JP7370540B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally referred to as "slot machines").

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, as seen in Patent Document 1, for example, a gaming machine is known in which a special game is played in which a large amount of prizes can be won when a person wins a prize.

That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball enters the starting slot. When a game ball enters the starting hole, a determination process is performed to determine whether the game is a hit or not. At this time, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time on a predetermined display. Then, when a predetermined variable time period has elapsed, the above-mentioned special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates that the player has won a prize, and the opening/closing member of the grand prize opening is operated, thereby giving the player a large amount of money. To provide a special game in which it is possible to win prizes.

JP 2017-006393 Publication

Such conventional gaming machines are required to further improve gaming enjoyment.

The present invention has been made in view of these circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Means 1: an operation means operable by the player;
A determination means for making a determination;
a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained in the determination by the determining means;
operation state detection means capable of detecting the state of the operation means;
post-operation sound output means capable of outputting a post-operation output sound in accordance with the detection when the operation state detection means detects that the operation means is in an operating state;
and a simulated image display means capable of displaying a simulated image display of the operating means,
Detection of being in the operation state as a sample image operation valid state, which is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the operation means that is the target of the sample image display is in the operation state. A gaming machine is provided with a multiple operation valid state in which a plurality of operations are allowed and the output sound after the operation can be output multiple times,
As the multiple-time operation valid state, a first multiple-time operation valid state and a second multiple-time operation valid state having mutually different occurrence conditions are prepared,
The first multiple operation valid state is an operation valid state in which at least a simulated image display of the first operation means among the operation means is displayed, and the first operation means is in an operation state where the first operation means is being operated. It is possible to play the game in such a way that a situation occurs in which the output sound after the first operation is in the output state in response to the detection of the first operation, and the first operation means is in the non-operation state where the first operation means is not operated. ,
The second multiple operation valid state is an operation valid state in which at least a simulated image display of the second operation means among the operation means is displayed, and the second operation means is in an operation state where the second operation means is being operated. It is possible to play the game so that a situation appears in which the output sound after the second side operation is in the output state in response to the detection of the second operation means, and the second operation means is in the non-operation state where the second operation means is not operated. ,
In the first multiple operation valid state, in a situation where the first operation means is in the non-operation state and the output sound after the first side operation is in the output state , As the output sound, when the first operating means tentatively changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, a sound that can cause a change in the output state using this as an opportunity is output, and the output state There are cases where a sound is output that does not cause a change in the output state, but when the first operating means temporarily changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, this may be used as an opportunity to cause a change in the output state. A loud sound and a sound that does not cause a change in the output state are not outputted redundantly, and while any of these sounds is in the output state, the first operating means changes from the operating state to the Even if it becomes inactive, its output state will not change due to this.
In the second multiple operation valid state, in a situation where the second operation means is in the non-operation state and the second-side post-operation output sound is in the output state, the second-side post-operation output sound Assuming that the second operating means tentatively changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, only a sound that does not cause a change in its output state is output as a result of this, but when the second operating means If the second operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state while in the operating state and the second side post-operation output sound is in the output state, taking this as an opportunity, Depending on the type of sound output as the output sound after the second side operation, the output state may or may not change.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this invention, a decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted; (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a); be. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. FIG. 3 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the main body side upper hinge member. It is an explanatory view showing the action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from behind. 20 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19. FIG. 20 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19. FIG. 20 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the back. It is an explanatory view of the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 34(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 34B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). 34(a) is a sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34(b), and FIG. 34(b) is an enlarged view of section A in FIG. 34(a). It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the performance operation unit as seen from the front. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the production operation unit in FIG. 37; (a) is a diagram of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows the part that is hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, button frame, etc. by cutting out a part of the operation button. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a portion that is to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in a cross-sectional view of the production operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from behind. FIG. 47(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 51(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back. It is. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from behind. 57 is a sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56. FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 when viewed from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 when viewed from behind. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a different form from that shown in FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with the front component, the board holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals that are input and output to a connection terminal board for a game ball lending device, which relays electrical connections between the payout control board, the CR unit, and the frequency display board, which constitute the main board. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the periphery of the VDP with built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control section. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. FIG. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payout control section. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81. FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit. It is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of an external terminal board. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 3 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing a continuation of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89; It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side power-on processing. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection failure determination process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of connection recovery processing. 7 is a timing chart illustrating the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the first starting port passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the second starting port passing process (step S5234). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S5238). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing symbol determination tables. It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbols and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). 12 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for gate passage processing (step S5402). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing (step S5403). It is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of performance patterns (fluctuation performance) that is referred to in the performance symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. 120 is a diagram showing the notification content, notification mode, notification time, and conditions for ending notification (cancellation conditions) for each type of notification sound illustrated in FIG. 119. FIG. It is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword performance operation unit. It is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword performance operation unit. It is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of performance patterns in a performance mode in which a sword drawing performance can be executed, (A) showing an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of a sword drawing preparation transition performance according to the type of fluctuation pattern, and (B) ) An example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to perform battōhon effect is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing operation of the sword ornament when the aura member is provided on the sword part (sword blade part) itself, and shows (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first unsheathed state, and (C) the second unsheathed state. Indicates the unsheathed state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation|movement of an aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword unsheathing operation of the sword ornament when an aura member is provided in the sheath, and shows (A) a sheathed state, (B) a first sword unsheathed state, and (C) a second sword unsheathed state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation|movement of an aura member. It is a diagram explaining the screen transition of the performance display device and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the princess reach performance. It is a diagram explaining the screen transition of the performance display device and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the princess reach performance. It is a diagram explaining the screen transition of the performance display device and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the princess reach performance. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance including the operation performance of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance including the operation performance of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the movement transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance including the operation performance of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the performance display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword ornament in the reach performance. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword ornament used for a pseudo continuous performance. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid for operation during the reach effect based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board, and during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board. , is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of a first suggestion pattern is executed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid for operation during the reach effect based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board, and during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board. , is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of a first suggestion pattern is executed. Similar to the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid for operation during the reach production, the pre-operation suggestion production of the second suggestion pattern is executed. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a transition example. Even though the second suggestion pattern was performed as a pre-operation suggestion performance, the sword decoration does not become operational, the operation button becomes operational, and then the sword decoration becomes operational. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion performance of a pattern. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an integrated image. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying an integrated image from the start of the validity period until the end of the validity period. 12 is a time chart showing an example of the first A acceptance permission state. 12 is a time chart showing an example of the first A acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 1st A acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd A acceptance permission state. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd A acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 2nd A acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd A acceptance permission state. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3rd A acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 3rd A acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 4th A acceptance permission state. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 4th A acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the fluctuation pattern in which the 4th A acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 5th A acceptance permission state. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 5th A acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 5th A acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 6th A acceptance permission state. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 6th A acceptance permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern in which the 6th A acceptance permission state occurs.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the Pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the Pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the Pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame disassembled, and Figure 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are spaced apart vertically and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. It includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the frame 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and back. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 also includes a curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and a curtain plate member 50 that is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below the handle unit 111 and can be operated by the player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 320 is attached to the lower front part of the tray unit 320, and a tray unit 320 is attached to the center of the tray unit 320, and the tray unit 320 is attached to the center of the tray unit 320, and the tray unit 320 is attached to the bottom of the tray unit 320, and it is attached to the center of the tray unit 320. A production operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory production, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320. , a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the dish unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. A door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 whose part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 is attached to the front lower part of the game board 5 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a ball launcher 680 is attached to the right side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame. 4, a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a locking unit 700 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 along the upper side and left side in front view and that pays out game balls to the player side. An L-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the rear lower part of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. A back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the upper part of the dispensing unit base 801, which is opened upward and extends left and right. A ball tank 802 is box-shaped and stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 is attached to a payout unit base 801 on the lower side of the ball tank 802, and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are moved to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front and that guides game balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; It is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and pays out the game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. A payout device 830 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls put out by the payout device 830 downward, and also guides game balls paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 according to the storage state of the game balls. The upper full bulb path unit 850 is configured to discharge from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full bulb discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full bulb path unit 850 is attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. A normal guide path 861 guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and a game ball discharged from the full discharge port 850e is guided forward and guides the game ball from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. A lower full bulb path unit 860 having a full bulb guide path 862 guiding to the bulb socket 274 is provided.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a lower part for bass sound that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power board box 930 installed on the right side in front view at the rear side of the board unit base 910 and housing a power board inside, and a power board box 930 installed on the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 that accommodates an interface control board inside, and a payout control board 951 that is installed across the power supply board box 930 and interface control board box 940 and that controls the payout of game balls is housed inside. and a payout control board box 950.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from a ball firing device 680 are sent to the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide the player, and a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitions the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player rotates the handle 302 with game balls stored in the upper tray 321, the ball launcher 680 fires the game balls with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in the winning hole, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the payout device 830 according to the accepted winning hole. Since the player's interest can be increased by this payout of game balls, the game ball in the upper tray 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Moreover, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16(a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16(b) is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 16(a) in an exploded manner. It is a diagram. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 has an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and back. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces facing outward in the left and right direction of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are on the same surface. It is being

The outer frame 2 also includes an outer frame upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame upper hinge member 60. It includes an upper left end side upper part of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and a lower outer frame hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The outer frame 2 also includes a curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and a curtain plate member 50 that is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position to the left of the left-right center; A flat right sliding member 82 is attached to a position near the right end of the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 also has an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 that are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 to be described later is locked. , is equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) with a predetermined thickness. This upper frame member 10 is provided with an engagement notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. Inside this engagement notch 11, upper and lateral fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with a mounting step portion 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to this mounting step portion 12 .

[2-2. Bottom frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) with a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 has the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the upper frame member 10. It is longer than the front and back width of the The lower frame member 20 is provided with engagement notches 21, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction, at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In this engagement notch 21, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is attached.

The lower frame member 20 also includes front end notches 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 have a constant cross-sectional shape and extend vertically, and are formed of extruded shapes of metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward on the outer sides in the left-right direction from a position near the rear with respect to the center in the front-rear direction to near the rear end. It includes recessed portions 31 and 41, and protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge out from the side surface opposite to the recessed portions 31 and 41 and are hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, lower and horizontal fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are inserted into the protrusions 32 and 42 and attached.

Furthermore, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves formed on their surfaces that extend vertically. These grooves make it easier for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 by providing finger rests when installing or transporting the pachinko machine 1 to island facilities such as game halls. The design of the exterior of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate components]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extension part 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape with a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension part 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is cut out and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically and has a size that allows a game ball to pass through on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51. A standing wall portion 54 extends upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension portion 51, and a standing wall portion 54 bulges forward from near the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 with the front surface facing upward. It is provided with a return part 55 which is inclined so as to go toward the rear as it goes toward the front.

The curtain plate member 50 is arranged such that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position that coincides with a discharge hole 74, which will be described later, of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side when assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The curtain plate member 50 also includes a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 on the top surface, and a right mounting portion 56 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the top surface. A section 57 is provided. On the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed via a left sliding member 81 and a right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, this curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on its front surface. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a grid pattern by a plurality of ribs, thereby increasing strength and rigidity. Moreover, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper fixing part 61 that is horizontally extended and has a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate-shaped upper fixing part 61 that extends forward from the front end of the upper fixing part 61. , a bearing groove 63 extending from the right end of the front extending part 62 toward the left and right center of the front extending part 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing part 61 in a plan view. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 64 extends downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing part extends downward from the end side of the front extension part 62 from the left end to the front end to the area where the bearing groove 63 opens. A flat hanging part 65 continuous with the part 64 is provided (see FIG. 16(b) etc.).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the upper fixing part 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step part 12 of the upper frame member 10, and is fixed with screws (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends further forward than the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 and is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

This outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to rotate the main body frame 4 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped lock body 66a that extends back and forth with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operating portion that protrudes rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then diagonally forward to the left, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. This lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 using attachment screws 67 .

The lock member 66 is attached through the attachment hole 66d at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is on the rear side of the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. This locking member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the attachment hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a to accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later.

This lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic part 66c by operating the operating part 66b. By operating the operating portion 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retreated from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. can be in a state where it is completely passed through. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally, and a portion extending upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 71. A rising flat plate-like rising part 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal part 71, and penetrating the horizontal part 71 vertically, allowing only one game ball to pass through. A discharge hole 74 of the same size is provided. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed into a trapezoid with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed into a truncated cone shape with the upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. This outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a left-side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and to extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U-shape. This discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is fixed to the curtain reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) that pass through the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 using screws (not shown). This outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is constructed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Furthermore, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (ejected) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. To be more specific, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball that falls between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 will fall between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the liquid rolls toward the rear where the gap is wide, and the liquid can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent them from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for game balls to stay in the lower hinge member 70 portion.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing part 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing part 86, and a horizontal fixing part 86. A flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing part 88 extends downward from the same side as the part from which the upper lateral fixing part 87 in 86 extends. This connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing part 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing part 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower lateral fixing part 88 extends from both front and back sides of the upper lateral fixing part 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart from each other in the front and rear. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper-lateral fixing parts 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the ends of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower and horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower and horizontal fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are screwed into the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing part 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing part 86, and further than the horizontal fixing part 86 of the upper horizontal fixing part 87. A lower horizontal fixing part 88 extends below the horizontal fixing part 86 from the lower end of the rearwardly projecting portion. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that projects from the rear end of the upper horizontal securing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal securing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper and lateral fixing parts 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces of the lower frame member 20 in the left and right direction, respectively. Ru.

[2-9. Locking mechanism of upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the locking member 66 on the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. Refer to and explain. FIG. 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the locking member on the outer frame.

When the locking member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65. Therefore, the lock body 66a partially closes the bent bearing groove 63, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In this embodiment, the support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 is such that the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a is The right side of the lock body 66a is close to the right side hanging part 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging part 65, and they are in contact with each other). In the normal pivoting state (not shown), the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are offset in an oblique direction and are opposed to each other. It is in a state.

In this normal pivoting state, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4, is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. In other words, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66. Note that, since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly. There is. In addition, in the illustration, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the attachment hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is applied with an acting force F in a direction in which it comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a, the acting force F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the abutting portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the circular arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 is directed toward the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (rotation center of the lock member 66). , the moment that rotates the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is connected to the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface and the side surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal pivoting state or a state in which the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, no load is always applied to the elastic part 66c of the lock member 66, and the elastic part 66c is integrally formed with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Note that even if the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right due to excessive force, the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a will come into contact with the hanging portion 65 and the lock body 66a will not move further. Since it does not rotate, the locking member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extending portion 62.

Note that even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc shape, the lock member 66 may be placed at a position where no rotational moment is generated due to the action of the component force F1 described above, or when the front end portion of the lock member 66 is directed toward the outside of the front extension portion 62. By locating the center of rotation of the locking member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated to rotate the locking member 66, no load is constantly applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66. Even when the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only comes into contact with the hanging portion 65, so the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extending portion 62.

When supporting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 in the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert hinge pin 622. When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the biasing force of the elastic part 66c. The locking member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a that had closed the bearing groove 63 retreats, opening the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic part 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space in front of the front end of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from inside the bearing groove 63, operate the operating part 66b of the lock member 66, rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and then remove the elastic part. The lock body 66a is retreated from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of the lock body 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball bite prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
A security mechanism at the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment and a ball chewing prevention mechanism for preventing game balls from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. The mechanism will be explained.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the lower outer frame hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to be placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and on the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 is provided with a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the top surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. , it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from occurring through the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

In addition, since the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 is provided with a barbed portion 55 extending forward, if an unauthorized tool that has come into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 bends upward, the barred portion 55 will cause the tip of the unauthorized tool to bend. Since it is possible to fold back further forward, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and unauthorized acts can be carried out through the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side. can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 is provided with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal part 71), the game ball on the horizontal part 71 is not ejected backward from the rear end of the horizontal part 71 due to the presence of the standing wall part 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50 include a discharge hole 74 through which a game ball can pass, and a left discharge hole 52. , and the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal part 71 of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 etc., and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is caught between the balls.

Therefore, if the game ball is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the area around the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side may be damaged, or the main body frame 4 may not close normally and the outer frame 2 may It is possible to prevent a gap from being created between the main body frame 4 and the use of the gap to commit fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 19. It is a diagram. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

As shown in FIGS. 29, 30, etc., the door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100, which has a rectangular frame-like external shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a door frame base unit 100, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300 that is attached to the handle unit 300, the pan unit 320 that is attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, the production operation unit 400 that is attached to the center of the pan unit 320, and the door frame base unit that is attached to the upper side of the pan unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 320, and the door frame left side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 that has a vertically extending rectangular (quadrangular) outer shape when viewed from the front and has a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, although the details will be described later. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and main body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked. an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 for sending the game balls to the ball firing device 680, which is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a ball sending device 680, which is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. The foul cover unit 270 receives the game balls that are ejected and does not reach the game area 5a and discharges them to the lower tray 322.

Although the details will be described later, the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to move the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is possible to drive the ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a certain force.

The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 below the through hole 111, and the front side bulges forward, although the details will be described later. A production operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 includes an upper tray 321 that stores game balls to be hit into the game area 5a, and a tray unit 320 that is disposed below the upper tray 321 and stores game balls supplied from the upper tray 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored, an upper tray ball removal button 327 for pulling out game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and a ball lending machine within the range of cash or prepaid card balance inserted into the ball rental machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card minus the amount of game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and cash inserted into the ball lending machine. A ball rental/return display section 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., a performance selection left button 331 and a performance selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player when presenting a performance, and a display section 330 in the lower tray 322 A lower tray ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the tray unit 320 is provided.

The production operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the tray unit 320 at the center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed and operated by the player and presents a production image to the player. It is something that can be done. Although the details will be described later, this production operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side production that is arranged within the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display a production image. A display device 460 is provided.

Although the details will be described later, the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 on the upper side of the dish unit 320, and It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light.

Although the details will be described later, the door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the tray unit 320, and It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). This door frame right side unit 550 protrudes more forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided at the front end. A right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. In the door frame right side unit 550, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be decorated with light emission.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It is used to decorate the upper part of the frame 3. Although the details will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart from each other on the left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. In the door frame top unit 570, the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed (hinged) so that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a tray unit 320 to which the production operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the front left outside of the through hole 111. A door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 has a plate-shaped door frame base 110 that has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and has a through hole 111 penetrating the front and back. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, protruding forward from the door frame base 110 and supporting the main body frame 4. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 which are rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front side of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decorative board 160, which is attached to the left side of the view and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 190, which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably attached. and a glass unit mounting member 170 for use.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front view of the front side of the door frame base 110 for attaching the handle unit 300, and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening/closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Furthermore, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental and return display section 330, performance selection left button 331, performance selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side performance display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , upper speaker 573, etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 has a square (rectangular) shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 110 is provided with a through hole 111 that penetrates the door frame base 110 in the front and back, and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the through hole 111 are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is located above and below the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at about 1/3 of the height in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed into a frame shape with the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear. This door frame base 110 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 has a handle mounting seat surface 112 formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward than the right end side, and the handle mounting seat surface 112 and the through hole 111. A cylinder mounting part 113 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end in front view, and the cylinder mounting plate 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached to the cylinder mounting part 113 . The cylinder insertion hole 114 into which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted passes through the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 from front to back on the left side when viewed from the front, so that the entry port 251a and the ball extraction port 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 are inserted forward. A ball feeding opening 115 for facing the ball is provided.

Further, the door frame base 110 is located to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the door frame base 110 and penetrates back and forth at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A passage hole 116 for the lower plate, which is inserted into the door frame base 110, and an upper hole that penetrates back and forth adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A plate passage opening 117 , a glass unit mounting part 118 that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111 and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the upper left and right sides of the door frame base 110 . It is provided with a speaker insertion opening 119 that penetrates back and forth at the corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31, 33, and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending left and right and attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a middle reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending left and right attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A left reinforcing sheet metal 133 that extends vertically and is attached along the left side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front; and a right reinforcing sheet metal 133 that extends vertically and is attached along the right side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front. It includes a metal plate 134 and a locking portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing metal plate 134 and to which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is locked.

In the reinforcing unit 130, both left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 with screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to a right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of an opening/closing cylinder unit 210, which will be described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed into a frame shape by an upper reinforcing metal sheet 131, a middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133, a right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by suitably bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a formed in the door frame base 110 at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 and penetrating back and forth.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, This location increases strength and rigidity, and prevents unauthorized tools such as piano wire and flathead screwdrivers from entering from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 includes a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 that is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of vertically spaced protruding pieces 141a, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 that passes through the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of protruding pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142. A disc-shaped flange member 143 is attached at a position between the flange member 143 and the hinge pin 142 on the door frame, which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. is inserted through the lock spring 144 and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and has a shape in side view that is open to the front. It is formed into a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) that protrudes higher than the upper protruding piece 141a. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes below the lower protruding piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. This bent portion abuts against the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

The collar member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and its upper end is in contact with the collar member 143, and its lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. This lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the collar member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the collar member 143. .

In the door frame upper hinge member 140, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls that portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame side upper hinge member 140. The entire upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 does not allow the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 to be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 or pulled out from below. Can be done. Thereby, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is , can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Thereby, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can hingely rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31, 32, and the like. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protrudes downward from near the front end of the extending piece 151a.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat plate-like extension piece 151a, and has an overall shape in side view. is formed into a substantially L-shape. This door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is shaped like a truncated cone that narrows downward. This door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

This door frame side lower hinge member 150 allows the door frame 3 to hinge relative to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31, 32, and the like. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is attached to the left side of the through hole 111 in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is a door that extends vertically from a height below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front to a height near the vertical center of the through opening 111. Frame left side upper decorative board 161 and door frame left side lower decoration that extends vertically from the lower position of the left side upper decorative board 161 of the door frame to approximately the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage hole 117. A substrate 162 is provided.

The door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are each equipped with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a on the front surface that can emit light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, when the door frame 3 is assembled. By emitting light as appropriate, the left unit decorative lens member of the left side unit 530 of the door frame can be decorated with light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting parts]
The glass unit attachment member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 31(b) and the like. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is used to detachably attach the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 includes a disc-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped base 171 that protrudes from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protrusion 172.

The glass unit attachment members 170 are each rotatably attached to a portion of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion holes 119 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, so that the protrusion 172 is positioned further outward than the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In this position, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit attachment part 118 of the door frame base 110 or removed from the glass unit attachment part 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding part 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 with the glass unit 190 inserted into the glass unit mounting part 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding part 172 attaches to the glass. It comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190, restricting rearward movement of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

Since the glass unit attachment member 170 has a protrusion 172 protruding from a disc-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit attachment member 170 is located within the protrusion 172. . From this, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is freely rotatable, the protrusion 172 is stably protruded downward from the base 171. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protrusion 172 is in the rotational position protruding downward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire body will not rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction on rearward movement of the glass unit 190 will not be naturally released. do not have.

In addition, when removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, rotate the glass unit mounting member 170 so that the protruding part 172 protrudes upward from the base part 171, and the protruding part 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1g. Handle mounting parts]
The handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle attachment member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical portion 181 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181 from the rear end of the tube portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182 , and a plurality of flange portions ( 182 ) that protrude into the cylindrical portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 . In this example, the cylindrical portion 181 includes three projecting rims 183 and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181. .

The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment surface 112 with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 182 in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than an outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side within the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side within the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, in the handle attachment member 180, the base 301a of the handle base 301 can be inserted into the cylindrical part 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

In addition, since the axis of the cylindrical part 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange part 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the slanted handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the cylindrical part The handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a similarly tilted state, with the axis line of the handle unit 300 being tilted so as to extend toward the right front.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that it can be seen from the front to the rear. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner circumference of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment part 118, and a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that closes the inside of the glass frame 191 and whose outer periphery is a glass frame. 191 and two transparent glass plates 192 attached to the glass plate 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end and the rear end of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and back so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a that extend outward in a flat plate form from a position below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band that projects downward from the lower end and extends along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can come into contact with the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is assembled by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit attachment part 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the protruding part 172 of the glass unit attachment member 170 is attached to the attachment piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame base 110.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat main body part 201 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body part 201, which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. A pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 are provided.

The main body part 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that its lower end protrudes further downward than the lower end of the glass unit 190 when it is attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body portion 201 has an upper end formed in a shape along the lower end of the gaming area 5a on the gaming board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so that it does not protrude into the gaming area 5a when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201 . Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed into a shallow box shape opened to the rear by the main body portion 201 and the rear protruding piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 201 is formed so as to align with a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball fired by the ball firing device 680) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is kept inside the game area 5a. It does not impede hitting the game ball into the ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the part that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is The removed rear protruding piece 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. In addition, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from the lower front side of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening/closing cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder attachment part 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front and extends back and forth, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and that rotates the key inserted into the keyhole 211a. 700, and a cylinder attachment plate 213 for attaching the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a.If the cylinder lock 211 is a corresponding key, it can be rotated either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed into a cylindrical shape with an open rear end (more specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notches 212a which are cut out. This rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. By doing so, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, and the key cylinder 710 can be rotated.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape protruding forward in a plan view. To be more specific, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-like front plate part 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate parts 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate part 213a in a flat plate-shape. and a pair of attachment plate parts 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from each other from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate parts 213b. The cylinder lock 211 passes through the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 from the rear at a position approximately at the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is such that the left side mounting plate portion 213c in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the right side mounting plate portion 213c in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thereby, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder attachment sheet metal 213 .

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate part 213a and a pair of side plate parts 213b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in the box-shaped cylinder mounting part 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the production operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34(b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. Moreover, FIG. 35(a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34(a), and FIG. 38 is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34(b). FIG. 39(a) is a sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and FIG. 39(b) is an enlarged view of section A in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the back. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the tray unit 320 at the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed and operated by the player and can also present an effect image to the player. It is.

The performance operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent center side excluding the outer periphery, and includes an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, and a performance operation unit that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and is a plate unit cover 326. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 that is attached to the mounting portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 that is arranged behind the operation button 410 and can decorate the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light, and a frame. A base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and has an operation button 410 and a decorative board unit 420 attached to the front side. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image is provided.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 has a circular outer shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the vertical height of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer periphery is transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 that has a circular outer circumference and a curved surface (partial shape of a spherical surface) so that the center side bulges forward, and a transparent button lens 411 that has a circular outer circumference and a curved surface (partial shape of a spherical surface) that bulges forward. It includes an attached annular button frame 412 and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are made of a material that does not easily transmit light.

The entire button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness. Further, the button lens 411 is formed into a smooth curved surface with no unevenness on the front side. The button lens 411 is recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside), and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a is recessed from the back surface in a cross-sectional arc shape at a position on the outer circumferential side of the first button decoration part 411a, and extends on the axis toward the center, and is arranged in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. A plurality (six) of second button decoration parts 411b are provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decoration part 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 toward the center when assembled to the operation button 410, and one group on both left and right sides is one group on both upper and lower sides. It extends further towards the center.

The plurality of second button decoration parts 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration parts 411b are formed so as to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that the front side thereof is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to unevenness with a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface at the first button decorative part 411a and the second button decorative part 411b. Therefore, the rear side cannot be clearly seen.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorative parts 411b of the button lens 411. This button frame 412 has a plating layer with metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a that extends from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide boss parts 413c protrude rearward along the outer periphery of the main body part 413a and are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Detection pieces 413d protrude rearward in a band-like shape and are arranged in plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, and a detection piece 413d that penetrates the flange part 413b back and forth outside the main body part 413a and extends along the outer periphery for a predetermined length. A plurality of base openings 413e (six) are formed in the circumferential direction, and a base opening 413e extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a in a cylindrical shape, and the front end side is inward so as to follow the inner surface of the button lens 411. An inner extending portion 413f that narrows toward the center (center side) is provided.

The outer circumferential edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer circumferential surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four upper, lower, left, and right corners of the main body portion 413a in the circumferential direction. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a, two on the upper side and one on the lower side. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided, three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, a portion of the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f are recessed inward from the outer circumferential side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f, which narrows inward, substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

This operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (approximately a part of a spherical surface) and is transparent, and a door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. The display screen can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and an operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. is urged forward by. The front side of the outer periphery of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, so that further forward movement is restricted. By pressing against this, the base unit 430 is moved rearward until the rear end contacts the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440 indicates that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, the operation button 410 has a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 so as to extend from the inner peripheral end to the center side when the production operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a can make it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner circumferential surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 has a front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the button frame 412 attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 allows the operation button to be closed. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion that is visible from the rear is formed so as to narrow inward from the outer periphery. The presence of this button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner circumferential surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the production operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner circumferential side of the decorative board unit 420 and is lower than the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It will protrude backwards. As a result, the light radiated forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 is transmitted to the button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and also to prevent leakage from the outside of the base unit 430, the left side of the operation button decorative board 433, the right side of the operation button decorative board 434, the upper side of the operation button decorative board 435, and the lower side of the operation button. Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative board 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside of the button base 413 to the outside. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operating button left inner decorative board 433, the operating button right inner decorative board 434, the upper operating button inner decorative board 435, and the operating button of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 from decorating parts other than those targeted for the light-emitting decoration, and it is possible to perform the light-emitting decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button 410 from the front side, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed to have an outer shape that matches the front end side of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 that is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and a frame body 416 that is attached to the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of frame side lenses 417 having light-transmitting properties that are attached to the frame body 416 from the rear side, and a frame top lens 418 having light-transmitting properties that is attached to the frame body 416 from the front side above the central opening 416a. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and a central opening 416a that penetrates back and forth on both left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c cut out with a predetermined width in the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , is equipped with. The center opening 416a is formed to have approximately the same size as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. This allows the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by frame side lenses 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-back direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner cylinder portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and is cut out at a portion corresponding to the notch 416c. When the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d is connected to the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420, respectively. and partitions between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Furthermore, the frame body 416 extends outward at the upper portions of the left and right sides of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e that are attached to the production operation unit attachment portions 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. The frame main body 416 (presentation operation unit 400) has a pair of mounting portions 416e and a cutout portion 416c on both sides thereof attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320.

The frame body 416 has almost the entire surface made of metal, except for a portion with the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A shiny plating layer is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close off the outer peripheral openings 416b, which are formed three on each side of the frame main body 416, from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface with no irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front side. In addition, the frame top lens 418 has a plurality of concavities and convexities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side, and are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, when the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are connected to the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420. At the same time, the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration board 437 of the base unit 430, and each can be decorated with light by the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted thereon. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission, and also This allows vibration to be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, and an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. , a vibration motor 424 attached to the front lower part of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

The board base 421 has an inner circumferential side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer circumferential side larger than the outer diameter of the flange part 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The operation button left outer decorative board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner periphery of the board base 421, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a. A plurality of second LEDs 422b are mounted along the side. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the front side along the inner periphery of the board base 421, and a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 423a. A plurality of second LEDs 423b are mounted along the side. Both the front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the production operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In addition, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410, The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, when assembled into the production operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the respective first LEDs 422a, 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b, 423b. An inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 emits light and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operating button 410 using the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operating button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

Further, the decorative board unit 420 can generate vibrations by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire production operation unit 400.

[3-4f. Effects of production operation unit]
The effects of the production operation unit 400 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the production operation unit of FIG. 37. FIG. 45(a) is a diagram of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, where a part of the operation button is cut out and hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. It is an explanatory view showing a part, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a part which is going to be hidden by a first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a performance operation unit. FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

The performance operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can display a performance image to the player according to the game state that changes when a game ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and also allows the player to operate the performance image. The player can be entertained by having the player participate in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The overall height of the production operation unit 400 is approximately the same as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the production operation unit 400 has a total width slightly larger than ⅓ of the total width of the door frame 3. The performance operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

In the performance operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the production operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit 320, there is a gap between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the pan unit 320. is formed. That is, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320 only at the upper part, and is attached in a suspended state.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the front inner circumference of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed as follows. As a result, in the production operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410, which bulges forward in a curved shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface), is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is sloped so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is placed above the tray unit 320 (performance operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when a player looks down from the gaming area 5a to the production operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Therefore, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 inside the operation button 410, etc. can be visually recognized in good condition.

In the performance operation unit 400, the four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state of the production operation unit 400 (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is pressed against the frame unit 415 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. It abuts a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416.

In the normal state, the production operation unit 400 has a button frame 412 of the operation button 410 whose center side (center axis CL side) protrudes forward from the center opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface), the portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is , protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is approximately 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is located in the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes approximately 4cm forward from the front of 415.

In a normal state, when a player presses the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 which bulges forward in a curved shape (approximately a part of a spherical surface).

This operation button 410 has a much larger outer diameter than the operation buttons for performance provided in conventional pachinko machines, so the area near the periphery away from the center of the button lens 411 is pressed. There is a high possibility that it will be done. To explain in detail, the operation button for performance in a conventional pachinko machine is installed so that its central axis extends substantially parallel to a vertical line, whereas the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 of this embodiment is installed so that the central axis CL is inclined with respect to the vertical line, so when the player presses the operation button 410 from above like in a conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. This means pressing a portion of the operation button 410 that is away from the central axis CL.

By the way, the operation buttons for performance in conventional pachinko machines are formed on a flat surface for the player to press, so if the operation buttons are made larger while keeping the part pressed on the flat surface, If you press a part of the operation button that is off the center of the button, the pressed surface will tilt so that the pressed part retreats first, making it impossible for the operation button to move back straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a part (button lens 411) that is pressed and operated by the player in a curved shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface) that bulges forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. I can do it. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retreated without tilting. You can fully enjoy the effects you operate.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has a vibration motor 424 attached to the front lower part of the board base 421 of the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is plated so that the effect operation unit 400 is suspended. Since it is attached to the production operation unit attachment part 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the part to which it is attached. , the entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. Furthermore, since the vibration motor 424 is placed directly below a position where it is relatively easy for the player to press the button (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44), the vibration motor 424 can It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, surprising the players and making them enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the pan unit cover 326 Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the leg section 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate section 326i, when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the frame remains until the lower surface of the leg section 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate section 326i. The attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. can absorb the impact by bending downward. Furthermore, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the production operation unit 400 is restricted, and the production operation unit mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 are mounted. It is possible to avoid applying excessive force to the portion 326a etc., and damage to the production operation unit 400 etc. can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or tapped with strong force, such as when the player is presented with an effect in which the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is pressed, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. will not be damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, suppress the decrease in player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. It can be suppressed.

Note that, as described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that is pressed by the player is formed into a curved surface shape (partial shape of an approximately spherical surface) that protrudes forward, so it is formed into a flat plate shape. The button lens 411 has higher strength and rigidity than the button lens 411, and even if it is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed throughout the button lens 411, making it less likely to be damaged.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 46, the effect operation unit 400 has a button lens 411, a frame side lens 417, a frame top lens 418, and an operation button internal decoration member 432 made of transparent members. The decorations with unevenness such as the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the first button inner decoration part 432f, and the second button inner decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side). ) can be visually recognized. In addition, in areas where these uneven decorations are formed, light is refracted in a complicated manner due to changes in board thickness, making it difficult to see the rear side through the areas where uneven decorations are formed. .

Since the production operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration part 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration part 411a This makes it difficult to see the rear at the outer periphery of the inner part of the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (back in the central axis CL direction), there is an inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a peripheral wall part of the operation button inner decoration member 432. 432a, and the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap allows the gap between the outer circumference of the inner operation button decoration member 432 to be closed from the front side (player side). It can be made difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating, and when the operation button 410 is viewed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button can be placed within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

To be more specific, the production operation unit 400 has a first button decoration part 411a, a second button decoration part 411b, and a button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, so that the outer periphery of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is A unit base 431, a decorative board unit 420, etc. located on the outer side and rear side (rear side) are formed so as not to be visible from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched area surrounded by the dashed line is hidden from the player's view. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the button frame 412, etc., the outside and back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are made difficult to see and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the entire performance operation unit 400.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, the first button decoration part 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. A second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven lines of the first button decoration part 411a and the uneven lines of the second button inner decoration part 432g intersect, resulting in a geometrical Decorations can be shown to players.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends). The second button interior decoration portion 432g allows the player to see a deep, three-dimensional geometric pattern, and enjoy the decorations including the interior of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in the production operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front and back direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a changes. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration part 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the production operation unit 400 provides a moving and three-dimensional decoration to the player using the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be shown, it can strongly attract the attention of players, making it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, an operation button An upper inner decorative board 435 and a lower operating button inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces thereof, the inner operating button decorative member 432 in the operating button 410 emits light. It can be decorated. That is, the interior of the operation button 410 can be decorated with light by the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of these operation button left interior decoration board 433, operation button right interior decoration board 434, operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and operation button lower interior decoration board 436 are as follows. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a, so that light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , only the inside of the operation button 410 can be well decorated with light.

In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a decorative board 422 on the left side of the operation button in the decorative board unit 420 behind the second button decoration part 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A first LED 422a and a first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by making these first LEDs 422a and 423a emit light, the six second button decoration parts 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light. I can do it. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are connected to the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body part 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder part 416d, making it easy to operate. Only the second button decoration part 411b of the button 410 can be well decorated with light.

Furthermore, the production operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 second LEDs 423b are arranged, and by making these second LEDs 422b and 423b emit light, the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylinder part 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light. .

In addition, in the production operation unit 400, a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of frames are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. By causing the LED to emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light. A flat light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is attached to the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration board 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be well decorated with light.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47(a) is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 47(b) is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 47(c) is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame from the rear. FIG. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) above the dish unit 320. 100 is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front; A transparent band-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 is attached to the front surface, and a light-transmitting lens is placed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and has a polyhedral decoration on the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit upper part that is attached to the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, protrudes forward in a cylindrical frame shape, and extends vertically. a decorative base 534; a left unit lower decorative base 535 that is attached to the front lower part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534; A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 is attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit A plurality of decorative members 537 are attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed into a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating the front side back and forth. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include circular holes and square holes extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the left side upper decorative board 161 of the door frame and the lower left side decorative board 162) are connected to each other through the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 531a of the left unit base 531 are formed such that when assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame are located approximately at the center in the vertical direction. This left unit base 531 is formed of a non-transparent member.

Furthermore, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective standing wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) that stands upright from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111 toward the front side. ing. In this left reflective standing wall portion 538, an inner surface that is flat and faces the through hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. Note that this reflective surface can be provided not only by providing the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall section 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, this left reflective standing wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the reflective standing wall portion 33 described above.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a that is circular in front view and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square lens portion 532a that is square in front view that corresponds to the square opening 531a. A lens portion 532b is provided. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately behind the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed into a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. This circular lens portion 532a allows the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to be irradiated forward in a point-like manner. The light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a allows the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member to be decorated with light.

The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is conically recessed toward the rear at the center of the front surface, and a front diffuser lens portion 532d that is formed on the outside of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , an input lens section 532e that bulges rearward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection section 532c), and an input lens section 532e that bulges rearward in the shape of a curved surface at the rear surface, and an input lens section 532e that extends forward as it moves away from the input lens section 532e as a whole on the outside of the input lens section 532e on the rear surface. The front reflecting portion 532f is tilted so as to move.

The front diffuser lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the cross-sectional shape of the front diffusing lens portion 532d when cut along the radial direction, the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape, and the mountain portion between the grooves is recessed forward. It bulges out in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed into a smooth wave shape. Further, the front diffusing lens portion 532d is formed such that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction, with the boundary being a radially extending line dividing the lens portion in the circumferential direction.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are recessed in a V-shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a serrated cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, with the peaks between the grooves being triangular and pointed rearward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the grooves and peaks move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction, with the boundary being a radially extending line dividing the front reflecting portion 532f in the circumferential direction. This radially extending line dividing in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffuser lens portion 532d.

When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame are located immediately behind the input lens portion 532e.

In the square lens section 532b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input into the square lens section 532b from the input lens section 532e. Since this input lens portion 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), it refracts the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels parallel to the front. Almost all of the light can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection section 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection part 532c is directed by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection part 532c in a direction perpendicular to the axis extending back and forth (parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame). The light is reflected so as to be diffused in a direction (direction), and travels inside the square lens portion 532b from the center toward the outside along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection section 532c travels from the center to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection section 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens section 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center to the outside in the rectangular lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative board 160 of the door frame reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting section 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting section 532c, the thickness of the square lens section 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center. (See Figure 50). As a result, the light that is reflected outward over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens section 532b in the front and back direction at the central diffuse reflection section 532c is sequentially reflected forward by the front reflection section 532f as it goes from the center side to the outside. It can be reflected.

The light reflected forward by the front reflecting section 532f passes through the front diffusing lens section 532d and is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens section 532b. At this time, since the front diffusing lens part 532d has a wave-shaped cross section, it can diffuse the light reflected forward by the front reflecting part 532f in various directions, and the square lens part 532b It is possible to irradiate light substantially uniformly forward (to the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) from the front surface of the lens member.

In the front diffusing lens part 532d and the front reflecting part 532f, the square lens part 532b has a plurality of concentric grooves divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing line as a border. Since the grooves are shifted in the radial direction and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, the light emitted forward from the front surface of the square lens part 532b has a concentric striped pattern of shading. It is possible to prevent the light from turning into light, and it is possible to irradiate the front with light with a more uniform density. Thereby, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly.

A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member includes a circular decorative portion formed in a portion located in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and a circular decorative portion located in front of the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. A multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion having a concave front surface and a short extension in the front and back. The polyhedral decoration part has multiple rows of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and multiple rows of polyhedrons made of a plurality of triangles arranged vertically on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped. It is shaped like a. The circular decorative part and the multifaceted decorative part are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative part 561a and the multifaceted decorative part 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the circular decorative part is caused by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens part 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative part is directed forward from the square lens part 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. The light irradiated onto each of them emits light and decorates them.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed into a rectangular tube shape extending longitudinally. The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a portion forming a lower surface on the outer periphery that is inclined so as to protrude downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and the lower part of the portion penetrates back and forth. This left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The left unit lower decoration base 535 has a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined from approximately the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. This left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 has a vertical middle part bent backward, and a dogleg-shaped part where the lower part is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, and a left A doglegged part whose upper part is bent backward along the front edge of the lower unit decorative base 535 connects the lower end of the upper doglegged part and the upper end of the lower doglegged part. It consists of a straight part.

Both upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. This left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and allows the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side to be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 537 extend vertically in short lengths and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is made of a non-transparent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. FIG. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the right side in front view of the through hole 111, and a front side of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the door frame right side decorative board 552, and the door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the left side of the center in front view of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, and extends in the vertical direction and the front/rear direction. A transparent plate-shaped right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. A right unit left cover 555 in the form of a transparent flat plate is attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the right unit 554 .

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 in front view, on the right side of the center in front view on the front side of the right unit base 551, and on the right side of the right unit left diffuser lens. A transparent flat right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical and longitudinal directions, and a decorated right unit is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. a right unit right decorative member 557 in the form of a sheet, and a right unit right cover 558 in the form of a transparent plate attached to the right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a shallow front and right side opening extending in the vertical and front and rear directions. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light shielding member 559 and a light opaque member attached to the left side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a flat plate shape.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and the right side unit 550 has a translucent right side unit with a polyhedral decoration on the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decorative lens member 561, the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561, the front end sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating from front to back, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. 563 and a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and connects the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape that is elongated vertically when viewed from the front, has a short rectangular cylindrical shape in the front and back, and is formed into a box shape that is closed near the center in the front and back direction. has been done. This right unit base 551 is formed of a non-transparent member.

Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflective standing wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) that stands upright from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111 toward the front side. ing. In the right reflective standing wall portion 568, the inner surface, which is flat and faces the through hole 111, is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. Note that this reflective surface can be formed by providing the inner surface of the right reflecting wall section 568 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, similar to the inner surface of the left reflecting wall section 538, or by providing a reflective surface for the same inner surface. It is also possible to provide this by attaching a seal. As will be described later, this right reflective standing wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a part (right side portion) of the reflective standing wall portion 33 described above.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip. The door frame right side decorative board 552 has a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a plurality of right LEDs 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. A plurality of medium LEDs 552c are provided. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is used to decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 by emitting light through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is used to decorate the right decorative member 557 of the right unit by emitting light through the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit. The middle LED 552c is used to decorate the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 has both front and rear surfaces formed in white. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a main body portion 553a in the shape of a flat plate extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall portion 553b projecting in a short flat shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right side in front view. A rectangular notch 553c is cut out from the right end side of the rear wall section 553b toward the left when viewed from the front, and a plurality of cutout sections 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member is formed on the left side of the main body section 553a when viewed from the front. 554, a housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed so that the lens 554 can be accommodated, a plurality of input lens parts 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body part 553a, and are provided in a plurality in the vertical direction; A plurality of side reflection parts 553f are arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens part 553e is located in the center in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge extending upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape so that it moves toward the In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a as a whole moves to the right in the front view as it goes from the rear end side to the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body part 553a, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

When the rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, its right end extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

The plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c illuminate the right unit decorative lens member 561 well. It can be decorated.

The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens sections 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body section 553a in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, it is formed approximately at the center in the vertical direction of each half. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the input lens portion 553e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion with a vertically extending rectangle projecting rearward, and is recessed forward in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a part and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately in front of the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of side surface reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is inclined to the surface of the main body portion 553a. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflection portion 553f has a sharp triangular cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 553e, with the peaks between the grooves facing toward the center. , the entire structure is saw-shaped. Further, the side reflection portion 553f is formed such that groove portions and peak portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

This right unit left diffuser lens member 553 allows the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 to enter the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. It is incident. Since the rear end of this input lens portion 553e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so that it spreads, and each input lens portion 553e It will spread radially forward from the center.

The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 553a moves to the right in the front view as it moves forward. Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident into the main body part 553a from the input lens part 553e hits the flat left surface inside the main body part 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main body section 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body section 553a, but is reflected on the inner surface of the left surface toward the side reflecting section 553f. becomes.

The light incident forward into the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflection portion 553f, and is directed outward from the left surface of the main body 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also irradiated outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, but the right unit left light shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since the left side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body portion 553a and is irradiated to the left side. . Therefore, from the left side of the main body part 553a, there is light reflected leftward by the side reflection part 553f inside the main body part 553a, and light irradiated rightward from the side reflection part 553f and left by the left side of the right unit left light shielding member 559. Since the light reflected in the direction and passed through the main body 553a is irradiated to the left, it is possible to decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a with good brightness. can.

In addition, in the side reflection portion 553f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary, thereby forming concentric arc-shaped grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, which prevents the light emitted outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body portion 553a from having concentric striped shading. This makes it possible to irradiate light with more uniform shading to the left. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d on the left surface of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly.

In addition, since the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side of the main body part 553a in front view (the side where the accommodation recess 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the left decorative member 554 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the left diffuser lens member 553 of the right unit is visible through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the left decorative member 554 of the right unit is visible. This portion can be decorated with the side reflection portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and is decorated with decorations such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that is in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5. It is designed to have a The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. To be more specific, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a main body part 556a in the shape of a flat plate extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall projecting in the shape of a flat plate from the rear side of the main body part 556a to the left in front view. 556b, a rectangular notch 556c that is cut out from the left end of the rear wall 556b to the right in a front view, and is formed in plurality at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, a front view of the main body 556a, and a plurality of input lens parts 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 556a and are provided in the vertical direction. A plurality of side reflection portions 556f are provided on the left side, which are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 556a of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit has a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge extending upward as it goes forward. The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a as a whole moves to the left in the front view as it goes from the rear end side to the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward to a greater extent than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

When the rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, its left end extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

The plurality of notches 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These plurality of notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the notch 553c of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 form a square opening penetrating back and forth. is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be well decorated with light by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer periphery approximately matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens sections 556e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body section 556a in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. Specifically, when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, it is formed approximately in the vertical center of each half. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the input lens portion 556e includes a rectangular parallelepiped portion with a vertically extending rectangle projecting rearward, and a spherically curved recess toward the front from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a part and. These input lens parts 556e are respectively located immediately in front of the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where they are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side surface reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 556e is inclined to the surface of the main body portion 556a. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflection portion 556f has a sharp triangular cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 556e, with the peaks between the grooves facing toward the center. , the entire structure is saw-shaped. Further, the side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed such that groove portions and peak portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

This right unit right diffuser lens member 556 allows the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 to enter the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens section 556e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so that it spreads, and each input lens section 556e It will spread radially forward from the center.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left in the front view as it moves forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident into the main body part 556a from the input lens part 556e hits the flat right surface inside the main body part 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main body 556a due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected on the inner surface of the right surface toward the side reflecting portion 556f. becomes.

The light incident forward into the main body 556a from the input lens part 556e is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflection part 556f, and is directed outward from the right side of the main body 556a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also irradiated outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, but the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is a member, the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 will be brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 will be irradiated to the right side through the main body portion 556a. . Therefore, from the right side of the main body part 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflection part 556f inside the main body part 556a, and the light irradiated leftward from the side reflection part 556f and the right side on the right side of the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit. Since the light reflected in the direction and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with light with good brightness. can.

In addition, in the side reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary, thereby forming the concentric arc-shaped grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, which prevents the light emitted outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a from having concentric striped shading. This makes it possible to irradiate light with more uniform shading to the right. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodation recess 556d on the right surface of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly.

In addition, since the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side in front view of the main body part 556a (the side where the accommodation recess 556d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit becomes visible. This portion can be decorated with the side reflection portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed into a thin sheet shape, and is decorated with decorations such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that is in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5. It is designed to have a The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed approximately symmetrically with respect to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or may be different decorations.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape in side view as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed into a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light shielding member 559 includes a main body portion 559a in the shape of a flat plate extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, a rear wall portion 559b projecting in a short flat shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, and a rear wall portion 559b. A rectangular notch 559c is cut out leftward from the right end side of the wall portion 559b when viewed from the front, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a cutout portion 559c extends rightward from the right side of the main body portion 559a and is cut out from the rear side. It includes a plurality of plate-shaped reinforcing parts 559d extending from the wall part 559b to the front end of the main body part 559a.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side being cut diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge extending upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to be movable, and the outer shape is formed to be approximately the same as the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

When the rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, its left end extends to the right of the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 comes into contact with the right end of this rear wall portion 559b.

The plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c cause the right unit decorative lens member 561 to emit light well. It can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets, each pair being a pair of reinforcing portions 559d spaced apart in the vertical direction and having substantially the same height as the left and right width, and spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view of a rectangular shape extending vertically, with the upper corner of the front end side cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower edge moves upward as it moves forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light shielding member 560, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, as shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a of the left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the vertical and front-back directions with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . Through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light radiated forward from the LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 is transmitted to the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated with light.

In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of non-transparent members, and are irradiated forward from the left LED 552a, middle LED 552c, and right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other, and the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and Light-emitting decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

Furthermore, since the internal space is vertically divided into four parts by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged at the rear side of each divided space. The LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 can prevent light from interfering between the spaces, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be , each can be decorated with light emission independently. That is, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be divided into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction, and each region can be decorated with light emission independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shapes of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and having a plurality of polyhedrons formed therein. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion having a concave front surface and a short length extending back and forth. The multifaceted decorative portion 561b includes a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons made of a plurality of triangles arranged in a plurality of vertical rows on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped. It is formed in a shape similar to the one shown below.

To be more specific, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative parts 561a and a multifaceted decorative part 561b in each space divided into four by three sets of reinforcing parts 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the top three parts located at the front, one multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, the multifaceted decorative part 561b is arranged in the top three parts. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is disposed.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. This right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light by an LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 disposed at the rear.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed into a cylindrical frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed to be able to cover both left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and both left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward than the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562. The right unit cover 563 is made of a transparent member, and allows the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side to be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend vertically in short lengths, and are attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a non-transparent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

When the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled to the door frame 3, it protrudes forward in a plate shape to a greater extent than the door frame left side unit 530, and slightly protrudes further forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 has a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end, respectively, independently. It can be used as a luminescent decoration.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 will be separated from the adjacent pachinko machine on the right side. It can act as a partition between the two. As a result, it is possible to give the illusion that a player playing on this pachinko machine 1 is playing in a private room, and to allow the player to play in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around him. I can do it.

In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes significantly forward, in a game hall where pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the island equipment This pachinko machine 1 can be seen even from the lateral direction along the , and the pachinko machine 1 can stand out in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in rows. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light, the book can be seen from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. The existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides are removed. By decorating the member 561 etc. with light emitting in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify and make the game hall attendants aware of the occurrence of a malfunction, allowing them to quickly respond to the malfunction. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved quickly, and the player can be prevented from becoming irritated and losing interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. Figure 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back. FIG. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a central base 571 attached to the center in the left and right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and attached to both left and right sides of the center base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surface of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extend from side to side, and the center in the left and right direction protrudes forward. A pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped and open at the rear, penetrate front and rear of the pair of upper speakers 573, respectively, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to near the center. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three each on the left and right) extending and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart vertically, and is attached to the front side of a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit main body 271, and a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal, which is arranged in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Although not shown, each of the pair of side bases 572 (left side base 572a, right side base 572b) has an internal space that is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the internal space of the opening window, the outer periphery outer light emitting part 34 (left outer periphery outer light emitting part 34a, right outer periphery outer light emitting part 34b) is provided to emit light from outside the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and It has a structure in which outer circumferential outer light detecting sections 35 (left outer circumferential outer light detecting section 35a, right outer circumferential outer light detecting section 35b) which detect light outside the outer circumference are provided.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a top middle decorative member 576 that is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction and has translucency, and a top middle decorative member 576 that is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame, and a door frame top middle decorative board 577 that is attached to the front of the unit main body 271 to close the plurality of slits 574b, respectively, and both left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guiding members 578 (three each on the left and right ends) extend from the vicinity across the opening 574a to near both left and right ends of the unit body 271, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of the plurality of (three) light guide members 578, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decoration A top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front side of the unit body 271 from the front side of each lens member 580 and extends from both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to near the center end of the opening 574a. A top middle right decorative member 582 is provided.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of both the left and right sides of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on the parts facing the outer ends of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 in the left and right direction. A plurality of (three) slits 574b are formed through the door frame top left decorative board 583 and door frame top right decorative board 584, respectively, which are formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of the unit main body 271. A pair of board bases 585 are respectively attached to the parts, and a door is mounted on the front side of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit body 271. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the front side of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. A pair of light shielding members 588 are provided.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the center base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 within the unit body 271, and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the unit cover 591 to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271. A lower cover 592 is attached to the main body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 has a rectangular shape extending from side to side when viewed from the front. The central base 571 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of projections and depressions on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to both left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. When the pair of upper speakers 573 are assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surfaces of each of the upper speakers 573 are mounted obliquely so that the side closer to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570 moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-shaped speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 has a shape when viewed from the front, such that the lower portions near both left and right ends of a rectangular shape extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 has a shape in a front view, in which a rectangle extending left and right is cut out with a trapezoid that narrows upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has a shape in a plan view of a rectangle extending left and right, and a base that is approximately 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. It is formed in a shape that is a combination of a trapezoid that protrudes forward, and a rectangle that protrudes short forward and has the front end side of the trapezoid as its long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the forwardly protruding part at the center in the left-right direction on the front face are connected to the line connecting the left-right end of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end of the front end of the forward-protruding part. It is located further back (concave) than the

The unit main body 271 has openings 574a extending from both left and right ends of the front surface to positions outside of the forwardly protruding portions, which extend through the unit body 271 in the front and rear directions. In addition, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending horizontally at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at an obliquely extending portion of the trapezoidally projecting portion on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from near the front end of a portion extending diagonally forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271 to near the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, three each, spaced apart vertically.

The unit main body 271 also has an upper opening 574c cut out in a square shape from the rear end toward the front in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a lower opening 574d cut out in the left-right direction from the rear end toward the front on the lower surface. , is equipped with. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by a lower cover 592.

The unit body 271 also includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at approximately the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. This unit main body 271 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a shape in a front view of a modified pentagon that is bent so that the center of the lower side of the approximately square is located downward, and extends outward in the left and right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed into a shape that is a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tips of the sides and the bottom ends of the left and right sides of a side pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the pentagonal portion on the front side moves rearward as it goes downward. This top middle decorative member 576 is entirely formed into a three-dimensional shape and has translucency.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is attached to the back of the top middle decorative member 576 in a state where the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward, so that the front surface is along the front surface of the pentagonal part of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decorative board 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decorative member 576 can be decorated with light.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of the front end of the forwardly protruding portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 on both the left and right sides. The side near both ends of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction is considered to be the end side, and the side near the center is the center side. 578a, and a circular arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward from the center end side of the straight portion 578a toward the center. The light guide member 578 has a straight portion 578a whose depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than its height in the vertical direction, and a circular arc portion 578b whose depth in the front-rear direction is larger than its height in the vertical direction. Further, the light guiding member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant at the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller toward the center side at the arcuate portion 578b. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight part 578a is located just in front of the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the circular arc part 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guiding member 578 includes a diffuse reflection part 578c made of saw-shaped unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight part 578a, and a diffused input part 578d made of a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear side of the arcuate part 578b. It is equipped with

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left and right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584. At the same time, the diffusion input section 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left and right direction, the light is transmitted to the straight part 578a. As the light travels toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of these in front of the straight portion 578a is decorated with light.

In addition, light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 enters the light guide member 578 from a diffusion input part 578d formed on the rear surface of the circular arc part 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thereby, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the circular arc portion 578b can be decorated with light.

In this way, the light guide member 578 is connected to the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens parts 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, concave and convex portions in the shape of a square pyramid protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top left decorative lens member 579 is decorated with light emission by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 via the three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens parts 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, concave and convex portions in the shape of a square pyramid protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire area on the right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top right decorative lens member 580 is decorated with light emission by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 via the three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from in front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to fill the space between the three decorative lens parts 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top left side. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. This top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the top right decorative lens member 580 so as to fill in the space between the three decorative lens parts 580a when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. This top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a non-transparent member.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) of the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing right. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has an LED 583a mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guiding members 578 attached to the front left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can each independently emit light. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 illuminates the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578. Can be decorated with light.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. The door frame top right decorative board 584 has an LED 584a mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can each independently emit light. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 illuminates the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578. Can be decorated with light.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with respect to each other. The board base 585 has a substantially square side wall in side view having sides extending vertically and longitudinally, a quadrangular rear wall in front view extending outward in the left and right direction at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and a side wall extending from the front end of the upper side of the side wall. A roughly right triangular upper wall that connects the upper sides of the side wall and rear wall with the line that connects the upper half of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and a roughly right triangular upper wall that connects the lower sides of the side wall and rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It has a right triangular lower wall, and is formed into a triangular prism-like box shape with an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 such that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. A door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to this board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear left side of the left-right center of the unit body 271, so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front. It will be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, relative to the surface extending left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, when the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, its front surface is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. The state is almost parallel.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, a plurality of LEDs 586a are exposed forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to decorate the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top middle decorative member 576 through the arc portion 578b of the light guiding member 578. be able to.

The door frame top center right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271, so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front. It will be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction, relative to the surface extending left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, when the door frame top center right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, its front surface is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction are formed. The state is almost parallel.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, a plurality of LEDs 587a are exposed forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to decorate the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed of non-light-transmitting members and are substantially symmetrical to each other. The light shielding member 588 extends between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 which are arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. It's in charge. This light shielding member 588 allows light to be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be well decorated with light in a state where they are independent from each other.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. It relays the connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door main body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered by a relay board cover 590.

This door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left and right direction, and the front faces on both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curved so as to be gouged rearward. Therefore, the player can be given the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 is significantly protruding forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center. It is formed to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed at both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the entire front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal at the rear of each of the left and right ends near where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. The speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens parts 579a and 580a spaced apart above and below of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The player can listen to the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in good condition, and can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 has a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated with light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 including the front side of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effects of door frame]
The functions and effects of the door frame 3 will be explained. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the through-holes 111 that penetrate the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 at the front and back are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in conventional pachinko machines. In accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, the vertical heights of the pan unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 are reduced, and the horizontal widths of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 are reduced. is made smaller. As a result, the front side of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , it corresponds to a game board 5 with a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 has a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) that has a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of a plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the lower side of the through-hole 111. The front surface (the front surface of the lower plate front decorative part 326c) of the lower half (the part below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 has a recessed shape so that it can be scooped out backwards (the plate unit 320 and the front ends of both left and right ends of the production operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the production operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 appears to protrude significantly forward, so that the production operation unit 400 is highlighted and emphasized to the player. This makes it possible to draw strong attention to the performance operation unit 400.

In the door frame 3, the production operation unit 400, which is arranged on the front side of the tray unit 320 below the through-hole 111, is tilted so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Therefore, when a player is seated in front of this pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state facing the player's head (face), and the player lowers his/her gaze and presses the production operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state close to the front, making the large, round operation button 410 clearly visible, and increasing expectations for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed within the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in good condition, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 that has a diameter that is approximately the same as the overall height of the pan unit 320 and bulges out in a round shape toward the front, when operating the operation button 410, it is possible to operate the operation button 410 by moving the hand over a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and "quick pressing" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is installed in an inclined position, so it can not only be pressed from above like a conventional pachinko machine operation button, but also operated from the left or right side. The user can easily operate the button 410 from the front or from the front, and the easy-to-operate operation button 410 can make the performance using the operation button 410 more enjoyable.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the performance operation unit 400 mounted in a suspended state by the plate unit 320, and is equipped with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibrations at the bottom of the performance operation unit 400, so that the game When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibrations depending on the state, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the top of the operation button 410, surprising the player and causing the operation button to move. 410 can be enjoyed even more.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 (performance operation unit 400) that spans the entire height of the tray unit 320 at the center of the front surface of the tray unit 320. Since the lower plate 322 underneath becomes less noticeable, players who are used to conventional pachinko machines can easily recognize that it is clearly different, and this appeal strongly attracts players' attention. The pachinko machine 1 can have high power.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 goes around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower tray 322 can be increased relative to the size of the lower tray opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls can be stored in the lower tray 322. In addition, since the rear part of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear side of the performance operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand into the lower tray 322 or hooks his left fingers on the lower tray opening 326d, Since it becomes difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to reduce the size of the lower plate opening 326d. The user can also tactually recognize that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate 322 .

Furthermore, the door frame 3 includes a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which the game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray for extracting the game balls from the lower tray 322 into a dollar box or the like below the tray unit 320. The plate ball extraction hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front and back, and is also arranged on the right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d (to the right of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the production operation unit 400) in front view. In other words, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are connected to the production operation unit 400, the production operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) of the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Because they are arranged at the rear of the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be made neat. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is arranged below the front (directly in front) of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, so the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is in an open state. Then, the game balls released from the upper tray 321 etc. to the lower tray 322 enter the lower tray 322 and are immediately discharged from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a to the dollar box or the like below. At this time, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the flow of game balls from the upper tray 321 etc. to the lower tray 322 and discharged to the dollar box is also limited. I can't see it. This prevents the player from giving the illusion that the game balls in the upper tray 321 and the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper tray 321 is full are being directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by allowing the player to concentrate on the game (the operation of hitting the game ball, the effect image, etc.). can.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a disposed in a position to the front left of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and a vertical position of the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall part is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are directly transferred to the lower tray ball. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or indirectly guided to the lower ball hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. As a result, while the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 are transferred to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since the balls flowing in the lower tray 322 can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower tray first area A1, the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322 can be removed from the lower tray 322 without being visible to the player. The game balls can be ejected downward (to the dollar box), and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326, through which the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the production operation unit mounting portion 326a (production operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player places his/her hand on the lower tray opening 326d or puts his/her hand into the lower tray 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e will not be blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be outputted forward in a good manner, and the sound from the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Furthermore, when the player puts his/her hand into or approaches the lower tray 322, the player can tactually feel the vibrations caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 that is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain the players and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is equipped with a door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can act as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, it is possible for players who play with this pachinko machine 1 to play in a private room. It is possible to create the illusion that the player is actually there, and it is possible to have players play games in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be decorated with light emitting light on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward. Even if you are not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 inside the building, you can make the presence of the pachinko machine 1 known from a distance, such as from the side along the island equipment, making it a pachinko machine that is highly appealing to players. It can be set as machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 above the through-hole 111, and the front face of the top middle decorative member 576 on both left and right sides. The top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 has a concave shape that can be scooped out backwards (the top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude forward, making it possible to highlight and emphasize the top middle decorative member 576 to the player. The center decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, the upper part of the door frame of a conventional pachinko machine is provided with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. In contrast, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, in the door frame top unit 570 attached above the through hole 111, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends are provided. In addition to being equipped with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided, which extend from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both left and right ends in front of the speaker cover 575. The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light. As a result, the entire front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are not noticeable at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to make the player aware at a glance that the player is in the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the pair of upper speakers 573 allows the player to enjoy high-quality stereo sound. can.

In this way, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the production operation unit 400 attached to the tray unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are arranged below and above the through-hole 111. , each protrudes forward at the center in the left and right direction, so that the imaginary line passing through the center in the left and right direction stands out, allowing the player to see a uniform decoration at the top and bottom, as well as giving the player a sophisticated decoration. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 stand out from other pachinko machines and have high appeal.

In addition, since the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 and the production operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, protruding forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the performance operation unit 400 is decorated with light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left and right direction, so that the player's line of sight is placed at the center in the left and right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 etc. of the production operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is a front view of the game board of FIG. 63. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view seen from behind after being disassembled. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a is A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is operated by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 that controls the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a game board side performance display device 1600 that is placed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, and a front side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also includes a transparent flat panel plate 1110, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive game balls that are hit into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are used for playing games at different positions in the gaming area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to receive a ball, a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and detects passage of a gaming ball, and a gaming ball that passes through the gate section 2003. The second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the regular lottery drawn by drawing, and the first special lottery draws by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A grand prize opening 2005 is provided in which game balls can be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a starting port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the lower side unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general prize openings 2001, and a side unit that is installed above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is installed approximately at the center of the gaming area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A locking mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the board side effect display device 1600 is provided.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 has a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end of the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at the top of the vertical center. A rear lower rear movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a rear upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view The back left movable production unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, and the back upper center is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. It includes a movable performance unit 3400 and a back/front/back movable performance unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back/lower/rear movable performance unit 3100.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 64, 65, and the like. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left side when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is located on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 near the lower end extending substantially perpendicularly, on the lower side of the out guide section 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and on the outside of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1008 that is recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protrusion 202 that protrudes toward the rear of the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from the lower front side of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel board 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of attachment bosses 1010 that protrude rearward from the rear surface. By inserting the plurality of attachment bosses 1010 into the attachment holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, they can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100).

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path passes through these notches 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 61, 62, 64, 65, etc. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (gaming panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be held sufficiently even when obstacle nails are planted in the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position within the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

The panel plate 1110 also has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 formed of round holes arranged near the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1114 arranged near the outer periphery at the lower left side and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the up-down direction. , is equipped with. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the gaming area 5a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel board 1110 is provided with step-shaped engaging step portions 1115 with a depressed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engagement step portions 1115 are cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel board 1110, and, like the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114, are arranged outside the gaming area 5a. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Furthermore, the panel board 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116, the inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to include the panel board 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel board 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (eg, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step part 1121 which removably holds the panel board 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step part 1121 which has a size approximately equal to that of the game area 5a inside the holding step part 1121 in the front and rear direction. A through hole 1122 penetrating through the.

The depth of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 from the front is approximately the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110, and the front surface of the panel board 1110 held within the holding step 1121 is the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110. It is approximately the same surface as the front. Further, the holding step portion 1121 has a front inner circumferential surface formed in such a size that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer circumferential surface of the panel plate 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel board 1110 relatively expands and contracts due to temperature changes or changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to a fitting hole 1113 and a long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step 1121, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121. It extends and includes a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel board 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 that engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. Specifically, the engagement claw 1124 is arranged at the upper part of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121. It protrudes toward the front and is adapted to be elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. This engagement piece 1125 is attached to the upper side ( It extends a predetermined amount toward the center (center side). By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with these engaging claws 1124 and engaging pieces 1125, the panel plate 1110 is held detachably from the panel holder 1120.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position within the gaming area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear surface of the outlet 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the outlet 1126.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path unit 860 passes through these notches 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 face forward.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of attachment holes 1128 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of attachment bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into these multiple mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1120 (gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 passing through in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game balls flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a are guided by the out guiding section 1003 to the out port 1126 on the rear side, and are discharged to the back side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a different form from that shown in FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with the front component, the board holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. This game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as plywood with a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The game panel 1150 has an outer shape that is approximately the same as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the outlet 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the outlet 1151.

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a notch 1152 that extends horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front and is opened downward and has the same shape as the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and a notch 1152 on the upper side of the notch 1152 in the vertical direction. A rectangular insertion hole 1153 is provided, which extends through the hole 1153 and into which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails that pass through the front and rear so that the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted in positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. Furthermore, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of attachment holes 1155 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of attachment bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the attachment bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into these multiple attachment holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel 1150 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

Furthermore, although not shown in the drawings, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and rear for attaching the table unit 2000, similar to the openings 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 described above. ing.

When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1151 is opened at the rear side of the out guide section 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear side outlet 1151 by the out guide part 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the outlet 1151.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200, when assembled on the game board 5, can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. The liquid can be discharged downward from the discharge section 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game content, payout of game balls, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Therefore, traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042, including the main control board box 1320, are all provided as transparent members to enable visual confirmation from the outside. There is. In other words, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 have surfaces that are inferior in fraud prevention performance. Since implementation areas are now provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures, which will be described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 when the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED that displays the gaming status, and four LEDs that display the normal lottery results drawn by passing the game ball through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 consisting of a normal symbol display 1402, a normal holding display 1408 consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the passing of game balls to the gate part 2003, and a drawing by receiving the game balls to the first starting port 2002. A first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the first special lottery result, and a first special holding consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the acceptance of game balls into the first starting slot 2002. A number display 1404, a second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs that display the second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004, A second special reservation number display 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and a special reservation number display 1406 that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot" etc. It mainly includes a round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (round number) of the opening/closing pattern.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be explained with reference to FIG. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that accommodates the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section for controlling effect images. .

[5-7. Game board side performance display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The game board side performance display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. To be more specific, the game board side performance display device 1600 is removably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the approximate center. This game board side performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

The game board side performance display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 that protrude outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixing piece 1602 that protrudes outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. This game board side performance display device 1600 has two fixing grooves opened on the left inner circumferential surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. 3010c, insert the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and lock it. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Front unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and has a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110 and a rear end passing through the opening 1112. and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

The table unit 2000 of this embodiment has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open and capable of receiving game balls shot into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are inside the gaming area 5a. a first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions; a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of game balls; A second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the normal lottery results that are drawn by passing through the part 2003, and a lottery is performed by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A grand prize opening 2005 that can accept game balls according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

The plurality of general winning holes 2001 are arranged at the lower part of the gaming area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is located directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed approximately directly below the blocking portion 1006 at the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. The second starting port 2004 is located directly below the gate portion 2003 to the right when viewed from the front. The big prize opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a starting port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the lower side unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general prize openings 2001, and a side unit that is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It includes an upper part 2300, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is attached to the approximate center of the gaming area 5a and has a gate part 2003 and a second starting opening 2004.

The starting port unit 2100 is located in the gaming area 5a, near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction, directly above the out port 1126, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that opens upward with a size that can accept only one game ball at a time, and a big winning port 2005 that allows multiple game balls to be received at a time ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) are of an acceptable size and extend from side to side, and are formed to be openable and closable depending on the gaming state.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that can accept game balls at all times.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front in the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view, slightly below the center in the vertical direction, in the gaming area 5a. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game balls flowing down along the inner rail 1002 are directed to the right (playing area 5a). (center in the left-right direction).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the gaming area 5a above the starting port unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is located on the front side of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed into a frame shape, and allows the game board side effect display device 1600 placed behind the game panel 1100 and the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 to be visually recognized from the front through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, excluding the lower side, protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that a game ball struck into the game area 5a is placed within the frame. It is made so that it cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front so that game balls in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 and can be released into the frame. It includes an open warp exit 2522 and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball released from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a. A starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 is provided, which is rotatably mounted around an axis extending left and right along the direction and accommodates a performance drive board.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back left center decoration unit 3050 that is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 that is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at an upper position from the center in the vertical direction. A rear lower rear movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a rear upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view The back left movable production unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, and the back upper center is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. It includes a movable performance unit 3400 and a back/front/back movable performance unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back/lower/rear movable performance unit 3100.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a flat frame-shaped frame projecting rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside of the frame toward the outside on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side performance display device 1600 is inserted. , a notch 3010d is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the vertical center of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting part 3010b when viewed from the rear, and a notch 3010d is provided to which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of the game board side performance display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side performance display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. formed at appropriate positions for mounting each movable performance unit and the like.

The back unit 3000 appropriately uses a back lower/rear movable presentation unit 3100, a back top/left movable presentation unit 3200, a back left movable presentation unit 3300, a back top/middle movable presentation unit 3400, a back/bottom/front movable presentation unit 3500, etc. , a light-emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. can be performed, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[6. Game content]
Next, the content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 are released. , the ball passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5 and is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving force of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more clockwise the handle 302 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. , game balls can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and game balls are attached to the obstacle nails. By making contact, the falling speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball, so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition to the obstacle nails, the game area 5a is provided with windmills (not shown) that are rotated by contact with game balls at appropriate positions.

When the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500. When the game ball flowing down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward. When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, since it is located directly above the first starting port 2002, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When game balls are accepted into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the gaming area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the large prize opening 2005 in the open state, and the like.

By the way, if the game ball that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, and will be moved to the general prize opening 2001 and the first prize slot in the lower side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, when the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called hitting to the right), On the downstream side thereof, the water flows down a region where a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 are provided.

Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is held in the main control board 1310, and if the normal lottery result is "normal win", the second starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time ( For example, the second starting port 2004 remains open for a period of 0.3 to 10 seconds, allowing game balls to be received into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when game balls pass through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the time when the normal lottery result is indicated (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). This suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 becomes open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

Furthermore, if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 between the time the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of suggesting the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result is finished. Further, the number of normal lottery results that can be held is set at the upper limit of four, and even if game balls pass through the gate section 2003, they are discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when game balls are received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot", "jackpot", " A special lottery result is drawn to generate a "medium win," "small win," "probability fluctuation win," "time reduction win," etc.). Then, the special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn when game balls are received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "Lose", "Small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", " 15R jackpot," "probability variable (probability change) win," "time saving (time reduction) win," "probable variable time saving win," "probable variable time saving win," and so on.

When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After the special variable time has elapsed, the grand prize opening 2005 becomes ready to accept game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the big win hole 2005 while the big win hole 2005 is in an open state, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 or 13) are delivered from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. is dispensed onto the upper tray 321. Therefore, by allowing the big winning hole 2005 to accept game balls when the big winning hole 2005 is enabled to accept game balls, many game balls can be paid out and the players can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", after the big prize opening 2005 is open to accept game balls for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot", a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the grand prize opening 2005 is open to accept game balls, or When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are accepted, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the game balls into a closed state where they cannot be accepted is established. Repeat a number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, a ``2R jackpot'' is repeated for 2 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``15R jackpot'' is repeated for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in "Jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, the probability that a special lottery result such as "Jackpot" will be drawn will be changed ("probable winning"), and the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result will be changed. There is a ``win'' (``time saving hit'').

In this embodiment, the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 receive game balls from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested. Once a game ball is received in the second starting slot 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the special lottery result, so the start of suggesting the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Ru. The maximum number of special lottery results to be held is 4 for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if game balls were accepted in 2004, they were discarded without retaining the special lottery results. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

This suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning them on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then indicating the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side performance display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by varying each symbol row with three symbol rows each consisting of a plurality of symbols being displayed side by side in the left and right direction. The symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three stop-displayed symbol rows are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

In addition, there is a time period (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) indicating a special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, and a time period indicating a special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (when the symbol rows fluctuate). The time required for displaying the confirmed image is different from the time required for displaying the finalized image, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting a special lottery result by the game board side performance display device 1600, the performance operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 displays a performance image for suggesting a special lottery result. The operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations on the center accessory 2500, various decorations on the back unit 3000, back lower and rear movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect It is possible to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper and middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. It is possible to keep the players entertained, and to prevent the players from losing interest in the game.

[Relationship between this embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in this embodiment is a door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in this embodiment is a main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment is a door unit of the present invention. The pan unit cover 326 of the pan unit 320 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment is attached to the window portion of the present embodiment, and the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A of this embodiment is attached to the bulge portion of the present invention. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

In addition, the interior decoration member of the operation button of the base unit in this embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side are the second decoration body of the present invention. The second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the peripheral decoration part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral decoration member 478 correspond to the second decoration part of the present invention, respectively. .

Furthermore, each LED and the sub-screen decoration board mounted on the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436 in this embodiment The LED 477a of 477 is the light emitting body of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 in this embodiment is the back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 in this embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the performance operation unit 400 (or the second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 bulging forward in the door frame 3 can be operated. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) The decoration in which the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) overlap, the decoration in which the first button decoration part 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. Since it is possible to show players a highly decorative decoration with a sense of perspective, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of players, and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be made expensive.

In addition, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the movement direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the button lens 411 can be moved by the player operating (pressing) the button lens 411. When this happens, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) will approach or separate. Due to a change in the distance between the first button decoration part 411a and the second inner button decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), the first button decoration part 411a and the second It becomes possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the button interior decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), and the first button decoration part 411a and The player can change the decoration (intersection mode) with the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), and It is possible to have fun and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward to the side opposite to the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side), it is different from the first decoration body. Since a space will be formed between the button lens 411 and the second button decoration member 432, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decoration part 411a and the second button of the operation button interior decoration member 432 when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decorative part 432g (or the peripheral decorative part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) will be much different, and the button lens 411 may be moved by operating the button lens 411. Even when the player's eye position moves, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) Since the intersecting manner (overlapping degree) changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Furthermore, since the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration part 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration part 411a is not provided. Through this, the interior operation button decoration member 432 on the back side (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be clearly seen, and the radial shape of the first button decoration part 411a can be clearly recognized. The decoration allows the player's line of sight to be directed to the center of the button lens 411, and through the center of the transparent button lens 411, the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) and the door frame can be seen. The player's attention can be strongly focused on the side effect display device 460.

In addition, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with a second button interior decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, when viewed from the outside, the button lens 411 The decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 intersect with each other, so that the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g It is possible to reliably bring out the sense of perspective in the decoration created by the buttons, and to make the decorations created by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g stand out, thereby making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players. can.

Moreover, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration part 432g The decoration can direct the player's line of sight and attention to the door frame side effect display device 460 visible in the center of the operation button internal decoration member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Furthermore, each LED mounted on the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436 (or the sub-screen decoration board 477) When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or sub-screen decoration member 476) can be decorated with light emission, and the button lens 411 can also be decorated with light emission. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by the light-emitting decoration. At this time, the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) controls the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board. Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decorative board 436 can be diffused, in the second button interior decoration part 432g, the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button top While the interior decoration board 435 and the lower operation button interior decoration board 436 are illuminated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), the first button decoration part 411a is decorated with the second button interior decoration. The second button inner decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) is decorated with a strong luminescence, whereas the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) is decorated with a strong luminescence. Since the first button decoration part 411a is decorated with weak light, each LED of the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436 When looking at the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) from the outside with the LED 477a emitting light, the sense of perspective is more emphasized. The decoration can be shown to the players, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing, strongly attracting the players' interest.

In addition, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the direction in which the button lens 411 moves, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side decoration member 432) There is no need to secure space for the button lens 411 to move around the outer circumference of the frame side second effect display device 460A), It is possible to expand the side second effect display device 460A) outward and make it as large as possible, and by increasing the size, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device) can be enlarged. 460A) can be highlighted. Furthermore, as described above, since there is no need to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly decorative, has a good appearance, and has a high appeal that strongly attracts the attention of players.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, if a player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. Since the applied impact force is more easily dispersed over the entire button lens 411 than in the case of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 can be made difficult to break (hard to be damaged). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the button lens 411 being damaged during a game, which may cause some players to become irritated and lose their interest, and also to prevent the button lens 411 from being damaged. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 that allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 disposed in the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the front through the through hole 111, there is a space under the through hole 111. The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. An operation button 410 with a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ~30 cm that can be moved (advance and retreat) by the player's operation, and an internal decoration that can be seen from the front through a transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged within the frame are attached, it is different from the conventional one. In a pachinko machine, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 is visible in the position where the game ball storage tray is conspicuous. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized as being different from conventional pachinko machines, and can have a high appeal. The frame unit 415 is provided with a frame side lens 417 having translucency, and a second button decoration having translucency is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) adjacent to the frame side lens 417. 411b, and an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with first LEDs 422a and 423a for decorating the second button decoration part 411b with light emission and second LEDs 422b and 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 with light emission. It includes an inner cylindrical part 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions from the decorative part 411b, and a main body part 413a and an inner extension part 413f of the button base 413 that partition the second button decorative part 411b and the center side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and the light from the second LED 422b illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and button lens 411 due to the inner cylinder portion 416d, the main body portion 413a, and the inner extension portion 413f. , 423b can be prevented from illuminating the second button decoration part 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decoration part 411b can be decorated with light emission independently. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a good-looking light emission effect can be performed. In addition, by appropriately combining lights off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc. for the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decoration part 411b, various patterns of light emission can be produced. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is also possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a and 423a that emits light to decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b that emits light to decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are combined into one operation button left outer decoration. In preparation for the circuit board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), so that the second button decorative part Compared to the case where 411b (operation button 410) is provided with a board, the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be kept as far away from the second button decoration part 411b as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be sufficiently reflected. The second button decoration part 411b can be irradiated with the light in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration part 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emitting light, the appearance of the second button decoration part 411b and the light emitting decoration of the frame side lens 417 can be improved, which strongly attracts the attention of players. In addition, it is possible to entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the players.

Furthermore, since the operating button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operating button left outer decorative board 422 is attached as the operating button 410 moves back and forth. The wiring connected to the outer right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is not bent or stretched, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration part 411b) is moved, the wiring will not be disconnected. To allow a player to enjoy the light-emitting decoration without any problem, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, since the second button decoration part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be seen through the transparent button lens 411. (Second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) When looking at the inner decoration member 432 of the operation button and the outer edge of the door frame side effect display device 460 (second effect display device 460A on the door frame side), the second button decoration part 411b is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. By causing the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b to emit light as appropriate, the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) are transparent and visible. As described above, the second button decoration part 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be decorated with light emitting light in various patterns. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and can be used for light emission effects, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by entertaining the effect images etc. on the effect display device 460A).

In addition, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410), which is provided with the second button decoration part 411b on the outer edge, can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of a player participation type performance. By allowing the player to operate the button 410, the player can enjoy operating the operation button 410 (player participatory effect), and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game. When performing a player participation type production, the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated with light to attract the player's attention to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type performance.

Furthermore, since only the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the non-transparent main body part 413a and the inner extension part 413f, which allow the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 to be decorated with light by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 The area closer to the center than the button decoration part 411b is not decorated with light emission (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) becomes brighter, so that it is placed at the rear. It is possible to prevent the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be decorated with light in a good condition, and the rear operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in good condition, and the decorations, light-emitting effects, etc. can be sufficiently enjoyed by the players, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the inner cylinder portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration of the operation button 410 are displayed on the rear side of the frame unit 415. 411b can be completely partitioned off by the inner cylindrical portion 416d. On the other hand, the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is at the end (rear end) of the inner cylinder portion 416d closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is located closer to the left outer decorative board 422 and the right outer operating button decorative board 423 than the diffusion range, the outer left decorative board 422 and the right outer operating button Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative board 423, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b 423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. There's nothing to do. Therefore, the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects can be realized.

In addition, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b on the rear side of the operation button 410 and the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned off by the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the main body portion 413a closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operating button right outer decorative board 423 Since the LEDs 422a and 423a also extend rearward, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body 413a, completely blocking light from entering the center of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Can be done. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be illuminated and decorated in good condition by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 ( The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side can be visually recognized in a good condition, and the player can fully enjoy the decorations, light-emitting effects, etc., thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Also, when viewed from the front, a second button decoration is provided in front of the outer part of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the part 411b is located, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side). The members on the outside and the rear side (rear side) of the effect display device 460A) can be made difficult to see by the second button decoration part 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. In addition, at this time, when the second button decoration part 411b is decorated with light emission by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the brightness of the second button decoration part 411b is different from the brightness of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the second decoration on the door frame side). Since the outside and rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, the members on the outside and rear side of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, frame unit 415, interior decoration member 432 of the operation button, door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Moreover, since the outer circumference of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration part 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration part 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by causing the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b to emit light as appropriate, a light emitting effect in which light circles around the outer edge of the operation button 410 or a light emission in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410 can be produced. Since it is possible to show the player a display, a light-emitting display in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored with the various light-emitting displays, and to make the player have fun. This can prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls stored in the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3 are driven into the game area 5a, and the upper tray 321 used for the game is opened. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is removably attached to the front side and lower part of the upper plate 321 to create a mounting space of a predetermined size behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). A remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, and a portion of the lower plate main body 325 corresponding to the first region A1 of the lower plate is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and a remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed from that portion. Since the lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls is attached by extending the portion of the lower tray main body 325 corresponding to the lower tray second region A2 inside, the lower tray 322 looks small when viewed from the front. Therefore, the lower plate 322 can be made less noticeable, and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be made relatively more noticeable. Therefore, when this pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in the position where the upper tray and lower tray are seen vertically side by side in conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to make a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make players realize that it is different from conventional pachinko machines at just a glance, and that can strongly attract the attention of players. can.

Further, in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the main body vertical wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery extends upward from the upper end to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower tray covers 340, 340A are provided to restrict the movement of the game balls, the game balls in the lower tray 322 are prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). This prevents the game balls supplied into the lower tray 322 and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 from coming into contact with or pressing against the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball will not come into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) will not be damaged by the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest due to interruption of the game due to damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and this pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

In addition, lower plate covers 340, 340A are provided in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to prevent the game balls from moving toward the main body vertical wall portion 325b and the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower tray main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable due to the game ball intruding into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

In addition, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game balls supplied into the lower plate 322 bounce within the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from intruding into the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can 326d) into the lower plate second area A2, the lower plate covers 340, 340A can prevent the fingertips etc. from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the underside of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), etc., and to allow the player to play the game in a safe state. Can be done.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the impact and pressure caused by the contact of the game ball with the lower plate covers 340, 340A. Even if the operation occurs, the information is not transmitted from the lower plate cover 340, 340A to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and damage to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is ensured. It can be prevented.

In addition, in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, so the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. In this state, the game balls released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can directly enter the lower tray ball removal hole 322a and be discharged downward (to the dollar box), and the game balls can be removed from the main body of the lower tray body 325. It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball will be removed from the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) from coming into contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent damage to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), reduce interruptions in the game, and reduce the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray main body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325 is tilted. The ball will climb up the bottom surface, and the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game balls that come into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate covers 340, 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game balls to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body vertical wall portion 325b, thereby suppressing damage to them.

In addition, since at least the lower plate covers 340, 340A are separate members, when the lower plate covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate covers 340, 340A, and this pachinko machine 1 can reduce the burden on the game hall side where the game hall is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front surface in the left and right direction expands most forwardly below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game in which game balls are accepted into the general prize opening 2001 etc. is played. The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 taken out is provided, and the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A are removably attached to the part that bulges out most forwardly, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. The storage tray (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) is provided with a storage tray that can store game balls, and the storage tray (the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322) is provided with an outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. It has a lower plate first area A1 located therein and a lower plate second area A2 located in a space at the rear of the mounting space 326j which is behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) in front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out, and the storage trays (the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322) can be made to look smaller and less noticeable. can. Therefore, since the conspicuous performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is visible in the area where the upper tray and lower tray were visible in the conventional pachinko machine, the player can see that the game machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized at a glance, and has a high appeal that can strongly attract the attention of players.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is Although it is small, the first part of the lower plate main body 325 has a second lower plate area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j which is the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. Since it includes the extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, and the lower tray covers 340, 340A, it is possible to store game balls even in a range that cannot be seen from the front of the lower tray 322 (lower tray second area A2). can. Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored, allowing the player to concentrate on playing the game without having to worry about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower tray 322. This makes it possible to enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the lower plate cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part are attached to the lower plate main body 325 and the main body part 325A having the lower plate first area A1, and the lower plate cover 340, 340A having the lower plate second area A2. Since the lower plate 322 is constructed by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A of different sizes, a first extension part 325B, a second extension part 325C, etc. are prepared in advance. By installing the lower tray cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, the size of the lower tray cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C can be adjusted according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the installation space 326j in the tray unit cover 326. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j. Since the width of this rear space depends on the amount of rearward protrusion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), various production operation units 400 (second production operation unit 400A) with different rear protrusion amounts can be used. The lower tray 322 can be made compatible with the performance operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 includes a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower tray 322 becomes a container-like shape concave downward, and the game ball can be stored reliably. In addition, since the lower plate covers 340, 340A have a cover standing wall part 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall part 325b of the lower plate main body 325, lower plate covers 340, 340A of various shapes are prepared in advance. Then, by combining (installing) the lower plate covers 340, 340A of a shape according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, the size (shape) of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j, etc., it can be adapted to various forms. It is possible to achieve the same effects as described above.

Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the lower plate covers 340, 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the part of the lower tray 322 on which the game balls are placed is the lower tray main body 325, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A are placed in the area where the load of many game balls is applied due to storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, the load of the stored game balls is only received by the lower tray main body 325, so even if many game balls are stored, there is no force that would cause the lower tray covers 340, 340A to be separated from the lower tray main body 325. There is no action, and the lower plate covers 340, 340A can be prevented from coming off from the lower plate main body 325.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray capable of storing game balls is provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game in which game balls are received into the general prize opening 2001 etc. is played. 321 and a lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball supply port 323c and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a in the lower tray 322 by a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower tray 322 including The pachinko machine 1 can have a high appeal that can strongly attract people. In addition, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see the game ball heading from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, it is difficult for the player to see the game ball in the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming distracted by making it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the ball, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) controls the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom of the lower plate 322 that guide the game balls from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since it is difficult to see the game balls guided by guiding means such as the ball guiding part 322c and the buffer part 322d between the ball extracting hole 322a and the ball extracting hole 322a, if the ball extracting hole 322a is left open. , the game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are guided by the guiding means and are smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. It is possible to create an illusion that the game balls are being ejected below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and it is possible to allow the player to concentrate on the game and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see from the front more than half of the lower plate 322, including the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, etc. In addition, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, etc. are located at the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). In other words, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to go around to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front is smaller than that of the actual lower plate. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 compared to appearance.

In addition, when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game ball released into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is transferred to the lower plate ball supply port 323c on the bottom of the lower plate 322 and the lower plate ball. This is because the balls can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a and discharged to the lower part of the lower tray 322 (dollar box) by the guiding means such as the ball guide portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, which are located between the ball extraction hole 322a and the ball guide portion 322c, and the buffer portion 322d. , it is possible to prevent the game balls from circulating in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to reliably make the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322 difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of game balls in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming distracted and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are immediately removed by the ball guide portion 322c etc. without the player noticing. Since the game ball can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the player is given the illusion that the game ball is being discharged below the lower tray 322 (to the dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322. Can be done. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and it is possible to allow the player to concentrate on the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see from the front more than half of the storage area (storage area) of game balls in a plan view of the lower tray 322, the lower tray is visible from the front. 322, the actual lower tray 322 is more than twice the visible size, so it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of game balls, similar to the lower tray of a conventional pachinko machine.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the door frame 3 bulges forward in the lower part of the game area 5a of the game board 5 when viewed from the front, where a game in which game balls are accepted into the general prize opening 2001 etc. is played. Installation of a production operation unit for attaching a large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the dish unit cover 326 to the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. 326a, and a plate front lower decorative part 326c located below approximately the center in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting part 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be gouged rearward. Because of the shape, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a can appear to protrude significantly forward, and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) This allows the operation unit 400A) to stand out. Therefore, the large performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized manner in the position where the upper tray and the lower tray are visible side by side in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can see On the other hand, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from a conventional pachinko machine just by looking at it, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing. The lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the lower plate front decoration part 326c which is recessed rearward on both left and right outer sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part of the game balls is routed to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 (capacity of the lower tray 322) can be secured. There is no need to play the game while worrying about the lower tray 322 being full of game balls, the player can concentrate on the game, enjoy the game, and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since a part of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand into the lower tray 322 from the front, his fingertips are in the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of the plate unit base 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, etc. This makes it possible for the player to recognize through the sense of touch that a sufficient amount of game balls is stored, and when the game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, the amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 is Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the player, it is possible to give a feeling of satisfaction to the player, and it is possible to enjoy the game and suppress a decrease in interest. Furthermore, since the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower tray 322 are unlikely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322, the lower tray cover 340, etc., it provides the player with a feeling similar to that of the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort to players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to reassure the players and prevent them from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the lower tray 322 is formed to become wider toward the back (backward), a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored even if the front side is small. In other words, since the front end side portion of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made less noticeable on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open (lower plate front decoration part 326c). This makes it possible to relatively make the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) more conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to provide the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) while ensuring a sufficient storage amount of game balls in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to increase the appeal to players and to attract players. It is possible to have fun and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the side and upper part of the lower tray 322 that wraps around behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is covered with the lower tray cover 340, the player cannot enter the lower tray 322. This can prevent the player from getting injured by touching the inner surface of the tray unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) with the fingertips when the player puts his/her hand in. You can play games in a safe state. Further, the lower tray cover 340 can prevent game balls from entering (spilling) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326.

Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center of the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) cannot be operated from the player side. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 more appealing, which can be made more conspicuous and strongly attract players' attention, and the decoration by the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. This allows the player to enjoy the decorations and performances of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), thereby suppressing a decrease in player's interest.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 is equipped with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321 and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically so as to be openable and closable, it is different from the conventional pachinko machine. Since it has the same function as the lower tray 322, when players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines play games with this pachinko machine 1, they will not be confused about the function of the lower tray 322, and will be able to play the same way as before. The player can enjoy the game by allowing the player to concentrate on the game. In addition, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are respectively arranged at the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and The lower plate ball removal hole 322a is not visible from the player's side, making the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 neat and good-looking, and providing a highly appealing pachinko machine that can strongly attract the attention of players. It can be set as machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the tray unit 320 bulges forward under the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3. A door frame side performance display device 460 that can present a performance to the player is attached to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of At the same time, attach the inner operation button decorative member 432 (screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) that decorates the outside of the operation button, and also An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 with a diameter of about 15 cm and a center bulging in a direction away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) is attached, and the button lens 411 is attached to an outer peripheral edge thereof. A cylindrical button base 413 that includes a first button decoration part 411a, a second button decoration part 411b, and a button frame 412, and protrudes from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. Since the first button decoration part 411a, the button base 413, etc. are provided, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the door frame side third It is possible to reduce visibility of the outer edge, the inner side (rear side), etc. of the screen unit 470 of the second performance display device 460A, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the internal operation button decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Also, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 prevent the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from being removed. By increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, the outer edge and back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, so the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see. 470), it can be well hidden by the first button decoration part 411a, etc., thereby preventing deterioration of the appearance, while also allowing the large operation button with an outer diameter of approximately 15 cm to be used. 410 (button lens 411) can be realized without any problem. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be made larger, this pachinko machine 1 can stand out, and the player's attention is strongly increased. The pachinko machine 1 can be made attractive and highly appealing.

Furthermore, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) is provided which protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed diagonally, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and hide anything outside the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), and the operation The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges in the direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the area near the outer periphery of the button lens 411 The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, the forward and backward direction of the operation button 410). Since the player is inclined with respect to the plane (orthogonal to the plane), light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 ) can make it difficult to see the outer edge, the back side, etc. of the interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) of the operation button, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 becomes large, so that the operation button inner decoration member 432 disposed inside the operation button 410 and the door frame A door frame side effect display device that allows the side effect display device 460 (second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) to be made larger or easier to move, and allows the player to be entertained by using the inside of the operation button 410. 460 (second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) can be easily provided, and a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players can be realized.

Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decoration). This allows the player to easily select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

Moreover, in the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, since the button frame 412 is made opaque, the button It is possible to reliably hide the rear side of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), etc. from being seen through the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), and the operation The appearance of the button 410 and the like can be improved by reducing deterioration in appearance.

The button lens 411 also has an opaque button frame 412 extending inward from the outer circumferential edge to the inside with a predetermined width, and cooperates with the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b to Since it is possible to make the gap between the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) difficult to see from the side, the main body part 413a and the operation button inner decoration member 432 ( It becomes possible to increase the gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side. can be moved well.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the outer periphery has no directionality compared to a case where the button lens 411 has a polygonal shape, so that the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, it can be pressed and operated without any problem, and it is possible to reliably let the player enjoy the player participatory performance using the operation button 410, thereby suppressing a drop in interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, when a player participatory effect in which the player operates the operation button 410 is executed, it is possible to easily operate the operation button 410 without checking the position of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make it easier to touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in a player participatory production using the operation button 410, thereby entertaining the player and reducing interest. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since a door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided within the operation button 410, player's interest can be controlled by presenting effect images according to the gaming state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) inside the button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted. Not only can the effects be entertaining, but also the effect images and light emitting effects provided by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can prompt the player to operate the operation button 410. By having the players actively participate in the player-participation type presentation and having fun, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. Further, by executing the effect within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, thereby increasing expectations for the game and suppressing a drop in interest. Can be done.

Further, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (part inside the first button decoration part 411a). Therefore, players can immediately recognize that the operation buttons 410 of this pachinko machine 1 are clearly different from the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, and the system has high appeal to players. The pachinko machine 1 can be used as a pachinko machine 1, and the player's expectations for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) inside the operation button 410 can be increased. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but it is not limited to this, and the game machine can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effects as above can be achieved.

Further, in the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration part 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the invention is not limited to this. , the button lens 411 may not have the first button decoration part 411a formed thereon.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but the button frame 412 is not limited to this. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed all around the lens 411 at a portion corresponding to the button frame 412.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the second Although the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the second base unit 450) is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second display on the door frame side are shown. At least one may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround only a portion of the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The button base 413 may have a shape that follows the outer periphery of the button lens 411, or may have a shape that does not follow the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have decoration (planar decoration by pasting a sticker, printing, etc., or three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief) on at least the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Further, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Furthermore, when the button base 413 is made transparent, it is desirable to apply a light diffusion process such as a grain, a slit, or a prism to at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the lower plate 322 is recessed backward only from the left outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate is not limited to, but is recessed rearward from both left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and connected to each other at the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). 322, or it is recessed backward only from the right outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part wraps around to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). You may also choose to have one.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the shape of the portion of the front surface of the tray unit cover 326 where the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward (the lower tray front decorative portion 326c) (the shape of the front end of the lower tray 322) is changed to a rearwardly curved surface. Although an example of a concave shape is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be concave in the shape of a polygonal column or a polyhedron.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) was attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326, but the present invention is not limited to this. ``A device equipped with a rotating body with a decoration on its surface'', ``A device equipped with a decorative body with a decoration and a movable device that moves the decorative body'', ``A game machine with a rotating body that has a decoration on its surface'' "Those with decorations that are three-dimensional reproductions of characters, items, logos, scenes (dioramas), etc. that are in line with the concept of the game machine"; It is also possible to attach a member such as a unit or a panel with decorations such as "", etc., applied by stickers, printing, etc.". Further, the number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (the production operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not need to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is provided with a production operation unit mounting portion 326a that is open to the front for attaching the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). However, the present invention is not limited to, and may include a dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover part) that does not have an opening (performance operation unit attachment part 326a) for attaching the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). A configuration may be adopted in which a space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is formed behind the dish unit cover. Furthermore, decorations such as characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. that are in line with the concept of the gaming machine may be applied to the front of such a dish unit cover by stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, etc. desirable.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of game balls in a plan view of the lower tray 322 is controlled by the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) as a covering part. Although an example has been shown in which the covering is made difficult to see from the front, the present invention is not limited to this, and half or less of the storage area of game balls in the lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front, The entire plate 322 may be made difficult to see from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown as having an arc shape partially provided in the circumferential direction. However, the second button decoration part 411b and the frame side lens 417 may have an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the production operation unit 400 is a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered at the center. The present invention is not limited to this, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an oval shape) centered at the center.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the operation button internal decoration member 432 arranged on the rear side, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is shown to be always visible, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration including a variable light transmitting means that makes the rear side visible when the following is satisfied. Here, the variable light transmitting means includes ``a magic mirror that makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front and rear sides,'' and ``a device that becomes transparent when the power is turned on and off, such as a liquid crystal film.'' "It becomes invisible or opaque so that the rear side can be seen." Note that the front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

By providing at least one of the front member and the rear member with a variable light transmitting means, only the front member or the front member and the rear member are visible under normal conditions, Decorations of visible members can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, the rear part (the rear member or a member placed behind the rear member) that is invisible in the normal state becomes visible, and the front part becomes visible. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the member on the rear side of the rear member can display an overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player using the front member and the rear member, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and also making it possible to entertain the player. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

To be more specific, for example, if the front member is equipped with a variable light transmitting means such as a one-way mirror, under normal conditions, by darkening the rear side of the front member, only the decoration of the front member can be displayed. It can be visually recognized by the player. When the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened with light from a light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear side of the rear member passes through the front member. The members become visible, and the decoration in which the decorations of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap can be shown to the player.

Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member under normal conditions, so the decoration of the front member and the rear member can be The player can see the decorations on the surface of the player. Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side becomes visible through the rear member, and the front member and the rear Through the member, a member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character, etc.) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, if both the front member and the rear member are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a one-way mirror, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player under normal conditions, and the decoration of the front member and the When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member becomes visible through the front member. Decorations made with the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED). ) and the respective satisfaction conditions of the variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member are satisfied, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. can be shown to the player. As a result, by appropriately selecting the part to be brightened by the light from the light emitting part, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and the player can enjoy a variety of decorations.

In addition, in the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a one-way mirror, when the rear side is darkened, it looks like a mirror, so it is difficult to see the surface of the front member or the rear member. A glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means was explained as something like a one-way mirror, but even if it is something like a liquid crystal film, similar effects can be achieved. In addition, when using something like a liquid crystal film as a variable light transmission means, it is possible to transmit light even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so it is possible to If the rear side of the member can be made brighter (or decorated with light emitting light) by light from a light emitting part such as an LED, it is possible to show a wider variety of effects such as light emitting effects and decorative effects to the players. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, dispensing control board, and peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals that are input and output to the connection terminal board for the rental device such as game balls that relays the electrical connection with the display board, and FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram schematically showing the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram of the periphery of the VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal display control section.

As shown in FIG. 69, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that performs control related to the game including the payout of prize balls in addition to the process of generating a control power source (for example, +5V, etc.). , and a second control section SCG that performs effects related to the game progressed by the first control section MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment adopts a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 serves as the first control unit MCG. , a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be explained in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, and then the The second control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be explained.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various control programs and various commands such as a main control program that is executed after the game is executed and controls gaming operations, and a RAM that temporarily stores data. A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from a detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c to output various signals to an external board, etc., and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to drive various solenoids. , and a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of a predetermined voltage power outage or instantaneous power outage.

The main control MPU 1310a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), etc. The watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in main control 1310af") for monitoring its operation (system) and functions for preventing fraud are also built in.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This nonvolatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code that is given a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. This ID code once assigned is stored in a non-volatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also includes a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in A hard random number circuit 1310an) is built-in. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range from 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value is preset), The predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first uses a clock signal ( Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. Once this is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a selects the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an as a jackpot. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information inputted with detection signals from various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 1310b, information based on detection signals from various detection switches inputted to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are It is configured as a circuit that outputs from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc. are input to its various input terminals. A main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that has been reset, and a main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb is not provided with a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. It consists of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function resets information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. by the main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that no signals based on the above are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured so that the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that signals based on the data are output from its various output terminals.

A first starting port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning hole 2001 and a signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. has been entered. In addition, a gate sensor 4003 that detects game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 60, a count sensor 4005 that detects game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 2005, and a back unit 3000 shown in A detection signal from the attached magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is sent to a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signals from each of these switches. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, By outputting a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca from the output terminal of , output a drive signal to the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reservation number display 1404, the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407. do.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information related to the game (game information) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca. By outputting various information related to games (gaming information) to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, A signal (power outage clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e.

Note that in this embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first starting port sensor 4002, second starting port sensor 4004, gate sensor 4003, and count sensor 4005; A contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch is used for the general winning a prize opening sensor 4020, 4020. This is because the game balls frequently enter the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with long lifespans are used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a jackpot game state advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and game balls frequently enter the ball, so that the count sensor 4005 frequently detects game balls. For this reason, a proximity switch with a long life is used for the count sensor 4005 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning holes 2001 and 2201 where game balls do not enter frequently, detection by the general winning hole sensors 4020 and 4020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020.

The main control MPU 1310a also controls the payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function by transmitting various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of its predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function. Various commands are sent to the board 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, and inputs the input from the main control input circuit 1310b to its predetermined serial input port. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port as a main control output with a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function from the output terminal of its predetermined serial output port. , various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured with a main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to a main control built-in RAM, a main serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I/O ports, etc. connects a bus 1310ah. (See FIG. 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae is for transmitting various commands as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management section 1310aec, etc. (Fig. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and starts to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. Main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to serial management section 1310aec.

Note that the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") that serves as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 75). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is generated by an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951, which will be described later, is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on. is output from the payout control board 951 and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and with this as a trigger, it is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, and an operation switch 954 that also serves various functions, as shown in FIG. and an error LED display 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1. The operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, detects the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on the detection signal output when operated. .) outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the memory.

[7-2-1. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payouts controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the payout of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on. Detection from the payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various control programs including a payout control program that controls operations, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 952b into which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. The payout control MPU 952a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has a built-in watchdog timer to monitor its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program transmits various information regarding games (gaming information) and various commands regarding payouts from the main control board 1310 through the payout control input circuit 952b in a serial format as a main payout serial data reception signal. to receive serial data. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame status 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, and operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Create a 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) based on the signal (detection signal), and send these error generation commands and error cancellation navigation commands to the payer as serial data. The signal is output as serial data to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmitting means). In addition, this payout control program executes the payout control program after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated with the operation of the operation switch 954, and output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Moreover, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this dispensing control program also executes the door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, since the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals of the payout control input circuit 952b is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, the various signals based on the information are It is configured as a circuit that outputs from an output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type with an emitter terminal connected to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc. are input to its various input terminals. A payout control output circuit with a reset function 952ca that has a reset function and is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that has been reset, and a payout control output circuit without a reset function 952cb that is not provided with a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. It consists of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit into which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. by the payout control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that no signals based on the above are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured so that the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. The circuit is configured such that signals based on the data are output from its various output terminals.

A ball outage detection sensor 827 that detects out of game balls in the supply path of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 that detects game balls released from the payout ports 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via a payout control input circuit 952b. Note that for the sake of explanation below, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Furthermore, the detection signals from the door frame release switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch 619 that detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to the dispensing control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a.

Further, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in a serial data format at the input terminal of its serial input port, and receives operation signals (detected) from the operation switch 954. signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port as a payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

The payout control MPU 952a also controls payout control without a reset function by transmitting various commands for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function from the output terminal of its serial output port. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function from the output terminal of its predetermined output port. A drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a drive signal is outputted from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the status of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on an error LED indicator from the output terminal of a predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for display on the error LED display 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the error LED display 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and When the number "1" is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it is notified that there are no game balls in the supply path of the dispensing device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is in play (specifically Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotating body and the game ball engage with each other near the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult for the payout rotating body to rotate. When the number “3” is displayed, it indicates a “dispensing detection sensor error” (specifically, a malfunction has occurred in the dispensing detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 842). When the number "5" is displayed, it indicates a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279). When the number "7" is displayed, it indicates that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is made at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number "9" is displayed, it indicates that the game ball is in stock (with prize ball stock (unpaid)) (specifically, game balls that have not yet been paid out). The number of pitches has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The number of game balls actually put out is output from the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information regarding the game (gaming information) from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (constructed with built-in infrared LEDs and photo ICs), and is connected to the game hall (hall) via these plurality of photocouplers. ) The number of game balls, etc., and various information (game information, error details regarding the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that an error has occurred) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in the hall computer.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and if an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1, the hall computer The computer is designed not to malfunction or break down, and the pachinko machine 1 is connected to the main control board 1310 for playing the game and the payout control board 951 for controlling payouts etc. from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1. It is designed to prevent malfunctions or failures due to abnormal voltage being applied. The hall computer monitors the games of the players by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The game ball rental request signal from the ball rental button 328 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 329 are first sent to the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining balance on the ball rental/return display section 330. The signal is output to the ball rental device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball rental and return display section 330. Further, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental/return display section 330 receives the voltage supplied from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. ing.

Note that the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 is equipped with a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. There is. This capacitor BC1 allows the payout control MPU 952a to store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) during power cutoff processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is such that when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on, the operation signal is sent to a predetermined input of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and using this as a trigger, the payout control MPU 952a clears the information from the payout control built-in RAM. It is now completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the connection terminal board for rental equipment such as game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control section 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be explained based on FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, but also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. It also relays electrical connections between the boards of , the CR unit 6 and the connection terminal board 869 for rental equipment such as game balls are electrically connected, the terminal board 869 for rental equipment such as game balls etc. and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay terminal board 869 is electrically connected. The terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay The terminal board 880 and the board, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). Further, AC 24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V using a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) and outputs it together with the ground LG. , is supplied to the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and is supplied to the frequency display board 365 through the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. .

The frequency display board 365 has a ball rental button 328, which is a push button switch, mounted on its component surface at a position corresponding to the ball rental button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball rental unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball rental/return display section 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining rental display section 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game player. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 via a terminal board 869.

The ball rental/return display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged in a row, and uses a so-called dynamic lighting method in which one segment indicator of these three digits is sequentially driven one by one. The lighting of the digit segment display is controlled. Through such lighting control, the ball rental/return display section 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental and return display section 330 receives digit signals DG0 to DG2 (total of 3 signals) for specifying a 1-digit segment display among the 3-digit segment display, and the specified 1-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (total of 7 signals) for specifying the content to be displayed by lighting are connected from the CR unit 6 to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input through the board 880, the one-digit segment display sequentially lights up according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment display The content of the light emitted from the device can be visually confirmed through the lending remaining display section 363.

Note that a CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental/return display section 330. A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to this CR unit lamp 365d via a game ball etc. rental device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball rental available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a terminal board 869 for connecting a game ball rental device via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 using a built-in voltage generation circuit, and when the ball rental button 328 and return button 329 are enabled and the ball rental is possible. controls the logic of the ball rental available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the rental remaining display section 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental/return display section 330 through a current limiting resistor mounted on a terminal board 869 for connecting a game ball rental device.

In the CR unit 6, when the ball rental button 328 is pressed, the ball rental operation signal TDS from the ball rental button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. When input, the ball lending request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 sends a single payout operation start request signal to payout a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. BRQ is outputted to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 and informing that a payout operation for paying out rented balls is possible or impossible, is sent to the connection terminal board for the rental device such as game balls. 869, and output to the CR unit 6. Note that, for example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that when the ball rental button 328 is pressed, game balls worth 200 yen are paid out, one payout operation is required. This is done twice in a row, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out in succession, and a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen are paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is inputted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores a remaining amount after subtracting an amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly explained. The power supply board 931 includes a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment, and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. , a firing control section 953 that performs firing control using the firing solenoid 682 of the batted ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG. 1.

[7-3-1. Power supply control section]
The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a that rectifies 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment when the power switch 934 is operated, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various types of direct current for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various boards. A power generation circuit 935d that generates a power source is provided.

[7-3-2. Launch control section]
The firing control section 953, which performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255, mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launching strength) of firing the game ball toward the gaming area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, A detection signal from a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching the button, and a single button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of a game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the handlebar relay terminal board 315 is inputted via the handle relay terminal board 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal is input to the firing control circuit 953a via the payout control board 951. .

The firing control circuit 953a controls the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the gaming area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and outputting the adjusted drive current to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, The game ball received by the ball sending member is controlled to be sent to the ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with an effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, a game board side effect display device 1600, and the door. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460 and controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and calendar information specifying the year, month, day, and time. Rotate the knob to control the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information that specifies seconds, and the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573. A volume adjustment volume 1510a that can be adjusted by operation is provided.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control section]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs production control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the process that is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power is turned on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control performance operations, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control section 1512, which will be described later. Various information that continues beyond the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed every time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, light emission modes of various LEDs, etc.) peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data that defines A peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores peripheral control SRAM 1511d (information for managing production flags, etc.) and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. ).

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can only retain the stored contents long enough for the power to be immediately restored after an instantaneous power outage, and can only be stored in a state where the power is cut off for a long time (in the event of a long power outage) ), the contents are lost, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor") provided on the power supply board 931 (not shown). This allows the stored contents to be retained for about 50 hours. By providing an SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is no longer supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. It can no longer be held and loses its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and when this timer times out, it is reset by hardware. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when it does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to clear the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer times up). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period of time, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is required.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. Game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. provided on the lamp is sent from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data is sent to the drive board 4170 and is used to output drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. Door side motor drive for transmitting a drive signal from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit or outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 Data is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882, Peripheral control output of door side light emission data from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board in 3. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation section 401 provided in the production operation unit 400, and a detection signal from a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation section 405. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized production operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for detecting the production operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized movable object detection data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and is input from the serial transmission circuit on the gaming board side to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in peripheral control"), and uses the built-in peripheral control WDT and the external peripheral control WDT 1511e together to prevent its own system from going out of control. We are diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be explained. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (direct memory access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, etc.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to and from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while also reading and writing various data from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, Various data are read and written to and from peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading various data into the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and peripheral control various parallel I/O ports. DMA0 ~It has four channels called DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab storage device built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, and peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices to perform data transfer independently without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. While reading and writing to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and It reads from and writes to input/output devices such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac also includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and peripheral control various serial I/Os built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. O port 1511ae, WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and input/output devices such as peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to transfer data independently, data is read and written to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h. For input/output devices such as serial I/O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h, and controls the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control Various devices including storage devices such as SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converters 1511ak and other input/output devices. This is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between the two.

The various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae include a serial I/O port for a lamp drive board, a serial I/O port for a motor drive board, a serial I/O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. A serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for obtaining information on the production operation unit.

The watchdog timer with built-in peripheral control (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer times out, it resets the hardware. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, if it does not output a clear signal to clear the timer within a certain period of time (until the timer times up) to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets the watchdog timer. It will take a while. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that no reset is required.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag not only output various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emitting latch signal, but also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a serial transmission circuit on the game board (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial It outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and serves as a confirmation lamp to notify that the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag are directly electrically connected, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures regarding the lighting control of LEDs, which is important in terms of gaming. Note that the lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and other LEDs other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotational position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the sound is muted, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. Music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to be described later) so that the volume is set at the board volume 0 to 6. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob.

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds are used to notify the hall staff of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, as well as content related to game production. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more impressive, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the game will shift to an advantageous game state.) The notification sound is also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the system is such that the notification sound and notification sound are played completely independently of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and the sound can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume. The volume can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to be described later) using a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into seven levels, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if, for example, a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 can be reproduced. Although the sound is low, the notification sound set at a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is committing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of a player. In addition, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so that it does not interfere with the music or sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the volume of the playback may be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, and there is a possibility of shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce things that are expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control section 1511, the liquid crystal display control section 1512, the RTC control section 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data that generates screens to be drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data that generates the light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sounds and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. has been done. The schedule data for generating a light emission mode is configured by chronologically arranging light emission data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the output channel number of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. A track number is defined for instructing which track among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Note that some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, while others are copied to the various control program copy area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on, etc. There are some that are read out and executed. In addition, some of the various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, while others are stored in various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. There are some items that are copied and read out.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b contains, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. Includes brightness correction program. This brightness correction program is for correcting the decrease in brightness of the game board side performance display device 1600 due to aging when the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is of an LED type. , acquires the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and uses the acquired brightness setting information based on the correction information. Correct it. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the current brightness. It includes the set brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, and, for example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the power was first turned on to the game board side effect display device 1600, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness is When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75%, the brightness is set to 80% by adding 5%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the backlight is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the game board side effect display device When turning on the backlight of 1600, the game board is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is 10%, which is the acquired correction information, added to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup memory that specifically stores information to be backed up among various types of information updated by executing various control programs. A managed work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store copies of various information stored in the backup managed work area 1511ca, and peripheral control ROM 1511b. The various control program copy area 1511cd exclusively stores copies of the various control programs stored in the program, and the copies of various data, control data, schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. A various control data copy area 1511ce that is exclusively stored, and a backup unmanaged work area 1511cf that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs but is not subject to backup. is provided.

Note that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power outage or power outage), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. Regarding the managed work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the power-on status command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) starts the RAM clear effect. and the game state (for example, it instructs the start of the performance when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca contains performance information (1fr ) is stored exclusively as a backup target, and the effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored exclusively as a target. Here, to briefly explain the names Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information that is updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as "Bank0". It means that it has a size. "(1fr)" means that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a Since the V-blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which indicates that it is in a state where it can accept screen data from Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each time, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" are respectively appended (direction information (1fr) and the performance described below). The same meaning is used for backup information (1fr). "(1ms)" means "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, as described later. and "Bank4" (the same meaning is used for presentation information (1 ms) and presentation backup information (1 ms), which will be described later).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. etc. are provided. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa contains game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. is a storage area where is set, and the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side contains lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. This is a storage area where the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting signals is set, and the received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands sent from the main control board 1310 and stores the received various commands. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae is is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read out and set, while various schedule data are directly read out from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. There are some that are set.

Bank0 (1ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, a performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf contains door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag contains data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. This is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai stores detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400. Various information obtained based on the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the press operation unit 405 (for example, a dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400) This is a storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the press operation unit 405, etc.) is set, and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak is a storage area in which information about the rotation (rotation direction) of the operation unit 401 and operation history information of the press operation unit 405 is set. When the control board 1510 receives the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 output the LOCKN signal to notify that fact. This is a storage area in which various information obtained about the frequency of malfunctions and the state of occurrence of malfunctions during connection with the effect display driving board 4450 is set.

Note that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr), the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, and the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor of Bank0 (1ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. , when the next peripheral control unit steady state processing is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady state processing is performed. Every time the process is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady processing is executed, the processing is proceeded based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab stores the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. - When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side. Each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Ru. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed and, for example, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, Processing is now performed based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side when the previous peripheral control unit steady process was executed. It has become.

When the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf stores the door data in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. - DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is set in the first area and second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, and for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT that was set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, and for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process was executed. It looks like this.

Next, a description will be given of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, which exclusively store copies of production information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). , the production information (1ms) is copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and is stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area. is, as production backup information (1ms), sent by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, a total of two pairs are managed as one page, with Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is copied every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The page is copied at high speed to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether the contents of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) match.

In addition, in the backup second area 1511cc, a total of two pairs are managed as one page, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is copied every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by checking whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb is configured to have two pairs in total, including Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs: Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in the peripheral control unit every frame (1 frame) as effect backup information (1fr). Every time regular processing is executed, the content is copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and is stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area. The performance information (1ms) is stored as the performance backup information (1ms) in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed copying, but the program for executing high-speed copying by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1511ac is shared. That is, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed using a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs; A first backup area 1511db and a second backup area 1511dc are provided to exclusively store copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (including when power is restored due to instantaneous power failure or power outage). is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, for instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on). ), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-described point in which the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Furthermore, if the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation section 401 and press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of jackpot game state) ), while the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. In this respect as well, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management target work area 1511da stores performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of jackpot gaming states and information for managing special performance flags). It consists of Bank 0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information (information, etc.) as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the name Bank0 (SRAM), as mentioned above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information that is updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as "Bank0". It means that it has a size. "(SRAM)" is "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is backed up. , and "Bank4" (the same meaning is used for performance information (SRAM) and performance backup information (SRAM) to be described later).

Next, a description will be given of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store copies of production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and each pair as one page. The production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is stored as production backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame. Then, it is copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, one pair includes Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM), and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame. The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, one pair includes Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame. The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this pair as one page, and the backup second area 1511db is an area for managing this pair as one page. 1511dc is an area where Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) form a pair, and this pair is managed as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. LCD display control section]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawings of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls the sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As such, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source"), and the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is A VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a with a built-in sound source that performs control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various types of music, sound effects, etc. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b that stores sound data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is sent to the effect display drive board 4450 which is placed near the bottom of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. A differential circuit 1512e that differentiates LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d, a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is input. A forced switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the signal, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d; It is equipped with This liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b contains, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (ring-shaped display object), and sprite data used for displaying screens and images, which will be described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data to be used for displaying at least one selected display object to be described later, tone adjustment background image data to be used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later, and volume adjustment icon data to be described later. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, the main body frame back image data used to display the main body frame back image that allows the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player's perspective, and the display of the service mode screen. Service mode screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used to display a suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the press operation section 405 (operation section) of the performance operation unit 400.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first screen data of the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting it from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, when a V blank signal, which will be described later, is input, the first screen data is copied according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next screen data following is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, updates the screen data arranged in chronological order in the screen generation schedule data every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output one by one to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source.

Additionally, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The sound command data at the beginning of the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the surroundings. After extracting various control data from the copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the input of the V blank signal triggers the start of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the sound command data is output one by one to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a starting from the first sound command data.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the built-in sound source described above, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and based on this input screen data, as shown in FIG. Extract side character data and upper plate side character data to create sprite data and generate drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM") for this purpose. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 to the door frame side effect display device 460. The drawing data is sent from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay. The terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display that is placed near the bottom of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are respectively attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from channel CH2 is The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, so that it can be connected from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the route is much longer than that for channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to the influence of noise. Therefore, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d uses THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication method called "Registered Trademark", the system is not easily affected by noise.

Channel CH1 is LVDS (Low Voltage Differential
Channel CH2 uses a differential interface based on a serial method called "Signaling", whereas channel CH2 uses an interface based on a parallel method. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side production transmitter IC4610d, and is stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450. The various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals by the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs one screen worth of screen data (one frame worth) to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Based on this input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data for one screen (1 of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1. Image data for the effect display device 460 is transmitted from the channel CH2 to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. In other words, "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is stored in the built-in VRAM. This refers to the data to be generated above.

In addition, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also outputs image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Transmission) Then, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Furthermore, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the VDP with built-in sound source 1512a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method in which drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

Furthermore, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source outputs the music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as music and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects is incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and is used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is installed, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source have production sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data and its volume, the sound data and volume of the notification sound that is used to notify the hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted. Includes subvolume values. Specifically, for the performance sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the knob of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating a dial operation section 401 or a press operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode to be described later.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is In fact, it is amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified performance sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value and is output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used among multiple tracks, and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used. The board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is adjusted to the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. This amplified performance sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, and for the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, A maximum volume that is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, which is set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, is synthesized, The volume of this synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. .

Here, we will briefly explain the control for playing a notification sound in order to notify the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or any fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 when the performance sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. To explain this, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, and the notification The sound data of the track in which the sound is embedded and the sub-volume value where the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually set at the bottom. It is amplified to a master volume value that corresponds to the sound volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified performance sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, only the maximum volume notification sound is actually heard from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is progressing according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after this predetermined period has elapsed, the sound that has been forcibly set to mute is generated. The volume of the production sound that is progressing according to the production schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the volume of the production sound is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a). If the adjustment is made by switching to the setting mode by operating the operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the sound is output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It's flowing.

In this way, when the production sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when a notification sound is played to notify the hall clerk of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound that has been muted is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound continues after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. When the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start playing again from the point where the notification sound started, but continues according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the notification sound started playing. The flow will start again from where it left off.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores game board side character data for drawing on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and data for drawing on the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and announcement sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, it outputs the audio data on the right side as serial data using a differential method in which it becomes a plus signal and a minus signal, and sends it to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a relay around the frame. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and is also sent to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as serial data of a differential method that makes the left audio data a plus signal and a minus signal. , the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. matching various performances are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

Note that the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data between the boards ranging from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data using a differential method on both the left and right sides, so that, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data consists of three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , a green video signal, and a blue video signal each consist of 8 bits, a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, 18 bits in total, so the upper 6 bits of each video signal are the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the lower two bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower two bits containing weak color information are invalidated even though they are output from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source.

Three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, which are drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. and are input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d sends three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. The three synchronizing signals, the signal and the clock signal, are serialized into serial signals (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd., and can be transmitted using only one differential pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so the path from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is Although the wiring length required for (the first path) is short, the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (the Since the length of the wiring required for the second route is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the first route, it becomes extremely susceptible to the influence of noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. On the closed side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 provided in the door frame 3, etc., on the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to run various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the dispensing device 830, the game balls put out by the dispensing device 830 can be guided to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320. A full tank branching unit 770 is arranged which can branch and guide the game balls put out to the lower tray 322 side when the tank is full.
Further, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, there is arranged a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5, which is a unit made up of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 6, etc., which are supplied with power from the pachinko island equipment. In this way, the various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are routed near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power source board 931, etc. In addition to the noise caused by the drive of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game balls and the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. is in an environment where it is subject to noise, etc.

Therefore, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a By adopting a differential communication system called ``V-by-One (registered trademark)'', the system is not easily affected by noise. In this embodiment, a transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and a receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side effects (described later) provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As mentioned above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential 1-pair cable consists of two wires. are not just parallel lines, but twisted pair cables. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case will be briefly described in which a parallel wire is used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects a transmitter and a receiver. For channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than channel CH1 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, THine Electronics has developed a transmitter IC1512d for the door frame side performance provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Even if a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by Co., Ltd. is used to make it less susceptible to noise, this kind of hardware configuration alone will not be able to prevent electrostatic discharge from the game balls. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise or noise that enters the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the effect display is stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state. , the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered data that is different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is displayed as a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem in that a certain image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is.

Therefore, in this embodiment, for channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the side of the door frame provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is The production transmitter IC1512d uses a differential communication method called ``V-by-One (registered trademark)'' by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to create a mechanism that is less susceptible to the effects of noise, and in addition to this hardware configuration. Therefore, even if differential serial data is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) that noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and receiver. Adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data in the twisted pair cable is affected by noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls, noise intruding into the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the image generated by the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control section 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent an image such as a sandstorm from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 such that it is impossible to recognize the image at all. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play due to the influence of noise.

In addition, in this embodiment, a transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side effects, which will be described later, provided in an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. A frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between and, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not constructed integrally, but are assembled separately, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, electrically connect various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. This makes it possible to electrically connect various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. With this configuration, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 after opening the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 and removing various wirings. If the defect that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, replace the defective door frame 3 with another door frame 3' to the main frame 4, and replace the door frame 3 with another door frame 3'. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various wirings from various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3' side can be connected electrically. The substrate can be electrically connected to the substrate.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the door frame side presentation transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to this hardware configuration, even if serial data using the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, the receiving side can cancel (remove) that noise. ) was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable to electrically connect the transmitter and receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power wiring and wiring for transmitting various other signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 have, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed together. For this reason, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively, at a predetermined distance apart from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns. The route from the transmitter to the receiver traverses multiple relay terminal boards, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, so the video transmission terminals formed on these multiple relay terminal boards are Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal that transmits serial data using the differential method sent by the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. occurs. Therefore, in this embodiment, the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these plurality of relay terminal boards are subjected to impedance matching.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay The terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and wiring for transmitting various other signals are electrically connected by harnesses. However, one wire of the twisted pair cable is red and the other wire is gray, and the wire that supplies power is red and several other wires of the harness are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d is sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is configured to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 that is housed. This forced switching circuit 1512f receives LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. is input into a differential circuit 1512e after being differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. This differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data includes the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, and the period during which the game board side performance display device 1600 displays a demonstration while waiting for a customer. During the period, a transmitter IC 1512d for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a receiver ICSDIC0 for the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described later, are installed. , that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so as to transmit these two signals. The circuit is configured such that the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the conversion circuit 1512e. has been done. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e. When the two differential signals of the positive signal and the negative signal are not input, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, so the door frame side effect transmitter A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays a startup screen on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, and performs a demonstration using the game board side performance display device 1600 while waiting for a customer. During the period, LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which will be described later, the effect display drive board 4450 displays various serialized signals. It mainly consists of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it sends a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to generate an image to convey that fact and outputs it to the game board side performance display device 1600. The information is displayed on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notified.

Furthermore, when the door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal, which will be described later, is sent to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input to the tray unit of the door frame 3. On the other hand, if the LOCKN signal is not input, it can be determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, ``A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store staff.") is output to the game board effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound to that effect (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. ”) is outputted to the audio data transmitting IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, thereby producing a notification sound from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, notification can be made using the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker etc. provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control section]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured with an RTC 4165a as its center. This RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (Pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently from the peripheral control board 1510 (Pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and maintain calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information. Based on this, the effects can be played out on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Examples of such effects include, for example, if it is December 25th, a Christmas tree or reindeer screen will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or if it is New Year's Eve, a new year countdown will be displayed. For example, the screen to be executed may be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

In addition, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of an LED type. There is. If the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is of an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600, in a range from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 in 5% increments, and It includes the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Additionally, in addition to calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second when it was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls ON/OFF or only ON of the backlight when cold cathode tube type backlights are installed in the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. It is supposed to be done.

Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information, is set on the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. On the manufacturing line, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, input date and time information is inputted on the manufacturing line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on. The manufacturing date and time are set as month, day, hour, minute and second.

In this way, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, input date and time information, etc. , it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability).

Also, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the brightness setting information etc. stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time. , it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to a setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, if you operate the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is being performed, the setting mode will be activated. The screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side production display device 1600 can be set as desired. You can adjust the brightness to The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In addition, in the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-mentioned brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type, the game board side effect is adjusted. A decrease in brightness due to aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, and inputs calendar information and time specifying the year, month, and day. The current date and time is determined by acquiring time information that specifies minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information including the brightness adjustment information for the game board and the currently set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is acquired. This acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time, In addition to acquiring the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% that is the correction information obtained for the brightness. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. , when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 85%, which is 10%, which is the acquired correction information, added to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is the same.

Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or by using the peripheral information described later. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process The current date and time may be specified by acquiring the current time information set in the time information storage section and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a resistance value that can be varied by rotating the knob, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak adjusts the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the sound is muted, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds to notify the hall staff of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity with respect to the pachinko machine 1, and game effects. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more impressive, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the game will shift to an advantageous gaming state.) etc.) is also played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, but the system is such that the notification sound and announcement sound are played completely independently of the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and are muted. It is possible to adjust the volume from the maximum volume to the maximum volume by controlling the liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) using a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into seven levels, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if, for example, a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 can be reproduced. Although the sound is low, the notification sound set at a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is committing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of a player.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so that it does not interfere with the music or sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the volume of the playback may be increased to make the screens displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful, or to provide an advantageous effect for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a gaming state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation section 401 of the production operation unit 400 and By operating the press operation unit 405, the user can enter a setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, if you operate the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is being performed, the setting mode will be activated. The screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 according to this setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and applies the voltage to this converted value. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased. There is. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which sound data of production sounds such as music and sound effects is incorporated, among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. However, it is not reflected in the volume adjustment of the above-mentioned notification sound or notification sound.

As described above, in this embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation section 401 of the production operation unit 400 or the press operation section 405 There are two ways to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. In this case, the person who can rotate the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is the clerk at the hall. However, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk may feel too low for the player, making it difficult to hear the music or sound effects, or may feel too loud for the player, making the music or sound effects too loud. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, within a predetermined period of time, the dial operation section 401 and the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 may be operated, or the demonstration using the game board side performance display device 1600 may be performed while waiting for a customer. If you operate the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 during the period in which the game is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, By operating the dial operation section 401 and press operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 according to this setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. This allows the player to adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume, so if the player feels that the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is too low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effects, the player can use the production operation unit 400 You can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or press operation unit 405. If you feel that the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too loud and the music or sound effects are too loud, you can use the production operation unit The volume can be lowered to a desired level by operating the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of 400.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if the pachinko machine 1 continues to be in a state where no games are played for a predetermined period of time, enters a customer waiting state, and the demonstration by the game board side performance display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , the volume adjusted last time by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 while playing the game is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. As a result, if a player who played the game while sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted volume is too low and has difficulty hearing the music and sound effects, the player who played the game while sitting in the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time A player who plays a game can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation section 401 or press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400. If a player who has been playing the game while seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1 feels that the adjusted volume is too loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who plays the game while seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1 may adjust the dial operation section 401 of the production operation unit 400 The volume can be lowered to a desired level by operating the press operation section 405.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be explained, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be explained. Note that the ground (GND) of the various boards and the ground (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931, and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 931, and the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on.

The power supply board 931 includes a power supply control section 935 and a firing control section 953, as shown in FIG. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment, supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and performs firing control. The section 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 682 of the batted ball firing device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control section 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied via the power supply board 931 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectifier circuit 935a rectifies 24 volts of alternating current (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. This power factor improvement circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power, creates +37V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+37V"), and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes the ripple of the supplied +37V, smoothes the +37V, and supplies the smoothed +37V to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the firing control section 953, respectively.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The firing control circuit 953a of the firing control unit 953 uses the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source to drive the game ball to the game area 5a shown in FIG. Control is performed to adjust the drive current for launching (shooting) the ball toward the ball and output it to the firing solenoid 682, while outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250. The sending member receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and the ball sending member performs control to send the received game ball to the batted ball firing device 650 side.

The power generation circuit 935d generates DC +5V (DC+5V, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c. +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is generated and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. A power supply system to which +5V is applied and supplied is a +5V power supply line, a power supply system to which +12V is applied and supplied is a +12V power supply line, and a power supply system to which +24V is applied and supplied is a +24V power supply line.

+5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951, as will be described later. The +5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This +5V generation circuit 1310g generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from +12V from the payout control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power terminal of the RAM with built-in main control via the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 on the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control on the payout control board 951, and It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. In other words, the +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and also connects the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM in the forward direction through the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1. Current flows towards the positive terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 receives +5V by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is transferred to the payout control board 951 and then returned from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 to the power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the memory contents are retained by supplying payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0 and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. Current is flowing towards it. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V and charged by the electrical connection method in which +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. It is now possible to do so. As a result, the +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V. When it runs out, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, so a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and does not flow, and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power terminal of the main control built-in RAM, so that the stored contents are retained. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control built-in RAM is constituted by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltages supplied to each control board etc. will be explained, and then the voltages mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board will be explained.

Three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931, are supplied to the payout control board 951 as shown in FIG. Two types of voltages, +24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Furthermore, three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and are also supplied to the peripheral area via this frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 76(a). 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, flashing signals, and gradation lighting signals to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, flashing signals, and gradation lighting signals to various decorative boards of the game board 5. A drive signal is output to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the panel 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates 3.3V DC (+3.3V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600. Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, the three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a +9V generation circuit 194a that generates +9V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. In addition to the +9V generated by the +9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to various decorative boards of the door frame 3.

Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components configuring the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and also to the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y and the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to a payout control MPU 952a and the like. This delivery control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931, and removes noise from this +5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, this +5V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal conveying the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). It is. The hall computer monitors the games of the players by ascertaining the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is not used in the payout control board 951 and is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like. The +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied is a +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the +5V power line created by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as shown in FIG. The +5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and also to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. +12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and +24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors signs of a power outage or instantaneous power outage of these +12V and +24V. When the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a +12V or +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a. The power outage notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Further, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power outage warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in FIG. 76(b). At the same time, the signals are inputted to the door frame decoration board and the like via this frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In the present embodiment, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to two power lines, a +12V power line and a +24V power line, thereby applying power to one of the +12V power line and the +24V power line. Compared to the case of monitoring the applied voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp signs of a power outage such as a power outage or momentary power outage.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing the power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a diagram. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be explained, followed by the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU created on the main control board 1310. Various input/output signals to and communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control board 1310, which are shown in FIGS. 69 and 75. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as peripheral circuits, as shown in FIG. )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
The main control filter circuit 1310h, as shown in FIG. 77, mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has its No. 1 terminal applied with +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g, its No. 2 terminal is grounded (GND), and the noise component is removed from its No. 3 terminal. +5V is being output. One end of the +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC0, so that ripples (alternating current components superimposed on the voltage) are first removed. smoothed.

The +5V output from the No. 3 terminal is electrically connected to the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). By connecting it to , ripples are further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. Note that when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is transferred to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. +5V is applied over a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the voltage.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the capacitor MC4 is connected to the ground (GND) at one end. electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of this RAM with built-in main control is connected via the resistor MR0 to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is also applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. The voltage is applied to the positive terminal of . As a result, as described above, the +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. If the circuit 1310g is unable to generate +5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow, and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control, so that the stored contents are retained.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
+5V, whose noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. It is now possible to do so. Specifically, when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (4.25V, for example), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1, and one end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripples are removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is output to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. Note that the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal has ripples removed and smoothed. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. Further, this smoothed +5V is applied not only to the VDD terminal but also to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is the output terminal, by applying +5V to each of these terminals A, B, C, and ST.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the grounding terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is connected to the ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the frequency-divided wave of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b receives detection from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to signals, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from an operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration into which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit into which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit where the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 controls the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the MPU 1310a, or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and error cancellation after power-on (after the period for functioning as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on). It has the ability to do this. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling an error that the payout control board 951 has, if an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power-on, the main control board 1310 It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and processing to clear the main control built-in RAM is performed.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic signal from the payout control board 951 is input to the main control board 1310. An operation signal in which the input signal becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed explanation of this point will be given later).

As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on is a pull-up line whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR3 but also to the other end of a resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (Non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type circuit whose emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is configured as an open collector output type circuit whose emitter terminal is grounded (GND). The line is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW and is input. When the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of resistors MR3, MR4, and transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by an operation signal from operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a must not instruct to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 inputted to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal, which is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and whose logic becomes HI, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, turning on the transistor MTR0 and switching it on. The circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I judge that.

Note that the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, the voltage is higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage, in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The voltage +12V is used to increase the reliability of the signal. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are pulled to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, count sensor 4005, general winning hole sensor 4020, and gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor, similar to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages, +12V and +24V, from a power supply board 931 via a payout control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors +12V and +24V power outages or signs of instantaneous power outages, and when it detects signs of power outages or instantaneous power outages, it sends a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a as well as to the payout control board. It outputs to the payout control MPU 952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will first be described, followed by the monitoring of +24V power failures or momentary power failures, the monitoring of +12V power failures or momentary power failures, and the output of a power failure notice signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495V is set) which becomes a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. AC components) are removed and smoothed. Note that the A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator MIC21 is equipped with two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the +24V monitoring voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B) is used to compare the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. , is used to compare the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V and the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the No. 2 terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is , ripples are removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V power outage or momentary power outage monitoring]
As described above, the +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage is monitored by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR21, one end of which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor MR21, which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22, which is grounded to the ground (GND); and the other end of the capacitor MC23, which is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR21 and MR22, and whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V by the resistance ratio of resistors MR21 and MR22, and is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC23. . The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that when there is a power outage or momentary power outage of +24V, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24 which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is increased to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is lower than the ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V power outage or momentary power outage monitoring]
As described above, the +12V power outage or instantaneous power outage is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the No. 5 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR24, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor MR24, which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 and the other end of the resistor MR25 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor MC25 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR24 and MR25, and one end of the capacitor MC25 is grounded to the ground (GND). are electrically connected. The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V by the resistance ratio of resistors MR24 and MR25, and is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC25. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are such that when there is a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A mentioned above, so one end is connected to the +5V power line and electricity. The other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor MC24 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) to preset the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays the role of a low-pass filter.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is increased to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is lower than the ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power outage warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is a D input terminal, based on a change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is a clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. Furthermore, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, it releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal that is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. On the other hand, when a signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, a latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 inputs a logic HI signal to the clear terminal CLR terminal to set the latch state, the logic LOW signal enters the preset terminal PR terminal. When a signal is input, the state in which a signal with logic HI is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal is maintained. (maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a 1D terminal, which is a D input terminal, and a 1CK terminal, which is a clock input terminal, and is connected to the ground (GND). The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, receives a signal from the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, which monitors a +24V power outage or momentary power outage, and a +12V power outage, as described above. Alternatively, a signal from the No. 7 terminal which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors instantaneous power outages is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. Note that the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC22, the GND terminal which is the grounding terminal is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a inputted to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal.At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. It is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input as a power outage warning signal to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs it to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage notice signal, and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage notice signal.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the transistor MTR22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR27 but also to the other end of a resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (Non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

A circuit composed of resistors MR27, MR28, and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , the switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is transmitted to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. It is input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. It is input to PA1.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage notice signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b mentioned above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. Electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR30 but also to the other end of a resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is not only electrically connected to the resistor MR33 but also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND), and the wiring It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a harness. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. connected.

The circuit composed of resistors MR30, MR31 and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is a switch circuit in the former stage, and the circuit composed of resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous stage transistor MTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. MTR21 turns OFF, and the switch circuit in the previous stage also turns OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, which is the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the switch circuit in the latter stage is The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), and the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor MTR21. By inputting the signal, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b mentioned above, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. electrically connected to. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and also to the other end of a resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness).
Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. , one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

A circuit made up of resistors MR35, MR36, and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , the switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the output control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic is set to HI. The peripheral power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, has one transistor each, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral While the logic is the same as the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is output to the output control board 951. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that is output as a power outage warning signal has two transistors, one in the front stage and the other in the latter stage, and the logic of the issued power outage warning signal is the same as the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the surroundings. The logic is the inversion of the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is connected to the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is connected to the payout control board via wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb has no reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This means that between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected to the main control board. 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are installed in the main control board 1310 and the payout control board. 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, Power outage warning is performed by the logic of a power outage warning signal (ON/OFF signal) using +12V, which is a voltage higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the delivery control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be explained with reference to FIG. 77. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, output the serial data sent from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal and output the main control without a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310cb sends the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951, and the serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 69 from the TXB terminal. The main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb sends the main control output circuit without a reset function as a serial serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to inputting the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal) to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal is input. A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is input, etc.

On the other hand, each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a outputs, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs the main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951, and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs drive signals to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs drive signals to various displays, and various information related to games (gaming information). is outputted to the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca, and various information regarding the game (gaming information) is outputted from the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

[9-7. Communication interface circuit between the main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage for the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. ing. The main circumferential serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise that invades the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, the reliability is increased by transmitting using +12V, which is a higher voltage than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. has been done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 47 μF), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly composed of:

+12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal of the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF)). In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, if power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the output control board 951 due to a power outage or instantaneous power outage, for example, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 μF) shown in FIG. Since the charge is applied as +5V, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a at least serially manages the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec, and transmission can be completed as main cycle serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

As described above, the main serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is increased by transmitting using a voltage of +12V, which is higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When the main cycle serial data is transmitted from the shift register 1310aea, it is possible to transmit a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI at +12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a is 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for a maximum of 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main frequency serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via the transistor MTR50. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR51 but also to the other end of a resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

The circuit composed of resistors MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is switched to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND), and the negative terminal is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and also to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by the AR 11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is sent to the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a as a main frequency serial data transmission signal. is input to the input terminal of

As a result, as described above, if +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to a power outage or instantaneous power outage, for example, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied as +5V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, by applying +5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the main frequency serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main frequency serial transmission port 1310ae can be completely transmitted, and the main frequency serial data transmission signal, that is, the main frequency serial data in the middle of transmission, is interrupted. The peripheral control board 1510 is configured to reliably receive the data without missing or missing the data.

When the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the main circuit whose logic becomes HI. The serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. When is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. . In this way, the logic of the main serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. This is the logic.

In this way, in this embodiment, there is a +5V power line to which +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and a +12V power line, to which +12V, which is the communication voltage, is applied via the diode MD50. Measures have been taken in the event that a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main frequency serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h whose first auxiliary power supply is the electrolytic capacitor MC2, are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply, By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, it is possible to maintain the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. For the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as a communication interface circuit, +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50 is and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that when a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs, the communication voltage is applied from the +12V power supply line through the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the commands being sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being fragmented, and also to prevent the commands from being lost, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the commands being sent. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate commands from being missed immediately after a power outage occurs or at the time of a momentary power outage.

In addition, the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all converted into main serial data by the resistor MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h is set to 470 μF so that transmission can be completed to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as a communication interface circuit. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF. As a result, even if a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset allows the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to be converted into main cycle serial data and all function as an interface circuit. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functional main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and prevents them from being lost. You can receive it without any problem.

[10. Payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control section, etc., FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a circuit diagram showing the payout motor drive. FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing the CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is. First, the dispensing control filter circuit will be explained, and then the dispensing control section circuit, various input/output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be explained.

[10-1. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. Terminal 1 of the output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). The +5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing ripples (alternating current components superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the three-terminal output control filter PIC0 is connected to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal output control filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which noise components have been removed.

The third terminal of the output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is connected to the capacitor PC1 and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). By electrically connecting them, ripples are further removed and smoothed from the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. . In addition, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a. +5V is applied over a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the voltage.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a, and the capacitor PC4 is connected to the ground (GND) at one end. electrically connected to the other end. The VBB terminal of this RAM with built-in output control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is also connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the resistor PR0. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and is also applied to the VBB terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. The voltage is applied to the positive terminal of . As a result, as described above, when +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Since the current is supplied to the payout control board 951 as a current, the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the voltage VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is constituted by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Payout control circuit]
The payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, as well as peripheral circuits such as a reset circuit, as shown in FIG. It mainly includes a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal, and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal. Here, we will first explain the dispensing control system reset, and then explain the dispensing control crystal oscillator, dispensing control input circuit, dispensing motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the dispensing control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
+5V, whose noise components have been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a, is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. It is now possible to do so. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, and one end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic outputs the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with reset function. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function are activated. The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal has ripples removed and smoothed. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
The +5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. Further, this smoothed +5V is applied not only to the VCC terminal but also to the OE terminal which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. When +5V is applied to its OE terminal, the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from its output terminal, ie, the OUT terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The dispensing control input circuit 952b receives the dispensing power outage warning signal from the door frame release switch 618 shown in FIG. 70, the main body frame release switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The circuit includes the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit into which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit into which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, etc. . First, we will explain the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame release switch is input, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input, the circuit to which the power outage warning signal issued from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, The circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank sensor is input and the circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be explained. Note that the full tank detection sensor 279 and the various detection switches shown in FIG. 70, such as the out of ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840, have open collector output type output terminals. Since the circuit configuration into which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, the circuit into which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame release switch is input]
The door frame release switch 618 uses a normally closed type (NC), and the switch is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is connected to a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR21 but also to the other end of a resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and also to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (Non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR20, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input as a door open signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is pulled up to +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21, and is also pulled to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR20. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR24 but also to the other end of a resistor PR25 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), a pull (not shown) is connected at one end to the +12V power supply line on the external terminal board 784. Electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR21, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Furthermore, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame release switch 618 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and the No. 1 terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. In addition to being pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via a resistor PR26, ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR26 but also to the other end of a resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to the +12V power supply in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR22, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame release switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts forming the door frame release switch 618 repeat ON/OFF for a short time.

A circuit consisting of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit consisting of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit consisting of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are door frame release switches. This is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Ru. In addition, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal board 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20. The transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5V side, and the transistor PTR21 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5V, and the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and a main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is turned on, and the door frame release signal whose logic is HI is sent to the input terminal of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal input to PA0 and whose logic becomes HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned OFF, and a door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3(b). Circuit where the detection signal from the main frame release switch is input]
The main body frame release switch 619 uses a normally closed type (NC), and the switch is turned on (conducting) when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The No. 2 terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is grounded (GND), while the No. 1 terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is connected to a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR29 but also to the other end of a resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the main body frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and also to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), a pull (not shown) is connected at one end to the +12V power supply line on the external terminal board 784. Electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR23, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29, and also connected to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR31 but also to the other end of a resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, as shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to the +12V power supply in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR24, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short time.

The circuit made up of resistors PR29 and PR30 and transistor PTR23 and the circuit made up of resistors PR31 and PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on and off by a detection signal from body frame opening switch 619.

When the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the body frame release switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal board 784. In addition, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. The transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated. It is input to an external terminal board 784. In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the main control board 1310. 1310.

In this manner, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame open switch 619 is turned on, the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame door open switch 619 is turned OFF, and the logic is The outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, as described above, either one or both of the states in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are provided. Even in this case, the main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310, so the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 based on the door frame 3 and/or The player can determine that the main body frame 4 is open, which does not normally occur during gaming, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal board 784. Therefore, this outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer determines the door frame door open information output signal based on the outer end frame door open information output signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 may be opened. It can be determined that a situation that does not normally occur during gaming is occurring for the player who is playing the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, normally closed switches are used for the door frame release switch 618 and the main body frame release switch 619, so if the door frame release switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason, the switch is turned ON ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and the main frame release switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conducting), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by employing normally closed switches for the door frame release switch 618 and the main body frame release switch 619, it is possible to output the main frame door release signal to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a short circuit, and the outer edge The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

In addition, if the door frame release switch 618 and the main body frame release switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (NO) switches (door frame release switch 618' and main body frame release switch 619'), , the door frame release switch 618' is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4. . The main body frame opening switch 619' is turned ON (conducting) when the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turned OFF (disconnecting) when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame release switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be released from the main body frame 4. Even if the frame release switch 619' is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 remains open from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if normally open switches are adopted as the door frame release switch 618' and the main body frame release switch 619', the main frame door release signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a disconnection. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3(c). Circuit into which the power outage warning signal issued from the power outage monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line that transmits a power outage warning signal issued from a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and a resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR41 but also to the other end of a resistor PR42 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (Non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR40, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is inputted to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power outage warning signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR42, and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a power outage warning signal issued from power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the two types of voltages +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage is detected, the reset function is disabled. A payout power outage warning signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power outage warning via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the +12V and +24V voltages for signs of a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and as described above, meets the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and that the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure notice signal is input to the payout control board 951, either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is applied. When the conditions are met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +12V by the above-mentioned pull-up resistor PR40 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of a power failure or instantaneous power failure of the +12V and +24V voltages. Sometimes, a payout power outage warning signal with logic LOW is input to the payout control board 951, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V is When there is a sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage, a power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the power outage control board 951, so that the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. When the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic at the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage of +12V and/or +24V voltage, a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage of the +12V and +24V voltages, a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V and/or +24V voltage, a power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of a power outage or instantaneous power outage in the +12V and +24V voltages, a power outage warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a due to the power outage notice are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit into which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. has been entered. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 has a circuit configuration as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line on the dispensing control board 951. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is also electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor is connected to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor is connected to the 3-terminal filter for the full-tank detection sensor via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via a resistor PR45. Thereby, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is inputted to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded (GND), and whose other end is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. Capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (Non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B).) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR41, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

A circuit composed of resistors PR45, PR46, and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. In the payout control board 951, a signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951, while when the storage space is full of stored game balls. , a signal in which the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is lowered to the ground (GND) side at the dispensing control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. is input to the payout control board 951.

When the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. A signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and whose logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, which turns on the transistor PTR41 and turns on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and a full signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. At 951, the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and its logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, which turns off the transistor PTR41 and turns off the switch circuit as well. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and a full tank signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to a switch circuit including a resistor PR45, a resistor PR46, and a transistor PTR41 via a three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank sensor. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and the dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. The circuit configuration is such that the signal is directly input to each switch circuit without any intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the out of ball detection sensor 827, the dispensing detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , the path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long and is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls, and the payout control MPU 952a detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls. When it is determined that the storage space is full of stored game balls based on the detection signal from 279, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout rotary body from paying out game balls. It is designed to be controlled. In other words, if noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a will control the payout motor 834 even though the accommodation space is not full of stored game balls. In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout rotary body from dispensing game balls, or the payout motor 834 is driven even though the storage space is full of stored game balls. When the above-mentioned prize ball passageway is filled with game balls upstream by controlling and rotating the payout rotary body to continue paying out game balls, the payout rotary body itself becomes unable to rotate and the payout motor 834 There may also be cases where an abnormal load is applied to the dispensing motor 834, resulting in overload and abnormal heat generation, resulting in failure, or a failure of the mechanism that transmits the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834 to the rotational motion of the dispensing rotating body. be. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is first changed to remove the noise component from the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3(e). [Circuit into which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are connected to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to a resistor PR49, and also to the other end of a resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the No. 4 terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is not only electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, but also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41, one end of which is grounded (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR52 but also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the former stage and the latter stage, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage changes, and the signal is sent as the RWMCLR signal to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. is input.

In addition, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. It is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR44 via a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to a resistor PR55, and also to the other end of a resistor PR56 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to +12V in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2, which is electrically connected to the power supply line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR44, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as a RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts forming the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time, causing a flapping phenomenon. The circuit is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954 due to the operation switch 954.

A circuit composed of resistors PR49, PR50, and transistor PTR42 is a front-stage switch circuit, and a circuit composed of resistors PR52, PR53, and transistor PTR43 is a rear-stage switch circuit, including resistors PR55, PR56, and transistor PTR44. The circuit consisting of is a switch circuit, and is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is configured to operate the RAM built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 (RAM with built-in payout control) and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time of power on, and an error reset function after the power is turned on (after the period in which it functions as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). It has the following functions. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 serves as a RAM clear signal in a function that clears the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on; ), it serves as an error release signal in the error release function.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is transferred to the previous stage transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42, turns on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and turns on the switch circuit in the previous stage. By pulling the voltage down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear to erase information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. It is determined that this is not an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, which are the third and fourth terminals, are pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is transmitted to the transistor PTR44. The signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, which turns on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. is input. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, this logic becomes LOW as shown in FIG. By inputting the RAM clear signal to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, which are the third and fourth terminals, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic is LOW is transmitted to the previous stage transistor. The voltage applied to the base terminal of PTR42 turns off the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage also turns OFF. When the voltage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear to erase information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. It is judged that it is an instruction.

In addition, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, which are the 3rd and 4th terminals, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. The signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, turning off the transistor PTR44 and turning off the switch circuit as well. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic of the RAM becomes HI. A clear signal is input to main control board 1310. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is HI within a predetermined period from power-on, the logic becomes HI as shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, this is an instruction to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a dispensing motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12 and +5V are applied thereto, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is outputted from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and outputted from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the 3rd terminal and the 10th terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the Zener diode PZD60, and is also electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the dispensing motor 834. Based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da, +12V or +5V is applied as the motor drive voltage to No. 3, which is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD60. It is supplied to the terminal and terminal No. 10, respectively, and also to the dispensing motor 834.

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors, and in this embodiment, the 6th and 7th terminals, which are the emitter terminals, of the drive ICPIC 60 are grounded (GND), and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is connected to the ground (GND). A payout motor drive signal is input to certain terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, which are terminals 2, 4, 9, and 11, are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, which are terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, which are terminals No. 1, No. 5, No. 8, and No. 12 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, an excitation signal is generated. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the drive ICPIC 60 via resistors PR60 to PR63. The signals are output to the base terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, respectively. These driving pulses are generated by switching excitation currents flowing through each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the dispensing motor 834, and rotate the dispensing motor 834. Note that when the drive pulses (excitation signals) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) are cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected in front of the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, which are terminals 3 and 10. We adopted a circuit configuration that

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals to and from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the BRDY, which is a ball rental request signal, and the BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal, from the CR unit 6, as described above, via the gaming ball rental device connection terminal board 869. , is input, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and ground LG created from AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for dispensing rental balls is possible or impossible. and outputs. As shown in FIG. 84, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via a resistor PR70. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via a resistor PR71, and also to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via a resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is not only electrically connected to a resistor PR71, but also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR71 but also to the other end of a resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR70, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected not only to the resistor PR72 but also to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line is connected to the power supply board 931. electrically connected to the other end of the By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR71, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR71, PR74, and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, which turns on the transistor PTR70 and turns on the switch circuit. This will turn it ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Ru.

The circuit composed of resistors PR72, PR76, and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR71, and the switch circuit is also turned off. This will turn it on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. Ru.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 931. be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via a resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON, while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned OFF. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC71, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 turns OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via a resistor PR79. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72, and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform after shaping it without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC72, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 turns OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

An EXS signal from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a that informs that one payout operation has started or ended is outputted to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and outputs the payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is applied. When the logic of the EXS signal outputted from the output terminal of the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 through a terminal board 869 for connecting a rental device such as a game ball by a pull-up resistor PR83. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to its built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC73, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is inputted to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic becomes LOW becomes the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the voltage is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The logic is the same.

A PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out rental balls is possible or impossible from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is sent to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. has been entered. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is applied. When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC 74 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869 for connecting a rental device such as a game ball by a pull-up resistor PR86. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to its built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC74, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is connected to the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the voltage is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The logic is the same.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as a payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

Each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a receives the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, dispensing power outage warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection). In addition to inputting signals such as signal 1, etc., for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is input via the payout control input circuit 952b. Detection signals from the ball outage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are inputted via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a outputs the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and outputs the EXS signal and PRDY signal from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Or output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, a payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a payout control output circuit 952ca to output the payout control output circuit 952ca to send the payout control output circuit 952ca to the payout control output circuit 952ca. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. It outputs to the error LED indicator 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310, and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be explained with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the payout control board 951 transmits the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951, in addition to the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, And games such as jackpot information output signals such as 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving information output signal, starting opening winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout power outage warning signal, etc. related to the game are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door open information output signal, the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. The jackpot information of the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15th round jackpot information output signal and the 2nd round jackpot information output signal is outputted from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Outputs gaming information signals such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a starting opening winning information output signal to the external terminal board 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor on the external terminal board 784. In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal board 784: the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number output signal from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving information output signal, and starting opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (pass through) the payout control board 951.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a gaming hall (hall), not shown, and the hall computer monitors the games played by the players. In addition, when outputting the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hole computer outputs the number of jackpots in which there are 2 rounds (2-round jackpot information output signal). The number of jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of jackpots (number of occurrences of 15 round jackpots) and the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (the number of jackpots in 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot determine the number of 2-round jackpots or the 15-rand jackpot from the total number of jackpots, so the number of jackpots that actually occurred in Pachinko machine 1 is higher. , it is not possible to determine whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. Additionally, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play the game by referring to the number of occurrences of jackpot game states displayed on this data counter. Some do.

However, the number of jackpot game states displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of two-round jackpots, so even if the player starts playing, only two-round jackpots will occur. Sometimes it is difficult to hit the jackpot after 15 rounds. In this way, although the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, it may unnecessarily agitate the player's gambling spirit.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by separately outputting the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal, the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot, It is now possible to accurately grasp the number of 15-round jackpots. Therefore, the hall computer can determine whether the highest number of jackpots actually occurred in Pachinko machine 1 is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot, and the data counter shows the 15-round jackpot. Since the number of jackpot occurrences and the number of 2-round jackpot occurrences can be displayed separately, or only the number of 15-round jackpot occurrences can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to unnecessarily arouse the gambling spirit of players. do not have.

In this embodiment, the 2nd round jackpot information output signal is output to the hole computer during the period from when the 2nd round jackpot occurs until the end of the round, and the 15th round jackpot information output signal is also output when the 15th round jackpot occurs. The state is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2 round jackpot information output signal and the 15 round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in this embodiment, for example, when a 2 round jackpot occurs, the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information are output to the hole computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hole computer for a predetermined period. Another example is a method in which the output signal is output to the hall computer for the same predetermined period.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be explained with reference to FIG. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and its rear side is covered by an external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 outputs the outer end frame door open information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal, and the 2 round jackpot information output signal. When a jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a starting opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

To briefly explain these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal does not occur during normal gaming when the player indicates that the door frame 3 and/or main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open. This is a signal that indicates that a situation has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is output every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal that conveys the information, and the main prize ball number information output signal is the various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that informs each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the entered game balls reaches 10 balls, and the 15 round jackpot information output signal indicates that a 15 round jackpot has occurred. The 2nd round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2nd round jackpot has occurred, and the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2nd round jackpot has occurred. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the special symbol is in the state of This is a signal that indicates that the fluctuating display has ended (stopped), and the normal symbol display information output signal indicates that the fluctuating display of the normal symbol has ended (stopped) on the regular symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The time-saving information output signal is a signal that conveys that the time-saving state is occurring, and the starting opening winning information output signal is a signal that conveys that the time-saving state is occurring. This is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

On the external terminal board 784, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row, as shown in FIG. The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As mentioned above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to output 10 prize balls each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to know that game balls have been paid out as prize balls, and the total number of game balls put out by the Pachinko machine 1 can be determined by counting the number of game balls that have been put out.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door open information output signal indicates that the door frame 3 and/or main body frame 4 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, this signal is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the door frame 3 and the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is being input. /Or it can be recognized that the main body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal indicates that the variable display of the special symbol is finished (stopped) on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. This is a signal that conveys the status, and in this embodiment, the end (stop) of the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 and second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is sent from the output terminal PT3. It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at a time. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, when the special symbol display information output signal is input, the hall computer displays the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and also to count the number of times and display the first special on the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of times the special symbols have been variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a starting slot winning information output signal. As described above, the starting hole winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. , is output for 0.128 seconds every time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4. When the starting hole winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole of the pachinko machine 1 every time the starting hole winning information output signal is input. It is possible to know that a game ball has entered the starting port 2004, and also to count the number of times the starting port winning information output signal has been input to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered the ball.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15 round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15 round jackpot information output signal is a signal that conveys that the 15 round jackpot is occurring, and in this embodiment, while the 15 round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT5, It is now output. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer detects that a 15 round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round jackpot information output signal is being input. In addition to being able to grasp the current state, it is also possible to grasp the total number of times that a 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal has been input.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2nd round jackpot information output signal. As mentioned above, the 2nd round jackpot information output signal is a signal that conveys that a 2nd round jackpot is occurring, and in this embodiment, while the 2nd round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT6, It is now output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer detects that a 2-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is being input. In addition to being able to grasp the current state, it is also possible to grasp the total number of times that a two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal has been input.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As mentioned above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that conveys that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols has been finished (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds when the fluctuating display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 ends (stops). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. At 1402, it is possible to know that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols has ended (stopped), and by counting the number of times, the total number of times the fluctuating display of the regular symbols has been displayed on the regular symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 can be determined. You can keep track of the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time saving information output signal. As mentioned above, the time saving information output signal is a signal that conveys that the time saving state is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1. In addition, by counting the number of times the time saving information output signal is inputted, it is possible to grasp the total number of times the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that conveys that a probability fluctuation is occurring, and in this embodiment, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is output from the output terminal PT9 while a probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the probability fluctuation information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer determines that the probability fluctuation is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the probability fluctuation information output signal is input. Not only can it be grasped, but also the total number of times that a probability variation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the probability variation information output signal has been input.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is sent to various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that informs that every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have been pitched reaches 10 balls, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer determines that the pachinko machine 1 receives 10 balls as prize balls each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to know that game balls are scheduled to be paid out as prize balls, and the total number of game balls scheduled to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is determined by counting the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out. can do. In addition, for example, game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls that have entered various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the big winning hole 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is output for 0.256 (=0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds, It is designed to output at intervals of 0.128 seconds, just like one continuous signal.

Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the various signals output from the main control board 951 side. It is arranged so that various signals output on the 1310 side are output via (pass through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are colored, and by electrically connecting wires with connectors colored in the same color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, it is possible to avoid accidentally connecting other wires with electricity. It is now possible to prevent unauthorized connections. Then, various signals output from the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output from the payout control board 951 side and various signals output from the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output from the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged on the left side of the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a line from the center left side to the right side, in this respect as well, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side can be connected. This makes it possible to prevent incorrect electrical connection of the wiring for transmitting signals to the hall computer.

In addition, in this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively connected to the hall from the external terminal board 784. It is configured to communicate to a computer. For example, in a state where game balls from the pachinko island equipment side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 If a 15th round jackpot happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 when there are few remaining game balls, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the game balls are paid out. (Furthermore, for example, if ball jamming or ball jamming occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this problem is resolved). Then, the prize ball number information output signal output from the payout control board 951 side indicates that the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10, as described above. Since it is a signal that conveys this fact every time, when it becomes impossible to pay out game balls, the payout control board 951 outputs a prize ball number information output signal and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls the hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk or the like may, for example, check the hose-like replenishment nozzle for supplying game balls from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720, and identify the location of ball clogging (or, for example, By identifying the location of the ball jam or the location of the ball jam and resolving the problem, the game ball can be returned to a state where it can be paid out.

However, even if the hall clerk etc. are working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, so after the 15 round jackpot is completed, the game balls are paid out by the work of the hall clerk etc. When the state is restored, the payout control board 951 will pay out the unpaid game balls one after another, and even though the 15th round jackpot has ended and the 15th round jackpot has not occurred, the payout control board 951 Every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10, it outputs a prize ball number information output signal that conveys this fact and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. That will happen. In this case, even though the 15th round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out. A problem arises in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between and.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and is independent of whether or not the payout motor 834 is actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, it is independent of the prize ball number information output signal outputted by the payout control board 951. As a signal, the main control board 1310 receives game balls that have entered various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on this, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to notify the fact, and the payout control board 951 and external terminal board 784 are activated. We adopted a system in which the information is transmitted to the hall computer via the computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (problems such as ball jamming in the supply nozzle, ball jamming or ball jamming in the payout device 830, etc.) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls scheduled to be thrown out and the relationship can be accurately communicated to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Production display drive board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is disposed near the bottom of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed within the plate unit 320. It mainly consists of a liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 mainly includes a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. are transmitted as a positive signal and a negative signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 outputs a positive signal and a negative signal. It is now possible to separate noise from negative signals. The plus signal and the minus signal from which the noise has been separated are input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator) and prevents the positive signal and the negative signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, thereby preventing disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 receives three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. Three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, are restored (that is, restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). Note that the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal are, as described above, although the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal each output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source are 8 bits. , the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d each have 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, so they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. Two signals in which a certain LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect the circuit as follows. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. is sent to the LCD module circuit 450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f switches the signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame side, when the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. A serial signal (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is transmitted from the side production transmitter IC 1512d as a plus signal and a minus signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are The signal is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 determines that when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, it is a request to output a LOCKN signal, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

Note that, as described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is used to create a startup screen on the game board side when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. During the period of displaying on the display device 1600 or during the period of waiting for a customer and performing a demonstration using the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is This is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, it is a signal output from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from that of the company's differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)." Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the signal is not output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d, and an abnormality occurs. Assuming that it is data, a LOCKN signal will be output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by using the function of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to force the output, the LOCKN signal output request data, which has a different data format from the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting the information, it is possible to check whether the device called the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND request paper, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for this digital circuit, and the +3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminals and the GNDO terminal, which serves as the ground for this TTL output, and the voltage is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal, which serves as the ground for this LVDS input. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminals and the PLLGND terminal, which serves as the ground for this PLL circuit, and the power is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

When +3.3V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, which indicates normal operation, and when the supply of +3.3 is stopped, the logic becomes LOW, indicating power down. It is a terminal for transmitting information. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via the resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the +3.3V power line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal uses a rising edge to transmit various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. This is a terminal for specifying either the case where the logic changes from LOW to HI or the falling edge (the logic changes from HI to LOW). The falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal. Incidentally, by connecting the EDGE terminal to +3.3V, a rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal is used to instruct whether or not to permit output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal), which will be described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal, the output is always enabled. Incidentally, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, no output will be possible.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and when both are grounded, the operation mode can be selected. The operation modes include normal mode and shakehand mode. In normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are generated based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. In the normal operating mode, the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 restores the parallel signal consisting of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal): horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a mode in which a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are generated based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. For some reason, the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 restores the parallel signal consisting of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal): horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, and the error occurs. If it is difficult to draw data on the door frame side effect display device 460, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control board 1510 to control the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of this fact. Output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d connects to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for restoring is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the performance display drive board 4450 for the door frame side effect. Send to receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Note that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door. A direct electrical connection may be made via the relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal that outputs a request to send a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the two. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, the three restored synchronization signals, the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal, are not used, so the SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that conveys whether data output from the D0 terminal to D17 terminal, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals receive three video signals (18 This is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal. Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals called D0 to D5 terminals in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line for the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals called D6 terminals to D11 terminals in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line for the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals called D12 to D17 terminals in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line for these red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected and are connected to the same ground. It has become.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board, FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. is a table showing a continuation of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives. First, we will explain the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout that is sent from the main control board to the payout control board, and then we will explain the various commands that are sent from the main control board to the peripheral control boards, and the commands that the main control board receives. Various commands from the payout control board will be explained.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, and count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When the signals are input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1) drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to dispense the upper tray 321 and lower tray 322, which are storage trays. If the machine that pays out game balls as rental balls is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), the main control board The prize ball commands sent from 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number). Command 10H specifies one prize ball, and command 11H In command 1EH, 2 prize balls are specified, and in command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball rental machine (a device that directly dispenses game balls as rental balls to storage trays such as an upper tray 321 and a lower tray 322) are installed adjacent to the gaming hall (hall), and the pachinko machine 1 and the ball rental machine (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 88(b), the payout control board 951 is Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be sent to the , command 20H specifies 1 prize ball, command 21H specifies 2 prize balls, ..., command 2EH specifies the prize ball. Fifteen balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

Note that as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88(c), and this command 30H specifies self-check.
If the sending side does not receive an ACK signal from the receiving side for a predetermined period of time after sending a command, it can send command 30H and check whether an ACK signal is received. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands have a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), It consists of a mode that shows variations of effects and has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, special figure 2 synchronized performance related, jackpot related, power on, general pattern synchronized performance related, normal electric role performance related, notification display, and status. It is classified into Display, and Others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronized production related]
Special figure 1 synchronized production related is based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands named special symbol 1 synchronized performance start, special symbol 1 designation, special symbol 1 synchronized performance end, and state designation during fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 1 synchronized performance start command instructs the start of the special pattern synchronized performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 designation command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. , the special figure 1 synchronized performance end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 synchronized performance, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and time saving state. Note that the probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state which is a low probability state and indicates a time saving state, a high probability time saving state which is a high probability state and indicating a time saving state, and a low probability time saving state which indicates a time saving state which is a high probability state. It consists of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a state but not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (as a normal gaming state, low probability non-time-saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than the low probability state (normal gaming state), and the time saving state is, for example, a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than that in the normal gaming state. By shortening the time during which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner compared to the non-time saving state (normal gaming state) and displaying them in a static manner in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the normal lottery results, the normal lottery results by the regular lottery (described later) at a predetermined time can be changed. In addition to increasing the number of stop displays compared to the non-time saving state, the period in which the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 are opened and closed is made longer than in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state). A state where it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for a special symbol without reducing the number of balls by increasing the acceptance rate (entering rate) of game balls into the second starting port 2004 shown (in other words, compared to the non-time saving state) , by increasing the number of decisions as to whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces, and when opening and closing the pair of movable pieces, by lengthening the period of opening and closing of the pair of movable pieces, the second starting port 2004 This is a state in which the acceptance rate (entering rate) of game balls is increased.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is sent when the special symbol 1 variation starts, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production starts, and the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is sent when the special symbol 1 synchronization production starts. The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning/losing information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production related]
Special figure 2 synchronized production related is based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. This command is composed of commands named "Start special pattern 2 synchronized performance," Specify special pattern 2, and End special pattern 2 synchronized performance regarding the second special symbol display 1405. These various commands include "B*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number).
) is assigned (the "*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 2 synchronized production start command instructs to start the special pattern synchronized production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 designation command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. , Special figure 2 synchronized performance end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 synchronized performance.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special pattern 2 synchronization production start command is sent when the special pattern 2 variation starts, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern 2 synchronization production starts, and the special pattern 2 synchronization production start command is sent when the special pattern 2 synchronization production starts. The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variable time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in Figure 89, categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot opening 1 Nth opening display, jackpot 1 closing display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and small win opening. , small win release display, small win count display, and small win ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the N-th opening jackpot opening command command starts during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting slot unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). The big winning hole 1 closing display command is used to indicate when the big winning hole 2005 is opening or starting to open for the Nth round. The winning opening 2005 is closed between rounds or has started closing), and the grand winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls with a count of 0 to 10 has been counted (as shown in FIG. 69). The jackpot ending command is for instructing the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is for telling the jackpot number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening 2005, which is detected by the count sensor 4005. This is an instruction to display symbol information.

In addition, the small win opening command is for instructing the start of the small win opening, and the small win opening display command is for instructing the opening of the small win. The small win count display command is used to instruct the small win medium/large prize opening winning presentation (when the count sensor 4005 detects a game ball that enters the large prize opening 2005 during the small win). The small win ending command instructs the start of the small win ending.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the N-th time display command when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (when the jackpot 1 is opened (starting port unit 2100). The grand prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the grand prize opening 1 is closed (starting closing of the grand prize opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), The big winning hole 1 count display command is used when the big winning hole 1 is opened and when the count changes to the big winning hole 1 (when the big winning hole 2005 of the starting hole unit 2100 is opened, and when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005) is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot opening is opened (when the jackpot opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened). ) will be sent to.

In addition, the small win opening command is sent at the start of the small win opening, and the small win opening display command is sent when the small win is opened (when the large win opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened at the time of the small winning), The small win count display command is sent when a small hit, medium or large prize opening is won (when the game ball that entered the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small winning), and the small winning ending command is sent. , sent when the small winning ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category includes commands named state at power-on and main control return destination at power-on. These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state. The power-on status command is used to control the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. Information that instructs when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, but also when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs) ), information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return to among the low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non time saving state, and high probability non time saving state mentioned above. , and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. For example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the model code of this pachinko machine is used to determine which work's copyright it corresponds to, and what kind of game specifications (for example, the probability fluctuation occurs). In addition to the game specifications in which the state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, there are also game specifications in which probability fluctuations occur with the number of changes in the special symbol being limited (for example, 30 or 70 times). (so-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine includes the series code to identify the machine type among the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, and the series code to identify the copyright of the work. Copyright code and game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications that when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, the probability change with a limited number of changes of special symbols) It mainly consists of a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which this occurs.

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs) ). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or recovered from a power outage or instantaneous power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is executed and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Futu synchronization related]
The normal pattern synchronization performance related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Regarding the device 1402, it is composed of commands named ``Start of ``Fuji pattern synchronization performance'', ``Family pattern designation'', ``Full pattern synchronization performance end'', and ``Change state designation''. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern synchronization performance start command instructs to start the general pattern synchronized performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization performance end command is for instructing the end of the general figure synchronization performance, and the fluctuation state designation command is for instructing the probability and time saving state. As mentioned above, the probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state which is a low probability state and indicates a time saving state, and a high probability time saving state which is a high probability state and indicating a time saving state. A low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually As the gaming state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the common symbol synchronization performance start command is sent at the start of the normal symbol 1 variation, the common symbol designation command is sent immediately after the beginning of the common symbol synchronization performance, and the common symbol synchronization performance end command is sent. , is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning/losing information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric effect related is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 that are opened and closed by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. It consists of commands named winning opening, general power open display, and general power opening ending. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general power opening command is for instructing the start of normal power opening, and the general power open display command is for starting the normal power opening (when the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left and right direction by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107). state or when to expand), and the ending command per general map instructs the start of the ending per general map.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal power opening command is sent at the start of the normal power opening, and the normal power release display command is transmitted when the general power is released (a pair of movable pieces move left and right by driving the starting port solenoid 2107). (when expanding in the direction), and the normal map ending command is transmitted when the normal map ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display classification includes commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is used when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 of the starting hole unit 2100 and the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 of the starting hole unit 2100 even though there is no jackpot (even though it is not a jackpot). When the count sensor 4005 detects the winning abnormality notification), the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical It instructs to start connection abnormality notification when there is a connection abnormality, and the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, sent to the main control board 1310, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the count sensor. 4005, etc., to start displaying a disconnection/short circuit abnormality. This command instructs the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when this occurs.

Further, the door open command is executed when the door frame 3 is moved relative to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 inputted via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the door is in an open state, the door open notification is instructed, and the door frame close command is used to close the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618. This command instructs the door open notification to end when the door is open. On the other hand, the main body frame release command is executed when the main body frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame release switch 619 inputted via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the main body frame is in the open state, the main body frame open notification is instructed, and the main body frame close command causes the main body frame 4 to close to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619. This is to instruct the end of the main body frame opening notification when the main body frame is in the closed state.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is sent when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during a jackpot (when the conditional device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the dispensing control board 951 when sending a command to The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door open command is transmitted when the door is detected to be open (when the door frame 3 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame opening command is sent when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619), and the main body frame is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when body frame closure is detected (when the body frame 4 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display classification consists of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command are each commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed explanations of these will be described later. . In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. In addition to setting the status, the received command is also set as the mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds "7*H" as additional information to these received commands. This formats the command into a command with a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame status 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame status changes, and when error cancellation navigation is performed.The error cancellation navigation command is sent when error cancellation navigation is performed, and the frame status 2 command is sent when the power is restored. , and when the frame status changes. Note that these formatted frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related category includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned "8*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, liquid crystal display control unit 1512, lamp drive board 4170, motor drive board 4180, and frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). This is used to inspect various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

The test command is sent at times other than RAM clear when the main control board is powered on and RAM clear. Specifically, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, when the power is restored from a power outage or an instantaneous power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the power-on processing on the main control side, which will be described later, is performed. The test command is executed and transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. others]
Other classifications include, as shown in Figure 90, starting opening winning, variation reduction operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The starting hole winning command instructs the start of the starting hole winning performance, and is the command to start the performance when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002. , and the start of the performance when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004. The high probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the shortening working state to the variable shortening non-working state, and the special symbol 1 memory command is, 0 to 4 special symbols 1 are reserved (game balls enter the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. The special symbol 2 memory command is used to convey the number of balls that have not been played (the number of balls held), and the special symbol 2 memory command is to notify the number of balls that have not been played (the number of balls that have entered the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (reserved number) that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the normal symbol memory command is for normal symbols 1 pending 0 to 4. This is to convey the number of balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and which have not yet been used to display fluctuating normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 (pending number). Yes, the special symbol 1 memory pre-read production command pre-reads and makes the special symbol 1 pending before the special symbol 1 pending is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading performance command is used to instruct the start of a pre-reading performance that notifies a preview of the display result on the first special symbol display unit 1403 based on the function display unit 1400. This is to instruct the start of a pre-reading performance which pre-reads and notifies a preview of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 reservation before the special symbol is used for variable display on the device 1405.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting hole winning command is transmitted at the time of starting hole winning (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the outage stop period has elapsed), and the high probability end designation command is , in the case of "high probability N times", the special symbol 1 memory command is sent at the end of the stop period (after the failure stop period has elapsed) after the fluctuation is confirmed after the high probability number of times has been consumed, and the special symbol 1 memory command is used to change the number of balls on hold when special symbol 1 is activated. (When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used in the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the first starting It is transmitted when a game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations is used to display a variable special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the number of reservations decreases. , the special symbol 2 memory command is executed when the number of reserved balls changes when the special symbol 2 is activated (a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 changes the special symbol). When there is a reserved number that has not been used yet, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the special symbol changes on the second special symbol display 1405. The normal symbol storage command is sent when the number of reserved balls changes when the normal symbol 1 is activated (when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the normal symbol on the function display unit 1400 is used for display). In a state where there is a pending number that has not yet been used for the normal symbol fluctuation display on the display 1402, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the pending number increases, or from the pending number, the normal symbol display 1402 The special symbol 1 memorization pre-reading production command is sent when the number of reserved balls decreases when the normal symbol is displayed fluctuatingly. The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading production command is sent when the special symbol 2 activates and the number of reserved balls increases (when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases). sent when the number increases). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as mentioned above, the starting hole winning command is used when a starting hole is won (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002), When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004, the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly transmit a sound to notify that fact. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the starting opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are designed to not only provide audio notifications but also to monitor whether there is any fraudulent activity. On the other hand, other pachinko machines have specifications in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the starting opening winning command, but does not notify the player by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 that the main control board 1310 receives will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 includes commands named frame status 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame status 2. The priority order is set in the order of frame state 2.

Frame status 1 commands (equivalent to error occurrence commands) include out of bulb, full tank, 50 or more in stock, connection error, and CR not connected, and if the bulb is out, bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit) is set to the value 1, when the tank is full, the value 1 is set to the bit 1 (B1), when there are 50 or more in stock, the value 1 is set to the bit 2 (B2), and when there is a connection error, the value 1 is set to the bit 1 (B1). Bit 3 (B3) is set to a value of 1, and if CR is not connected, bit 4 (B4) is set to a value of 1. In bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, B5 is set to a value of 1, B6 is set to a value of 0, and B7 is set to a value of 0.

The error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the error cancellation command) includes ball gumming, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. In ball gumming, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1, and the payout detection sensor In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the "dispensing detection sensor error" indicates whether a malfunction has occurred in the dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70. A "retry error" indicates that inconsistent payouts of game balls have been repeatedly performed due to retry operations. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, Then, the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command includes a ball being removed, and a value of 1 is set in bit 0 (B0) when the ball is being removed. Bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

Regarding the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame status changes, and when error cancellation navigation is performed, the error cancellation navigation command is sent when error cancellation navigation is performed, and the frame status 2 command is sent when error cancellation navigation is performed. is sent when the power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process which will be described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be explained.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include random numbers for jackpot determination, which are used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state, and random numbers for determining whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when a jackpot gaming state does not occur. Random numbers for reach determination to be used for determination and fluctuations for use in determining the fluctuation display pattern of special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. A random number for a display pattern, a random number for a jackpot symbol used to determine a jackpot symbol derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating a jackpot gaming state, and this jackpot symbol. The random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of the random number for the symbol, which is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating the small win game state. Random numbers for small winning symbols used to determine small winning symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are prepared for use in determining initial values of the random numbers for small winning symbols. In addition to these random numbers, there is also a normal symbol hit determination random number used to determine whether or not to open/close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8, and a random number used to determine the initial value of this normal symbol hit determination random number. A random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol hit determination, a random number for a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, etc. for use in determining a fluctuating display pattern of a normal symbol fluctuatingly displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. Provided.

Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the random numbers for jackpot determination are updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the jackpot determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first uses a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a with one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. do. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a selects the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an as a jackpot. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1, thereby counting up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated at power-on, or when the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values is stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is set by the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. retrieves the ID code from its built-in nonvolatile RAM, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the retrieved ID code. The system is such that the derived fixed value is set. In other words, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set as the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is set in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used if the ID code is stored in the memory, and the ID code is saved by executing initial value derivation processing when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above is taken to prevent the data from being analyzed.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination will be explained. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain game balls that are paid out as prize balls may somehow obtain the game board 5, disassemble it, and steal the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is obtained illegally and it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the ID code is attached with a code, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', that is, other pachinko machines 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous power outage occurs at each predetermined interval obtained and a game ball is allowed to pass through the gate part 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which game balls can be accepted into the starting port 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer can, for example, indicate the address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts, time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts, and by the time the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a ( If a timer clear setting value is not set in the WDT clear register (hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT1310af starts up and starts measuring time, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and time measurement is started again. In this way, by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting time measurement again, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a can operate normally. It is possible to monitor whether the

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power outage clearing process (step S14). In this power clearing process, first, output of a power outage clear signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. This power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltages between +24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltages between +12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison results. The result of this comparison is that when a power outage or instantaneous power outage does not occur, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power clearing process, first, by starting to output a power outage clear signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of this D type flip-flop MIC22, is started. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca with its logic set to LOW. be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, can be canceled until the latched state is set. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the electricity clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether a power outage notice signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input as a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). has been done. The determination as to whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is made based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power outage warning signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is sent from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, with its logic set to HI, and sent to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. is input. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches a state in which the logic is LOW and is input to its preset terminal PR terminal, it outputs a power outage warning signal from its output terminal 1Q terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute a RAM clear process that initializes the main control built-in RAM (gaming storage unit) for a predetermined period of time from the time the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) to the main control MPU 1310a based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951. Depends on whether or not. Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it does not instruct to clear the RAM, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that it is an instruction to clear the RAM, and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is being operated.

In step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S20). That is, the main control program is capable of executing a RAM clearing process that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (gaming storage unit)) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. state (gaming control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to the value 1 when the game information is to be deleted, and to the value 0 when the game information is not to be deleted. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time waiting processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 is activated (boot I am waiting until In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. When it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal is input, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that a detailed explanation will be given later regarding the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

If it is determined in step S24 that no power outage warning signal is input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the gaming information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the gaming information is not to be erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the gaming information is not to be erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the total thereof.

Following step S28, the main control program compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in main control side power-off processing (power-off time), which will be described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off processing described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. A detailed explanation of , will be given later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off processing has ended normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM for when the power is restored ( Step S34). In this setting, power restoration information is read from the ROM built into the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power restoration" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, as well as the state in which power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage. This also includes a state in which the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset by irradiating the main control board 1310 with high frequency waves from a hidden high frequency output device (hidden high frequency output device), and then returns to normal operation.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed after this, so the main control side power-off process described later is normally completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when erasing gaming information, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30, , or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control program erases all of the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the gaming control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. The main control MPU 1310a also performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs to clear the RAM and erases gaming information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. If the process has not ended normally, a fixed numerical value range of a counter that retrieves a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a and updates a random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the retrieved ID code. Perform initial value derivation processing to always derive the same fixed value from , and set this fixed value as the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for determining normal symbol hit described above. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 951, serial input/output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510, ), the transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed, parity is present, etc., and the transmission serial port control register is configured to initialize the transmitting circuit, enable transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine testing institute, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control program performs activation settings for the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to games, a hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a is used to update, by hardware, a jackpot determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state. At the same time, the hardware random number setting register is set to activate the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, a predetermined random number circuit is generated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values within the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predefined numerical range is extracted again, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed. Note that when the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, and when this latch signal is input, the main control The random number (random value) extracted by the built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number as a jackpot determination random number.

Following step S48, the main control program performs reservation settings for commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power restored) based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. A power-on state command classified as power-on and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM may read out game information from the game backup information and store various commands corresponding to this game information. be. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later. A detailed explanation will be given later regarding the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50.

Following step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program executes an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control side main processing has started. This will restrict the execution of the gaming control side RAM clearing process triggered by the receipt (normal operation control means). As described above, based on the concept of time sharing, the main control program uses the detection signal inputted with the operation of the operation switch 954 as the error release navigation command for a predetermined period of time from the power-on as described above. The RAM clearing process is triggered by the input (gaming control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clearing process is restricted even if the error cancellation navigation command is input ( (game control side normal operation control means), is handled as a release switch for canceling error notification accompanying an error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error cancellation section), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel an error that occurred regarding the payout operation, is used instead as a game storage section for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. The main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clearing process to start initialization, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the game It can function as an operation section for canceling an error that occurs regarding the ball dispensing operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

If no power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning/losing random number updating process, the above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, random numbers that are not related to winning/losing determination (jackpot determining) are updated by software. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for normal symbol fluctuation display patterns, etc. are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If the power outage warning signal has not been input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. and repeat steps S54 to S56. Note that the processing from step S54 to step S56 is referred to as "main processing on the main control side."

On the other hand, when a power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, from being performed, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects game information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as that for starting output of the power outage clear signal in the power outage clearing process in step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program is as shown in FIG. , the drive signals output to the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, etc. are stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage section), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the built-in main control WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the built-in main control WDT 1310af is cleared, and time measurement starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that the processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the main control side power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

In addition, in step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S32, it is checked whether the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

Here, a description will be given of the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. We will explain the problems in .

As mentioned above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is used to charge the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The electric charge is applied as +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. In other words, even if the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power outage or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V, and the power from the pachinko island equipment is restored. The main control side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off. This is because a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing (described later) occurs and the pachinko island equipment is interrupted. When the power is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 when the power is restored, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. Start counting the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set) until the system that controls drawing of the device 460 starts up (boots), and immediately before the waiting time reaches that waiting time. If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, the electric charge charged in the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of approximately 7ms, step S42 The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that even if the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side It may become impossible to complete the main control side power-off process in the power-on process. Therefore, the main control side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the calculated checksum value based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power outage or power outage, and then, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs in step S30, it is found that the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by a hall clerk, etc., and the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even without the hall clerk's intention to clear the RAM. ).

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power outage warning signal is input, Returning again to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step 24, and when a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, step When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game cannot proceed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and to prevent variations in the checksum calculation results. This allows the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to determine that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and memorized value in step S64 match when restarted. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step 24, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input (that is, in step S22) (When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in progress of the game, the pachinko machine 1 Even if the power supply to the main control MPU 1310a is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power-off processing consisting of the processing from step S58 to step S68 and an infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value stored in the checksum calculation in step S64). Therefore, there is no need to initialize the gaming information stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be started after being restored to the gaming information that existed immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurred.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage notice signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a forcibly resets the contents of the main control built-in RAM using the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power-off processing can be started again without updating the The main control side power-off processing can be reliably completed within the "instantaneous power outage or power outage securing period" of about 7 ms by the standard hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when power is cut off from the pachinko island equipment due to an instantaneous power outage or power outage while performing the power-on processing on the main control side at the time of power restoration, the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in Fig. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby processing in step S22 Immediately following step 24, it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to step S24 again, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, step S24 is performed. By repeating this determination, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the built-in main control WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the built-in main control WDT 1310af is cleared and restarted. By not being able to start time measurement, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af using software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by preventing the control flow from proceeding to the control flow in which interrupt permission is set and the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, which will be described later. This system was adopted. In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is cut off from the pachinko island equipment, there is a part that is covered by software so that the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM will not be changed at all, and a part that is covered by the main control side power supply. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information) are divided into two parts: a part covered by hardware to ensure that the timeout process is completed and the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all. This makes it possible to reliably prevent game information) from being changed.

Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (restored) is determined based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to transmit the message, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. There is. Here, first, if the main control return destination command upon power-on does not include information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. The problem in this case, that is, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on as the main control return destination command at power-on is not performed in step S50 will be explained.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game state screen (for example, a jackpot game performance screen) in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 shown in FIG. drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to open the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs is restored, so that the attacker When the solenoid 2108 starts to be driven, the big prize opening 2005 changes from the closed state by the opening/closing member 2107 to the open state.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will control the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to display which round of the jackpot game state it is in at all. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 sends a message to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the game ball that entered the big prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, it is not possible to display which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state it is in at all.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and opens the big prize opening 2005 by the opening/closing member 2107 when finishing the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot gaming state, for example. The main control board 1310 sends a grand prize opening 1 close display command that instructs the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, to start closing the big prize opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 between rounds) from the peripheral control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state by transmitting it to the board 1510, it starts driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and closes the jackpot 2005 by the opening/closing member 2107. The main control board 1310 sends a command to display the opening of the grand prize opening for the fifth time to instruct the state to transition from the state to the open state (that is, to start opening the fifth round of the grand prize opening 2005) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. becomes.

In addition, for example, a screen may be displayed that informs the player that the gaming state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player (for example, that the movable piece is expanded). When the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the screen that informs the player in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2107 to display the pair shown in FIG. If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs while the movable piece is expanded in the left and right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 updates the work area of the RAM with built-in main control in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the settings, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred, and the starting port solenoid 2107 is started to drive. The movable piece transitions from a state in which it stands up substantially vertically to a state in which it expands in the left-right direction.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state advantageous to the player, a momentary power outage or power outage may occur. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and time-saving state specified by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and returned, the game state becomes such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, resulting in a game state that is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen at all on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to inform that the player is present. For this reason, players seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised at the occurrence of a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored, game balls may be received into the second starting port 2004 just before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs. In some cases, the user may forget that the gaming state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state when the power is restored. Despite this, when the power is restored, a screen instructing a game (that is, a screen instructing a game in which a game ball enters the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. As a result, there was a problem in that the player did not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage could not be returned to immediately after the power was restored. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. There was a problem.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (in addition to turning on the power, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs), the main control board 1310 uses the power-on status command. In order to send the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the fourth round of the jackpot gaming state, When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and opens the big prize opening 2005 from the closed state by the opening/closing member 2107. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (in other words, a screen indicating what round it is). ) cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but in a jackpot game state, when the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the jackpot opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107. A screen that conveys a message to the player (for example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, ``You have won the jackpot. The grand prize opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the grand prize opening.'') It is possible to display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to instruct a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball is placed into the big prize opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-mentioned example, while the game state is such that game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored. When the main control board 1310 returns, a screen informing you that the starting port solenoid 2107 has started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left and right direction (for example, a message saying "The movable pieces are expanded") is displayed. The peripheral control board 1510 displays a message on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 that tells the player, "Please play the game so that the game ball enters the lower opening." can be displayed to instruct a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball is entered into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored. This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions as to where the peripheral control board 1510 should return when power is restored after a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, after the power is restored, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. This can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process which is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum in step S28 is checked when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be explained. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, it is not executed in step S30. In the comparison and determination, there is no way that the checksum values match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM must be cleared in step S38. As a result, when the command to be sent at power-on is reserved in step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. will be stored in the state. As for these commands, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, first a power-on state command is transmitted, and then a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device for the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as mentioned above, the power-on state command is executed as shown in FIG. Information that instructs when the operating switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in the figure is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, there is a power outage or momentary power outage that occurs and the power is (including when the power is restored), the state is restored in any of the above-mentioned low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non-time saving state, and high probability non time saving state (probability and time saving state). It consists of information that instructs whether to play the pachinko machine, and information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem will be explained when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As mentioned above, the model code of a pachinko machine is determined when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs), and what kind of game specifications (for example, a game specification in which the state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs), as well as a limited number of changes in special symbols (for example, It is possible to specify whether the game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) is such that a probability change occurs when the game is played 30 times or 70 times.

In the manufacturing line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may coexist.
Then, workers on the production line can determine which of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) has ownership over the copyright. You may not know whether the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright for a work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also a misconception or misunderstanding that it is flowing down the production line. Therefore, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the production line worker will It is not possible to confirm which work's copyright belongs to the manufactured main control board 1310, and even if the copyright of the same work belongs to which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also impossible to confirm what type of game it is (type of game) and what kind of game specifications (game specifications or ST machines in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist. 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem in that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board 1310 inputs the model code of the pachinko machine when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). In order to send the power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 89 and the power-on main control return destination command are sent. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 can turn on the power to the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from and sweet digital type, the series code to identify which type it is, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state will be changed. In addition to game specifications in which the state continues until the occurrence of a special symbol, a game specification code for specifying a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in the special symbol (ST machine, etc.); By visually checking detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on What type of machine is it (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) and what kind of game specifications (if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or an ST machine. As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control board inspection process of the production line By being able to visually check the inspection monitor and accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the operator can classify the copyright of the work by main control board 1310 and perform subsequent work. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing will be explained. This main control side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register banks as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks, a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is changed from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started, there is no need to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, the normal In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the symbols and the ordinary electric accessory control process, the payout control board 951 also sends various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payer has been received normally is input, time management is performed such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. Note that these various times and ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program, for example, detects the detection signal from the general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball that entered the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, and the game ball that entered the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 is detected. A detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 which detects a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. , a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball passing through the gate part 2003 shown in FIG. 8, and a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 which detects fraudulent activity using a magnet shown in FIG. The detection signal and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 that indicates that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. It is stored in the input information storage area as . In addition, a detection signal from a first starting port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, and a detection signal from a second starting port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding starting opening winning command shown in FIG. 90 classified into others is stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004. , and the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the detection signal from the general winning a prize hole sensor 4020,4020 which detects the game ball which entered the general winning a prize hole 2001,2201, and the count sensor 4005 which detects the game ball which entered the big winning a prize hole 2005 A detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate section 2003 are read as the first time when this switch input process is started, and are read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ), each is read again a second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a third time, and the third and second reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a fourth time, and the fourth and third reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is the same, it will be treated as if the game ball did not enter.

In this way, in the switch input process, the main control program receives detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, count sensor 4005, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, and gate sensor 4003. By performing two readings in total, one for comparing the first to third readings, and one for comparing the second to fourth readings, it is possible to eliminate the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since false detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general prize opening sensors 4020, 4020, count sensor 4005, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, and gate sensor 4003 are Reliability can be increased.

Following step S104, the main control program performs win/loss random number update processing (step S106). In this win/loss random number update process, the above-mentioned random numbers for jackpot symbols and random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing to further enhance randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for the jackpot symbol and the random number for the small prize symbol are random numbers related to the win/loss determination (jackpot determination), their respective counters count up only every time this win/loss random number update process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are also updated by this win/loss random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is, as mentioned above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from 1 to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are used as the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The winning/losing random number updating process and the winning/losing random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine are updated, but each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out game balls based on this input information is created, and the prize balls are paid out as prize balls. When the planned number of game balls has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact, and it is stored as output information in the output information storage area, or A self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for checking the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is created. Since the number of balls has reached 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal is set to be output to notify that fact, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 951. Or, if the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has successfully received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. A self-check command is created and sent to the payout control board 951. In addition, if the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, such as when creating a prize ball command that pays out 15 balls as prize balls, the exceeding number of balls will be added to the number of balls that will be played next time. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls is calculated. When the number of balls has reached that point, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program includes various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays shown in FIG. 91 (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command). Send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, and outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program successfully receives these various commands as payer serial data, the main control program stores information to notify the payout control board 951 to that effect in the main control built-in RAM as output information. Store in area. In addition, the main control program formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands categorized by status display in Figure 90 (frame status 1 command, error clearing). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. Note that the frame status 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. For example, when input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is being input when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the jackpot hole 2005), etc. , a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as a random number for jackpot determination. Then, whether or not the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the built-in main control ROM. (to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state (referred to as "special lottery")), and to update the random number for jackpot symbols.The value of the counter is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the probability variation hit determination value (determination as to whether or not a probability variation is generated). Here, "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of hitting the jackpot changes to a high probability (when the probability changes) that is set higher than when it is normal (low probability). In this embodiment, the above-mentioned jackpot judgment value range (jackpot judgment range) is set to a value of 32,668 to 32,767 for low probability, and is read from the normal judgment table, whereas for high probability, the value is 31,768. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability change time determination table. In this way, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S114, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the When determining whether or not the jackpot judgment value pre-stored in the ROM matches the jackpot judgment value, a random number for jackpot judgment (that is, a random number obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a with built-in main control) is used. This is done depending on whether or not it is included in the jackpot determination range.

If these determination results are based on the first starting port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special map 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. In some cases, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronized production shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol is displayed according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set so that the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is lit, and is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information. do. In addition, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot gaming state is entered, various commands classified into jackpot related as shown in FIG. A closing display command, a jackpot opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening/closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened/closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and when the number of times (round) that the big prize opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is 2, The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp 1407a is set so that the 2nd round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in 10 is lit, and the lighting signal is stored in the output information storage area as output information. In some cases, the output of a lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of a lighting signal to the status display 1401 is set to indicate whether or not a fluctuation has occurred in a predetermined color, and the output is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. to be memorized.

This gate information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. It looks like this. For example, if the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is placed in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is placed in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is placed in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information in the third section of information storage is shifted to the second section of gate information storage, and the third section of gate information storage becomes a free area. For example, if gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of gate information storage, respectively, and the second section of gate information storage and the third section of gate information storage become empty areas. Here, if gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is stored so that the total number of stored gate information is reserved and the normal symbol storage display 1188 is lit. Based on this, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area mentioned above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and from this read gate information, the random number value for normal symbol hit determination is extracted and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as "normal lottery"). Based on the result of this determination (the result of a normal lottery), it is determined whether the movable piece should be opened or closed. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the pair of movable pieces expands in the left and right direction, resulting in a gaming state in which the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It's in a gaming state. The fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and sent as the transmission information. In addition to storing it in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display 1402 is lit according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and the above-mentioned output information is set. Store in the output information storage area. For example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role performance shown in FIG. is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and also sets the output of a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 to open and close the movable piece, and stores it in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information. When the value of the random number for normal symbol hit judgment taken out does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation is performed based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. Decide on the display pattern, create various commands related to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area mentioned above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, this main control program sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951 when various commands from the payout control board 951 have been successfully received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. When in the jackpot game state, it outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (gaming information) signals related to the game, such as time saving information output information, starting opening winning information output signal, etc., are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, this main control program reads transmission information from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits this transmission information to peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands categorized as related to special figure 1 synchronized production, created in the main control side timer interrupt process that is this routine, and various commands categorized as related to special figure 2 synchronized production. Commands, various commands related to jackpots (for example, big winning based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected. 90 Various commands categorized as notification displays (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.) and various commands categorized as status displays (frame status 1 command, error clear), as shown in Navigation commands and frame state 2 commands), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands, to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order as main serial data. As described above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is possible to transfer the data to the register 41aea and complete transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main cycle serial data. When the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, in order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. In this case, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , as main cycle serial data, is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes a status command at power-on, and then status, which constitutes a main control return destination command at power-on, The mode and sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, game information is read from the game backup information and is stored in accordance with this game information in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing. In some cases, various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame status 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit ) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 151 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error cancellation navigation command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 151 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to the (presentation control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (presentation control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame close command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (presentation control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command received from the payout control board 951 in the form shown in FIG. 91 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. Clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, by restarting time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, the main control MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 performs the backup function described above for storing game information based on the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and when the power is restored, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup process was executed as the destination for the main control board 1310 to resume playing the game. 89, which instructs the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are electrical drive sources, by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine, is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It is now possible to output to. In other words, the main control board 1310 is the main control board 1310 in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in control RAM, the power-on status commands and power-on main status commands classified as power-on in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 of this routine, the power-on state command is generated as main cycle serial data. The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 when the power is turned on. The effect can be displayed in the display area. As a result, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage is restored after the power is restored. At the same time, it is possible to notify the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 by displaying an effect in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to prevent the player from seeing this state and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that a malfunction has occurred.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process that is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. The entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. By creating a main control return destination command at power-on and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, two commands, the power-on status command and the main control return destination command at power-on, can be created. Only the following information is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 of this routine, the power-on status command is configured as main cycle serial data. The main control board is inspected in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which is sent to the inspection equipment in the main control board inspection process, and then the status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the command to return to the main control when the power is turned on. Send to process inspection equipment. The inspection device in the main control board inspection step configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code to identify the model type among the Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in special symbols (ST Detailed machine type information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for specifying the machine (such as machine).

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control section power-on processing as shown in FIG. 95. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the production control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs processes such as initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, determining hot start/cold start, and setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs processing to initialize itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state where interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the commands shown in FIGS. 89 and 90 from the main control board 1310. , it becomes possible to receive various commands such as commands related to control of game performance and commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ), and also compare the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), and compare the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc. The performance backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1ms), and the performance backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 4 (1ms), are compared, and the compared content is When they match, the production backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr), with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The production backup information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1ms), is copied back to Bank0 (1ms) to perform a hot start, but if the compared content does not match (i.e. , when there is a mismatch), a value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In addition, in the hot start/cold start determination process, regarding the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM), and the performance backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc. When the compared contents match, the performance backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), is ) to perform a hot start, and if the compared contents do not match (in other words, they do not match), the value is copied back to Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to perform a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to zero-clear it. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I'm trying not to get it on.

Following step S1000, the production control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and adjusts the brightness of the game board so that the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is set. Processing is performed to adjust the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and turn it on. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in the range from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the current brightness. This includes the set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set. When lighting, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness is adjusted to the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on the light. In addition, in the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. This is no longer done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent this from happening.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, after performing this current time information acquisition processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1002, the production control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is used for peripheral control, which will be described later, to be executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Furthermore, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the production control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1 (step S1008). When this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again and it is repeatedly determined whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. By repeating such a determination, the peripheral control unit enters a standby state until the steady state processing is executed. Furthermore, after determining whether or not this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I'm trying not to get it on.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is to be executed, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is first set to the value 1 (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1009, the production control program performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the production control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the production control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 through the lamp drive board serial I/O port. When this lamp drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Game board side light emitting data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is now set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK to send 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Start transmitting data one bit at a time.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I/O port is The 1-byte written data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte of data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is sent one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I/O port, the lamp drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and Transmission of 1 byte of data from the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the panel side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 72. Also here, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 1511cab, door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is now set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and sends the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the first address of 1511cab is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial number via external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I/O port's transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK to transfer the data of the transmission buffer register written to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1 byte of data 1 bit at a time.

Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger every time a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port occurs (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O This is triggered by the fact that 1 byte of data written in the transmit buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the transmit buffer register no longer has 1 byte of data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is sent one byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , and then transfers and writes to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for frame decoration driving amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfers the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and starts transmitting 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed using the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 etc. is performed based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400. Based on the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It will be decided as appropriate whether or not to reflect the changes.

Following step S1014, the production control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source from the channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. It is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. In addition, in the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is sent to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. Output to the display device 460 is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent delays in processing time, but although so-called dropped frames may occur, various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Various effects are produced from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by the multiple LEDs and the multiple LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and the sound data output processing described later. The system is designed to prioritize the synchronization of music, sound effects, etc., and synchronization.

Following step S1016, the production control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the production control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation processing described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data, In addition to music and sound effects, the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is input, this audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right side audio data into serial data of a differential method that has a plus signal and a minus signal and sends it to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data using a differential method as a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. matching various performances are played in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and announcement sounds are also played in stereo.

Following step S1018, the production control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the production control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, which screen data from the first screen data is transferred to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. Update the pointer to indicate what to output.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order constituting the schedule data for light emission mode generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of light emission data from the first light emission data is selected for the light emission of various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate the mode.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds arranged in chronological order that constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are specified. The pointer is updated in order to instruct which number of sound command data from the first one of the sound command data is to be output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data is The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data, is a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated in motor and solenoid drive processing. In the motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in chronological order is performed. Updates the pointer to the data, and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so if for some reason the pointer points to the original point in the motor and solenoid drive process, Even if the drive data that is supposed to be used is used to instruct other drive data, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated to instruct the originally intended drive data.

Following step S1020, the production control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the production control program uses information transmitted from the production display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various information transmitted from the main control board 1310. Various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means), which will be described later, are analyzed (command analysis means). The production control program generates schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emitting mode generation, and sound based on information transmitted from the production display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. In addition, the performance control program is configured such that the command received from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing is, for example, a starting opening winning command to instruct the start of the starting opening winning presentation, the number of pending normal symbols, etc. Normal symbol memory command to identify (0 to 4 pieces), symbol synchronization performance start command to instruct the start of symbol synchronization performance, symbol memory command output when the starting pending number changes, large winning opening 2005 The big winning hole 1 count display command (big winning hole count command) that is output every time a game ball is accepted, or the frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command, (command analysis means) and recognizes the current gaming state. In addition, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, this production control program executes a command received by this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing such as a main body frame open command, a main body frame close command, a door open command, or a door frame close command. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , the production control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The various commands include, as shown in Fig. 89, various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to jackpot, and various commands classified as power-on. various commands classified as related to general figure synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, and the above-mentioned door frame opening command. , the door frame close command, the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the second error cancellation command), and the frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as test-related, and various commands that are classified as other.

Following step S1022, the production control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, if the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands categorized as the notification display shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 1511 sends screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. set to the abnormality display mode for executing abnormality notification. It is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed from the highest priority registered in advance, and will automatically transition to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing the information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on, the production control program classifies the command analyzed in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above into the status display shown in FIG. In the case of various commands such as the error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), for example, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a manner different from the normal presentation mode accompanying the presentation operation, for example, the game board side A visual warning is given to the outside using the effect display device 1600 (the effect device), a door frame side effect display device 460 (the effect device), and a lamp (the effect device), and an auditory warning is given to the outside using the speaker ( error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are prevented.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the production control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the production control program stores it in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and time information stored in the time information storage section are updated. Through this RCT acquisition information update process, hours, minutes, and seconds, which are time information stored in the time information storage section, are updated, and based on this updated time information, year, month, and year, which are calendar information stored in the calendar information storage section, are updated. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the production control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is specified among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for light emission mode generation. Game board side light emitting data SL- for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. DAT is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. Alternatively, it is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the LED transmission data storage area 1511cab on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the production control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the production control program selects the screen data indicated by the pointer from among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data whose pointer has been updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020. is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on the game board side effect display device. 1600 and the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the production control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the production control program selects the pointer that is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, and controls the built-in sound source to output the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to track numbers specified in the data, and output channels to be used are set according to output channel numbers.

In addition, in the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is activated, and the volume adjustment volume is The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob 1510a is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into 7 parts and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, and board volume 0 to board volume 6 are set. The volume is set so that the volume increases toward volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the audio data is transmitted as serialized audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and the sound source is built into the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by programming the volume from mute to maximum volume. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into seven levels, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, sound effects, and other performance sounds will be low. However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is cheating, a notification sound set at a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of the player. In addition, based on the current board volume that is set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so that it does not interfere with the music or sound effects, while the advertising sound In addition to the music and sound effects, the volume of the playback can be increased to make the screens displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful, or to provide an advantageous effect for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a gaming state.

Following step S1032, the production control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the production control program transfers the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Included in Bank0 (1fr) are a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac stores the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, as the performance backup information (1fr) in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) starting from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the data to the peripheral control DMA controller. The request factor of 1511ac specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied to Bank0 (1fr). ), all of the content stored at the end address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb is sequentially copied one byte at a time, starting from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr). ) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), sequentially backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the second area 1511cc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are successively stored in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at a time in Bank4 (of the backup second area 1511cc). 1fr) in order from the first address.

In addition, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac transfers the performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), as the performance backup information (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db. Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the data to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and copy the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the data to the peripheral control DMA controller. In the request factor of 1511ac, specify copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and copy the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank0 (SRAM). ), all of the content stored at the end address of 1511 db is sequentially copied starting from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511 db, one byte at a time (for example, 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. ) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), successively backup a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) be copied to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are successively stored in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at a time in Bank4 (of the second backup area 1511dc). Copy everything in order starting from the first address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1036, the production control program sets the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

This peripheral control section steady processing starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009, indicating that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and then setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1010. The interrupt timer activation process is performed, and the processes of steps S1012, S1014, . Setting this will complete the process. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted, as shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed in response to this will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045). As described above, this steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95 is being executed; They are each set to the value 0 when the processing is completed.

If the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, this routine is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050); Exit this routine. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control section steady processing, and when the peripheral control section steady processing is executed, the value is 1; They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady state processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady state processing is forcibly canceled midway through and starts execution from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the steady state processing is canceled in step S1009 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady state processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, the fact that the steady processing of the peripheral control unit is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply shown in FIG. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the input processing (peripheral control steady state processing), the completion of the peripheral control steady state processing is indicated by the peripheral control V blank in this routine. By transmitting the signal to the signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the judgment in step S1045 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, the peripheral control section steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether or not the process has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the routine processing of the peripheral control section cannot be completed between the input of the V blank signal and the input of the next V blank signal, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, if the processing cannot be completed in approximately 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next It is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, it takes approximately 66.6 ms to execute the current peripheral control section steady processing that has failed. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is normally executed repeatedly each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process will be executed 64 times. It is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the steady processing of the peripheral control unit fails, the progress state of the effect caused by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the progress state of the effect caused by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress of the performance can be reliably matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 95. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33, as shown in FIG. is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, so after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the process is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

If the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is immediately terminated. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has priority over the peripheral control unit V blank signal. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, if the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN (incremented, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electrical drive source schedule data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. At the same time, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and the pointer is updated every time this motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c is first read. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the production operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive data of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Set it in the motor transmission data storage area 1511caf on the amplifier board side. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the area 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1 byte of data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O This is triggered by the fact that 1 byte of data written in the transmit buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the transmit buffer register no longer has 1 byte of data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is transferred one byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. Transfers the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, starts transmitting 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and transfers the data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Continuous transmission is performed using the motor serial I/O port.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board. When this serial I/O port serial transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c is configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the solenoid and solenoid is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. 73 in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it at the start address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the motor drive clock signal SM-CLK on the gaming board side. Start transmitting byte data one bit at a time.

Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, interrupts the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port) whenever a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I/O port occurs. The 1-byte written data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte of data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is sent one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, Transmission of one byte of data from the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the motor drive clock signal SM-CLK on the game board side, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The original positions, movable positions, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in this movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, performance operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation (operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 detects that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact, and specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the frequency of failures and the occurrence status of failures between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the door frame side effect display device 460 drawing status can be obtained.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for backup. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, each time the 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah are included in Bank0 (1ms) which is the backup target. , and the effect information (1ms) stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai as effect backup information (1ms) around Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cb. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) starting from the start address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the data to the peripheral control DMA controller. In the request factor of 1511ac, specify copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1ms) to Bank0 (1ms). ), all of the contents stored at the end address of the backup area 1511cb are sequentially copied one byte at a time starting from the start address of Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank0 (1ms). ) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms), sequentially backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1ms) of the second area 1511cc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) be copied to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms) are successively stored in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at a time in Bank4 (of the backup second area 1511cc). 1ms) in order from the first address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above as the progress of the effects are executed within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 95, various processes related to the effect from step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat depending on the production lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start being transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. One byte (8 bits) of information is loaded into the reception buffer by the serial I/O port for the board, and when this loading is completed, an interrupt is generated using this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet consists of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values and are summed as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received among the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral One byte of information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I/O port built in the control MPU 1511a is taken in (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data is taken out from the reception buffer.When the status, which is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the value is 1, which is the mode, which is the second byte of the main frequency serial data. When taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. Note that the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this judgment, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are sequentially read from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. If the sum values are not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value of the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, which has already been taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main frequency serial data among the main frequency serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated, so the pachinko machine 1 is not affected by the noise. It is in a sanding environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 1511 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are regarded as numerical values. and calculates the sum value (sum value), and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the main circumference serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has changed to main circumference serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise. be able to.

In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main cycle serial data The status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (step S1216), and this routine ends. This received command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the 1st byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the 2nd byte of the main serial data are the received command storage area. The data is stored in the peripheral control section reception ring buffer of 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used as if the end and beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the status allocated as the first byte of the received main serial data and the status allocated as the second byte of the received main serial data when storing it in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, if the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period has exceeded the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received. In some cases, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is continued as is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal is executed when the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. Interrupt processing will be explained. When this peripheral control section power outage notice signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 shown in FIG. signal) is input (step S1302). If it is determined that no power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input, this routine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer activated in step S1320 has elapsed for 2 microseconds. If 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input, this routine ends, while the power outage warning signal is input. If a signal is being input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

If the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off, etc. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for only a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 waits for at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being sent. It is set to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) the received command is stored.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies data to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies data to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac specifies copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. Then, the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored in a predetermined byte (e.g. , 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the request source of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify to copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and copy the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr). The content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in the received command storage area 1511cac to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank 0 (1fr) is contiguous by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Then, all the received command storage areas included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb are copied in order from the first address.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. The content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The received command storage area is sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and then the peripheral control MPU core The peripheral control DMA controller 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Copy is specified, and the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is copied to a specified value. All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are sequentially copied starting from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input (step S1312). If it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. .

On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again and it is determined whether the power outage warning signal is being input. In other words, it continues to be determined indefinitely whether or not a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input. By continuing to make the determination infinitely in this way, when the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. cannot be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. Note that when the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

In this way, if the determination in step S1312 is that the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) continues in the infinite loop, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314, so that peripheral control is performed immediately before the power outage occurs. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage notice signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process is not executed, and therefore the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e are The output of the clear signal is now interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is mistakenly started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than 2 microseconds and passes the determination in step S1302, the step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clearing process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as part of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 receives from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the data is abnormal, this is a signal that is output to notify that fact.Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side presentation receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). This determination is made because when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , requests transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal data). This data is used to confirm (recover) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the most significant bits B7←B6, B6← B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to the value 1 (step S1506), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal read out in step S1500 is Signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is changed to the least significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0. The bits are shifted one bit at a time from B7 to the most significant bit B7.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to the value 0 (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection failure determination process]
Next, a description will be given of a connection failure determination process executed as part of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 It is determined whether a problem has occurred in the connection between the performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. As described above, this LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that this is the case, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact, and specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination is made by determining whether the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation judgment value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value do not match, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. and then exit this routine.

On the other hand, in step S1522, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 151 There is a problem in the connection between the door frame side presentation transmitter IC1512d prepared for the event and the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the presentation display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by the value 1 (step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it has been determined in step S1522 that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. (counts the cumulative number of times). Note that the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, but it is not reset due to a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored. In some cases, the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is restored to the instant or immediately before the power outage.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative count of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative count. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times it has been determined that this state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number of times. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, in step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and receiver is interrupted when the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. This is a flag that indicates whether a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and the value is 1 when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that the current state is in the current state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0. Note that the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, but it is not reset due to a momentary power outage or power outage, and is not reset when the power is restored. At times, the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is restored to the value of the moment or immediately before a power outage.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery processing]
Next, a connection recovery process executed as part of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection recovery process, which is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. We will notify you to that effect.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process in step S1020, it is determined whether or not screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. S1540). This determination is used to instruct which screen data, starting from the first screen data, is to be output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation in the scheduler update process. Then, it is determined whether the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data, so while it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the screen generation schedule When the performance has been completed in accordance with the data and all pointer updates have been completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been activated. Note that this determination includes the period during which the startup screen when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a demonstration while waiting for a customer. It is possible to judge whether or not it is the current period based on the schedule data for screen generation, and display the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600. In the period when the player is waiting for a customer and a demonstration is being performed using the game board-side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later. When the period is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a state of waiting for a customer and performing a demonstration (when it is simply in a state of waiting for a customer), This routine ends immediately.

In step S1540, when the performance is progressing in accordance with the screen generation schedule data, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is immediately terminated, while in step S1540, the performance is progressing in accordance with the screen generation schedule data. When the effect has been completed and all pointer updates have been completed, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to Counts up the number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (counts the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, if it has not been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, then the While the routine ends, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, the number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even 1. If so, it is determined whether the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, and the transmitter This flag indicates whether or not there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.The value is 1 when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. If the value has not been reached, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is ended. In this SYNC pattern output processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, thereby causing the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 to The transmitter IC1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d, and is output to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, and is used for door frame side performance. This is to restore the connection between the transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, if the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, if a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the communication error display process is performed. (step S1548), and this routine ends. In this communication error display process, in order to reliably notify that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Performs processing to draw on. For example, a message saying "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store staff." is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, in the communication error display process, the startup screen when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a demonstration while waiting for a customer. During this period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs the LOCKN signal. As a response signal to the transmission of signal output request data, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and if this LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. It is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store staff.") is displayed in the game. In addition to performing the process of displaying on the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the upper pan-side liquid crystal display device.") is repeatedly emitted from a speaker etc. installed in the door frame 3. Perform flowing processing. At this time, a process may be performed in which all of the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are turned on.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described using the timing chart shown in FIG. 103.

First, to briefly explain the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8, the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. A variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by part steady processing, etc., and the main control side of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93 is performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 through the main process or the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 94, or the second special lottery result shown in FIG. When the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the starting hole 2004 becomes a "jackpot", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 8 will be from 1 round to 15 rounds. There will be a total of 15 rounds, and in each round, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), The round is completed, and each time one game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out.

The first special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the second starting port 2004 is determined by the main control board 1310. Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that a left decorative pattern is displayed on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and a central decorative pattern is displayed in the center. Then, on the right side, the variable display of the right side decorative pattern is started, and after a predetermined period of time, the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is displayed. At this time, the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can also be confirmed in the symbol or the second special symbol. When the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are translucent to the extent that the background image is visible, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side of the area to the lower left side of the area, the center decorative symbols rotate from the upper center side of the display area to the lower center side of the display area, and the right side decorative symbols rotate from the upper right side of the display area to the lower right side of the display area. When the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a fluctuating manner as if they were floating, and the left side decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, they correspond to the stopped and displayed left side decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern. The left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that starts to be displayed variably and then stops on the first special symbol display 1403 or second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, The left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern, which are started to be displayed in a variable manner and then stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 selects a first special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the first starting port 2002 or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the second starting port 2004. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery results, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command to display the game board side shown in FIG. 8 as shown in FIG. 103. When the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern starts in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen of the screen data arranged in chronological order forming the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The pointer is updated to instruct which screen data to output to the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source.In other words, when the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process, the screen data is updated in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation. Since the production is in progress, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, that is, the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is not started. Until the stop display is displayed, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. , the determination in step S1540 in this connection recovery process causes the routine to be forcibly terminated.

As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT is kept in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 from when the left side decorative symbols, the center decorative symbols, and the right side decorative symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner until they are stopped and displayed. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (in other words, between the transmitter and Even if the number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even once, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and receiver The process for recovering the connection between A problem has occurred with the side LCD display.Please call a store employee.'' message is not displayed, indicating that the drawing data received from the door frame side display transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Display.

When the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to display the left decorative symbols, central decorative symbols, and right decorative symbols in a variable manner and stops displaying them (timing K1), the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. 95. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the effect is completed in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, in the scheduler update process, the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. In the determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102, which is executed as part of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the process advances to step S1542 in the same process, and the communication check counter CC- When the value of CNT is 0, that is, when it has been determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine is terminated and the communication check counter is When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process advances to step S1544 in the same process. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. If the value has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S1546, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine ends. On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1), In other words, if a problem definitely occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process advances to step S1548, the above-described communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are being stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side performance receiver If there is a problem with the connection to ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver, even once, and if there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is performed without fail, so that between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. (In other words, there is definitely a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver), by always performing the communication error display process, for example, " A problem has occurred with the LCD display on the upper tray.Please call the store staff.'' The process is to display and notify the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the data is valid, is enabled.

In the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern start to be displayed in a variable manner, and are stopped, and then the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner again. During the interval period until the start of the game, the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are activated. A state in which a problem has occurred at least once in the connection with the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the cumulative number of times determined to be the same does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is performed without fail, thereby reducing the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. In other words, while performing processing to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. (In other words, there is definitely a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver), by always performing communication error display processing, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Processing is performed to display and notify the user of the message "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store staff."

When the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern starts again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left side decorative pattern and the center decorative pattern , and until the right side decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 The number of times it has been determined that a problem has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if the connection recovery process is repeated, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process to recover the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. The communication error display process in step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store staff." is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is disabled, and the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern start to be displayed in a variable manner, and then are stopped, and then the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed again. During the interval period until the start of the fluctuating display of symbols, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 is activated, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter The LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the IC1512d is abnormal data, is disabled. This is because the combination result of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information that is most interesting to the player, and is beneficial to the player. Since the player can judge whether or not a jackpot game state in which a jackpot is awarded will occur, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Then, until the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is distorted due to the influence of noise and may not be correct. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, instead of interrupting the performance midway through and performing processing to restore the state to a state where it can be drawn correctly, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 displays the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and By stopping and displaying the right-side decorative pattern, the information most interesting to the player is completed.

In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the period during which the startup screen of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on, and the period when the pachinko machine 1 is displayed in the customer waiting state. This is significantly different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510 during the demonstration using the game board side performance display device 1600. This LOCKN signal output request data includes the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, and the period during which the game board side performance display device 1600 displays a demonstration while waiting for a customer. During the period of execution, the information is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the differential Two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the switching circuit 1512e are input to a forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so as to transmit the two signals. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the pan unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is sent to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Output to control MPU 1511a. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input, and sends the effect to the effect display drive board 4450. While it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred, if the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a malfunction has occurred in the production display drive board 4450. A notification image (for example, "A malfunction has occurred in the LCD display on the upper tray. Please call the store staff.") is displayed on the game board side performance display device by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. 1600, and also outputs a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. As a result, notification can be made using the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker etc. provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the light-emitting decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which has received the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem in the door frame side effect display device 460. When no signal is input, it can be determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. Then, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a malfunction in the door frame side performance display device 460, it can notify the hall clerk etc. of this by executing a notification process. Hall clerks and the like can very easily check whether or not there is a problem with the door frame side performance display device 460 before a player plays a game, and this check does not take much time. ing. Therefore, a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 can be discovered without much effort.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that there is, it is a signal that is output to notify that fact. Specifically, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver, so it is used for door frame side production. When the receiver ICSDIC0 cannot properly receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, a communication problem occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. In order to notify that the rendered drawing data is abnormal data, a LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input sends a connection confirmation signal to the door indicating that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is to be started being transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. By outputting to the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can early discover a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure during image communication, and can act on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to resolve the defect. It looks like this. Therefore, by discovering and resolving the malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460, receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. If the reception is not successful, the performance control microprocessor sends a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure signal that indicates that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, causing a communication problem. The generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is now possible to display and notify users. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication malfunction during image communication at an early stage, and notifies the player seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can notify the pachinko hall clerk, etc., or directly notify the pachinko hall clerk, etc. who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko hall clerk, etc. will be able to notify the pachinko machine 1 of the occurrence of the malfunction. You can begin work to resolve the problem at an early stage. Therefore, by early detection and resolution of the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period). If a problem occurs even once in the connection between the side production receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that the state is in a state where the cumulative number of times has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is used to enable the LOCKN signal and eliminate communication problems during image communication. A connection confirmation signal is sent to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. , it is possible to continue outputting repeatedly. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period when the game is started and stopped and the game is not progressing, communication problems can be resolved.

Then, during the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period), the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450. If a problem occurs even once in the connection between the performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. If the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is activated to enable the LOCKN signal and eliminate communication problems during image communication. The door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d sends a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to inform the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 of the start of transmission, until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. While the output continues to be repeated, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 to play the game. When the process starts again, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d performs a predetermined process. It is possible to stop sending the data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 and output the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. It looks like this. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a problem-resolving signal, only during the period when the game starts and stops and is not progressing, it is possible to move in the direction of resolving the communication problem. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing and stops displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. While repeatedly outputting the connection confirmation signal only during the period when the game is not progressing, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion of the performance (disturbance of the image) that progresses on the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460, Each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the game again (every time the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period) begins), it is possible to move the game toward resolution.

According to the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 controls the first starting port 2002, which is a starting area provided in the gaming area 5a, and the second starting port 2002, which is a starting area provided in the gaming area 5a, when a game ball is fired by a ball launcher 650 toward a game area 5a defined on the game board 5. A main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is installed. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands shown in FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b), which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. 70 payout control MPUs 952a are installed.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information regarding games even after the power is turned off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built into the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information regarding payout even after the power is shut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 70. If the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, information regarding the game stored in the main control internal RAM is erased. The RAM clear signal shown in FIG. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a gaming control microprocessor, and if the operation is performed within the period from when the power is turned on to when the power-on processing of the payout control unit is performed, the RAM clear signal with built-in payout control is A RAM clear function outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing stored payout information, and the main control side power supply shown in FIG. 92 from the time of power-on. If the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process in step S16 in the power-on process is performed (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time the power is turned on), the error that has occurred regarding the payout device 830 is canceled. This system also has an error cancellation function that outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 as an error cancellation signal to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor. .

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, the game stored in the main control internal RAM is When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information regarding is outputted to the main control MPU 1310a which is the gaming control microprocessor, and the payout control unit is operated within the period from power-on to the power-on processing of the payout control unit, A RAM clear function outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payouts stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and a RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. If the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process is performed (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on) has elapsed, the dispensing device 830 An error cancellation function that outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in FIG. 82 as an error cancellation signal to cancel the generated error to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor. Therefore, by operating one operation switch 954, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function. Therefore, it is possible to provide a RAM clear function and an error release function while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input section of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, such as a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. This is a circuit into which detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the like are input. Since the circuit configuration into which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is cited as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit into which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be explained. do.

Attempting to gain unfair profits by manipulating the flow of game balls as desired by, for example, bringing a magnet (e.g., a permanent magnet or electromagnet) close to a game ball that has been hit into the gaming area of a game machine. There is no end to fraudulent gaming activities.

In order to detect such fraudulent gaming activities and suppress them by means of light emitting means, audio warnings, etc., magnetic detection sensors 4024 capable of detecting magnetism are provided corresponding to predetermined positions in the gaming area. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, control related to game progress and performance will be summarized below.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of the processes. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (display images such as patterns, various background images, text, characters, etc.) based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310, It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members that contribute to the performance (the performance operation unit 400, movable members, etc.).

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control processing, first and second starting opening winning processing is performed. In this first and second starting hole winning processing, a judgment is made as to whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the starting hole, and when it is determined that a winning has been won, processing such as increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed. It will be done.

When the first and second starting opening winning processes are finished, if the processing flag is 0, a fluctuation start process is executed. In this fluctuation start process, on the condition that the number of pendings is 1 or more, the pending jackpot judgment is completed and executed, and the result of this jackpot judgment (wins/losses, its type, etc.) is memorized, and then , updates the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is completed, the fluctuation pattern setting processing is executed. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is based on the above-mentioned stored jackpot determination result, current gaming state, etc. After determining and setting the variable time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the stop display) and the stop symbol (such as a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the process flag is 2 when the first and second starting opening winning processes are finished, the changing process is executed. In this process during fluctuation, a timer monitors the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting process, and based on the timeout, the special symbol is displayed in fluctuation on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. to stop. After that, if the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start process is a jackpot, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start process is not a jackpot (loss). , update the processing selection flag to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process will be restarted from the fluctuation start process.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is completed, the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated to set the jackpot game aspect (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, Based on this, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when a jackpot game ends, a process is performed to stop the operation of the conditional device, and if the type of jackpot won is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. After updating the gaming status flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process will be restarted from the fluctuation start process.

Note that a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored as the variation patterns. The fluctuation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol, and also determines the effect that appears on the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. This can determine the type of pattern. In this embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a variation pattern for jackpot variation, a variation pattern for losing reach variation, and a variation pattern for loss variation. The jackpot variation is a variation that is performed when the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot, and in the production display device 1600, after the reach production, the variation display of the decorative symbols is developed so that the jackpot symbol is finally fixed and stopped. The performance to be performed is executed. The missed reach variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined that a reach is to be performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number. A performance is performed in which the fluctuating display of the symbols is finally discontinued and the symbols are displayed as fixed and stopped. The loss variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is not determined that a reach is to be performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number. , an effect is performed in which the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols is developed so that the symbols are finally stopped and displayed as fixed. Further, the variation pattern is defined so that it can be specified whether the variation pattern is on the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

That is, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as the result of jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to it, thereby making it possible to generate such a variation pattern of decorative symbols. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 causes a fluctuating pattern of decorative symbols to appear on the effect display device 1600 based on the acquired game information, as well as changes the effect display (background and pending image) related to the level of expectation. Control is executed to change the mode (display and movement) of the operation unit 400 and to operate movable members such as the rear-down movable production unit 3100.

Next, game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: Step S114).

Now, if the main control program moves to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: Step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the above-mentioned process as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal by the first starting port sensor 4002 is in the ON state (ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (YES in step S5231), a first jackpot determination random number is obtained from the random number counter. A first starting opening passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol retention storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Further, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( A second starting opening passage process is executed, such as acquiring a second jackpot determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol retention storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
・When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests either "8R definite variable jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 After opening for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the grand prize opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times. Control to 8R jackpot gaming state,
・When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R variable jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated 16 times to create a 16R jackpot game state,
- When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R guaranteed variable jackpot B", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) ) or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that 9 game balls have entered the big winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times and controlled to an 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) The game is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which an opening/closing pattern (round game) in which the game is closed after opening is repeated twice.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is more advantageous for the player to play right-handed than to play left-handed in a situation where the time-saving control is executed, and it is more advantageous for the player to play right-handed than to play left-handed in a situation where the time-saving control is not executed. As mentioned above, left-handed hitting is advantageous for the player. In this respect, in the left-handed game, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol in response to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002, the jackpot game is open for a maximum of 8 rounds. Only the state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004, the probability of winning is approximately 50% (the allocation rate of the winning type). ), the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained when winning the jackpot, such as the 16-round long-open jackpot game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained). , so that when the player is controlled to shift to the right-handed batting state, he can expect to win a larger amount of prize balls than when he is in the left-handed batting state.

In the jackpot control process, in order to start the opening control of the big winning hole 2005, processes such as starting the operation of the conditional device, resetting the variation counter described later, etc. are performed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after controlling the opening of the jackpot 2005 as described above, as shown in FIG. Execute each flag and time saving flag setting process.

The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is used in the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 109, which will be described later. It is set when ending the jackpot game state based on Probable Variable Jackpot, 8R Probable Variable Jackpot B), and when the next jackpot occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) shown in FIG. will be reset.

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, time saving control (high probability time saving state) is performed after the jackpot game state ends. It is set when ending the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R probability variable jackpot A, 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B), and when the next jackpot occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are digested 100 times without winning the jackpot after the low probability time saving state occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

The variation counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of the special symbol after the variation counter is reset, and is used in the first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112, which will be described later. It is updated (for example, counting up) when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B). It is reset when starting a jackpot gaming state based on .

In addition, if the jackpot execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then as a process of step S5236, whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the control is in a small win gaming state is set. Determine whether As a result, if the small winning execution flag is set, a small winning control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, in the small hit control process, a process is performed in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds).

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the jackpot control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of the big winning hole 2005 is performed, the high probability flag, the time saving flag, the time saving flag, etc. Each set process such as a number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(a), there is no possibility of winning a small hit in the jackpot determination.

Further, if the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of random numbers for second jackpot determination stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is On the condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, if the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of random numbers for second jackpot determination stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol A second special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the second special symbol that is in a pending state is not lost (as long as the value of the second special pending number counter is not "0"), the first special symbol Regardless of the pending status of the lottery, only the lottery for the second jackpot determination random number will be held continuously without interruption (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (right-handed hit) in the time saving state (high probability time saving state). Only the lottery (judgment process) for the two random numbers for jackpot determination can be performed continuously without interruption.

In addition, it is limited to those where the special pattern game (symbol variation) using the second special pattern (second special pattern) is executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (first special pattern). Instead, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which game balls enter (pass) the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S5232).

Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, then as shown in FIG. In step S5241, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first inputs each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern). ) is obtained from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of the first special symbol is set to its maximum value. (upper limit value) is "4" (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, if it is determined that the number of reservations for the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the first special figure pre-reading process for executing the first special figure side pre-reading effect is executed, and the process ends (step S5245). As will be described later, the pre-read performance on the first special symbol side is a performance that suggests the determination result (or its expectation level) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required on the peripheral control board 1510 side to determine whether or not to execute a pre-read effect and the content of the effect (information regarding wins and losses for pre-read judgment, information regarding symbol types for pre-read judgment) information, information regarding the variation pattern number for pre-read determination, etc.) and stores it in the corresponding storage area as information to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before being finally determined, such as SP reach group, normal reach group among the fluctuation patterns, potential hit group and small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a pre-read command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, if it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, in the process of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, then as shown in FIG. In step S5251, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first inputs each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, second random number for reach determination, random number for second jackpot symbol). A random number (random number for second variable display pattern) is obtained from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and sets the number of reservations of the second special symbol to its maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether it is "4" (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, if it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, a second special figure pre-reading process for executing a pre-reading effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the process is ended (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-read performance on the second special symbol side is a performance that suggests the determination result (or its expectation level) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special symbol pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning/losing information, symbol type, fluctuation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before being finally determined, such as SP reach group, normal reach group among the fluctuation patterns, potential hit group and small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a pre-read command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, if it is determined that the number of pending second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a command is issued to instruct the number of reserved first special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (First pending number designation command 0 to 4) is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is instructed in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). commands (second pending number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S5238). In addition, the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. This program module differs only in the random numbers and tables used for determination, so only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. A random number for jackpot determination corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the read random number for jackpot determination, a lottery process is performed regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. The first special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281 )

3. It is executed in accordance with the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for the variable display pattern, and the special symbol on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600. A first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process is performed regarding the variation mode of the effect display to be performed.

4. First special symbol variation processing (step S5283) that waits until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped.

5. The mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing to stop the fluctuating display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in a pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in a pending state, then as a process of step S5302, the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, the first variable display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the main control built-in RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is Random numbers related to the display mode when the fluctuating display of symbols is stopped (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first fluctuating display pattern random number) are first-in first-out. Shift operation is performed in the manner of (First-Out).

Specifically, the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d), and the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d), and the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol retention storage area a to first special symbol retention storage area d). Random numbers extracted according to occurrences are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the above-mentioned first special symbol occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). . Similarly, the second special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol retention storage area a to second special symbol retention storage area d), and is responsive to the occurrence of a starting prize to the second starting opening 2004. The random numbers extracted are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the fluctuating display of the second special symbol occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the fluctuating display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

After that, as the process of step S5305, a jackpot judgment process is performed, which is a judgment process regarding the jackpot win or loss, based on the read first jackpot judgment random number. Thereafter, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so as to proceed to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process ends.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non time saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the high probability state shown in FIG. Select a jackpot determination table (step S5312), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), select the low probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5313), and select The jackpot determination table is compared with the random number for jackpot determination read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110(A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is determined for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number) when the gaming state is low probability. (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) and the high probability jackpot judgment table used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non time saving state, high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a probability jackpot determination table. Then, in the low probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot judgment random numbers, 204 types of first jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 The first jackpot judgment random numbers (65,536 types) are associated with each other so that the first jackpot judgment random number of the type matches the loss judgment value indicating the loss (jackpot probability at low probability; approximately "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the random number for jackpot determination (second random number for jackpot determination) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing. In the referenced low-probability jackpot judgment table, 204 types of second jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65,332 types of second jackpot judgment random numbers are the above-mentioned losses. The second jackpot judgment random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to match the failure judgment value indicating that the winning probability is low (jackpot probability at low probability; approximately "1/321").

In addition, in the high probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot judgment random number, 2040 types of first jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value, and 63496 types of first jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value. The first jackpot judgment random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the loss judgment value (jackpot probability at high probability; approximately "1/32"). On the other hand, in the high probability jackpot judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the second jackpot judgment random number in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing. , 2040 kinds of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 63496 kinds of second jackpot determination random numbers match the loss determination value indicating the above-mentioned loss. The second random numbers for determining a jackpot are associated with each other (probability of jackpot at high probability; approximately "1/32"). In addition, the jackpot judgment value (the jackpot judgment value The number of jackpot judgment values may be the same (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different). In this case, the jackpot judgment value of at least one of the jackpot judgment table for low probability and the jackpot judgment table for high probability may be made different (both may be made different). .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot judgment table with the random number for jackpot judgment read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, and when it is judged that it is a jackpot (step S5315 ), sets a jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a jackpot (step S5316), and ends the jackpot determination process.

In addition, if it is determined in step S5315 that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot judgment random number read above matches the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, based on the selected jackpot judgment table. It is determined whether or not (step S5317). However, as mentioned above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process) of this example, the random number for jackpot determination that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), and in this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit has not been won (it is determined that it is a loss).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game loses in step S5317, the reach determination table is compared with the random number for reach determination read out in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM and is used when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state. A reach determination table in a high probability time saving state used in the case of , and a reach determination table in a low probability state used when the gaming state is in a low probability state (low probability non time saving state) are provided.

Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, one type of reach determination random number matches the reach determination value indicating reach, and 71 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination value indicating not reach. The above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to coincide with each other. However, in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state, in order to maximize the speed of game progress when in the time saving state, all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating that there is no reach. In this way, it may be possible to avoid a match with the reach determination value indicating reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state are used to determine reach. The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 kinds of random numbers for reach determination indicate no reach. In this manner, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher than in the high probability time saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-time saving state, there are five types of reach determination including the same reach determination random numbers as the reach determination table set in the high probability time saving state and the low probability state. The above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination are respectively associated so that the random number for reach determination matches the reach determination value indicating that reaching is possible, and the 67 types of random numbers for reach determination match the reach determination value indicating that reaching is not possible. In this manner, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is the same as in the low probability non-time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the random number for reach determination read out in step S5302 (step S5319), and if it is determined that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120). , sets a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is a reach, and ends the process (step S5121).

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. By comparing the selected symbol determination table with the selected symbol determination table, a jackpot symbol is determined as a mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (a stop symbol of the first special symbol) (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110(B), the first special symbol side symbol determination table contains random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200) for the judgment results (8R probability variable jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). (Random numbers for the first jackpot symbol) are stored in a form that is associated with each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 110(C), the second special symbol side symbol determination table has a random number for the second jackpot symbol (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Here, a total of 200 second jackpot symbol random numbers) are stored in a manner that they are associated with each other.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the determination result associated with the obtained jackpot symbol random number. In addition, in the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot symbol and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol are set to be different. . More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) for a variable jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability state and a regular jackpot that does not trigger a transition to a high probability state is said to be the same, but for the first jackpot symbol. The expected value of the game balls that can be obtained by winning the jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol is greater than the expected value of the gaming balls that can be obtained by winning the jackpot determined based on the random number. ing.

The specific game/performance contents for each type of jackpot are briefly summarized as follows.
1. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 detects that the jackpot 2103 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine game balls have entered the jackpot 2103. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs, and performs a battle performance (battle victory performance) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, and in the high-probability time-saving state. 8R certain variable jackpot A controlled by the performance mode that is shown on the performance display device 1600 as being in a relatively advantageous state.

2. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 detects that the jackpot 2103 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine game balls have entered the jackpot 2103. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state controls to a low probability time saving state until the variable display of the special symbol is consumed 100 times (or wins the jackpot within the period until it is consumed 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state. 8R normal jackpot in which a battle performance in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat performance) is performed, and the performance display device 1600 is controlled to a performance mode in which a relatively disadvantageous state is shown in a low probability time shortening state.

3. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 detects that the jackpot 2103 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine game balls have entered the jackpot 2103. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 16R jackpot game state is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R jackpot game state, a production (success production) is performed as to whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (or becomes 16 rounds). ) is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after being controlled to a high probability time saving state, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to a performance mode in which a relatively advantageous state is shown. 16R surefire jackpot

4. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 detects that the jackpot 2103 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine game balls have entered the jackpot 2103. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, a performance (failure performance) regarding whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (or becomes 16 rounds) is performed. ) is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after being controlled to a high probability time saving state, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to a performance mode in which a relatively advantageous state is shown. 8R certain strange jackpot B

5. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 detects that after the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) or that 9 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening/closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected twice, the game ball is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 2R jackpot game state, a special It is controlled to a low probability time saving state until the fluctuating display of symbols is used 100 times (or you win the jackpot within the period until it is used 100 times), and during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state, a specific character A 2R normal jackpot that is controlled to a performance mode in which a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which the player is defeated is performed, and a performance display device 1600 indicates that the player is in a relatively disadvantageous state in a low probability time shortening state.

In addition, in the left-handed hitting state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 2004, and only the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, and there is a reserved ball with the second special symbol. Except in the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and a jackpot (8R probability variable jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) related to the first special symbol will occur. Similarly, no game ball enters the first starting port 2002 in the right-handed hitting state. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 will occur, and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 will not be displayed unless there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol. Only the variable display is executed, and jackpots related to the second special symbol (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) occur.

In addition, in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, only about 1000 game balls are paid out by repeating the opening/closing pattern of opening the jackpot 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 8 times, In the jackpot related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the opening/closing pattern in which the jackpot 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times at maximum.

In addition, in the first special symbol stop pattern setting process, if it is determined to be 8R definite variable jackpot A, the 8R definite variable jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if it is determined to be 8R normal jackpot, the jackpot symbol is set to 8R normal jackpot symbol. decide. Also, although not shown, in the second special symbol stop pattern setting process, if the 16R probability variable jackpot is determined, the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 8R probability variation jackpot B is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. When the B symbol is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Furthermore, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the small win flag is set as a process in step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process (step S5239), the small hit symbol ( After determining the unique pattern stopping mode (step S5334), the process moves to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the losing symbol as the state when the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S5336), and then moves to step S5337. do.

After the process of determining the stop symbols is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S5337 to select the lottery result (type of jackpot, small hit, out of reach, or out of reach). A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may also instruct the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displaying the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and changing the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → The display is stopped in the order of the middle decorative symbols (in some cases, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same symbol and are synchronously displayed in a variable manner and stopped at the same time). For example, if the jackpot is won in a type other than the 2R normal jackpot, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three left, middle, and right decorative symbols. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as any other symbol) is determined. In addition, when a reach miss is specified, a miss symbol with a reach (a combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; a miss symbol with a reach; If the winning pattern is determined and a miss is specified, a miss symbol without reach is determined (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). The stop symbols determined in this way are displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variable time specified from the variable pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes a winning performance display (special display mode) to appear before the jackpot game starts, and the jackpot game After the start of the game, a performance display during the jackpot game appears.

FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 112, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S5341), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and the small hit flag is set. is set (step S5343), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small hit is selected (step S5344), and if a reach flag is set (step S5345), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a reach is selected (step S5344). (not shown) (step S5346), and if none of the jackpot flag, small hit flag, and reach flag are set, that is, if the result is a normal loss (a result of not executing the reach effect), when the result is a loss. A variation pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for variation display pattern read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, a variation pattern to be executed is determined (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variable pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of this, and variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets a variation time set in correspondence to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). Then, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283), this process ends. As a result, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 1403 for the variable time determined in this way, and the effect control is performed on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. will be carried out.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table of this example includes random numbers for jackpot determination (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number) and jackpot symbol random numbers (first jackpot symbol random number, second jackpot symbol random number). A plurality of types are provided for each determination result based on the determination result. In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of pieces of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The random numbers for the first variable display pattern are stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a reads out the selected variation pattern table from among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the judgment results based on the jackpot judgment random number and the jackpot symbol random number in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. The above-mentioned special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are compared with the random number for the fluctuating display pattern that has been read out, and the fluctuating time information associated with the random number for the fluctuating display pattern that has been read out is obtained from this table. Determine the fluctuation pattern of. As a result, a determination process regarding the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, there is no chance of winning a small hit, so the fluctuation pattern table for the small winning is not used. In this example, there is no small winning, but it may be possible to win a small winning.

In addition, in the variation pattern table during reach in this example, the mode type of the reach effect to be executed is determined by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute and the random number for the variation display pattern. has been done. For example, in the non-time-saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 The random numbers for the 18 types of variable display patterns are set as judgment values (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with low expectations for a jackpot will be executed, and the random numbers for 18 types of variable display patterns are for the high expectations for a jackpot. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach effects is to be executed.

In addition, super reach performance (SP performance) is a game in which the expectation of jackpot is higher than normal reach performance, and for players who desire the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state, when the super reach performance is executed, the player who is in a jackpot gaming state Expectations are increasing. In other words, this kind of super reach performance has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of jackpot, and as a result, even if a loss is displayed in the end, the player's expectation level for the jackpot gaming state will decrease. You will be able to increase your However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise players' expectations for a jackpot game state, a highly anticipated preview performance that is a separate lottery from the fluctuating pattern appears during the period when the super reach performance is being executed. It is required to do (compound).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot symbol random number and is used when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the non-time saving state and the time saving state A common variation time of 12 seconds is set for both. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the second jackpot determination random number and the second symbol random number and is used to determine the variation time of the second special symbol, the time saving state is 0.1 seconds to A variation time of 12 seconds can be set, and a variation time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time-saving state and in the non-time-saving state, and when the first special symbol is fluctuating in the time-saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 is At the same time as prompting the player, time is secured for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004.

In addition, if 0.1 seconds is selected from the fluctuation time when the second special symbol loses, each game ball that is hit into the game area 5a at an interval of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) This prevents items from being discharged without being subjected to lottery processing.

That is, the game ball hit right is supplied to the area directly above the gate section 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area into the gate section 2003 while in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a win as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). This creates a situation where the balls can be received one after another into the second starting port 2004 (a time-saving state where almost all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received into the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be executed one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of around "1 in 32". It becomes possible.

In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), the second Game balls are often accepted into the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table when the second special symbol misses based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 has extremely low fluctuation times in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.). It is said that it can be set to a short value of 0.1 seconds. In other words, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol variation is ended in a time (0.1 seconds) that is less than the firing interval of game balls (0.6 seconds), so it is 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where game balls fired at intervals are received one after another into the second starting port 2004, it is possible to prevent these game balls from being ejected without being subjected to lottery processing. .

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, the variable timer in which the variable time is set according to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process for the variable pattern (step S5282) is subtracted by 1. As a result, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of this step S5373, this process ends at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

In addition, even though the variable timer has been subtracted by 1 (step S5371), if the variable time timer has not reached 0, until the variable time timer reaches 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixed and stopped), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes in steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, display control is performed to display the stop symbols determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern (step S5382).

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start a jackpot gaming state (step S5387); The waiting time until the start of the jackpot gaming state (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, the high probability flag is reset. At the time when the time saving flag is reset (step S5389), the fluctuation frequency counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the initial value, the first special symbol normal process (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined in the process of step S5235 that the jackpot execution flag is set, and the jackpot game will be executed in the jackpot control process (step S5240a) described above. The state will now be executed.

The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a jackpot start command (8R probability variable jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variation jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Set the jackpot command, 8R certain variable jackpot B command, and 2R normal jackpot command). Thereby, a performance of a jackpot game state (battle performance or additional challenge performance) according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the performance display device 1600, each lamp/LED, each speaker, etc.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not a low probability time saving state exists (step S5390). Then, when in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether the number of variations of the special symbol consumed after being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here, 100 times) ( Step S5391). In other words, when the number of variations of the special symbol consumed after being controlled to the low probability time saving state reaches a predetermined upper limit (100 times), it is assumed that the conditions for ending the low probability time saving state are satisfied, and the time saving state is The function is stopped and a transition is made to the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state) (step S5392).

After the processing related to the time saving function is thus performed, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small win flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small win start command indicating to start the small win game state is set (step S5394), and the small win flag is set. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the small winning game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small winning execution flag indicating that the small winning gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value. At the time when the information is updated (step S5394), this process ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined in the process of step S5236 that the small hit execution flag is set, and the small win control process (step S5240b) will be executed. A small winning game state is now executed. Incidentally, unlike when a jackpot is won, the gaming state is not changed when such a small winning gaming state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is considered a loss and the first special symbol process is performed without performing any processing related to the jackpot or small win. At the time when the flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined that the jackpot execution flag and the small hit execution flag are not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game will be started according to the pending status. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) is performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and a game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, then as shown in FIG. As the process of step S5402, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes gate section passing processing such as acquiring the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and based on the read normal random number, a lottery process for the display mode of the normal symbol when the variation control is stopped is performed.
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 is performed based on the regular symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variable display of the above-mentioned normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 is stopped (step S5405)
4. The fluctuation display of the normal symbols is performed such that the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbols is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbols is stopped. Normal symbol stop processing to stop (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the normal symbol is in a mode that suggests a "normal symbol hit", the movable piece becomes open and the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004. Normal electric accessories release processing (step S5407) that executes processing to enable control of

In addition, the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is operated so that its initial value indicates that the above-mentioned normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate passage process (step S5402).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. As the process of step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value "4" or not.

In the process of step S5411, if it is determined that the number of pending normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed in order to newly put the variable display control of the normal symbols in a pending state. Processing will be carried out. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal pending number counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as processing in step S5413, the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, if it is determined that the number of pending normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S5412 to S5414, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbols is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the normal holding number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the holding state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control for the normal symbols in the pending state, then as a process of step S5422, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a are The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of symbols (for example, normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers) is read out from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal holding number counter is counted down, and when the variable display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted in response to the passing of the game ball to the gate section 2003 are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Remember. When a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area is read out. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the fluctuating display control of the above-mentioned normal symbols occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the fluctuating display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal figure hit determination table (not shown) in the time saving mode if the current gaming state is the time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426). Step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5425), selects the normal figure hit determination table (not shown) in the non-time-saving state ( Step S5427), the selected normal symbol hit determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing are compared (step S5428).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the gaming state is short time (high probability time short state), and the normal figure hit determination table is used when the gaming state is non-time short. (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state). Then, in the short-time normal pattern winning judgment table that is referred to for comparison with normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern winning judgment value indicating that the normal pattern has been won. The above-mentioned normal random numbers are associated with each other so that the normal map indicating a loss does not coincide with the loss judgment value. In this way, in the time saving mode, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the winning pattern is guaranteed, and the movable piece becomes open and the game ball passes through the second starting port 2004. Acceptance is controlled. Rather than all of the 255 types, more normal random numbers than in the non-time-saving state may be made to match the normal pattern winning determination value indicating that the winning pattern has been won.

In addition, in the non-time-saving normal pattern winning judgment table that is referred to for comparison with normal random numbers, it is possible that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern winning judgment value indicating that a winning pattern has been won. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to match the ordinary figure deviation judgment value indicating that the ordinary figure is not correct. In this way, in the non-time saving period, even if a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, there is no chance of winning a normal ticket, so the movable piece 2106 is in the open state and the second starting port There is no possibility of controlling the acceptance of game balls into 2004. However, as mentioned above, it may be possible to make it possible to win the normal symbol even in the non-time-saving state. In this case, the probability of winning is lower than in the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the winning probability. When the second starting port 2004 is opened, the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, two seconds to allow the game ball to be received into the second starting port 2004, and then moved forward again. It may also be possible to make it impossible to accept game balls into the second starting port 2004.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, and when it is determined that the ordinary symbol has won (step S5429 ), after setting the normal pattern winning flag indicating that the fluctuation is winning per normal pattern (step S5430), the normal pattern winning as the state when the fluctuation control of the normal pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the normal pattern) The symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing is that the symbol is a loss, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol A normal symbol is determined as a mode at the time of control stop (stop symbol of a normal symbol) (step S5432). After that, at the time when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated (step S5433) so as to proceed to the normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404), this process is ended.

While such control is performed by the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to perform the peripheral control unit steady processing (received command analysis processing). In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and it is possible to execute a performance according to the game situation.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a starting prize has occurred, and when such a situation exists, performs control regarding a hold display and a look-ahead effect in accordance with the starting winning. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped gaming situation, the following fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting processing, production symbol fluctuation start processing, production symbol fluctuation processing, production symbol fluctuation stop processing, jackpot display processing , a jackpot game process, or a jackpot end performance process.

Waiting process for reception of a fluctuation pattern designation command: Until a fluctuation pattern command related to a fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, a performance (demonstration performance, etc.) is performed when the symbols are not in a fluctuating state and control regarding jackpots is not being performed. While performing control, upon receiving a variation pattern command regarding a variation pattern from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the production symbol variation start process.

Production pattern variation start processing: Various production contents (production pattern, preview production, etc.) during the pattern variation period are determined based on a variation pattern command, etc., and variation of decorative symbols is started based on the determined production contents. Control as follows. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during effect pattern variation. In addition, among the fluctuation patterns (production patterns), many of the "variation patterns (production patterns) that are stopped at jackpot symbols" are prepared in the form of pairs with "variation patterns (production patterns) that are stopped at loss symbols". By functioning as the same variation pattern (performance pattern), a performance is provided as to whether a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol will appear. Therefore, when explaining fluctuation patterns (performance patterns) below, when referring to "predetermined fluctuation patterns" or "specific fluctuation patterns," unless otherwise specified, "the pattern will stop at the jackpot symbol. It means both "predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern)" and "predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern) that stops at a losing symbol", and as a result of the production content progressing in the same manner. A turning point will be reached where either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol will appear.

Processing during production symbol fluctuation: Performs control to start various production contents determined in the production symbol variation start processing at respective timings during the symbol variation period, and when the variation time ends, changes the value of the process flag to the production symbol. Update to a value compatible with fluctuation stop processing.
Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (design confirmation command) instructing to stop all patterns, control is performed to stop the fluctuation of decorative patterns and derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, if the decorative pattern is to be stopped at a jackpot pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process, and if the decorative pattern is to be stopped at a loss pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command. Update to the corresponding value.

Jackpot display processing: Controls the performance (such as the display performance that notifies the performance display device 1600 of the occurrence of a jackpot) during the period from when the decorative pattern stops at the jackpot pattern until the start of the jackpot game. Thereafter, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot in-game processing.

Processing during the jackpot game: Controls various performances during the period when the jackpot game state occurs. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Jackpot end performance processing: In the performance display device 1600, the performance during the period from the end of the jackpot game state until the change permissible state is reached (such as a display performance that notifies the player that the jackpot game state has ended) is controlled. . Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of performance patterns (fluctuation performance) that is referred to in the performance symbol variation start process in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command is associated with a production pattern (variation production). Therefore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a, it determines the production pattern (variation production) associated with the variation pattern command based on the determination table T1, and (Fluctuation Effect) Based on this, control is performed so that the variation of the decorative pattern is started.

Note that the effect pattern (variable effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variation number indicated by the above-mentioned variation pattern command. For example, multiple performance patterns (fluctuating effects) are associated with one fluctuation number indicated by a fluctuation pattern command, and one of these performance patterns (fluctuating effects) is determined based on the performance lottery, gaming situation, etc. You may also do so. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment also allows a plurality of effect patterns to be associated with some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

Also, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after determining the performance pattern (variable performance) in this way, performs a preview lottery (determination process for the preview performance) based on the jackpot determination result, symbol type, and fluctuation pattern. , by performing control (processing during performance pattern fluctuation) to make the preview performance won in the preview lottery appear at a predetermined timing while the performance pattern determined above (fluctuation performance) is performed, multiple performance contents can be displayed. As combinations are possible, the appearance of these symbols indicates the degree of expectation for the appearance of jackpot symbols.

Conventionally, among such complex effects, although they are the same specific preview effect (for example, a timer effect), multiple effects may appear and be executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed. It is hoped that this will help maintain interest in gaming. However, since the preview effect can only be combined when there is a high expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear, the frequency with which multiple timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed naturally becomes low. , it was considered difficult to sufficiently improve gaming interest.

As will be described later, "timer performance" refers to a predetermined performance that appears during the execution of a performance pattern (variable performance), and a count display toward the timing when the predetermined performance is performed is set to a first predetermined value. (for example, "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"), or as a standby display (in preparation, etc.) before starting the count display. It is. In other words, in this case, when a count display (for example, countdown) is started from the first predetermined value as a timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, a performance (for example, a conversation preview or a cut-in A , B, etc.) is targeted for timer effect, it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the case of a timer effect (particularly a timer effect on the preview side that is executed as a result of a preview lottery), the target effect of the effect is kept secret at least at the time the count display starts. It is desirable to do so. In addition, "timer performance target" refers to the timer performance that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value reaches a second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"). That is, in the timer effect, a count is displayed toward the timing at which the effect target occurs.

In addition, in the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place to accurately display the number of seconds. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, but as long as it is executed as a count effect in which a count is displayed by counting up or down, the elapsed time from the start of counting ( It does not have to be an accurate indication of the number of seconds, etc.).

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice-side timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when winning in the preview lottery, the above-mentioned effect pattern ( It is possible to execute a timer performance (variable timer performance) that is pre-installed as the performance content of the variable performance. In other words, in this case, if only the timer effect on the preview side executes the count effect display as ``the effect content of the preview effect that functions to increase the jackpot expectation level with respect to the effect pattern determined based on the variable pattern command''. First, by executing the performance pattern itself as "the production content determined based on the variation pattern command", the expectation level can be changed from the jackpot expectation level indicated by the performance pattern determined based on the variation pattern command. It becomes possible to make a count effect display (timer effect) appear without wasting the increase in expectations (increasing the level of expectation by satisfying the condition of ``winning in a preview lottery''). For example, if the jackpot expectation level when a specific performance pattern determined based on the variable pattern command appears is "20%", if the preview side timer performance is further executed, the jackpot expectation level will increase due to the function of the composite performance. For example, the frequency of appearance will be reduced to 40%, and the appearance frequency will have to be lowered accordingly.However, if a variable side timer effect is executed as the effect of the specific effect pattern itself, you can expect a jackpot. It is possible to execute a timer effect while keeping the frequency at "20%" (it can appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and the appearance frequency can be suitably maintained.

In addition, the jackpot expectation level when a production pattern (variable production) appears in the judgment table T1 differs depending on the variation number (and production pattern), and basically, the jackpot expectation increases as the variation number becomes larger. There is a tendency for the degree to increase. For example, in the production patterns corresponding to variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), variable-side timer production is executed in which "conversation preview" is the production target in all of the production patterns. The appearance ratio is fluctuation number 5 (6) > fluctuation number 9 (10) > fluctuation number 17 (18), while the expectation of jackpot at the time of appearance is fluctuation number 5 (6) < fluctuation number 9 ( 10)<Fluctuation number 17 (18). For convenience of explanation, only the determination table that is referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail, but even in the determination table that is referred to in the low-probability time-saving state and the high-probability time-saving state, the performance content of the performance pattern itself is This includes a performance pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which a variable-side timer performance can be executed, and can appear with a different probability from that in the normal gaming state.

In addition, in the determination table T1, variation numbers 3 to 6 are all the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but variation numbers 5 and 6 are variable-side timer effects that target conversation previews. This differs from variation numbers 3 and 4 in this point. Also, variation numbers 7 to 14 are all the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but variation numbers 9 and 10 are variable side timer effects that target conversation previews, and variation numbers 11 and 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed. In 12, a variable side timer effect is executed with cut-in A as the effect target, and in variable numbers 13 and 14, the conversation preview and cut-in A are executed, and at the same time, a variable side timer effect is executed with these as the effect target. They differ in that they can be In addition, variation numbers 15 to 22 are all the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed, but variation numbers 17 and 18 are variable-side timer effects that target conversation previews, and variation numbers 19 and 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed. In 20, a variable side timer effect is executed with cut-in B as the effect, and in variable numbers 21 and 22, a conversation preview and cut-in B are executed, and a variable side timer effect is executed with them as the effect. They differ in that they can be In addition, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the variable side timer effect is executed with cut-ins A and B as the effect than when the variable side timer effect is executed with the conversation preview as the effect. is set so that the expectation of a jackpot tends to be higher when a variable-side timer effect is executed that targets both the conversation preview and cut-ins A and B.

Furthermore, "conversation preview" is a performance that can appear relatively early after the performance pattern (decorative pattern variation performance) is executed, and that often has a relatively low level of expectation. On the other hand, cut-ins A and B can appear at a relatively late stage after the production pattern (variation production of decorative symbols) is executed, and a relatively high level of expectation has been built up. This is a performance that often occurs (or a performance that always builds up a relatively high level of expectation). Therefore, the "conversation preview" is set so that its appearance rate (execution probability) is higher than other productions with higher expectations (cut-ins A and B, character A actions, B, etc. described later). It has become something that will be done. Also, in character reach, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the variable production is executed to correspond to cut-in A that appears as the content of the preview production, whereas in SP reach, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the preview production is This is executed to correspond to cut-in B rather than cut-in A that appears as the production content of the production.

Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the performance contents (performance pattern ) is assigned as the variable side timer effect. On top of this, if the fluctuation pattern is of a "predetermined type (such as a shortening fluctuation or a normal reach performance with low expectations) (for example, fluctuation numbers 1 to 6)", a count performance is displayed as a timer performance on the preview side. While ensuring that the performance is not won (by increasing the premium level) and suitably increasing the expectation level when the preview side timer performance appears, the fluctuation pattern is set to ``Fluctuation pattern that executes the fluctuation side timer performance ( count fluctuation patterns such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22, etc.), the fluctuation pattern is of the predetermined type (for example, fluctuation The proportion corresponding to numbers 1 to 6, etc.) is set to be low.

Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count variation patterns in which the variation side timer effect is executed, but 2 of them (0 Since only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) of the variation patterns (which may be set individually) correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), the corresponding ratio is "2/14". On the other hand, eight fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, and 16) are prepared as fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation side timer effect is not executed, and among these, four fluctuation patterns (variation Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), the corresponding ratio is "4/8".

In such a configuration, when the performance content of the variable pattern is one that can perform a count effect display (variable side timer effect) (count variation pattern), the advance notice is more effective than when the variable pattern is a variable pattern that does not perform a variable side timer effect. The rate at which it is determined that count performance display (notice side timer performance) cannot be executed as the performance content of the performance is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one performance pattern (variable performance) without unnecessarily increasing the level of expectation and lowering the appearance frequency.

Also, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the production pattern (variation production) determined in the production symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), the rate at which the notice-side timer effect appears is made to differ depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect patterns corresponding to variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the above-mentioned preview side timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. When the notification side timer effect is executed, the above-mentioned notice side timer effect can appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 are executed, the above-mentioned notice side timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability. ing.

Note that even when the effect patterns corresponding to variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the above-mentioned advance notice side timer effect may appear with a low probability. In addition, even if any of the performance patterns corresponding to variable numbers 15 to 22, which allow the above-mentioned notice-side timer performance to appear with a high lottery probability, are executed, in reality, it is more likely to be a jackpot than a loss. It is said that the above-mentioned preview side timer effect can appear with a higher lottery probability with the winning effect pattern, and it is said that the variable number 22 can appear with an even higher lottery probability than the variable number 16. ing.

In such a configuration, the count effect display may be previewed depending on whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The execution rate of the performance content (notice side timer performance) will be different. Therefore, among the above count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the proportion of multiple count displays appearing within one production pattern (variation production) is high, that type In some cases, it is possible to further increase the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the performance pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach) in which the performance content of the same reach type appears, the variable side timer performance is included as the performance content. In the production patterns (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the notice-side timer effect does not occur within the execution period of the production pattern, compared to production patterns (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) that do not include the variation-side timer production as the production content. The rate at which the effects appear (the rate at which it is decided to execute the preview-side timer effect in the preview lottery) is set to be high. In other words, in this case, two timer performances (variable side timer performance, preview side timer performance) will appear within one performance pattern by simply requiring a high jackpot expectation level for one preview side timer performance to be won in the preview lottery. In turn, it becomes possible to realize the double timer performance opportunity without unnecessary increase in the expectation of jackpot.

Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the production pattern (variation production) determined in the production symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in the case of a variable side timer effect (fluctuating side count effect display) where "conversation notice" is the effect target and a variable side timer effect (fluctuating side count effect display) where "cut-in" is the effect target. The count display formats (forms and colors of count numbers, etc.) are different. In other words, in this case, even if a performance pattern (for example, fluctuation number 9, 11) whose performance content is the same reach performance is executed, the count display mode of the fluctuation side timer performance (variation side count performance display) is checked. By doing this, in combination with the fact that the rate at which the above-mentioned notice-side timer effect appears is made to differ depending on which count fluctuation pattern, it is recognized that the notice-side timer effect is likely to appear. You will be able to look forward to it.

Regarding the form of the count display that appears in the preview side timer effect (preview side count effect display), regardless of whether the target of the effect is the same (conversation preview, cut-in), the variable side timer effect (variable side timer effect) It may be different (or different from at least one of them) than the count display mode (conversation preview, cut-in) that appears in the count production display), or it may be the same as the count display mode (or at least one of them). .

However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as a timer effect on the preview side (count effect display on the preview side) will be executed in a common manner regardless of the type of effect that is the target of the display. This is useful in improving expectations by making the player aware that a preview-side timer performance with a high frequency is appearing. In this sense, it is more desirable for the preview side timer effect to be different from any of the count display modes (conversation preview, cut-in) that appear in the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display). Regarding the above-mentioned common aspects of the preview side timer effect (notice side count effect display), multiple modes with different expectations (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) are prepared, and any one of them is executed. You can do it like this.

In addition, in order to better recognize that the preview side timer effect is being executed, it is necessary to display a count display when the preview side timer effect is executed and a count display when the variable side timer effect is executed. It is desirable to have different counting speeds (for example, the speed at which the numbers change during count-up and count-down). In such a configuration, after the timer effect starts, even during the period when the count display is in progress, the count speed of the timer effect is watched closely, and the timer effect is compared to the variable side timer effect, which has relatively low expectations. This makes it possible to create interest in which of the highly anticipated advance notice side timer performances is being executed, and to suitably maintain game interest during the timer expiration period.

At this time, in the variable side timer performance, depending on the target of the performance (conversation preview, cut-in), the count is displayed at a speed relatively close to (or the same speed as) the count speed of the preview side timer performance ( If the count is displayed at a speed that is not relatively close to the count speed of the timer effect on the preview side (conversation preview), it is possible to check whether the timer effect on the preview side is being executed or not. It becomes possible to add interest by varying the difficulty of judgment. In addition, in the variable side timer effect (or the notice side timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating the appearance and deletion of the count number, whereas in the advance notice side timer effect (or the variable side timer effect), the count number is displayed continuously. The count may be displayed by displaying the information.

According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the preview side timer effect are executed at the same time, it is easy to understand whether or not the preview side timer effect is being executed. It is expected that this will lead to an increase in interest in gaming.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count is displayed for the variation patterns (count variation patterns such as variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, and 17 to 22) corresponding to the variation side timer performance. A plurality of performance patterns with different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time required to complete all counts) are set as selectable performance patterns. When a variable pattern corresponding to the variable timer effect is obtained, one of the plurality of effect patterns is determined based on the random number for the effect, and the count display of the variable timer effect and the preview side timer are displayed. By varying the ease with which the performance can be executed simultaneously with the count display (for example, the larger the total count is, the easier it is to overlap), the ease of determining whether or not the preview side timer performance is being executed can be varied. I try to make it more interesting by

In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple performance patterns (target of timer performance and reach We decided to prepare multiple performance patterns (with the same production content), but with different start timing or end timing of the count display (total number of counts, or time required to complete all counts) (however, if the content is the same as that of the timer production), The type of performance to be performed and the type of ready-to-reach performance executed as the performance content of the variation pattern are the same for each performance pattern), but a plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared and made to correspond one-to-one.

In addition, the number of counts displayed (total count) when appearing in the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect may be different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect may differ. If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different between the side timer effect and the preview side timer effect, it is possible to make it more interesting by varying the difficulty of determining whether or not the preview side timer effect is being executed. .

In addition, if the timer effect on the preview side is executed with a countdown display, and the timer effect on the variable side is executed with a countup display, it can be determined with certainty whether or not the timer effect on the preview side is being executed. It is expected that this will greatly improve gaming enjoyment. In addition, while the preview side timer effect is executed in a countdown display, the variable side timer effect for a specific effect (for example, a conversation preview) is executed in a count up display, and the effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the variable side timer effect for (cut-in) is executed with a countdown display, the difficulty of determining whether or not the preview side timer effect is being executed can be varied depending on the target of the effect, making it more interesting. It will be possible to grant.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases in which the same effect is targeted for the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, and there are cases in which different effects are targeted for effect. control. When the variable-side timer performance and the preview-side timer performance target the same performance (for example, a conversation preview), compared to when the variable-side timer performance and the preview-side timer performance target different performances. In addition to setting it so that the rate at which the jackpot expectation level decreases is high, even if the same performance (for example, a conversation preview) is targeted for the variable side timer performance and the preview side timer performance, each count display The end timing is different.

In other words, in this case, even if the variable-side timer performance and the preview-side timer performance target the same performance (e.g., a conversation preview), one of the variable-side timer performance and the preview-side timer performance performs the predetermined value first. At this point, it is as if a different performance is being performed (the timer performance is executed in a manner with relatively high expectations). It appears as if After this, the other count display that was continued will reach a predetermined value and end in a manner that makes it clear that the same performance (for example, a conversation preview) is the target of the performance. Even if it is revealed by the timer production on the finished side that a conversation preview with relatively low expectations is targeted for production, a different production that can appear after that is targeted for production ( It is expected that the player's interest in the game will be improved by maintaining the sense of expectation that the timer effect is being executed in a relatively highly anticipated manner.

In addition, when the same effect (for example, a conversation preview) is targeted for the variable-side timer effect and the preview-side timer effect, the timing when the variable-side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the timing when the preview-side timer effect reaches the predetermined value. It is desirable that a separate display corresponding to the end of counting (for example, "Counting succeeded!", "Chance UP!", etc.) appears at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

More specifically, a variable-side timer performance and a preview-side timer performance, each of which targets a "conversation preview" executed as a variation-side or preview-side performance, are made to appear within one performance pattern. In this case, the count display of the variable-side timer effect and the count display of the preview-side timer effect will be performed simultaneously, but in the variable-side timer effect, the variable-side timer effect will be displayed in conjunction with the "conversation preview". While the count display progresses in accordance with the fluctuation-side specific effects that occur (such as ``Count Success!'' or effects that match the appearance of conversation previews), the timer effects on the preview side are related to the ``conversation preview''. A count display is displayed in accordance with a specific trailer side effect that occurs as a preview side effect (such as "Chance UP!" or a timer end display that appears at the start timing of a conversation preview (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect)). As the process progresses, separate displays corresponding to the end of counting will appear at different timings.

By the way, each of the conversation preview and cut-in performances is required to be executed whenever they are targeted for a variable-side timer performance (when a count fluctuation pattern is determined). In particular, conversation previews and cut-ins are performances that can be executed in multiple ways with different expectations, so if they are targeted for a variable-side timer performance, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, Therefore, it is necessary to make it appear in a manner that is highly expected. Therefore, the performance that is the target of the variable-side timer performance is incorporated in advance as the performance content of the above-mentioned performance pattern (variable performance), and just by executing the performance pattern, the variable-side timer performance and its target are combined. It is desirable to allow each of the effects (modes with relatively high expectations) to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to control so that when the variable side timer effect is executed, the effect targeted for the effect (a mode with relatively high expectations) is always selected in the preview lottery. .

In addition, if the conversation preview and cut-in effects are not included in the variable timer effect, it will be determined whether or not they will appear as part of the preview side in the preview lottery described later. A determination is made as to what manner (relatively high or low expectation) the appearance should be made as part of the production content, and control regarding appearance is performed based on the result of this determination. .

The production pattern determination process using FIG. 118 will be summarized below.
That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires a variation pattern command, a symbol type command, etc. from the main control MPU 1310a, it first determines the current game based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, etc. Refer to the judgment table according to the state. For example, if the production pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to create a bias (expectation level) in the probability change expectation when a specific production pattern appears, the number of rounds in a jackpot game state, etc. become.

Next, multiple performance patterns (such as multiple performance patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display that appears in the variable side timer performance, etc.) are available for selection as the performance patterns associated with the variable number. If so, one of a plurality of production patterns having different start timing or end timing of the count display is selected based on the jackpot determination. At this time, we will set a performance pattern so that the start timing or end timing of the count display will be delayed at a higher rate if the jackpot determination is won. It is made to have a tendency that the later the time is, the higher the possibility that a jackpot symbol will appear.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, count fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, and 17 to 22) are acquired when a special performance condition is satisfied. Even in this case, a performance pattern set so that a variable side timer performance does not appear is selected from among a plurality of performance patterns.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the production pattern that appears during symbol variation (the production from the start of variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of variation) is selected in this way, what kind of preview production should be performed within the execution period of the production pattern. It will be decided whether to additionally execute (combine) in such a manner (preliminary lottery).

Figure 119 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel This figure shows an example of a sound definition table in the case of realizing a process of outputting only the sound. This sound definition table manages the definitions of playback priority, left/right pan initial values, vertical pan initial values, volume initial values, note number, seek point, playback type settings, and output type settings for each sound name. are doing. Note that here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions of notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and descriptions of the definitions of other notification sounds, performance sounds, etc. are omitted. Note that in addition to the definition based on the fixed channel method, it is also possible to use the definition based on the automatic channel method for each channel other than channel X to which the notification sound is assigned for the effect sound.

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of the notification sounds should be assigned to channel X and output when each of the notification sounds satisfies the output conditions. A high notification sound will be assigned to channel X and output, regardless of the allocation status to channel X of a notification sound with a low priority value. As will be described later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned to channel X first will be given priority, and the notification sound assigned to channel It will be done.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial sound image localization positions of the left and right speakers formed by the combination of the upper left speaker 573L, the lower left speaker 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, a difference is created in the volumes individually output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that the output is only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L), and when set to "0x80", for example, the output is output from the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker. The difference in volume that is individually output from the left and right speakers formed by the combination of 921L, upper right speaker 573R, and lower right speaker 921R becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, setting "0xFF" indicates that the signal is output only from the right speakers (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of vertical panning is the sound image localization of the sound from the upper and lower speakers, such as the pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R), for example. Represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the upper and lower pan settings during sound playback, a difference is created in the volumes output individually from the upper and lower speakers, making it possible to localize the sound image in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that the output is only from the pair of upper speakers 573, and if it is set to, for example, "0x80", it indicates the difference in volume that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers in combination. becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, setting "0xFF" indicates that output is only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set within a setting range of, for example, "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback that repeatedly plays the target sound (corresponding to "LOOP" in the illustration), or 1SHOT playback that plays the target sound once (corresponds to "1SHOT" in the diagram). It represents whether The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is to be reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 120 is a table showing the notification content, notification mode, notification time, and conditions for ending the notification (cancellation conditions) for each notification sound illustrated in FIG. 119, for each type of notification sound. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is determined for each notification sound, but this is done by dividing this into as many empty channels as possible in order to effectively utilize the single channel X. This is a measure to maintain the status and refrain from outputting the notification sound thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 120, notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) indicates a state in which magnetism has been detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity using a magnet is being carried out). It is something that informs you of something. The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Boo-boo, magnetism has been detected", and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Magnetism has been detected"). ) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and game board 5, respectively. In addition, the notification time is 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound 6 times) from the time of detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 for the loop process that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected". However, the display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps will continue to be executed until the cancellation condition of "returning the power" is met. It has become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), the vibration sensor 2405 detects vibration (there is a high possibility that cheating by cheating is being carried out). Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) notifies that the state is in the state), and count sensor 4005 (first big prize opening sensor or second big winning opening sensor) even though it is not in the jackpot gaming state (big winning opening state). A notification sound that notifies you that a state has been detected (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity is being carried out to forcibly open the closed grand prize hole and win game balls) by the winning hole sensor). 3 (big prize abnormality) is considered to belong to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraud has been committed, and the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group are The notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be the same.

For example, for notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), the notification mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "booboo vibration detected", and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , "Vibration detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is executed as the notification time. The loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound 6 times) from the time when the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps. The lighting will continue until the cancellation condition of "returning the power supply" is met. In addition, for notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), the notification mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "booboo big prize abnormality has been detected", and a Display (for example, "Great prize abnormality detected") and lighting of various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and as a notification time, The loop process that repeatedly outputs the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound 6 times) from the time when the count sensor 4005 detects the notification sound. The display and lighting of various lamps will continue to be executed until the cancellation condition of "powering on again" is met.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group with respect to the display within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Regarding the lighting of the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the lighting mode is the same for notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group (all of the various lamps are not necessarily turned on) (It doesn't have to be a specific aspect). In addition, regarding the notification sounds that are subject to loop processing, notification sounds such as "boo-boo" that play a role in notifying that something belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity) A combination of the alarm sound used in any of 3 to 3 and a message sound (unique sound) that serves to notify individual identification of the content of the notification by sequential output is adopted. Alarm sounds consist of monotonous sounds to give a warning meaning in tense fraudulent situations, and message sounds consist of a variety of sounds to clearly distinguish them from other notification sounds. It is desirable that the

In other words, when reporting something that belongs to the first notification group (a situation in which there is a high possibility that fraud has been committed), rather than specifying which notification type it is, it is important to determine how the hall should respond to the fraud. It is important to speed up the initial response. In this regard, according to the above configuration, only the notification sound of "boo-boo" and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light-emitting devices) are output, and only those belonging to the first notification group (fraudulent acts) are output. It is expected that this will speed up the hall's initial response to fraudulent acts. Furthermore, following the notification sound of "boo-boo", a message sound notifying the type of notification is output, and a message is displayed within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. As a result, it is expected that the hall side will be able to handle the initial response smoothly.

On the other hand, notification sound 4 (door open) is generated when the door frame release switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4 (possibility of fraudulent activity by opening the door). This is to notify that the door may have been opened due to abnormality response measures taken by the hall. The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "The door is open. '') and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively. In addition, the notification time is 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound three times) from the time when the door frame open switch 618 detects the loop process that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "Door is open ping pong ping pong". ), whereas the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps are canceled when the release condition is ``door closing detection (door frame release switch 618 causes the main body frame 4 to Detection that the door frame 3 is closed) is continued until the condition ``detection that the door frame 3 is closed'' is satisfied.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), the main body frame opening switch 619 detects that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 ( Although there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being carried out by opening the main body frame, there is also a possibility that the main body frame has been opened due to abnormal response measures by the hall side. , it is considered to belong to the second notification group when there is a moderate possibility that some kind of fraud has been committed and it cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are The mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be the same.

For example, for notification sound 5 (frame open), the notification mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Frame is open ping pong ping pong", and a display ( For example, "The frame is open") and various lamps (light-emitting devices) installed on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are lit, and at the same time, the main body frame open switch is activated as a notification time. 619, the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed in 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound three times). The lighting of the various lamps continues until the release condition "frame closure detection (detection of the main body frame 4 being closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619)" is satisfied. It happens.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group with respect to the display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Regarding the lighting of the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the lighting modes are the same for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group (all of the various lamps are not necessarily turned on) (It doesn't have to be a specific aspect). However, the lighting mode of the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode of the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. In addition, regarding the notification sounds that are subject to loop processing, there are message sounds (unique sounds) that play the role of individually identifying the content of the notification, and those belonging to the second notification group (fraudulent acts). A combination of sequential output with an alarm sound used in both notification sounds 4 and 5, such as "ping-pong ping-pong", which plays the role of notifying that a state in which there is a moderate possibility that a There is.

In other words, when notifying players who belong to the second notification group (states where there is a moderate possibility that fraudulent activity has been committed), it is important to ensure that players who are playing the game properly do not feel disgusted. It is important that the hall side be able to take measures to deal with abnormalities fairly quickly. In this regard, according to the above configuration, first, as the notification sound, a message sound is output to notify which notification type it is, as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later. Therefore, it is expected that those who play the game properly will be less likely to feel disgusted by it. On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for those who are playing the game properly to feel disgust, the message tone is followed by an alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong", although it is a different alarm sound than when belonging to the first notification group. In order to make it difficult for players who are playing the game properly to feel disgusted, the lighting mode is different from that when they belong to the first notification group, but it is output when they belong to the third notification group. By providing notification by lighting various lamps that do not occur, it is expected that the abnormality response measures on the hall side will be speeded up to some extent.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) indicates that the game ball hits the gate part 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a even though it is in a non-time saving state. The gate sensor 4003 detects that the gate has passed (the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and the game should be corrected to be played in a proper manner (left-handed)). This is to inform you that. The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed hitting," and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed hitting." ”) are executed respectively. In addition, as for the notification time, both the loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed batting" and the display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. It is designed to end in 20 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound twice) from the time when the gate sensor 4003 detects the detection.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed play guidance), the state in which the lower tray 322 is detected to be full with game balls by the full tank detection sensor 279 (lower tray 322 is in a state in which the ball should be removed), a notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is provided to provide game guidance for properly proceeding with the game, although the possibility of cheating is low. It is considered that the notification sound belongs to the third notification group when the device is in the desired state, and the notification mode, notification time, and release condition for all notification sounds belonging to the third notification group should be set to be the same. It is said that

For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), the notification mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball from the lower tray", and a Display (for example, "Please remove the ball from the lower tray") is executed, and a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball from the lower tray" as a notification time, and a game board. The display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 is configured to end in 20 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound twice) from the time when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects the full tank. .

However, regarding notification sound 6 (left-hand hitting guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), when they are terminated 20 seconds after detection by gate sensor 4003 and full tank detection sensor 279, those sensors 2401, When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-hand hitting guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

In addition, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more precisely, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds has been output, 5 seconds of silence is output. Data is assigned to channel It has become. Since notification sounds 6 and 7 both output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as unique notification modes different from the first notification group and the second notification group. The hall side can also properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group by simply checking the silent data part instead of the message sound part that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. Regarding the silent data, it is desirable to prepare it in advance as one piece of sound data (10 seconds of sound data) including the message sound, and to perform loop processing while assigning this to channel X.

By the way, there may be silent parts in the notification sounds used in the first notification group and the second notification group (such as between the alarm sound and the message sound), but these are very short periods to create a "pause". It is clear that this is a period of time and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent portion (third notification group) having a relatively long time and having a group identification function.

According to this configuration, alarm sounds such as "boo-boo" and "ping-pong-ping-pong" are not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silent period in between. It becomes possible to provide information regarding game guidance without making the user feel disgusted.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the priority order is set to be the same for notification sounds that belong to the same notification group, but the priority order is set to be different for notification sounds that belong to the same notification group. You can do it like this. In addition, as the playback type setting, loop playback in which the target sound is played repeatedly is adopted, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and 1-SHOT playback in which the target sound is played once may be adopted. . In addition, "booboo", which is commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group, and "ping pong ping pong", which is commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, are sounds that are related to message sounds. You may prepare separate sound data for each notification sound, or prepare sound data separate from the message sound, and create sound data that combines the message sound and alarm sound when outputting. You may also assign it to a channel after that.

[Game machine equipped with multiple production operation units]
Incidentally, in the above description, a gaming machine is described in which the tray unit 320 is equipped with a performance operation unit 400 that can be operated by the player by pressing and can also present a performance image to the player. With reference to FIGS. 121 to 143, a gaming machine that can further increase a player's desire to operate will be described. Note that the performance control of the performance operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 121 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword production operation unit 5000. FIG. 122 is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword performance operation unit 5000. Here, the sword performance operation unit 5000 disposed in the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 described above will be described, and the same components as described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the explanation will be omitted as appropriate.

The sword performance operation unit 5000 is provided on the front side of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword production operation unit 5000 stores a sword part 5010 having a blade part 5011, a handle part 5012, and a collar part 5013 sandwiched between the blade part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and the blade part 5011 of the sword part 5010. A sword decoration body 5001 is constituted by a sheath part 5020 that can be used.

The sword decoration body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath part 5020 is movable in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the direction of drawing the sword and the direction of shedding the sword. The sword portion 5010 is normally in a sheathed state with the blade portion 5011 stored in the sheath portion 5020, and in the sword drawing performance, the blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player due to the sword drawing action. Then, the sword section 5010 in the unsheathed state can function as an operation means that receives a sheathing operation by the player and returns to the sheathed state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 123, a description will be given of an opportunity to perform a sword drawing performance involving movement of the sword performance operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001). FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of performance patterns in a performance mode in which a sword-drawing performance can be performed, and (A) an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to perform a sword-drawing preparation transition performance according to the type of variation pattern. and (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to perform battohon effect.

The production patterns described here include a pattern in which the battou main performance is performed after the battou preparation transition performance is executed, a pattern in which the battou main performance is performed without the battou preparation transition performance performed in advance, and a pattern in which the battou main performance is performed without the battou preparation transition performance performed in advance. However, there are patterns in which the battō main performance is not performed, patterns in which neither the battō preparation transition stage nor the battō main performance is performed, and furthermore, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the battō main performance is as follows: Two patterns are provided: one with an aura member and one without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 123(A), depending on the type of variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, a lottery is made to determine whether or not to execute the drawing preparation transition effect. Here, the multiple types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a fluctuation pattern for jackpot fluctuation when winning a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern for small hit fluctuation when winning a small hit, and a fluctuation pattern for losing fluctuation when a loss occurs, and fluctuations that result in an advantageous result for the player. It is set such that the higher the pattern, the higher the probability that the drawing preparation transition effect will be executed. Specifically, the sword preparation transition performance is executed with a 50% probability when the variation pattern is for a jackpot variation, with a 30% probability when it is a variation pattern for a small hit variation, and when it is a variation pattern for a loss variation. It will be executed with a 20% probability. In addition, the probability of the deviation variation time fluctuation pattern may be changed depending on the presence or absence of a reach effect so that the probability of performing a draw preparation transition effect is higher when a reach effect is performed than when it is not performed. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), depending on the type of variation pattern and the presence or absence of the drawing preparation transition effect, a lottery is made to determine whether or not to perform the drawing preparation transition effect. Even if the types of variation patterns are the same, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed, the probability that the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed is set to be higher than when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not executed. Further, it is set such that the probability that the battohon performance will be executed increases as the variation pattern yields an advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the advantage of the variation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability that the sword draw preparation transition effect is executed is higher than the probability that the sword draw main effect is executed. Specifically, when the sword-drawing preparation transition performance is executed with the fluctuation pattern for winning fluctuations, the probability that the sword-drawing preparation transition performance is executed is higher than when the sword-drawing preparation transition performance is not performed with the fluctuation pattern for small hit variation. In addition, in the case of the variation pattern for jackpot variation, the main drawing performance is always executed regardless of whether or not there is a drawing preparation transition performance.

In addition, when the battou main performance is executed, the battou preparation transition performance is executed in advance, and the more advantageous the variation pattern is for the player, the higher the probability that the battou main performance with the aura member will be executed. It is set so that In addition, here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the battohon performance with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition due to the unsheathing action of the sword decoration and the movement of the aura member)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127, the sword drawing motion of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword drawing performance (sword preparation transition performance and sword drawing main performance) will be described. Further, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011) itself that can accept the sheathing operation by the player, and the sword part 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 124, 125), the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath part 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011), and the sword part 5010 is combined with the member on the door frame 3 side (the aura member 5035). The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of an integrated decorative body (FIGS. 126 and 127).

FIG. 124 is a state transition diagram illustrating the unsheathing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011) itself. The sword is drawn, and (C) the second sword is drawn. FIG. 125 is a longitudinal sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that FIG. 125 is a longitudinal sectional view of the blade portion 5011 taken out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easier to understand.

The sword decoration body 5001 in the normal state is in a sheathed state with the blade portion 5011 housed in the sheath portion 5020, as shown in FIG. 124(A). In the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword drawing operation in the sword drawing preparation transition performance, only the part of the blade 5011a that is fitted in the hand of the blade part 5011 is pulled out from the sheath part 5020 and is visible to the player, as shown in FIG. 124(B). It becomes the state where the first sword is drawn. Then, as shown in FIG. 124(C), the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword drawing operation in the main sword drawing performance is a second drawn sword in which the blade part 5011 is further pulled out from the sheath part 5020 and most of it becomes visible to the player. state. Here, the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state can function as an operation means capable of accepting a sword sheathing operation by the player.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be able to operate independently apart from the unsheathing operation of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is attached to the sheath when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sheathed state (FIG. 124(A)) to the first drawn state (FIG. 124(B)). The blade portion 5011 is deformed by moving the movable range inside the portion 5020 from the closed state (FIG. 125(A)) to the open state (FIG. 125(B)) as far as possible (maximum movement). Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even during the transition process in which the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first drawn state to the second drawn state (FIG. 124(C)). Note that, as will be described later, the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be located below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even when the aura member 5030 is operated at its maximum, so the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first drawn state.

The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is enclosed in the blade portion 5011, as shown in FIG. 125(A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. It has a pinion 5033. In the aura member 5030, when the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the rotational force is converted into linear movement of the rack 5031a in the right direction and the rack 5032a in the left direction. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position protruding outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011 (open state).

Further, below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011, an LED board 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b. By emitting light from these LEDs, it becomes possible to decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030) with light.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010) changes from the sheathed state to the first drawn state, the state changes from the closed state to the open state, and the operation of the aura member 5030 causes the blade portion 5011 to change from the closed state to the open state. Although an example has been shown in which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword drawn state to the second sword drawn state after deforming the sword, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start its operation (deformation) after the sword decoration body 5001 enters the second sword drawn state. The final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state functions as an operating means (not limited to the mode in which the sword is fully moved, but also includes the mode in which the motion is stopped midway) ).

FIG. 126 is a state transition diagram illustrating the unsheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath 5020, (A) sheathed state, (B) first unsheathed state, (C) Indicates the second sword drawn state. FIG. 127 is a longitudinal sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that FIG. 127 is a longitudinal sectional view of the blade portion 5011 taken out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easier to understand. Here, the same components as those in FIGS. 125 and 126 described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 126(A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that accommodates the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) is While the aura member 5030 provided therein is movable in the horizontal direction, it is movable in the vertical direction. Moreover, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 has an aura member attached, the aura member 5035 can change the state of the blade part 5011 (in the sheathed state) while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the sword blade part 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sheathed state. ⇔ First sword drawn state ⇔ Second sword drawn state). This allows the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011) to be combined with the frame side member (aura member 5035) to appear as an integrated decorative body.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely accommodated state) is accommodated in the sheath portion 5020, as shown in FIG. 127(A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that its upper end is below the leaf 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the fully housed state, and includes a hollow cylindrical enclosing aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011, and an enclosing aura member 5036 It has a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b provided below the hollow space, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. In the enclosure aura member 5036, the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and both pinions mesh with each other, so that the rotational force is transferred to the right side of the rack. This is converted into an upward linear movement of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and stops at a position where the surrounding aura member 5036 is combined with the blade portion 5011 to form the second drawn state, as shown in FIG. 127(B). At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a complete appearance state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable to the upper limit of its range of motion (maximum movement).

Further, although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED board having a plurality of LEDs, so that the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be decorated with light.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade part is moved while maintaining the relative positional relationship according to the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword part 5010) (sword sheathed state ⇔ first sword drawn state ⇔ second sword drawn state). Although an example of combining with 5011 has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start its operation (combining) after the sword decoration body 5001 enters the second sword drawn state. The final state based on the production pattern set until the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state functions as an operation means (not limited to the complete appearance state with maximum movement, but also the intermediate appearance with stopping the movement midway) (including a form with an aura member attached). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player from the sheathed state to the first sword drawn state.

(Other production pattern 1 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, another reach effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. FIGS. 128 to 130 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the performance display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess reach performance. Here, the main differences from the sword decoration body 5001 described above are as follows. First, the sword decoration body 5001 in the sheathed state functions as an operation means and detects a sword draw operation by the player. Second, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left and right directions when viewed from the front, and the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It can be operated up to the center of the front.

When the fluctuating symbols form a ready-to-reach state, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the fluctuating display of the three decorative symbols becomes a ready-to-reach state (FIG. 128 (A1)), and the princess reach start image is displayed (FIG. 128 (A1)). 128(A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In a normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and is held still above the display area with a part of the blind visible to the player (initial state). There is. Further, at this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a sheathed state.

In the princess reach effect, after an image of the princess heading behind the blind is displayed (FIG. 128 (A3)), an operation effect suggestion image that suggests an operation effect is displayed (FIG. 128 (B1)). Then, the operation performance of the sword decoration body 5001 is started and the valid operation period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 begins, and the display area of the performance display device 1600 prompts the player to draw the sword decoration body 5001. An operation promotion image and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 129 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are moved vertically little by little from the time the operation effect suggestion image is displayed until the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Good too. Then, when a sword drawing operation by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

The sword drawing operation by the player is an operation in which the player grasps the handle 5012 of the sheathed sword ornament 5001, lifts the sword 5010 upward, and pulls out the blade 5011 from the sheath 5020. When the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state, the player's sword unsheathing operation is detected, and a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection. The detection notification operation may be an operation that allows the player to feel a movement different from his/her own sword drawing operation through the handle 5012 held by the player, such as vertical movement or vibration of the sword 5010 (or handle 5012). Bye. Further, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player takes his hand off the handle 5012. Therefore, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, which reduces unnecessary contact with the sword ornament 5001 (grabbing it again to confirm the detection, etc.) and prevents malfunction or damage to the movable body. Can be done.

When the player performs a sword drawing operation here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but depending on the level of expectation, when the player performs a sword drawing operation, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visible to the player. You can do it like this.

When the end pattern is performed, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY is placed in a stationary state (initial state) above the display area without overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600. state), and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect using the sword ornament 5001 is displayed (FIG. 129 (C1)). Then, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a detached mode "767" (FIG. 129 (C2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sheathed state at the timing when the stop result shown in FIG. You can do it like this.

On the other hand, when the development pattern is performed, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to the center of the front (lower part of the display area) that overlaps with the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is moved to fall to a state where only the hold display area is visible (full fall state) (FIG. 129 (D1)). Next, the princess's shadow is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the second drawn state (FIG. 129 (D2)). Note that at this time, a plurality of patterns of display of the princess's shadow projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided; for example, By varying the color and size of the shadow, and the comments that are displayed afterward, it may be possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the lottery result by Hime Reach (the degree of expectation of a win, the gaming profit in the event of a win, etc.) .

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the sword decoration body 5001 enters the second drawn state due to the sword drawing operation by the player, that is, after the princess's shadow is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword drawn state changes. The sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center in the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath part 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 129 (D3)). When the sword decoration 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the fully fallen state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility is An image of the princess being surprised when the blinds are removed is displayed (FIG. 130 (D4)). Thereafter, the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the position where the original sword drawing operation was performed, and if the result of the current variable display is a win, the win will be announced with a smiling princess in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image is displayed (FIG. 130 (E1) (E2)), and an image notifying the princess of the loss is displayed along with a sad princess (FIG. 130 (F1) (F2)).

Note that when a sword drawing operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above, but a movable effect in which the sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center in the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is used. If the player is unable to move due to the player holding the sword when executing the command, an announcement or display such as "Please let go of the sword" is made. The performance itself will proceed even if the player does not stop grasping the sword decoration body 5001, but the sword decoration body 5001 will be operated by the player at the timing of movement of the sword decoration body 5001 in the left and right direction (FIG. 129 (D3)). If it is held in the position where it was performed, it will cause a delay in the movement performance in the left and right direction. However, regardless of whether or not the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 in the left-right direction has been performed, the effect that is executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the effect of the falling movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) have progressed. Since the game is configured to do so, the game progress will not be stagnant. Note that the sword decoration body 5001 may be configured to perform a movement effect in the left and right direction immediately when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration body 5001, or may be configured so as not to perform a movement effect. You can.

In this way, in the princess reach performance, the specific decorative member SDY that has suggested the operation performance (operation valid) of the sword decoration 5001 is moved to fall by the player's unsheathing operation (up and down direction movement) of the sword decoration 5001. At the same time, the sword decoration 5001 itself, which has been operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600, is moved in the forward direction of the effect display device 1600 (to the operating position) by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3. It can be moved to the left (to the left). That is, based on the player's sword drawing operation, it becomes possible to move the sword decoration body 5001 itself to an operating position different from the operating position where the sword drawing operation was performed, increasing the value of the player's operation and increasing the player's motivation for the operation. It is possible to suppress the decline of In addition, one operating means is configured to be able to operate in stages that differ in accordance with the player's operations (in the vertical direction during operation, and in the left and right directions after operation), thereby providing an effect that uses multiple movable modes. The operating value of the operating means can be increased compared to conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Note that the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 in the left and right direction is performed for the purpose of performing an integrated performance with the performance image performed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory). Although the operation position is displaced from the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, after performing a sword drawing operation with the sword decoration 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. You may also perform a movement effect in the left-right direction, in which the object is moved to the left (to the left end of the frame). Furthermore, since the operation by the player of the sword decoration 5001 in this example is a vertical movement (a sword drawing movement that pulls up the sword part 5011 from the bottom to the top), the sword decoration 5001 performed after the operation is based on the operation. As for the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 moves in a direction (such as the left-right direction in this example) that is different from the direction of movement (up-down direction here) during operation by the player.

Furthermore, when a sword draw operation by the player is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so the player can accurately determine the timing of the end of the operation. can be judged. In addition, since the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time so that the player can visually confirm it, unnecessary contact such as touching the operating section again to confirm the detection can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation and the subsequent movement performance of the sword decoration body 5001 being delayed, or from damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, if the movable effect cannot be performed due to contact with the sword ornament 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is made to the player to take his/her hand off, and the player is requested to perform the operation during the operation validity period. Since even contact with the operating means is prohibited after the detection and notification operation is completed, the operational value of the operating means can be increased.

(Other performance pattern 2 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133, another reach effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be explained. 131 to 133 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the performance display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the reach performance including the operation performance of the operation button 410, which is used in many ways. be. Here, as an operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern ((A), (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation level suggestion effect is performed that suggests the degree of expectation that the fluctuation being executed will be a jackpot, and an operation effect of the operation button 410 are shown. A pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which the operation performance of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and developed as a performance will be explained.

In the reach effect here, when the fluctuating display of the three decorative symbols becomes the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 131(A)), first, the operation validity period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is set. The game is started, and an operation promotion effect is performed to prompt the player to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 131(B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of an operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and an operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern.

First, in a pattern in which an expectation level suggesting effect is performed by pressing the operation button 410, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Afterwards (FIG. 131 (N1)), an image suggesting the jackpot expectation level is displayed (FIG. 132 (N2)). Thereafter, the result of the current variation display (big hit, miss) is announced ((N3) or (N4) in FIG. 132). Note that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the expectation level suggestion effect for the fluctuating display being executed. For example, instead of the image indicating the expectation level (FIG. 132 (N2)), a look-ahead effect may be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A character may appear that changes the pending display.

In addition, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and developed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. (FIG. 131 (M1)) in which an effect image is displayed that suggests that an operation performance that requests the sheathing of the sword ornament 5001 will be performed. Next, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, a start image for the operation performance of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, a message with the title "Chance to draw your sword" and the operation explanation "I want you to sheath your sword") is displayed. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. The sword decoration body 5001 at this time is in a form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum movement of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 133 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the second sword is drawn, and the effective period for operating the sword decoration body 5001 begins, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved vertically in small increments in the initial state, and the production is performed. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to sheath the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 133 (M3)). Then, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, an effect is performed based on the result of the current variable display.

If the result of this variable display is a jackpot, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind ornament) will be moved to fall from its initial state to a fully fallen state ( Figure 133 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a jackpot is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) has been canceled. An image (decorative design stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (FIG. 133 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the current variable display is incorrect, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) will only stop moving in small increments in its initial state. , In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (decorative pattern stop mode "767") notifying the miss is displayed (FIG. 133 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the level of expectation and developing operation effects of other operation means (sword ornament 5001) are possible, and the player presses the operation button 410. It is not possible to determine the subsequent development at the time of operation. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in operating the operation button 410, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to operate and a decrease in interest in the game, which may occur due to the monotonous performance after the operation.

In addition, in a series of reach performances, the first operation (pressing the operation button 410) and the second operation (sheathing the sword decoration 5001) are different in the operation mode (pressing operation and sheathing operation). This request is made to the player based on the operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, which is a concern due to unreliable and monotonous operations.

In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means for the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sheathing the sword ornament 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. The sheathing of the sword ornament 5001 may be an effective operation as the first operation opportunity. In this case, the operation means that is effective for the second operation opportunity targets the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410, which has relatively lower expectations than the sword decoration 5001 used for the first time. is desirable.

(Other performance pattern 3 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 134 to 138, another reach effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 134 to 138 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the performance display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the ready-to-reach performance. Here, a pattern ((A), (B1), (B2) → O in the figure) that results in a jackpot when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and Even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory) does not move based on the pressing operation and is displayed in a dislocated state, the pattern display in the dislocated state is re-varied and the player is given the opportunity to operate it again. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) in the figure → Q when an opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is given/R when an opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is given) I will explain about it.

In the reach effect here, when the fluctuating display of the three decorative symbols becomes the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 134(A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, , the message "You can move the movable body with a single button press" is displayed (FIG. 134(B)), and then the operation valid period for accepting the press operation of the operation button 410 starts, and the operation period for accepting the press operation of the operation button 410 is started. An operation promotion effect is performed to prompt the user (FIG. 134(C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and an operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern. Note that the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one hit (once), but may be repeated (multiple times). In addition, in order to make it easier for the player to grasp the object (movable object) that is moved by the operation, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved vertically in small increments in the initial state during the valid operation period of the operation button 410. You can do it like this. Further, if the sword decoration body 5001 becomes an operation target later, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sheathed state to the second sword drawn state at this point.

In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) moves and a jackpot is achieved, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) changes from the initial state to the fully fallen state. (FIG. 135 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image notifying the jackpot (a decorative pattern The stop mode "777" and the message "Good job" are displayed (FIG. 135 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) does not move, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is only stopped from moving in small increments and is allowed to fall. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern in an off-center manner ("767") is oscillatedly displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 136 (P1). Thereafter, according to the effect pattern that is set, A pattern (FIG. 136 (P2)) in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a dislocated manner ("767") or a revival pattern in which the ready-to-reach state is restored again is developed.

In the revival pattern, the display area of the effect display device 1600 changes from the oscillating display of the decorative pattern in the out-of-place mode shown in FIG. The samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 136 (P3)), and the decorative pattern becomes ready again and is displayed in a reduced size at the top right of the screen, and at the same time, either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is pressed in the center of the screen. An operation-enabled suggestion image (the face of an ally samurai with his eyes closed) is displayed (FIG. 136 (P4)). Then, as time passes, the eyes of the displayed samurai are enlarged and the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved vertically little by little in the initial state (FIG. 136 (P5)). This increases the player's expectations for the performance using the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory). Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be decorated with light in a high-speed blinking manner, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be moved up and down while changing from the sheathed state to the first drawn state. Then, depending on the set performance pattern, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an effective operation means, and the specific decoration member SDY is based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001. (bamboo blind yakumono) will be performed. Note that the pattern in which the operation button 410 is the operation target is set to have a lower level of expectation than the pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is the operation target.

When the operation button 410 is used as an operation means, an image of sweat on the forehead of a samurai (operation button confirmed image), which is an operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is displayed, and the operation button is pressed. 410 is decorated with light emission (FIG. 137 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory) continues to move in small increments, and the operation button 410 is illuminated with light, the operation validity period of the operation button 410 starts, and an operation that prompts the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 137 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed. Here, when the operation button 410 is operated a required number of times, the light-emitting decoration is no longer displayed.

If the result of the variable display is a jackpot, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to fall from the initial state to the full falling state. (Figure 137 (R3)). At this time, the decorative pattern that had been displayed at the top right of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed at the bottom right of the screen so that it can be viewed by the player. Note that, as in the case described above (FIG. 133 (M4)), the mode of the decorative symbols may be made difficult for the player to grasp at this point. Next, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is returned from the fully fallen state to the initial state again, and a screen An image notifying the jackpot (decorative pattern stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed in the center (FIG. 137 (R4)).

On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is off, when the press operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 is stopped. In the display area, a decorative pattern in an off-center manner ("767") is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 137 (R5)).

When the sword decoration 5001 is used as an operation means, the operation effectiveness suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is an image in which a samurai whose eyes are closed opens his eyes and his eyes become sharp (sword decoration (confirmed image) is displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state with the aura member attached (FIG. 138 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 may be decorated with light emission. The player can understand from the image in the display area that the operation of the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410 is valid; however, at this point, the player cannot determine whether the sword decoration 5001 has an aura member attached or not. This can be understood by actually looking at the sword ornament 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved little by little, the second sword drawn state is reached and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the operational validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 begins, the display on the production display device 1600 In the area, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to sheath the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 138 (Q2)).

If the result of the current variable display is a jackpot, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the effect transition similar to that shown in FIGS. 137 (R3) and (R4) described above will be followed (FIG. 138 ( Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, if the variable display result is negative, and the player's sheathing operation is detected, the same performance transition as in FIG. 137 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 138 (Q5)).

In this way, the level of expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) that is executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, so the level of expectation is more powerful than the level of expectation suggested by an image. Suggestions can be provided, and a decline in interest in games can be suppressed. Furthermore, even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is not moved and dropped based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given the opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. be done. Since the degree of expectation can also be suggested by the operating means that provides an operating opportunity, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, which is a concern due to unreliable and monotonous operation performance.

Although FIGS. 128 to 138 described above show three examples of reach performance patterns using the sword ornament 5001, various performance modes may be combined. As a result, it is possible to provide a wide variety of performances and further increase the interest in the game.

(Form of sword decoration)
The form of the sword ornament 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 139. Up until now, the sword decoration body 5001 has been provided with two types: a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member, but here, a form in which the sword part 5010 is deformed by further operating the handle part 5012 is adopted. Two types are provided.

FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating the form of a sword ornament 5001 used for pseudo-coupling. The sword decoration body 5001 here is provided so that its form can be changed in two stages by deforming the handle part 5012, and is also provided inside the sheath part 5020 of the door frame 3, so that the player can see it from the left and right sides of the sheath part 5020. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears visibly. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 like the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation mode is movable in the left and right direction similarly to the aura member 5030 described above. FIGS. 139A to 139D are diagrams showing the types (stage changes) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sheathed state, and sequentially show stage 0 form to stage 3 form. The sword decoration body 5001 takes one of the stages 0 form to 3 forms depending on the performance.

As shown in FIG. 139(A), the stage 0 form is a form in a normal state similar to the above-mentioned FIGS. Indicates the form. As shown in FIG. 139(B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath part 5012 due to the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 139(C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle part 5012 expands and moves from the stage 1 form so as to be divided into two left and right parts from the center, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from inside. show. As shown in FIG. 139(D), in the stage 3 form, the second decoration part 5012b is further moved upward from inside the handle part 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decoration part 5012a in the stage 2 form. Indicates the form. In the stage 1 form to stage 3 form here, it is possible to change the form without bringing the sword decoration body 5001 into the second drawn state. Furthermore, since the sword part 5010 that can accept operations by the player as the operating part of the operating means and the sheath part 5020 that does not operate work together to form an integrated decorative body, it is possible to provide a more powerful operating means. Can be done.

(Pre-operation suggestion performance using specific decorative member SDY)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 140 to 143, a pre-operation suggestion performance that is executed before the operation validity period in which the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 becomes operational in the ready-to-reach performance will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion performance, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 will be valid for operation among a plurality of operation means by the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory). . Specifically, as a suggestion pattern based on a pre-operation suggestion performance using the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory), the operation validity period is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) positioned at the initial position. There is a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation valid period when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved from the initial position to the suggested position. If the expectation of winning is set high and the operation becomes effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion performance of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 140(B)) is such that the operation validity period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory) positioned at the initial position even during the operation validity period. If this is done, there is a 30% probability that the sword decoration 5001 will be enabled, and a 70% probability that the operation button 410 will be enabled. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (Fig. 142 (AA1)) in which the operation validity period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) is moved to the suggestion position, In this case, the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes operable with a probability of 30%. Below, examples of performance transitions according to the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) in the first suggestion pattern and the second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion performance will be explained.

(First suggestion pattern)
140 and 141 show that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is selected during the reach effect based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310 by lottery by the peripheral control board 1510. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the ready-to-reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this reach effect, when three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 140(A)), an operation button is predetermined to be activated by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510. The pre-operation suggestion performance of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation validity period for any of the operation means of the sword ornament 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is generated. As a specific presentation content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation presentation suggestion image (rotation of aura) indicating that the operation means becomes operational is displayed in the display area of the presentation display device 1600 before the operation validity period is generated. is displayed (FIG. 140(B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintains its initial position. Furthermore, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 remain unchanged.

Then, while maintaining the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) at the initial position, a valid operation period is generated for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is predetermined to be valid. let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as a pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, if the valid operation period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 will be valid at a higher rate than the sword decoration 5001. This can be suggested to the player.

When the operation button 410 becomes valid, as shown in FIG. 140(C), the valid operation period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintains its initial position. let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emitting light so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Further, even when the sword decoration 5001 is enabled for operation, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern, although the rate is lower than that for the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 140(D), the operational validity period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintains its initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, an operation promotion performance is performed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to sheath the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Further, at this time, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (form with an aura member), allowing the player to sheath the sword.

In the above-mentioned FIG. 140(C) or (D), when an operation on a valid operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) is detected, if the result of the current variable display is a jackpot, The specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to fall from the initial state to the fully fallen state (FIG. 141 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a jackpot is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) has been canceled. An image (decorative design stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (FIG. 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the current variable display is a failure, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) maintains its initial state and is not moved, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 notifies the failure. An image (decorative pattern stop mode "767") is displayed (FIG. 141 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
FIG. 142 shows that when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is valid for operation during the reach effect, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is similar to the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the ready-to-win effect that is executed. In addition, in FIG. 143, even though the second suggestion pattern is performed as a pre-operation suggestion performance, the sword decoration 5001 does not become operational, the operation button 410 becomes operational, and then the sword decoration FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a pre-operation suggestion performance of a step-up pattern in which a body 5001 becomes operational.

As shown in FIG. 142 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion performance of the second suggestion pattern is performed by selecting either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 that is predetermined to be valid for operation by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510. is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means is generated. As a specific presentation content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation presentation suggestion image (rotation of aura) indicating that the operation means becomes operational is displayed in the display area of the presentation display device 1600 before the operation validity period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, along with the display of the operation effect suggestion image, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) is displayed. It operates from the initial position to a small fall state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the production display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) moves vertically between the initial position and the suggested position. It is moved in small increments in the direction. At this time, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament remain unchanged.

Then, in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to the suggested position, the operation validity period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration body 5001) that is predetermined to be valid is determined. generate. In this example, when the sword ornament 5001 is validated for operation, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as a pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, if the valid operation period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is at the suggested position, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 will be considered valid at a higher rate than the operation button 410. This can be suggested to the player.

When the operation of the sword decoration 5001 becomes valid, as shown in FIG. 142 (AA3), the operation validity period for the sword decoration 5001 is determined while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is operating at the suggested position. to occur. At the same time, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, an operation promotion performance is performed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to sheath the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the state of the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state (form with an aura), and the player can perform a sheathing operation. Further, even when the operation button 410 is activated, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 142 (AA2), an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect period of the effect display device 1600 is activated. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In addition, in the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion performance, the specific decorative member SDY (blind ornament) is moved from the state in which it is in the suggested position to the initial state. Further, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) may be moved from the state of moving to the suggested position to the fully fallen state or the initial state without being returned to the initial state.

When an operation on a valid operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) is detected in the above-mentioned FIG. 142 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-mentioned FIG. Similarly, if the result of the current variable display is a jackpot, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to fall from its initial state to a fully fallen state (FIG. 141 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a jackpot is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) has been canceled. An image (decorative design stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (FIG. 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the current variable display is a failure, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintains its initial state and remains unmoved, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 notifies the failure. An image (decorative pattern stop mode "767") is displayed (FIG. 141 (CC3)). The performance transition after the operation promotion performance is the same as the performance transition after the operation promotion performance in the first suggestion pattern.

Note that the movement pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to a pattern in which it is moved to the suggestion position, but may include a plurality of movement patterns. For example, if multiple types of movement patterns are provided so that the rate at which the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operational is different, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the movement, so the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is used. It is possible to increase the interest of the used pre-operation suggestion performance and operation promotion performance.

(Step up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion performance of the second suggestion pattern in which the operation validity period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory) moved to the suggestion position is performed, and the sword decoration 5001 becomes operation valid, In addition to the basic pattern of following the effect transition from FIG. 142 (AA1) to (AA3) before the sword decoration 5001 becomes operational, the operation button 410 becomes operational, and then the sword decoration 5001 changes. A step-up pattern that becomes operational is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 143 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is a valid operation period for the sword ornament 5001 that is predetermined to be valid by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510. is executed, that is, before the operation promotion effect for the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 142 (AA3) is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, the same operation effect suggestion image (rotation of aura) as in FIG. 142 (AA1) described above is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved in small increments (FIG. 143 (BB1) ). Next, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind accessory) being moved to the suggested position, an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated. At the same time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emitting light, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. (Figure 143 (BB2)). Here, even if a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the valid operation period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. A suggested image (most of the blackout image) is displayed (FIG. 143 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or when the valid operation period of the operation button 410 ends. Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (form with aura), and the display area of the effect display device 1600 shows that the operational means to enable the operation are changed from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration 5001. A switching notification image (messages such as ``Chance to draw your sword'' and ``I would like you to sheath your sword'') is displayed (FIG. 143 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is in a state of being moved to the suggested position. Then, when the operational validity period of the sword decoration 5001 is activated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 142 (AA3) described above is performed. The performance transition after the operation promotion performance is the same as the performance transition after the operation promotion performance in the second suggestion pattern described above (FIG. 141).

Note that in the case of FIG. 143 (BB2) described above, only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the button operation 410 (no operation promotion effect). It is only necessary to have the player operate the sword ornament 5001 after first directing the player's attention to the button operation 410. Furthermore, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when the step-up pattern becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

In this way, in the pre-operation suggestion performance of this example, the specific decorative member SDY (blind ornament) is displayed before the valid operation period of one of the plurality of operation means is activated. ) can be changed, and the position indicates the operating means that can be operated effectively. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 140(B)) in which the valid operation period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is valid for operation. A second suggestion pattern in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the expectation level is high and the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is located at the suggested position (in FIG. 142 (AA1), the sword decoration 5001 There is a high degree of expectation that the operation will be effective.For this reason, the player focuses on the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind ornament) in order to understand which operation means will be effective, so there is a high expectation that the operation means will be effective. It can enhance the interest of the performance.

Furthermore, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion performance. Furthermore, since the movement performance (falling performance) of the specific decorative member SDY (blind screen accessory) is also used to notify the result after the operation of the operating means (Fig. 141), the falling performance is sequentially performed from the up and down small movement of the pre-operation suggestion performance. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game. In addition, in the above, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory), that is, the expectation that the operating means that is enabled by the movable body is operated, but this is not limited to this. A display may be made to indicate the level of expectation. Furthermore, when the operating means to be enabled is determined, not only is the operating button 410 turned on or the sword ornament 5001 is changed to the second drawn state, but the operating means to be enabled is moved by vibration or the like. You can also

In addition, the second suggestion pattern includes the operation button 410 once being activated (or after the operation button 410 is pretending to be activated) in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is located at the suggested position. 2) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword ornament 5001 becomes operationally effective. This makes the player interested in both operating means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes operational immediately after the pre-operation suggestion presentation, the user can expect that the sword decoration 5001 may become operational after that, which reduces the motivation to operate and the interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion presentation, an operation presentation suggestion image is displayed before the operation validity period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is valid. (FIG. 140 (B)), similarly to the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 142 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is viewed from the initial position in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It may be arranged to operate in a small drop state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part, and to move in small steps in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. Note that when the operation validity period is generated thereafter, the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the motion of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) in the first suggestion pattern is partially the same as the motion in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so the operation performance suggestion by the first suggestion pattern is given to the player. Even when an image is displayed, it is possible to make the user think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, even when the pre-operation suggestion effect based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the sword ornament 5001 will be valid for operation. Then, since the player strongly desires that the operation effective period occurs in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory), which is operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image, is operated at the suggested position, the pre-operation suggestion It is possible to improve the interest of the performance.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the performance determination according to the result of the jackpot determination, the game board side performance display device 1600 displays a specific performance. Execute the performance based on the pattern. During a performance period in which a specific performance pattern is executed, a specific performance acceptance period (validity period) can be generated in which a specific performance execution condition is established by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific performance acceptance period. Based on the establishment of specific performance execution conditions, a specific performance during operation (such as a performance that suggests the degree of expectation regarding the awarding of benefits) can be executed. The degree of expectation regarding the awarding of benefits suggested as a result of a specific operation performance may be 100% or 0%.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation means for providing such an operation effect (such as an effect that indicates the degree of expectation regarding the granting of a privilege when operated), an operation is performed. In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further include other operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.). In this regard, in a specific performance pattern, there are cases where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the performance determination (when the specific performance execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), and There are cases in which an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.) (a case in which a specific performance execution condition is satisfied when another operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.), even if no operation is performed at that operation opportunity, just because the pre-operation effect that gives the operation opportunity occurs, It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation regarding awarding of benefits (the degree of expectation of jackpot) is higher than when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. When an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.), the degree of expectation regarding the awarding of benefits suggested may be 100% or 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration 5001, etc.), the operation corresponding to the operation on the other operation means (sword decoration 5001, etc.) It is possible to improve the interest in the game when the performance is at a preliminary stage before being performed and an operation is about to be performed. In other words, in this case, a desired performance result (such as a performance result that suggests that there is a high level of expectation regarding the granting of benefits) will not appear in the operation performance corresponding to the operation on another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.). Even if you are unable to operate the operating means within the specified performance acceptance period (validity period), you can still improve your gaming enjoyment through such operation-related performances. Become.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) having such dramatic properties. In this case, common operation-related effects (for example, see FIG. 142 (AA1)) can be performed when giving these operation opportunities.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least the performance mode that generates the valid period (performance reception period) in which the operation on the operation button 410 is validated (performance reception is possible) is performed.
・After the "specific operation-related performance" that can appear even when the operation on the sword decoration object 5001 is enabled (direction can be accepted), the operation on the corresponding operation button 410 is enabled (direction can be accepted) after the performance has started. ), a first production mode that generates a valid period (production reception period), and - the operation of the operation button 410 is enabled without the "specific operation-related production" starting to be produced (production can be accepted) A plurality of production modes are prepared, such as a second production mode that generates a valid period (production reception period), and by executing any of these production modes, the operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (production is activated). A valid period (direction reception period) during which the performance can be accepted is generated.

According to such a configuration, there may occur a period in which an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted. In either case, if a period occurs during which an operation means other than the specified operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) can accept production, a common (specific ) operation-related effects can now be executed, it becomes possible to add interest to whether a specific operation means or another operation means can accept effects, and such effects can be performed. By having the player perform the operations while the game is being performed, a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in such a common (specific) operation-related performance, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance was started, the function corresponds to one of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001). A production acceptance period will occur, but at least at the time the production is started, it is not clear which of these operating means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) the production reception period will occur. It is desirable to keep it confidential. In addition, for each operation-related production exemplified below, an operation opportunity is given to any of the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) before the production acceptance period occurs. It may also be possible to indicate whether or not the production result will be displayed (by displaying the production result display), or to display multiple operations within the relevant period after the production reception period has occurred, including at the same time as the production reception period occurs. It may be possible to indicate which of the means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) the operation opportunity is given (by displaying a performance result display), and to which timing the operation-related performance is executed. Whether or not to do so can be changed as appropriate.

[Automatic button production state]
In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to an automatic button performance state (specific performance state) can be executed, and when controlled to this automatic button performance state, When a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined performance pattern in which a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, the player Even if the performance is not accepted for the operation, it is possible to execute a process (automatic performance function) for causing the same change in the performance as when the performance is accepted for the operation by the player within the performance acceptance period. According to such an automatic button performance state, a post-operation performance will be generated when the button is operated, even if the performance reception period occurs, even if the button is not operated, thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest due to forgetting to operate the button. You will be able to do it. Regarding the automatic production function, when the automatic production function is activated, the same production reception as when the operation is actually performed may be performed so that the processing corresponding to the production reception is performed, or the production reception may be performed. Instead, the same processing as when the presentation is received may be performed.

In the embodiment related to the "automatic performance function" described below, the above-mentioned operation-related techniques, performances, settings, etc. may be used in combination or replaced as appropriate.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, during the period when the demo screen in which symbol variation is not executed, the automatic button can be pressed by operating the operating means multiple times. It is possible to set the performance state. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation of the operation button 410 (or by a different operation means than the operation button 410). ``Various settings'' is selected and the ``Various settings'' screen is displayed, and the ``Various settings'' screen is displayed by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or by a different operation means than the operation button 410). When "Setting automatic button effect state" displayed in the screen is selected, the automatic button effect state is set. Note that only the operation button 410 may be operated multiple times, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on a different operation means may be operated multiple times.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the automatic button production state can be set by operating the operation button 410 once, and by simplifying the operation, the automatic button production state can be set. It is possible to set an automatic button performance state while maintaining attention to the performance progress during symbol variation. However, some players want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the validity period has expired, and from these players, it is difficult to operate the operation button 410. If the automatic button presentation state is set simply by operating the button, the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button production state while the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation state of the operation button 410 must be maintained for a predetermined period of time ( Here, it is required to operate this once in a mode that is maintained for 2 seconds (so-called "long press mode"). As a result, even if the operation button 410 is actively operated during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, regardless of whether or not the validity period has occurred, the automatic button production state will not be activated. This makes it possible to make it less likely that the settings will be set incorrectly. In addition, it is desirable that the setting to the automatic button production state is not made even if the operation is performed in a long press mode at least when the production reception period is occurring during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state. .

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the automatic button presentation state is set, the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed can also be used to cancel the setting. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

That is, during the period when the demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button production state can be canceled by operating the operating means multiple times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation of the operation button 410 (or by a different operation means than the operation button 410). ``Various settings'' is selected and the ``Various settings'' screen is displayed, and the ``Various settings'' screen is displayed by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or by a different operation means than the operation button 410). When "cancellation of automatic button presentation state" displayed within is selected, the automatic button presentation state is canceled.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button production state can be canceled by operating the operation button 410 once, and by simplifying the operation, It is made possible to cancel the setting of an automatic button performance state while maintaining attention to the performance progress during symbol variation. However, unlike when setting to the automatic button presentation state, the operation button 410 can be moved to the operation state even if the operation state of the operation button 410 is not maintained for a predetermined period of time (even if the operation mode is not a long press). The automatic button presentation state is set to be canceled just by detecting that the button has been pressed (by only being operated in a single operation mode). In other words, when some operation is performed on the operation button 410, it can be said that there is a desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410. Therefore, when the operation is performed, automatic button production is performed. By canceling the setting of the state and quickly returning to the normal presentation state, it is expected that the game's interest will be suitably maintained.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is configured with a plurality of operating means including the operating button 410. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when in the automatic button production state set by the operation on the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is different based on the result of jackpot determination. A production reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) (more precisely, a predetermined production pattern in which a production reception period is set for the sword decoration 5001, etc.) occurs and the operation by the player (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not accepted within the performance acceptance period, even if the operation by the player (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not accepted within the performance acceptance period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic performance function) that causes the same change in the performance as when the performance is accepted. According to such a configuration, will there be a period during which the operation of the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted as a production, or will it be possible to perform the operation using another operation means (for example, , sword decoration body 5001)).When the above-mentioned performance (specific operation-related performance (see FIG. 164 (AA1), etc.)) is executed, the performance is As a result, even if either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled for production, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate it, so that you can enjoy such specific operation-related production with peace of mind. Become.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
- When a first side effect reception period occurs in which the first operation means (for example, operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) , when no operation is performed on the first operation means within the first side performance reception period, automatic processing can be executed to cause the same change in the performance as when the first operation means is operated. Yes (first automatic presentation means),
- When controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), the second presentation reception period in which the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) is set as the operation target among the plurality of operation means is When this occurs, when no operation is performed on the second operation means within the second side performance acceptance period, an automatic process is executed to cause the same change in the performance as when the second operation means is operated. Possible (second automatic presentation means)
Based on this structure, regardless of whether the first-side production reception period or the second-side production reception period occurs, the second production reception period will be executed when the same specific time has elapsed after the occurrence of the first-side production reception period and the second-side production reception period. Automatic processing by the first automatic performance means or automatic processing by the second automatic performance means can be executed.

According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), there is a first presentation reception period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target, and a second operation means is set as the operation target. Even if any of the second side production reception period set as 2nd side production reception period occurs within the execution period of symbol variation, the automatic production function can function when the same specific time has passed from the occurrence of those periods. As a result, you can enjoy the performance with peace of mind.

However, if a first-side production reception period occurs in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as an operation target, when a specific time has elapsed after the first-side production reception period occurs, The automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means is executed when the automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means is executed, and when a time different from the specific time has passed after the occurrence of the first side presentation reception period. As the case may be, the presentation may progress within the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means will be executed when a specific time has elapsed after the occurrence of the first-side performance reception period, but the timing differs from this. Since the production is accepted and the production automatically occurs after the operation, it can function as a surprise production.

In addition, when controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), the operating means is given more operation opportunities within the symbol fluctuation period than when not controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state). The rate at which the performance acceptance period occurs may be increased. In other words, in this case, as the production reception period occurs more frequently, it can be assumed that the frequency of forgetting to operate within the production reception period will also increase, but even if you forget to operate the automatic production Since the post-operation performance is executed when the function functions, the performance acceptance period can be generated more frequently while suppressing a decline in game interest due to frequent forgetting of operations. Incidentally, when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), it is desirable that the occurrence rate of both the presentation reception period for the first operation means and the presentation reception period for the second operation means be high. However, it is more desirable that the degree to which the occurrence rate increases is made different between the presentation acceptance period for the first operating means and the presentation acceptance period for the second operating means.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
- If the performance acceptance condition is satisfied within the performance reception period, the post-operation performance can be executed (post-operation performance execution means),
- Enables execution of processing for establishing performance acceptance conditions based on operations performed by the player within the performance acceptance period (player operation acceptance means);
- When no operation is performed by the player within the performance acceptance period, it is possible to execute processing to establish the performance acceptance condition without receiving any operation by the player at a specific timing within the performance reception period (automatic performance reception means )
However, the specific timing within the production acceptance period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the production reception period has passed from the start of the production acceptance period. I am planning to do so. As a result, the player will be given enough time to operate the automatic production function until it functions, and the player will also have the option of accepting the production through operation. , it becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game.

In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means is executed when a specific time has elapsed after the first presentation reception period has occurred, and the other case has been the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means is executed when a specific time has elapsed after the first presentation reception period has occurred. When the performance progresses within the symbol variation, such that automatic processing by the first automatic performance means may be executed when a different time has passed, the above "specific time" or the above "specific time" may be used. Both of the "times different from the above" are set as time values longer than at least half of the time set as the first-side production reception period.

Here, if a production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button production state is controlled, and an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted within the production reception period, , processing for generating a post-operation performance in response to the reception of the performance will be executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating a post-operation performance in response to the reception of the performance, a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button performance state may also be performed.

Similarly, when the automatic button presentation state is controlled, a presentation reception period for an operation means different from the operation button 410 (sword decoration 5001, etc.) occurs during the execution period of symbol variation, and the presentation reception period occurs. Even if an operation for the sword decoration object 5001 is received within the period, a process for generating a post-operation performance according to the reception of the performance, and a process for canceling the setting of the automatic button performance state are executed, respectively. is desirable. In this case as well, regarding the "post-operation performance according to performance reception", the performance reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the period when the automatic button performance state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is not performed within the performance reception period. The effect will be executed with the same content as the post-operation effect that is executed when the effect for the operation on the body 5001 is accepted.

In other words, after being controlled to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), the desire to return to the performance state (normal performance mode) in which the performance can progress depending on the player's own operations (the specific performance state). A desire to end the condition may occur. Such a desire often arises when a performance acceptance period occurs during which the player is given an opportunity to operate, but there is a limited period of time from the start of the performance acceptance period until it ends. It is difficult to perform both the operation to end a specific production state and the operation to accept the operation, and as a result, the opportunity for operation may be lost. If so, interest in the game may decline. In this regard, in the above configuration, when a performance reception period regarding a specific performance occurs while being controlled to an automatic button performance state (specific performance state), an operation button to which an operation opportunity is given within the performance reception period occurs. 410 or the sword ornament 5001 (operated in a single operation mode), the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state) is terminated and the presentation is changed. (Processing to execute the effect after the operation) is performed respectively, so the player's desire to terminate the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and advance the effect depending on the player's own operation is enhanced. Even if it occurs within the period, it becomes possible to smoothly switch the performance state.

However, regarding the setting changes related to the automatic button production state (changing the setting to the automatic button production state or canceling the setting of the automatic button production state) during the period when the demo screen is displayed (state where symbol fluctuation is not executed) , the settings can be changed without requiring any operation on the sword decoration body 5001. In other words, the sword decoration 5001 is given a lower frequency of operation opportunities than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the symbol change, and when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001, the jackpot is expected to be higher than that of the operation button 410. It is something that is highly regarded. Therefore, the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not allowed solely for the purpose of changing the settings related to the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state), and as a result, the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is not granted. It would be more desirable to maintain interest in the game by increasing the sense of premium when playing the game. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period when the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the operation means other than the sword ornament 5001 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410 or other operation means) multiple times, the automatic button presentation state can be set or canceled.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of symbol variation when the automatic button presentation state is not controlled, the automatic button presentation state can be changed without requiring any operation on the sword ornament 5001. Settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the "long press mode", the automatic button presentation state is controlled, but only the setting change to the automatic button presentation state is necessary. No operation is allowed on the sword ornament 5001 for the purpose of this purpose.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the settings related to the automatic button presentation state can be changed by the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is the case where the settings related to the automatic button presentation state are changed when the pattern is controlled to be in the automatic button presentation state. This is limited to the case where a performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs during the execution period of the fluctuation, an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is accepted as a performance within the performance reception period, and a corresponding post-operation performance appears. . According to such a configuration, the setting can be changed to the automatic button presentation state by operating the sword decoration 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is given. It becomes like this.

The plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment include an automatic button function that generates an effect upon operation even if no operation is performed within the effect acceptance period when in the automatic button effect state. In addition to operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) that can be targeted by the "performance function", special operation means that are not targeted by the "automatic performance function that generates a performance upon operation without any operation within the performance reception period" It may further include. In other words, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, a performance acceptance period occurs in which an opportunity to operate the special operation means is given, and if the performance is accepted for operation on the special operation means within the performance reception period, the corresponding The degree of expectation for a jackpot will be suggested by the performance after the operation according to the reception of the performance. However, even if the automatic button effect is controlled, if no operation of the special operation means is accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the effect was accepted may appear. There isn't. However, in this case, although the same post-operation performance as when the performance was accepted does not appear, it may be made to appear if it is different from the performance when the performance was accepted.

In addition, regarding the setting to the automatic button production state using the operation button 410 (operation in the form of a long press), the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. Not only the time, but also the performance reception period for an operation means other than the operation button 410 (the performance reception period in which the level of expectation is suggested when operating the sword ornament 5001, and the level of expectation is suggested when operating the special operation means) It is desirable to prevent this from being allowed even if there is a production reception period, etc.). In other words, if the automatic button effect state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (operating in a long-press mode) during the effect reception period for an operation means different from the operation button 410. In the middle of the performance reception period, the "automatic performance function that generates a performance upon operation without any operation within the performance reception period" is enabled, so that the original performance reception (operating an operation means different from the operation button 410) is enabled. This may occur without any operation (when the performance is accepted), and from the perspective of a player who is unfamiliar with such automatic button performance states, it is difficult to determine whether the performance reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred or whether the operation button 410 This is because the player may be confused as to whether or not there was a performance acceptance period for a different operation means, and there is a concern that this may reduce interest in the game.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a precursor performance prior to the occurrence of the performance acceptance period, but it is controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state). A precursor effect that appears before the production acceptance period occurs when the performance is not activated, and a precursor effect that appears before the production acceptance period occurs when controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state). It may also be possible to perform the display in a different manner. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize in advance whether or not the automatic performance function is in a performance state that can function within the specific performance reception period, and it becomes possible to enjoy the performance with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image indicating the remaining time (for example, a "bar display" indicating the remaining time) is displayed during the performance acceptance period. However, when the production acceptance period occurs, the specified image is displayed at least until the specific image (for example, a "bar display" indicating the remaining time) is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image of lightning falling toward the specific area) may be displayed outside the area (premonitor effect). In other words, in this case, when the production reception period occurs, by checking the movement of the production image that is different from the specific image, the user can pay attention to the location where the hidden "specific image suggesting the remaining time" will appear from now on. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the specific performance reception period ends due to the player's operation not being completed in time, and furthermore, Even if the player's operation is not completed in time, the automatic performance function functions and the post-operation performance is executed, so it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to set or cancel the setting of the automatic button production state by the player's operation, but the results of the jackpot determination, including the following explanation examples, are The state may be set to the automatic button performance state or the setting of the automatic button performance state may be canceled in accordance with the progress of the game or performance. An example of how the state can be set or canceled depending on the progress of the game or performance is, for example, ``While the control is in the normal game state, it is controlled as the automatic button performance state, but when the state is controlled in the jackpot game state. There are control modes such as ``The automatic button presentation state is canceled when the state changes to a high probability time saving state,'' and ``The automatic button presentation state is generated within the execution period of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation in the execution state is terminated. There are control modes such as "generating a production pattern that is canceled when a predetermined time has passed from the occurrence of the button production pattern", and "generating an automatic button production state over a period in which multiple symbol changes are executed". It is possible to adopt a control mode such as the following. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 1 may be always controlled to be in an automatic button presentation state, and in this case, the automatic button presentation state is not set and canceled, and the setting and cancellation of the "automatic button presentation state" are not canceled. This process itself will be eliminated.

Further, the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions may be when the remaining time of the production reception period has expired, or at a predetermined timing after that, or when the remaining time of the production reception period remains. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). If the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions when the remaining time of the performance reception period has expired or at a predetermined timing thereafter, the performance after the operation will be performed as if the performance had been accepted after the performance reception period ended. It will be executed. On the other hand, if the automatic performance function described above functions at a timing (specific timing) when there is still time left in the performance reception period, the automatic performance function described above will function as if there was an actual operation. At the point in time (specific timing), the performance reception period ends and the post-operation performance is executed.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that the effect will occur after the operation even if you do not operate it when the automatic button effect state is controlled, it is necessary to wait until the effect reception period ends (the effect reception It is important to make the above-mentioned automatic performance function function at a specific timing within the period to start the corresponding post-operation performance. In other words, in this case, if the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function even though the specific timing within the performance acceptance period has arrived, the post-operation performance will be generated by the player's own operation after the specific timing has arrived. It is also possible to cause anxiety when being controlled to the automatic button presentation state (for example, ``I am mistakenly thinking that I am being controlled to the automatic button presentation state even though I am not controlled to the automatic button presentation state.'') ``The automatic presentation function may not function due to some kind of trouble, and it may become impossible to check the presentation after operation.'') You will be able to do it.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button presentation state. Below, characteristic techniques related to the automatic button presentation state will be explained in sequence, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, or each of the following characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above presentation examples. They may be used in combination as appropriate.

In addition, in explaining each of the following characteristic technologies, the premise is that in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), normally when the specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) is not controlled, When a performance reception period occurs, which can occur, even if no operation is performed within the performance reception period, the same post-operation performance as when the operation is performed is generated. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of jackpot determination) that can only be executed when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, When a specific valid period occurs while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation was performed is generated even if no operation is performed within the specific valid period. You may also do so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation performance when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) (improvement of presentation performance by allowing the occurrence of a specific display presentation). Of course, even if a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) occurs, the automatic presentation function may not function during a different presentation reception period that is set when a specific display presentation is not performed. On the other hand, during a specific validity period when a specific display effect is being performed, the automatic effect function functions, which saves you the trouble of operating it, allowing you to enjoy the VIP feeling. Therefore, it is expected to suitably increase interest in games. It should be noted that the automatic presentation function does not necessarily have to function in all other presentation reception periods that are set when a specific display presentation is not being performed, and the automatic presentation function does not necessarily function in at least some of the presentation reception periods. If the function is made incapable of functioning, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved when a specific effective period occurs while a specific display effect is being performed (when the effect acceptance period in which the automatic effect function always functions occurs). It is possible to expect. In addition, even if such a specific validity period occurs, if there is no operation by the player until the arrival of a specific timing within the specific validity period, the above-mentioned automatic performance function will function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start a post-operation performance accordingly.

Further, after preparing at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination,
- If the first specific effective period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect will be executed at the timing when the first predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first specific effective period occurred. While the function functions to end the first specific validity period and generate a corresponding post-operation effect,
- When a second specific valid period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time period that is longer than the first predetermined time period after the second specific valid period occurs. At the timing when , the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions, ends the second specific validity period and generates a corresponding post-operation performance, and further,
・If the third specific effective period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific effective period will continue even though the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is controlled. Processes such as preventing the same post-operation effect from appearing if there is no operation until the end of the operation may be performed when in a specific effect state. According to such a configuration, even if the production acceptance period (specific valid period) occurs while the production is controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), the first production period starts from the occurrence of the production reception period. The above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions when a predetermined time period has elapsed, or the above-mentioned automatic presentation function does not function until a second predetermined time period that is longer than the first predetermined time period has elapsed; Even after the performance acceptance period ends, the above-mentioned automatic performance function may not be able to function in the first place. Therefore, even if the display is controlled to a specific display state (automatic button display state), it is possible to check which type of specific display display was being performed when the display reception period (specific valid period) occurred. For example, if the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function even though the first predetermined time has passed, the above-mentioned The performance can be progressed with a sense of tension, such as wondering whether the automatic performance function will work or whether the automatic performance function described above will not work in the first place. Note that the first specific validity period, the second specific validity period, and the third specific validity period are all set when the operation means to be operated (for example, the operation button 410) enters the operation state (so-called When a single operation is performed), the effect is accepted and a post-operation effect is generated.

Note that the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can only be executed when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). There may be. In this way, when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) can be displayed. In this case, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game interest in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state). In addition, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and a third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is prepared. does not necessarily have to be prepared. Furthermore, the post-operation effects that occur when the effect is accepted during the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period may have different presentation contents.

In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions to generate a post-operation performance, at what timing within the performance reception period did the automatic performance function function? In order to make it possible to recognize whether there was enough time left, an automatic production function was activated for the bar display (a display that changes the image (in this case, area change) as time passes) indicating the remaining time in the production acceptance period. The post-operation effect may be generated while this is displayed instead of being hidden at the time. According to such a configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that is continuously displayed at the time when the automatic production function functions, the production acceptance period can be changed to the first specific valid period ( A period during which the automatic performance function functions when the first predetermined time has passed, which is a relatively early stage after the production reception period occurs) and a second specific effective period (a period in which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time period has passed, which is a relatively early stage after the production reception period occurs) When the second predetermined time period, which is a late stage, has elapsed, it becomes possible to recognize which period the automatic presentation function is functioning.

In this sense, when the first specific effective period (the period in which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time has elapsed after the production acceptance period occurs) occurs, and when the second specific effective period ( The expected level of jackpot is different depending on when the automatic production function functions when the second predetermined time has passed after the production acceptance period occurs (for example, the second specific validity period is more advantageous) It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, if the first specific display effect or the second specific display effect is executed, you can expect a jackpot when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. They function in different degrees (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Additionally, if a post-operation performance occurs due to an operation by the player within the performance acceptance period, the "bar display" may be hidden in the state where the post-operation performance occurs, or the automatic performance function described above may be used. As in the case where the "bar display" functions, the post-operation effect may be generated while the "bar display" is displayed instead of being hidden. The post-operation performance does not have to be performed as a display change on the performance display device 1600, but may be performed, for example, as light emitted by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or as an action by a movable decoration. Good too.

In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions to generate a post-operation performance, the player does not have any involvement with the operating means to be operated (for example, the operation button 410), and the post-operation performance is generated. Since the performance is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operating means the automatically generated post-operation performance corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function is activated to generate a post-operation performance, first, during the performance reception period, an operation target suggestion image (for example, a target operation In addition, even if the above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions, the post-operation presentation is generated with the operation target suggestion image displayed instead of hidden. It is desirable to In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target does not necessarily have to be the same. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize which one was even in a state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, if a post-operation performance occurs due to an operation by the player within the performance acceptance period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation performance occurs, or the above-mentioned automatic As in the case where the performance function functions, the post-operation performance may be generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden. Whenever the automatic presentation function functions, such as when the automatic presentation function functions within the first specified validity period described above or when the automatic presentation function functions within the second specified validity period described above, The post-operation effect may be generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden.

In addition, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed in one of multiple modes with different jackpot expectations, both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect can be generated. This makes it possible to simultaneously check the following information, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, the post-operation performance does not have to be performed as a display change on the performance display device 1600, but may be performed as, for example, a light emitted by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decoration. There may be.

For example, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with the above-mentioned automatic production function, the operation target suggestion image (such as a mock image of the operation means) may appear only when the jackpot expectation level (for example, a jackpot has been obtained). If multiple modes are prepared in which the rate at which the post-operation effect is executed (the rate at which the post-operation effect is executed) is different, and the operation is accepted by the player's operation, the operation target will be changed at the time when the post-operation effect starts to be executed based on the operation reception. If the suggestive image (such as a simulated image of the operation means) is left displayed in one of the multiple modes with different expectations, the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of post-operation presentation can be changed. It becomes possible to check both at the same time, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when generating a valid period (direction reception period) during which the sample image is displayed, the type of the valid period (direction reception period) (conditions for the generation of the valid period, post-operation effects that occur when the operation is accepted), etc. (e.g., the type of display), the display area is reduced over time (first effective period that occurs when the first condition is met), and the display area is reduced over time (first effective period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied). It is desirable that there be a case where the display is not performed (a second validity period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied). In other words, during a valid period in which no display is displayed and the display area is reduced over time, it becomes difficult to recognize how much time is left for accepting operations. You will be able to maintain a good sense of internal tension. Note that "not displaying a display area in which the display area of a specific image is reduced over time" means, for example, that normally (during the first effective period) the display area of a specific image is displayed in a manner that the display area is reduced over time. When displaying an image, this can be achieved by not displaying the gauge image itself during the second valid period, or by displaying the gauge image but by adopting a method in which the display area is not reduced over time. be.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the second validity period (in the case where the display area is not reduced over time), changes in response to the operation acceptance (display changes, lamp lighting, etc.) It is desirable that at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect starts to be executed, so that the simulated image is not hidden but is displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to understand that the operation was accepted while the sample image was displayed (before the expiration date), making it possible to feel anxious about not being able to complete the operation in time. will be able to be removed.

In this case, the display mode of the sample image (for example, color or Transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and it is also possible for the sample image to be made difficult to see due to other images. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state where a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) has occurred. However, in order to suitably obtain such effects, it is necessary at least at the time when the change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) starts to be executed. It is desirable that the display state of the model image is maintained in the manner in which it was displayed before the operation was accepted, and that the display state of the model image is not made difficult to recognize by other images. Therefore, if the sample image was dynamically displayed during the validity period during which operation reception was permitted, there would be at least one change in response to the operation reception (display change, lamp lighting, etc.) ) is desirably continued to be dynamically displayed even when execution has started. On the other hand, if the player's operation causes a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) within the first validity period, the change occurs. The sample image may be hidden in a state where (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs, or as in the case of the second validity period described above, the sample image may be displayed instead of being hidden. Changes (changes in display, lighting of lamps, etc.) may occur in response to operation reception in the state.

However, even during the effective period in which "the display area of a specific image is not displayed to be reduced over time," a mock image of the operating means to be operated will still be displayed. As for images, it is desirable to display them as moving images that progress at a specific speed. According to such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time when operation reception is allowed depending on how much the moving image based on the sample image has progressed. This is possible, and it is expected that the player's interest in gaming will be suitably maintained.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example includes a first operating means (for example, the operating button 410) and a second operating means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) as operating means, and the first operating means There are cases in which a valid period (direction reception period) during which operations for the second operating means are permitted, and cases in which a valid period (direction reception period) during which operations are permitted for the second operation means are generated. Among these, during the validity period in which the acceptance of operations on the first operation means is permitted, a first image of the first operation means is displayed, and during the validity period in which the reception of operations on the second operation means is permitted, the second operation means is displayed. The second sampled image is displayed. In addition, the validity period in which the operation reception on the first operation means is allowed and the validity period in which the operation reception on the second operation means is allowed are different from each other. The rate at which modes that only appear when a jackpot is executed is made to differ. In addition to the valid period during which operation reception for the first operation means is permitted (direction reception period) and the validity period during which operation reception for the second operation means is permitted (direction reception period), there are valid periods different from these. Furthermore, it may be something that can occur. In this regard, when an operation is accepted during a valid period with a high expectation of a jackpot (for example, a valid period in which accepting operations on the second operating means is permitted), changes in response to the operation acceptance (display changes, etc.) It is desirable that the simulated image (second simulated image) be in a displayed state, rather than being hidden, at the time when execution of at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as lighting of a lamp, etc., starts.

As a result, in addition to the case where the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. However, if you accidentally operate the first operating means (for example, the operating button 410) and leave the first operating means (for example, the operating button 410) in the operating state (without performing the operation), Even if an operation is performed on the second operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) and the operation is accepted, the player is made to recognize that the effect has been properly accepted. You will be able to do this.

In this case, the display mode of the sample image (for example, color or Transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and it is also possible for the sample image to be made difficult to see due to other images. It suffices if it can be recognized even in a state where a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) has occurred. However, in order to suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects, at least at the time when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) starts to be executed, it is necessary to It is desirable that the display state of the sample image is maintained in the manner in which it was displayed before the reception was made, and that the gauge image is not made difficult to see due to other images. Therefore, if the sample image was dynamically displayed during the validity period during which operation reception was permitted, there would be at least one change in response to the operation reception (display change, lamp lighting, etc.) ) is desirably continued to be dynamically displayed even when execution has started. In addition, in order to make the player aware that the performance has been properly accepted, it is necessary to make changes (such as display changes and lamp lighting) due to the player's operation within the first validity period. Even if such a change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs, the change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) in response to the operation reception is performed while the sample image (first sample image) is displayed without being hidden. , lamp emission, etc.).

According to such a configuration, "a determination means that performs a determination, a performance means that performs a performance based on the result of the determination by the determination means, and a performance device that performs a performance based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination by the determination means." a special operation receiver disposed movably between a first position and a second position (an operation button 410 displaceable between a normal position and a pressed position); ), a first detection section capable of detecting a specific action (press operation) by the player based on the displacement of the specific operation receiving section to a second position, and a special operation receiving section different from the specific operation receiving section. (For example, a second detection unit capable of detecting a special action (for example, a sheathing operation) by a player on the sword decoration 5001), A plurality of production reception periods including a first production reception period and a second production reception period are prepared as production reception periods (of different types), and in the first production reception period, a specific production reception period that imitates the specific operation receiving section is prepared. A simulated image is displayed, and the performance is accepted by detection by the first detection section, and in the second performance reception period, a special simulated image that simulates the special operation receiving section is displayed, and the performance is accepted by the detection by the first detection section. The performance is accepted by the detection by the second detection unit, and even though a special imitation image imitating the special operation receiving unit is displayed during the second performance reception period, the specific operation by the player is When the specific operation receiving section is displaced from the first position to the second position, even if the player performs the special operation while maintaining the specific operation receiving section at the second position, the second detection Based on the detection by the section, the performance is accepted, and the performance after the operation is made executable based on the performance reception.

With such a configuration, even if the player performs the special operation while maintaining the specific operation receiving section at the second position, the performance is accepted by the detection by the second detection section, and the corresponding operation is accepted. At the time when the execution of the post-operation performance is started based on the reception of the performance, the special imitation image that simulates the special operation receiving part is kept displayed instead of hidden, so that it is not the side that operated by mistake. The player can be made aware that the post-operation performance is being executed as a proper operation.

In addition, when the special sample image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different jackpot expectations, the post-operation performance will start to be executed in the displayed mode. If the production is accepted without such an erroneous operation, the sample image may be left displayed instead of hidden at the time when the post-operation production starts, or the sample image may be left displayed after the operation. The simulated image may be hidden at the time when the performance is started.

By the way, the frequency of occurrence of the second effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the special operation receiving part is lower than that in the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving part. This is considered to be one of the causes of many operational errors. Therefore, when the second production reception period occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the special operation receiving section, it is indicated that the production reception is allowed or will be in a state where production reception is allowed. It is desirable that a reception acceptance sound is output. This allows the player to recognize that the second performance acceptance period has occurred, and is expected to make it difficult for the player to make operational errors. The "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible state (valid period) will definitely occur while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned), or the reception This refers to a sound in which a permissible state (validity period) has already occurred. In other words, the output is started within the set time period in which presentation reception is permitted, indicating that the presentation reception is permitted, or before the set time period in which presentation reception is permitted begins. It is a sound that indicates that the output is started and the reception of the production is permitted, and is output as a production sound such as "Peekeen", for example.

However, even when the first production reception period occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation receiving section, it is indicated that the production reception is allowed or will be in a state where production reception is allowed. A reception acceptance sound may be output. However, in this case, it is preferable that the mode (tone, etc.) of the acceptance permissible sound be made different depending on whether the first presentation acceptance period occurs or the second presentation acceptance period occurs. Alternatively, during the first performance reception period, even if a performance is accepted while the reception permissible sound is being output, the reception permissible sound that is in the output state will not be terminated and will continue, but during the second performance reception period. In this system, if a production is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being output, it is desirable that the reception permission sound being output is terminated midway through. Both of these configurations may be adopted. According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand whether the first performance reception period or the second performance reception period will occur, and whether the operation on the specific operation receiving section or the special operation reception period will occur. It becomes possible to properly grasp which operation has been accepted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a gauge image (small gauge image) with a relatively small display area is displayed, and then the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) is displayed to become smaller as time passes. (For example, the display area will eventually be set to "0") to generate a small gauge validity period (performance reception period) that indicates the remaining time when operation reception is allowed. Displaying a relatively large gauge image (large gauge image) and then decreasing the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) over time (for example, eventually reducing the display area to "0") In some cases, a large gauge valid period (performance reception period) indicating the remaining time in which operation reception is allowed is generated by displaying a display that indicates that the operation is accepted. The small gauge validity period in which the small gauge image is displayed and the large gauge validity period in which the large gauge image is displayed are based on the expectation level of jackpot that is suggested when the operation is accepted. The rate at which aspects that do not appear are executed) is different (for example, the expectation of a jackpot is higher during the large gauge validity period). In addition to the small gauge validity period and the large gauge validity period, a validity period different from these may be generated. The small gauge validity period and the large gauge validity period may provide an operation opportunity for the same operation object, or may provide an operation opportunity for different operation objects.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the large gauge validity period, the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp lighting) starts to be executed. It is desirable that the large gauge image remain displayed rather than hidden. Additionally, the large gauge image becomes smaller over time even when the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp lighting) starts to be executed. It is desirable that the display continues without being terminated. As a result, while there was a sense of security as it appeared that there was a lot of time remaining due to the large gauge image being displayed, after the operation was accepted, there were questions about whether or not the operation was accepted properly. It becomes possible to make the patient feel a sense of anxiety, and it becomes possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension.

In this case, the display mode of the gauge image (for example, color or transmittance, etc.) do not necessarily have to be the same, and the gauge image may be made difficult to see due to other images. However, in order to suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects, at least at the time when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) starts to be executed, it is necessary to It is desirable that the display state of the gauge image is maintained in the manner in which it was displayed before the reception was made, and that the gauge image is not made difficult to see due to other images. On the other hand, if a change (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp emission) occurs due to an operation by the player within the small gauge validity period, the change occurs. The gauge image (small gauge image) may be hidden in a state where a change in display (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs. ) may be displayed instead of being hidden, and a change (such as a display change or a lamp lighting) may be generated in response to an operation reception.

In addition, when the large gauge validity period occurs, it is desirable that a reception permission sound indicating that the state in which production reception is permitted or that production reception is permitted is output. . This allows the player to recognize that the large gauge validity period has expired, thereby further emphasizing the sense of security until the operation is accepted. The "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible state (valid period) will definitely occur while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned), or the reception This refers to a sound in which a permissible state (validity period) has already occurred. In other words, the output is started within the set time period in which presentation reception is permitted, indicating that the presentation reception is permitted, or before the set time period in which presentation reception is permitted begins. It is a sound that indicates that the output is started and the reception of the production is permitted, and is output as a production sound such as "Peekeen", for example.

However, even when the small gauge validity period occurs, an acceptance permission sound may be output that indicates that the performance reception is permitted or that the performance reception is permitted. However, in this case, it is desirable that the mode (tone, etc.) of the acceptance permissible sound be made different depending on whether a small gauge valid period occurs or a large gauge valid period occurs. Alternatively, during the small gauge validity period, even if a performance reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound that is being output will not end and will continue, but during the large gauge validity period, If the production is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is being output, it is desirable that the acceptance acceptance sound being output is terminated midway through. Both of these configurations may be adopted. According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand whether a small gauge valid period or a large gauge valid period occurs, and it is possible to accept an operation during a small gauge valid period and a large gauge valid period. It becomes possible to properly grasp which operation was accepted during the period.

The large gauge image and the small gauge image may not only be different in size, but also have different shapes (such as images that are not similar).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above (or described later), during the period in which operation acceptance is permitted, the simulated image is dynamically displayed to depict the displacement of the operation receiving part. It is to be displayed. In this regard, the sample image is not hidden but remains displayed at the point when the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as display change or lamp lighting) starts to be executed. In this case, the dynamic display of the simulated image may be continued without being terminated.

Further, the sample image and the gauge image may be displayed as an integrated sample image, which will be described later, in which they are integrated.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples and the production examples described later, "operation reception" refers to detection by mechanical operation means such as buttons, as well as detection by touch sensor of contact with a specific operation receiving part. The operation may be accepted by detecting the movement of the player in a specific area in a non-contact manner.

In addition, when we refer to a performance that generates a performance reception period during which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) as an "operation-based performance," there is no relation to this operation-based performance. It may also be possible to perform it in parallel with another specific performance (for example, a movable body performance, a count performance, etc.) that does not have a specific effect. However, in this case, if the "operation-based production" is executed but "another specific production unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operation-related production" and "another specific production unrelated to this" are not executed. It is desirable that the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions is higher than when there is a performance situation in which "Specific Performance" is being performed concurrently. In other words, when there is a performance situation in which an "operation-based production" and "another specific production unrelated to this" are concurrently performed, it is assumed that the production is not accepted for the "operation-related production" and the post-operation production is not executed. In contrast, a decline in gaming interest can be suppressed because ``another specific performance unrelated to this one'' is in the running state, whereas an ``operation-based performance'' is executed but ``another specific performance unrelated to this one'' is in progress. If you are in a production situation where "Specific Production" is not being executed, if the production is not accepted for "Operation Production" and the production is not executed after the operation, you will end up in a situation where no production will be executed. Therefore, a decline in interest in gaming is inevitable. Therefore, when an "operation-based production" is executed but "another specific production unrelated to this one" is not being executed, the "operation-related production" and "another specific production unrelated to this one" are executed. By making the rate at which the automatic performance function functions as described above higher than when there is a performance situation in which "performance" is performed concurrently, it is possible to suitably maintain the game's interest when an operation-based performance occurs. become. The percentage may be 100%. By the way, foreshadowing performances that are performed before the production reception period occurs, and performances that operate the operation means that are the target of operation, are executed as "operation-based performances" or performances related to this. It can be said that it is a thing. In addition, if the "another specific performance" is to be generated before the start of the performance acceptance period (preferably a precursory performance), it is suggested in advance that the rate at which the automatic performance function described above will function will be higher. You will be able to do it. In this case, it is desirable that the performance be executed as a performance that ends after the performance reception period (preferably, post-operation performance) ends. On the other hand, if "another specific performance" is to be executed as a performance that occurs after the start of the performance acceptance period (preferably a precursory performance) and ends before the end of the performance acceptance period, for example, It becomes possible to recognize only immediately beforehand whether there is a high probability that the automatic presentation function will function, and it becomes possible to provide presentations with a sense of tension. In this regard, if the "another specific performance" is to occur before the start of the performance acceptance period (preferably, the precursor performance), the "another specific performance" can be performed multiple times within one symbol change. If it is set to be performed, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so the automatic production function is likely to function when "another specific production" is executed. It is now possible to create a sense of tension as to whether or not the performance reception period will occur.

Also, when in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss fluctuations according to the result of the jackpot determination are sequentially digested and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, the loss fluctuation is executed 999 times in a row, Until the 1000th loss variation is reached, a performance reception period may occur with a predetermined probability in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) based on the result of the jackpot determination. In addition, even if the performance acceptance period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, the above-mentioned automatic performance function may function or may not function. On the other hand, when in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot judgment is sequentially digested and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is executed 999 times in a row). When the 1000th losing variation is reached, the symbol variation (performance pattern) that reaches the specific value will be given an operating opportunity to the operating means (any of multiple operating means) regardless of the result of jackpot determination. In addition to ensuring that there is a performance acceptance period in which a performance is granted, the above-mentioned automatic performance function will function even if there is no operation by the player within the performance reception period, and there will be an operation by the player within the performance reception period. Processing that always generates the same post-operation effect as before may be executed. According to such a configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of the loss variation reaches a specific value, "the player should perform an operation every time a performance acceptance period occurs while the loss variation is being executed continuously." As if feeling a sense of responsibility, the Pachinko machine 1 itself will always function automatically even if there is no operation by the player. Since the game is realized as a performance that makes the player feel excited, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game. At this time, during the performance reception period that occurs when the losing fluctuations are sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th losing fluctuation), the losing fluctuations are sequentially digested and the execution is performed. A special display image (e.g., "Operate") that is different from the display image that appeared during the performance acceptance period until the number of times reaches a certain value (e.g., loss variation up to 999 times) (e.g., "Operate", etc.) It is desirable to display a message such as "If it is troublesome, I will handle the operation on your behalf." In addition, even after the symbol variation (performance pattern) that has reached a specific value is digested, each time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a jackpot game state) is fulfilled, the symbol variation (Performance pattern), regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, a performance reception period is always generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means), and a special display image (for example, " If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf.''), and even if there is no operation by the player within the production acceptance period, the automatic production function described above will function and respond to the production reception. It is desirable to execute a process that always generates a post-operation effect.

In addition, when in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot judgment is sequentially digested and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is executed 999 times in a row, The remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the 1000th losing fluctuation) may be displayed.

In addition, when in a specific production state (automatic button production state), until the loss variation according to the result of jackpot judgment is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value, during symbol variation, the first operation Both the production acceptance period for the means and the production acceptance period for the second operation means can occur, but in the symbol variation when the losing variation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value. Alternatively, the performance may be advanced so that only one of the performance reception period for the first operating means and the performance reception period for the second operation means always occurs, and the other side cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is possible to prevent expectations from being raised regarding the occurrence of the production acceptance period itself. It becomes wet. However, this example shows that "despite the fact that we have been urging players to perform operations every time a production acceptance period occurs while losing fluctuations are being executed continuously, no results have been achieved. As if he felt a sense of responsibility, considering that the pachinko machine itself is realized as a performance that ensures that the automatic performance function functions even if there is no operation by the player, it is a transitional situation. In order to prevent such expectations from building up any further, a production reception period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) for which the level of expectation is relatively low at the time of occurrence, and the second operation means (for example, It is desirable that the performance acceptance period for the sword decoration object 5001) not occur.

In addition, for the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means, the control is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). This can occur both when not in use and when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state). Regarding the second production acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given, this cannot occur unless the control is controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), and the second production reception period is given when the operation opportunity is given. It may be possible to generate the event when the event occurs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation performance when the control is in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), and when the control is in the specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state). This makes it possible to suitably maintain the player's interest in gaming.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when generating the performance reception period based on the result of jackpot determination,
・Display a sample image of the operation means (operation target suggestion image suggesting the operation means to be operated) (sample image display means);
- After the performance acceptance period has occurred, if the player performs an operation while the sample image is being displayed, the post-operation performance can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means);
- After the performance acceptance period has occurred, if a specific timing arrives without any operation by the player while the sample image is being displayed, the post-operation performance can be executed without receiving any operation from the player ( automatic production reception means)
However, the sample image may be displayed in one of several modes that differ in the rate (expectation level) that the effect will be executed after the operation in a ``mode advantageous to the player'' when the effect is accepted. It is desirable to be able to do so. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized in both the case where the post-operation performance is generated by the player operation reception means and the case where the post-operation performance is generated by the automatic performance reception means. It will be possible to generate effects after the operation.

In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions to generate a post-operation performance, the player does not have any involvement with the operating means to be operated (for example, the operation button 410), and the post-operation performance is generated. Since the performance is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operating means the automatically generated post-operation performance corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function is activated to generate a post-operation performance, first, a sample image (an operation target suggestion image that suggests the operation means to be operated) is displayed within the performance reception period, and at the same time, Even if the above-mentioned automatic presentation function functions, it is desirable to generate the post-operation presentation while the simulated image is displayed instead of being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target does not necessarily have to be the same. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize which one was even in a state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, if a post-operation performance occurs due to an operation by the player within the performance acceptance period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation performance occurs, or the above-mentioned automatic As in the case where the performance function functions, the post-operation performance may be generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden. The post-operation performance may be performed using at least an area of the performance display device 1600 that is different from the area where the sample image is displayed, or may be performed using a lamp provided on the game board 5 or a movable decoration. It may also be executed as an operation by.

At this time, if the sample image is displayed in one of multiple modes with different expectations, even if the post-operation effect occurs, the expectation level (the sample image) that was suggested during the effect acceptance period will be display mode).

The simulated image that continues to be displayed in this way is hidden after the post-operation effect occurs. However, when automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a specific time has elapsed after the first-side performance reception period has occurred, and when the specific time has passed since the first-side performance reception period has occurred, In the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means is executed when different times have elapsed, the time from when the post-operation presentation is executed until the simulated image is hidden is also different from each other. is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect has been generated by automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed, or whether the post-operation effect has been generated by automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has elapsed. Even if there is no post-operation effect, you will be able to recognize at what time the post-operation effect occurred by checking the time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the sample image is hidden. .

In addition, when a post-operation effect occurs due to automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed, and when a post-operation effect occurs due to automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has passed, a jackpot is determined by the jackpot judgment. The degree of expectation obtained may be different.

In addition, if a performance reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to operate occurs while being controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), two displays will be displayed during the performance reception period. Either of the display modes (for example, a low-expectation display mode with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot or a high-expectation display mode with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot) can appear, and a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) ) appears, even if no operation is performed within the production acceptance period, the production will be accepted (the automatic production function will always function) and the production will be executed after the operation according to the production reception, but the low expectations display When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, a production is accepted (the automatic production function functions) when no operation is performed within the production reception period, and a post-operation production according to the production reception is executed. The presentation may be advanced so that there are cases where the presentation is accepted (the automatic presentation function functions) and there are cases where the presentation is not executed after the operation. In other words, if you forget to operate when a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, it is inevitable that you will lose interest in the game because you will not be able to confirm the performance after the operation. When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, it is assumed that the game's interest will not decrease significantly even if the player forgets to perform an operation. If you sometimes forget to perform an operation, the automatic performance function must function within the performance acceptance period to avoid a decline in gaming interest due to forgetting to perform an operation. If you forget to operate when the image) appears, the automatic production function will not necessarily function during the production acceptance period to create a sense of tension in the game so that you will not forget to operate it. It is expected that this will increase the awareness of player participation. Note that when not controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), a low expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) does not appear. It may be made so that it cannot appear. Furthermore, during the performance acceptance period, any of three or more display modes may appear.

[Further performance regarding sample image display]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of determining which of a plurality of fluctuation patterns to execute based on the result of jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) as to which of the expected performances (such as a preview performance) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

Then, when such a performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) is performed, control is performed to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment on the performance display device 1600, so that the effect is displayed according to the result of the jackpot judgment. A fluctuating effect based on the decorative pattern will be executed together with an expected effect (preliminary effect) regarding the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (actual object effect). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effects based on the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed as a bonus for the player. It becomes possible.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected presentation will be provided as a presentation with "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a jackpot has been won." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), it is possible to generate an operation reception performance (valid period) in which the performance reception is permitted. However, as will be described later, the acceptance permissible sound that is output when the operation acceptance effect occurs is made to differ in form depending on the result of the effect determination, and as a result, the post-operation effect is executed in a highly anticipated manner. It is designed to suggest the percentage of winnings and the percentage of jackpot symbols being stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination, Even if a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when the predetermined condition is met), It is possible to generate an operation reception performance (valid period) in which performance reception is permitted. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected and a special result is not obtained in the production judgment, the operation acceptance production (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the operation reception performance (valid period) that occurs with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the operation reception performance (validity period) that occurs when the symbol performance based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is performed as a performance.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview effect judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the operation acceptance effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, there is a variation pattern other than the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern". It may also be provided. However, regardless of which result is obtained as a preview effect judgment, a variation pattern that generates an operation acceptance effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing is not included in the low expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). It is desirable to prevent this from occurring, or to reduce its selection ratio.

By the way, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions is a predetermined effect for the effect element that is the target of the effect, as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). The operation only executes a post-operation performance that causes a change (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in a speaker, a light emission change by a lamp, and a performance operation by a movable decoration). The reception performance (validity period) itself is poor in performance, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease until the performance is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception performance,
・During the execution period of the symbol production (production pattern) based on the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), "BGM playback (specific type of production sound)" according to the variation pattern (production pattern) is in a non-suppressed mode. During the execution period of a low-expectation non-suppression reception performance that provides operation opportunities while being output, or a symbol performance (performance pattern) based on a high-expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), the fluctuation pattern (performance pattern) is Is the corresponding "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" suppressed or output without sound, or is in a non-output state (whether the playback period in which audible sound is recorded among the sound data has ended, or whether the channel assignment As mentioned above, various measures have been taken, such as making it possible at least to generate a high-expectation suppression reception performance that provides an opportunity to operate even when the system is closed (e.g., has been terminated).

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further displays the simulated image displayed in the operation reception performance as an integrated simulated image that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the simulated image. This is intended to improve the game's interest when the operation acceptance performance (validity period) occurs. For such an integrated mock image, there is an operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that occurs with the above-mentioned predetermined variation pattern. It is desirable to display this in both the reception performance (validity period), and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. In addition, for each of the above-mentioned production examples, it is desirable to replace the display mode of the illustrated sample images with one of the integrated sample images described below, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. .

Hereinafter, a case will be described in which a sample image is displayed as an "integrated sample image."
First, to explain the "sample image" again, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given in the operation reception performance includes the "operation receiver" that is operated by the player, and the periphery of the operation receiver. A "peripheral decoration part" for decoration is provided. In this regard, the term "simulation image" refers to an image that simulates the "operation receiver" of such operation means. The "operation receiving part" is usually provided so as to be displaced by the player's manipulation, and the "peripheral decoration part" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the case of the operation means (effect operation unit 400) illustrated in FIGS. 39 and 40, the "operation receiving section" corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the "periphery decoration section" corresponds to the frame unit 415. This corresponds to . Furthermore, in the case of the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) illustrated in FIGS. 124 and 139, the "operation receiving part" corresponds to the sword part 5010, and the "periphery decoration part" corresponds to the sheath part 5020. Become.

FIG. 144 shows the "integrated image" that is displayed when an operation reception effect (valid period) occurs for an operation means provided with an "operation receiver" that receives a "press operation" by a player. It is a figure showing an example.

In this example, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an "operation receiver" on the upper surface of the handle 5012 of the sword decoration 5001. That is, when the handle button 5014 is "pressed" by the player, it is pushed into the handle part 5012 and detected by a predetermined sensor (detection means), and the detected information is used to determine the effect (such as the trigger for executing the effect after the operation). ). According to such a configuration, the sword decoration body 5001 as an operation unit includes a "handle button 5014" that can be operated (up and down) with respect to the handle 5012, and a "handle button 5014" that can be operated (up and down) with respect to the sheath 5020. Two operation receiving parts with a possible "handle part 5012" will be provided.

FIG. 144 describes the "integrated image" when a specific operation reception performance (valid period) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 when a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. I decided to. However, in the examples described below, including FIG. It may be applied as an "integrated image" when an operation acceptance performance (validity period) that gives an opportunity occurs. In other words, in this case, the "simulated image of the operation button 410" illustrated in each of the above-mentioned production examples can be replaced with the "integrated simulated image" described below, and in this case, the pattern button 5014 is not provided and is omitted as a member.

As shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception that gives an operation opportunity to the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) When generating an effect (validity period), in the effect display device 1600, a button pattern image BMG that imitates the patterned button 5014 (or operation button 410) is integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery. They are displayed as integrated images IGa to IGd. In the example shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are not prepared separately as image data, but are integrated into one image data (integrated image data). They are displayed only as morphological images IGa to IGd). Furthermore, when the integrated image IGa to IGd are displayed, operation prompts such as "press" and "down arrow" are also displayed, but for convenience of explanation, they are omitted here.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the post-operation performance executed when an operation is accepted in a specific operation reception performance (validity period) is a "first performance mode with relatively low expectations" and a "relatively low expectation performance mode". A plurality of performance modes are prepared, including a "second performance mode with high expectations," and one of these production modes is executed based on the result of the jackpot judgment (performance judgment). . In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d),
・The mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated model image IGb) is better than when the mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image IGa) appears in a specific operation reception performance (validity period) When this appears, the percentage of appearance of "second production mode with relatively high expectations" will be higher as a post-operation production.
- The mode shown in FIG. 144(c) (integrated model image IGc) is better than when the mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated model image IGb) appears in a specific operation reception performance (valid period) When this appears, the percentage of appearance of "second production mode with relatively high expectations" will be higher as a post-operation production.
・The mode shown in FIG. 144(d) (integrated model image IGd) is better than the mode shown in FIG. Based on the result of jackpot judgment (performance judgment), so that a relationship is established that when ``2nd production mode with relatively high expectation level'' appears as a post-operation production when . One of the morphological images IGa to IGd is displayed.

It is not necessary to prepare all of the four aspects shown as the integrated image IGa to IGd. Just by preparing at least two aspects, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation performance within the effective period. Furthermore, it is possible to further prepare modes different from the above four modes (integrated image IGa to IGd) and display any one of the prepared modes.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
- An operation means (sword decoration body 5001, production operation unit 400),
- An integrated model image display unit that displays a model image of the operation receiving part as integrated model images IGa to IGd that are integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image;
- an operation reception execution means capable of causing a display change (post-operation effect) when a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving part due to an operation performed by the player while the integrated image is displayed; The integrated model image can be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

Details of the "integrated model images" shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d) will be explained separately for each aspect (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

First, the "integrated pattern image IGa" shown in FIG. 144(a) is configured to include a normal button pattern image BMGa and a normal peripheral edge decoration image SSGa that decorates its periphery. However, in the "integrated model image IGa", the normal button model image BMGa is displayed as "an image that simulates the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given". On the other hand, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is "a peripheral decoration part (handle part 5012 or frame unit 415), but instead decorates the periphery of the normal button pattern image BMGa as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600.

According to such a configuration, first, even if a plurality of operating means are provided, it is determined which of the operating means is given the opportunity to operate based on the operating means to be operated ( It can be easily recognized by visually recognizing the normal button pattern image BMGa that imitates a part of the button image BMGa. Moreover, the normal button pattern image BMGa itself is not an actual peripheral decoration part, but a luxurious and large image (integrated pattern image IGa) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that is preferable for improving decorativeness and performance. ), it is expected that the visual impact when the normal button sketch image BMGa is displayed will be greater, and that it will increase the interest in the game. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost or installation space required to make an existing peripheral decoration part luxurious, and it is possible to realize a highly flexible presentation that is not limited by the shape of an existing peripheral decoration part. become.

In the "integrated model image IGa" shown in FIG. 144(a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is expressed as a pedestal for installing a button (normal button model image BMGa), and on its top surface, A predetermined decoration is applied to warn that the button is highly dangerous. As described above, these "pedestals" and "predetermined decorations" have shapes different from the actual peripheral decorations and are expressed as different decorations.

In this regard, in the "integrated image IGa" according to this embodiment, a display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 145 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that the display area within the display target area is decreased over time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG changes from the predetermined maximum display area to the predetermined minimum value (including "0") when no operation is accepted within the validity period. The display area decreases over time until it reaches the display area of . In other words, in this case, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa not only has the function of indicating the operation means to be operated, but also indicates the remaining time until the state (validity period) in which operation reception is permitted ends. It also has the function of suggesting the remaining time.

In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 144(a), a partition image KG is provided that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. . The area surrounded by this divided image KG will function as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG". However, the partition image KG does not necessarily need to be displayed, and a predetermined range within the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG."

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 144(a), a predetermined decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") is applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. , a gauge image (here, a "gray" gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed so as to overlap with the display target area to which the predetermined decoration has been applied. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden but becomes visible even in the part where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, so that the gauge image GG is displayed from a full state to It becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game over the entire period until the game becomes empty.

Note that when realizing such a display mode within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image GG having a predetermined transmittance is superimposed on the display target area with the predetermined decoration. In addition to the display method, a method may be adopted in which the color of the display target area itself, which is decorated with a predetermined decoration, is changed in color between the part with the gauge and the part without the gauge. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist alone as image data, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by changing the color of the predetermined decoration within the display target area.

In the example shown in FIG. 144(a), the normal peripheral decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is Since it is arranged to extend over other areas within the image SSGa, it is possible to further enhance the integrated decorativeness of the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself. It is expected that the player's enjoyment of the game will be improved when the "integrated image IGa" is displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 144(a), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which the "integrated image IGa" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern button to be operated is pressed. 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button pattern image BMGa in the "integrated pattern image IGa". In other words, as will be described later, the button drawing image BMG has a plurality of modes with different expectations, and the button drawing image BMGa is normally displayed as one of these modes. If this is adopted, the mode (expectation level) of the button pattern image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the handle button 5014 that is the operation target, without visually recognizing the normal button pattern image BMGa.

The "button drawing image BMGa (FIG. 144(a))" does not necessarily have to be an exact copy of the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) that is the object of operation; in short, the object of operation is It is sufficient if it is displayed with a level of reproduction (deformation, etc.) that allows one to recognize which operating means it is.

On the other hand, the "integrated mapped image IGb" shown in FIG. , and a peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof are configured as an integrated image. However, in the "integrated map image IGb", the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", but the button map image BMG is displayed as the "button map image" described above. Instead of "BMGa," the button is displayed as "special button image BMGb," which has a different shape.

More specifically, in the "integrated model image IGb" shown in FIG. The button pattern image BMGa (FIG. 144(a)) is displayed as an image having a different shape from that of the button pattern image BMGa (FIG. 144(a)), which is a pattern of the button pattern 5014 (or the operation button 410). However, if such a display method is simply adopted, there is a concern that when the "integrated image IGb" is displayed, it will be difficult to recognize which of the plurality of operation means is being operated.

However, as mentioned above, in the "integrated model image IGa", the "button model image BMGa", which is a model of the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the operation target, is displayed integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". Therefore, the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" itself naturally has the function of indicating that the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) is the object to be operated. In this regard, in the "integrated map image IGb", the "special button map image BMGb" is displayed integrated with such "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", so the "special button map image Even if "BMGb" does not properly simulate the operation target, the "integrated simulated image IGb" as a whole may suggest that the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) is the operation target. become able to. In order to suitably obtain such an effect (the function of suggesting the operation target by the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa), the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" must be operated by a different operation means than the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410). It can be said that it is important not to display the handle part 5012 and the like when it is the object of operation.

According to this configuration, by displaying the button drawing image BMG, which imitates the operation receiving part, and the peripheral decoration image SSG, which decorates the periphery thereof, as an integrated image, it is possible to The button drawing image BMG, which is only a part of the fake image, can now be displayed in a more flexible expression method that is not necessarily limited to the shape of the operating means to be operated, resulting in a more outstanding presentation. It is expected that the game will be made more interesting by its attractiveness and decoration.

Note that the "special button drawing image BMGb" illustrated in FIG. The words "DANGER" are written on it. The appearance of such a "special button drawing image BMGb" that does not exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1 makes it easier for players to remember the premium feeling, and the "button drawing image BMGa" appears. People are now expected to instinctively sense that expectations are higher than they used to be.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) occurs in which the "integrated image IGb" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is also considered as an operation target. The patterned button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button pattern image BMGb in the "integrated pattern image IGb". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of button map image BMG in the "integrated map image IG", and as a result, the button pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, the mode (expectation level) of the button pattern image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target.

On the other hand, the "integrated mapped image IGc" shown in FIG. It is configured as an integrated image with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated map image IGc", the button map image BMG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal button map image BMGa", but the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the "normal peripheral decoration image" described above. Instead of "image SSGa", the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape is displayed.

However, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is also the same as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" in the following points.
- "The peripheral decoration part (handle part 5012 or frame unit 415) that is actually provided around the periphery of the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410), which is the object to which the operation opportunity is given, is not imitated, and the effect display is The periphery of the button pattern image BMG is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display performance on the device 1600.
- A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

According to such "integrated model image IGc (FIG. 144(c))", when using "integrated model image IGa (FIG. 144(a))" as a reference, it is possible to perform an operation on any operating means. It is possible to significantly change the overall shape of the "integrated map image IGc" (FIG. 144(c)) without causing a change in the shape of the "button map image BMG" that indicates whether an opportunity will be given. become able to. Thereby, it becomes possible to realize decorativeness and presentation with a high degree of freedom by causing shape changes without sacrificing the suggesting function of the operation target.

Further, in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 144(c))" according to this embodiment, at least a part thereof is an image having the same decoration as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 144(a))". It is displayed as . Therefore, the same post-operation effect is targeted when "integrated image IGa (Fig. 144(a))" appears and when "integrated image IGc (Fig. 144(c))" appears. It becomes possible to suggest that a specific operation reception effect (validity period) is applied.

In particular, in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 144(c))" according to this embodiment, a separate member with special decoration is added to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 144(a))". The image is enlarged and displayed as an enlarged image in its entirety. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is displayed as a developed version of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", and the expectation level is higher than when the "button drawing image BMGa" appears. People are expected to be able to instinctively sense things that are expensive.

Furthermore, although the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 144(c))" has a different shape and decoration from the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 144(a))," the gauge image (predetermined image) No change is made to the display target area of GG itself.

In other words, when a part of such an integrated image IG is used as the display target area of the gauge image GG, are the display target area and the gauge image "merely part of the decoration" or "the rest?" It is difficult for the player to discern whether the part has a function of indicating time or not. In this respect, the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 144(a))" and the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 144(c))" are gauges that have important functions such as "suggesting the remaining time." The shape of the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG is not changed, but the shape is changed in other parts, so it is possible to change the shape without sacrificing the remaining time suggestion function. This makes it possible to achieve decorativeness and performance with a high degree of freedom.

Further, as shown in FIG. 144(c), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) occurs in which the "integrated image IGc" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is also considered as an operation target. The patterned button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button pattern image BMGa in the "integrated pattern image IGc". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of the button map image BMG in the "integrated map image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, the mode (expectation level) of the button pattern image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target. However, when the "integrated map image IGc" is displayed, the normal button map image BMGa is displayed in a different color (for example, "green") than when the "integrated map image IGa" is displayed. You can also do this. In this case, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) will also emit green light.

On the other hand, the "integrated mapped image IGd" shown in FIG. It is configured as an integrated image with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated button drawing image IGd", the button drawing image BMG is not displayed as the above-mentioned "normal button drawing image BMGa" but as a "special button drawing image BMGb" which has a different shape. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG is also displayed as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a shape different from the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa".

That is, in the "integrated model image IGd (FIG. 144(d))", the "special button model image BMGb" used in the "integrated model image IGb (FIG. 144(b))" and the "integrated model image IGc" (FIG. 144(c))" is displayed as an integrated image with the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". According to such a configuration, the effect produced by the "special button map image BMGb" described above regarding the "integrated map image IGb (FIG. 144(b))" and the "integrated map image IGc (FIG. 144(b))" can be achieved. In addition to obtaining the effects achieved by the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" mentioned above regarding "c))", when using the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 144(a))" as a reference, Since the aspects of both the button drawing image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are changed, it is expected that the user will instinctively feel that the level of expectation is high.

On the other hand, even though the aspects of both the button drawing image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG are changed, the same decorations and shapes appear in some areas of the edge decoration image SSG. Identification for the same post-operation effect when "integrated image IGa (Fig. 144(a))" appears and when "integrated image IGd (Fig. 144(d))" appears. It becomes possible to suggest that the operation reception effect (validity period) is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 144(d), when a specific operation acceptance effect (valid period) in which an "integrated image IGd" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also considered as an operation target. The patterned button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button pattern image BMGb in the "integrated pattern image IGd". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of the button map image BMG in the "integrated map image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, the mode (expectation level) of the button pattern image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target. However, when the "integrated map image IGd" is displayed, the special button map image BMGb is displayed in a different color (for example, "rainbow color") than when the "integrated map image IGb" is displayed. You can do it like this. In this case, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) will also emit light in a rainbow color.

As shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the symbol presentation based on a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, and a predetermined operation acceptance presentation (valid period) When this occurs, an integrated button image IG in which the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are integrated is displayed, but one side of the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one manner. The other side can be displayed in one of a number of ways. For example, when the button drawing image BMG is displayed as the "normal button drawing image BMGa", the peripheral decoration image SSG may be displayed as either the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" ( Figures 144(a), (c)). Furthermore, when the button drawing image BMG is displayed as the "special button drawing image BMGb", the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as either the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" ( 144(b),(d)). Furthermore, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", the button print image BMG can be displayed as either the "normal button print image BMGa" or the "special button print image BMGb" ( Figures 144(a), (b)). Furthermore, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as the "special border decoration image SSGb", the button print image BMG may be displayed as either the "normal button print image BMGa" or the "special button print image BMGb" ( Figures 144(a), (b)).

According to such a configuration, although the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, only one side thereof is displayed when the aspect changes. Therefore, if you look at one side whose appearance has not changed, you can easily recognize that the predetermined operation reception performance (validity period) is occurring, regardless of which form the other side is displayed on. Therefore, by looking at the other side whose aspect is changing, it becomes possible to appropriately recognize the degree of expectation. Note that the aspect of one side of the button drawing image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG may not be changed, and only the aspect of the other side may be changed.

Furthermore, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When the integrated image IG is displayed in the operation reception performance (valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so that the display area within the display target area decreases over time. It is considered possible. In other words, in this case, the "peripheral decoration image SSG" has the function of suggesting the remaining time until the state in which operation acceptance is allowed ends, and indicates which operating means is the object of operation. By being displayed as an integrated button image IG that is integrated with the ``button image BMG'' that performs the suggesting function, it is possible to understand the remaining time and the operation target, and also recognize which of multiple modes has appeared. It is expected that the player will be able to suitably maintain the game's interest when the operation acceptance performance (validity period) is occurring, such as by being able to do so.

In addition, in the integrated sample image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. (There are both parts with a remaining time suggestion function and parts without a remaining time suggestion function). In other words, the purpose of the peripheral decoration image SSG is not only to indicate the remaining time of the operation reception effect (validity period), but also to indicate the remaining time of the operation reception effect (validity period). It is possible to proactively adopt display formats with the aim of "enhancing the user experience", so while indicating the remaining time, it is also possible to improve the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs. can be significantly improved. In order to obtain such effects, it is more desirable that the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG be displayed as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. I can say that.

Furthermore, in the integrated pattern image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode, the button pattern image BMG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. However, in reality, when the "handle part 5012" which is the peripheral decoration part has one mode, the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410) which is the operation receiving part has multiple modes (multiple luminescent colors). ). Therefore, when the button drawing image BMG changes, it can be confirmed by simply checking the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the object of copying.

Furthermore, in the integrated pattern image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), when the button pattern image BMG is displayed in one mode, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. However, as a matter of fact, the "handle portion 5012" which is the peripheral decorative portion does not change into any of the plurality of modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG decorates the peripheral edge of the button pattern image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not exist as a component of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not need to match the aspect of the "pattern part 5012" which is the peripheral decoration part, and can perform a variety of depictions that are preferable for enlivening the performance. Note that the "handle part 5012" which is the peripheral decoration part may be provided as something that cannot be changed into a plurality of modes, such as being non-emissive.

Furthermore, in the integrated pattern image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the aspect of both the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG may change (FIG. 144(d)). However, as a matter of fact, it is desirable that the aspects of both the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change when the "handle portion 5012" which is the peripheral decoration part is in one aspect.

Different aspects appear in the “handle portion 5012” which is the peripheral decoration part, depending on whether the peripheral decoration image SSG is the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” or the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. You can do it like this. However, while the peripheral decoration image SSG at least changes in shape between the case where it is the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", the peripheral decoration In the "handle portion 5012", it is desirable to cause only a change in the aspect (for example, a change in the light emission manner) without a change in shape. It can be said that it is desirable to provide the peripheral decoration part so that its shape cannot change in the first place, in order to highlight the virtual presentation function of the peripheral decoration image SSG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pattern images include a button pattern image BMG in which the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) is patterned, as well as a pattern image in which the pattern portion 5012 is patterned. TMG is prepared, and the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG is made to vary depending on which of the simulated images is displayed. That is, in this case, the peripheral decoration images SSGa,b that decorate the periphery of the button pattern image BMG cannot be displayed when a pattern image different from the button pattern image BMG is displayed, so that the peripheral edge The decorative images SSGa, b themselves can also be expected to have a "function that suggests which operating means is the object of operation."

Note that if the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG differs depending on the form of the pattern image (button pattern image BMG, pattern pattern image TMG), the form (thickness) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the peripheral decoration image , length) are also preferably different. The operation reception effect in which the button drawing image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the button drawing image TMG is displayed are effects that occur at the same timing within the same variation pattern (you can select which one occurs depending on the effect judgment) It may also be an effect that occurs in a different variation pattern or at a different timing. The periphery decoration image SSG that appears when the button pattern image BMG is not a periphery decoration part, and the periphery decoration image SSG that appears when the button pattern image TMG is a periphery decoration part is not an imitation of the periphery decoration part. It's okay. However, even if the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different, it is desirable that the set time as the operation acceptance effect (validity period) may be the same.

In addition, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and other areas in the peripheral decoration image SSG include those areas. A predetermined decoration (in this case, a "striped pattern") is applied over the area, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined decoration. That is, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration increases, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game. become able to.

In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image (here, a "gray" gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in an overlapping manner over a display target area that has been given a predetermined decoration. ing. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden but becomes visible even in the part where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, so that the gauge image GG is changed from a full state to It becomes possible to suitably maintain interest in the game over the entire period until the game becomes empty.

However, the predetermined decoration does not necessarily have to be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Further, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (also serve as) a predetermined decoration, and in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the predetermined decoration Since the number of predetermined decorations also decreases, players who dislike the loss of predetermined decorations are encouraged to perform operations early.

In the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the peripheral decoration image SSG is the peripheral edge of the operation receiving part (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) to be operated. The peripheral decoration part (handle part 5012 or frame unit 415) provided on the machine is not imitated, and the image represents an intangible object as a gaming machine part. Therefore, it becomes possible to realize decorativeness and performance with a higher degree of freedom without being limited by the substance of the gaming machine parts.

Furthermore, in the integrated pattern image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), among the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG, at least the peripheral decoration image SSG has a plurality of shapes. In other words, in this case, it is possible to change the shape of only the peripheral decoration image SSG representing an insubstantial object without changing the shape of the button drawing image BMG, so which of the plurality of operation means is the operation target. It becomes possible to realize a display with higher performance and decoration by changing the shape of the integrated image IG while appropriately indicating whether the image is being displayed or not.

Regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, when the button drawing image BMG is in one mode, the shape may not necessarily be changed, but only the color may be changed. However, the shape change is allowed because the edge decoration image SSG represents an insubstantial object and because the edge decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the button drawing image BMG. In this sense, it can be said that changing the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG has great technical value.

In addition, in the integrated replica image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), it was decided to change the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG by increasing its size. As will be explained later, methods for changing the shape include increasing the number of objects represented as images (such as the number of decorations), or using multiple methods with different contour shapes (cuboids, spheres, etc.) It is possible to adopt methods such as expanding the range of objects displayed within a predetermined object expressed as an image. Also, as will be described later, regarding the change in the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG, as a precursor effect, a stepwise change from a form with low expectations to a form with high expectations is performed, and then, finally, It may also be possible to allow operation reception in the operation reception performance while the changed form is maintained.

In addition, in the integrated sample image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), regardless of the form in which the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed, the gauge image ( The display target area of GG (predetermined image) is not changed (at least the shape) and is displayed in the same form. Therefore, even if the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG changes, it is possible to suitably maintain the function of suggesting how much time is left, and in this way, the important function can be maintained. While maintaining this, the degree of expectation can also be suggested by changes in shape in a region other than the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Depending on which of the above-mentioned effects is intended to be achieved, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not necessarily have to represent an insubstantial object, and may be a peripheral decoration provided on the peripheral edge of the operation receiver. It may also be displayed as an image of a portion of the image.

Furthermore, the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d) can be dynamically displayed during the "valid period in which operation reception is permitted" such as a predetermined operation reception presentation. This prompts the player to perform the operation.

However, in the integrated pattern image IG according to this embodiment, although the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, the button pattern image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are Only one side is dynamically displayed, and the other side is displayed statically. According to such a configuration, one side uses dynamic expressions to contribute to improving the performance when a button effect, which is an important effect, occurs, while the other side uses a dynamic expression to maintain the display in place. By doing so, when the integrated image IG is viewed as a whole, it will not be displayed moving, so visibility can be suitably ensured.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the button model image BMG is dynamically created so as to depict how the operation receiver to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within its movable range. The peripheral decoration image SSG is not dynamically displayed. Then, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the side that is not dynamically displayed (peripheral decoration image SSG), and when the integrated image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that the display area within the display target area is decreased over time.

In this way, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the side of the integrated image IG that has secured suitable visibility (the peripheral decoration image SSG, which is the side that is not dynamically displayed). Therefore, although we are trying to improve the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs by dynamic display using the button drawing image BMG, it is difficult to understand how much remaining time is allowed for the reception of the performance. can be easily recognized.

In addition, in addition to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, on the side of the integrated image IG that has ensured suitable visibility (the side that is not dynamically displayed, the peripheral decoration image SSG), the gauge image ( Predetermined image) Also includes an area where GG is not displayed. That is, in this case, when performing a performance that suggests the level of expectation on the side of the integrated image IG that has secured suitable visibility, the performance is performed in an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from having an adverse effect.

A region of the peripheral decoration image SSG that is different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG itself, and the button pattern image BMG have multiple aspects with different expectations. Although one of the modes is displayed based on the result of jackpot determination (performance determination), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself have different expectations. A plurality of modes may be provided, and one of these modes may be displayed based on the result of jackpot determination (performance determination).

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), when the button pattern image BMG is displayed as an integrated pattern image IG that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery, In addition, if the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG merely a decoration or pattern within the peripheral decoration image SSG? There is a concern that it will be difficult to grasp whether the time limit is 100%, or has a function that indicates the remaining time. In addition, there is a concern that interest in the game may be reduced because it becomes difficult to grasp to what position the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has decreased due to the mixture with the decorations and patterns applied to the peripheral decoration image SSG. .

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, at least when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), the gauge image ( In the display target area where the predetermined image) GG can be displayed, it is possible to display an image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or an image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed.

More specifically, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is used as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It is displayed at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the display target area. Then, a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display position of the "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is also displayed to be displaced in the same way.

According to such a configuration, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is displaced to a predetermined position. Then, the validity period ends, so even if it is not possible to recognize whether the gauge image (predetermined image) is just a decoration or indicates the remaining time, the position of the "specific image" By checking this, you will be able to recognize the remaining time. In this sense, when displaying such a "specific image", it can be said that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the integrated image IG from the start to the end of the valid period during which operation reception is permitted.

As shown in FIG. 145, if timing A0 has now arrived at which the valid period (predetermined operation reception effect) in which operation reception is permitted within the predetermined variation pattern starts, the effect display device 1600 , an integrated image IG, and operation promotion images such as "Push!" and "Downward Arrow" are displayed.

In this example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated simulated image IGa) is displayed as the integrated simulated image IG, but based on the result of the effect determination, FIGS. ) may be displayed in any of the modes shown in (). Regardless of the manner in which the integrated image IG is displayed, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the relevant validity period, the display of a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" causes a change in the mode described below as time passes.

As shown in FIG. 145(a), first, in the integrated image IG at timing A0 (the start timing of the validity period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. It will be done. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a full state, it becomes possible to recognize that the validity period has just started.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 145(a), at timing A0, which is the start timing of the validity period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" "Specific image whose aspect has been partially changed" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is displayed. By simply checking, it becomes possible to easily understand whether a predetermined period of time has already passed since the operation was accepted (a situation where the remaining crotch space is decreasing).

However, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is first processed from timing A0 (start timing of the validity period). Until a predetermined time period (time required for the entire image of a specific image to appear) has elapsed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a manner such that the display area increases according to the elapsed time. is displayed in the display target area.

For example, in the integrated image IG at timing A1, which is a short period of time after timing A0 (the start timing of the validity period), as shown in FIG. A "specific image TG" as a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" appears to the point where about half of the image is visible. It can be seen that the display area is increasing as time passes.

In the integrated image IG at timings A2 and A3 when a large amount of time has elapsed, as shown in FIGS. The "specific image TG" as a "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" has already appeared in its entirety, and the gauge image can be displayed without increasing the display area. (Predetermined image) It can be seen that the image is displaced within the display target area of GG.

That is, as described above, the "specific image TG" is the gauge image (predetermined image) that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. (image) is displayed at or near the end of the GG, and is displayed in such a way that the display position of the gauge image (predetermined image) is shifted (in a continuous manner) in accordance with the displacement of the end of the GG (predetermined image) It becomes.

The "specific image TG" according to this embodiment is displayed as an image with a star-shaped mark in a white square space at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It has become a thing. However, the "specific image TG" does not have to be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, for example, the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in a manner in which the end portion thereof is partially changed, such as an image in which the image gradually becomes thinner over a predetermined length. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image appearing at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In any case, the "specific image TG" originally functions as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that indicates that the remaining time has run out when the display area reaches the minimum value (here "0"). Therefore, even when the remaining time runs out (when the validity period ends), at least a part (or all of it may be) is not hidden and remains displayed.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The display area of the image (predetermined image) GG is "0", leaving about half the display area of the "specific image TG". If no operation is accepted until this state is reached, the period during which operation acceptance is allowed ends in this state, and the integrated image IG is hidden.

However, as described above, the "specific image TG" does not originally function as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, it is most desirable to display the integrated image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the validity period, so that the entire display area of the "specific image TG" is left, and such a configuration You may also do so.

However, it is difficult to realize a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes exactly "0" at the end of the validity period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the display position of the "specific image TG" is adjusted (continuously) according to the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Since the image is displayed so as to be displaced, when viewed from the player side, out of the images displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, how far does the gauge image ( It becomes possible to make it ambiguous whether the predetermined image is GG or not.

In other words, even though the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the validity period ends and most (more than half, or all) of the display area remains, the player does not When viewed, it appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (not displayed here) when the validity period ends. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is longer than it actually is, so it is possible to make it appear that the validity period is longer than it actually is. This makes it possible to suitably maintain the player's interest in the game while the operation acceptance presentation is being performed.

On the other hand, when the validity period of the operation reception performance ends, at least a part of the "specific image TG" remains and ends, so the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden. Even if the period does not end immediately after the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, the display area of the “specific image TG” can be displayed to be reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable due to the discrepancy between the display timing and the end timing of the validity period. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer that can absorb such a time lag.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 145, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the validity period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has partially changed." specific image" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the validity period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is The image (predetermined image) may be displayed within the display target area of GG.

According to such a configuration, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is used as a part of the gauge image GG. As a result, it becomes possible to make it appear as if the valid period is set to be longer than it appears, and to reduce the interest in playing when the valid period occurs. They will be expected to improve their skills.

[Permissible acceptance period with at least one of configurations 1A to 40A]
As explained using FIG. 118 as an example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation regarding which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute is based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the starting winning (pending award). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to perform a performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) as to which of the expected performances (such as a preview performance) should be selectively made to appear. Furthermore, depending on the result of this performance judgment, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (such as preview performances) prepared in response to the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that multiple There is a possibility that none of the expected performances (such as preview performances) will be executed.

As described above, when such performance judgments (fluctuation pattern judgment, preview judgment, etc.) are performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance contents according to the result of the performance judgment, so that the jackpot judgment can be performed. A fluctuating performance using a decorative pattern according to the result will be executed together with an expected performance (notice performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movement of the movable body (accessories performance). As a result, as a result of the fluctuating effects using the decorative patterns being executed together with the expected effects related to the background depiction and movement of the movable body, when the jackpot pattern (special pattern combination) is stopped and displayed, the player receives a special benefit. It becomes possible to perform a jackpot game or transition to a high probability game state.

In such a configuration, the fluctuating performance using the above-mentioned decorative patterns is provided as a performance with "a function to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination", and the background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected performance will be provided as a performance that has "a function that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as a reach effect with a background change) is identified. If a variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a production judgment (e.g., advance notice judgment), if the symbol production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined conditions ), it is possible to generate an acceptance permission state (validity period) in which production acceptance is permitted.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expected variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination. Even if a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined conditions are met). Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance permission state (validity period) in which production acceptance is allowed. However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected, and unless a special result is obtained in the production judgment, the acceptance permission state (validity period) will not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. . In addition, the acceptance acceptance state (validity period) that occurs with a predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the reception acceptance state (validity period) that occurs when the symbol production based on a specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. This is performed as a performance (post-reception display, post-reception output sound, etc.).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state in which acceptance of a movement (operation) by a player is permitted when a predetermined condition is met, and within the acceptance acceptance state, When an action (operation) by a player is accepted in the game, changes after the acceptance (change in display, acceptance output sound, effect light emission, etc.) can occur depending on the type of acceptance permission state that has occurred. .

In addition, in the reception permissible state, it can only appear when the operation reception on the operation unit is permitted (reception permissible period) or when the operation reception is permissible (reception permissible period). Display modes related to operations can be displayed. As a display mode related to such operations, for example, the object (operation means) that is the target of the action (operation) by the player is often displayed as a model image display, which is expressed as an image. The image display is not limited to this, and may be any image display that, when displayed, always provides the player with an operation opportunity. Regarding the "operation-related display (sample image display)", there are multiple modes with different expectations (for example, multiple color schemes such as white and red), and one of these multiple modes is selectively displayed. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, the "operation-related display mode" refers to a state in which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted (acceptance permissible period), or a state in which the operation reception is permitted (acceptance permissible period). Since it can only appear occasionally, at least when the "operation-related display mode" is displayed, the reception permissible state always occurs, or if it is in the permissible state at the time it is displayed. good. Therefore, while the "operation-related display mode" is being displayed, the acceptance permission state may be terminated before the "operation-related display mode" is hidden. Further, as such "operation-related display mode", multiple types of image displays may be prepared, and both of these image displays may be displayed in the reception acceptance state.

In addition, in the acceptance permission state, a remaining time display indicating the remaining time during which actions (operations) by the player are allowed to be accepted can be displayed. Such remaining time display can be performed, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time. As the aspect of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of aspects (for example, the speed of decrease in the display area of the gauge image, the suggestion of the degree of expectation, the suggestion of the type of operation means, etc.) are prepared, and these aspects are prepared. It may be configured to be executed by either of the following. In this case, different expectations (rate of appearance of jackpot symbols) may be suggested depending on which mode the game is executed.

In addition, when a reception permissible state occurs, a pre-effect that suggests that the player will be given an opportunity to act before this (suggests that a reception permissible state will occur) is considered to be executable. The pre-effect is executed by, for example, displaying the effect on the effect display device 1600 and outputting a corresponding effect sound.

In addition, no matter which result is obtained as a preview production judgment, regarding the variation pattern that generates the acceptance permission state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach, other than the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern" It may also be provided. Furthermore, no matter which result is obtained as a preview performance determination, a variation pattern may be provided that generates an acceptance permission state (validity period) at a predetermined timing before SP reach.

In addition, including each of the above-mentioned examples and the examples described below, the "operation (movement) by the player" to be detected refers to the operation (movement) by the player such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword ornament 5001." It is not limited to things that are directly manipulated (pressing motions or sword drawing motions), but also "touch motions by the player on a specific part" that can be detected by a touch sensor, or "in a specific space" that can be detected by a non-contact sensor. The meaning also includes ``actions by the player in the game''. In short, the "operation means" may include one or more receiving means (operation units) that accept actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.). Bye.

By the way, the acceptance permission state (validity period) according to this embodiment includes different types of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance output sound, and the presence or absence of output, different audible output status of BGM, Various types of reception permissible states, such as the number of times operation reception is allowed within the permissible state (validity period) is different, and whether or not the automatic repeated press function or automatic button function is enabled is different. (validity period) is provided.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the following special effect is provided between a plurality of acceptance acceptance states, so that the effect when an acceptance acceptance state occurs is enhanced. The system also maintains a sense of tension when the reception permissive state occurs. Note that each presentation (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of the configurations; for example, even if only one presentation (any configuration) is provided, the game entertainment It is possible to suppress the decline in It is also possible to adopt the configurations described as "desirable application" as appropriate. Furthermore, each performance (configuration) described below is merely an example, and any configuration that can suppress the decline in gaming interest related to the reception acceptance state may be used.

[Configuration 1-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. Then, it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. Further, it is possible to display a message prompting the user to operate the specific operation means. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation enabled state is provided in which the output sound after the operation can be output multiple times, and in the multiple operation enabled state, the above message display is displayed and the above message display is not displayed. I try to make sure that there is. In addition, among such multiple operation valid states, in the type of multiple operation valid state in which the above message display is displayed, it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, and the output after the operation is performed accordingly. In the case where a sound is output, if it is detected that the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the output sound is being output after the operation, the output state changes. Since the post-operation output sound in 2 can be changed based on the detection, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension as to whether or not to maintain the operation on the specific operation means when the message display is displayed. can be expected. Note that the "specific operation means" according to the configuration 1-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "specific operating means" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operating means. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operating means" as operating means with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state in the multiple-operation enabled state of the type in which no message display is displayed among the multiple-operation enabled states, and the corresponding operation is performed. If the output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state while the output sound is being output after the operation. , the post-operation output sound in the output state is not changed by the detection, and changes without the detection as a trigger (for example, the output sound is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). ). According to such a configuration, in the multiple operation valid state, whether a change occurs in the output sound after the operation when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state depends on whether the message display is displayed or not. It is now possible to suggest whether or not the player is playing the game, and it is expected that the game player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state in a type of multiple operation enabled state in which no message display is displayed, among the multiple operation enabled states. If a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state where it is not being operated while the corresponding post-operation output sound is being output. Even if the output sound after the operation in the output state is terminated, the end of the output sound after the operation in the output state is not triggered by the detection; On the other hand, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the message display is displayed, it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operating state, and in response to this. If the post-operation output sound is output, it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from the operated state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. Then, the end of the output sound after the operation in the output state may be triggered by the detection or not triggered by the detection (for example, the output sound may end after being output for a predetermined output time). (if applicable). According to such a configuration, when the message display is not displayed in the multiple operation valid state, it is preferably suggested that no change occurs in the output sound after the operation when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. On the other hand, when the message display is displayed in the multiple operation valid state, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since students will be able to do this, they will be expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, ``When a message display is displayed in the multiple operation enabled state, it is made difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state.'' In order to achieve the desired effect, it is important to consider the case where the output sound changes after the operation when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state when one mode is displayed as a message display. It is desirable to have both a case where no change occurs in the output sound after the operation and a case where no change occurs in the output sound after the operation. However, this configuration does not necessarily need to be adopted; for example, when different message display formats appear, such as message display sizes, colors, or display formats, Even if the output sound changes after the operation and sometimes does not change depending on the mode, compared to the case where the message display itself is not displayed at all, It can be expected that this will make it difficult for the player, to a certain level, to recognize "whether or not there will be a change in the output sound after the operation." However, it is desirable (not an essential configuration) to display a message prompting multiple operations in a manner that cannot appear in an operation-enabled state in which only one operation is accepted.

[Configuration 2-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. Then, it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is provided in which the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. There is a multiple operation valid state in which a sound is not output multiple times, and a multiple operation valid state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state. That's what I do. Then, in the multiple operation valid state, the specific operation is performed in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. When it is detected that the means is in the operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the specific operating means is activated from the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that the device is in a non-operating state, the output sound after the operation in the output state can be changed based on the detection, so that the operating state of the specific operating means is maintained. It can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension regarding what should be done. Note that the "specific operation means" according to the configuration 2-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "specific operating means" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operating means. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operating means" as operating means with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, If it is detected that the specific operating means is in the above operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the specific operating means is in the state where the post-operating output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that the operation state has changed to a non-operation state where no operation has been performed, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state will not be changed based on the detection; The output may be changed without any trigger (for example, the output may be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). According to such a configuration, in the multi-operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operating means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state, depending on whether the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled or not. It is now possible to suggest whether or not this will occur, and it is expected that the player's interest in gaming can be suitably maintained.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, among the multiple operation valid states, the multiple operation of the type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state If it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state in the enabled state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the specific operating means is detected to be in the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that the operating means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state where it is not being operated, the post-operation output sound in the output state will not end with this detection as a trigger, and (For example, the output is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated.) On the other hand, in the multiple operation valid state, the above specific operation means is simply maintained in the operating state. If it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times, and the corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the corresponding post-operation output sound is output. When it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state is Even if the termination is done both in the case of being triggered by the detection and in the case of being done without being triggered by the detection (for example, in the case of being terminated after outputting for a predetermined output time). good. According to such a configuration, when the so-called auto continuous hit function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state, it is possible to ensure that no change occurs in the output sound after the operation when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. In contrast, when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is enabled in the multi-operation enabled state, whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation when the specific operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. Since it becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the situation, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the configuration 2-A, an operating means when the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated in the multiple operation enabled state, and an operation means when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state. , it is assumed that the same operation means is used as the "specific operation means" in both cases, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, in a state where multiple operations are enabled, if a sample image display that simulates an operation means that allows multiple operations is displayed, when the operation means corresponding to the sample image display is maintained in an operated state. The multiple operation enable state of the type in which the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled, and the multiple operation of the type in which the so-called automatic continuous hit function is not activated when the operating means corresponding to the sample image display is maintained in the operated state. In the valid state, a configuration may be adopted that determines whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation.

[Configuration 3-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. Then, it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection, and it is possible to display a simulated image display imitating the specific operation means. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the output sound after the operation can be output multiple times, and the above-mentioned sample image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the multiple operation valid state, and the periodic change is made possible. There are cases in which periodic changes are displayed so as to appear in time units of less than a predetermined time period, and cases in which the periodic changes are displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time period. Then, in the multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is operated in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. If the state is detected and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the specific operating means is not operated from the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that the non-operation state has been entered, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed based on the detection, so that the periodic change in the sample image display is longer than the predetermined time. It can be expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when displayed over a long period of time. Note that the "specific operation means" and "predetermined time" according to the configuration 3-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-A. Therefore, the "specific operating means" and "predetermined time" in other configurations may mean the same operating means or time, or may mean different operating means or time. Moreover, it may mean the same "operating means" or "time" as the operating means or time of different names related to other configurations. Further, as the "time longer than the predetermined time", only one time may be prepared, or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple operation valid state, the specific operation is performed in a multiple operation valid state of the type in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time. If it is detected that the means is in the operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the specific operating means is detected to be in the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that the device is in a non-operated state, the post-operation output sound in the output state will not be changed by this detection, and will change without being triggered by this detection. (For example, the output may be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated.) According to such a configuration, in the multi-operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, through the length of time required for periodic changes in the image display. It is now possible to suggest whether or not a change will occur, and it is expected that interest in gaming can be suitably maintained.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, among the multiple operation valid states, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time equal to or shorter than the above-mentioned predetermined time. If it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the specific operating means is in the state where the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that a state has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state where no operation has been performed, the post-operation output sound in the output state will not end with this detection as a trigger; (For example, the output is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated.) In contrast, when the periodic change in the sample image display is longer than the predetermined time in the multiple operation valid state. When it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operating state in the multiple operation valid state of the type displayed as shown in , and the corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the post-operation output sound is output. When it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which it is not being operated, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is determined by the detection. There may be both a case where the output is triggered and a case where the output is performed without the detection as a trigger (for example, a case where the output is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). According to such a configuration, when the time required for periodic changes in the image display in the multiple operation valid state is relatively short, the output sound after the operation is changed when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. When changing the specific operating means from the operating state to the non-operating state, when the time required for periodic changes in the image display is relatively long in the multi-operation enabled state, whereas it is preferable to suggest that no change occurs. Since it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the output sound after an operation, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the configuration 3-A, in the multiple operation enabled state, a periodic change in the sample image display appears in time units equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time period, and an operation means when the periodic change in the sample image display appears in the multiple operation enabled state. Although it has been assumed that the operating means when the change appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time are the same operating means as the "specific operating means," this is not necessarily the case. That is, in the multiple operation enabled state, even if periodic changes in the sample image display appear in time units shorter than the predetermined time, periodic changes in the sample image display appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. Even when there is an operation, the operation means corresponding to the display of the simulated image may be used as the operation target, and a configuration may be adopted that determines whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation.

Further, in the configuration 3-A, a plurality of times may be prepared as the above-mentioned "time less than the predetermined time", or only one time (for example, "predetermined time") may be prepared. good. Similarly, regarding the above-mentioned "time longer than the predetermined time", a plurality of time periods may be prepared, or only one time period may be prepared.

[Configuration 4-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, the operation is performed according to the detection. It is possible to output a post-output sound, and it is possible to display a simulated image display imitating the above-mentioned operating means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means that is the object of the display of the sample image is in the operating state, the operation state is considered to be a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started. A multiple operation valid state is provided in which the detection of is allowed multiple times and the output sound after the operation can be output multiple times, and the operation means is provided with a first operation means and a second operation means. There is. Further, the first operating means is in the operating state in the multiple operating enabled state of the type in which at least a simulated image display of the first operating means is displayed in the multiple operating enabled state. is detected and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the first operating means changes from the operated state to the non-operated state in which the first operating means is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that the first operation means has been changed, the output sound after the operation in the output state can be changed based on the detection, so that when the simulated image display of the first operation means is displayed It can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension. Note that the "first operation means" and "second operation means" according to the configuration 4-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "first operating means" and "second operating means" according to other configurations, or it may mean different operating means. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operating means" as operating means with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, the second operating means is in the operating state in the multiple operating enabled state of the type in which at least a simulated image display imitating the second operating means is displayed among the multiple operating enabled states. If something is detected and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the second operating means is not operated from the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if a non-operation state is detected, the post-operation output sound in the output state will not change with this detection as a trigger; (The output may be output for the specified output time and then terminated.) According to such a configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, the output sound after the operation changes when the operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, depending on the type of operation means that allows multiple operations. It is now possible to suggest whether or not the game will occur, and it is expected to suitably maintain interest in the game.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, in the multiple operation valid state, the second operation means is of a type in which at least a simulated image display imitating the second operation means is displayed among the multiple operation valid states. If the operating state is detected and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the second operating means changes from the operating state to the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that a non-operation state has been entered, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state will not be triggered by this detection, and will be done without taking the detection as a trigger. (For example, the output is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated.) On the other hand, among the multiple operation valid states, multiple times of the type in which at least a simulated image display imitating the first operation means is displayed When it is detected that the first operating means is in the operated state in the operation enabled state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, while the post-operation output sound is being output, the above-mentioned When it is detected that the first operating means has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state, the post-operation output sound in the output state is terminated depending on the detection. There may be both a case where the output is performed without any trigger (for example, a case where the output is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). According to such a configuration, when the second operating means is targeted for displaying a sample image and the second operating means is operated in the multiple operation valid state, the second operating means is deactivated from the operating state. On the other hand, when the first operating means is targeted for displaying a sample image and the first operating means is operated, Since it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation when the first operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension. become expected.

[Configuration 5-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. Then, it is possible to perform post-operation changes according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the execution of the post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times and the above operation is performed. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which post-operation changes can be executed multiple times, and as one of the post-operation changes, an output sound after the operation can be output, and in the multiple-operation valid state, the above specified When it is detected that the operating means is in the operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the specific operating means changes from the operating state to the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that a non-operation state has been entered, the output sound after the operation in the output state changes in response to the detection and does not change in response to the detection. By doing so, it can be expected that a feeling of tension can be suitably maintained when the operation is in a valid state for multiple times. Note that the "specific operation means" according to the configuration 5-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "specific operating means" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operating means. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operating means" as operating means with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are prepared as multiple operation valid states, and the first multiple operation valid state In the valid state, the post-operation change according to the above detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the above-mentioned specific operation means in the operation state, but in that case, the post-operation change can be newly executed according to the above detection. The interval until the start of execution is an indefinite period of time, and the second multiple operation valid state means that if the specific operation means is kept in the operation state, multiple changes after the operation according to the detection described above will occur. In the third multiple operation valid state, the change after the operation according to the detection described above can be newly executed at a fixed time interval simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. It is also possible to set it as Then, if it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the first multiple operation valid state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the post-operation output sound is output. When it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which it is not being operated, the post-operation output sound in the output state is terminated with the detection as a trigger. If it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state in the second plural operation valid state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the post-operation output sound is Even if it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is being output, the output sound after the operation in the output state will end. The operation is not triggered by the detection, but is performed without the detection (for example, the output is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated), and the third multiple operation valid state When it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the specific operating means is detected to be in the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that a state has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state where no operation has been performed, the post-operation output sound in the output state will not end with this detection as a trigger; For example, the output may be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated. According to such a configuration, first, when maintaining the specific operating means in the operating state does not enable the generation of the post-operation output sound multiple times in accordance with the detection, the specific operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that there will be no change in the output sound after the operation when the state is changed. In this regard, if it is possible to generate the post-operation output sound in accordance with the detection described above multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in the operating state, this may occur when the specific operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. When the specified operating means is maintained in the operating state, there are both cases in which the output sound changes after the operation and cases in which the output sound does not change after the operation. By checking whether the post-operation output sound is output at regular intervals, it is possible to suggest whether or not there is a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. As a result, it is expected that players will be able to maintain their interest in gaming in a favorable manner.

In addition, in the configuration 5-A, the operating means when the so-called auto continuous hit function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state are provided. , it is assumed that the same operation means is used as the "specific operation means" in both cases, but this is not necessarily the case. Furthermore, although we have assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, this is not necessarily the case. I can't. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 6-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. Then, it is possible to perform post-operation changes according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the execution of the post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times and the above operation is performed. A multiple operation valid state is provided in which a post-operation change can be executed multiple times, and as one of the post-operation changes, a post-operation output sound can be output, and as the multiple operation valid state, A first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are provided. On this basis, the first multiple operation valid state is such that the change after the operation according to the detection can be executed multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, and 2. In the multiple operation valid state, the change after the operation according to the detection cannot be performed multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, and in the multiple operation valid state, the specific operation is not executed multiple times. When it is detected that the means is in the operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the specific operating means changes from the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. When a non-operated state is detected, the post-operation output sound in the output state changes in response to the detection, and does not change in response to the detection. Therefore, it can be expected that a feeling of tension can be suitably maintained when the operation is in a valid state for a plurality of times. Note that "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" according to configuration 6-A are used to explain the technical concept of configuration 6-A. It's just a name. Therefore, even if the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" refer to the same operation means or multiple operation valid state in other configurations, Alternatively, it may mean different operating means or a state in which multiple operations are valid. Moreover, it may mean the same "operating means" or "multiple operation valid state" as the operating means or multiple operation valid state of other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are prepared as multiple operation valid states, and the first multiple operation valid state In the valid state, the post-operation change according to the above detection can be executed multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, and in that case, the post-operation change starts to be executed anew in response to the above detection. The interval until the operation is performed is always longer than the specific time, and the second multiple operation valid state means that if the specific operation means is simply maintained in the operation state, the change after the operation according to the detection described above will not occur. is not allowed to be executed multiple times, and the third multiple operation valid state is such that the post-operation change according to the detection can be executed multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state, In this case, the interval until the change after the operation is newly started in response to the above detection is always a specific time or less, and the specific operation means is operated in the first multiple operation valid state. If the state is detected and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the specific operating means is not operated from the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that the non-operation state has been entered, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be terminated using this detection as a trigger. When it is detected that the operating means is in the operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the specific operating means is in the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that the device is in a non-operated state, the post-operation output sound in the output state is not terminated with this detection as a trigger; (for example, the output is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the third multiple operation valid state, When the post-operation output sound is output, it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. However, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is done without the detection as a trigger (for example, if the output sound is output for a predetermined output time). may be terminated). According to such a configuration, first, when the specific operating means is not able to generate the post-operation output sound multiple times in accordance with the detection by simply maintaining the specific operating means in the operating state, the specific operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that there will be no change in the output sound after the operation when the state is changed. In this regard, if the post-operation output sound according to the detection described above can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in the operating state, this may occur when the specific operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. When the specific operating means is maintained in the operating state, there are both cases in which the output sound changes after the operation and cases in which the output sound does not change after the operation. The post-operation output sound changes when the specific operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, depending on whether the interval between the output of the post-output sound and the new output is longer than a specific time. It is now possible to suggest whether or not the player is playing the game, and it is expected that the user's interest in the game will be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the configuration 6-A, the operating means when the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated in the multiple operation enabled state and the operation means when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is enabled in the multiple operation valid state are provided. , it is assumed that the same operation means is used as the "specific operation means" in both cases, but this is not necessarily the case. Furthermore, although we have assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, this is not necessarily the case. I can't. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state. Moreover, the "specific time" related to the configuration 6-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "specific time" of other configurations, or it may mean a different time. Moreover, it may mean the same "time" as the time of another name related to other configurations. Further, a plurality of "times longer than a specific time" according to the configuration 6-A may be provided, or only one may be provided. Similarly, a plurality of "times equal to or less than a specific time" according to the configuration 6-A may be provided, or only one may be provided.

[Configuration 7-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. Then, it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multi-operation enabled state is provided in which the output sound after an operation can be output multiple times. Then, among these multiple operation valid states, based on the fact that the specific operation means is detected to be in the operational state before the predetermined end timing arrives, the operation is valid. In a multi-operation enabled state of a type in which the state can be terminated, if it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the post-operation output sound is output. When it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which it is not being operated, the post-operation output sound in the output state changes upon this detection. Since this is made possible, it can be expected that a feeling of tension can be suitably maintained when the operation is in a valid state for multiple times. Note that the "specific operation means" according to the configuration 7-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "specific operating means" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operating means. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operating means" as operating means with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, the operation is valid based on the fact that it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing among the multiple operation valid states. When it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the state is not terminated, and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the post-operation output sound is output. Even if it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which it is not being operated, the output sound after the operation in the output state will change based on the detection. Instead, the output may be changed without being triggered by the detection (for example, the output may be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). According to such a configuration, in the multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is determined based on whether the operation valid state is terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state. It is now possible to suggest whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation when changing from the operation state to the non-operation state, and it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, based on the fact that it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state before the predetermined end timing arrives among the multiple operating valid states. When it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state in a multiple operation enabled state in which the operation enabled state is not terminated, and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the post-operation output sound is Even if it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is being output, the output sound after the operation in the output state will end. The specific operation means is not triggered by the detection, but is performed without the detection, and the specific operation means is performed before the predetermined end timing arrives in the multiple operation valid state. After detecting that the specific operating means is in an operating state in a multi-operation enabled state of the type in which the operation enabled state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operating means is in an operating state, and performing the corresponding operation. If an output sound is output, and the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the output sound is being output after the operation, the operation in the output state The end of the post-output sound may be done in both cases, triggered by the detection, and not triggered by the detection. According to such a configuration, the operation valid state is not terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state before the predetermined termination timing arrives. In the operation enabled state, it is preferable that there is no change in the output sound after the operation when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. In a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the fact that the specified operation means was previously detected to be in the operated state, the specified operation means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state. Since it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after an operation, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the configuration 7-A, there are a plurality of types in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state before the predetermined termination timing arrives. The operation is performed based on the operation means that is to be operated multiple times in the operation valid state and the specific operation means being detected to be in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. Multiple operations of a type that can terminate the valid state.Although it is assumed that the operation means that are the object of multiple operations in the valid state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means," this is not necessarily the case. I can't do it. For example, in the multiple operation valid state, when the "operation means" expressed as a sample image display is operated, the present invention determines whether or not the operation valid state is of a type that can be terminated using this as an opportunity. The configuration may also be specified. In addition, even if the multiple operation valid state is not terminated before the predetermined end timing arrives depending on the result of the jackpot determination, etc., depending on the result of the jackpot determination etc. If the multiple operation valid state may be terminated before the termination timing arrives, the multiple operation valid state corresponds to the above-mentioned ``multiple operation valid state of the type in which the operation valid state can be terminated.'' It is.

[Configuration 8-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. Then, it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection, and it is possible to display a message display prompting the user to operate the specific operation means. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation enabled state is provided in which the output sound after an operation can be output multiple times, and in the multiple operation enabled state, there are both cases where a message display is displayed and cases where no message display is displayed. That's what I do. Then, among the multiple operation valid states, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which a message display is displayed, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the output sound after the operation is "The corresponding If the specific operating means changes from the operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound will start from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state. Since it is possible to output a sound that does not take a fixed amount of time until it becomes inaudible, when the output sound is in the output state after the operation and the message display is displayed, the specified operation means It can be suggested that even if the operation for the operation is completed, it is difficult to estimate how much time has passed since the operation has been changed to the non-operation state before the output sound after the operation in the output state ends. become. Note that the "specific operation means" according to the configuration 8-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 8-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "specific operating means" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operating means. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operating means" as operating means with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which no message display is displayed, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the after-operation output As a sound, "If the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the output sound is being outputted, the corresponding operation will start from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state. Only sounds that take an indefinite amount of time before the output sound becomes inaudible (sounds that are not processed as a fixed amount of time and have an indefinite amount of time) can be output, and multiple operations can be performed. Among the valid states, in the multiple operation valid state where a message display is displayed, when it is detected that a specific operating means is in the operating state, the post-operation output sound is displayed as "The output sound after the corresponding operation is not output." If the specified operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not being operated, from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state until the output sound after the operation becomes inaudible. "The sound in which the time is processed as a fixed time" is output, and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound "The above-mentioned specific operating means is not operated from the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output." When the device enters a non-operating state, a sound is output that does not take a certain amount of time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation. It is also possible to have both.

According to such a configuration, in the multi-operation enabled state, if the post-operation output sound is in the output state and the message display is not displayed, when the specific operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, It is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the output sound after an operation in the output state to end after changing to the non-operation state. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that the noteworthy performance is low in a situation where there is no such thing. On the other hand, in the multiple operation valid state, if the output sound after the operation is in the output state and a message display is displayed, the output sound is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. Since there are both cases in which it is possible to estimate how much time has passed since the post-operation output sound ends after entering the non-operation state, and cases in which it is difficult to estimate, for example, , while suggesting that the performance after changing the specific operating means from the operating state to the non-operating state may be worth paying attention to, the output does not necessarily take a certain amount of time to pass after the specific operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. The output sound is not always terminated after an operation in the state, and it is expected that the tension will be suitably maintained when changing to the non-operation state.

In order to suitably produce such effects, it is important to note that when one aspect is displayed as a message display, the post-operation output sound is set to "The above specified sound is output while the post-operation output sound is being output." When the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, there is a certain period of time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation. ``sound that is processed as time'' is output, and ``if the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the output sound after the relevant operation is being output, the corresponding non-operating state It is desirable that the time from the timing when the specific operation means is turned on to the time when the output sound is made inaudible after the operation is not a constant time is output. However, this configuration does not necessarily need to be adopted; for example, when different message display formats appear, such as message display sizes, colors, or display formats, Even if one of the sounds is output depending on the mode, it is expected that the above-mentioned effects will be achieved at a certain level compared to the case where the message display itself is not displayed at all. can. However, it is desirable (not an essential configuration) to display a message prompting multiple operations in a manner that cannot appear in an operation-enabled state in which only one operation is accepted.

[Configuration 9-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. Then, it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is provided in which the output sound after operation can be output multiple times, and in the multiple operation valid state, the corresponding post-operation output sound can be output simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. In a multi-operation enabled state where is output multiple times, when it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state, the after-operation output sound will be "The above When a specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, the time from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is constant. Therefore, when it is possible to output the corresponding output sound multiple times by simply maintaining the specified operation means in the operating state, the operation on the specified operation means can be outputted multiple times. Even if the operation ends, it is possible to suggest that it is difficult to estimate how much time has passed since the non-operation state is entered before the post-operation output sound in the output state ends. Note that the "specific operation means" according to the configuration 9-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "specific operating means" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operating means. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operating means" as operating means with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple operation valid state, in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, the above When it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state, the above-mentioned post-operation output sound indicates that the specific operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state where it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. In this case, the time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a sound whose time is not fixed (it is not processed as a fixed time and is undefined) Among the multiple operation valid states, the type in which the output sound after the corresponding operation is output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. In the multi-operation enabled state, when it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state, the post-operation output sound will be "When the specific operating means is in the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output." When the specific operation means enters the non-operated state from the non-operated state, the time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operated state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a certain period of time ( A sound that is processed as a fixed period of time) is output, and a non-operation in which the specific operating means is not operated from the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. state, the time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is not treated as a fixed time, but is an indeterminate sound (constant). It may also be possible to have both a case where a sound "not at the time of" is output.

According to such a configuration, when the so-called auto continuous hit function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operating means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state is not activated. It is difficult to estimate how long it will take to end the operating state, for example, if the specific operating means has recently been changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, the performance is noteworthy. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that the value is low. On the other hand, when the so-called auto-speech function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operating means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state is changed to the non-operated state. For example, it is possible to estimate how long it will take for the operation to end after the operation is completed, and there are cases where it is difficult to estimate. Although it is suggested that the performance after being put into the operating state may be worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed after being put into the non-operating state. It is now expected to suitably maintain the tension when the vehicle is placed in a non-operating state.

In addition, in the configuration 9-A, an operating means when the so-called auto-repeat function is not enabled in the multiple-time operation enabled state and an operating means when the so-called auto-repeat-hit function is enabled in the multiple-time operation enabled state. , it is assumed that the same operation means is used as the "specific operation means" in both cases, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, in a state where multiple operations are enabled, if a sample image display that simulates an operation means that allows multiple operations is displayed, when the operation means corresponding to the sample image display is maintained in an operated state. The multiple operation enable state of the type in which the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled, and the multiple operation of the type in which the so-called automatic continuous hit function is not activated when the operating means corresponding to the sample image display is maintained in the operated state. In the valid state, the configuration according to configuration 9-A may be adopted.

[Configuration 10-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. Then, it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection, and it is possible to display a simulated image display imitating the specific operation means. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the output sound after the operation can be output multiple times, and the above-mentioned sample image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in the multiple operation valid state. There are cases in which the changes are displayed in units of time shorter than the predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic changes are displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. Then, among the multiple operation valid states, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the specific operation means When it is detected that the is in the operating state, the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is displayed as "If the specific operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state where it is not being operated while the said post-operation output sound is being output. , the time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state to the time when the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation can be outputted. When periodic changes are displayed in time units longer than the predetermined time, even if the operation of the specific operation means is completed, how much time has passed since the non-operation state was reached? It becomes possible to suggest that it is difficult to predict whether the output sound will be terminated after an operation in the output state. Note that the "specific operation means" and "predetermined time" according to the configuration 10-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-A. Therefore, the "specific operating means" and "predetermined time" in other configurations may mean the same operating means or time, or may mean different operating means or time. Moreover, it may mean the same "operating means" or "time" as the operating means or time of different names related to other configurations. Further, as the "time longer than the predetermined time", only one time may be prepared, or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation valid states, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, the specified When it is detected that the operating means is in the operating state, the specific operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state where it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. In this case, the time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state to the time when the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is not a fixed period of time (the sound is not processed as a fixed period of time and is an undefined period of time) A plurality of types of sounds are displayed such that periodic changes in the simulated image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time among multiple operation valid states. In the operation valid state, when it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state, the post-operation output sound will be displayed as "The specific operating means is operated from the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output." When the specified operating means enters the non-operating state, the time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is treated as a fixed time." is output, and if the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output, The time from the timing when the specific operation means is activated until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is not treated as a fixed time, and an indefinite sound (sound that is not a fixed time) is output. There may be both cases.

According to such a configuration, when the time required for periodic changes in the image display in the multi-operation enabled state is relatively short, the operation that is in the output state when the specific operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. It is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the post-output sound to end after entering the non-operating state; for example, in a situation where the specific operating means has just been changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that the noteworthy performance is low. On the other hand, when the time required for periodic changes in the image display in the multiple operation valid state is relatively long, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. , since there are both cases in which it is possible to estimate how long it will take to end the non-operation state and cases in which it is difficult to estimate, for example, the specific operation means described above. While this suggests that there is a possibility that the performance after changing from the operating state to the non-operating state is worth paying attention to, it does not necessarily mean that the performance after changing from the operating state to the non-operating state is necessarily the output state after a certain period of time has elapsed. The output sound is no longer always terminated, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained when the device is placed in a non-operating state.

In addition, in the configuration 10-A, in the multiple operation valid state, the periodic change in the sample image display appears in time units of the predetermined time or less, and the operation means when the periodic change in the sample image display appears in the multiple operation valid state. Although it has been assumed that the operating means when the change appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time are the same operating means as the "specific operating means," this is not necessarily the case. That is, in the multiple operation enabled state, even if periodic changes in the sample image display appear in time units shorter than the predetermined time, periodic changes in the sample image display appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. 10-A may also be adopted, with the operation means corresponding to the display of the simulated image being the operation target.

Further, in the configuration 10-A, a plurality of times may be prepared as the above-mentioned "time less than the predetermined time", or only one time (for example, "predetermined time") may be prepared. good. Similarly, regarding the above-mentioned "time longer than the predetermined time", a plurality of time periods may be prepared, or only one time period may be prepared.

[Configuration 11-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first detect the state of the operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection, and it is possible to display a simulated image display imitating the operation means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means that is the object of the display of the sample image is in the operating state, the operation state is considered to be a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started. A multiple operation valid state is provided in which the detection of is allowed multiple times and the output sound after the operation can be output multiple times, and the operation means is provided with a first operation means and a second operation means. There is. Further, in the multiple operation valid state, the first operation means is in the operating state in a type of multiple operation valid state in which at least a simulated image display imitating the first operation means is displayed. is detected, as the post-operation output sound, "If the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operating output sound is being output, the first operating means returns to the non-operating state. An operation that can be performed multiple times is made possible by allowing the output of a sound that does not take a fixed amount of time from the timing when the first operation means is turned on until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation. When a simulated image display imitating the first operating means is displayed as a means, even if the operation on the first operating means is completed, how much time has elapsed since the non-operating state is output? It becomes possible to suggest that it is difficult to predict whether the output sound will be terminated after the operation in the state. Note that the "first operation means" and "second operation means" according to the configuration 11-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 11-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "first operating means" and "second operating means" according to other configurations, or it may mean different operating means. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operating means" as operating means with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which at least a simulated image display imitating the second operation means is displayed, the second operation means is in the operation state. If something is detected, the post-operation output sound will be "If the second operating means changes from the operated state to the non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the corresponding non-operated state will be detected." "Only sounds where the time from the timing when the second operating means becomes in the state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a fixed amount of time (sounds that are not processed as a fixed time and are undefined)" is enabled to be output, and in a multi-operation enabled state of the type in which at least a simulated image display imitating the first operating means is displayed, when it is detected that the first operating means is in the operating state. , as the post-operation output sound: "If the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operating output sound is being output, the first operating means changes to the non-operating state. When a sound is output for a certain period of time from the timing when the operation becomes inaudible until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation (a sound that is processed as a fixed time) is output, and when the output sound after the operation is output ``If the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the output sound is being output after the operation, the first operating means changes from the timing when the first operating means changes to the non-operating state. Even if there are both cases where the time until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is output is a sound for which the time is not fixed (sound that is undefined and is not processed as a fixed time). good.

According to such a configuration, when the second operating means is targeted for displaying a sample image and the second operating means is operated in the multiple operation valid state, the second operating means is deactivated from the operating state. It is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound that is in the output state to end when the operation state is changed to the non-operation state, for example, when the second operation means is in the operation state. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that the noteworthy performance is low in a situation where the non-operating state has just been started. On the other hand, when the first operating means is targeted for displaying a sample image and the first operating means is operated, the operation that is in the output state when the first operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state Since there are both cases in which it is possible to estimate how much time elapses after the post-output sound ends after entering the non-operation state, and cases in which it is difficult to estimate, for example, Although it is suggested that the performance after the first operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state may be worth paying attention to, the output is not necessarily output after a certain period of time has passed after the first operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. The output sound is no longer always terminated after an operation in the state, and it is expected that the tension will be suitably maintained when the device is placed in the non-operation state.

[Configuration 12-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. Then, it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is provided in which the output sound after the operation can be output multiple times, and in the multiple operation valid state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the output sound after the operation is As the output sound, "If the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the output sound is being output after the operation, from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state. A case in which a sound is output for a certain period of time until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation, and a case in which the specific operation means is operated while the output sound after the operation is being output. When the state changes from a state to a non-operated state where it is not being operated, the time from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is not a fixed amount of time." For example, since we made it so that there are both cases where ``is output'' and ``is output'', we tried to suggest that, for example, there is a possibility that the performance after changing the specific operation means from the operation state to the non-operation state may be worth paying attention to. Also, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed after being put into the non-operation state, and this has also been improved to reduce the feeling of tension when changing to the non-operation state. be expected to maintain it. Note that the "specific operation means" according to the configuration 12-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "specific operating means" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operating means. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operating means" as operating means with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are prepared as the multiple operation valid state, and in the first multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is It is said that the post-operation output sound according to the above detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the operating state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite period of time. , the post-operation output sound is defined as "If the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not being operated while the post-operating output sound is being output, the specific operating means is in the non-operating state. The time from the timing when the output sound is made inaudible after the operation is a certain period of time (sound that is processed as a certain period of time).'' In the operation valid state, the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state, and the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated at predetermined intervals, but the post-operation output sound is If the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound starts from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state. It may be possible to output the sound as a sound in which the time it takes for the sound to become inaudible is not a fixed time (sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is undefined).

According to such a configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state among the multiple operation valid states, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state is It is difficult to estimate how long it will take to end the operation after entering the operation state. For example, in a situation where the specific operation means has just been changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, the performance is noteworthy. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that the value is low. On the other hand, in the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state is determined by how much time has passed since the specific operating means changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. Since it is possible to guess whether the specific operation means will be terminated, it becomes possible to suggest, for example, that there is a possibility that the performance after changing the specific operation means from the operation state to the non-operation state is worth paying attention to. .

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, especially in the first multiple operation valid state, even though there is only one valid period, as the output sound after the operation, "the above When a specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, the time from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is constant. (a sound that is processed as a fixed period of time)" and "non-operation where the specific operating means is not operated from the operating state while the output sound after the operation is being output". state, the time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a sound whose time is not a fixed period of time (it is not processed as a fixed period of time) It may also be possible to have both a case where the sound is output as an indefinite sound) and a case where the sound is output as an indefinite sound.

According to such a configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state among the multiple operation valid states, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state is , since there are both cases in which it is possible to estimate how long it will take to end the non-operation state and cases in which it is difficult to estimate, for example, the specific operation means described above. While this suggests that there is a possibility that the performance after changing from the operating state to the non-operating state is worth paying attention to, it does not necessarily mean that the performance after changing from the operating state to the non-operating state is necessarily the output state after a certain period of time has elapsed. The output sound is no longer always terminated, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained when the device is placed in a non-operating state.

In addition, in the configuration 12-A, the operating means when the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated in the multiple operation valid state, and the operation means when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is enabled in the multiple operation valid state. , it is assumed that the same operation means is used as the "specific operation means" in both cases, but this is not necessarily the case. Furthermore, although we have assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, this is not necessarily the case. I can't. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 13-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is provided in which the output sound can be output multiple times after the operation, and in the multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is simply maintained in the operation state and the operation according to the detection is performed. The after-output sound can be generated multiple times. In this regard, in the multi-operation enabled state, when it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state, the post-operation output sound is set to "The specific operating means is When the device changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, the time from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a certain period of time. A certain sound (a sound that is processed as a fixed period of time)" is output, and the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the output sound is being output after the operation. In this case, the time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a sound that is not a fixed period of time (it is not processed as a fixed period of time and is undefined) This suggests that, for example, there is a possibility that the performance after changing the above-mentioned specific operating means from an operating state to a non-operating state may be worth paying attention to. However, the output sound after an operation that is in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed after being put into the non-operation state, and this also reduces the feeling of tension when changing to the non-operation state. It is now expected to maintain a suitable level of performance. Note that the "specific operation means" according to the configuration 13-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "specific operating means" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operating means. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operating means" as operating means with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, a first multiple operation valid state is prepared as the multiple operation valid state, and in the first multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is maintained in the operating state. It is said that the output sound after the operation according to the above detection can be generated multiple times by only the above detection, but in that case, the interval until the output sound after the operation is newly generated is always longer than the specified time, and The post-operation output sound is defined as "If the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the post-operating output sound is being output, the timing at which the specific operating means enters the non-operating state. The output sound may be output as a sound in which the time from when the output sound is made inaudible after the operation is a fixed time (sound processed as a fixed time).

Furthermore, as will be described later, a second multiple-time operation valid state is prepared as the multiple-time operation valid state, and in the second multiple-time operation valid state, the specific operation means is not only maintained in the operated state. It is not possible to generate the post-operation output sound in response to the above detection multiple times, and the post-operation output sound is "unless the specific operating means has not been operated from the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output." When the operation state is entered, the time from the timing when the specific operation means becomes the non-operation state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a sound whose time is not fixed (it is not processed as a fixed time) It may also be possible to output the sound as "an undefined sound)".

Furthermore, as will be described later, a third multiple-time operation valid state is prepared as the multiple-time operation valid state, and in the third multiple-time operation valid state, the specific operation means is simply maintained in the operated state. The post-operation output sound according to the above detection can be generated multiple times, but in that case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is a specific time or less, and the post-operation output sound "If the specified operating means changes from the operated state to the non-operated state while the output sound after the operation is being output, the period after the operation starts from the timing when the specified operating means changes to the non-operated state. The output sound may be outputted as a sound in which the time taken to make the output sound inaudible is not fixed (sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is undefined).

In addition, in the configuration 13-A, the operating means when the so-called auto continuous hit function is not enabled in the multiple operation enabled state, and the operating means when the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state. , it is assumed that the same operation means is used as the "specific operation means" in both cases, but this is not necessarily the case. Furthermore, although we have assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, this is not necessarily the case. I can't do it. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state. Further, the "specific time" related to the configuration 13-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "specific time" of other configurations, or it may mean a different time. Moreover, it may mean the same "time" as the time of another name related to other structures. Further, a plurality of "times longer than a specific time" according to the configuration 13-A may be provided, or only one may be provided. Similarly, a plurality of "times equal to or less than a specific time" according to the configuration 13-A may be provided, or only one may be provided.

[Configuration 14-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which an output sound after the operation can be output multiple times, and in the multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is activated before a predetermined end timing arrives. In a multiple operation valid state of the type where the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the post-operation output As a sound, "If the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the output sound is being outputted, the corresponding operation will start from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state. Since we have made it possible to output "sounds whose time until the output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed period of time (sounds whose duration is indefinite without being processed as a fixed period of time)", multiple operations of the relevant type can be performed. In the enabled state, it is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operating means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state to end. For example, it is possible to suitably suggest that the specific operation means has recently been changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and that the noteworthy performance is low. Note that the "specific operation means" according to the configuration 14-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 14-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "specific operating means" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different operating means. Furthermore, it may mean the same "operating means" as operating means with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, the operation is valid based on the fact that it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing among the multiple operation valid states. In a multi-operation enabled state where the state is not terminated, when it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state, the post-operation output sound will be "The specified specific operation while the post-operation output sound is being output." When the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, there is a certain period of time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation. A sound that is not a time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is undefined) may be output. According to such a configuration, in the multiple operation valid state of the type that is not terminated, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state is changed to the non-operating state. It is preferable that it is difficult to estimate how long it will take to complete the process, and that, for example, the specific operation means will not be noticeable in a situation where it has recently been changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. You will be able to make suggestions.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, based on the fact that it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state before the predetermined end timing arrives among the multiple operating valid states. In a multiple operation valid state of the type where the operation valid state is not terminated, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the output sound after the operation is displayed as "The output sound after the operation is being output." In this case, when the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, the period from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state until the output sound after the operation becomes inaudible. Only sounds whose time is not a fixed time (sounds that are undefined and are not processed as a fixed time) can be output, and when the predetermined end timing arrives in the multiple operation enabled state. In a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means was previously detected to be in the operated state, it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operated state. Then, as the post-operation output sound, "If the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operating output sound is being output, the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state. When a sound whose time from the timing when the operation becomes inaudible until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a fixed time (sound that is processed as a fixed time) is output, and when the output sound after the operation is output. ``If the specified operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the output sound after the operation is being output, the period after the operation starts from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state. There may be both a case where a sound whose time until the output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is undefined) is output.

According to this configuration, in the multiple operation valid state of the type that is not terminated, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state is changed to the non-operating state. It is preferable that it is difficult to estimate how long it will take to complete the process, and that, for example, in a situation where the specific operating means is immediately changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, the performance that should be noted is low. On the other hand, in the multiple operation valid state of the type to be terminated, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state may be in the non-operating state. There are both cases in which it is possible to estimate how much time has passed since the operation state has been entered, and cases in which it is difficult to estimate. Although it is suggested that the performance after changing from the state to the non-operating state may be worth paying attention to, the output sound after the operation does not necessarily reach the output state after a certain period of time has passed after the state is changed to the non-operating state. It is now expected that the user will not necessarily end the operation, and it will be expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when entering the non-operating state.

In addition, in the configuration 14-A, there are a plurality of types in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state before the predetermined termination timing arrives. The operation is performed based on the operation means that is to be operated multiple times in the operation valid state and the specific operation means being detected to be in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. Multiple operations of a type that can terminate the valid state.Although it is assumed that the operation means that are the object of multiple operations in the valid state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means," this is not necessarily the case. I can't do it. For example, in the multiple operation valid state, when the "operation means" expressed as a sample image display is operated, the present invention determines whether or not the operation valid state is of a type that can be terminated using this as an opportunity. The configuration may also be specified. In addition, even if the multiple operation valid state is not terminated before the predetermined end timing arrives depending on the result of the jackpot determination, etc., depending on the result of the jackpot determination etc. If the multiple operation valid state may be terminated before the termination timing arrives, the multiple operation valid state corresponds to the above-mentioned ``multiple operation valid state of the type in which the operation valid state can be terminated.'' It is.

[Configuration 15-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is provided in which the output sound after operation can be output multiple times, and the multiple operation valid states include a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state with different generation conditions. We are planning to prepare the following. Further, in both the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is in a non-operation state where it is not operated, and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. It is possible to play the game so as to cause a situation to appear, and in the first plural operation valid state, in a situation where the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. If the specific operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the specific operating means is in the operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change based on this, but if the specific operating means is in the operating state and the above-mentioned If the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is not changed due to this. sell. In other words, in this case, in the first multiple operation valid state, even if the specific operating means that is in the operated state is brought into the non-operated state, the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then will not change due to this. Although it is expected that the operation will be stopped with a casual feeling because the operation does not occur, when the above-mentioned specific operation means that is in the non-operating state is brought into the operating state, the output sound after the operation that was in the output state until then is Since it is possible for changes to occur, it can be expected that a sense of tension will be suitably provided when the operation is performed again. Note that "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" according to configuration 15-A are used to explain the technical concept of configuration 15-A. It's just a name. Therefore, the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" may mean the same operation means or operation valid state in other configurations. , may mean different operation means or operation valid states. Moreover, it may mean the same "operating means" or "operating valid state" as operating means or operational valid state of different names related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first plural operation valid state, in a situation where the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the post-operation output sound Assuming that the specified operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, both a sound that can cause a change in its output state and a sound that does not cause a change in its output state are output. However, while the specific operating means is in the operating state and the output sound after the operation is in the output state, the specific operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. In this case, regardless of the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound, the output state may not be changed using this as an opportunity. According to such a configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state, even if the specific operating means in the operating state is set to the non-operating state, the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then is not triggered by this. Since no change occurs, it is expected that the user will feel free to interrupt the operation. There are cases in which the output sound changes after an operation, and cases in which it does not, so while it is designed to encourage you to perform the operation again, there is also the possibility that the output sound will change after the operation. It can be expected that this will suitably provide the feeling of tension in re-operating.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, especially in the situation where the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state in the second multiple operation valid state, As the output sound after the operation, there is a sound in the output state that does not cause a change in the output state when the specific operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state. (although the sound that can be generated is not outputted as the output sound after the operation), the specific operation is performed under the condition that the specific operation means is in the operating state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is in the output state. When the means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this should be used as an opportunity for the above-mentioned post-operation output sound to either change or not to change depending on the type of sound being output. You can. According to such a configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state, when the specific operating means in the operating state is brought into the non-operating state, there is a possibility that a change occurs in the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then. Since there are both cases in which no change occurs, and cases in which no change occurs, while encouraging the user to interrupt the operation, there is also the possibility that the output sound may change after the operation, which creates a feeling of tension in interrupting the operation. On the other hand, when the specific operating means which is in the non-operating state is brought into the operating state, the output sound after the operation which has been in the output state until then is not changed. Therefore, it can be expected that the user will feel free to perform the operation again.

In addition, in the configuration 15-A, the operating means that is allowed to be operated multiple times in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state are both the same operation means as "specific operation means". Although it is assumed that this is the case, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 16-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, an after-operation output according to the detection is made. It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image display that simulates the operation means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the above-mentioned image display is in the operation state, the operation state is considered to be a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which detection is allowed multiple times and the output sound after the operation can be output multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state in which generation conditions are different from each other is provided. A state and a second multiple operation valid state are provided. The first multiple operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least an image display imitating the first operation means among the operation means is displayed, and the first operation means is operated. To play a game so as to cause a situation in which an output sound after a first side operation is in an output state in response to detection that the first operation means is in an operation state, and the first operation means is in a non-operation state in which the first operation means is not operated. The second plural operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least a simulated image display of the second operation means among the operation means is displayed, A situation occurs in which the output sound after the second operation is in the output state in response to the detection that the second operation means is in the operation state where the second operation means is operated, and the second operation means is in the non-operation state where the second operation means is not operated. the first operating means is in the non-operating state and the output sound is output after the first operation. If the first operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state under a certain situation, the output state of the first-side post-operation output sound may change with this as an opportunity; If the first operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state while the first operating means is in the operating state and the output sound after the first side operation is in the output state, the first operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. Since the output state of the output sound after the operation can be set not to change using this as an opportunity, it is possible to more actively encourage the first operating means, which is in the non-operating state, to be brought into the operating state. Become. Note that the "first operation means", "second operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" according to the configuration 16-A are the same as those of the configuration 16-A. It is simply a name used to explain a technical idea. Therefore, it means the same operating means or operation effective state as the "first operating means", "second operating means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" related to other configurations. It may mean a different operation means or a valid operation state. Moreover, it may mean the same "operating means" or "operating valid state" as operating means or operational valid state of different names related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in a situation where the first operation means is in the non-operation state and the output sound after the first side operation is in the output state in the first multiple operation valid state, the first As the output sound after side operation, only the sound that causes a change in the output state when the first operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state may be output. However, when the first operating means is in the operating state and the output sound is in the output state after the first side operation, When the first operating means changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, the output state of the output sound after the first side operation does not change due to this (processing that causes a change in the sound in the output state is possible) You may do so (not be done). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to more actively urge the first operating means, which is in a non-operating state, to be brought into an operating state.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, especially in a situation where the second operating means is in a non-operating state and the second side post-operation output sound is in an output state in the second plural operation valid state. As the output sound after the second side operation, only the sound that does not cause a change in the output state when the second operating means temporarily changes from the non-operating state to the operating state is outputted. However, when the second operating means is in the operating state and the second operating output sound is If the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while in an output state, this will be used as an opportunity to change the type of sound being output as the output sound after the second side is operated. There may be both cases where the value is changed and cases where it is not changed. According to such a configuration, when the second multiple operation valid state occurs, the second operating means in the operated state is more actively encouraged to be brought into the non-operated state. , since there is a possibility that a sound that does not cause any change is output in response to the non-operation state, it can be expected that the sense of tension will also be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 17-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to execute post-operation changes according to the detection, and it is possible to display a simulated image display that simulates the operating means. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the execution of the post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times and the above operation is performed. A multiple operation valid state is provided in which a post-operation change can be executed multiple times, and as one of the post-operation changes, a post-operation output sound can be output, and as the multiple operation valid state, A first multiple-time operation valid state and a second multiple-time operation valid state are provided, each with different generation conditions. The second multiple operation valid state is one in which the state can be terminated upon detection that the specific operation means is in the operational state before a predetermined termination timing arrives. However, in the first multiple operation valid state, the state is terminated when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives. In the first plural operation valid state, when the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the output sound after the operation is in the output state, If the specific operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change based on this, but if the specific operating means is in the operating state and the post-operating output If the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the sound is in an output state, the output state of the output sound after the operation can be prevented from changing based on this opportunity. Therefore, it becomes possible to more actively urge the specific operating means, which is in the non-operating state, to be brought into the operating state. Note that "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" according to configuration 17-A are used to explain the technical concept of configuration 17-A. It's just a name. Therefore, the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" may mean the same operation means or operation valid state in other configurations. , may mean different operation means or operation valid states. Moreover, it may mean the same "operating means" or "operating valid state" as operating means or operational valid state of different names related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state, the specific operating means is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state. If the device changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change based on this, but the specific operating means is in an operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. If the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state under certain circumstances, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change due to this, and the second plurality of operations In the valid state, if the specific operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the specific operating means is in the non-operating state and the output sound after the operation is in the output state, the above-mentioned operation Although the output state of the post-output sound does not change due to this, the specific operating means is in the operating state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state. When the state changes from the operation state to the non-operation state, this may be used as an opportunity to change or not change depending on the type of sound output as the above-mentioned post-operation output sound. good. According to such a configuration, when the "first multiple operation valid state" that is not terminated by an operation by the player occurs, the specific operation means that is in the non-operation state is operated. You will be able to more actively encourage people to reach this state. In addition, if a "second multiple operation valid state" that can be terminated by an operation by the player occurs, the specific operation means that is in the operating state is more actively set to a non-operational state. Although the user is prompted to do so, there is a possibility that a sound that does not cause any change is outputted due to the non-operation state, so it can be expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the configuration 17-A, the operating means that is allowed to be operated multiple times in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state are both the same operation means as "specific operation means". Although it is assumed that this is the case, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 18-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is provided in which the output sound after operation can be output multiple times, and the multiple operation valid states include a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state with different generation conditions. We are planning to prepare the following. Further, in both the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is in a non-operation state where it is not operated, and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. It is possible to play the game so that a situation appears, and when the specific operating means is in a non-operating state and the output sound after the operation is in an output state, the specific operating means is in a non-operating state. When changing from a state to an operation state, the time from entering the operation state until the end of the output state of the output sound after the operation is either a constant time or not. Therefore, the performance when the operation on the specific operation means is completed becomes complicated, and it can be expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained. Note that "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" according to configuration 18-A are used to explain the technical concept of configuration 18-A. It's just a name. Therefore, the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" may mean the same operation means or operation valid state in other configurations. , may mean different operation means or operation valid states. Moreover, it may mean the same "operating means" or "operating valid state" as operating means or operational valid state of different names related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state, the specific operating means is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state. When the state changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, the time from entering the operating state to ending the output state of the post-operation output sound is a certain amount of time depending on the type of the post-operation output sound in the output state. Although there are cases and undefined cases, the specific operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state while the specific operating means is in the operating state and the output sound after the operation is in the output state. In this case, the time from when the non-operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated may be indefinite. According to such a configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state is It is difficult to predict whether the process will end after a certain amount of time has elapsed, and for example, this suitably suggests that the noteworthy performance is low in a situation where the specific operating means has just been changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. You will be able to do this. On the other hand, when changing a specific operating means from a non-operating state to an operating state, it is possible to estimate how long it takes for the post-operation output sound that is in the output state to end after the specific operating means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. Because there are both cases where it is difficult to guess and cases where it is difficult to guess, it suggests that, for example, there is a possibility that the performance after the above-mentioned specific operation means is put into operation again is worth paying attention to. However, the output sound after an operation in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed after being put into the operation state again, and this is also desirable for reducing the feeling of tension when the operation state is put back into the operation state. will be expected to be maintained.

In addition, as will be described later, in this case, especially when the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state in the second plural operation valid state, When the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from entering the operating state to ending the output state of the post-operation output sound is indefinite, but when the specific operating means If the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is in an operating state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is in an output state, the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is The time until the output state is ended may be fixed or unfixed depending on the type of post-operation output sound in the output state. According to such a configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operating means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state is It is difficult to predict whether the process will be completed after a certain amount of time has elapsed, for example, it is preferable to suggest that the noteworthy performance is low in a situation where the specific operating means has just been changed from a non-operating state to an operating state. Be able to do things. In contrast, it is possible to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound that is in the output state to end when the specific operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. Because there are both cases where it is difficult to guess and cases where it is difficult to guess, this suggests that, for example, there is a possibility that the performance after the above-mentioned specific operation means is in the non-operation state is worth paying attention to. However, the output sound after an operation that is in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed after the non-operation state is set, and this is also a good idea for reducing the feeling of tension when switching to the non-operation state. will be expected to be maintained.

[Configuration 19-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, an after-operation output according to the detection is made. It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image display imitating the operation means described above. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the above-mentioned image display is in the operation state, the operation state is considered to be a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started. A multiple operation valid state is provided in which detection is allowed multiple times and the output sound after the operation can be output multiple times, and the operation means is provided with a first operation means and a second operation means. As the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state, which have different generation conditions, are prepared. The first multiple operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least a simulated image display of the first operation means is displayed, and is an operation state in which the first operation means is operated. It is possible to play a game in such a way that a situation occurs in which the output sound after the first side operation is in the output state and the first operation means is in the non-operation state where the first operation means is not operated. The second multiple operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least a simulated image display of the second operation means is displayed, and the second multiple operation valid state occurs when the second operation means is operated. It is possible to play the game so that a situation occurs in which the output sound after the operation of the second side is in the output state and the second operation means is in the non-operation state in which the second operation means is not operated. and, in the first multiple operation valid state, the output sound after the first side operation is in the output state and the first operation means is in the non-operation state. In this case, when the first operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from entering the operating state to ending the output state of the output sound after the first side operation is a constant time. Therefore, in a situation where the output sound after the first side operation is in the output state and the first operating means is in the non-operating state, it is difficult to determine at what timing the first operating means should be operated. It is now possible to provide a sense of performance, and it can be expected that the game's interest will be suitably maintained. Note that the "first operation means", "second operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" according to the configuration 19-A are the same as those of the configuration 19-A. It is simply a name used to explain a technical idea. Therefore, the same operation means or operation valid state as the "first operation means", "second operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" in other configurations may be used. It may mean a different operating means or a valid operating state. Moreover, it may mean the same "operating means" or "operating valid state" as operating means or operational valid state of different names related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the second multiple operation valid state, the second side operation output sound is in the output state and the second operation means is in the non-operation state. When the second operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from entering the operating state until the end of the output state of the output sound after the second side operation is (not treated as a fixed time) ) may be undefined. According to such a configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the second operating means is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state is not heard after the second operating state is changed to the operated state. It is preferable that it is difficult to estimate how much time will elapse before the process ends; for example, in a situation where the second operating means has just been changed from a non-operating state to an operating state, the performance that should be noted is low. Be able to make suggestions.

Further, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, a situation in which the output sound after the first side operation is in the output state and the first operation means is in the non-operation state in the first multiple operation valid state. When the first operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state in the lower part, the time from entering the operating state to ending the output state of the output sound after the first side operation is constant. Although it can be treated as time, when the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state under a situation where the output sound is in an output state and the first operating means is in an operating state after the first side operation. In this case, the time from when the non-operation state is entered until the output state of the first-side post-operation output sound is ended may be indefinite (not treated as a fixed time). According to such a configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the first operating means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state is not generated after the first operating state is changed to the operating state. It is possible to estimate how much time it will take for the process to end, and this suitably suggests that, for example, there is remarkable performance even in a situation where the first operating means has just been changed from a non-operating state to an operating state. On the other hand, it is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the first operating means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state to end after the first operating means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state. For example, in a situation where the first operating means has recently been changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is possible to suitably suggest that the noteworthy performance is low.

Also, as will be described later, in the second multi-operation valid state, when the second-side post-operation output sound is in the output state and the second operating means is in the non-operating state, When the second operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from entering the operating state to ending the output state of the second-side post-operation output sound is indefinite; If the second operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state while the output sound is in the output state after the operation of the second side and the second operating means is in the operating state, the second operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The time from when the output state of the second-side post-operation output sound ends to the end of the second-side post-operation output sound may be fixed or indefinite depending on the type of the second-side post-operation output sound in the output state. You can. According to such a configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the second operating means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state is generated after the second operating state is changed to the operating state. It is preferable that it is difficult to estimate how much time will elapse before the process ends, and that, for example, the second operating means will not be noteworthy in terms of performance in a situation where the second operating means has just been changed from a non-operating state to an operating state. On the other hand, when the second operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, the post-operation output sound in the output state is terminated after how much time has passed since the second operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. Since there are both cases where it is possible to guess and cases where it is difficult to guess, for example, the performance after the second operating means is in a non-operating state is worth paying attention to. However, the output sound after an operation that is in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed after the non-operation state is set, and the It is now expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 20-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which an output sound can be output multiple times after the operation, and the multiple operation valid states include a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state. A plurality of operation valid states are prepared, and in each of these operation valid states, a situation is created in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state where it is not operated, and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. This makes it possible to play games. In the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state, but in this case, after the operation The interval until a new output sound is generated is set to an undefined time (not treated as a fixed time), and in the second multiple operation valid state, the specific operating means is maintained in the operating state. However, in the third multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is kept in the operating state, and the output sound after the operation according to the detection is not generated multiple times. The corresponding post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times, but in that case, it is possible to process it so that the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated is a constant time. , in the multiple operation valid state, the specific operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the specific operating means is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state. In this case, the output state of the output sound after the operation can be changed using this as an opportunity, so that, for example, when the specific operation means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state again, there will be a noticeable effect even in the immediate situation. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that there is a gender. Note that the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "third multiple operation valid state" according to the configuration 20-A are the same as the configuration 20-A. It is simply a name used to explain A's technical philosophy. Therefore, the same operation means or operations are valid as the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "third multiple operation valid state" related to other configurations. It may mean a state, or it may mean a different operating means or a valid state of operation. Moreover, it may mean the same "operating means" or "operating valid state" as operating means or operational valid state of different names related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in a multiple operation enabled state in which the after-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, after the operation In the first multiple operation valid state in which the interval until a new output sound is generated is an indefinite period of time, the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. If the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state in the image below, the output state of the post-operation output sound will not change due to this, but the post-operation output sound will change. In the third multiple operation valid state where the interval until a new occurrence is a constant time, the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In this case, when the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed using this as an opportunity, and the specific operating means is only maintained in the operating state. In the second multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound according to the detection is not enabled to be generated multiple times, the specific operating means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. When the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state in the lower part, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed using this as an opportunity. According to such a configuration, the so-called auto-repeat function is activated at regular intervals, and when the player performs the operation again in the second multi-operation enabled state, in which the so-called auto-repeat function is not activated. In both the case where the player performs the operation again in the third multiple operation valid state, the output state of the output sound after the operation can be changed using this as an opportunity, so the auto continuous hit It is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether or not the user is in a situation where the function is being activated. On the other hand, in the first multiple operation valid state, if the specific operation means is operated again under the condition where the output sound is in the output state after the operation, the so-called auto continuous hit function is effective. Since we have made it possible to recognize that there is no situation in which it is not activated (the second multiple operation enabled state), that is, a situation where the automatic repeated tapping function is enabled, the so-called automatic repeated tapping function is activated at regular intervals. By not being activated every time, it is made difficult to recognize whether the automatic repeated hit function is to be activated or not, but with this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest due to this configuration.

In addition, in the configuration 20-A, in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state, the operation means that are allowed to be operated multiple times are all “specified”. Although it is assumed that the same operating means is used as the "operating means", this is not necessarily the case. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 21-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is provided in which an output sound after the operation can be output multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state. In each of these operation enabled states, it is possible to play the game so as to create a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state where it is not operated and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. That's what I do. In the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state, but in this case, after the operation The interval until a new output sound is generated is set to an undefined time, and in the second multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is simply maintained in the operation state and the output after the operation according to the detection is performed. The sound can be generated multiple times, but in this case, the interval between the operation and the new generation of the output sound can be treated as a fixed time, and when the multiple operation is enabled, , when the specific operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the specific operating means is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the post-operating output sound Since the output state can be changed using this as an opportunity, for example, when the specific operating means is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state again, it is suitably suggested that there is a remarkable performance even in a recent situation. You will be able to do it. Note that "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" according to the configuration 21-A are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 21-A. It's just a name. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means or operation valid state as "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" in other configurations. However, it may also mean a different operating means or a valid operating state. Moreover, it may mean the same "operating means" or "operating valid state" as operating means or operational valid state of different names related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after the operation is an indefinite time, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and When the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state in a situation where the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is not changed based on this. In the second plural operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is a constant time, the specific operating means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is When the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state while in an output state, this causes the post-operation output sound to change according to the type of sound being output. It may be possible to have both cases where the value is changed and cases where it is not changed. According to such a configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-sequence function is not enabled at regular intervals, even if the specific operating means is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, after the above-mentioned operation Since the output state of the output sound does not change based on this trigger, coupled with the fact that the interval between the above operation and when a new output sound is generated is assumed to be an indefinite period of time, it is difficult to see whether the player's operation is being accepted properly. It is expected that this will make it difficult to recognize and maintain a good sense of tension. On the other hand, in the second multi-operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-sequence function is enabled at regular intervals, there is a possibility that the performance after the above-mentioned specific operation means is activated again may be worth paying attention to. However, by not necessarily changing the output sound after an operation in the output state when the operation state is changed again, this also reduces the feeling of tension when switching back to the operation state. It is expected that it will be maintained properly.

In addition, in the configuration 21-A, in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state, the operation means that are allowed to be operated multiple times are both the same operation means as "specific operation means". Although a certain case is assumed, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 22-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which an output sound can be output multiple times after the operation, and the multiple operation valid states include a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state. A plurality of operation valid states are prepared, and in each of these operation valid states, a situation is created in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state where it is not operated, and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. It is said that it is possible to play games. In the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state, but in this case, the post-operation output The interval until a new sound is generated is set to an undefined period of time, and in the second multiple operation valid state, if the specific operating means is kept in the operating state, the output sound after the operation according to the detection will not occur. In the third multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. However, in this case, since the interval between the operation and the new output sound can be set to a certain period of time, the range of performance has been expanded and the game's interest has been increased. It can be expected to maintain it well. Note that the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "third multiple operation valid state" according to the configuration 22-A are the same as the configuration 22-A. It is simply a name used to explain A's technical philosophy. Therefore, the same operation means or operations are valid as the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "third multiple operation valid state" related to other configurations. It may mean a state, or it may mean a different operation means or operation effective state. Moreover, it may mean the same "operating means" or "operating valid state" as operating means or operational valid state of different names related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, the post-operation output sound is in a multiple-operation enabled state in which the post-operation output sound according to the detection described above can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state. In the first multiple operation valid state in which the interval until a new occurrence is an indefinite time, the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. If the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from when it enters the operating state until the end of the output state of the output sound after the operation is indefinite (as a fixed time) On the other hand, in the third multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is a constant time, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the above-mentioned If the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state while the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated after entering the operating state. In the second embodiment, the period of time can be treated as a fixed time rather than an indefinite time, and the output sound after the operation according to the detection cannot be generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operating means in the operating state. In the multiple operation valid state, when the specific operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the specific operating means is in the non-operating state and the output sound after the operation is in the output state. The time from when the operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends can be treated as a constant time. According to such a configuration, the so-called auto-repeat function is activated at regular intervals, and when the player performs the operation again in the second multi-operation enabled state, in which the so-called auto-repeat function is not activated. In the case where the player performs the re-operation in the third multiple operation valid state, the time from when the player performs the re-operation until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends. Since this is constant, it is expected that the player will be able to maintain a good sense of tension by making it difficult to recognize whether or not the player is in a situation where the automatic continuous hit function is being activated. On the other hand, in the first multiple operation valid state, if the specific operation means is operated again under the condition where the output sound is in the output state after the operation, the so-called auto continuous hit function is effective. Because it is possible to recognize that there is no situation in which it is not activated (the second multiple operation enabled state), that is, a situation where the auto-sequence function is enabled, the so-called auto-sequence function is activated at regular intervals. By not activating it, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the automatic repeated hit function is to be activated, but with this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the configuration.

In addition, in the configuration 22-A, in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state, the operating means that is allowed to be operated multiple times is all “specified”. Although it is assumed that the same operating means is used as the "operating means", this is not necessarily the case. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 23-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is provided in which an output sound after the operation can be output multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state. In each of these operation enabled states, it is possible to play the game so as to create a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state where it is not operated and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. That's what I do. In the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state, but in this case, the post-operation output The interval until a new sound is generated is set to an undetermined time, and in the second multiple operation valid state, the output sound after the operation according to the detection is simply maintained in the operation state of the specific operation means. It is said that it can be generated multiple times, but in that case, it can be processed so that the interval between the output sound and the new generation after the operation is a fixed time, so the range of performance is expanded. Therefore, it can be expected that the player's interest in playing games can be suitably maintained. Note that "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" according to the configuration 23-A are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 23-A. It's just a name. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means or operation valid state as "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", and "second multiple operation valid state" in other configurations. However, it may also mean a different operating means or a valid operating state. Moreover, it may mean the same "operating means" or "operating valid state" as operating means or operational valid state of different names related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after the operation is an indefinite time, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and When the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state while the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated after entering the operating state. In the second multi-operation valid state, in which the time until a new output sound is generated is indefinite, and the interval until a new output sound is generated after the operation is a constant time, the specific operation means is in a non-operation state. If the specified operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state while the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is The time until it is completed may be an indefinite time or a constant time. According to such a configuration, in the first multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called automatic continuous hit function is not enabled at regular intervals, even if the specific operating means is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, the operating state Since the time from the time when the output sound after the operation ends until the output state of the output sound after the operation ends is undefined, this combined with the fact that the interval until the output sound after the operation is newly generated is an undefined time, makes it difficult to play the game. It is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether the user's operation is being accepted properly. On the other hand, in the second multi-operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-sequence function is enabled at regular intervals, there is a possibility that the performance after the above-mentioned specific operation means is activated again may be worth paying attention to. However, by making the output sound after an operation in the output state not necessarily end within a certain period of time after being put into the operation state again, it also creates a feeling of tension when the operation state is changed again. It is now expected to maintain a suitable level of performance.

In addition, in the configuration 23-A, in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state, the operation means that are allowed to be operated multiple times are both the same operation means as "specific operation means". Although a certain case is assumed, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 24-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multi-operation enabled state is provided in which the output sound after an operation can be output multiple times. Then, as the multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state, and in that case, the post-operation output sound is newly generated. An indefinite change multiple operation valid state that can be processed so that the interval until the occurrence is an indefinite time, and a plurality of output sounds after the operation according to the detection just by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. The constant change can be generated multiple times, and in that case, the constant change can be processed so that the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is a constant time. The multiple operation valid state is a type of multiple operation valid state in which the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the predetermined termination timing arrives. Regarding the possibility that the state will be terminated based on the detection that the specific operating means is in the operating state during the interval from the time when the state can be generated until the output sound is newly generated after the operation. You will be able to make suggestions. The terms "specific operation means", "indeterminate change multiple times operation valid state", and "constant change multiple times operation valid state" according to the configuration 24-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 24-A. It's just a name. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means or operation valid state as "specific operation means", "inconstant change multiple operation valid state", or "constant change multiple operation valid state" in other configurations. However, it may also mean a different operating means or a valid operating state. Moreover, it may mean the same "operating means" or "operating valid state" as operating means or operational valid state of different names related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, the indefinite change multiple operation valid state is based on the fact that the specific operating means is detected to be in the operating state before the predetermined end timing arrives. While the state can occur as a multiple operation valid state of a type that can be terminated, the constant change multiple operation valid state is a state in which the specific operation means is operated before a predetermined termination timing arrives. There are cases where the state occurs as a multi-operation valid state of a type that is not terminated based on the detection that the state is in the state, and cases where the specific operation means is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. There may be both a case where the state occurs as a multiple operation valid state of a type that can be terminated based on the fact that the state is detected as being in the multiple operation valid state. According to such a configuration, when the specific operating means is maintained in the operating state and the interval until a new output sound is generated after the operation is an indefinite time, the specific operating means is maintained in the operating state. On the other hand, when the specific operating means is maintained in the operating state, the output sound after the operation is detected. If the interval until a new occurrence is a certain period of time, is the situation in which the state can be terminated upon detection of the specific operating means being in the operating state, or is the specific operating means It is expected that upon detecting that the robot is in an operating state, it will be difficult to recognize whether the state is in a situation where it cannot be terminated, and a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the configuration 24-A, the operating means that are allowed to be operated multiple times in the indefinite change multiple operation valid state and constant change multiple operation valid state are both the same operation means as "specific operation means". Although a certain case is assumed, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 25-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which an output sound can be output multiple times after the operation, and the multiple operation valid states include a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state. A plurality of operation valid states are prepared, and in each of these operation valid states, a situation is created in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state where it is not operated, and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. This makes it possible to play games. The first multiple operation valid state is such that the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state, and in that case, the post-operation output sound is The interval until a new occurrence shall be always longer than the specific time, and the second multiple operation valid state will not be output after the operation according to the above detection if the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state. The sound cannot be generated multiple times, and the third multiple operation valid state is such that the output sound after the operation according to the detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. In this case, the interval after the operation until a new output sound is generated must be equal to or less than the above-mentioned specific time, and when the multiple operations are in the valid state, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state. If the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state while the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change based on this. By doing so, it becomes possible to suggest that there is a possibility that the performance after the specific operating means is put into the operating state again may be worth paying attention to. In addition, the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", "third multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" according to the configuration 25-A are as follows. , is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 25-A. Therefore, it is the same as "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", "third multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" related to other configurations. It may mean an operating means, a valid operation state, or a time, or it may mean a different operating means, a valid operation state, or a time. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation means", "operation effective state", and "time" as operating means, operation effective state, and time of different names related to other configurations. In addition, "time less than a specific time" not only includes "a specific time," but also only one time is prepared for each of "a time longer than a specific time" and "a time less than a specific time." The time may be different, or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, the post-operation output is in a multiple-operation enabled state in which the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state. In the first multiple operation valid state in which the interval until a new sound is generated is always longer than the specific time, the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. If the specific operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state under the following circumstances, the output state of the post-operation output sound should not be changed by this, and the output state of the post-operation sound should not be changed. In the third multiple operation valid state in which the interval until a new output sound is generated is always less than or equal to the specific time, the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the output sound is output after the operation. When the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state under a certain situation, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed using this as an opportunity, and the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state. In the second multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound according to the detection is not generated multiple times, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is not generated. If the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state under a situation in which the specific operating means is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed using this as an opportunity.

According to such a configuration, when the player performs the operation again in the above-mentioned second multi-operation enabled state where the so-called auto-repeat function is not activated, and when a specific time has elapsed since the start of output after the previous operation. In both cases, when the player performs the operation again in the third multiple operation valid state, in which the so-called auto-sequence function is activated and a new post-operation output is started just by the passage of time. Since the output sound after the operation that was in the output state changes when the player performs the operation again, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the player is in a situation where the auto-repeat function is being activated, creating a sense of tension. It is expected that it will be maintained properly. On the other hand, in the first multiple operation valid state, if the specific operation means is operated again under the condition where the output sound is in the output state after the operation, the so-called auto continuous hit function is effective. Because it is possible to recognize that the situation is not in a situation where it is not activated (the second multiple operation enabled state), that is, it is in a situation where the auto-sequence function is enabled, it is possible to recognize that it is not in a situation where it is not activated. The so-called auto-sequence-striking function is not activated until a time longer than a specific time has elapsed, making it difficult to recognize that "the auto-sequence-striking function is to be activated," but the game has such a configuration. A decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the configuration 25-A, in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state, the operating means that is allowed to be operated multiple times is all “specified”. Although it is assumed that the same operating means is used as the "operating means", this is not necessarily the case. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 26-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is provided in which an output sound after the operation can be output multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state. In each of these operation enabled states, it is possible to play the game so as to create a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state where it is not operated and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. That's what I do. The first multiple operation valid state is such that the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state, and in that case, the post-operation output sound is The interval until a new occurrence is always longer than the specific time, and the second multiple operation valid state is only when the specific operation means is maintained in the operating state after the operation according to the detection. The output sound can be generated multiple times, and in that case, the interval after the operation until the output sound is newly generated is always equal to or less than the above-mentioned specific time, and in the multiple operation enabled state, If the specific operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the specific operating means is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the post-operating output sound is output. Since the state can be changed using this as an opportunity, it is possible to suggest that the performance after the specific operating means is put into the operating state again may be worth paying attention to. Note that the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" according to the configuration 26-A are based on the technical concept of the configuration 26-A. It is just a name used for explanation. Therefore, it means the same operation means, operation validity state, and time as "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" related to other configurations. It may also mean a different operation means, operation effective state, or time. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation means", "operation effective state", and "time" as operating means, operation effective state, and time of different names related to other configurations. In addition, "time less than a specific time" not only includes "a specific time," but also only one time is prepared for each of "a time longer than a specific time" and "a time less than a specific time." The time may be different, or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after the operation is always longer than the specific time, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state. , and when the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state while the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound changes upon this occasion. In the second multiple operation valid state, in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after the operation is always equal to or less than the specific time, the specific operating means is in the non-operating state and the specific operating means is in the non-operating state and When the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state while the post-operation output sound is in the output state, this will be used as an opportunity to determine the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound. There may be both cases in which the value is changed and cases in which it is not changed depending on the situation. According to such a configuration, a new post-operation output is not started by the so-called auto-sequence function unless a time longer than the specific time has elapsed since the start of the output after the previous operation. In this state, even if the specific operating means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change with this as a trigger. Coupled with the fact that the so-called automatic consecutive hit function is not activated until a long period of time has elapsed, it is expected that this will make it difficult to recognize whether or not the player's operations are being accepted properly, thereby maintaining a good sense of tension. Ru. On the other hand, in the second multi-operation enabled state, the so-called auto-sequence function is enabled and a new post-operation output is started only after a certain period of time or less has passed since the output after the previous operation started. , while suggesting the possibility that the performance after the specific operating means is put into the operating state again is worth paying attention to, the output sound after the operation that is in the output state is changed to the operating state again. By not necessarily using this as an opportunity to change, it is expected that the tension will be suitably maintained when returning to the operating state.

In addition, in the configuration 26-A, the operating means that are allowed to be operated multiple times in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state are both the same operation means as "specific operation means". Although a certain case is assumed, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 27-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which an output sound can be output multiple times after the operation, and the multiple operation valid states include a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state. A plurality of operation valid states are prepared, and in each of these operation valid states, a situation is created in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state where it is not operated, and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. We are making it possible to play games in the following ways. The first multiple operation valid state is such that the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state, and in that case, the post-operation output sound is The interval until a new occurrence is always longer than the specific time, and the second multiple operation valid state is determined by the fact that the specific operation means is maintained in the operating state only after the operation according to the detection. The output sound cannot be generated multiple times, and the third multiple operation valid state means that the output sound can be generated multiple times after the operation according to the detection described above simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. In this case, since the interval after the operation until the output sound is newly generated is always equal to or less than the specified time, the range of effects is widened and the enjoyment of the game is suitably maintained. can be expected. In addition, the "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", "third multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" according to the configuration 27-A are as follows. , is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 27-A. Therefore, it is the same as "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", "third multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" related to other configurations. It may mean an operating means, a valid operation state, or a time, or it may mean a different operating means, a valid operation state, or a time. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation means", "operation effective state", and "time" as operating means, operation effective state, and time of different names related to other configurations. In addition, "time less than a specific time" not only includes "a specific time," but also only one time is prepared for each of "a time longer than a specific time" and "a time less than a specific time." The time may be different, or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, the post-operation output sound is in a multiple-operation enabled state in which the post-operation output sound according to the detection described above can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state. In the first multiple operation valid state in which the interval until a new occurrence is always longer than the specific time, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the output sound after the operation is in the output state. When the upper specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state under a certain situation, the time from when it enters the operating state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is indefinite ( On the other hand, in the third multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always less than or equal to the specific time, the specific operation means If the specific operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the post-operation output after entering the operating state The time until the sound output state ends can be treated as a constant time rather than an indefinite time, and simply by maintaining the specific operating means in the operating state, multiple sounds can be output after the operation according to the detection. In the second multiple operation valid state in which the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state. When the state changes from the state to the operating state, the time from entering the operating state until the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound can be treated as a constant time, and the specific operating means maintains the operating state. In the second multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound according to the detection is not generated multiple times, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state. When the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state under certain circumstances, the time from when it enters the operating state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is a certain period of time. It may also be possible to process it as According to such a configuration, when the player performs the operation again in the above-mentioned second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated, and when a specific time has elapsed since the start of output after the previous operation. In both cases, when the player performs the operation again in the third multiple operation enabled state, in which the so-called auto-sequence function is enabled and a new post-operation output is started just by the passage of time. Since the time from the player's re-operation until the end of the output sound output state after the operation is fixed, it is possible to determine whether or not the auto-repeating function is enabled. It is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension by making it difficult to recognize. On the other hand, in the first multiple operation valid state, if the specific operation means is operated again under the condition where the output sound is in the output state after the operation, the so-called auto continuous hit function is effective. Because it is possible to recognize that the situation is not in a situation where it is not activated (the second multiple operation enabled state), that is, it is in a situation where the auto-repeat function is enabled, it is possible to recognize that it is not in a situation where it is not activated. The so-called auto-sequence-striking function is not activated until a time longer than a specific time has elapsed, making it difficult to recognize that "the auto-sequence-striking function is to be activated," but the game has such a configuration. A decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the configuration 27-A, in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state, the operating means that is allowed to be operated multiple times is all “specified”. Although it is assumed that the same operating means is used as the "operating means", this is not necessarily the case. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 28-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multiple operation valid state is provided in which an output sound after the operation can be output multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state. In each of these operation enabled states, it is possible to play the game so as to create a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state where it is not operated and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. That's what I do. The first multiple operation valid state is such that the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state, and in that case, the post-operation output sound is The interval until a new occurrence is always longer than the specific time, and the second multiple operation valid state is only when the specific operation means is maintained in the operating state after the operation according to the detection. The output sound can be generated multiple times, and in that case, the interval after the operation until the new output sound is generated must be less than or equal to the specified time, which expands the range of effects. , it can be expected to suitably maintain interest in gaming. The "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" according to the configuration 28-A are based on the technical concept of the configuration 28-A. It is just a name used for explanation. Therefore, it means the same operation means, operation validity state, and time as "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" related to other configurations. It may also mean a different operation means, operation effective state, or time. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation means", "operation effective state", and "time" as operating means, operation effective state, and time of different names related to other configurations. In addition, "time less than a specific time" not only includes "a specific time," but also only one time is prepared for each of "a time longer than a specific time" and "a time less than a specific time." The time may be different, or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation enabled state, the so-called auto continuous hit function will not be activated unless a period longer than a specific time has passed since output started after the previous operation. When the specific operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the means is in the non-operating state and the output sound after the operation is in the output state, the above-mentioned operation is performed after entering the operating state. The time until the end of the post-output sound output state is set to be undefined (it is not treated as a fixed time), and the so-called auto In the second multiple operation valid state in which the continuous hit function is enabled and a new post-operation output is started, the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state; When the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from when it enters the operating state until the end of the output state of the output sound after the operation is an indefinite period of time (not constant). There may be cases where the time is not processed as a certain amount of time) and cases where it is a certain amount of time (which can be processed as a certain amount of time). According to such a configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state in which the so-called auto-sequence function is not activated until a time longer than a specific time has elapsed since output started after the previous operation, the specific operation means is activated. Even if the is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state again, the time from entering the operating state to the end of the output state of the output sound after the previous operation is indefinite, so the output after the previous operation has started. Coupled with the fact that the so-called auto-succession function is not activated until a longer time than a specific time has elapsed, it is difficult to recognize whether the player's operation is being accepted properly, thereby maintaining a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. There is expected. On the other hand, in the second multi-operation enabled state, the so-called auto-sequence function is enabled and a new post-operation output is started only after a certain period of time or less has passed since the output after the previous operation started. , while suggesting the possibility that the performance after the specific operating means is put into the operating state again is worth paying attention to, the output sound after the operation in the output state is changed after the specific operating means is put into the operating state again. By not necessarily ending the operation within a certain period of time, it is expected that the tension will be suitably maintained when the operation state is resumed.

In addition, in the configuration 28-A, in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state, the operation means that are allowed to be operated multiple times are both the same operation means as "specific operation means". Although a certain case is assumed, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 29-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to output an output sound after the operation according to the detection. In this regard, as the operation valid state is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the detection of the operation state is allowed multiple times. A multi-operation enabled state is provided in which the output sound after an operation can be output multiple times. As the multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state, and in that case, the post-operation output sound is new. There is a long-change multi-operation valid state in which the interval until the occurrence of the above operation is always longer than a specific time, and multiple output sounds after the operation according to the detection described above simply by maintaining the above-mentioned specific operating means in the operating state. In this case, the interval until the new output sound is generated after the operation is always less than or equal to the specified time mentioned above. The multiple operation valid state is a type of multiple operation valid state in which the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives. Therefore, there is a possibility that the state will be terminated based on the detection that the specific operating means is in the operating state during the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation. Be able to make suggestions. In addition, the "specific operation means", "long change multiple operation valid state", "short change multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" according to the configuration 29-A are based on the technical concept of the configuration 29-A. It is just a name used for explanation. Therefore, it means the same operation means, operation effective state, and time as "specific operating means", "long change multiple operation valid state", "short change multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" related to other configurations. It may also mean a different operation means, operation effective state, or time. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation means", "operation effective state", and "time" as operating means, operation effective state, and time of different names related to other configurations. In addition, "time less than a specific time" not only includes "a specific time," but also only one time is prepared for each of "a time longer than a specific time" and "a time less than a specific time." The time may be different, or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, the long change multiple operation valid state is based on the fact that the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. The state can occur as a multiple operation valid state of a type that can be terminated, and the short change multiple operation valid state is such that the specific operation means is in the operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives. The above-mentioned specific operation means is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. There may be both a case where the state occurs as a multiple operation valid state of a type that can be terminated based on the detection of the state. According to such a configuration, although the automatic repeated hitting function is to be activated, the so-called automatic repeated hitting function will not be activated unless a period longer than a specific time has elapsed since output started after the previous operation. can suitably suggest that the state is in a situation where the state can be terminated upon detection of the specific operating means being in the operating state; If the so-called auto continuous hit function is activated and a new post-operation output is started only after a specified time or less has elapsed since then, the corresponding By making it difficult to recognize whether the state is in a situation where the state can be ended or whether the state is in a situation where the state cannot be ended upon detection of the specific operating means being in the operating state, a sense of tension is suitably created. be expected to maintain it.

In addition, in the configuration 29-A, in the short change multiple operation valid state and the long change multiple operation valid state, the operation means that are allowed to be operated multiple times are both the same operation means as "specific operation means". Although a certain case is assumed, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 30-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, an after-operation output according to the detection is made. It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image display that simulates the operation means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the display of the sample image is in the operation state, the output sound after the operation can be started. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which multiple operations are allowed and the output sound after the above operation can be output multiple times, and the sample image display is displayed so that periodic changes appear in the multiple operation valid state. In some cases, the periodic change is displayed in a time unit that is less than or equal to a predetermined time, and in other cases, the periodic change is displayed in a time unit that is longer than the predetermined time. As the multiple operation valid states, a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are prepared, and in these multiple operation valid states, In each case, it is possible to play the game in such a way that a situation is created in which the operating means that is the object of displaying the simulated image is in a non-operating state, and the output sound is in the output state after the operation. ing. In the first multiple operation valid state, periodic changes in the display of the sample image can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, and the operating means that is the target of displaying the sample image is in the operation state. The output sound after the operation according to the above detection can be generated multiple times by simply being maintained, and in the second multiple operation valid state, the periodic change of the sample image display is made in a time unit longer than the predetermined time. However, if the operating means that is the target of the image display is maintained in an operating state, the output sound after the operation according to the detection described above cannot be generated multiple times, and the third In the multi-operation enabled state, periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, and the operation means that is the target of the sample image display is simply maintained in the operating state. The post-operation output sound according to the above detection can be generated multiple times, and in the multiple-operation enabled state, the operating means that is the target of the sample image display is in the non-operating state, and the output sound after the above-mentioned operation is enabled. If the operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the output sound is in the output state, the output state of the output sound after the operation can be changed using this as a trigger. It becomes possible to suggest that there is a possibility that the performance after the operating means that is the object of image display is put into the operating state again may be worth paying attention to. Note that the "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", "third multiple operation valid state", and "predetermined time" according to the configuration 30-A are the same as those of the configuration 30-A. It is simply a name used to explain the technical philosophy of. Therefore, the same operation valid state or time as the "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", "third multiple operation valid state", and "predetermined time" related to other configurations It may also mean a different operation effective state or time. In addition, it may mean another name for an operation valid state related to another configuration, an “operation valid state” that is the same as time, or “time”. Moreover, only one time may be prepared for each of the "time less than a predetermined time" and "time longer than a predetermined time," or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, the multiple operation valid state is such that the output sound after the operation according to the above detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the sample image display in the operation state. In the first multiple operation valid state in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operating means that is the target of displaying the sample image is in a non-operating state. If the operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state while the operating means is in an output state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is triggered by this to change. In the third multiple operation valid state in which periodic changes in the sample image display are made possible to appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, the operation means that is the object of displaying the sample image is If the operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the operating means is in the non-operating state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound will change as a result of this. After making it possible to change the pattern image, it is possible to display periodic changes in the pattern image display in a time unit longer than the predetermined time period, but the operating means that is the target of the pattern image display is maintained in an operating state. In the second multiple operation valid state, the operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state. When the operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state under a certain situation, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed using this as an opportunity.

According to such a configuration, among the multiple operation valid states in which the so-called auto-repeating function is enabled for the operating means that is the target of the sample image display, the first multiple operation valid state is not displayed on the sample image. By having the same configuration as the second multi-operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeat function is not enabled, in that periodic changes in the display appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, the auto-repeat function is activated. While maintaining a sense of tension by making it difficult to recognize whether the target is the object of Unlike , the output state of the output sound after the operation did not change due to this, so depending on whether or not there is a change when the operation is repeated, it is possible to detect whether the auto continuous hit function is enabled. It can be expected that a decline in interest in gaming can be suppressed by suitably suggesting that such a situation exists. In addition, among the multiple operation valid states in which the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled for the operation means that is the target of the sample image display, in the third multiple operation valid state, the output sound after the operation is set to the output state. If you perform the operation again in a certain situation, the output state of the output sound after the operation can change based on this, so the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated. By making it the same configuration as the state, it is difficult to recognize whether it is the target of the automatic repeated hit function and maintain a sense of tension. Unlike in the previous case, since it is possible to display images that appear in units of time less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the auto-repeat function can be activated depending on the length of the periodic changes in the sample image display. It can be expected that a decrease in interest in gaming can be suppressed by suitably indicating that the player is in a certain situation.

[Configuration 31-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, an after-operation output according to the detection is made. It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image display that simulates the operation means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the display of the sample image is in the operation state, the output sound after the operation can be started. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which multiple operations are allowed and the output sound after the above operation can be output multiple times, and the sample image display is displayed so that periodic changes appear in the multiple operation valid state. In some cases, the periodic change is displayed in a time unit that is less than or equal to a predetermined time, and in other cases, the periodic change is displayed in a time unit that is longer than the predetermined time. As the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are prepared, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, the target of the sample image display is It is possible to play the game in such a way that a situation is created in which the operating means is in a non-operating state and the output sound after the operation is in the output state. In the first multiple operation valid state, periodic changes in the display of the sample image can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, and the operating means that is the target of displaying the sample image is in the operation state. The output sound after the operation according to the above detection can be generated multiple times just by being maintained, and in the second multiple operation valid state, the periodic change of the sample image display is made in units of time equal to or less than the above predetermined time. The apparatus is configured such that an output sound after the operation according to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the image display in an operating state, In the multiple operation valid state, the operating means that is the target of the image display is in the non-operating state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is in the output state, and the operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state. , the output state of the output sound after the above operation can be changed using this as an opportunity, so it is worth paying attention to the performance after the operation means that is the target of the image display is put into the operation state again. You will be able to suggest the possibility that it may be valuable. Note that the "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "predetermined time" according to the configuration 31-A are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 31-A. It's just a name. Therefore, it may mean the same operation valid state or time as the “first multiple operation valid state”, “second multiple operation valid state”, and “predetermined time” in other configurations. , may also mean different operational enable states or times. In addition, it may mean another name for an operation valid state related to another configuration, an “operation valid state” that is the same as time, or “time”. Moreover, only one time may be prepared for each of the "time less than a predetermined time" and the "time longer than a predetermined time," or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state, periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time period, and the sample image is displayed. The post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the operating means in the operating state, and when the operating means that is the target of the above-mentioned image display is in the non-operating state. In addition, if the operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state while the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change due to this. In the second multi-operation enabled state, periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, and the operating means that is the object of displaying the sample image is operated. The post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times just by being maintained in the state, and when the operating means that is the target of the image display is in the non-operating state and after the above-mentioned operation. If the operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the output sound is in the output state, use this as an opportunity to adjust the output sound according to the type of sound output as the post-operation output sound. There may be both cases where the output state of the output sound changes after the operation and cases where it does not change. According to such a configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state in which periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operation means is restarted from the non-operation state. Even if the player enters the operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change based on this, so that it is difficult to recognize whether the player's operation is properly accepted, thereby suitably maintaining a sense of tension. There is expected. On the other hand, in the second multiple operation valid state in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, the performance after the specific operation means is put into the operation state again is While trying to suggest that there is a possibility that there is something worth paying attention to, by not necessarily changing the output sound after an operation in the output state when the operation state is changed again, it is possible to It is now expected to maintain a suitable level of tension when doing so.

[Configuration 32-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, an after-operation output according to the detection is made. It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image display that simulates the operation means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the display of the sample image is in the operation state, the output sound after the operation can be started. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which multiple operations are allowed and the output sound after the above operation can be output multiple times, and the sample image display is displayed so that periodic changes appear in the multiple operation valid state. In some cases, the periodic change is displayed in a time unit that is less than or equal to a predetermined time, and in other cases, the periodic change is displayed in a time unit that is longer than the predetermined time. The multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state. In all of these, it is possible to play the game in such a way that a situation appears in which the operating means that is the object of the display of the simulated image is in a non-operating state, and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. We have prepared a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state as multiple operation valid states, and in each of these multiple operation valid states, It is possible to play the game in such a way that a situation appears in which the operating means that is the object of the image display is in a non-operating state and the output sound after the operation is in the output state. Further, in the first multiple operation valid state, the operation means that is the target of the display of the sample image can be displayed so that periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. The post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the operation state, and in the second multiple operation valid state, the periodic change of the sample image display is longer than the predetermined time. Although it is possible to display the image so that it appears over a long period of time, it is not possible to generate the output sound after the operation multiple times in response to the detection described above simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the image display in the operation state. In the third multiple operation valid state, periodic changes in the display of the sample image can be displayed in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, and the operating means that is the object of displaying the sample image is maintained in the operating state. Since the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by the above-mentioned detection, the range of effects can be expanded, and it can be expected that the game's interest can be suitably maintained. Note that the "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", "third multiple operation valid state", and "predetermined time" according to the configuration 32-A are the same as those of the configuration 32-A. It is simply a name used to explain the technical philosophy of. Therefore, the same operation valid state and time as the “first multiple operation valid state”, “second multiple operation valid state”, “second multiple operation valid state”, and “predetermined time” related to other configurations It may mean a different operation effective state or a different time. In addition, it may mean another name for an operation valid state related to another configuration, an “operation valid state” that is the same as time, or “time”. Moreover, only one time may be prepared for each of the "time less than a predetermined time" and the "time longer than a predetermined time," or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, the multiple operation valid state is such that the output sound after the operation according to the above detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the sample image display in the operation state. In the first multiple operation valid state in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operating means that is the target of displaying the sample image is in a non-operating state. If the operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state while the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound changes after entering the operating state. While the time until the end of the image is indefinite (not treated as a fixed time), the periodic change in the image display can be displayed in units of time less than or equal to the predetermined time. 3. In the multiple operation valid state, when the operating means for which the sample image is displayed is in the non-operating state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is in the output state, the operating means is operated from the non-operating state. state, the time from entering the operation state until the end of the output state of the output sound after the operation can be treated as a fixed time (instead of an indefinite time), and the target of the sample image display. It is not possible to generate the post-operation output sound in accordance with the detection a plurality of times only by maintaining the operating means in the operating state. If the operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state while the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated after entering the operating state. The time up to this point may be treated as a constant time (instead of an indefinite time).

According to such a configuration, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound according to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the sample image display in the operation state. , Regarding the first multiple operation valid state, like the second multiple operation valid state, periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, which is an automatic continuous hit function. While maintaining a sense of tension by making it difficult to recognize whether the target is the object of Unlike, since the time from when the re-operation is performed until the output state of the output sound after the operation ends is indefinite (it is not treated as a fixed time), such re-operation By checking the output state of the post-operation output sound during operation, it can be expected to appropriately suggest that the automatic continuous hit function is being activated, thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest. . In addition, among the multiple operation valid states in which the output sound after the operation according to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the sample image display, the third multiple operation Regarding the operation valid state, similar to the second multiple operation valid state, if a re-operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the post-operation output sound will be changed after the re-operation is performed. The time until the output state ends can be treated as a fixed amount of time (instead of an indefinite amount of time), making it difficult to recognize whether it is a target of the auto continuous hit function and maintaining a sense of tension. However, unlike in the case of the second multiple operation valid state, periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in units of time less than or equal to the predetermined time. Through the length and shortness of periodic changes in the display of the simulated image, it can be expected that a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed by suitably indicating that the player is in a situation where the auto-repeating function is being activated.

[Configuration 33-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, an after-operation output according to the detection is made. It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image display that simulates the operation means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the display of the sample image is in the operation state, the output sound after the operation can be started. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which multiple operations are allowed and the output sound after the above operation can be output multiple times, and the sample image display is displayed so that periodic changes appear in the multiple operation valid state. In some cases, the periodic change is displayed in a time unit that is less than or equal to the predetermined time, and in other cases, the periodic change is displayed in a time unit that is longer than the predetermined time. As the multiple operation valid state, a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are prepared, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, the above-mentioned sample image display It is possible to play the game in such a way that a situation is created in which the target operating means is in a non-operating state and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. Further, in the first multiple operation valid state, the operation means that is the target of the display of the sample image can be displayed so that periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. The post-operation output sound corresponding to the above-mentioned detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the operation state, and in the second multiple-operation valid state, the periodic change of the sample image display is not longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. The display can be made so as to appear in units of time, and the output sound after the operation according to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the image display in the operation state. Therefore, it can be expected that the range of performances will be expanded, and that the interest in the game will be suitably maintained. Note that the "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", and "predetermined time" according to the configuration 33-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 33-A. It's just a name. Therefore, it may mean the same operation valid state or time as the “first multiple operation valid state”, “second multiple operation valid state”, and “predetermined time” in other configurations. , may also mean different operational enable states or times. In addition, it may mean another name for an operation valid state related to another configuration, an “operation valid state” that is the same as time, or “time”. Moreover, only one time may be prepared for each of the "time less than a predetermined time" and the "time longer than a predetermined time," or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, the multiple operation valid state is such that the output sound after the operation according to the above detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the sample image display in the operation state. In the first multiple operation valid state in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operating means that is the target of displaying the sample image is in a non-operating state. If the operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the operating means is in the operating state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound changes after entering the operating state. While the time until the end of the image is indefinite (not treated as a fixed time), the periodic change in the image display can be displayed in units of time less than or equal to the predetermined time. 2. In the multiple operation valid state, when the operating means that is the target of the display of the sample image is in the non-operating state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is in the output state, the operating means is operated from the non-operating state. state, the time from entering the operation state until the end of the output state of the output sound after the operation is treated as a constant time, and the time is not treated as a constant time and is indefinite. It may also be possible to set the time as the time of the following.

According to such a configuration, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound according to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the sample image display in the operation state. In the first multiple operation valid state, in which periodic changes in the image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operating means that is the object of displaying the image is changed from the non-operating state. Even if the player enters the operating state again, the time from when the operating state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is undefined, so it is difficult to recognize whether the player's operation has been properly accepted. It is expected that this will make it difficult to maintain a good sense of tension. On the other hand, in the second multiple operation valid state in which periodic changes in the image display can be displayed in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, the operating means that is the object of displaying the image is again in the operating state. By making the output sound after an operation in the output state not necessarily end after a certain period of time after being put into the operation state again, we made it possible to suggest the possibility that a new effect will appear after the operation state is activated again. It is now expected to maintain a suitable level of tension when doing so.

[Configuration 34-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, an after-operation output according to the detection is made. It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image display that simulates the operating means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the display of the sample image is in the operation state, the output sound after the operation can be started. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which multiple operations are allowed and the output sound after the above operation can be output multiple times, and the sample image display is displayed so that periodic changes appear in the multiple operation valid state. There are cases where the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in a time unit shorter than a predetermined time, and cases where the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, Among the multiple operation valid states, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which periodic changes in the display of the sample image are displayed in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, the operation that is the target of the display of the sample image When the means is maintained in the operating state, the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times in such a way that the interval until a new output sound is generated after the operation is set at a fixed time, which increases the enjoyment of the game. It is now expected to maintain a suitable level of performance. Note that the "predetermined time" related to the configuration 34-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 34-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time. Moreover, it may mean the same "time" as the time of another name related to other structures. Moreover, only one time may be prepared for each of the "time less than a predetermined time" and the "time longer than a predetermined time," or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation valid states, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, When the operating means that is the object of the image display is maintained in the operating state (the above-mentioned post-operation output sound may not be able to be output multiple times just by maintaining the operating state), the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is newly generated. The output sound after the above operation can be output multiple times with a fixed interval of time until it occurs, and the periodic change in the sample image display when the multiple operation is enabled is the same as above. In the multiple operation valid state of the type that is displayed in units of time longer than a predetermined time, when the operation means that is the target of the image display is maintained in the operation state, (the output sound after the operation is The output sound after the operation is not outputted multiple times with a fixed interval of time until the output sound is generated. ) If the above-mentioned post-operation output sound can be output multiple times with an indefinite interval before a new occurrence, and if the above-mentioned operation state is simply maintained, the above-mentioned post-operation output sound may be output multiple times. It may be possible to have both a case where the output is possible and a case where the output is not possible.

According to such a configuration, when the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in a time unit that is less than or equal to the predetermined time, it is preferably determined that the so-called auto continuous hit function is to be activated. In addition to what can be suggested, when the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled, an output sound is output after reception at a certain time interval, so the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled. It is also easier to remember the actual experience, and it is expected that players will be able to suitably maintain their interest in the game. On the other hand, if periodic changes in the sample image display appear in time units longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the so-called automatic continuous hit function may be activated. In addition to the fact that there are cases where it is not applicable, even if the so-called auto continuous tapping function is enabled, the output sound is only output after reception at irregular intervals, making it feel like the auto continuous tapping function is enabled. Since it is made difficult to recognize, one is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 35-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, an after-operation output according to the detection is made. It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image display that simulates the operation means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the display of the sample image is in the operation state, the output sound after the operation can be started. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which multiple operations are allowed and the output sound after the above operation can be output multiple times, and the sample image display is displayed so that periodic changes appear in the multiple operation valid state. There are cases where the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in a time unit shorter than a predetermined time, and cases where the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, Among the multiple operation valid states, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which periodic changes in the display of the sample image are displayed in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, the operation that is the target of the display of the sample image The post-operation output sound according to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the means in the operating state, and in this case, the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated must be a specified time or less. Therefore, when the periodic changes in the sample image display are relatively fast, ``in a situation where the output sound after operation can be output continuously at relatively short intervals simply by maintaining the operating means in the operating state''. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that the Note that the "predetermined time" and "specific time" related to the configuration 35-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 35-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" or "specific time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time. Moreover, it may mean the same "time" as the time of another name related to other structures. Also, only one time may be provided for each of "time less than a predetermined time", "time longer than a predetermined time", and "time less than a specific time", or multiple different times may be provided. You can leave it there.

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation valid states, in the ``multiple operation valid state of the type in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time equal to or shorter than the above-mentioned predetermined time'', The post-operation output sound according to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the image display in the operating state, and in that case, until the post-operation output sound is newly generated. The interval between the two images should always be less than or equal to the specified time period, whereas the periodic change in the image display should be enabled for multiple operations of the type that is displayed in a time unit longer than the predetermined time period. In the "state", there is a case where the operation means that is the object of the display of the sample image is maintained in the operating state, and the output sound after the operation according to the above detection can be generated multiple times, and a case where the operating state is maintained. There are cases in which the above-mentioned post-operation output sound cannot be output multiple times if only the above-mentioned operation state is maintained, but in a case where the post-operation output sound according to the above-mentioned detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state, The interval until a new output sound is generated after the operation may always be set to be longer than the specific time. According to such a configuration, when the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in a time unit that is less than or equal to the predetermined time, it is preferably determined that the so-called auto continuous hit function is to be activated. In addition to what can be suggested, when the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled, new output sounds are output one after another within a relatively short period of time, so the so-called auto-repeat function is It is easier to remember the feeling of being enabled, and it is expected that the player will maintain his/her interest in the game. On the other hand, if periodic changes in the sample image display appear in time units longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the so-called automatic continuous hit function may be activated. In addition to both cases where it is not applicable, even if the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled, the output sound will not be output after a new reception until a relatively long time has passed, and the auto continuous hit function will be activated. Since it becomes difficult to recognize the actual feeling of what is being done, one is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 36-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, an after-operation output according to the detection is made. It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image display that simulates the operating means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the display of the sample image is in the operation state, the output sound after the operation can be started. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which multiple operations are allowed and the output sound after the above operation can be output multiple times, and the sample image display is displayed so that periodic changes appear in the multiple operation valid state. There are cases where the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in a time unit shorter than a predetermined time, and cases where the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, Among the multiple operation valid states, in a type of multiple operation valid state in which periodic changes in the display of the sample image appear in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, the sample image is displayed in the multiple operation valid state. If the display is displayed so that periodic changes appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operation means that is the object of the display of the sample image is operated before the predetermined end timing arrives. Since the state can be terminated upon detection that the operating means is in the operating state, it is detected that the operating means is in the operating state through the length of time required for periodic changes in the image display. This can be used as an opportunity to suggest the possibility that the state in question may be terminated. Note that the "predetermined time" related to the configuration 36-A is only a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 36-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time. Moreover, it may mean the same "time" as the time of another name related to other configurations. Moreover, only one time may be prepared for each of the "time less than a predetermined time" and the "time longer than a predetermined time," or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of time equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time in the multi-operation enabled state, the predetermined end timing may be reached. The situation is such that a multiple-operation enabled state of a type that can be terminated by the detection that the operating means that is the target of the sample image display is in the operating state is occurring ( (Avoid the situation where a multiple operation valid state of the type that is not terminated occurs), and ensure that periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time in the multiple operation valid state. , the state can be ended when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the sample image display is in the operating state before the predetermined end timing arrives. A situation where a type of multiple operation valid state is occurring, and a situation where a type of multiple operation valid state is occurring where the state is not terminated when the operation state is detected. According to such a configuration, periodic changes in the sample image display may be displayed in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time in the multiple operation valid state. In the case where the operation means to be displayed as a sample image is detected to be in the operation state, it is possible to suitably suggest that the state is in a situation where the state can be terminated. If the periodic change in the sample image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time period in the operating state, it is necessary to detect that the operating means that is the target of the sample image display is in the operating state. It is difficult to recognize whether the state is in a situation where the state can be ended as a trigger, or whether the state is in a situation where the state cannot be ended in response to the detection that the operating means that is the subject of the display of the sample image is in the operating state. As a result, they are expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

[Configuration 37-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to execute post-operation changes in response to detection of the operation state. In this regard, the operation valid state is a state in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state, and the detection of the specific operating means being in the operating state is allowed multiple times. A multi-operation enabled state is provided in which changes can be executed multiple times. Among the multiple operation valid states, a predetermined type in which a post-operation change in response to detection of being in the operation state may not be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state; In the multiple operation valid state, the after-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operating means is in the operating state. In contrast, when a non-operation state is entered, a corresponding non-operation display will not be displayed. In a specific type of multiple operation valid state in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be executed multiple times in response to the detection that the specific operating means is in the operating state, the above-mentioned post-operation change may be performed based on the detection that the specific operating means is in the operating state. A post-operation display, which is one of the above, can be displayed, and when the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding non-operating display can be displayed, and In a specific type of multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is in a non-operation state, and the post-non-operation display is displayed in response to detection of the non-operation state, and the post-operation change is displayed. Since the situation in which the output sound remains in the output state after the above-mentioned operation can occur as a result of the game played by the player, the range of performance when the above-mentioned specific operation means is maintained in the operation state is expanded. As a result, it can be expected that the player's interest in playing games can be suitably maintained. In addition, "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state", and "specific type of multiple operation valid state" according to the configuration 37-A are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 37-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state", and "specific type of multiple operation valid state" refer to the same operation means or operation valid state. Alternatively, it may mean a different operating means or a valid operating state. Moreover, it may mean the same "operating means" or "operating valid state" as operating means or operational valid state of different names related to other configurations. In addition, "multiple operation valid state of a predetermined type" means that "the above-mentioned post-operation change can be performed multiple times in response to detection of the specific operation means being in the operation state simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state.""Multiple operation valid state in which there is no case", but it is possible to prepare multiple such multiple operation valid states with different occurrence conditions, or prepare only one. It's okay. Similarly, regarding the ``specific type of multiple operation valid state'', ``just by maintaining the above specific operation means in the operating state, it is possible to perform post-operation changes multiple times in response to the detection that the specific operation means is in the operating state''. ``A state in which multiple operations can be performed multiple times.'' However, multiple operations with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one may be prepared. .

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple operation valid state of the specific type, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state, and the post-non-operation display is displayed in response to the detection that the specific operation means has entered the non-operation state. and in a situation where the post-operation output sound of the post-operation change maintains the output state, when it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, the detection , the above-mentioned post-operation display that was in the display state until then changes, but the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then does not change and its output state changes. may be maintained. According to such a configuration, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state while the specific type of multiple operations is in the valid state, and the post-non-operation display is displayed in response to detection that the specific operation means is in the non-operation state. is displayed, and in a situation where the post-operation output sound of the post-operation change maintains its output state, if the player performs a second operation while the post-operation change is being executed, While some of the changes after the previous operation are continued, some changes are also made, so the expectation for the start of a new production is also improved. It will be possible to grant.

In addition, in the configuration 37-A, in both the predetermined type multiple operation valid state and the specific type multiple operation valid state, the only operation means that is allowed to be operated multiple times is the "specific operation means". Although this example assumes a case, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 38-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to execute post-operation changes in response to detection of the operation state. In this regard, the operation valid state is a state in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state, and the detection of the specific operating means being in the operating state is allowed multiple times. A multi-operation enabled state is provided in which changes can be executed multiple times. In the multiple operation valid state, the state is not terminated when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. In a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operating means is in the operating state. In order to avoid displaying a corresponding post-operation display when the state changes from an operation state to a non-operation state where no operation has been performed, it is necessary to In a specific type of multi-operation enabled state in which the state can be terminated upon detection that the specific operating means is in the operating state, the A post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed, and when the specific operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, a corresponding non-operated display can be displayed. In the above, in the multiple operation valid state of the specific type, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state, and a non-operation after display is displayed according to the detection that the specific operation means has entered the non-operation state, and after the operation Since a situation in which the output sound after the operation maintains the output state among the changes can occur as a result of the game played by the player, when the situation occurs, the specific operating means is in the operating state. It can be expected that the detection of this will suitably indicate that the situation is likely to be terminated. In addition, "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state", and "specific type of multiple operation valid state" according to the configuration 38-A are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 38-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state", and "specific type of multiple operation valid state" refer to the same operation means or operation valid state. Alternatively, it may mean a different operating means or a valid operating state. Moreover, it may mean the same "operating means" or "operating valid state" as operating means or operational valid state of different names related to other configurations. In addition, the "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state" refers to "the state triggered by the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives.""This is a multiple operation valid state that is never terminated." You may prepare multiple such multiple operation valid states with different occurrence conditions, or you may prepare only one. You can do it like this. Similarly, regarding the "specific type of multiple operation valid state", "the specific operating means is detected to be in the operating state before the predetermined end timing arrives, and This is a "multiple operation valid state in which the state can be terminated", but it is possible to prepare multiple such multiple operation valid states with different generation conditions, or prepare only one. You can.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple operation valid state of the specific type, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state, and the post-non-operation display is displayed in response to the detection that the specific operation means has entered the non-operation state. and in a situation where the post-operation output sound of the post-operation change maintains the output state, when it is detected that the specific operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, the detection , the above-mentioned non-operation display that was in the display state until then changes, but the above-mentioned post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then does not change and its output state changes. may be maintained. According to such a configuration, when the player performs a second operation while a post-operation change is being executed, a portion of the previous post-operation change is continued to be executed; Since some changes are made, it is possible to suitably create a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In addition, in the configuration 38-A, in both the predetermined type multiple operation valid state and the specific type multiple operation valid state, the only operation means that is allowed to be operated multiple times is the "specific operation means". Although this example assumes a case, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 39-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to execute post-operation changes in response to detection of the operation state. In this regard, the operation valid state is a state in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state, and the detection of the specific operating means being in the operating state is allowed multiple times. A multi-operation enabled state is provided in which changes can be executed multiple times. In the multiple operation valid state, when the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts outputting anew is a fixed time. In a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be performed multiple times in the form of Although the post-operation display can be displayed, the above-mentioned When the specific operating means is maintained in the operating state, the post-operation change occurs multiple times in such a way that the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts outputting again is an indefinite period of time. In the valid state of multiple operations of a specific type that is considered to be executable, the after-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, is only enabled to be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operating state. In addition, even when it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, a post-non-operation display can be displayed in accordance with the detection that the specific operating means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. In the multiple operation valid state of the specific type, the specific operation means is in a non-operation state, and the post-non-operation display is displayed in response to detection of the non-operation state; Since the situation in which the output sound after the operation maintains the output state among the changes after the operation can occur as a result of the game played by the player, the range of performance when the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state is increased. It can be expected that the game will become more widespread and that the interest in gaming will be suitably maintained. In addition, "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state", and "specific type of multiple operation valid state" according to the configuration 39-A are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 39-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state", and "specific type of multiple operation valid state" refer to the same operation means or operation valid state. Alternatively, it may mean a different operating means or a valid operating state. Moreover, it may mean the same "operating means" or "operating valid state" as operating means or operational valid state of different names related to other configurations. In addition, the "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state" refers to "the interval between when the specific operation means is maintained in the operating state and the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts outputting anew. A multiple operation valid state in which a change after an operation can be executed multiple times in a fixed period of time. Multiple operation valid states with different occurrence conditions are prepared as such multiple operation valid states. Alternatively, only one may be prepared. Similarly, regarding the ``specific type of multiple operation valid state'', ``when the specific operation means is maintained in the operating state, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes described above, will remain in effect until the output sound after the operation starts anew. "Multiple operation valid state in which changes after the operation can be executed multiple times with an undefined interval", but multiple operation valid states with different occurrence conditions are prepared as such multiple operation valid states. Alternatively, only one may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple operation valid state of the specific type, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state, and the post-non-operation display is displayed in response to the detection that the specific operation means has entered the non-operation state. and in a situation where the post-operation output sound of the post-operation change maintains the output state, when it is detected that the specific operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, the detection , the above-mentioned non-operation display that was in the display state until then changes, but the above-mentioned post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then does not change and its output state changes. may be maintained. According to such a configuration, when the player performs a second operation while a post-operation change is being executed, a portion of the previous post-operation change is continued to be executed; Since some changes are made, it is possible to suitably create a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In addition, in the configuration 39-A, in both the predetermined type multiple operation valid state and the specific type multiple operation valid state, the only operation means that is allowed to be operated multiple times is the "specific operation means". Although this example assumes a case, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 40-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, the operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. , it is possible to execute post-operation changes in response to detection of the operation state. In this regard, the operation valid state is a state in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operating means is in the operating state, and the detection of the specific operating means being in the operating state is allowed multiple times. A multi-operation enabled state is provided in which changes can be executed multiple times. In the multiple operation valid state, when the specific operating means is maintained in the operating state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts outputting anew is always less than a specific time. In a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be executed multiple times in the form of a time of , one of the above-mentioned post-operation changes is However, even if the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, it should be possible to display at least a corresponding non-operating display. On the other hand, when the specific operating means is maintained in the operating state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts outputting anew is always longer than the specific time. In a specific type of multiple operation valid state in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be performed multiple times, the post-operation display, which is one of the above-mentioned post-operation changes, is performed based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operating state. Not only can it be displayed, but also when it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, a post-non-operation display is displayed in response to the detection that the specific operating means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. In the multiple operation valid state of the specific type, the specific operation means is in a non-operation state, and the post-non-operation display is performed in response to detection that the specific operation means has entered the non-operation state. is displayed, and the post-operation output sound of the post-operation changes maintains the output state, which can occur as a result of the player playing the game. It can be expected that the range of performance will be expanded when the game is maintained, and that the interest in the game will be suitably maintained. The "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state", "specific type of multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" according to the configuration 40-A are the technology of the configuration 40-A. It is just a name used to explain an idea. Therefore, the same operation means or operation valid state as "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state", "specific type of multiple operation valid state", and "special time", according to other configurations, It may mean time, or it may mean a different operating means, operation effective state, or time. Moreover, it may mean the same "operation means", "operation effective state", and "time" as operating means, operation effective state, and time of different names related to other configurations. In addition, the "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state" refers to "the interval between when the specific operation means is maintained in the operating state and the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts outputting anew. This is a multiple operation valid state in which the above change after the operation can be executed multiple times with the time always being less than or equal to a specific time.However, as this multiple operation valid state, the conditions for occurrence are different. A plurality of them may be prepared, or only one may be prepared. Similarly, regarding the "specific type of multiple operation valid state", "when the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state, the post-operation output sound that is one of the post-operation changes starts outputting again". "a multiple operation valid state in which the change after the operation can be performed multiple times in such a way that the interval between the two times is always longer than the specific time," and such a multiple operation valid state includes: You may prepare a plurality of cases with different generation conditions, or you may prepare only one. In addition, "time less than a specific time" not only includes "a specific time," but also only one time is prepared for each of "a time longer than a specific time" and "a time less than a specific time." The time may be different, or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple operation valid state of the specific type, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state, and the post-non-operation display is displayed in response to the detection that the specific operation means has entered the non-operation state. and in a situation where the post-operation output sound of the post-operation change maintains the output state, when it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, the detection , the above-mentioned post-operation display that was in the display state until then changes, but the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then does not change and its output state changes. may be maintained. According to such a configuration, if the player performs a second operation while a post-operation change is being executed, a portion of the previous post-operation change is continued to be executed; Since some changes are made, it is possible to suitably create a feeling of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In addition, in the configuration 40-A, in both the predetermined type multiple operation valid state and the specific type multiple operation valid state, the only operation means that is allowed to be operated multiple times is the "specific operation means". Although this example assumes a case, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

By the way, in the above configurations 1-A to 40-A, there is one that states "suggestion that the performance is worth paying attention to" as an effect; It is not necessary to actually have sex. It can be expected that the player's interest in the game will be maintained simply by providing a performance that ``a valuable performance may be executed.''

[Other configurations]
Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance permissible period (operation permissible state) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit, an operation-related display related to the occurrence of the acceptance permissible period (e.g. , a mock image display that imitates the operation receiver, and an image that is displayed when the validity period occurs (ally characters, enemy characters, etc.), but for example, the periphery of the simulated image display is decorated It may also be displayed as an integrated image display (see FIG. 144) that is integrated with a peripheral decoration image. Regarding such integrated image display, there is a reception permissible period (operation permissible state) that occurs when the symbol production progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and a variation pattern that does not develop into SP reach as a result of advance judgment. It is desirable to display it in both the reception permissible period (operation permissible state) that occurs, and also in both the low expectation non-suppressing reception performance and the high expectation restraint reception performance. is desirable.

Note that such operation-related displays are as described with reference to FIGS. 144 and 145, or as another example or modification thereof, so the details are omitted, but for example, the peripheral decoration image A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided inside.
Further, as the operation-related display, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectations are prepared, and the display can be performed in any one of these modes. However, such a replica image display does not necessarily have to be displayed as an integrated replica image display that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an acceptance permissible period (operation permissible state) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit, operation-related sounds related to the occurrence of the acceptance permissible period are generated. (For example, an acceptance acceptance sound) may be output audibly, thereby making it difficult to forget to perform an operation. Here, "acceptance permissible sound" means that once the sound starts being output, the reception permissible period (reception period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while the sound data is being assigned). , a sound in which the acceptance period (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, the "acceptance permissible sound" is a sound that indicates that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception is permitted, and has no relation to the reception permissible period (reception period). It can also be said that this is a sound that would not be output under a situation where a performance without a sound is being performed.

By the way, as mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 1, the types (for example, conversation preview, cut-in notice, movable object notice, etc.) as changes after acceptance (for example, display after acceptance, output sound after acceptance, etc.) that appear when an acceptance is accepted. We provide multiple acceptance acceptance periods (operation acceptance states) with different acceptance periods (e.g.). Occurrence conditions are defined for each acceptance permissible period (operation permissible state), and when any one of these occurrence conditions is met, the acceptance permissible period (operation permissible state) of the type corresponding to the satisfied occurrence condition is set. It is possible for this to occur.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes a plurality of operation sections (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) as operation sections that are operated by the player. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, it is possible to generate a reception period (multiple operation permissible period) in which not only one operation section but several (multiple) operation sections are allowed to accept operations. It is said that However, this configuration is not an essential configuration.

Hereinafter, details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A" will be explained with reference to the drawings. However, when realizing these inventions, it is only necessary to appropriately select and partially provide only the configurations necessary to obtain the desired effect from each configuration described below, and it is not necessary to provide all of them. . For example, depending on the type (type of invention) of the problem to be solved (intended effect), there may not necessarily be an acceptance period (multiple operation permissible period) during which some (plural) operation units can be operated. It may be something that does not occur (an acceptance period in which only one operation unit is allowed to accept operations), or it may be something that does not have an operation unit that can accept multiple operations. , it may not be equipped with an operation section that allows only one operation reception, or it may not be equipped with an automatic button function or an automatic repeated press function. Further, for each of the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. 145, these may not necessarily be provided, or only the configurations necessary to obtain the desired effect from each configuration may be selected as appropriate. It may be partially provided. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A" when it is desired to obtain a further effect. It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configurations that do.

First, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "1st A reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 146 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when the "1st A reception permissible state" occurs based on "Condition 1A" being satisfied as the occurrence condition and the player performs an operation. It is. FIG. 147 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the "1st A acceptance permission state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect when the "first A acceptance permission state" occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "1st A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "1st A fluctuation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After that, start the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 1st A variation pattern, sound output according to the 1A variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "1st A variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 146(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "1st A variation pattern", timing tAa2 has arrived when the 1A time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative symbol SZ. (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 1A"), "Changes after 1A reception (1A production situation suggestion display JA1, 1A continuous hit display HA1, output sound after 1A reception SA1, SB1) The above-mentioned 1A reception permission state (valid period) in which operation reception on the 1A operation unit regarding ``reception of operations on the 1A operation section regarding ``regarding operations'' is allowed to occur (situation shown in FIG. 148(a)).

Here, the "1st A operating section" in which the operation is permitted in the 1st A reception permissible state according to this embodiment is set as the operation button 410, and the 1A reception permissible state is terminated. It is permissible to accept multiple operations until the process is completed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, as shown in FIGS. A mock image display MG-A1 imitating the "operation button 410" as the 1A operation section), a message display MA1 related to the operation on the operation target (here, the "operation button 410" as the 1A operation section), A situation suggestion display JA1 indicating the operation status is displayed when a timing tAa1 arrives before the corresponding 1A reception permission state occurs (before the operation reception for the 1A operation unit is permitted). It has become something to do.

However, the sample image display MG-A1, message display MA1, and situation suggestion display JA1 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 1st A reception permissible state occurs; It may be displayed at the same time as the event occurs or a little later than the event. In particular, the situation suggestion display JA1 may not be displayed until an operation is first accepted for the 1A operation section in the 1A acceptance permission state, that is, until an operation is first accepted for the 1A operation section. It may also be implemented as something that appears and is displayed based on the event. Furthermore, the timing at which the sample image display MG-A1 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA1 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, message display MA1 may be displayed before sample image display MG-A1 is displayed.

Regarding the sample image display MG-A1, message display MA1, and situation suggestion display JA1, after the display starts, regardless of the operation state of the 1A operation section, the 1A reception permission state is at least terminated. It is displayed continuously during the period.

Here, the "sample image display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1st A reception acceptance state has a "first color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" and a "second color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme. For example, a color scheme determined based on the result of performance determination etc. is used for display.

In addition, the "mock image display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1st A acceptance permission state is such that "after the simulated part of the operation receiving part" which is the operation target is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α), When one periodic change is a moving image that is sequentially displayed in each manner shown in FIGS. It is something that will appear. As will be explained later, this cycle 1A time is set as a shorter time (short cycle) than the cycle time used in many of the other acceptance acceptance states, so in the 1A acceptance acceptance state, "operation acceptance" is It depicts how the "section" quickly moves up and down its range of motion.

In addition, the 1A acceptance permission state originally continues until timing tAa3 arrives when there is no operation reception for the 1A operation unit, as shown in FIG. 147(b), and when timing tAa3 arrives. It shall be terminated based on the following. Therefore, while the 1A reception permission state continues, a gauge image (in this example, a gauge image (in this example, a gauge image in the sample image display MG-A1) indicating the remaining time until the timing tAa3 when the 1A reception permission state ends) Although the description is such that the number of images) decreases over time, this description may not necessarily be performed.

In addition, if the "sample image display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1st A acceptance acceptance state is started to be displayed before the timing tAa2 when the 1A acceptance acceptance state occurs, the periodic changes and changes in the gauge image It is desirable to start the process after waiting for the timing tAa2. That is, in this case, the "sample image display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1st A acceptance permission state is displayed while maintaining the mode shown in FIG. 144(α) until timing tAa2 arrives. becomes.

In addition, in the 1A acceptance acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 146(c), (d), and 148(a), in addition to the sample image display MG-A1, , the operation button 410) (here, the message display MA1 displayed as "Kill the bat! Button 'repeatedly hit'!!") is displayed.

In addition, in the 1A acceptance permission state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 146(e) and 148(a), a situation suggestion display JA1 indicating the operation status in the 1A acceptance permission state, An ally character (in this case, ally character YS-A1) corresponding to the type of the 1st A reception allowed state, and an enemy character (here depicted as a giant bat) according to the type of the 1st A reception allowed state. The enemy character BOSS-A1) and a gauge image HP-A1 showing its remaining HP gauge are displayed. In the 1st A acceptance acceptance state, "Whether or not the ally character YS-A1 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A1 by accepting multiple operations on the 1A operation section (the gauge image HP-A1 must be set to 0)" It is possible to suggest whether the expectation of winning the jackpot is high or low through the performance such as "whether the player can do it or not". Each time an operation (operation reception) is performed, an effect can be executed such that the "ally character YS-A1" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A1". In this example, the ally character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1 are displayed as the situation suggestion display JA1, but not all of these displays are necessarily displayed. However, as long as at least one of the ally character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation status.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 146, at timing tAa2-A1 within the 1A acceptance acceptance state (the production situation shown in FIG. 148(b)), the "1A operation section (here, the operation button 410)" It is assumed that the first operation is accepted.

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "1st A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-A1 within the 1A acceptance permission state, the first operation is accepted as shown in FIG. 146(f), As shown in FIG. 148(g), a "first A post-reception change (first A post-reception performance)" is generated in response to the operation reception (the performance situation shown in FIG. 148(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "1st A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-A1 within the 1A acceptance permission state, the process shown in FIG. 146(f), As shown in (g), as a change after receiving the first A, the "first A post-receiving output sound" corresponding to the operation received on the "first A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is audibly output. , the ``1st A post-reception display'' corresponding to the operation reception on the ``1st A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)'' starts to be displayed.

That is, when an operation is accepted once for the "1st A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 1st A reception allowed state, the "1A post-reception display" shown in FIG. 148(b) is displayed. As shown, one video is displayed in which "ally character YS-A1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice-based magic (smoke effect, generation of ice-based magic, etc.). It has become so. However, as will be explained later, in the 1st A acceptance acceptance state, based on the result of the performance judgment when the operation is accepted, the "enemy character BOSS-A1" may be injured, the strength of ice-based magic may be increased, or the gauge image may be There is a possibility that the remaining HP gauge of HP-A1 will decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance judgment, etc.). If the content of the production progresses in this way, then the state when the operation is accepted to the 1A operation section (here, "ally character YS-A1" is changed to "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice-based magic) 146(e), (f), FIG. 148(f), etc.). It should be noted that once the performance content has progressed in this way, as long as the first A acceptance acceptance state continues, the degree of progress of the performance content will not be returned to the state before the progress. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again to the 1A operation section after one video display that has changed to the advanced production content described above is completed, when an operation is accepted again at the 1A operation section. The mode (here, the mode in which "ally character YS-A1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice-based magic) can appear as a single video display that changes to the advanced production content. becomes. Each time the performance progresses, it may be suggested that there is a high possibility (expectation level) of winning the jackpot.

In addition, in this example, when an operation is accepted once for the "1A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 1A acceptance permission state, in addition to the above "1A post-reception display", the above As the "first A post-reception output sound", the first post-reception output sound SA1 can be output as shown in FIG. 146(g). Note that the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 according to this example is a mode in which the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice-based magic (smoke It functions as a sound effect corresponding to "effects, generation of ice-based magic, etc.". At this time, as will be described later, there is a possibility that the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 may be further output as the "first A post-acceptance output sound". The second post-reception output sound SB1 according to this example is output when the production content of the "1st A post-reception display" progresses. Note that here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 is realized to function as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect. , as long as it can indicate that the player has accepted the operation, and when the auto continuous hit function is enabled, it can indicate that the 1A operation section is maintained in the operated state. It is fine as long as it is something.

In this way, in the 1A acceptance permission state, each time an operation is accepted for the 1A operation unit (here, the operation button 410), the ally character YS-A1 changes to the enemy character BOSS-A1. In other words, the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A1" decreases due to multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A1" (the production content progresses). As a result, when the HP becomes 0, it means that the "enemy character BOSS-A1" has been defeated, and this provides a performance that suggests that the level of expectation is high. However, in this case, if the HP does not become 0 despite multiple attacks and the "enemy character BOSS-A1" cannot be defeated, it is suggested that the level of expectation is low.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 146(a), it is assumed that the operation by the player (operation state of the first A operation section) started at timing tAa2-A1 is continued until timing tAa2-A2. It has become.

In this respect, the 1st A reception permissible state is such that ``simply maintaining the operation section (1A operation section) in the operation state changes the reception after reception (for example, after reception display, after reception output sound, after reception light emission, etc.). ``Multiple operation enabled state'' is a type in which a function (e.g., post-acceptance action) is executed multiple times (a type in which the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 146(a), during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 (period in which the first A operating section is maintained in the operating state), no operation is accepted for the first A operating section. This is performed multiple times, and each time a post-acceptance change (for example, post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, post-acceptance accessory action, etc.) is executed in accordance with the operation acceptance.

Here, when an operation is accepted once for the 1A operation unit in the 1A acceptance permission state, the ally character YS-A1 is displayed as the display after the 1A acceptance, as shown in FIG. 148(b). As described above, the manner in which the enemy character BOSS-A1 is attacked with ice-based magic (smoke effect, occurrence of ice-based magic, etc.) is displayed (one video display). Therefore, from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 when the so-called auto-repeat function is activated, first, such "one video display" is played multiple times as many times as the number of operations accepted. becomes.

In addition, when an operation is accepted once for the 1A operation unit in the 1A acceptance permission state, the 1A post-acceptance output sound appears as the 1A post-acceptance display, and the ally character YS-A1 As described above, the sound effect is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to the manner in which the enemy character BOSS-A1 is attacked with ice-based magic (smoke effect, generation of ice-based magic, etc.). Therefore, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is activated, in addition to the above-mentioned "one video display", the sound effect corresponding to such "one video display" However, it will be played multiple times as many times as the number of operations accepted.

However, in the 1st A reception permissible state, if the operation unit (1A operation unit) is maintained in the operating state and the auto continuous hit function is enabled, the ally character YS-A1 uses ice-based magic to attack the enemy character BOSS-A1. The mode of attacking (one video display) and the sound effect corresponding to the "one video display" (output sound after 1A reception) change after the above reception for a certain period of time (a predetermined time). ), a new execution is started every time.

In addition, in the 1st A reception permission state, if the operation unit (1A operation unit) is maintained in the operating state and the auto continuous hit function is enabled, the ally character YS-A1 uses ice-based magic to attack the enemy character BOSS-A1. The mode of attacking (one video display) and the sound effect corresponding to the "one video display" (output sound after 1A reception) can be executed multiple times as the above-mentioned post-reception change, In this case, the interval until the change after reception starts anew in response to the above detection (the interval from the start of execution of the previous change after reception until the start of execution of the next change after reception) must be set. It is now considered to be a period of time that is less than or equal to a specific time.

That is, in this case, from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 146, "one video display" in which friendly character YS-A1 attacks enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice-based magic is displayed. The automatic continuous hit function causes a new execution to be started at fixed time intervals, and such repeated display of ``one video display'' is expressed as ``continuous hit display HA1a'' in the figure.

Similarly, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. The continuous hit function causes a new output to be started at regular intervals, and such repeated output of "sound effects" is expressed as "first post-acceptance output sound SA1a" in the figure.

In this regard, in the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. This assumes that there is no progress.

Therefore, within the period, the "situation suggestion display JA1" (see FIG. 146(e)) that suggests the operation status in the 1A acceptance permission state, or the ``situation suggestion display JA1'' (see FIG. The "second post-acceptance output sound (see FIG. 146(h))" does not change or start executing when the operation is accepted.

According to such a configuration, in the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 146, the "ice-based magic attack" and "smoke effect" shown in FIG. 148 are displayed. Although the mode in which the sound effect is output and the output of the corresponding sound effect are repeatedly executed at fixed time intervals by the auto continuous hit function (display during continuous hit HA1a, output sound SA1a after the first reception), the ``situation suggestion display'' JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))" will not change. As a result, it becomes possible to confirm that the performance content is the same as when the operation was performed or that the performance content has not progressed without performing monotonous repeated operations, so it is possible to suitably maintain the enjoyment of the game. becomes expected.

Regarding the "situation suggestion display JA1 (see Fig. 146(e))," at least one of the ally character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1 is displayed when the operation is accepted. It may be changed as follows. However, in this case, it is necessary to change the mode to a different mode from "the mode when the production content progresses", and the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 (1A operation section When the period during which the display is maintained in the operating state ends (when the operation is interrupted), this will be used as an opportunity to return to the "display mode before the operation". Furthermore, the "Situation Suggestion Display JA1" (see Figure 146(e)) such as the friendly character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1 will not be displayed until the operation is accepted. As mentioned above, it may be realized that it is not displayed, but that it appears and is displayed when the operation is accepted (until the validity period ends or only for a predetermined time). That's exactly what I did.

In addition, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2, a "situation suggestion display JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))" indicating the operation status in the 1A acceptance permission state, The "second output sound after reception (see Fig. 146 (h))" that indicates the operation status in the state does not change or start execution when the operation is accepted, so it does not change the production content. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that progress has not been made.

However, in a situation where the continuous hit display HA1a is executed by such an automatic repeated hit function (period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2), the continuous hit display is displayed as shown in FIG. 148(b). As HA1a, "the mode in which the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice-based magic (smoke effect, generation of ice-based magic, etc.)" appears repeatedly at regular intervals. Suggestion display JA1" may be made difficult to view or become inconspicuous, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the first A acceptance permission state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 146 and 148, the player operates the 1A operation section at timing tAa2-A2 in order to more actively check the operation status in the 1A acceptance permission state. This assumes the case where the automatic continuous hit function is disabled.

Here, in the 1A acceptance acceptance state, as shown in FIGS. 146(f) and 148(c), the operating state of the 1A operating section is temporarily interrupted (in a non-operating state Even if the auto continuous hit function is disabled, the continuous hit display HA1a, which had been in the execution state until then, will not be turned into a hidden state as a result of this. In other words, in this case, the continuous hit display HA1a is displayed even after the timing tAa2-A2 (even after the first A operation section becomes inactive), for example, when the above-mentioned "video display for one time" in the execution state is predetermined. The execution state continues for a predetermined period of time until the display is completed after being executed for the specified display time, or for a predetermined period of time from the non-operation state.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation state of the first A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (it is set to a non-operating state) and the automatic repeated tapping function is disabled, the repeated tapping display HA1a that was in the execution state until then is disabled. Since this is not immediately hidden, it will take some time before the operation status in the first A acceptance permission state becomes easy to recognize. This means that the remaining time in the 1A acceptance permission state is consumed significantly, so the operation state of the 1A operation section is temporarily interrupted to simplify the operation situation in the 1A reception permission state. It has come to be expected that the act of trying to confirm something will have a good sense of tension.

In addition, in this example, if the operation on the first A operation part is interrupted while the continuous hitting display HA1a is being displayed and it is put into the non-operating state, the continuous hitting display HA1a is changed to the non-operating state after the continuous hitting display HA1a is displayed. The time it takes to enter the state is not set as a constant time, but is set to be undefined.

According to such a configuration, how much time has to elapse from the time when the operation state of the first A operation section is temporarily interrupted (it is put into a non-operating state) and the automatic repeated hitting function is disabled? It becomes difficult to predict whether a situation will arise in which the display HA1a is hidden and the operation situation in the first A acceptance permission state is easy to recognize. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be spent remaining in the 1A acceptance acceptance state, so the operation state of the 1A operating section is temporarily interrupted and the 1A It is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably created in the act of more easily confirming the status of the operation in the reception-permitting state.

In addition, in the first A acceptance permission state, as shown in FIG. 146(g), the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a that has been in the execution state until then is also output at timing tAa2, similar to the continuous hit display HA1a. - In A2, when the operation state of the first A operation section is temporarily interrupted (it is put into a non-operation state) and the automatic repeated hit function is disabled, this will not be used as an opportunity to make it into an inaudible state. In other words, in this case, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a corresponds to the above-mentioned "one video display" that was in the execution state even after the timing tAa2-A2 (even after the first A operation section became inactive). The output state continues for a predetermined amount of time until the "sound effect" is executed for a predetermined output time and is output, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation state of the first A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (by setting it to a non-operation state) and the auto continuous hit function is disabled, the first reception that was in the execution state until then is disabled. The post-output sound SA1a is not immediately put into a non-output state, and in this case, it appears as if the auto-speech function is still effective, so it can be expected that the tension will be suitably maintained.

Further, in this example, if the operation on the first A operation section is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is being output and it is brought into the non-operation state, the first reception The time until the post-output sound SA1a is brought into a non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be undefined.

According to such a configuration, how much time has elapsed since the operation state of the first A operation section is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operation state) and the automatic repeated hit function is disabled? It becomes difficult to predict whether the output sound SA1a will be in a non-output state after the reception of , that is, whether it will be possible to confirm more reliably that the automatic repeated hit function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be spent remaining in the 1A acceptance acceptance state, so it is difficult to predict how much time will be spent in the 1A reception acceptance state, so it is difficult to predict how much time will be spent in the 1A reception permission state. It is now expected to create a suitable sense of tension.

Further, in the first A reception permissible state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the first A operation section is interrupted while the continuous hitting display HA1a and the first post-reception output sound SA1a are in the execution state (non- 146(f), (g), etc.), the timing at which the display HA1a during repeated hits is hidden and the output sound SA1a after the first reception is changed are as shown in FIGS. The timings at which the non-output state is made are different from each other. In the figure, the timing at which the continuous hit display HA1a is set to a hidden state is before the timing at which the output sound SA1a after the first reception is set to a non-output state, but the relationship is the opposite. You may set it so that Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state of non-display or non-output is indefinite, the timing at which the continuous hit display HA1a is set to the non-display state may be different from when the output sound SA1a after the first reception is non-displayed. There may be both cases in which the timing is before the timing at which the output state is made and cases in which the timing is in the output state and in which the timing is after the timing. Alternatively, the timings may be the same.

According to such a configuration, in the 1A acceptance permission state according to this embodiment, the operation state of the 1A operation section is determined while the continuous hitting display HA1a and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a are in the execution state. When the game is interrupted (when the game is set to the non-operating state), the first A operating section is set to the non-operating state, as shown in FIGS. 146(f), (g), and FIG. 148(c). In this situation, a situation appears in which the continuous hit display HA1a continues to be displayed and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a continues to be output. However, after this, due to the passage of time since the 1A operation section was put in the non-operation state, as shown in FIGS. 146(f) and (g) and FIG. The display HA1a is set to a non-display state, and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is set to a non-output state. As a result, the player can not only easily recognize that the auto-repeated hit function is disabled, but also the player's friendly character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image. The mode (here, mode JA1a) of the situation suggestion display JA1 that suggests the operating situation, such as HP-A1, can be easily recognized (see FIG. 148(d)).

However, as described above, in the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. This assumes that the content does not progress.

Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 148(d), the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA1 (here, the aspect Although JA1a) can be easily recognized, their appearance is the same as the state before operation (see Figure 148(a)), and as a result, the production content has not progressed. is suggested. In addition, regarding the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA1 that suggests the operation status such as the friendly character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1, it is possible to suggest that the production content is not progressing. However, it does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see FIG. 148(a)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 146(a), at timing tAa2-B1 within the 1A acceptance permission state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 148(e)), the ``1A operation section (here, It is assumed that the "operation button 410)" is put into the operating state again.

In this example, if the "1st A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is put into the operating state again at timing tAa2-B1 within the 1A acceptance acceptance state and the operation is accepted, this will be used as an opportunity to As shown in FIGS. 146(f) and (g), the "1st A post-reception change (1A post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception will occur again (as shown in FIG. 148(e)). performance situation).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "1st A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-B1 within the 1A acceptance permission state, the process shown in FIG. 146(f), As shown in (g), as a change after receiving the first A, the "first post-receiving output sound SA1 (one video worth of "Sound effect corresponding to the display)" is output audibly again, and "1A post-reception display (one video display)" in response to the operation reception on the "1A operation section (here, operation button 410)" will start displaying again.

In this example, it is assumed that even when the operation on the 1A operation unit is restarted at timing tAa2-B1 within the 1A acceptance acceptance state, the production content corresponding to the 1A acceptance acceptance state does not progress. It has become. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 148(e), the 1A post-reception change is the same as when the execution is first started based on the operation acceptance for the 1A operation unit at the timing tAa2-A1. In this manner, the first A post-acceptance changes (such as the first A post-acceptance display, the first A post-acceptance output sound, etc.) are started to be executed. Note that the details of the performance are as described above, so the explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 146 and 148, the operation by the player (operation state of the first A operation section) started at timing tAa2-B1 is maintained until timing tAa2-B3. This assumes the case where the auto continuous hit function is enabled.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 (the period during which the 1A operation section is maintained in the operating state again), the operation reception for the 1A operation section is performed multiple times by the automatic continuous tap function. , each time, post-acceptance changes corresponding to the operation acceptance (for example, post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, post-acceptance accessory action, etc.) are executed.

Then, even during the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 (the period during which the first A operation section is maintained in the operating state again), such changes after reception are executed multiple times by the auto continuous hit function. As for the state when the display (such as the display HA1a during repeated hits and the output sound SA1a after the first reception) is performed, the period from the timing tAa2-A1 to the timing tAa2-A2 described above will be the same unless the production content progresses. This is the same as the case (see FIG. 148(b)). Note that the details of the performance are as described above, so the explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 according to the example shown in FIG. This is based on the assumption that the presentation content corresponding to the first A acceptance permission state has progressed (the presentation situation shown in FIG. 148(f)).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B2 of the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 according to the example shown in FIG. 1A post-reception performance)" is executed with the content of the production not progressing, whereas in the period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3, the "1A post-reception change (first 1A (post-reception performance)" will be executed in a state in which the content of the performance has progressed.

More specifically, during the period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3, at "timing tAa2-B2", which is the timing at which the content of the production progresses, as shown in FIGS. 146(e) and 148(f), Based on the reception of the operation on the 1A operation unit, the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA1 that suggests the operation status is changed from the previously appearing “aspect JA1a” to a different “aspect JA1b”. The display changes are executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 148(f), the enemy character BOSS-A1 is changed to a wounded state, the ice-based magic by the ally character YS-A1 is changed to a state of higher strength, and the gauge image HP-A1 will be changed to a state in which the remaining HP gauge is reduced. According to such a configuration, through the change in the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA1, the performance content corresponding to the first A acceptance acceptance state is changed to the operation acceptance (by the auto continuous hit function) performed at timing tAa2-B2. Based on the result of performance judgment), it is suggested that progress has been made.

Then, after the production content has progressed in this way, when one operation reception is made to the 1A operation section, as shown in FIG. The content of the production progresses, such as ``Friendly character YS-A1 attacks injured enemy character BOSS-A1 using ice-based magic with increased strength.'' ``Video display'' will be displayed.

In this production example, after the production content has progressed, the degree of progress of the production content will not be returned to the state before the progress as long as the first A acceptance acceptance state continues. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again to the 1A operation section after one video display that has changed to the advanced production content described above is completed, when an operation is accepted again at the 1A operation section. The mode (here, the mode in which "ally character YS-A1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice-based magic) appears as a single video display that changes to the advanced performance content.

In other words, in this case, in the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is activated, during the period after timing tAa2-B2 when the production content has progressed, the " ``One video display'' will be played multiple times as many times as the number of operations accepted by the auto continuous hit function.

In addition, even in the period after the timing tAa2-B2 when the production content has progressed, the manner in which the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice-based magic (one video display) will change after the above reception. A new execution is started every fixed time (predetermined time). Therefore, the above-mentioned "one video display" in which the production content has progressed will also be started anew at a fixed time interval by the automatic continuous hit function, and the "one video display" in such a progress state In the figure, the repeated display is expressed as "continuous hit display HA1b".

In this manner, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, when "timing tAa2-B2", which is the timing at which the effect content is advanced, arrives, the effects shown in FIGS. 146(e), (f) and 148(e), As shown in (f), the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA1 changes from "Aspect JA1a" to "Aspect JA1b", and the aspect of continuous hitting display HA1 also changes from "Aspect HA1a" to "Aspect HA1b". That will happen. From then on, while the auto continuous hit function is enabled (timings tAa2-B2 to tAa2-B3), while the situation suggestion display JA1 is displayed as "Aspect JA1b", the continuous hit display HA1 is displayed as "Aspect JA1b". HA1b".

In this example, the mode of the continuous hit display HA1 is changed according to the progress of the performance content, but it may not be changed according to the progress of the performance content. In other words, even if the continuous hit display HA1 is configured to continue to be executed in the same mode regardless of the progress of the production content, the player can continue to execute the automatic continuous hit function through the continuous hit display HA1. It is possible to check the current situation and the number of times (frequency) that operations have been accepted, and it is also possible to check the degree of progress of the production content through the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA1.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is accepted once for the "1st A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 1A acceptance permission state, the above " In addition to the "1st A post-reception display", the first post-reception output sound can be output as the "1A post-reception output sound" as shown in FIG. 146(g). As such "first A post-reception output sound", in addition to the first post-reception output sound SA1 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display", there is also a first post-reception output sound SA1 as shown in FIG. 146(h). In addition, as described above, the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 indicating that the performance content corresponding to the first A acceptance permission state has progressed can be output.

Therefore, in the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 according to the example shown in FIG. Then, based on the operation acceptance (performance progress) at timing tAa2-B2, the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started in mode SB1b-1. As a result, the player can recognize that the production content has progressed through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 corresponding to the operation acceptance.

However, in this production example, the first post-reception output sound SA1, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display", is output in the same manner before and after the production content progresses. We are planning to realize this as follows. Therefore, when the timing tAa2-B2, which is the timing at which the production content progresses, arrives, based on the operation acceptance, the output of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 as a new "sound effect" is started. However, the manner is the same as when the operation is accepted before timing tAa2-B2 (the execution is different depending on whether or not the production progress occurs at timing tAa2-B2). (the aspects are the same).

In other words, in this case, over the entire period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is activated, the sound effect corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" (output after the first reception) The sound SA1) will be newly outputted in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeat function, and the repeated output of such a "sound effect" is referred to as the "output sound SA1a after the first reception" in the figure. ”. Note that the output mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a during this period is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned "period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2", so a description thereof will be omitted here. shall be.

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is not changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content, but may be changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content.

However, even in a situation where the continuous-hitting display HA1b is executed by such an automatic repeated-hitting function (period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3), as shown in FIG. As display HA1b, "A mode in which ally character YS-A1 attacks injured enemy character BOSS-A1 with high-strength ice-based magic (smoke effect, generation of ice-based magic, etc.)" is displayed for a certain period of time. Because it appears repeatedly every time, this may make the "situation suggestion display JA1" difficult to see or become inconspicuous, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the corresponding 1A acceptance acceptance state (this configuration is mandatory). (not).

In this regard, the production examples shown in FIGS. 146 and 148 are such that the player operates the 1A operation section at timing tAa2-B3 in order to more actively check the operation status in the 1A acceptance permission state. This assumes that the auto continuous hit function is disabled once again.

Here, as mentioned above, in the 1A acceptance acceptance state, while the 1A acceptance acceptance state continues, the operation state of the 1A operation section is interrupted (it is put into a non-operation state) and the auto continuous tap function is activated. Even if it is invalidated, the continuous hit display HA1 that has been in the execution state will not be turned into a hidden state as a result of this. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 146(f) and 148(g), even if the operating state of the first A operating section is temporarily interrupted at timing tAa2-B3, the continuous hitting display HA1b will be displayed after timing tAa2-B3. (even after the 1A operation unit becomes inactive), for example, until the above-mentioned "one video display" in the execution state is executed for a predetermined display time and is finished displaying. , or the execution state continues for a predetermined period of time from the non-operating state.

Also, as in the case of the continuous hit display HA1a, if you interrupt the operation on the 1A operation section and put it in the non-operational state while the continuous hit display HA1b is displayed, then change it to the non-operational state. The time until the continuous hit display HA1b goes into a non-display state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be undefined.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the 1A acceptance acceptance state, while the 1A acceptance acceptance state continues, the operation state of the 1A operation section is interrupted (it is set to a non-operation state) and the automatic repeated press function is disabled. Even if this happens, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a, which has been in the output state until then, will not be changed to the non-output state as a result of this. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 146(g) etc., even if the operation state of the first A operation section is temporarily interrupted at timing tAa2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a continues to ( (Even after the 1A operation section becomes non-operational), the above "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in the execution state is executed for a predetermined output time until it finishes outputting. The output state continues for a predetermined period of time or a predetermined period of time from the non-operating state.

However, at timing tAa2-B3 shown in FIG. 146, while the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 that started output at timing tAa2-B2 continues to be output, the operation state of the first A operation section This assumes that the service is interrupted.

In this regard, in the 1A acceptance permission state, the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 also indicates that the operation state of the 1A operation section is interrupted (into a non-operation state), similar to the first post-acceptance output sound SA1. The output state will not be terminated (made inaudible) by the fact that the output has been heard). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 146(h) etc., even if the operation state of the first A operation section is temporarily interrupted at timing tAa2-B3, the second post-acceptance output sound SB1b-1 will not be generated after timing tAa2-B3. (even after the 1st A operation section becomes non-operational), it is executed for a predetermined output time until it finishes outputting, or for a predetermined time after the non-operation state. The output state will continue.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the first A operation section is interrupted while the first post-reception output sound SA1 is being output and it is brought into a non-operating state, the first reception The time until the post-output sound SA1a is brought into a non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be undefined. Similarly, regarding the second post-acceptance output sound SB1, if the operation on the first A operation section is interrupted while the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is being output and it is brought into a non-operational state, The time from when the operation state is set until the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is set to a non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be undefined.

According to such a configuration, how much time has elapsed since the operation state of the first A operation section is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operation state) and the automatic repeated hit function is disabled? Predict whether the output sound SA1 after reception and the output sound SB1 after reception will become inaudible, that is, whether it will be possible to confirm more reliably that the auto continuous hit function has been disabled. It becomes difficult. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be spent remaining in the 1A acceptance acceptance state, so it is difficult to predict how much time will be spent in the 1A reception acceptance state, so it is difficult to predict how much time will be spent in the 1A reception permission state. It is now expected to create a suitable sense of tension.

Further, in the first A reception permissible state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the first A operation section is interrupted while the continuous hitting display HA1b and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a are in the execution state (non- 146(f) and (g), the timing at which the continuous hit display HA1b is hidden and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is changed. The timings at which the non-output state is made are different from each other. In the figure, the timing at which the continuous hit display HA1b is set to a hidden state is before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is set to a non-output state, but the relationship is the opposite. You may set it so that Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state of non-display or non-output is indefinite, the timing at which the continuous hit display HA1b is set to the non-display state may be different from when the output sound SA1a after the first reception is non-displayed. There may be both cases in which the timing is before the timing at which the output state is made and cases in which the timing is in the output state and in which the timing is after the timing. Alternatively, the timings may be the same. Regarding the relationship between the display HA1b during repeated hits and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a, there is a relationship between the display HA1b during continuous hits and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1, and the relationship between the display HA1b during continuous hits and the output sound SA1a after the first reception. and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1, and the same can be said of other examples.

According to such a configuration, in the first A acceptance acceptance state according to this embodiment, the continuous hitting display HA1b, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1b-1 are in the execution state, respectively. 146(f), (g), (h) or FIG. 148(g). As shown in FIG. 3, while the first A operating section is in the non-operating state, the continuous hitting display HA1b continues to be displayed, and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a continues to be output. Then, a situation appears in which the second post-acceptance output sound SB1b-1 continues to be output. However, after this, as time elapses after the first A operation section is put into the non-operational state (time elapses from timing tAa2-B3), as shown in FIG. 146(f) and FIG. 148(h), The continuous hit display HA1b is now hidden. As a result, the player can not only easily recognize that the auto-repeated hit function is disabled, but also the player's friendly character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image. It becomes possible to easily recognize the mode of the situation suggestion display JA1, such as HP-A1, which suggests the operating situation (here, the mode JA1b in which the presentation content has progressed) (see FIG. 148(h)).

In addition, originally, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 are also output based on the time elapsed since the first A operation section was put in the non-operational state (time elapsed from timing tAa2-B3). ), each continued output state is terminated (made inaudible).

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 146(a), the timing is after the timing tAa2-B3 when the first A operation section is put into the non-operation state, and the output sound SA1a after the first reception and the output sound SA1a after the second reception are At timing tAa2-C1 (presentation situation shown in FIG. 148(i)) when all output sounds SB1 are in the audible state (before the output state is ended), the first A operating section is put into the operating state again. I am assuming the case.

In this example, even if the "1st A operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is put into the operating state again at the timing tAa2-C1 within the 1A acceptance acceptance state and the operation is accepted, the above-mentioned timing tAa2-C1 As in the case of B1, using this as a trigger, as shown in FIGS. 146(f) and (g), the "1st A post-reception change (1st A post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception is caused again. (The presentation situation shown in FIG. 148(i)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "1st A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-C1 within the 1A acceptance permission state, the process shown in FIG. 146(f), As shown in (g), as a change after receiving the first A, the "first post-receiving output sound SA1 (one video worth of "Sound effect corresponding to the display)" is output audibly again, and "1A post-reception display (one video display)" in response to the operation reception on the "1A operation section (here, operation button 410)" will start displaying again.

In this example, when the operation on the 1A operation unit is restarted at timing tAa2-C1 within the 1A reception permission state, the performance content corresponding to the 1A reception permission state is shown in FIG. 148(h). This is based on the assumption that the situation does not progress from the state (the progress state of the first stage). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 148(i), the 1A post-reception change is the same as when the execution of the 1A post-reception change is started for the first time based on the operation reception for the 1A operation unit at the timing tAa-B2. In this manner, the first A post-acceptance changes (such as the first A post-acceptance display, the first A post-acceptance output sound, etc.) are started to be executed. Note that the details of the performance are as described above, so the explanation will be omitted here.

However, as described above, in this example, at the timing tAa2-C1 when the operation on the first A operation unit is restarted, both the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 are in an audible state. This is based on the assumption that the country will arrive in the middle of the country.

In this regard, regarding the first post-acceptance output sound SA1, the previous output state is terminated based on the fact that the operation on the first A operation section has been started again (the operation has been accepted) at timing tAa2-C1. At the same time, new output is started in response to the reception of the new operation. On the other hand, regarding the second post-acceptance output sound SB1, some change may be caused based on the fact that the operation on the first A operation section has been started again (the operation has been accepted) at timing tAa2-C1. There is no output, so the previous output state is continued.

According to such a configuration, in the 1A acceptance acceptance state, while the 1A post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance is being output, the 1A operation unit that has been in the non-operation state until then is When an operation is accepted, this triggers both the case where the 1A post-acceptance output sound is terminated (first post-acceptance output sound SA1) and the case where it is not terminated (second post-acceptance output sound SB1). Therefore, it is possible to suitably provide a feeling of tension when the first A operating section, which has been in a non-operating state, is brought into an operating state again.

Note that the continuous hit display HA1 may also be configured such that the display state may be continued at timing tAa2-C1. In this case, regarding the continuous hit display HA1, when an operation is accepted for the 1A operation unit that was previously inactive, the previous "one video display" that was in the middle of execution will be displayed. It is desirable to terminate the process midway and instead start a new display (one video display) triggered by the acceptance of the new operation.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 146 and 148, the operation by the player (operation state of the first A operation section) started at timing tAa2-C1 is maintained until timing tAa2-C2 and is automatically executed. This assumes the case where the continuous hit function is enabled.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 (the period during which the 1A operation section is maintained in the operating state again), the operation reception for the 1A operation section is performed multiple times by the automatic continuous tap function. , each time, post-acceptance changes corresponding to the operation acceptance (for example, post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, post-acceptance accessory action, etc.) are executed.

Then, during the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 (the period during which the first A operation section is maintained in the operating state again), such changes after reception are executed multiple times by the auto continuous hit function. Regarding the state when the display is played (such as the display HA1b during repeated hits and the output sound SA1a after the first reception), unless there is further progress in the production content, the above-mentioned "from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3" will be used. This is the same as in the case of ``period'' (see FIG. 148(f)). Note that the details of the performance are as described above, so the explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 according to the example shown in FIG. This is based on the assumption that the performance content corresponding to the 1A reception acceptance state has further progressed based on the performance judgment results (results of performance judgment, etc.) (when the second stage has progressed) (Fig. 148(j) ). In particular, timing tAa2-C2 according to this example assumes that the production mode has progressed to the final stage of the production content corresponding to the 1A reception acceptance state, and is It is also assumed that the process is terminated when the operation is accepted at the timing tAa2-C2 (see FIG. 146(a) and FIG. 148(j)).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 according to the example shown in FIG. On the other hand, from timing tAa2-C2 onwards, the operation is not allowed to be accepted on the first A operation section, and the 1A post-reception change (1A post-reception performance)" will be executed in a manner in which the performance content is further advanced (final stage performance mode) (see FIG. 148(j)).

More specifically, at timing tAa2-C2, as shown in FIGS. 146(e) and 148(j), a situation suggestion display JA1 indicating the operating situation is displayed based on the operation acceptance for the first A operating section. A display change is executed to change the aspect of ``aspect JA1b'' that has appeared up to that point to a different ``aspect JA1c''. Here, as shown in FIG. 148(j), the enemy character BOSS-A1 is changed to a defeated state, and the ice-based magic by the ally character YS-A1 is exploding around the enemy character BOSS-A1. As a result, the gauge image HP-A1 is changed to a state in which the remaining HP gauge is further decreased (here, "0"). According to such a configuration, through such a change in the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA1, the performance content corresponding to the first A acceptance acceptance state is changed to the operation acceptance (by the auto continuous hit function) performed at timing tAa2-C2. Based on the result of performance judgment), it is suggested that progress has been made.

However, as mentioned above, the "mode JA1c" as the situation suggestion display JA1 corresponds to the "final stage production mode" of the production contents corresponding to the 1A acceptance acceptance state, and This only appears when the 1A acceptance permission state is terminated with the acceptance of an operation as a trigger. Therefore, after the execution of "aspect JA1c" as the situation suggestion display JA1 is started based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAa2-C1, regardless of whether or not there is an operation by the player within the execution period, It is executed for a predetermined time and then becomes hidden. Here, we have only prepared "mode JA1c" as the final stage production mode of situational suggestion display JA1, but we have prepared multiple modes with different expectations of winning the jackpot, and It may also be possible to selectively cause a mode to appear depending on the performance determination result.

Furthermore, when the operation is accepted at timing tAa2-C2, the auto-repeat function that had been enabled until then will be disabled as the 1A acceptance permission state is terminated. . In this regard, when the auto continuous hit function is disabled at timing tAa2-A2 or timing tAa2-B3, the continuous hit display HA1, which had been displayed due to the auto continuous hit function, is now hidden. However, when the auto continuous hit function is disabled at timing tAa2-C2, Using this as an opportunity, the continuous-hitting display HA1, which had been in a display state due to the automatic repeated-hitting function until now, is set to a non-displaying state (at a certain time (for example, 0 seconds) from the time when the operation is accepted).

In addition, in this example, when the auto continuous hit function is disabled at timing tAa2-A2 or timing tAa2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a that had been in the output state by the auto continuous hit function until then is disabled. Although it was made so that it would not become inaudible as a trigger (it was made to become inaudible for an undetermined amount of time after the automatic repeated tapping function was disabled), the automatic repeated tapping function was disabled at timing tAa2-C2. When it is disabled, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a, which had been in the output state due to the automatic continuous hit function, is made inaudible (for a certain period of time from the time the operation is accepted) using this as a trigger. That's what I do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to indicate whether or not the 1st A reception permissible state has ended through the output status of the first post-reception output sound SA1a after the automatic repeated hit function is disabled. Become.

However, regarding the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a, when the auto continuous hit function is disabled at timing tAa2-C2, this becomes an opportunity for the output sound SA1a to become inaudible (for a certain period of time from the time the operation is accepted). It may be possible to have both a case where the signal is set to the inaudible state and a case where the signal is not set to the inaudible state. For example, when the expectation level is high that a jackpot has been obtained, the state is made inaudible, but when the expectation level is low that a jackpot is obtained, it is not set to the inaudible state, so that the final state does not appear. Coupled with the fact that it is not made inaudible at timing tAa2-A2 (which cannot suggest high expectations) and timing tAa2-B3, the output sound after the first reception after the auto continuous hit function is disabled. Through the output status of SA1a, it becomes possible to suggest the degree of expectation that a jackpot has been achieved.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the first post-acceptance output sound SA1, as the first A post-acceptance output sound in response to the operation acceptance, as shown in FIG. 146(h), , it is possible to output a second post-acceptance output sound SB1 that suggests that the performance content corresponding to the first A acceptance permission state has progressed.

Therefore, in the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 according to the example shown in FIG. Then, based on the operation acceptance (performance progress) at timing tAa2-C2, the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started in mode SB1b-2. Thereby, the player can recognize the degree of progress of the production content through the output mode of the output sound after acceptance. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 corresponding to the operation acceptance.

Note that in this example, it is assumed that the timing tAa2-C2 arrives after the second post-acceptance output sound SB1b-1 that started outputting at the timing tAa2-B2 has become inaudible. It may be arranged that the output sound SB1b-1 may arrive while the output sound SB1b-1 is being audibly output. In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 changes from "Aspect SB1b-1" to a different "Aspect SB1b-2" at timing tAa2-C2 (by ending Aspect SB1b-1). , aspect SB1b-2) may be output in an alternative form.

Furthermore, as described above, the 1A reception permission state originally continues until timing tAa3 arrives when there is no operation reception for the 1A operation unit, as shown in FIG. 147(b). It is terminated based on what has arrived. In this respect, the first A acceptance acceptance state occurs as an acceptance acceptance state in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 147, if an operation is not accepted for the 1A operation section until timing tAa3 arrives in the 1A reception permission state, the 1A reception permission state is determined based on the arrival of timing tAa3. Not only is the state terminated, but as a change after the 1A reception that appears when an operation is performed on the 1A operation section, the final stage production mode ( 147(e), (h), FIG. 148(j), etc.) will start to be executed.

Note that the first A acceptance acceptance state may be generated as an acceptance acceptance state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. That is, in this case, the 1A acceptance permission state is only terminated based on the arrival of timing tAa3, and the execution of the 1A post-acceptance change that appears when an operation is performed on the 1A operation unit is started. There will be no more.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "2nd A reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 149 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when the "2nd A acceptance permission state" occurs based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 2A" being satisfied and the player performs an operation. It is. FIG. 150 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation contents when the "2nd A acceptance permission state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 151 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect when the "2nd A acceptance permission state" occurs.

Now, suppose that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "2nd A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "2nd A fluctuation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After that, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the 2nd A fluctuation pattern, sound output according to the 2nd A fluctuation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)) is started, Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (advancement performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "2nd A variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 149(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "2nd A variation pattern", timing tAb2 has arrived when the 2nd A time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ. (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 2A"), "Changes after 2nd A reception (2nd A production situation suggestion display JA2, 2nd A continuous hit display HA2, 2nd A output sound after reception SA2, SB2) The above-mentioned 2A acceptance permission state (validity period) in which the 2A reception permission state (validity period) is allowed to occur is possible (the situation shown in FIG. 151(a)).

Here, in the 2nd A reception permissible state according to this embodiment, the "2nd A operation unit" in which operation reception is permitted is set as the same operating means (operation button 410) as in the above 1A reception permissible state. Therefore, multiple operation receptions are allowed until the second A reception permission state is ended. However, the second A operation unit may be set as a different operation means from the first A acceptance permission state.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, as shown in FIGS. A simulated image display MG-A2 imitating the "operation button 410" as the 2A operation section; a message display MA2 related to the operation on the operation target (here, the "operation button 410" as the 2A operation section); A situation suggestion display JA2 indicating the operation status is displayed at timing tAb1 before the occurrence of the relevant 2A acceptance permission state (before the operation acceptance for the 2A operation unit is allowed). It has become something to do.

However, the sample image display MG-A2, the message display MA2, and the situation suggestion display JA2 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 2A reception permission state occurs, and the 2A reception permission state does not necessarily have to be displayed before the 2A reception permission state occurs. It may be displayed at the same time as the event occurs or a little later than the event. In particular, the situation suggestion display JA2 may not be displayed until an operation is first accepted for the 2A operation section in the 2A acceptance permission state, that is, until an operation is first accepted for the 2A operation section. It may also be implemented as something that appears and is displayed based on the event. Further, the timing at which the sample image display MG-A2 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA2 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, message display MA2 may be displayed before sample image display MG-A2 is displayed.

Regarding the sample image display MG-A2, message display MA2, and situation suggestion display JA2, after the display starts, regardless of the operating state of the 2A operation section, the corresponding 2A reception permission state is terminated at least. It is displayed continuously during the period.

Here, the "sample image display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2A acceptance acceptance state has a "first color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" and a "second color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme. For example, a color scheme determined based on the result of performance determination etc. is used for display. However, these color schemes may be different from the above-mentioned 1A acceptance permission state.

In addition, "Make image display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2nd A acceptance permission state is such that "After the part that simulates the operation receiving part" which is the operation target is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α), When one periodic change is a moving image that is sequentially displayed in each manner shown in FIGS. It is something that will appear. However, since this period 2A time is set as a longer time (long cycle) than the period 1A time that appears in the 1A reception permission state, the 2A reception permission state is different from the above-mentioned 1A reception permission state. In comparison, the "operation receiver" is depicted moving slowly up and down its movable range.

In addition, the 2nd A acceptance permission state is originally as shown in FIG. 150(b), when no operation is received for the 2nd A operation unit, it continues until timing tAb3 arrives, and when timing tAb3 arrives. It shall be terminated based on the following. Therefore, while the 2A reception permission state continues, a gauge image (in this example, a gauge image in the sample image display MG-A2) indicating the remaining time until the timing tAb3 when the 2A reception permission state ends arrives. Although the description is such that the number of images) decreases over time, this description may not necessarily be performed.

In addition, if the "sample image display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2nd A acceptance permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tAb2 at which the 2A reception permission state occurs, the periodic changes and the changes in the gauge image. It is desirable to start after waiting for the timing tAb2. That is, in this case, the "sample image display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2A acceptance permission state is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) until timing tAb2 arrives. becomes.

In addition, in the 2A acceptance acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. , the operation button 410) (in this case, a message display MA2 displayed as "Defeat the Tiger! Button "Continuous Hit"!!") is displayed.

In addition, in the 2A acceptance acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 149(e) and 151(a), a situation suggestion display JA2 indicating the operation status in the 2A acceptance acceptance state, An ally character (in this case, ally character YS-A2) that corresponds to the type of the 2nd A reception allowed state, and an enemy character (here, the enemy depicted as a tiger) that corresponds to the type of the 2nd A reception allowed state. The character BOSS-A2) and a gauge image HP-A2 showing its remaining HP gauge are displayed. In the 2nd A acceptance permission state, "Whether or not the ally character YS-A2 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A2 by accepting multiple operations on the 2nd A operation section (the gauge image HP-A2 must be set to 0)" It is possible to suggest whether the expectation level of winning the jackpot is high or low through the performance such as "whether the player can hit the jackpot or not". Each time an operation (operation reception) is performed, an effect can be executed such that the "ally character YS-A2" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A2". In this example, the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2 are displayed as the situation suggestion display JA2, but not all of these displays are necessarily displayed. However, as long as at least one of the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation status. Note that the ally character YS-A2 may be displayed in a different image display from the ally character YS-A1 that appears in the first A acceptance acceptance state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 149, at timing tAb2-A1 within the 2A acceptance permission state (the production situation shown in FIG. 151(b)), the "2A operation section (here, the operation button 410)" It is assumed that the first operation is accepted.

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "2nd A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-A1 within the 2A acceptance permission state, as shown in FIG. 149(f), As shown in (g), a "2nd A post-reception change (2nd A post-reception performance)" is generated in response to the operation reception (the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "2nd A operating section (here, the operating button 410)" at timing tAb2-A1 within the 2nd A acceptance acceptance state, the process shown in FIG. 149(f), As shown in (g), as a change after receiving the second A, the "output sound after receiving the second A" corresponding to the operation received on the "second A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is audibly output. , the ``2nd A post-reception display'' corresponding to the operation reception on the ``2nd A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)'' starts to be displayed.

That is, when an operation is accepted once for the "2nd A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 2nd A acceptance permission state, the "2nd A post-reception display" is displayed as shown in FIG. 151(b). As shown, one video is displayed in which "ally character YS-A2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire-based magic (smoke effect, fire-based magic generation, etc.). It has become so. However, as will be explained later, in the 2nd A reception acceptance state, based on the result of the performance judgment when the operation reception is made, the "enemy character BOSS-A2" may be injured, the strength of fire magic may increase, or the gauge image There is a possibility that the remaining HP gauge of HP-A2 will decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance judgment etc.). If the content of the production progresses in this way, then the state when the operation reception is made to the 2A operation section (here, "ally character YS-A2" uses fire-based magic to "enemy character BOSS-A2") 149(e), (f), FIG. 151(e), etc.). It should be noted that once the performance content has progressed in this manner, as long as the second A acceptance acceptance state continues, the degree of progress of the performance content will not be returned to the state before the progress. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again to the 2A operation section after one video display that has changed to the advanced production content described above is completed, when an operation is accepted again at the 2A operation section. The mode (here, the mode in which "ally character YS-A2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire-based magic) can appear as a single video display that changes to the advanced production content. becomes. Each time the performance progresses, it may be suggested that there is a high possibility (expectation level) of winning the jackpot.

In this example, when an operation is accepted once for the "2nd A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 2A acceptance permission state, in addition to the above "2A post-reception display", the above As the "second A post-reception output sound", the first post-reception output sound SA2 may be output as shown in FIG. 149(g). Note that the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 according to this example is a mode in which the ally character YS-A2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire-based magic (smoke), which appears as the "2nd A post-acceptance display" above. effect, generation of fire-based magic, etc.), and is different from the above-mentioned "first post-acceptance output sound SA1". At this time, as will be described later, there is a possibility that the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 may be further output as the "second A post-acceptance output sound". The second post-reception output sound SB2 according to this example is output when the production content of the "2nd A post-reception display" progresses. Note that here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 is realized to function as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect. , any information that can indicate that the player has accepted the operation is sufficient, and can indicate that the second A operation section is being maintained in an operating state when the auto continuous hit function is enabled. It is fine as long as it is something.

In this way, in the 2nd A acceptance acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted for the 2nd A operation unit (here, the operation button 410), the ally character YS-A2 changes to the enemy character BOSS-A2. In other words, the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A2" decreases due to multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A2" (as the production progresses). As a result, when the HP becomes 0, it means that the "enemy character BOSS-A2" has been defeated, and this provides a performance that suggests that the level of expectation is high. However, in this case, if the HP does not become 0 despite multiple attacks and the "enemy character BOSS-A2" cannot be defeated, it is suggested that the level of expectation is low.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 149(a), it is assumed that the operation by the player (operation state of the second A operation section) started at timing tAb2-A1 is continued until timing tAb2-A2. It has become.

In this respect, the 2nd A reception permissible state is defined as ``just by maintaining the operation part (2nd A operation part) in the operation state, changes after reception (for example, display after reception, output sound after reception, light emission after reception, etc.) It is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state" in which a function (e.g., post-acceptance action) is executed multiple times (a type in which the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 149(a), during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 (period in which the second A operating section is maintained in the operating state), no operation is accepted for the second A operating section. This is performed multiple times, and each time a post-acceptance change (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance accessory action, etc.) is executed in accordance with the operation acceptance.

Here, when an operation is accepted once for the 2A operation unit in the 2A acceptance permission state, the ally character YS-A2 is displayed as the display after the 2A acceptance, as shown in FIG. 151(b). As described above, the manner in which the enemy character BOSS-A2 is attacked with fire-based magic (smoke effect, generation of fire-based magic, etc.) is displayed (one video display). Therefore, from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 when the so-called auto-repeat function is activated, first, such "one video display" is played multiple times for the number of times the operation is accepted. becomes.

In addition, when an operation is accepted once for the 2A operation unit in the 2A acceptance permission state, the 2A post-acceptance output sound appears as the 2A post-acceptance display, and the ally character YS-A2 As described above, the sound effect is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to the manner in which the enemy character BOSS-A2 is attacked with fire-based magic (smoke effect, generation of fire-based magic, etc.). Therefore, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is activated, in addition to the above-mentioned "one video display", the sound effect corresponding to such "one video display" However, it will be played multiple times for the number of times the operation is accepted.

However, in the 2nd A reception permissible state, if the operation part (2nd A operation part) is maintained in the operation state and the auto continuous hit function is enabled, such changes after reception (one video display, sound effect ( (2A output sound after reception) etc.) are executed multiple times, but their execution interval (interval from the start of execution of the previous change after reception to the start of execution of the next change after reception) is indefinite. (a non-predetermined time).

In addition, in the 2nd A reception permission state, if the operation part (2nd A operation part) is maintained in the operating state and the auto continuous hit function is enabled, the ally character YS-A2 uses fire-based magic to attack the enemy character BOSS-A2. The mode of attacking (one video display) and the sound effect corresponding to the "one video display" (output sound after 2nd A reception) can be executed multiple times as the above-mentioned post-reception change, In this case, the interval until the change after reception starts anew in response to the above detection (the interval from the start of execution of the previous change after reception until the start of execution of the next change after reception) must be set. The time is set to be longer than the above-mentioned specific time (the time used in the 1st A acceptance permission state and the 3A acceptance permission state).

That is, in this case, from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 149, "one video display" in which friendly character YS-A2 attacks enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire-based magic is displayed. The automatic continuous hit function causes a new execution to be started at irregular intervals, and such repeated display of ``one video display'' is expressed as ``continuous hit display HA2a'' in the figure.

Similarly, in the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. The continuous hit function causes a new output to be started at irregular intervals, and such repeated output of "sound effects" is expressed as "first post-acceptance output sound SA2a" in the figure.

In this regard, in the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. This assumes that there is no progress.

Therefore, within the period, the "situation suggestion display JA2" (see FIG. 149(e)) that suggests the operation status in the 2A acceptance permission state, or the ``situation suggestion display JA2'' that suggests the operation status in the 2A acceptance permission state The "second output sound after reception (see FIG. 149(h))" does not change or start executing (in a manner in which the performance progresses) in response to the reception of the operation.

According to such a configuration, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 149, the "flame-based magic attack" and "smoke effect" shown in FIG. 151 are displayed. Although the automatic repeated hitting function and the output of the corresponding sound effects are executed repeatedly at irregular intervals (repeated hitting display HA2a, output sound SA2a after first reception), the "situation suggestion display" JA2 (see FIG. 149(e))" will not change. As a result, by simply maintaining the operating state, it becomes possible to check the production contents in response to multiple operation receptions or whether the production contents have not progressed, so that the game interest can be suitably maintained. becomes expected.

Regarding the "situation suggestion display JA2 (see Fig. 149(e))", at least one of the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2 is displayed when the operation is accepted. It may be changed as follows. However, in this case, it is necessary to change the mode to a different mode from "the mode when the production content progresses", and the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 (2A operation section When the period during which the display is maintained in the operating state ends (when the operation is interrupted), this will be used as an opportunity to return to the "display mode before the operation". Furthermore, the "Situation Suggestion Display JA2" (see Figure 149(e)) such as the friendly character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2 will not be displayed until the operation is accepted. As mentioned above, it may be realized that it is not displayed, but that it appears and is displayed when the operation is accepted (until the validity period ends or only for a predetermined time). That's exactly what I did.

In addition, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2, a "situation suggestion display JA2 (see FIG. 149(e))" that indicates the operation status in the 2A reception permission state, and a 2A reception permission permission state are displayed. The "second output sound after reception (see Fig. 149 (h))" that indicates the operation status in the state does not change or start execution when the operation is accepted, so it does not change the production content. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that progress has not been made.

However, in a situation where the continuous hitting display HA2a is executed by such an automatic repeated hitting function (period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2), as shown in FIG. 151(b), the continuous hitting display HA2a is As HA2a, "the mode in which the ally character YS-A2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire-based magic (smoke effect, generation of fire-based magic, etc.)" appears repeatedly at irregular intervals, so this "situation Suggestion display JA2" may be made difficult to view or become inconspicuous, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the second A acceptance permission state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the production examples shown in FIGS. 149 and 151 are such that the player operates the second A operation section at timing tAb2-A2 in order to more actively check the operation status in the second A acceptance permission state. This assumes the case where the automatic continuous hit function is disabled.

Here, in the second A acceptance acceptance state, as shown in FIG. 149(f) and FIG. ) When the automatic continuous hit function is disabled, the continuous hit display HA2a, which had been in the execution state until then, is turned into a non-display state using this as a trigger. That is, in this case, the execution state of the continuous-hitting display HA2a is terminated when the timing tAb2-A2 has arrived (when the second A operation section is put in the non-operating state).

According to such a configuration, when the operation state of the second A operation section is temporarily interrupted (it is put into a non-operating state) and the automatic repeated tapping function is disabled, the repeated tapping display HA2a, which had been in the execution state until then, is Since the display is immediately turned into a hidden state, the operation situation in the second A acceptance permission state can be easily recognized at an early stage. This means that the remaining time in the 2A reception permission state is not consumed much, so the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted to simplify the operation situation in the 2A reception permission state. It is expected that this will facilitate the act of confirming information.

In addition, in this example, if the operation on the second A operation part is interrupted while the continuous hitting display HA2a is being displayed, and it is put into the non-operating state, the continuous hitting display HA2a is hidden. The time it takes to enter the state is set as a constant time (here, "0 seconds").

According to such a configuration, how much time has to elapse from the time when the operation state of the second A operation section is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) to disable the automatic repeated hitting function? It becomes easier to predict whether a situation will arise in which the display HA2a is hidden and the operation situation in the second A acceptance permission state is easy to recognize. This means that it becomes easier to predict how much time will be spent remaining in the 2A acceptance acceptance state, so the operation state of the 2A operation section is temporarily interrupted and the 2A It is expected that it will be easier to check the status of operations in the acceptance state. The effect can be obtained even if "1 second" is set as the above-mentioned constant time, so the period from when the continuous hit display HA2a is turned off to the non-display state is The time does not necessarily have to be set to "0 seconds".

In addition, in the second A acceptance permission state, as shown in FIG. 149(g) etc., the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a that has been in the execution state until then is also output at timing tAb2, similar to the continuous hitting display HA2a. - In A2, when the operation state of the second A operation section is temporarily interrupted (it is put into a non-operation state) and the automatic repeated hit function is disabled, this is used as a trigger to make it into an inaudible state. That is, in this case, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is terminated when the timing tAb2-A2 arrives (triggered when the second A operation section is put into the non-operation state). That will happen.

According to such a configuration, when the operation state of the second A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (it is set to a non-operation state) and the auto continuous hit function is disabled, the operation after the first reception which was in the execution state until then is disabled. The output sound SA2a will be immediately turned into a non-output state, and in this case, it can be expected to suitably indicate that the automatic repeated hit function has been disabled.

In addition, in this example, if the operation on the second A operation section is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is being output and it is brought into the non-operation state, the first reception The time until the post-output sound SA2a is brought into a non-output state is set as a constant time (here, "0 seconds").

According to such a configuration, how much time has passed since the operation state of the second A operation part is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operation state) and the automatic repeated hit function is disabled? It becomes easier to predict whether the output sound SA2a will be in a non-output state after the reception of the output sound SA2a. This means that it becomes easier to predict how much time will be spent remaining in the 2A acceptance acceptance state, so it is easier to predict how much time will be spent in the 2A acceptance permission state, so it is difficult to play a game method in which the operation state of the 2A operation section is temporarily interrupted. It is expected that this will make it easier. The effect can be obtained even if, for example, "0.5 seconds" is set as the above-mentioned constant time, so the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a becomes non-operational after the non-operation state. The time it takes to enter the output state does not necessarily have to be set to "0 seconds".

Moreover, in the second A acceptance acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 149(f) and 151(c), the operation state of the second A operating section is temporarily interrupted (non-operated) at timing tAb2-A2. When the automatic continuous hit function is disabled (in the state of 1), a new display change is caused by this as an opportunity.

Here, the display change triggered by the 2A operating section being put into the non-operating state is ``by changing the continuous hit display HA2a, which had been in the display state until then, into the non-display state, The display image that was originally displayed on the screen is made visible.'' Rather, some new mode appears by performing processing triggered by the 2A operation section being placed in a non-operational state. The display change according to this example appears by performing a process of starting a new display of "non-operation display HB2" as a cut-in image shown in FIG. 151(c). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to more reliably suggest that the second A operation section is in a non-operated state and that the automatic repeated hit function is in a disabled state.

Note that the "non-operation display HB2" according to this example has a plurality of modes that differ depending on the degree of progress of the production, and at timing tAb2-A2, it is displayed in a mode HB2a that suggests that the production has not progressed. It has become so. However, regarding the "display after non-operation HB2", it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of modes that suggest the degree of progress of the performance. Alternatively, a first post-non-operation display of a type that is displayed in one of multiple modes that suggests the degree of progress of the production, and a second post-non-operation display of a type that is displayed only in one mode that does not suggest the degree of progress of the production. Both the display and the display may be displayed as "display after non-operation HB2".

In this regard, in the 2A acceptance acceptance state according to this example, when the 2A operation section is placed in the non-operation state, this will be used as an opportunity to display a new display (display after non-operation HB2); The corresponding sound is not started to be output anew.

In addition, in the situation shown in FIG. 151(c), the mode of the situation suggestion display JA2 (here, the mode is JA2a) is the same as the state before the operation (see FIG. 151(a)), which also suggests that the performance content has not progressed. In addition, regarding the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA2 that suggests the operation status such as the friendly character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2, it is possible to suggest that the production content is not progressing. However, it does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see FIG. 151(a)).

Note that in this example, the gauge image HP-A2 of the situation suggestion display JA2 is not made difficult to see due to the "display after non-operation HB2", and as a result, the mode of the situation suggestion display JA2 is This makes it easy to understand the progress of the performance. The friendly character YS-A2 and the enemy character BOSS-A2 may also not be made difficult to see due to the "display after non-operation HB2".

In this regard, the "display after non-operation HB2" may be hidden when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the second A operating section was placed in a non-operated state, regardless of its mode. In this example, the display state is continued while the 2nd A reception permission state continues, and when the timing tAb3 at which the 2A reception permission state ends, or the player's operation reception is new. It is set to be hidden after this incident occurred. According to such a configuration, even if the player loses the will to continue the operation while the 2A acceptance acceptance state continues, the display state of the non-operation display HB2 changes to the corresponding state. Since it continues until the timing tAb3 when the 2nd A reception acceptance state ends, it is possible to make it appear that the performance results of the operations up to that point are appearing, and it is possible to suitably maintain the interest in the game. become expected.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 149(a), at timing tAb2-B1 within the 2nd A acceptance permission state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(d)), "2nd A operation section (here, It is assumed that the "operation button 410)" is put into the operating state again.

In this example, if the "2nd A operating section (here, the operating button 410)" is again put into the operating state and the operation is accepted at timing tAb2-B1 within the 2nd A acceptance acceptance state, this will be used as an opportunity to As shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (g), the "2nd A post-reception change (2nd A post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception will occur again (as shown in FIG. 151(d)). performance situation).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "2nd A operating section (here, the operating button 410)" at timing tAb2-B1 within the 2nd A acceptance acceptance state, the process shown in FIG. 149(f), As shown in (g), after the non-operation display HB2 (aspect HB2a) is hidden, the operation reception on the "2A operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is performed as a change after the 2A reception. The "first reception output sound SA2 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the "first reception output sound SA2 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" is output audibly again, and the operation reception for the "second A operation section (here, operation button 410)" is performed. The ``2nd A post-reception display (one video display)'' corresponding to the ``2nd A post-reception display'' is started to be displayed again.

In this example, it is assumed that even when the operation on the 2A operation unit is restarted at timing tAb2-B1 within the 2A reception permission state, the production content corresponding to the 2A reception permission state does not progress. It has become. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 151(d), the change after the second A reception is the same as when the execution is started for the first time based on the operation reception for the second A operation unit at the timing tAb-A1. In this manner, the execution of the second A post-acceptance change (such as the second A post-acceptance display, the second A post-acceptance output sound, etc.) is started. Note that the details of the performance are as described above, so the explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 149 and 151, the operation by the player (operation state of the second A operation section) started at timing tAb2-B1 is maintained until timing tAb2-B3. This assumes the case where the auto continuous hit function is enabled.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 (the period during which the 2nd A operating section is maintained in the operating state again), the operation reception for the 2nd A operating section is performed multiple times by the automatic continuous tap function. , each time, post-acceptance changes corresponding to the operation acceptance (for example, post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, post-acceptance accessory action, etc.) are executed.

Then, even during the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 (the period during which the second A operation section is maintained in the operating state again), such changes after reception are executed multiple times by the auto continuous hit function. As for the state when the display (such as the display HA2a during repeated hits and the output sound SA2a after the first reception) is performed, the above-mentioned "period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2" will be used as long as the production content does not progress. This is the same as the case (see FIG. 151(b)). Note that the details of the performance are as described above, so the explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 according to the example shown in FIG. This is based on the assumption that the performance content corresponding to the second A acceptance permission state has progressed (the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(e)).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. 2A post-reception performance) is executed in a manner in which the content of the production has not progressed, whereas in the period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3, the ``2A post-reception change (stage 2A change after reception)'' is executed in a manner in which the content of the performance has not progressed. 2A (post-reception performance)" will be executed with the content of the performance progressing.

More specifically, during the period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3, at "timing tAb2-B2", which is the timing at which the production content is advanced, the timing shown in FIGS. 149(e) and 151(e) Based on the reception of the operation on the second A operation part, the mode of the situation suggestion display JA2 that suggests the operation status is changed from the previously appearing "mode JA2a" to a different "mode JA2b" so that The display changes are executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 151(e), the enemy character BOSS-A2 is changed to a wounded state, the flame-based magic by the ally character YS-A2 is changed to a state of higher strength, and the gauge image HP-A2 will be changed to a state in which the remaining HP gauge is reduced. According to such a configuration, through such a change in the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA2, the performance content corresponding to the second A acceptance permission state is changed to the operation acceptance (by the auto continuous hit function) performed at timing tAb2-B2. Based on the result of performance judgment), it is suggested that progress has been made.

Then, after the production content has progressed in this way, when one operation reception is made to the 2A operation section, as shown in FIG. 151(e) as the "2A post reception display" The content of the production progresses, such as "Friendly character YS-A2 attacks injured enemy character BOSS-A2 using fire-based magic with increased strength". ``Video display'' will be displayed.

In this production example, after the production content has progressed, the degree of progress of the production content will not be returned to the state before the progress as long as the second A acceptance acceptance state continues. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again to the 2A operation section after one video display that has changed to the advanced production content described above is completed, when an operation is accepted again at the 2A operation section. The mode (here, the mode in which "ally character YS-A2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire-based magic) appears as a single video display that changes to the advanced performance content.

In other words, in this case, of the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 when the so-called automatic repeated hit function is activated, during the period after timing tAb2-B2 when the production content has progressed, the " ``One video display'' will be played multiple times as many times as the number of operations accepted by the auto continuous hit function.

In addition, even in the period after the timing tAb2-B2 when the production content has progressed, the manner in which the ally character YS-A2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire-based magic (one video display) will change after the above reception. A new execution is started at irregular intervals (times not determined in advance). Therefore, the above-mentioned "one video display" in which the production content has progressed will also be started anew at irregular intervals by the automatic continuous hit function, and the "one video display" in such a progress state will be started anew at irregular intervals. In the figure, the repeated display is expressed as "continuous hit display HA2b".

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, when "timing tAb2-B2", which is the timing at which the effect content is advanced, arrives, the effects shown in FIGS. 149(e), (f) and 151(d), As shown in (e), the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA2 changes from "Aspect JA2a" to "Aspect JA2b", and the aspect of continuous hitting display HA2 also changes from "Aspect HA2a" to "Aspect HA2b". That will happen. From then on, while the auto continuous hit function is enabled (timings tAb2-B2 to tAb2-B3), while the situation suggestion display JA2 is displayed as "Aspect JA2b", the continuous hit display HA2 is displayed as "Aspect JA2b". HA2b".

In this example, the mode of the continuous hit display HA2 is changed according to the progress of the performance content, but it may not be changed according to the progress of the performance content. In other words, even if the continuous hit display HA2 is configured to continue to be executed in the same mode regardless of the progress of the production content, the player cannot activate the automatic continuous hit function through the continuous hit display HA2. It is possible to check the current situation and the number of times (frequency) that operations have been accepted, and it is also possible to check the degree of progress of the production content through the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA2.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is accepted once for the "second A operation section (here, operation button 410)" in the second A reception permission state, the above " In addition to the "2nd A post-reception display", the first post-reception output sound can be output as the "2nd A post-reception output sound" as shown in FIG. 149(g). In addition to the first post-reception output sound SA2 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display", the "second A post-reception output sound" includes the first post-reception output sound SA2 as shown in FIG. 149(h). In addition, as described above, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 indicating that the performance content corresponding to the second A acceptance permission state has progressed can be output.

Therefore, in the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 according to the example shown in FIG. Then, based on the operation acceptance (performance progress) at timing tAb2-B2, the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is started in mode SB2b-1. As a result, the player can recognize that the production content has progressed through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 corresponding to the operation acceptance.

However, in this production example, the first post-reception output sound SA2, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display", is output in the same manner before and after the production content progresses. We are planning to realize this as follows. Therefore, when the timing tAb2-B2, which is the timing at which the content of the production progresses, arrives, based on the operation acceptance, the output of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 as a new "sound effect" is started. However, the manner is the same as when the operation is accepted before timing tAb2-B2 (the execution is different depending on whether or not the production progress occurs at timing tAb2-B2). (the aspects are the same).

In other words, in this case, over the entire period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is activated, the sound effect corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" (output after the first reception) Sound SA2) will be newly outputted in the same manner at irregular intervals by the auto-repeat function, and the repeated output of such "sound effect" is referred to as "output sound SA2a after first reception" in the figure. ”. Note that the output mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a during this period is the same as the above-mentioned "period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2", so a description thereof will be omitted here. shall be.

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is not changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content, but may be changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content.

However, even in a situation where the continuous hitting display HA2b is executed by such an automatic repeated hitting function (period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3), as shown in FIG. As display HA2b, "the manner in which ally character YS-A2 attacks injured enemy character BOSS-A2 with high-strength fire-based magic (smoke effect, generation of fire-based magic, etc.)" is displayed at irregular intervals. This may make the "situation suggestion display JA2" difficult to see or become inconspicuous, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the corresponding 2A acceptance acceptance state (this configuration is mandatory). (not).

In this regard, the production examples shown in FIGS. 149 and 151 are such that the player operates the second A operation section at timing tAb2-B3 in order to more actively check the operation status in the second A acceptance permission state. This assumes that the auto continuous hit function is disabled once again.

Here, as mentioned above, in the 2nd A acceptance acceptance state, while the 2A acceptance acceptance state is continuing, the operation state of the 2A operation section is interrupted (it is set to a non-operation state) and the auto continuous tap function is activated. When it is invalidated, the continuous hit display HA2, which had been in the execution state until then, is turned into a non-display state. That is, in this case, the execution state of the continuous-hitting display HA2b is terminated when the timing tAb2-B3 has arrived (when the second A operation section has been put into the non-operating state).

Also, similar to the case of the continuous hit display HA2a, if you interrupt the operation on the 2nd A operation part and put it in the non-operational state while the continuous hit display HA2b is displayed, then after changing it to the non-operating state, The time until the continuous hit display HA2b is turned off is set as a constant time (here, "0 seconds").

Moreover, in the 2nd A acceptance acceptance state according to this example, when the operation state of the 2nd A operation section is temporarily interrupted (it is set to a non-operating state) and the automatic repeated hit function is disabled, the display changes based on this. As mentioned above, this creates a new problem. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 149(f) and FIG. 151(f), at timing tAb2-B3, the operating state of the second A operating section is temporarily interrupted (it is put into a non-operating state), and the auto continuous hit function is disabled. 151(f), a process is performed to newly start displaying the "non-operation display HB2" as a cut-in image shown in FIG. 151(f). As mentioned above, the "display after non-operation HB2" in this example has multiple modes that differ depending on the degree of progress of the performance, and at timing tAb2-B3, it is displayed that the content of the performance has progressed by one stage. Suggested aspect HB2b is displayed.

In the situation shown in FIG. 151(f), the mode of the situation suggestion display JA2 (here, the mode JA2b) that suggests the operation situation such as the friendly character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, the gauge image HP-A2, etc. This also suggests that the content of the production has progressed by one stage.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the 2A acceptance acceptance state, while the 2A acceptance acceptance state continues, the operation state of the 2A operation section is interrupted (it is set to a non-operation state) and the auto continuous press function is disabled. When this occurs, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2, which had been in the output state until then, is made inaudible using this as a trigger. That is, in this case, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is terminated when the timing tAb2-B3 arrives (triggered when the second A operation section is put into the non-operation state). That will happen.

However, at timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149, while the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 that started outputting at timing tAb2-B2 continues to be output, the operating state of the second A operating section is This assumes that the service is interrupted.

In this respect, in the 2A acceptance permission state, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is different from the case of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2, in which the operation state of the 2A operation unit is interrupted (non-operation The output state will not be terminated (made inaudible) by the fact that the output state is set to the state). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 149(h) etc., even if the operation state of the second A operation section is temporarily interrupted at timing tAb2-B3, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2b-1 will not be generated after timing tAb2-B3. (even after the 2nd A operating section is in the non-operating state), it is executed for a predetermined output time until it finishes outputting, or for a predetermined time from the non-operating state. The output state will continue.

In addition, in this example, if the operation on the second A operation section is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is being output and it is brought into the non-operation state, the first reception The time until the post-output sound SA2a is brought into a non-output state is set as a constant time (here, "0 seconds"). On the other hand, regarding the second post-acceptance output sound SB2, when the operation on the second A operation section is interrupted and the second A operation section is brought into a non-operational state while the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is being output, The time from when the non-operation state is set until the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is set to the non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be undefined. In other words, in this case, when the operation on the second A operation section is interrupted, different performances are provided between the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB2, which were in the output state until then. .

According to such a configuration, even in the second A acceptance permission state according to this embodiment, the second A operation unit is not activated while the second A post-acceptance output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2b) is in the execution state. When the game is played so as to interrupt the operation state (when it is set to the non-operation state), as shown in FIG. 149(h), the 2A reception desk A situation appears in which the post-output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2b) continues to be in the execution state. However, after this, due to the passage of time since the 2nd A operating section was put into the non-operating state (time lapse from timing tAb2-B3), the 2nd A reception which had been continued as shown in FIG. The post-output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2b) will be in a non-output state.

In this regard, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 149(a), the output sound after the second A reception (the second reception At timing tAb2-C1 (before the output state is ended) when the rear output sound SB2b) is in the audible state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 151(g)), the second A operating section is put into the operating state again. I am assuming the case.

In this example, even if the "2nd A operating section (here, the operating button 410)" is put into the operating state again at timing tAb2-C1 within the 2nd A acceptance acceptance state and the operation is accepted, the above-mentioned timing tAb2- As in the case of B1, using this as an opportunity, as shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (g), the "2nd A post-reception change (2nd A post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception is caused again. (The presentation situation shown in FIG. 151(g)).

More specifically, when an operation is accepted for the "2nd A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-C1 within the 2A acceptance permission state, As shown in (g), after the non-operation display HB2 (aspect HB2b) is hidden, as a change after the second A reception, the operation reception for the "second A operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is performed. The "first reception output sound SA2 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the "first reception output sound SA2 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" is output audibly again, and the operation reception for the "second A operation section (here, operation button 410)" is performed. The ``2nd A post-reception display (one video display)'' corresponding to the ``2nd A post-reception display'' is started to be displayed again.

In this example, when the operation on the 2A operation unit is started again at timing tAb2-C1 within the 2A reception permission state, the production content corresponding to the 2A reception permission state changes from the progress state of the first stage. This assumes that there is no progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 151(g), when the second A post-acceptance change is first started to be executed based on the operation acceptance for the second A operation unit at the timing tAb2-B2 (see FIG. 151(e)), the execution of the 2nd A post-acceptance changes (2nd A post-acceptance display, 2nd A post-acceptance output sound, etc.) is started. Note that the details of the performance are as described above, so the explanation will be omitted here.

However, as described above, this example assumes that the timing tAb2-C1 at which the operation on the second A operation section is restarted arrives while the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is in an audible state. ing.

In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 does not cause any change based on the fact that the operation on the second A operation section has been started again (the operation has been accepted) at timing tAb2-C1. , continues the previous output state. Note that the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 corresponding to the 2A acceptance permission state is made inaudible when the 2A operation section is put into the non-operation state, so the 2A operation is not in the audible state at the time the unit is operated again.

According to such a configuration, in the 2A acceptance acceptance state, while the 2A post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance is being output, the 2A operation unit, which has been in the non-operation state, is When the operation is accepted, the second A post-acceptance output sound is not terminated using this as a trigger, and is always not terminated (second post-acceptance output sound SB2).

It should be noted that the display HA2 during repeated hits is also hidden when the 2A operation section is put into the non-operation state, similar to the first output sound SA2 after reception, so the 2A operation It is not in the display state at the time the section is operated again.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 149 and 151, the operation by the player (operation state of the second A operation section) started at timing tAb2-C1 is maintained until timing tAb2-C2 and is automatically executed. This assumes the case where the continuous hit function is enabled.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 (the period during which the 2nd A operating section is maintained in the operating state again), the operation reception for the 2nd A operating section is performed multiple times by the automatic continuous tap function. , each time, post-acceptance changes corresponding to the operation acceptance (for example, post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, post-acceptance accessory action, etc.) are executed.

Then, even during the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 (the period during which the second A operation section is maintained in the operating state again), such changes after reception are executed multiple times by the auto continuous hit function. As for the mode when the display HA2b is displayed during repeated hits, the output sound SA2a after the first reception, etc., unless there is further progress in the production content, the mode from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3 described above will be the same. 151 (f)). Note that the details of the performance are as described above, so the explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 according to the example shown in FIG. This is based on the assumption that the performance content corresponding to the 2A reception acceptance state has further progressed based on the results of the performance judgment, etc. (when the second stage has progressed) (Fig. 151(h) ). In particular, timing tAb2-C2 according to this example assumes that the production mode has progressed to the final stage of the production content corresponding to the 2A acceptance permission state, and is It is also assumed that the process is terminated when the operation is accepted at the timing tAb2-C2 (see FIG. 149(a) and FIG. 151(h)).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 according to the example shown in FIG. On the other hand, after timing tAb2-C2, the operation is not allowed to be accepted on the second A operation section, and the 2A post-reception change (2A post-reception performance)" will be executed in a manner in which the performance content is further advanced (final stage performance mode) (see FIG. 151(h)).

More specifically, at timing tAb2-C2, as shown in FIGS. 149(e) and 151(h), a situation suggestion display JA2 indicating the operating situation is displayed based on the operation reception on the second A operating section. A display change is executed to change the aspect of ``aspect JA2b'' that has appeared up to that point to a different ``aspect JA2c''. Here, as shown in FIG. 151(h), the enemy character BOSS-A2 is changed to a defeated state, and the flame magic by the ally character YS-A2 is exploding around the enemy character BOSS-A2. As a result, the gauge image HP-A2 is changed to a state in which the remaining HP gauge is further reduced. According to such a configuration, through such a change in the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA2, the performance content corresponding to the second A acceptance acceptance state is changed to the operation acceptance (by the auto continuous hit function) performed at timing tAb2-C2. Based on the result of performance judgment), it is suggested that progress has been made.

However, as mentioned above, the "mode JA2c" as the situation suggestion display JA2 corresponds to the "final stage production mode" of the production contents corresponding to the 2A acceptance acceptance state, and This only appears when the 2A acceptance permission state is terminated with the acceptance of an operation as a trigger. Therefore, after the execution of "aspect JA2c" as the situation suggestion display JA2 is started based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAb2-C1, regardless of whether or not there is an operation by the player within the execution period, It is executed for a predetermined time and then becomes hidden. Here, only "mode JA2c" is prepared as the final stage performance mode of the situation suggestion display JA2, and multiple modes with different expectations of winning the jackpot are not prepared.

Additionally, when the operation is accepted at timing tAb2-C2, the auto-repeat function that had been enabled up until then will be disabled as the 2nd A acceptance permission state is terminated. . In this regard, even when the automatic repeated hitting function is disabled at timing tAb2-C2, the repeated hitting display HA2, which had been in the display state due to the automatic repeated hitting function up to that point, is set to a non-displayed state using this as a trigger.

Furthermore, in this example, even when the automatic repeated hitting function is disabled at timing tAb2-C2, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a, which had been in the output state due to the automatic repeated hitting function up to that point, is used as a trigger (operation (for a certain period of time from the time the reception is made) becomes inaudible.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the first post-acceptance output sound SA2, as the second A post-acceptance output sound in response to the operation acceptance, as shown in FIG. 149(h), , it is possible to output a second post-acceptance output sound SB2 indicating that the performance content corresponding to the second A acceptance permission state has progressed.

Therefore, in the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 according to the example shown in FIG. Then, based on the operation acceptance (performance progress) at timing tAb2-C2, the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is started in mode SB2b-2. Thereby, the player can recognize the degree of progress of the production content through the output mode of the output sound after acceptance. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2.

In this example, it is assumed that the timing tAb2-C2 arrives after the second post-reception output sound SB2b-1, which started outputting at the timing tAb2-B2, becomes inaudible. The output sound SB2b-1 may arrive while the output sound SB2b-1 is being audibly output after the reception of the SB2b-1. In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 changes from "Aspect SB2b-1" to a different "Aspect SB2b-2" at timing tAb2-C2 (by ending Aspect SB2b-1). , aspect SB2b-2) may be output in an alternative form.

Furthermore, as described above, the 2nd A acceptance permission state originally continues until timing tAb3 arrives when there is no operation acceptance for the 2nd A operation unit, as shown in FIG. 150(b), and when timing tAb3 It is terminated based on what has arrived. In this respect, the second A reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the automatic button function described above is enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 150, if no operation is accepted on the second A operation unit until timing tAb3 arrives in the second A reception permission state, the second A reception permission is activated based on the arrival of timing tAb3. Not only is the state terminated, but as a change after the 2A reception that appears when an operation is performed on the 2A operation section, the final stage production mode ( 150(e), (h), FIG. 151(h), etc.) will start to be executed.

Note that the second A acceptance acceptance state may be generated as an acceptance acceptance state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. That is, in this case, the 2nd A acceptance permission state is only terminated based on the arrival of timing tAb3, and the execution of the 2nd A post-acceptance change that appears when an operation is performed on the 2A operation section is started. There will be no more.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "3rd A reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 152 is a time chart showing an example of the production content when the "3rd A reception permissible state" occurs and the player performs an operation based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 3A" being satisfied. It is. FIG. 153 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the "3rd A acceptance permission state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the "3rd A acceptance permission state" occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "3rd A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "3rd A fluctuation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After that, start the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the 3rd A fluctuation pattern, sound output according to the 3rd A fluctuation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "3rd A variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 152(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "3rd A variation pattern", timing tAc2 has arrived when the 3A time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative symbol SZ. Based on (based on "Condition 3A" being met), "Changes after receiving 3rd A (3rd A production situation suggestion display JA3, 3rd A continuous hitting display HA3, output sound after receiving 3rd A SA3, SB3 The above-mentioned 3A acceptance permission state (valid period) in which the 3A reception permission state (validity period) is allowed to occur (situation shown in FIG. 154(a)) is permitted.

Here, in the 3A acceptance permission state according to this embodiment, the “3A operation unit” where operation reception is permitted is set as the operation button 410, and the 3A reception permission state is ended. It is permissible to accept multiple operations until the process is completed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, as shown in FIGS. A sample image display MG-A3 that imitates the "operation button 410" (as a 3A operation section) and a situation suggestion display JA3 that suggests the operation status are displayed before the 3A acceptance permission state occurs (3A It is displayed when the timing tAc1 (before the operation reception on the operation unit is permitted) arrives.

However, the sample image display MG-A3 and the situation suggestion display JA3 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 3rd A reception permissible state occurs; It may be displayed at the same time or with a slight delay after the occurrence. In particular, the situation suggestion display JA3 may not be displayed until an operation is first accepted for the 3A operation section in the 3A acceptance permission state, that is, until an operation is first accepted for the 3A operation section. It may also be implemented as something that appears and is displayed based on the event.

Regarding the sample image display MG-A3 and the situation suggestion display JA3, after the display starts, regardless of the operating state of the 3A operation section, it will continue until the corresponding 3A acceptance acceptance state is ended at least. This is what will be displayed.

Here, "sample image display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A reception acceptance state has a "first color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" and a "second color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme. For example, a color scheme determined based on the result of performance determination etc. is used for display.

In addition, the "mock image display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A reception permission state is such that "after the part that simulates the operation receiving part" which is the operation target is "displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α), When one periodic change is a moving image that is sequentially displayed in each manner shown in FIGS. It is something that will appear. Note that the period 3A time is set as a shorter time (short cycle) than the period 2A time, and may be set as the same time as the period 1A time, for example. Therefore, in the 3A acceptance acceptance state, the "operation receiving part" is depicted as quickly moving up and down its movable range.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 153(b), the 3A acceptance permission state is continued until timing tAc3 arrives when there is no operation acceptance for the 3A operation unit, and is based on the arrival of timing tAc3. It will be terminated. Therefore, while the 3A reception permission state continues, a gauge image (in this example, a gauge image in the sample image display MG-A3) indicating the remaining time until the timing tAc3 at which the 3A reception permission state ends Although the description is such that the number of images) decreases over time, this description may not necessarily be performed.

In addition, if the "sample image display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A reception permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tAc2 when the 3A reception permission state occurs, the periodic changes and changes in the gauge image It is desirable to start the process after waiting for the timing tAc2. That is, in this case, the "sample image display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A acceptance permission state is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) until timing tAc2 arrives. becomes.

Note that in the 3A acceptance permission state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 152(d) and 154(a), unlike the 1A reception permission state and the 2A reception permission state, the 3A operation unit ( Here, a message display related to accepting an operation for the operation button 410) is not displayed.

In addition, in the 3A acceptance permission state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 152(e) and 154(a), a situation suggestion display JA3 indicating the operation status in the 3A reception permission state, An ally character (in this case, ally character YS-A3) that corresponds to the type of the 3rd A reception allowed state, and an enemy character that corresponds to the type of the 3rd A reception allowed state (here, an enemy depicted as a ghost). The character BOSS-A3) and a gauge image HP-A3 showing its remaining HP gauge are displayed. In the 3rd A acceptance permission state, "Whether or not the ally character YS-A3 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A3 by accepting multiple operations on the 3rd A operation section (the gauge image HP-A3 must be set to 0)" It is possible to suggest whether the level of expectation of winning the jackpot is high or low through the performance such as "whether or not the jackpot can be achieved". Each time an operation (operation reception) is performed, an effect can be executed such that the "ally character YS-A3" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A3". Note that in this example, the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3 are displayed as the situation suggestion display JA3, but not all of these displays are necessarily displayed. However, as long as at least one of the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation status.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 152, at timing tAc2-A1 within the 3A acceptance acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 154(b)), the "3A operation section (here, operation button 410)" It is assumed that the first operation is accepted.

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "3rd A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-A1 within the 3A acceptance permission state, as shown in FIG. 152(f), As shown in FIG. 154(g), a "3rd A post-reception change (3rd A post-reception performance)" corresponding to the operation reception is generated (the performance situation shown in FIG. 154(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "3rd A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-A1 within the 3A acceptance permission state, the process shown in FIG. 152(f), As shown in (g), as a change after the 3A reception, the ``3A post reception output sound'' corresponding to the operation reception on the ``3A operation section (here, the operation button 410)'' is outputted audibly. , the ``3rd A post-reception display'' corresponding to the operation reception on the ``3rd A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)'' starts to be displayed.

That is, when an operation is accepted once for the "3A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 3A acceptance permission state, the "3A post-reception display" shown in FIG. 154(b) is displayed. As shown, one video is displayed in which "ally character YS-A3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning-based magic. However, as will be explained later, in the 3rd A acceptance acceptance state, based on the result of the production judgment when the operation is accepted, "enemy character BOSS-A3" may be injured, the strength of lightning magic may be increased, or the gauge image may be There is a possibility that the remaining HP gauge of HP-A3 will decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance judgment, etc.). When the content of the production progresses in this way, the state when the operation reception is made to the 3A operation section (here, "ally character YS-A3" uses lightning-based magic to "enemy character BOSS-A3") 152(e), (f), FIG. 154(f), etc.). It should be noted that once the performance content has progressed in this manner, as long as the third A acceptance acceptance state continues, the degree of progress of the performance content will not be returned to the state before the progress. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again to the 3A operation section after one video display that has changed to the advanced production content described above is completed, when an operation is accepted again at the 3A operation section. The mode (here, the mode in which "ally character YS-A3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning-based magic) can appear as a single video display that changes to the advanced production content. becomes. Each time the performance progresses, it may be suggested that there is a high possibility (expectation level) of winning the jackpot.

In addition, in this example, when an operation is accepted for the "3A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" once in the 3A acceptance permission state, in addition to the above "3A post-reception display", the above As the "3rd A post-reception output sound", the first post-reception output sound SA3 can be output as shown in FIG. 152(g). Note that the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 according to this example is a mode in which the ally character YS-A3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3 with thunder-based magic (lightning It functions as a sound effect corresponding to "the occurrence of magic, etc.)". In addition, at this time, as will be described later, there is a possibility that the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is further output as the "3rd A post-acceptance output sound". The second post-reception output sound SB3 according to this example is output when the production content of the above-mentioned "3rd A post-reception display" progresses. Note that here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is realized as one that functions as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect. , as long as it can indicate that the player has accepted the operation, and when the auto continuous hit function is enabled, it can indicate that the 3A operation section is maintained in the operated state. It is fine as long as it is something.

In this way, in the 3A acceptance permission state, each time an operation is accepted for the 3A operation unit (here, the operation button 410), the ally character YS-A3 changes to the enemy character BOSS-A3. In other words, the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A3" decreases due to multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A3" (the content of the production progresses). As a result, when the HP becomes 0, it means that the "enemy character BOSS-A3" has been defeated, and this provides a performance that suggests that the level of expectation is high. However, in this case, when the HP does not become 0 despite multiple attacks and the "enemy character BOSS-A3" cannot be defeated, it is suggested that the level of expectation is low.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 152(a), it is assumed that the operation by the player (operation state of the third A operation section) started at timing tAc2-A1 is continued until timing tAc2-A2. It has become.

In this respect, the 3rd A reception permissible state is such that ``just by maintaining the operating section (3rd A operating section) in the operating state, changes after acceptance (for example, display after acceptance, output sound after acceptance, light emission after acceptance, etc.) It is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state" in which a function (e.g., post-acceptance action) is executed multiple times (a type in which the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 152(a), during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 (period in which the third A operating section is maintained in the operating state), no operation is accepted for the third A operating section. This is performed multiple times, and each time a post-acceptance change (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance accessory action, etc.) is executed in accordance with the operation acceptance.

Here, when an operation is accepted for the 3A operation unit once in the 3A acceptance permission state, the ally character YS-A3 is displayed as the display after the 3A reception, as shown in FIG. As described above, the manner in which the enemy character BOSS-A3 is attacked with lightning-based magic is displayed (a single video is displayed). Therefore, from the timing tAc2-A1 to the timing tAc2-A2 when the so-called auto continuous hit function is activated, first, such "one video display" is played multiple times for the number of times the operation is accepted. becomes.

In addition, when one operation is accepted for the 3A operation unit in the 3A acceptance permission state, the 3A post-acceptance output sound appears as the 3A post-acceptance display, and the ally character YS-A3 As described above, the sound effect is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to the manner in which the enemy character BOSS-A3 is attacked with lightning-based magic (smoke effect, generation of thunder-based magic, etc.). Therefore, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is activated, in addition to the above-mentioned "one video display", the sound effect corresponding to such "one video display" However, it will be played multiple times for the number of times the operation is accepted.

However, in the 3rd A reception acceptance state, if the operation part (3rd A operation part) is maintained in the operating state and the auto continuous hit function is enabled, the ally character YS-A3 will use lightning-based magic to attack the enemy character BOSS-A3. The mode of attacking (one video display) and the sound effect corresponding to the "one video display" (output sound after receiving 3A) will change after the above reception for a certain period of time (predetermined time). ), a new execution is started every time.

In addition, in the 3rd A reception permission state, if the operation part (3rd A operation part) is maintained in the operating state and the auto continuous hit function is enabled, the ally character YS-A1 uses lightning magic to attack the enemy character BOSS-A3. The mode of attacking (one video display) and the sound effect corresponding to the "one video display" (output sound after receiving 3A) can be executed multiple times as the above-mentioned post-reception change, In this case, the interval until the change after reception starts anew in response to the above detection (the interval from the start of execution of the previous change after reception until the start of execution of the next change after reception) must be set. It is now considered to be a period of time that is less than or equal to a specific time.

That is, in this case, from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. 152, "one video display" in which friendly character YS-A3 attacks enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning-based magic is displayed. The automatic continuous hit function causes a new execution to be started at fixed time intervals, and such repeated display of ``one video display'' is expressed as ``continuous hit display HA3a'' in the figure.

Similarly, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. Due to the continuous hit function, a new output is started at fixed time intervals, and such repeated output of "sound effects" is expressed as "first post-acceptance output sound SA3a" in the figure.

In this regard, in the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. This assumes that there is no progress.

Therefore, within the period, the "situation suggestion display JA3" (see Figure 152(e)) that suggests the operation status in the 3A acceptance permission state, or the ``situation suggestion display JA3'' that suggests the operation status in the 3A reception permission state. The "second post-acceptance output sound (see FIG. 152(h))" does not change or start executing when the operation is accepted.

According to such a configuration, in the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. 152, "lightning-based magic attack" etc. shown in FIG. 154 are displayed; Although the output of the corresponding sound effect is repeatedly executed at fixed time intervals by the automatic repeated hitting function (repeated hitting display HA3a, output sound SA3a after first reception), "situation suggestion display JA3 (Fig. 152 ( (see e))" will not change. As a result, it becomes possible to confirm that the performance content is the same as when the operation was performed or that the performance content has not progressed without performing monotonous repeated operations, so it is possible to suitably maintain the enjoyment of the game. becomes expected.

Regarding the "situation suggestion display JA3 (see Figure 152(e))", at least one of the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3 is displayed when the operation is accepted. It may be changed as follows. However, in this case, it is necessary to change the mode to a different mode from "the mode when the production content progresses", and the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 (3A operation section When the period during which the display is maintained in the operating state ends (when the operation is interrupted), this will be used as an opportunity to return to the "display mode before the operation". Additionally, the "Situation Suggestion Display JA3" (see Figure 152(e)) such as the friendly character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3 will not be displayed until the operation is accepted. As mentioned above, it may be realized that it is not displayed, but that it appears and is displayed when the operation is accepted (until the validity period ends or only for a predetermined time). That's exactly what I did.

In addition, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2, a "situation suggestion display JA3 (see FIG. 152(e))" that suggests the operation status in the 3A acceptance permission state, The "second output sound after reception (see Fig. 152 (h))" that indicates the operation status in the state does not change or start execution when the operation is accepted, so it does not change the production content. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that progress has not been made.

However, in a situation where the continuous hit display HA3a is executed by such an automatic repeated hit function (period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2), the continuous hit display is displayed as shown in FIG. 154(b). As HA3a, ``A mode in which ally character YS-A3 attacks enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning-based magic appears repeatedly at regular intervals, so this makes ``Situation Suggestion Display JA3'' difficult to see or becomes less noticeable. (This configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the production examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 154 are such that the player operates the 3A operation section at timing tAc2-A2 in order to more actively confirm the operation status in the 3A acceptance permission state. This assumes the case where the automatic continuous hit function is disabled.

Here, in the 3A acceptance acceptance state, as shown in FIGS. 152(f) and 154(c), the operating state of the 3A operating section is temporarily interrupted (in a non-operating state Even if the auto continuous hit function is disabled, the continuous hit display HA3a, which had been in the execution state until then, will not be turned into a hidden state as a result of this. In other words, in this case, the continuous hit display HA3a is displayed even after the timing tAc2-A2 (even after the 3A operation section is in the non-operated state), for example, when the above-mentioned "video display for one time" that was in the execution state is predetermined. The execution state continues for a predetermined period of time until the display is completed after being executed for the specified display time, or for a predetermined period of time from the non-operation state.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation state of the third A operation section is temporarily interrupted (it is set to a non-operating state) and the automatic repeated tapping function is disabled, the repeated tapping display HA3a that was in the execution state until then is disabled. is not immediately hidden, so it takes time until the operation status in the third A acceptance permission state becomes easy to recognize. This means that the remaining time in the 3A acceptance permission state is consumed significantly, so the operation state of the 3A operation section is temporarily interrupted to simplify the operation situation in the 3A reception permission state. People are now expected to create a sense of tension in the act of trying to confirm something.

In addition, in this example, if the operation on the 3A operating section is interrupted while the continuous hitting display HA3a is being displayed, and it is put into the non-operating state, the continuous hitting display HA3a is hidden. The time it takes to enter the state is not set as a constant time, but is set to be undefined.

According to such a configuration, how much time has to elapse from the time when the operation state of the third A operation part is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operating state) and the automatic repeated hitting function is disabled until the continuous hitting is started? It becomes difficult to predict whether a situation will arise in which the display HA3a is hidden and the operation situation in the third A acceptance permission state is easy to recognize. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be spent remaining in the 3A acceptance acceptance state, so the operation state of the 3A operation section is temporarily interrupted and the 3A It is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably created in the act of more easily confirming the status of the operation in the reception-permitting state.

In addition, in the 3rd A acceptance permission state, as shown in FIG. 152(g), the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a that has been in the execution state until then is also output at the timing tAc2, similar to the continuous hit display HA3a. - In A2, when the operation state of the 3A operation part is temporarily interrupted (it is put into a non-operation state) and the automatic repeated hit function is disabled, this will not be used as an opportunity to make it into an inaudible state. In other words, in this case, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a corresponds to the above-mentioned "one video display" that was in the execution state even after the timing tAc2-A2 (even after the third A operation section became non-operated). The output state continues for a predetermined amount of time until the "sound effect" is executed for a predetermined output time and is output, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation state of the third A operation section is temporarily interrupted (by setting it to a non-operation state) and the auto continuous hit function is disabled, the first reception that was in the execution state until then is disabled. The post-output sound SA3a is not immediately put into a non-output state, and in this case, it seems as if the auto-speech function is still effective, so it can be expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the third A operation section is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is being output and it is brought into a non-operating state, the first reception The time until the post-output sound SA3a is brought into a non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be undefined.

According to such a configuration, how much time has passed since the operation state of the third A operation section is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operation state) and the automatic repeated hit function is disabled? It becomes difficult to predict whether the output sound SA3a will be in a non-output state after the reception of , that is, whether it will be possible to confirm more reliably that the automatic repeated hit function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be spent remaining in the 3A reception acceptance state, so it is difficult to predict how much time will be spent in the 3A reception permission state, so it is difficult to predict how much time will be spent in the 3A reception permission state. It is now expected to create a suitable sense of tension.

Further, in the 3A acceptance permission state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 3A operation section is interrupted while the continuous hitting display HA3a and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a are in the execution state (non-operation state). As shown in FIGS. 152(f) and 152(g), the timing at which the display HA3a during repeated hits is hidden and the output sound SA3a after the first reception is The timings at which the non-output state is made are different from each other. In the figure, the timing at which the continuous hit display HA3a is set to a hidden state is before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is set to a non-output state, but the relationship is the opposite. You may set it so that Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state of non-display or non-output is indefinite, the timing at which the continuous hit display HA3a is set to the non-display state may be different from when the output sound SA3a after the first reception is non-displayed. There may be both cases in which the timing is before the timing at which the output state is made and cases in which the timing is in the output state and in which the timing is after the timing. Alternatively, the timings may be the same.

According to such a configuration, in the 3A acceptance permission state according to this embodiment, the operation state of the 3A operation section is controlled while the continuous hitting display HA3a and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a are in the execution state. When the game is interrupted (when the game is set to the non-operating state), as shown in FIGS. 152(f) and (g) and FIG. In this situation, a situation appears in which the continuous hit display HA3a continues to be displayed and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a continues to be output. However, after this, due to the passage of time since the 3A operating section was put in the non-operating state, as shown in FIGS. 152(f) and (g) and FIG. 154(d), the continuous The display HA3a will be in a non-display state, and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a will be in a non-output state. As a result, the player can easily recognize that he/she is in a situation where the auto-repeat hit function is disabled, as well as the player's friendly character YS-A3, enemy character BOSS-A3, gauge image, etc. The mode of the situation suggestion display JA3 (here, the mode JA3a) that suggests the operating situation, such as HP-A3, can be easily recognized (see FIG. 154(d)).

However, as mentioned above, in the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 in the example shown in FIG. This assumes that the content does not progress.

Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 154(d), the mode of the situation suggestion display JA3 (here, the mode Although JA3a) can be easily recognized, their appearance is the same as the state before operation (see Fig. 154(a)), and as a result, the production content has not progressed. is suggested. In addition, regarding the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA3 that suggests the operation status such as the friendly character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3, it is possible to suggest that the production content is not progressing. However, it does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see FIG. 154(a)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 152(a), at timing tAc2-B1 within the 3rd A acceptance permission state (the production situation shown in FIG. 154(e)), the ``3rd A operating section (here, It is assumed that the "operation button 410)" is put into the operating state again.

In this example, if the "3rd A operating section (here, the operating button 410)" is again put into the operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAc2-B1 within the 3rd A acceptance acceptance state, this will be used as a trigger to As shown in FIGS. 152(f) and (g), the "3rd A post-reception change (3rd A post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception will occur again (as shown in FIG. 154(e)). performance situation).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "3rd A operating section (here, the operating button 410)" at timing tAc2-B1 within the 3rd A acceptance permission state, the process shown in FIG. 152(f), As shown in (g), as a change after receiving the third A, the "first post-reception output sound SA3 (one video worth of "Sound effect corresponding to the display)" is output audibly again, and "3A post-reception display (one video display)" in response to the operation reception on the "3A operation section (here, operation button 410)" will start displaying again.

In this example, it is assumed that even when the operation on the 3A operation section is restarted at timing tAc2-B1 within the 3A reception permission state, the production content corresponding to the 3A reception permission state does not progress. It has become. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 154(e), the 3A post-reception change is the same as when the execution was first started based on the operation acceptance for the 3A operation unit at the timing tAc2-A1. In this manner, the execution of the 3rd A post-acceptance changes (3A post-acceptance display, 3A post-acceptance output sound, etc.) is started. Note that the details of the performance are as described above, so the explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 154, the operation by the player (operation state of the third A operation section) started at timing tAc2-B1 is maintained until timing tAc2-B3. This assumes the case where the auto continuous hit function is enabled.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 (the period during which the 3A operation section is maintained in the operating state again), the operation reception for the 3A operation section is performed multiple times by the automatic continuous tap function. , each time, post-acceptance changes corresponding to the operation acceptance (for example, post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, post-acceptance accessory action, etc.) are executed.

Then, during the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 (the period in which the third A operation section is maintained in the operating state again), such changes after reception are executed multiple times by the auto continuous hit function. As for the state when the display (such as the display HA3a during repeated hits and the output sound SA3a after the first reception) is performed, the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 described above will be the same unless the production progresses. This is the same as the case (see FIG. 154(b)). Note that the details of the performance are as described above, so the explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 according to the example shown in FIG. This is based on the assumption that the performance content corresponding to the third A acceptance permission state has progressed (the performance situation shown in FIG. 154(f)).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B2 in the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 according to the example shown in FIG. 3A post-reception performance)" is executed with the content of the performance not progressing, whereas in the period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3, the "3A post-reception change (stage 3A performance)" is executed in a manner that the content of the performance has not progressed. In the period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3, 3A (post-reception performance)" will be executed in a state in which the content of the performance has progressed.

More specifically, during the period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3, at "timing tAc2-B2", which is the timing at which the production content progresses, as shown in FIG. 152(e) and FIG. 154(f), Based on the reception of the operation on the 3A operation part, the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA3 that suggests the operation status is changed from the previously appearing "Aspect JA3a" to the different "Aspect JA3b". The display changes are executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 154(f), the enemy character BOSS-A3 is changed to a wounded state, the lightning-based magic by the ally character YS-A3 is changed to a state of higher strength, and the gauge image HP-A3 will be changed to a state in which the remaining HP gauge is reduced. According to such a configuration, through the change in the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA3, the production content corresponding to the third A acceptance permission state is changed to the operation acceptance (by the auto continuous hit function) performed at timing tAc2-B2. Based on the result of performance judgment), it is suggested that progress has been made.

Then, after the production content has progressed in this way, when one operation reception is made to the 3A operation section, as shown in FIG. The content of the production progresses, such as ``Friendly character YS-A3 attacks injured enemy character BOSS-A3 using lightning-based magic with increased strength.'' ``Video display'' will be displayed.

In this production example, after the production content has progressed, the degree of progress of the production content will not be returned to the state before the progress as long as the 3A acceptance acceptance state continues. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again to the 3A operation section after one video display that has changed to the advanced production content described above is completed, when an operation is accepted again at the 3A operation section. The mode (here, the mode in which "ally character YS-A3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning-based magic) appears as a single video display that changes to the advanced performance content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is activated, during the period after timing tAc2-B2 when the production content has progressed, the " ``One video display'' will be played multiple times as many times as the number of operations accepted by the auto continuous hit function.

In addition, even in the period after the timing tAc2-B2 when the production content has progressed, the manner in which the ally character YS-A3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning-based magic (one video display) will change after the above reception. A new execution is started every fixed time (predetermined time). Therefore, the above-mentioned "one video display" in which the production content has progressed will also be started anew at a fixed time interval by the automatic continuous hit function, and the "one video display" in such a progress state In the figure, the repeated display is expressed as "continuous hit display HA3b".

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, when "timing tAc2-B2", which is the timing at which the effect content is advanced, arrives, the effects shown in FIGS. 152(e), (f) and 154(e), As shown in (f), the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA3 changes from “Aspect JA3a” to “Aspect JA3b”, and the aspect of continuous hitting display HA3 also changes from “Aspect HA3a” to “Aspect HA3b”. That will happen. From then on, while the auto continuous hit function is enabled (timings tAc2-B2 to tAc2-B3), while the situation suggestion display JA3 is displayed as "Aspect JA3b", the continuous hit display HA3 is displayed as "Aspect JA3b". HA3b".

In this example, the mode of the continuous hit display HA3 is changed according to the progress of the performance content, but it may not be changed according to the progress of the performance content. In other words, even if the continuous hit display HA3 is configured to continue to be executed in the same mode regardless of the progress of the production content, the player cannot activate the automatic continuous hit function through the continuous hit display HA3. It is possible to check the current situation and the number of operations accepted (frequency), and it is also possible to check the degree of progress of the production content through the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA3.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is accepted once for the "3A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 3A acceptance permission state, the In addition to the "3A post-reception display", the first post-reception output sound can be output as the "3A post-reception output sound" as shown in FIG. 152(g). As such "3A post-reception output sound", in addition to the first post-reception output sound SA3 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display", there are also sounds as shown in FIG. 152(h). Additionally, as described above, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 indicating that the performance content corresponding to the third A acceptance permission state has progressed can be output.

Therefore, in the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 in the example shown in FIG. Then, based on the operation acceptance (performance progress) at timing tAc2-B2, the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is started in mode SB3b-1. As a result, the player can recognize that the production content has progressed through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 to be longer than that of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 corresponding to the operation acceptance.

However, in this production example, the first post-reception output sound SA3, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display", is output in the same manner before and after the production content progresses. We are planning to realize this as follows. Therefore, when timing tAc2-B2, which is the timing at which the content of the production progresses, arrives, based on the acceptance of the operation, the output of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 as a new "sound effect" is started. However, the mode is the same as when the operation is accepted before timing tAc2-B2 (the execution is different depending on whether or not the production progress occurs at timing tAc2-B2). (the aspects are the same).

In other words, in this case, over the entire period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 when the so-called auto continuous hit function is activated, the sound effect corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" (output after the first reception) The sound SA3) will be newly outputted in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeat function, and the repeated output of such a "sound effect" is referred to as the "output sound SA3a after the first reception" in the figure. ”. Note that the output mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a during this period is the same as the above-mentioned "period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2", so a description thereof will be omitted here. shall be.

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is not changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content, but may be changed in accordance with the progress of the performance content.

However, even in a situation where the continuous hit display HA3b is executed by such an automatic repeated hit function (period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3), as shown in FIG. As display HA3b, "Friendly character YS-A3 attacks injured enemy character BOSS-A3 with strong lightning-based magic" appears repeatedly at regular intervals. JA3" may be made difficult to see or become inconspicuous, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the 3A acceptance permission state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the production examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 154 are such that the player operates the 3A operation section at timing tAc2-B3 in order to more actively check the operation status in the 3A acceptance permission state. This assumes that the auto continuous hit function is disabled once again.

Here, as mentioned above, in the 3A acceptance acceptance state, while the 3A acceptance acceptance state continues, the operation state of the 3A operation section is interrupted (it is set to a non-operation state) and the auto continuous tap function is activated. Even if it is invalidated, the continuous hit display HA3, which has been in the running state, will not be turned into a hidden state as a result of this. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(f) and FIG. 154(g), even if the operating state of the third A operating section is temporarily interrupted at timing tAc2-B3, the continuous hitting display HA3b will be displayed after timing tAc2-B3. (even after the 3A operation unit is in the non-operational state), for example, until the above-mentioned "one video display" in the execution state is executed for a predetermined display time and is finished displaying. , or the execution state continues for a predetermined period of time from the non-operating state.

Also, similar to the case of the continuous hit display HA3a, if you interrupt the operation on the 3A operation section and put it in the non-operational state while the continuous hit display HA3b is displayed, change it to the non-operational state and then The time until the continuous hit display HA3b is turned off is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be undefined.

Also, as mentioned above, in the 3A acceptance acceptance state, while the 3A acceptance acceptance state continues, the operation state of the 3A operation section is interrupted (it is set to a non-operation state), and the automatic repeated press function is disabled. Even if this happens, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a, which had been in the output state until then, will not be turned into the non-output state as a result of this. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(g) etc., even if the operation state of the third A operation section is temporarily interrupted at timing tAc2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a will continue to be outputted from timing tAc2-B3 ( Even after the 3A operation section becomes non-operational), the above "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in the execution state is executed for a predetermined output time until it finishes outputting. The output state continues for a predetermined period of time or a predetermined period of time from the non-operating state.

However, at timing tAc2-B3 shown in FIG. 152, while the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 that started outputting at timing tAc2-B2 continues to be output, the operating state of the third A operating section This assumes that the service is interrupted.

In this regard, in the 3A acceptance permission state, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 also indicates that the operation state of the 3A operation section is interrupted (into a non-operation state), similar to the first post-acceptance output sound SA3. The output state will not be terminated (made inaudible) by the fact that the output has been heard). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(h) etc., even if the operation state of the third A operation section is temporarily interrupted at timing tAc2-B3, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1 will not be generated after timing tAc2-B3. (even after the 3rd A operation section is in the non-operating state), it is executed for a predetermined output time until it finishes outputting, or for a predetermined time from the non-operating state. The output state will continue.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the third A operation section is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is being output and it is brought into a non-operating state, the first reception The time until the post-output sound SA3a is brought into a non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be undefined. Similarly, regarding the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, if the operation on the 3A operation section is interrupted while the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is being output and it is brought into a non-operational state, The time from the operation state until the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is set to the non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be undefined.

According to such a configuration, how much time has passed since the operation state of the third A operation section is temporarily interrupted (put into a non-operation state) and the automatic repeated hit function is disabled? Predict whether the output sound SA3 after reception and the output sound SB3 after reception will become inaudible, that is, whether it will be possible to confirm more reliably that the auto continuous hit function has been disabled. It becomes difficult. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be spent remaining in the 3A reception acceptance state, so it is difficult to predict how much time will be spent in the 3A reception permission state, so it is difficult to predict how much time will be spent in the 3A reception permission state. It is now expected to create a suitable sense of tension.

Further, in the 3A acceptance permission state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 3A operation unit is interrupted while the continuous hitting display HA3b and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a are in the execution state (non-operation state). 152(f) and (g), the timing at which the display HA3b is turned into a hidden state and the output sound SA3a after the first reception is The timings at which the non-output state is made are different from each other. In the figure, the timing at which the continuous hit display HA3b is set to a hidden state is before the timing at which the output sound SA3a after the first reception is set to a non-output state, but the relationship is reversed. You may set it so that Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state of non-display or non-output is indefinite, the timing at which the continuous hit display HA3b is set to the non-display state may be different from when the output sound SA3a after the first reception is non-displayed. There may be both cases in which the timing is before the timing at which the output state is made and cases in which the timing is in the output state and in which the timing is after the timing. Alternatively, the timings may be the same. Regarding the relationship between the display HA3b during repeated hits and the first output sound SA3a after reception, the relationship between the display HA3b during repeated hits and the second output sound SB3 after reception, and the relationship between the display HA3b during repeated hits and the output sound SA3a after reception, etc. and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, and the same can be said of other examples.

According to such a configuration, in the third A acceptance acceptance state according to this embodiment, the continuous hitting display HA3b, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1 are in the execution state, respectively. 152(f), (g), (h) or FIG. 154(g). As shown in FIG. 3, while the third A operating section is in the non-operating state, the continuous hitting display HA3b continues to be displayed, and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a continues to be output. Then, a situation appears in which the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1 continues to be output. However, after this, as shown in FIG. 152(f), FIG. 154(h), etc., due to the passage of time after the third A operation section is put into the non-operating state (time passage from timing tAc2-B3), The continuous hit display HA3b is now hidden. As a result, the player can easily recognize that he/she is in a situation where the auto-repeat hit function is disabled, as well as the player's friendly character YS-A3, enemy character BOSS-A3, gauge image, etc. It becomes possible to easily recognize the mode of the situation suggestion display JA3, such as HP-A3, which suggests the operation status (here, the mode JA3b in which the presentation content has progressed) (see FIG. 154(h)).

In addition, originally, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 would also be generated based on the time elapsed since the third A operation section was put in the non-operational state (time elapsed from timing tAc2-B3). ), each continued output state is terminated (made inaudible).

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 152(a), the timing is after the timing tAc2-B3 when the third A operation section is put into the non-operating state, and the output sound SA3a after the first reception and the output sound after the second reception At timing tAc2-C1 (presentation situation shown in FIG. 154(i)) when all output sounds SB3 are in the audible state (before the output state is ended), the 3rd A operating section is put into the operating state again. I am assuming the case.

In this example, even if the "3rd A operating section (here, the operating button 410)" is brought into the operating state again at timing tAc2-C1 within the 3rd A acceptance acceptance state and the operation is accepted, the above-mentioned timing tAc2-C1 As in the case of B1, using this as a trigger, as shown in FIGS. 152(f) and (g), the "3rd A post-reception change (3rd A post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception is caused again. (The presentation situation shown in FIG. 154(i)).

More specifically, when an operation is accepted for the "3rd A operating section (here, the operating button 410)" at timing tAc2-C1 within the 3rd A acceptance acceptance state, the process shown in FIG. 152(f), As shown in (g), as a change after receiving the third A, the "first post-reception output sound SA3 (one video worth of "Sound effect corresponding to the display)" is output audibly again, and "3A post-reception display (one video display)" in response to the operation reception on the "3A operation section (here, operation button 410)" will start displaying again.

In this example, when the operation on the 3A operation unit is restarted at timing tAc2-C1 within the 3A reception permission state, the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception permission state is shown in FIG. 154(h). This is based on the assumption that the situation does not progress from the state (the progress state of the first stage). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 154(i), the 3A post-reception change is the same as when execution was first started based on the operation reception for the 3A operation unit at the timing tAc-B2. In this manner, the execution of the 3rd A post-acceptance changes (3A post-acceptance display, 3A post-acceptance output sound, etc.) is started. Note that the details of the performance are as described above, so the explanation will be omitted here.

However, as described above, in this example, at the timing tAc2-C1 when the operation on the third A operation unit is restarted, both the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 are in an audible state. This is based on the assumption that the country will arrive in the middle of the country.

In this regard, regarding the first post-acceptance output sound SA3, the previous output state is terminated based on the fact that the operation on the 3A operation section has been started again (the operation has been accepted) at timing tAc2-C1. At the same time, new output is started in response to the reception of the new operation. On the other hand, regarding the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, some kind of change is caused based on the fact that the operation on the third A operation section has been started again (the operation has been accepted) at timing tAc2-C1. There is no output, so the previous output state is continued.

According to such a configuration, in the 3A acceptance acceptance state, while the 3A post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation reception is being output, the 3A operation unit, which has been in the non-operation state, is When the operation is accepted, this triggers both the case where the 3A post-acceptance output sound is terminated (first post-acceptance output sound SA3) and the case where it is not terminated (second post-acceptance output sound SB3). Therefore, it is possible to suitably provide a feeling of tension when the third A operating section, which has been in a non-operating state, is brought into an operating state again.

Note that the continuous hit display HA3 may also be configured such that its display state may be continued at timing tAc2-C1. In this case, regarding the continuous hit display HA3, when an operation is accepted for the 3A operation unit that was previously inactive, the previous "one video display" that was in the middle of execution will be displayed. It is desirable to terminate the process midway and instead start a new display (one video display) triggered by the acceptance of the new operation.

Furthermore, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 154, the operation by the player (operation state of the 3rd A operation section) that starts at timing tAc2-C1 continues until timing tAc3 when the 3rd A acceptance permission state ends. This assumes that the operating state is maintained and the auto continuous hit function is enabled.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 (the period during which the 3A operation section is maintained in the operating state again), the operation reception for the 3A operation section is performed multiple times by the automatic continuous tap function, and the Each time, a post-acceptance change (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance accessory action, etc.) is executed in accordance with the operation acceptance.

Then, even during the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 (the period during which the third A operation section is maintained in the operating state again), such changes after reception are executed multiple times by the automatic continuous hit function. Regarding the state of the time (such as the display HA3b during repeated hits and the state of the output sound SA3a after the first reception), unless there is further progress in the production content, the above-mentioned "from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3" will be applied. This is the same as in the case of “period” (see FIG. 154(f)). Note that the details of the performance are as described above, so the explanation will be omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 according to the example shown in FIG. This is based on the assumption that the production content corresponding to the 3A reception acceptance state has further progressed (the second stage has progressed) based on the result of the judgment (e.g., the result of the judgment) (see Fig. 154(j)). the performance situation shown). In particular, timing tAc2-C2 in this example assumes a case where the final stage of the performance mode among the performance contents corresponding to the third A reception acceptance state has progressed.

In this respect, the 3A acceptance acceptance state is different from the above-mentioned 1A acceptance acceptance state and 2A acceptance acceptance state, and progresses to the final stage of the production content corresponding to the 3A reception acceptance state. Even if this occurs, the validity period is not terminated midway, and this occurs as a type of validity period that always continues until timing tAc3 (Fig. 152(a), ( e) and FIG. 154(j), etc.).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc2-C2 according to the example shown in FIG. In contrast, in the period from timing tAc2-C2 to timing tAc3, the state in which operation reception on the third A operation unit is allowed continues. In this case, the "3rd A post-reception change (3rd A post-reception performance)" will be executed in a manner in which the production content is further advanced (final stage production mode) (see FIG. 154(j)). .

More specifically, at timing tAc2-C2, as shown in FIGS. 152(e) and 154(j), a situation suggestion display JA3 indicating the operation situation is displayed based on the operation reception on the third A operation section. A display change is executed to change the aspect of ``aspect JA3b'' that has appeared up to that point to a different ``aspect JA3c''. Here, as shown in FIG. 154(j), the enemy character BOSS-A3 is changed to a defeated state, and the lightning-based magic by the ally character YS-A3 is exploding around the enemy character BOSS-A3. As a result, the gauge image HP-A3 is changed to a state in which the remaining HP gauge is further decreased (here, "0"). According to such a configuration, through the change in the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA3, the performance content corresponding to the third A acceptance permission state is changed to the operation acceptance (by the auto continuous hit function) performed at timing tAc2-C2. Based on the result of performance judgment), it is suggested that progress has been made.

As described above, the "mode JA3c" as the situation suggestion display JA3 corresponds to the "final stage production mode" of the production contents corresponding to the 3A acceptance acceptance state.

Then, after further progress has been made in the content of the production, when one operation reception is made to the 3A operation section, as shown in FIG. 154 (j) as the "3A post reception display", , the above-mentioned "one-time video display" will be performed in a more advanced manner, such as "ally character YS-A3 uses even more powerful lightning-based magic to defeat enemy character BOSS-A3." will be displayed.

In this production example, after the production content has further progressed, as long as the 3A acceptance acceptance state continues, the degree of progress of the production content will not be returned to the state before the progress. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again to the 3A operation section after the one-time video display that has changed to the more advanced production contents described above, the operation is accepted again at the 3A operation section. The state of the moment (in this case, the state in which the friendly character YS-A3 defeats the enemy character BOSS-A3 using lightning-based magic with even higher strength) is the same as that of the one episode that has changed to the more advanced production content. Appears as a video display.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tAc2-C1 when the so-called auto continuous hit function is activated to timing tAc3, in the period after timing tAc2-C2 when the production content has progressed, the "one-shot video" with further changes in appearance is "Display" will be played multiple times by the auto-repeat function for the number of times the operation is accepted.

Also, even in the period after timing tAc2-C2, the manner in which ally character YS-A3 defeats enemy character BOSS-A3 using lightning-based magic with even higher strength (one video display) is As a change after the above-mentioned acceptance, the execution is started anew at a certain time (predetermined time). Therefore, the above-mentioned "one video display" in which the production content is further advanced will also be started anew at a fixed time interval by the automatic continuous hit function, and the "one video display" in such a progressed state ” is expressed as “Continuous hit display HA3c” in the figure.

In this manner, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, when "timing tAc2-C2", which is the timing at which the effect content is further advanced, arrives, the effects shown in FIGS. 152(e), (f) and 154(i) are displayed. , (j), the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA3 changes from "aspect JA3b" to "aspect JA3c", and the aspect of continuous hitting display HA3 also changes from "aspect HA3b" to "aspect HA3c". I will do it. From then on, while the auto continuous hit function is enabled (timings tAc2-C2 to tAc3), while the situation suggestion display JA3 is displayed as "Aspect JA3c", the continuous hit display HA3 is displayed as "Aspect HA3c". It will be executed in

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is accepted once for the "3A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 3A acceptance permission state, the In addition to the "3A post-reception display", the first post-reception output sound can be output as the "3A post-reception output sound" as shown in FIG. 152(g). As such "3A post-reception output sound", in addition to the first post-reception output sound SA3 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display", there are also sounds as shown in FIG. 152(h). Additionally, as described above, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 indicating that the performance content corresponding to the third A acceptance permission state has progressed can be output.

Therefore, in the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 according to the example shown in FIG. 152, when timing tAc2-C2, which is the timing at which the production content is advanced, arrives, as shown in FIG. 152(h), Based on the operation acceptance (performance progress) at timing tAc2-C2, the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is started in mode SB3b-2. As a result, the player can recognize that the production content has progressed through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound.

However, in this production example, the first post-reception output sound SA3, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display", is output in the same manner before and after the production content progresses. We are planning to realize this as follows. Therefore, when timing tAc2-C2, which is the timing at which the content of the production progresses, arrives, based on the acceptance of the operation, the output of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 as a new "sound effect" is started. However, the mode is the same as when the operation is accepted before timing tAc2-C2 (the execution is different depending on whether or not the production progress occurs at timing tAc2-C2). (the aspects are the same).

In other words, in this case, the sound effect (output sound SA3 after first reception) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one video display" is performed over the entire period from timing tAc2-C1 at which the so-called auto continuous hit function is activated to timing tAc3. ) will start to be output anew in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeat function, and the repeated output of such "sound effects" is designated as "first reception output sound SA3a" in the figure. I am trying to express it. Note that the output mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a during this period is the same as the above-mentioned "period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2", so a description thereof will be omitted here. shall be.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 154, the 3rd A acceptance permission state is ended when timing tAc3 arrives while the auto continuous hit function activated at timing tAc2-C1 continues. This is assumed to be the case.

In other words, in this case, in the 3A acceptance permission state, as shown in FIGS. 152(e) to 152(h), the situation suggestion display JA3 and the continuous hitting display HA3 are displayed, and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is displayed. The process is terminated while the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is being output, and at this time, the automatic continuous hit function is also disabled.

Here, as shown in FIG. 152(e) and FIG. 154(k), the situation suggestion display JA3 is set to be hidden based on the termination of the 3A acceptance permission state. ing. In the examples shown in FIG. 152(e) and FIG. 154(k), the state is set to be hidden at the timing when the third A acceptance permission state is ended, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the 3A acceptance permission state is terminated and a certain period of time (time greater than 0 seconds) has elapsed from the terminated timing tAc3, the display becomes hidden. Even if the presentation progresses immediately before the end of the 3A acceptance permission state, it is possible to suitably secure enough time to confirm the progress. In this case, it is desirable that the timing at which the situation suggestion display JA3 is hidden is always later than the timing at which the continuous hit display HA3, which will be described later, is hidden.

Furthermore, regarding the continuous hitting display HA3, unlike the above-mentioned 1st A reception allowing state (multiple hitting display HA1) and the above 2nd A receiving allowing state (multiple hitting display HA2), the 3rd A reception allowing state is ended. Due to this, it is no longer hidden. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(f) and FIG. 154(k), the continuous hitting display HA3b was in the execution state even after the timing tAc3 (even after the 3rd A acceptance permission state ended). The above-mentioned "video display for one time" is executed for a predetermined display time until the display is finished, or the execution state continues for a predetermined time from a non-operating state. Become.

In addition, when the 3rd A acceptance permission state is terminated while the continuous hitting display HA3 is displayed, the 1st A reception allowing state (the repeated hitting display HA1) or the 2nd A reception allowing state (the repeated hitting display HA2) is terminated. ), the time from the end of the 3A acceptance permission state until the continuous hit display HA3 is hidden is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite. ing.

Furthermore, regarding the output sound SA3a after the first reception, unlike the case of the above-mentioned 1A reception permission state (repeated hit display HA1) and the above 2A reception permission state (repeated hit display HA2), the 3A reception permission state It is designed so that it will not be put into a non-output state when it is terminated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(g) etc., the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a remains in the output state after the timing tAc3 (even after the 3A acceptance permission state has ended). The output state continues until the "sound effect corresponding to each video display" is executed and output for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from a non-operating state. That will happen.

Furthermore, regarding the second post-reception output sound SB3, the 3rd A reception permission state is similar to the above 1A reception permission state (repeated hit display HA1) and the 2A reception permission state (repeated hit display HA2). It is designed so that it will not be put into a non-output state when it is terminated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(h) etc., the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is output for a predetermined output time even after timing tAc3 (even after the third A acceptance permission state ends). The output state continues until the output is completed after execution, or for a predetermined period of time from the non-operating state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the 3A acceptance permission state is terminated while the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is being output, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is output from the end of the 3A acceptance permission state. The time until the output becomes non-output is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be undefined. Similarly, regarding the second post-reception output sound SB3, if the 3A reception permission state is terminated while the second post reception output sound SB3 is being output, the 3A reception permission state is terminated. The time from when the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is put into a non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be undefined.

Further, in the 3A acceptance permission state according to this embodiment, even if the 3A reception permission state is terminated while the continuous hitting display HA3 and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a are in the execution state, 152(f), (g), etc., the timing at which the continuous hit display HA3 is set to a non-display state and the timing at which the output sound SA3a after the first reception is set to a non-output state are different from each other. Trying to be different. In the figure, the timing at which the continuous hit display HA3 is set to a hidden state is before the timing at which the output sound SA3a after the first reception is set to a non-output state, but the relationship is the opposite. You may set it so that Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state of non-display or non-output is indefinite, the timing at which the continuous hit display HA3 is set to the non-display state may be different from when the output sound SA3a after the first reception is non-displayed. There may be both cases in which the timing is before the timing at which the output state is made and cases in which the timing is in the output state and in which the timing is after the timing. Alternatively, the timings may be the same. Regarding the relationship between the display HA3 during repeated hits and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a, the relationship between the display HA3 during continuous hits and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, and the relationship between the display HA3 during continuous hits and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, and the same can be said of other examples.

According to such a configuration, in the third A acceptance acceptance state according to this embodiment, the continuous hitting display HA3c, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-2 are in the execution state, respectively. 152(f), (g), (h) or FIG. 154(k). As shown in , etc., the continuous hit display HA3c continues to be displayed, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a continues to be output, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-2 is output. A situation in which the state continues appears. However, after this, due to the elapse of time since the end of the third A acceptance permission state (time elapsed from timing tAc3), the continuous continuous hit display HA3b is hidden, and the output after the first reception is The sound SA3a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-2 will be in a non-output state.

In this example, it is assumed that the timing tAc2-C2 arrives after the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1, which started outputting at the timing tAc2-B2, becomes inaudible. It may be arranged that the output sound SB3b-1 may arrive while the output sound SB3b-1 is being audibly output after the reception. In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 changes from "Aspect SB3b-1" to a different "Aspect SB3b-2" at timing tAc2-C2 (by ending Aspect SB3b-1). , aspect SB3b-2) may be output in an alternative form.

Further, the third A reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 153, if no operation is accepted on the 3A operating section until the timing tAc3 arrives in the 3A reception permission state, the 3A reception permission is not accepted based on the arrival of the timing tAc3. The state is only terminated, and the 3rd A post-reception change that appears when an operation is performed on the 3rd A operating section is not started.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "4th A reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 155 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when the "4th A reception permissible state" occurs based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 4A" being satisfied and an operation is performed by the player. It is. FIG. 156 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the "4th A acceptance permission state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the "4th A acceptance permission state" occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "4th A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "4th A fluctuation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After that, start the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the 4th A fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 4th A fluctuation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "4th A variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 155(c), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "4th A variation pattern", timing tAd2 has arrived when the 4th A time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ. Based on (based on "Condition 4A" being met), "Changes after 4A reception (4A production situation suggestion display JA4, 4A single presentation TA4, 4A output sound after reception SA4, SB4, etc.) ) is allowed to occur (situation shown in FIG. 157(a)).

Here, in the 4A acceptance permission state according to this embodiment, the “4A operation unit” where operation reception is permitted is set as the operation button 410, and the 4A reception permission state is ended. It is permissible to accept multiple operations until the process is completed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, as shown in FIGS. A simulated image display MG-A4 imitating the "operation button 410" as the 4A operation section, and a message display MA4 related to the operation on the operation target (here, the "operation button 410" as the 4A operation section); A situation suggestion display JA4 indicating the operation status is displayed when timing tAd1 arrives before the corresponding 4A acceptance permission state occurs (before the operation acceptance for the 4A operation unit is allowed). It has become something to do.

However, the sample image display MG-A4, message display MA4, and situation suggestion display JA4 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 4th A reception permissible state occurs; It may be displayed at the same time as the event occurs or a little later than the event. However, in this example, it is particularly desirable that the situation suggestion display JA4 be displayed before the first operation acceptance for the fourth A operation unit is made in the fourth A acceptance permission state. Further, the timing at which the sample image display MG-A4 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA4 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, message display MA4 may be displayed before sample image display MG-A4 is displayed.

Regarding the sample image display MG-A4, message display MA4, and situation suggestion display JA4, after the display starts, regardless of the operating state of the 4A operation section, the 4A reception permission state is at least terminated. It is displayed continuously during the period.

Here, the "sample image display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4th A acceptance permission state uses only the "first color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme.

In addition, "Make image display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4th A acceptance permission state is such that "After the part of the "Operation receiving section" that is the operation target is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α), When one periodic change is a moving image that is sequentially displayed in each manner shown in FIGS. It is something that will appear. However, this cycle 5A time is set as a longer time (long cycle) than the cycle 1A time that appears in the 1A acceptance permission state, and may be set as the same time as the cycle 2A time, for example. Therefore, in the fourth A acceptance acceptance state, the "operation receiving part" is depicted as slowly moving up and down its movable range.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 156(b), the 4th A acceptance permission state is continued until timing tAd3 arrives when there is no operation reception for the 4th A operation unit, and is based on the arrival of timing tAd3. It will be terminated. Therefore, while the 4A reception permission state continues, a gauge image (in this example, a gauge image (in this example, a gauge image in the sample image display MG-A4) indicating the remaining time until the timing tAd3 at which the 4A reception permission state ends Although the description is such that the number of images) decreases over time, this description may not necessarily be performed.

In addition, if the "sample image display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4A reception permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tAd2 when the 4A reception permission state occurs, the periodic changes and changes in the gauge image It is desirable to start after waiting for the timing tAd2. That is, in this case, the "sample image display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4th A acceptance permission state is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(α) until timing tAd2 arrives. becomes.

In addition, in the 4A acceptance acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 155(c), (d), and 157(a), in addition to the sample image display MG-A4, , operation button 410) (in this case, a message display MA4 displayed as "Defeat the demon! Button 'repeatedly hit'!!") is displayed.

In addition, in the 4A acceptance permission state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 155(e) and 157(a), a situation suggestion display JA4 indicating the operation status in the 4A acceptance permission state, An ally character (in this case, ally character YS-A4) that corresponds to the type of the 4A reception permission state, and an enemy character (here, an enemy depicted as a demon) that corresponds to the type of the 4A reception permission state. The character BOSS-A4) and a gauge image HP-A4 showing its remaining HP gauge are displayed. In the 4th A acceptance acceptance state, "Whether or not the ally character YS-A4 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A4 by accepting multiple operations on the 4th A operation section (the gauge image HP-A4 must be set to 0? It is possible to suggest whether the expectation of winning the jackpot is high or low through the performance such as "whether the player can do it or not". Each time an operation (operation reception) is performed, an effect can be executed such that the "ally character YS-A4" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A4". In this example, the ally character YS-A4, the enemy character BOSS-A4, and the gauge image HP-A4 are displayed as the situation suggestion display JA4, but not all of these displays are necessarily displayed. However, as long as at least one of the ally character YS-A4, the enemy character BOSS-A4, and the gauge image HP-A4 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation status.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 155, at timing tAd2-A1 within the 4A acceptance acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 157(b)), the "4A operation section (here, operation button 410)" is pressed. It is assumed that the first operation is accepted.

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "4th A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAd2-A1 within the 4A acceptance permission state, as shown in FIG. 155(e), As shown in (g) and (h), a "4th A post-reception change (4th A post-reception performance)" is generated in response to the operation reception (the performance situation shown in FIG. 157(b)). ).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "4th A operating section (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tAd2-A1 within the 4th A acceptance acceptance state, the process shown in FIG. 155(f), As shown in (g), as a change after the 4A reception, the 4A post reception output sound corresponding to the operation reception on the 4A operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is audibly output. , the "4th A post-reception display" corresponding to the operation reception on the "4th A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" starts to be displayed.

That is, when one operation is accepted for the "4th A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 4A acceptance permission state, the "4A post-reception display" shown in FIG. 157(b) is displayed. As shown, one video is displayed in which "ally character YS-A4" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A4" with wind-based magic (smoke effect, generation of wind-based magic, etc.). It has become so. However, as will be explained later, in the 4th A reception allowed state, each time an operation reception is performed, "enemy character BOSS-A4" will be injured, the strength of wind magic will increase, and the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-A4 is now decreasing (the content of the production is progressing). If the content of the production progresses in this way, then the state when the operation is accepted to the 4A operation section (here, "ally character YS-A4" is changed to "enemy character BOSS-A4" by wind-based magic) 155(e), (f), and FIG. 157(d), (f), (h). etc.).

However, as will be described later, the 4A acceptance acceptance state according to this example is similar to the above-mentioned 3rd acceptance acceptance state (before the timing tAd3 at which the 4A acceptance acceptance state ends due to the passage of time). This occurs as a type of validity period in which early termination due to operation acceptance does not occur. In other words, in this case, every time an operation is accepted during the valid period of this type (4th A reception permissible state), the production contents corresponding to the 4A reception permissible state must be changed (progressed). If there is, there will be a problem with the processing when the content of the performance has progressed to its final form.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned 3A reception permission state, if a further operation is accepted under the situation where the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception permission state has progressed to the final state, each time the operation reception is made, the final We decided to repeatedly cause changes after acceptance regarding the aspect. On the other hand, in the 4A reception permission state according to this example, if the operation reception is further performed in a situation where the production content corresponding to the 4A reception permission state has progressed to the final state, the operation reception will trigger the first The production mode (predetermined production mode) is made to appear, and the production is restarted from the situation where the first production mode (predetermined production mode) appears. The first performance mode (predetermined performance mode) may be the mode that appears when the 3A reception permission state occurs, or the first operation reception is performed after the 3A reception permission state occurs. It may also refer to an aspect that appears based on something. According to such a configuration, even after the content of the presentation has progressed to the final form, the player can enjoy the progress of the presentation from the first presentation form to the final form over and over again. Each time the performance progresses, it may be suggested that there is a high possibility (expectation level) of winning the jackpot. In this case, when the jackpot has not been obtained, the first performance mode (predetermined performance mode) is made to appear at the stage before progressing to the final mode, and the first production mode (predetermined performance mode) is This means that the performance will have to be redone from the situation in which the performance mode) is appearing.

In addition, in this example, when an operation is accepted for the "4th A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" once in the 4A acceptance permission state, in addition to the above "4A post-reception display", the above As the "4th A post-reception output sound", the first post-reception output sound SA4 can be output as shown in FIG. 155(g). Note that the first post-reception output sound SA4 according to this example is the "mode in which the ally character YS-A4 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind-based magic (smoke)" that appears as the "4th A post-reception display" above. It functions as a sound effect corresponding to "effects, generation of wind-based magic, etc." In addition, at this time, as will be described later, there is a possibility that the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 is further output as the "4th A post-acceptance output sound". The second post-reception output sound SB4 according to this example is output when the production content of the "4th A post-reception display" progresses. Note that here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is realized to function as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect. , any information can be used as long as it can indicate that the player has accepted the operation.

In this manner, in the 4A acceptance acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted for the 4A operation unit (here, the operation button 410), the ally character YS-A4 changes to the enemy character BOSS-A4. In other words, the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A4" decreases due to multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A4" (as the production progresses). As a result, when the HP becomes 0, it means that the "enemy character BOSS-A4" has been defeated, and this provides a performance that suggests that the level of expectation is high. However, in this case, if the HP does not become 0 despite multiple attacks and the "enemy character BOSS-A4" cannot be defeated, it is suggested that the level of expectation is low.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 155(a), it is assumed that the operation by the player (operation state of the fourth A operation section) started at timing tAd2-A1 is continued until timing tAd2-A2. It has become.

However, the 4th A acceptance acceptance state is different from the 1A acceptance acceptance state, the 2A acceptance acceptance state, the 3A acceptance acceptance state, etc., and "even if the operation unit (4A operation unit) is maintained in the operation state, Multiple times for types in which the corresponding post-reception changes (for example, post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, post-reception function action, etc.) are not executed multiple times (types in which the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated) It is classified as "operation valid state". Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 155(a), during the period from timing tAd2-A1 to timing tAd2-A2 (period in which the 4th A operating section is maintained in the operating state), no operation is accepted for the 4th A operating section. It is performed only once at timing tAd2-A1, and changes after one reception according to the operation reception at timing tAd2-A1 (for example, display after reception, output sound after reception, light emission after reception, light emission after reception, etc.) (e.g., role-playing actions) will be executed.

Therefore, in this production example, at timing tAd2-A1, as shown in FIG. 157(b), as the display after receiving the fourth A, the ally character YS-A4 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind-based magic. The mode (smoke effect, generation of wind magic, etc.) will begin to be displayed (one video display).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 157(b), as the display after receiving the 4th A, the enemy character BOSS-A4 is changed to a state in which the enemy character BOSS-A4 has received the first level of damage, and the enemy character BOSS-A4 is The wind magic is displayed as a single display TA4 (mode TA4a), and the gauge image HP-A4 is changed to a mode in which the remaining HP gauge is decreased by one stage. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) will change from "Aspect JA4a" before the operation to "Aspect JA4b", and this will cause the situation to change from "Aspect JA4a" before the operation to "Aspect JA4b". It is now suggested that the performance content corresponding to the 4th A reception acceptance state has evolved based on the operation reception performed at timing tAd2-A1.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the situation suggestion display JA4 whose appearance has changed in this way continues to be displayed until at least the 4A acceptance permission state ends, so while the 4A reception permission state continues. This allows the player to easily recognize the current operating situation.

On the other hand, the single display TA4, which is described as a wind-based magic by the ally character YS-A4, is made invisible after a predetermined time (certain time) has elapsed. The production examples shown in FIGS. 155 and 157 are based on the assumption that the time has elapsed before the timing tAd2-A2 arrives and the single display TA4 (aspect TA4a) is turned into a non-display state. It has become. In this example, the single presentation display TA4 is displayed in different modes depending on the degree of progress of the performance content, but it is arranged to be displayed in one mode (the same mode) regardless of the degree of progress of the production content. Good too. Alternatively, in the 4A acceptance acceptance state according to this example, when an operation is accepted, the state of the situation suggestion display JA4 always changes, and this can indicate that the operation has been accepted. In view of this, the single presentation TA4 may not necessarily be displayed.

Furthermore, at timing tAd2-A1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (4th A post-acceptance output sound) is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to the 4th A post-acceptance display (attack mode). At the same time, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (the 4th A post-acceptance output sound) changes to mode SB4b to indicate that the production content corresponding to the 4A acceptance permission state has progressed to the first stage mode. Output starts at -1.

In this regard, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 corresponding to the 4A reception permission state is continuously output until at least the 4A reception permission state ends. While the 4th A reception acceptance state continues, the player can easily recognize the current operating situation through that aspect. However, regarding the second post-acceptance output sound SB4, the output state does not necessarily have to be terminated while the fourth A acceptance permission state continues; Alternatively, the signal may be outputted for a period shorter than the timings tAd2 to tAd3) and then turned into a non-output state.

On the other hand, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is set to a non-output state after a predetermined time (certain time) has elapsed. The production example shown in FIG. 155 is based on the assumption that after the timing tAd2-A2 has arrived, the time has elapsed and the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is put into a non-output state.

That is, in this case, the timing tAd2-A2 arrives while the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 are both in the output state. However, both the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 according to this example indicate that the fourth A operation section is in the non-operational state (timing tAd2-A2 has arrived). No change will occur as a trigger.

Note that in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect, and it may be necessary may be anything that can indicate that the player has accepted the operation. In addition, regarding the first reception output sound SA4, it was decided to output it in one mode (the same mode) regardless of the degree of progress of the production content, but it was decided to output it in a different mode depending on the degree of progress of the production content. You can also do this. Alternatively, in the 4A acceptance acceptance state according to this example, when an operation is accepted, the second post-acceptance output sound SA4 is always output, which does not indicate that the operation has been accepted. Considering that it is possible, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 may not necessarily be output.

Here, in the 4th A reception acceptance state, before the time required for "one video display (single display TA4)" according to the operation reception has elapsed (while the single display TA4 is being displayed), A case may occur in which the player performs an operation to place the fourth A operation section in a non-operating state and an operation to change it from the non-operating state to an operating state, respectively. In this case, the above-mentioned "single display TA4" is executed after the above-mentioned "certain period of time" has elapsed after the execution of "one video display" in response to the operation reception starts and before it ends. It will be executed in such a manner that "displaying one video" will start, but at this time, the new "displaying one video" will be the same as the previous "displaying one video" which was in the middle of execution. It is also possible to terminate "one video display" midway and execute it in an alternative form.

Similarly, in the 4A reception acceptance state, before the time required to produce the "sound effect corresponding to one video display (output sound SA4 after first reception)" in response to the operation reception has elapsed ( While the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is being output), there are cases in which the player performs an operation to place the fourth A operation section in a non-operating state, and an operation to change it from the non-operating state to an operating state again. It can occur. In this case, the above-mentioned "first reception output sound SA4" is generated after the execution of the "single sound effect" corresponding to the operation reception starts and before the above-mentioned "certain period of time" ends. After a certain amount of time has elapsed, a new "sound effect for one time" will be executed, but in this case, the new "sound effect for one time" will be in a state in the middle of execution. The previous "single effect sound effect" may be terminated midway and executed in its place.

The "Situation Suggestion Display JA4" (see Figure 155(e)) such as the friendly character YS-A4, the enemy character BOSS-A4, and the gauge image HP-A4 are not displayed until the operation is accepted. As mentioned above, it may be realized as something that appears and is displayed when the operation is accepted (until the validity period ends or only for a predetermined time). It is.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to such an example of performance, the performance situation shown in FIG. The performance situation does not appear as a result of the 4A operation section being put into a non-operation state. It simply displays the 4A post-reception display and 4A post-reception output sound (situation suggestion display JA4, single announcement TA4, first post-reception output sound SA4, and second post-reception output sound SB4) that started execution at timing tAd2-A1. ), those for which the conditions for terminating the execution state are not yet satisfied even when timing tAd2-A2 arrives continue the execution state (situation suggestion display JA4, output sound after first reception). SA4, second post-acceptance output sound SB4) If the condition for terminating the execution state before the timing tAd2-A2 arrives, the output sound is output at that point (before the timing tAd2-A2). It simply ends the execution state.

Furthermore, in this example, when the operation on the fourth A operation section is interrupted while the single display TA4 is being displayed and it is brought into the non-operating state, the single display TA4 is changed to the non-display state after the single display TA4 is put into the non-operating state. The time it takes to complete the process is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be undefined.

In addition, in this example, if the operation on the 4A operation section is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is being output and it is brought into a non-operating state, the first reception The time until the post-output sound SA4 is brought into a non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be undefined.

Further, in the 4A acceptance permission state according to this embodiment, when the operation state of the 4A operation section is interrupted while the single announcement TA4 and the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 are in the execution state (non-operation ), the timing at which the single announcement display TA4 is set to the non-display state and the timing at which the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is set to the non-output state are set to be different from each other. In this example, the relationship as to which of the single presentation TA4 and the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is terminated first is not reversed; for example, the single presentation TA4 is , is ensured to end before the first post-acceptance output sound SA4.

According to such a configuration, in the 4A acceptance acceptance state according to this embodiment, the operation state of the 4A operation unit is interrupted while the single announcement TA4 and the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 are in the execution state. When the game is played in such a way (in the non-operation state), the single display TA4 continues to display while the 4A operation section is in the non-operation state, and the output after the first reception is A situation appears in which the sound SA4 continues to be output.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 155(a), at the timing tAd2-B1 within the 4th A acceptance permission state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 157(d)), the ``4th A operation section (here, This assumes that the operation button 410) is put into the operating state again and this operating state continues until timing tAd2-B2.

In this example, if the "4th A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is put into the operating state again at timing tAd2-B1 within the 4A acceptance permission state and the operation is accepted, this will be used as an opportunity to As shown in FIGS. 155(e) to (h), the "4th A post-reception change (4th A post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception is caused again by the amount corresponding to one operation reception. (The presentation situation shown in FIG. 157(d)).

However, as mentioned above, in this example, even when the operation on the 4A operation section is restarted at timing tAd2-B1 within the 4A reception permission state, the production content corresponding to the 4A reception permission state is not advanced. The Rukoto. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 157(d), the change after the 4A reception (the 4A Display after reception, output sound after reception of 4A, etc.) will start to be executed.

Therefore, in this production example, at timing tAd2-B1, as shown in the display after receiving the 4th A, as shown in FIG. , the mode of attacking the enemy character BOSS-A4 (smoke effect, generation of wind magic, etc.) will begin to be displayed (one video display).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 157(d), as the display after receiving the 4th A, the enemy character BOSS-A4 is changed to a state in which the enemy character BOSS-A4 has received the second level of damage, and the enemy character BOSS-A4 is The wind magic is displayed as a single display TA4 in the second stage mode TA4b, and the gauge image HP-A4 is changed to the state in which the remaining HP gauge is decreased by two stages. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) will change from "Aspect JA4b" before the re-operation to "Aspect JA4c". It is now suggested that the performance content corresponding to the 4th A acceptance acceptance state has evolved based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAd2-B1.

Furthermore, at timing tAd2-B1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (4th A post-acceptance output sound) is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to the 4th A post-acceptance display (attack mode). At the same time, the second post-reception output sound SB4 (4th A post-reception output sound) is set to mode SB4b-2 in order to indicate that the production content corresponding to the 4A reception permission state has progressed to the second stage. Output starts with .

Here, in this production example, the timing tAd2-B1 arrives while the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (fourth A post-acceptance output sound) that started outputting at the timing tAd2-A1 is in the output state. Become. At this time, at the timing tAd2-B1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (4th A post-acceptance output sound) terminates the first stage mode SB4b-1 that was in the output state and replaces it. Then, output in the second stage mode SB4b-2 is started.

Furthermore, at timing tAd2-B2, it is assumed that while the single display TA4 is being displayed, the operation on the fourth A operating section is interrupted and the fourth A operating section is brought into a non-operating state. At this time, as described above, the time from when the single display TA4 is set to the non-operating state until the single display TA4 is set to the non-display state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

Then, at timing tAd2-B2 when the 4th A operating section is brought into the non-operating state again, the presentation situation shown in FIG. 157(e) appears; It did not appear as a result of what was done to him. It simply displays the 4th A post-reception display and 4A post-reception output sound (situation suggestion display JA4, single display TA4, first post-reception output sound SA4, and second post-reception output sound SB4) that started execution at timing tAd2-B1. ), the conditions for ending the execution state have not yet been satisfied even when the timing tAd2-B2 arrives, so the execution state is only continued.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 155(a), at timing tAd2-C1 within the 4th A acceptance permission state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 157(f)), the ``4th A operation section (here, It is assumed that the operation button 410) is once again put into the operating state and this operating state is continued until timing tAd2-C2.

In this example, if the "4th A operating unit (here, the operating button 410)" is put into the operating state and the operation is accepted at timing tAd2-C1 within the 4th A acceptance acceptance state, this will trigger the As shown in 155(e) to (h), the "4th A post-reception change (4th A post-reception performance)" corresponding to the operation reception is caused once again by the amount corresponding to one operation reception. (The presentation situation shown in FIG. 157(f)).

However, as described above, in this example, even when the operation on the 4A operation section is started again at timing tAd2-C1 within the 4A reception permission state, the production content corresponding to the 4A reception permission state is not advanced. The Rukoto. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 157(f), the change after the 4A reception (the 4A Display after reception, output sound after reception of 4A, etc.) will start to be executed.

Therefore, in this production example, at timing tAd2-C1, as shown in FIG. 157(f), as shown in FIG. , the mode of attacking the enemy character BOSS-A4 (smoke effect, generation of wind magic, etc.) will begin to be displayed (one video display).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 157(f), as the display after receiving the 4th A, the enemy character BOSS-A4 is changed to a third-level wound, and the enemy character BOSS-A4 is The wind magic is displayed as a single display TA4 in the third stage mode TA4c, and the gauge image HP-A4 is changed to the state in which the remaining HP gauge is decreased by three stages. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) will change from "Aspect JA4c" before the re-operation to "Aspect JA4d". It is now suggested that the performance content corresponding to the 4th A reception acceptance state has evolved based on the operation reception performed at timing tAd2-C1.

Furthermore, at timing tAd2-C1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (4th A post-acceptance output sound) is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to the 4th A post-acceptance display (attack mode). At the same time, the second post-reception output sound SB4 (4th A post-reception output sound) is set to mode SB4b-3 in order to indicate that the production content corresponding to the 4A reception permission state has progressed to the third stage. Output starts with .

Here, in this production example, the timing tAd2-C1 arrives while the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4, which started outputting at the timing tAd2-B1, are in the output state. I will do it. At this time, at the timing tAd2-C1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (4th A post-acceptance output sound) terminates the second stage mode SB4b-2 that was in the output state and replaces it. Then, output in the second stage mode SB4b-3 is started. Furthermore, regarding the first post-reception output sound SA4 (fourth A post-reception output sound), the sound that was in the output state is ended and the output is restarted from the beginning in its place.

Then, at the timing tAd2-C2 when the 4A operating section is brought into the non-operating state again, the presentation situation shown in FIG. It did not appear as a result of what was done to him. It simply displays the 4A post-reception display and 4A post-reception output sound (situation suggestion display JA4, single display TA4, first post-reception output sound SA4, and second post-reception output sound SB4) that started execution at timing tAd2-C1. ), those for which the conditions for terminating the execution state are not yet satisfied even when timing tAd2-C2 arrives continue the execution state (situation suggestion display JA4, output sound after first reception). SA4, second post-acceptance output sound SB4), if the condition for terminating the execution state before the timing tAd2-C2 arrives, at that point (before the timing tAd2-C2) It simply ends the execution state.

Furthermore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 155(a), at timing tAd2-D1 within the 4th A acceptance permission state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 157(h)), the ``4th A operation section (here, This assumes that the "operation button 410)" is brought into the operating state once again, and this operating state is continued at least until timing tAd3.

In this example, if the "4th A operating section (here, the operating button 410)" is put into the operating state and an operation is accepted at timing tAd2-D1 within the 4th A acceptance acceptance state, this will trigger the As shown in 155(e) to (h), the "4th A post-reception change (4th A post-reception performance)" corresponding to the operation reception is caused once again by the amount corresponding to one operation reception. (The performance situation shown in FIG. 157(h)).

However, as described above, in this example, even when the operation on the 4A operation section is started again at timing tAd2-D1 within the 4A reception permission state, the performance content corresponding to the 4A reception permission state progresses. It will be done. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 157(h), the change after the 4A reception (the 4A Display after reception, output sound after reception of 4A, etc.) will start to be executed.

In this production example, at timing tAd2-D1, as shown in FIG. 157(h) after receiving the 4th A, the ally character YS-A4 is in the final (4th stage) progress mode. The mode of attacking the enemy character BOSS-A4 with magic (smoke effect, generation of wind-based magic, etc.) will begin to be displayed (one video display).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 157(h), the display after receiving the 4th A changes to a state in which the enemy character BOSS-A4 has been defeated, and a single wind-based magic by the ally character YS-A4 is displayed. It is displayed in the final mode TA4d as display TA4, and the gauge image HP-A4 is changed to a mode in which the remaining HP gauge is 0. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) will change from "Aspect JA4d" before the re-operation to "Aspect JA4e". It is now suggested that the performance content corresponding to the 4th A reception acceptance state has evolved based on the operation reception performed at timing tAd2-D1.

Furthermore, at timing tAd2-D1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (4th A post-acceptance output sound) is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to the 4th A post-acceptance display (attack mode). At the same time, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (fourth A post-acceptance output sound) indicates that the production content corresponding to the fourth A acceptance permission state has progressed to the final stage (fourth stage). Output is started in mode SB4b-4.

Here, in this production example, the timing tAd2-D1 arrives while the second post-acceptance output sound SB4, which started outputting at the timing tAd2-C1, is in the output state. At this time, at the timing tAd2-D1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (4th A post-acceptance output sound) terminates the third stage mode SB4b-3 that was in the output state and replaces it. Then, the final stage (fourth stage) mode SB4b-4 starts outputting.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 155 and 157 include the display after the 4A reception and the output sound after the 4A reception (situation suggestion display JA4, single announcement display TA4, first reception Of the post-acceptance output sound SA4 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4), the relevant This is based on the assumption that the timing tAd3 at which the fourth A acceptance permission state ends has arrived.

That is, in this case, the 4th reception acceptance state is such that, as shown in FIGS. 155(e) to (h), the situation suggestion display JA4 is displayed, and the output sound SA4 after the first reception and the second reception The process ends while the post-output sound SB4 is being output.

Here, as for the situation suggestion display JA4, as shown in FIG. 155(e) and FIG. 157(i), based on the termination of the 4th A acceptance permission state, the aspect JA4e that was in the display state until then is is set to be hidden.

However, as for the situation suggestion display JA4, as shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 157(i), based on the arrival of timing tAd3, the state that was in the display state until then changes (progresses) to the state JA4L. Then, the mode JA4L may be displayed only for a predetermined time even after the fourth A acceptance permission state ends.

Regarding the aspect JA4L of the situation suggestion display JA4, as many types (JA4La to JA4Le) as necessary are prepared in order to correspond to the aspect of the situation suggestion display JA4 (JA4a to JA4e) that can be displayed at timing tAd3. Then, when timing tAd3 arrives, mode JA4L corresponding to the mode displayed at that time may be selectively executed. Incidentally, in the examples shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 157, in response to the mode JA4e of the situation suggestion display JA that was being displayed when the timing tAd3 arrived, the situation suggestion display is triggered by the arrival of the timing tAd3. It is assumed that the "aspect JA4e" of JA4 is changed (progressed) to the "aspect JA4Le".

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 155 and 157(i), the single display TA4 is hidden, but if timing tAd3 arrives while the single display TA4 is being displayed. Then, when the 4th A acceptance permission state is terminated, it is no longer hidden. In other words, in this case, the single display TA4 continues after the timing tAd3 (even after the 4th A acceptance permission state ends), for example, the "one video display" in the execution state is displayed for a predetermined display time. The execution state continues for a predetermined period of time until it is executed and displayed, or for a predetermined period of time from the non-operation state.

In addition, if the 4A reception permission state is terminated while the single display TA4 is being displayed, the period from the end of the 4A reception permission state until the single display TA4 is hidden is The time is not set as a constant time, but is set to be indefinite.

Furthermore, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is not set to a non-output state upon termination of the fourth A acceptance permission state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 155(g) etc., the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 remains in the output state even after the timing tAd3 (even after the 4th A reception permissible state ends). The output state continues until the "sound effect corresponding to each video display" is executed and output for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from a non-operating state. That will happen.

Furthermore, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 is not set to a non-output state upon termination of the fourth A acceptance permission state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 155(h) etc., the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 is output for a predetermined output time even after timing tAd3 (even after the 4th A acceptance permission state ends). The output state continues until the output is completed after execution, or for a predetermined period of time from the non-operating state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the 4A acceptance permission state is terminated while the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is being output, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is The time until the output becomes non-output is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be undefined. Similarly, regarding the second post-reception output sound SB4, if the 4A reception permission state is terminated while the second post reception output sound SB4 is being output, the 4A reception permission state is terminated. The time from when the output sound SA4 is put into a non-output state after the first reception is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be undefined.

Further, in the 4A acceptance permission state according to this embodiment, even if the 4A reception permission state is terminated while the single presentation TA4 and the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 are in the execution state, the single presentation The timing at which TA4 is set to a non-display state and the timing at which the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is set to a non-output state are made to be different from each other. In this example, the relationship as to which of the single presentation TA4 and the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is terminated first is not reversed; for example, the single presentation TA4 is , is ensured to end before the first post-acceptance output sound SA4. Regarding the relationship between such single display TA4 and the first post-acceptance output sound SA4, there is a relationship between the single display TA4 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4, and between the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 and the first post-acceptance output sound SA4. This also holds true with the post-acceptance output sound SB4 of No. 2, and the same can be said of other examples thereof.

Further, the 4th A reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 156, if no operation is accepted on the 4A operating section until the timing tAd3 arrives in the 4A reception permission state, the 4A reception permission state is determined based on the arrival of the timing tAd3. The state is only terminated, and the 4th A post-reception change that appears when the 4th A operation unit is operated is not started.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "fifth A reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 158 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when the "5th A reception permissible state" occurs based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 5A" being satisfied and the player performs an operation. It is. FIG. 159 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the "5th A acceptance permission state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the "5th A acceptance permission state" occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "5th A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "5th A fluctuation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After that, start the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 5th A variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 5A variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.)), Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "5th A fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 158(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "5th A variation pattern", timing tAe2 has arrived when the 5A time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative symbol SZ. (Based on the fulfillment of "Condition 5A"), "Changes after 5A reception (5A production situation suggestion display JA5, 5A single presentation TA5, 5A output sound after reception SA5, SB5, etc.) The above-mentioned 5A acceptance permission state (valid period) in which the 5A operation unit 5A operation acceptance regarding ``reception of operations regarding ``) is allowed to occur (situation shown in FIG. 160(a)).

Here, the "5th A operating section" which is in the 5th A reception permissible state according to this embodiment and allows multiple operation receptions is set as the sword ornament 5001 instead of the operation button 410. Therefore, multiple operation receptions are permitted until the fifth A reception permission state is terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, as shown in FIGS. A mock image display MG-A5 imitating the "sword ornament 5001" as the 5A operation section, and a message display MA5 related to the operation on the operation target (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 5A operation section) and the status suggestion display JA5 indicating the operation status when the timing tAe1 arrives before the 5A acceptance permission state occurs (before the operation reception for the 5A operation unit is allowed). It is to be displayed on the

However, the sample image display MG-A5, message display MA5, and situation suggestion display JA5 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 5A reception permission state occurs, and the 5A reception permission state does not necessarily have to be displayed before the 5A reception permission state occurs. It may be displayed at the same time as the event occurs or a little later than the event. Furthermore, the timing at which the sample image display MG-A5 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA5 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, message display MA5 may be displayed before sample image display MG-A5 is displayed.

In this example, for the sample image display MG-A5 and the message display MA5, after the display starts, regardless of the operating state of the 5A operation section, at least until the 5A acceptance permission state is ended. is to be displayed continuously, but the situation suggestion display JA5 is to be hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed.

Here, "sample image display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A reception acceptance state uses only a "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme.

In addition, "Make image display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5th A reception permission state is such that "After the part where the "operation receiving part" which is the operation target is simulated is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α), When one periodic change is a moving image that is sequentially displayed in each manner shown in FIGS. It is something that will appear. This cycle 5A time is set as a longer time (long cycle) than the cycle 1A time that appears in the 1A acceptance permission state, and may be set as the same time as the cycle 2A time, for example. Therefore, in the 5A acceptance acceptance state, the "operation receiving part" is depicted as slowly moving up and down its movable range.

However, as described above, in the 5A acceptance acceptance state, an image of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed as "reprint image display MG-A5" instead of the operation button 410. Therefore, the "sample image display MG-A5" is not actually displayed in the "form shown in FIG. 144 (α)", but the "form shown in FIG. 144 (α)" is Instead, it appears as an image replaced with an image imitating the sword decoration body 5001.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 159(b), the 5A reception permission state is continued until timing tAe3 arrives when there is no operation reception for the 5A operation unit, and is based on the arrival of timing tAe3. It will be terminated. Therefore, while the 5A reception permission state continues, a gauge image (in this example, a gauge image in the sample image display MG-A5) indicating the remaining time until the timing tAe3 when the 5A reception permission state ends comes Although the description is such that the number of images) decreases over time, this description may not necessarily be performed.

In addition, if the "sample image display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A reception permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tAe2 when the 5A reception permission state occurs, the periodic changes and changes in the gauge image It is desirable to start the process after waiting for the timing tAe2. In other words, in this case, the "sample image display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A acceptance permission state does not display the state shown in FIG. The image will be displayed in a manner that maintains the original image.

In addition, in the 5A acceptance acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. , sword ornament 5001)) (here, message display MA5 is displayed as "Defeat the goblin! Hit the sword repeatedly!").

In addition, in the 5A acceptance permission state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 158(e) and 160(a), a situation suggestion display JA5 indicating the operation status in the 5A reception permission state, An ally character (here, ally character YS-A5) that corresponds to the type of the 5A acceptance permission state, and an enemy character (here, an enemy depicted as a goblin) that corresponds to the type of the 5A acceptance permission state. The character BOSS-A5) and a gauge image HP-A5 showing its remaining HP gauge are displayed. In the 5A acceptance permission state, "Whether or not the ally character YS-A5 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A5 by accepting multiple operations on the 5A operation section (the gauge image HP-A5 must be set to 0)" It is possible to suggest whether the expectation level of winning the jackpot is high or low through the performance such as "Can you do it or not?". Each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the character, an effect can be executed such that the "ally character YS-A5" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A5". In this example, the ally character YS-A5, the enemy character BOSS-A5, and the gauge image HP-A5 are displayed as the situation suggestion display JA5, but not all of these displays are necessarily displayed. However, as long as at least one of the ally character YS-A5, the enemy character BOSS-A5, and the gauge image HP-A5 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation status.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 158, at timing tAe2-A1 within the 5A acceptance acceptance state (the production situation shown in FIG. 160(b)), the "5A operation unit (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" It is assumed that the first operation is accepted for .

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the "5th A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at the timing tAe2-A1 within the 5A acceptance permission state, the state shown in FIG. 158(e) As shown in ~(h), the "5th A post-reception change (5A post-reception performance)" corresponding to the operation reception is generated (the performance situation shown in FIG. 160(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "5th A operation unit (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" at timing tAe2-A1 within the 5A acceptance acceptance state, the process shown in FIG. 158(f) is performed. , (g), as a change after the 5A reception, the ``5A post-reception output sound'' corresponding to the operation reception on the ``5A operation section (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' is audibly output. At the same time, the "5th A post-reception display" corresponding to the operation reception on the "5th A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" starts to be displayed.

That is, when an operation is accepted once for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 5A acceptance permission state, the "5A post-reception display" shown in FIG. 160(b) is displayed. As shown in , one video is displayed in which "ally character YS-A5" uses swordsmanship to attack "enemy character BOSS-A5" (smoke effect, slashing effect, etc.). It has become so. However, as will be explained later, in the 5A reception acceptance state, each time an operation reception is performed, the "enemy character BOSS-A5" will be injured, the strength of the sword technique will increase, and the remaining HP gauge of the gauge image HP-A5 will decrease. (The contents of the production are now progressing.) If the content of the production progresses in this way, then the state when the operation reception is made to the 5A operation section (here, "ally character YS-A5" uses swordsmanship to defeat "enemy character BOSS-A5") The attack mode) will appear as a single video display that changes to the advanced production content (such as in Figs. 158(e) and (f), and Figs. 160(d), (f), and (h)). ).

However, as will be described later, the 5A reception permission state according to this example is similar to the above-mentioned third reception permission state and fourth reception permission state (the 5A reception permission state ends with the passage of time). This occurs as a type of validity period in which early termination triggered by operation acceptance (before timing tAe3) does not occur. In other words, in this case, each time an operation is accepted during the validity period of such a type (5A reception permission state), the production content corresponding to the 5A reception permission state must be changed (progressed). If there is, there will be a problem with the processing when the content of the performance has progressed to its final form.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned 3A reception permission state, if a further operation is accepted under the situation where the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception permission state has progressed to the final state, each time the operation reception is made, the final We decided to repeatedly cause changes after acceptance regarding the aspect. On the other hand, in the 5A reception permission state according to this example, when the operation reception is further performed in a situation where the production content corresponding to the 5A reception permission state has progressed to the final state, each time the operation reception is performed. , the post-acceptance change according to the final aspect can be repeatedly caused. However, as will be described later, in the 5A acceptance permission state according to this example, when the operation reception is further performed while the after reception display (5A post reception display) is being displayed due to the after reception change according to the final mode, The display state of the displayed post-acceptance display is maintained and continued without displaying the post-acceptance display according to the final mode again. In addition, regarding the post-reception output sound (5A post-reception output sound), once it is output in the final mode, it is assumed that further operation reception is performed regardless of the output status of the post-reception output sound in the final mode. Also, the output is not started using this as an opportunity. According to such a configuration, after the production content has progressed to the final mode, even if further operation reception is performed, changes in the final mode after the reception are difficult to occur, and the execution mode is restricted ( At least the output sound is not output after acceptance), so that it is possible to prevent the "5th A operation section (here, the sword decoration body 5001)" from being handled in a disorderly manner.

In addition, in this example, when an operation is accepted once for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 5A acceptance permission state, in addition to the above "5A post-reception display", As the "5th A post-reception output sound", the first post-reception output sound SA5 may be output as shown in FIG. 158(g). Note that the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 according to this example is a mode in which the friendly character YS-A5 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A5 using swordsmanship (smoke effect It functions as a sound effect that corresponds to the occurrence of a slashing effect, etc.). In addition, at this time, as will be described later, there is a possibility that the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 is further output as the "5th A post-acceptance output sound". The second post-reception output sound SB5 according to this example is output when the production content of the "5th A post-reception display" progresses. Note that here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is realized to function as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect. , any information can be used as long as it can indicate that the player has accepted the operation.

In this way, in the 5A acceptance acceptance state, each time an operation is accepted for the 5A operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001), the ally character YS-A5 changes to the enemy character BOSS-A5. ” and its sound effects appear. In other words, the HP of “enemy character BOSS-A5” decreases due to multiple attacks by “ally character YS-A5” (the production content progresses). ), and as a result, when the HP becomes 0, it means that the "enemy character BOSS-A5" has been defeated, and this provides a performance that suggests that the level of expectation is high. . However, in this case, if the HP does not become 0 despite multiple attacks and the "enemy character BOSS-A5" cannot be defeated, it is suggested that the level of expectation is low.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 158(a), it is assumed that the operation by the player (operation state of the fifth A operation section) started at timing tAe2-A1 is continued until timing tAe2-A2. It has become.

However, the 5A reception permission state is different from the 1A reception permission state, the 2A reception permission state, the 3A reception permission state, etc., and "even if the operation unit (5A operation unit) is maintained in the operation state, Multiple times for types in which the corresponding changes after reception (for example, display after reception, output sound after reception, light emission after reception, function action after reception, etc.) are not executed multiple times (types in which the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated) It is classified as "operation valid state". Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158(a), during the period from timing tAe2-A1 to timing tAe2-A2 (period in which the 5A operation section is maintained in the operating state), no operation is accepted for the 5A operation section. It is performed only once at timing tAe2-A1, and changes after one reception according to the operation reception at timing tAe2-A1 (for example, after reception display, after reception output sound, after reception light emission, after reception (e.g., role-playing actions) will be executed.

Therefore, in this production example, at timing tAe2-A1, as the display after receiving the fifth A, as shown in FIG. 160(b), the ally character YS-A5 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A5 using swordsmanship. The mode (occurrence of smoke effect, slashing effect, etc.) will start to be displayed (one video display).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 160(b), as the display after receiving the fifth A, the enemy character BOSS-A5 is changed to a state in which the enemy character BOSS-A5 has received the first level of damage, and the enemy character BOSS-A5 is The attack using swordsmanship is displayed as a single display TA5 (mode TA5a), and the gauge image HP-A5 is changed to a mode in which the remaining HP gauge is decreased by one stage. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA5 (enemy character BOSS-A5, ally character YS-A5, gauge image HP-A5) will change from "Aspect JA5a" before the operation to "Aspect JA5b", and this will cause the situation to change from "Aspect JA5a" before the operation to "Aspect JA5b". It is now suggested that the performance content corresponding to the 5th A acceptance acceptance state has progressed based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAe2-A1.

However, as mentioned above, the status suggestion display JA5 whose aspect has changed in this way is not necessarily displayed continuously until the corresponding 5A acceptance permission state is ended. It is displayed for a predetermined time (fixed time) and then turned off.

Further, the single display TA5, which is depicted as a swordsmanship attack by the ally character YS-A5, is also hidden after a predetermined period of time (certain period of time) has elapsed. The production examples shown in FIGS. 158 and 160 are based on the assumption that the time has elapsed before the timing tAe2-A2 arrives and the single display TA5 (aspect TA5a) is turned into a hidden state. It has become. In this example, the single presentation display TA5 is displayed in different modes depending on the degree of progress of the performance content, but it is arranged to be displayed in one mode (the same mode) regardless of the degree of progress of the production content. Good too. Alternatively, in the 5A acceptance acceptance state according to this example, when an operation is accepted, the state of the situation suggestion display JA5 always changes, and this can indicate that the operation has been accepted. In view of this, the single presentation TA5 may not necessarily be displayed.

Furthermore, at timing tAe2-A1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 (5th A post-acceptance output sound) is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to the 5th A post-acceptance display (attack mode). At the same time, the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) changes mode SB5b to indicate that the production content corresponding to the 5A acceptance permission state has progressed to the first stage mode. Output starts at -1.

In this respect, the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 corresponding to the 5A acceptance permission state is output at a predetermined time (timing tAe2 to The output signal is output for a certain period of time (shorter than the time tAe3), and then the output is turned off. Similarly, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is also set to a non-output state after a predetermined time (certain time) has elapsed.

The production example shown in FIG. 158 assumes that the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are set to a non-output state after timing tAe2-A2 arrives. ing.

That is, in this case, timing tAe2-A2 arrives while both the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are in the output state. However, both the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 according to this example indicate that the 5A operating section is in the non-operational state (timing tAe2-A2 has arrived). No change will occur as a trigger.

Note that in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect and may be used as desired. may be anything that can indicate that the player has accepted the operation. In addition, regarding the first reception output sound SA5, it was decided to output it in one mode (the same mode) regardless of the degree of progress of the production content, but it was decided to output it in a different mode depending on the degree of progress of the production content. You may also do so. Alternatively, in the 5A acceptance acceptance state according to this example, when an operation is accepted, the second post-acceptance output sound SA5 is always output, which does not indicate that the operation has been accepted. Considering that it is possible, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 may not necessarily be output.

Here, in the 5A acceptance acceptance state, before the time required for "one video display (single display TA5)" according to the operation reception has elapsed (while the single display TA5 is being displayed), A case may occur in which the player performs an operation to place the fifth A operation section in a non-operating state and an operation to change it from the non-operating state to an operating state, respectively. In this case, the above-mentioned "single display TA5" is executed after the above-mentioned "certain period of time" has elapsed after the execution of "one video display" in response to the operation reception starts and before it ends. It will be executed in such a manner that "displaying one video" will start, but at this time, the new "displaying one video" will be the same as the previous "displaying one video" which was in the middle of execution. It is also possible to terminate "one video display" midway and execute it in an alternative form.

Similarly, in the 5A acceptance acceptance state, before the time required for "sound effect corresponding to one video display (output sound SA5 after first reception)" according to the operation reception elapses ( While the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is being output), there are cases in which the player performs an operation to place the 5A operation section in a non-operating state and an operation to change it from the non-operating state to an operating state again. It can occur. In this case, the above-mentioned "first post-acceptance output sound SA5" is generated after the above-mentioned "certain period of time" starts and before the execution of the "single sound effect" corresponding to the operation reception starts and ends. After a certain amount of time has elapsed, a new "sound effect for one time" will be executed, but in this case, the new "sound effect for one time" will be in a state in the middle of execution. The previous "sound effect for one time" may be terminated midway and executed in its place.

The "Situation Suggestion Display JA5" (see Figure 158(e)) such as the friendly character YS-A5, the enemy character BOSS-A5, and the gauge image HP-A5 are not displayed until the operation is accepted. As mentioned above, it may be realized as something that appears and is displayed when the operation is accepted (until the validity period ends or only for a predetermined time). It is.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to such an example of performance, the performance situation shown in FIG. The performance situation did not appear as a result of the 5A operating section being put into a non-operating state. It simply displays the 5A post-reception display and 5A post-reception output sound (situation suggestion display JA5, single announcement TA5, first post-reception output sound SA5, and second post-reception output sound SB5) that started execution at timing tAe2-A1. ), those for which the conditions for terminating the execution state are not yet satisfied even when timing tAe2-A2 arrives continue the execution state (situation suggestion display JA5, output sound after first reception). SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5), if the condition for terminating the execution state before timing tAe2-A2 arrives, the output sound is output at that point (before timing tAe2-A2). It simply ends the execution state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 5A operation section is interrupted while the single display TA5 or the situation suggestion display JA5 is being displayed and it is brought into a non-operating state, the single display TA5 or the situation The time until the suggestion display JA5 is hidden is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be undefined.

In addition, in this example, if the operation on the 5A operation section is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are being output and the operation section 5A is brought into a non-operation state, the non-operation The time from when the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are set to the non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite. .

Further, in the 5A acceptance permission state according to this embodiment, the single announcement TA5, the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are in the execution state, respectively. When the operation state of the 5A operation section is interrupted (when it is put into a non-operation state), the single display TA5, the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound are displayed. The timing at which SB5 is brought into a non-execution (non-display, non-output) state is set to be a different timing. In this example, the order in which they are terminated is not changed; for example, single presentation TA5 is terminated earliest among them.

According to such a configuration, in the fifth A acceptance acceptance state according to this embodiment, the single announcement TA5, the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are respectively If you play the game so as to interrupt the operation state of the 5A operation part while it is in the execution state (when it is set to the non-operation state), the single display TA5 is displayed while the 5A operation part is in the non-operation state. Also, a situation appears in which the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 continue to be executed.

However, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 158(a) and 160(d), the single announcement TA5, the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5. This is based on the assumption that no new operation is accepted to the fifth A operation section even when all the operations end the execution state.

In this example, while all of the single announcement display TA5, situation suggestion display JA5, first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are in the non-execution state, As shown in a), at timing tAe2-B1 within the 5A acceptance acceptance state (the production situation shown in FIG. 160(e)), the "5A operation section (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is activated again. This is based on the assumption that the device is put into an operating state and this operating state is continued until timing tAe2-B2.

In this example, if the "5th A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is put into the operating state again at timing tAe2-B1 within the 5A acceptance acceptance state and the operation is accepted, this will be used as a trigger. , as shown in FIGS. 158(e) to (h), the "5th A post-reception change (5A post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception is caused again by the amount corresponding to one operation reception. (The performance situation shown in FIG. 160(e)).

However, as described above, in this example, even when the operation on the 5A operation section is restarted at timing tAe2-B1 within the 5A reception permission state, the production content corresponding to the 5A reception permission state is not advanced. The Rukoto. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 160(e), the change after the 5A reception (the 5A 5A post-acceptance display, 5A post-acceptance output sound, etc.) will start to be executed.

Therefore, in this production example, at timing tAe2-B1, as the display after receiving the fifth A, as shown in FIG. The mode of attacking the enemy character BOSS-A5 (occurrence of smoke effect, slashing effect, etc.) will begin to be displayed (one video display).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 160(e), as the display after receiving the fifth A, the enemy character BOSS-A5 is changed to a state in which the enemy character BOSS-A5 has received the second level of damage, and the enemy character BOSS-A5 is The attack using swordsmanship is displayed as a single display TA5 in the second stage mode TA5b, and the gauge image HP-A5 remains and changes to the mode in which the HP gauge is decreased by two stages. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA5 (enemy character BOSS-A5, ally character YS-A5, gauge image HP-A5) changes from "Aspect JA5b" before the re-operation to "Aspect JA5c". It is now suggested that the performance content corresponding to the fifth A acceptance acceptance state has evolved based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAe2-B1.

Furthermore, at timing tAe2-B1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 (5th A post-acceptance output sound) is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to the 5th A post-acceptance display (attack mode). At the same time, the second post-reception output sound SB5 (5A post-reception output sound) is set to mode SB5b-2 to indicate that the production content corresponding to the 5A reception permission state has progressed to the second stage. Output starts with .

Here, the timing tAe2-B1 may arrive while the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (fifth A post-acceptance output sound) whose output was started at the timing tAe2-A1 is in the output state. In this case, at the timing tAe2-B1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) terminates the first stage mode SB5b-1 that was in the output state and replaces it. Alternatively, the output in the second stage mode SB5b-2 may be started.

Further, at timing tAe2-B2, it is assumed that while the single display TA5 is being displayed, the operation on the fifth A operation section is interrupted and the operation section is brought into a non-operation state. At this time, as described above, the time from when the single display TA5 is set to the non-operating state until the single display TA5 is set to the non-display state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

Note that at timing tAe2-B2 when the 5A operating section is brought into the non-operating state again, the 5A post-reception display and the 5A post-reception output sound (situation suggestion display JA5, single announcement display TA5) that started execution at timing tAe2-B1 are displayed. , the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5) are continuing their execution states because the conditions for terminating their execution states have not yet been met, and the timing tAe2- No changes will occur as a result of B2.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 158(a), at timing tAe2-C1 within the 5A acceptance permission state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 160(f)), "5A operation section (here, This is based on the assumption that the "sword ornament 5001)" is put into the operating state once again, and this operating state is continued until timing tAe2-C2.

In this example, if the "5th A operating unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is put into the operating state and the operation is accepted at timing tAe2-C1 within the 5th A acceptance acceptance state, this will be used as an opportunity to As shown in FIGS. 158(e) to (h), the "5th A post-reception change (5A post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception is generated once again by the amount corresponding to one operation reception. (the presentation situation shown in FIG. 160(f)).

However, as mentioned above, in this example, even when the operation on the 5A operation section is started again at timing tAe2-C1 within the 5A reception permission state, the production content corresponding to the 5A reception permission state is not advanced. The Rukoto. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 160(f), the state is the same as when the third stage progress (here, the final stage progress) is made based on the operation acceptance for the 5A operation unit. , the 5th A post-acceptance changes (5A post-acceptance display, 5A post-acceptance output sound, etc.) will start to be executed.

Therefore, in this production example, at timing tAe2-C1, as the display after receiving the fifth A, as shown in FIG. Display (one video display) of how to defeat the enemy character BOSS-A5 using (smoke effect, slashing effect, etc.) begins.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 160(f), the display after receiving the fifth A changes to a state in which the enemy character BOSS-A5 has been defeated, and an attack using swordsmanship by the ally character YS-A5. is displayed as a single display TA5 in the third stage mode TA5c, and the gauge image HP-A5 is changed to the mode in which the remaining HP gauge is reduced to 0. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA5 (enemy character BOSS-A5, ally character YS-A5, gauge image HP-A5) will change from "Aspect JA5c" before the re-operation to "Aspect JA5d". It is now suggested that the performance content corresponding to the 5th A reception acceptance state has evolved based on the operation reception performed at timing tAe2-C1.

Furthermore, at timing tAe2-C1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 (5th A post-acceptance output sound) is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to the 5th A post-acceptance display (attack mode). At the same time, the second post-reception output sound SB5 (5A post-reception output sound) is set to mode SB5b-3 in order to indicate that the production content corresponding to the 5A reception permission state has progressed to the third stage. Output starts with .

Here, in this production example, the timing tAe2-C1 arrives while the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5, which started outputting at the timing tAe2-B1, are in the output state. I will do it. At this time, at the timing tAe2-C1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) terminates the second stage mode SB5b-2 that was in the output state and replaces it. Then, output in the second stage mode SB5b-3 is started. Furthermore, regarding the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 (fifth A post-acceptance output sound), the sound that was in the output state is ended and the output is restarted from the beginning in its place.

Then, at timing tAe2-C2 when the 5A operating section is brought into the non-operating state again, the production situation shown in FIG. It did not appear as a result of what was done to him. Simply display the 5A post-reception display and 5A post-reception output sound (situation suggestion display JA5, single announcement TA5, first post-reception output sound SA5, second post-reception output sound SB5) that started execution at timing tAe2-C1. ), those for which the conditions for terminating the execution state are not yet met when timing tAe2-C2 arrives continue the execution state (situation suggestion display JA5, output sound after first reception). SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5), if the condition for ending the execution state before timing tAe2-C2 is met, at that point (before timing tAe2-C2) It simply ends the execution state.

However, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 158(a) and 160(h), the single announcement TA5, the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5. This is based on the assumption that no new operation is accepted to the fifth A operation section even when all the operations end the execution state.

In this example, while the single announcement display TA5, the situation suggestion display JA5, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are all in the non-execution state, As shown in a), at timing tAe2-D1 within the 5A acceptance acceptance state (the performance situation shown in FIG. 160(i)), the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" This is based on the assumption that the device is brought into the operating state once again and this operating state is continued at least until timing tAe3.

Here, as described above, the performance content corresponding to the fifth A acceptance permission state has already progressed to the final state due to the operation acceptance performed at timing tAe2-C1. In this production example, even if an operation is further accepted at timing tAe2-D1 under such a situation, the situation is not suggested as shown in FIGS. 158(a) and 160(i). Regarding the display JA5 and the single display TA5, execution will start in the same manner (final manner) as when execution is started at timing tAe2-C1, corresponding to one operation reception.

However, as mentioned above, in this production example, after the 5A post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound SA5, second post-reception output sound SB5) is output once in the final mode, Regardless of the output status of the post-acceptance output sound according to the final mode, even if the operation acceptance is further performed, the output will not be started using this as a trigger. Therefore, when an operation is accepted at timing tAe2-D1, the 5A post-acceptance display (single display TA5, situation suggestion display JA5) starts to be executed, but the 5A post-acceptance output sound (the 5A post-acceptance display JA5) is triggered by the operation acceptance. The first post-acceptance output sound SA5 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5) are never executed.

Here, in this production example, it is assumed that timing tAe2-D1 arrives after the situation suggestion display JA5d (final mode) that started displaying at timing tAe2-C1 is hidden, but timing tAe2-C1 Timing tAe2-D1 may arrive (operation acceptance occurs) while the situation suggestion display JA5d (final mode) that was started to be displayed is still in the display state. At this time, at the timing tAe2-D1, the situation suggestion display JA5d (final mode) that had been displayed until then is not hidden and redisplayed, but the display state is continued. You may also do so. Further, in this case, the time period during which the display state is maintained or continued may be reset based on the timing tAe2-D1 instead of the timing tAe2-C1. In this case, at timing tAe2-D1, not only the 5th A post-reception output sound is not newly output, but also the situation suggestion display JA5d (final mode) is not newly displayed.

In the production example shown in FIG. 158 and FIG. 160, after the 5A post-acceptance display, which started execution at timing tAe2-D1, is set to non-execution, the 5A reception permission state is ended. This is based on the assumption that tAe3 has arrived.

However, timing tAe3 may arrive while the 5th A post-acceptance display is still in the display state. In this case, based on the arrival of timing tAe3, the 5th A post-reception display that had been in the display state until then may be made to be in the non-display state.

Further, timing tAe3 may arrive while the output sound after receiving the fifth A is in the output state. In this case, based on the arrival of timing tAe3, the 5th A post-acceptance output sound, which had been in the output state until then, may be made to be in the non-output state. However, based on the arrival of timing tAe3, the 5A post-reception display that was in the display state until then will be turned into a hidden state, but the 5A post-reception output sound that was in the output state until then will be changed to a hidden state. , it may be made to continue instead of being in a non-output state.

Further, the fifth A acceptance acceptance state occurs as an acceptance acceptance state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 159, if no operation is accepted for the 5A operation section until the timing tAe3 arrives in the 5A reception permission state, the 5A reception permission state is determined based on the arrival of the timing tAe3. The state is only terminated, and the 5A post-reception change that appears when the 5A operation unit is operated is not started.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "6th A reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 161 is a time chart showing an example of the production contents when the "6th A reception permissible state" occurs and the player performs an operation based on the above-mentioned occurrence condition "Condition 6A" being satisfied. It is. FIG. 162 is a time chart showing an example of the performance contents when the "6th A acceptance permission state" occurs and no operation is performed by the player. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the "6th A acceptance permission state" occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (suspended) and the "6th A fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "6th A fluctuation pattern". A corresponding performance judgment (such as a preview performance judgment) is performed. After this, the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ (production depiction according to the 6th A variation pattern, sound output according to the 6A variation pattern (normal BGM playback when not reachable, etc.), etc.) is started, Within the execution period of the fluctuating performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "6th A variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 161(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "6A variation pattern", timing tAf2 has arrived when the 6A time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ. Based on (based on "Condition 6A" being met), "Changes after 6A reception (6A production situation suggestion display JA6, 6A single presentation TA6, 6A after reception output sound SA6, SB6, etc.) ) can be generated (situation shown in FIG. 163(a)).

Here, the 6A reception permission state according to this embodiment allows only one operation reception for the "6A operation section" until the 6A reception permission state ends. The operation button 410 is set as the "sixth A operation section".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, as shown in FIGS. A simulated image display MG-A6 imitating the "operation button 410" as the 6A operation section, and a message display MA6 related to the operation on the operation target (here, the "operation button 410" as the 6A operation section); A situation suggestion display JA6 indicating the operation status is displayed when the timing tAf1 arrives before the 6A acceptance permission state occurs (before the operation reception for the 6A operation unit is allowed). It has become something to do.

However, the sample image display MG-A6, the message display MA6, and the situation suggestion display JA6 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 6A reception permission state occurs, and the 6A reception permission state is It may be displayed at the same time as the event occurs or a little later than the event. Furthermore, the timing at which the sample image display MG-A6 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA6 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, message display MA6 may be displayed before sample image display MG-A6 is displayed.

Here, the "sample image display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A reception acceptance state has a "first color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" and a "second color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme. The basic color scheme) is now used selectively.

In addition, "Make image display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A reception permission state is such that "After the part where the "operation receiving part" which is the operation target is simulated is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α), 144 (β) to (σ) shown in sequence in the various modes shown in FIG. 144) is one periodic change, the periodic change is repeated in a form that takes a predetermined period of 6A time. It is something that will appear. This cycle 6A time is set as a longer time (long cycle) than the cycle 1A time that appears in the 1A acceptance permission state, and may be set as the same time as the cycle 2A time, for example. Therefore, in the 6A acceptance acceptance state, the "operation receiving part" is depicted as slowly moving up and down its movable range.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 162(b), the 6A reception permission state is continued until timing tAf3 arrives when there is no operation reception for the 6A operation section, and is based on the arrival of timing tAf3. It will be terminated. Therefore, while the 6A reception permission state continues, a gauge image (in this example, a gauge image (in this example, a gauge image in the sample image display MG-A6) indicating the remaining time until the timing tAf3 at which the 6A reception permission state ends Although the description is such that the number of images) decreases over time, this description may not necessarily be performed.

In addition, if the "sample image display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A acceptance permission state is started to be displayed before the timing tAf2 when the 6A reception permission state occurs, the periodic changes and changes in the gauge image It is desirable to start the process after waiting for the timing tAf2. In other words, in this case, the "simulation image display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A acceptance permission state is in the state shown in FIG. 144(α) (actually, the state shown in FIG. The image will be displayed in a manner that maintains the original image.

In addition, in the 6A acceptance acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 161(c), (d), and 163(a), in addition to the sample image display MG-A6, , the operation button 410) (here, the message display MA6 is displayed as "Defeat the wizard! Hit the hammer with one blow!!").

In addition, in the 6A acceptance permission state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 161(e) and 163(a), a situation suggestion display JA6 indicating the operation status in the 6A acceptance permission state, An ally character (in this case, ally character YS-A6) that corresponds to the type of the 6A reception permission state, and an enemy character (here, an enemy depicted as a wizard) that corresponds to the type of the 6A reception permission state. The character BOSS-A6) and a gauge image HP-A6 showing its remaining HP gauge are displayed. In the 6A acceptance permission state, the question is ``Whether or not the ally character YS-A6 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A6 by one operation reception on the 6A operation section (the gauge image HP-A6 must be set to 0). It is possible to suggest whether the expectation of winning the jackpot is high or low through the performance such as "whether the player can do it or not". When an operation (operation reception) is performed on the character, an effect can be executed such that the "ally character YS-A6" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A6". In this example, the ally character YS-A6, the enemy character BOSS-A6, and the gauge image HP-A6 are displayed as the situation suggestion display JA6, but not all of these displays are necessarily displayed. However, as long as at least one of the ally character YS-A6, the enemy character BOSS-A6, and the gauge image HP-A6 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation status.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 161, at timing tAf2-A1 within the 6A acceptance acceptance state (the production situation shown in FIG. 163(b)), the "6A operation section (here, the operation button 410)" is pressed. It is assumed that the first operation is accepted.

In this example, if an operation is accepted for the "6A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tAf2-A1 within the 6A acceptance permission state, the steps shown in FIGS. 161(e) to (h) As shown in FIG. 163(b), a "6A post-reception change (6A post-reception performance)" corresponding to the operation reception is generated (the performance situation shown in FIG. 163(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is accepted for the "6A operation section (here, the operation button 410)" at timing tAf2-A1 within the 6A acceptance permission state, the operations shown in FIGS. As shown in (h), as a change after the 6A reception, the "6A post reception output sound" corresponding to the operation reception on the "6A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is audibly output, and , the ``6th A post-acceptance display (single announcement TA6, situation suggestion display JA6)'' corresponding to the operation acceptance on the ``6th A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)'' starts to be displayed.

That is, when an operation is accepted for the "6A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" once in the 6A acceptance permission state, the "6A post-reception display" shown in FIG. 163(b) is displayed. As shown, one video is displayed in which the "ally character YS-A6" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A6" using a hammer (including the generation of impact effects). .

In one video display according to this example, an attack using a hammer by the ally character YS-A6 is first displayed as a single display TA6. As a result, a mode in which the enemy character BOSS-A6 could be defeated and a mode in which the enemy character BOSS-A6 could not be defeated are prepared. In the example shown in FIG. 163(b), This is based on the assumption that a mode in which the enemy character BOSS-A6 was defeated is displayed.

More specifically, in the examples shown in FIGS. 161 and 163, "enemy character BOSS-A6" is defeated, the strength of the hammer increases, and the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-A6 changes to 0. be done. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA6 (enemy character BOSS-A6, ally character YS-A6, gauge image HP-A6) changes from "Aspect JA6a" before the operation to "Aspect JA6b", which causes the enemy It is suggested that the operating situation was such that the character BOSS-A6 could be defeated (it is suggested that there is a high possibility that a jackpot has been obtained).

Although the illustration is omitted, an attack using a hammer by the ally character YS-A6 is displayed as a single display TA6, but as a result, if an aspect appears in which the enemy character BOSS-A6 could not be defeated. , the "enemy character BOSS-A6" survives, the strength of the hammer decreases, and the remaining HP gauge of the gauge image HP-A6 is changed so as to remain partially. In other words, in this case, the situation suggestion display JA6 (enemy character BOSS-A6, ally character YS-A6, gauge image HP-A6) changes from the "aspect JA6a" before the operation to the "aspect JA6b". , This suggests that the operation situation is such that the enemy character BOSS-A6 could not be defeated (this suggests that the possibility of winning the jackpot is low).

In addition, in this example, when an operation is accepted for the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" in the 6A acceptance acceptance state, in addition to the above "6A post-reception display", the above "6A reception display" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 161(g), the first post-acceptance output sound SA6 can be output as the "6A post-acceptance output sound". Note that the first post-acceptance output sound SA6 according to this example is a mode in which the ally character YS-A6 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A6 using a hammer (single display), which appears as the above-mentioned “6th A post-acceptance display”. It functions as a sound effect corresponding to "TA6)". Note that in this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA6 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect and may be used as desired. may be anything that can indicate that the player has accepted the operation.

At this time, the second post-acceptance output sound SB6 is further output as the "6th A post-acceptance output sound". The second post-acceptance output sound SB6 according to this example is used when the enemy character BOSS-A6 can be defeated (when expectations are high) and when the enemy character BOSS-A6 cannot be defeated. Different modes are prepared depending on when the mode appears (when the expectation level is low), and output is made in one of these modes.

In this way, in the 6A acceptance acceptance state, when an operation is accepted for the 6A operation section (here, the operation button 410), the ally character YS-A6 changes to the enemy character BOSS-A6. The depiction of attacking the character and its sound effects appear. In other words, when the HP of the enemy character BOSS-A6 becomes 0 due to one attack by the ally character YS-A6, the enemy character BOSS-A6 This means that they were able to defeat the game, and this provides a performance that suggests that expectations are high. However, in this case, if the HP does not become 0 despite multiple attacks and the "enemy character BOSS-A6" cannot be defeated, it is suggested that the level of expectation is low.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 161(a), it is assumed that the operation by the player (operation state of the 6A operation section) started at timing tAf2-A1 is continued until timing tAf2-A2. It has become.

However, the 6A reception permission state is such that only one operation reception on the 6A operation unit is permitted. Therefore, a second operation will not be accepted during the period from timing tAf2-A1 to timing tAf2-A2, and the performance that is in execution will not change in any way triggered by timing tAf2-A2.

Furthermore, the single display TA6, the situation suggestion display JA6, the first post-acceptance output sound SA6, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB6, which started to be executed at timing tAf2-A1, are each executed for a predetermined time. It is then placed in a non-executable state. These effects are executed for different lengths of time, and the execution state ends at different times.

Furthermore, the execution states of the single display TA6, the situation suggestion display JA6, the first post-acceptance output sound SA6, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB6, which started execution at the timing tAf2-A1, are indefinite from the timing tAf2-A2. It will be finished in a time of .

In this production example, regarding the single display TA6, the same display is displayed when the mode in which the enemy character BOSS-A6 was defeated appears and when the mode in which the enemy character BOSS-A6 could not be defeated appears. It is displayed as a mode. However, the single presentation TA6 may not necessarily be displayed. Furthermore, the first post-reception output sound SA6 is the same in cases where the enemy character BOSS-A6 could be defeated and cases where the enemy character BOSS-A6 could not be defeated. It is output in the following format. However, the first post-acceptance output sound SA6 may not necessarily be output.

Further, the 6A reception permission state occurs as a reception permission state in which the automatic button function described above is enabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 162, if an operation is not accepted for the 6A operation section until the timing tAf3 arrives in the 6A reception permission state, the 6A reception permission is not accepted based on the arrival of the timing tAf3. Not only is the state terminated, but the 6A post-reception change starts to be executed in the manner that appears when the 6A operation section is operated.

Note that the 6A acceptance acceptance state may be generated as an acceptance acceptance state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. That is, in this case, the 6A acceptance permission state is only terminated based on the arrival of timing tAb3, and the execution of the 6A post-acceptance change that appears when an operation is performed on the 6A operation unit is started. There will be no more.

In addition, the "1st A operating section", "2nd A operating section", "3rd A operating section", "4th A operating section", and "6th A operating section" in the above-mentioned production example are all "operating buttons 410". However, some of these operating units may be implemented as an operating unit different from the “operation button 410”. For example, the configuration may be replaced with a configuration in which the operation unit expressed as a sample image display is operated in each acceptance permission state. That is, the "1st A operating section", "2nd A operating section", "3rd A operating section", and "4th A operating section" are displayed as a sample image display and are allowed to accept multiple operations. The "6th A operation section" may be any device that can be displayed as a sample image display and that allows only one operation reception. However, the "1st A operating section", "2nd A operating section", "3rd A operating section", "4th A operating section", and "6th A operating section" all have different operations from the "5th A operating section". It will be prepared as a section.

In addition, the "post-reception change (post-reception display)" that corresponds to the operation being accepted during each reception period (reception permissible state) in the example production mentioned above does not necessarily indicate the degree of expectation that a jackpot will be achieved. You don't have to. For example, it may be generated as a reception period for determining whether or not the probability fluctuation function will be enabled within the execution period of a jackpot game, and may be executed as a display after the reception, and the expectation level suggestion regarding the game may be It may also be made to occur as a simple acceptance period within a mini-game that has no relation to anything, and to be executed as a display after the acceptance. Alternatively, it may be generated based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition during various interval periods, etc., and executed as a display after the reception of the condition. Therefore, the acceptance period according to the above-described production example does not necessarily have to occur within the period in which the symbol variation is being executed. In addition, even in cases where the post-reception display does not suggest such expectations, multiple modes are prepared for the post-reception display, and the display is displayed in one of these multiple modes. You may also do so.

In addition, when periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time" and cases in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time". Therefore, the image can be displayed in the same form (or similar form). However, if periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "time longer than a predetermined time," the image display may be displayed in the first form and in the second form. If the periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of "predetermined time", the second form (or similar form) is not displayed, and the second form (or similar form) is not displayed. It may also be possible to display one form (or similar form).

By the way, periodic changes in the display of a sample image, unlike color schemes or luminescence, are a phenomenon that occurs over time, so it takes a relatively long time to distinguish between their merits and demerits. In other words, it is difficult to reliably distinguish whether the periodic changes in the image display currently appearing are long or short (both long cycles and short cycles are not displayed). For). However, on the other hand, if players can distinguish between them, they will be able to enjoy the value as a new information source. , it will be possible to provide new performance.

In addition, in the second A reception permission state according to the above production example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a when the auto continuous hit function is enabled is at timing tAb2-B2, which is the timing at which the production content progresses. When this happens, a new "sound effect" will begin to be output. However, instead of this, the arrival of timing tAb2-B2 may not be used as a trigger to start outputting a new "sound effect", but to continue outputting (sound effects) in the manner that has been executed up to that point. .

In other words, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a does not necessarily have to be realized as a repeated output of a sound effect. The operation state is continued on the condition that the operation state is maintained (by the judgment of the operation reception detected each time) (on the condition that the auto continuous hit function is enabled), and when the operation state is no longer maintained. It may also be realized as output in a manner such as "terminate the process". In this case, even if timing tAb2-B2, which is the timing at which the production content is advanced by the so-called automatic continuous hit function, arrives while the first post-reception output sound SA2a is being output, this is the timing tAb2-B2. In this case, the reproduction state may be continued without any change in the output mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a (effect sound based on the first data). In this sense, it can be said that the automatic repeated hit function according to this performance example is a function that periodically determines whether the player is in the operating state simply by maintaining the operating state. Even if the 2nd A reception permission state is realized with such a configuration, at least the number of times the performance has progressed, the new post-acceptance change (second post-acceptance output sound SB2) will occur at indefinite intervals and from a specific time. This will occur multiple times at long intervals.

In addition, the interval at which the automatic continuous tap function determines whether or not it is in the operating state in the acceptance permission state is any of the following: cycle 1A time, cycle 2A time, cycle 3A time, cycle 4A time, cycle 5A time, and cycle 6A time. It is desirable to set the time to be shorter than that. However, the interval at which it is determined whether or not the user is in the operating state by the auto-repeat function in the reception permission state may be different depending on the type of reception permission state. For example, in the 2nd A reception allowed state, the interval at which the auto continuous hit function determines whether or not it is in the operating state (operation accepted) is the same as the interval at which the automatic continuous hit function determines whether or not it is in the operation state (operation accepted) in the 1st A reception allowed state or the 3rd A reception allowed state. It may be set to be different from the interval at which it is determined whether or not there is an operation (operation acceptance). Further, in the 1st A acceptance acceptance state and the 3rd A acceptance acceptance state, the interval at which it is determined whether or not it is in the operation state (operation acceptance) by the automatic repeated hit function may be the same.

In addition, if the operation target for which the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled is maintained in the operating state, the above-mentioned change after reception will be in the acceptance permission state (the first 1A reception permissible state, 3A reception permissible state, etc.), the above change after reception is a type of reception permissible state (2A reception permissible state) in which execution is newly started every undefined time (time not determined in advance). It is desirable that the number of times the above-mentioned post-acceptance change occurs within the acceptance permissible state is greater than the number of times that the above-mentioned change after acceptance occurs within the acceptance permission state.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example displays a post-reception display on the performance display device 1600 as one of the post-reception changes. This is not an essential configuration. For example, it is possible to realize the same effect form as the post-reception change by the above-mentioned post-reception display by changing the light emission form of the effect lamp or changing the drive of the movable body.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the 1st A reception permission state and the 2A reception permission state are "types of reception where the reception permission state can be terminated early based on the operation reception (when the final production mode appears)". It is prepared as a "permissible state". However, in the 1st A reception acceptance state and the 2A reception acceptance state, for example, if a predetermined judgment result is not obtained as a result of jackpot judgment or performance judgment, no matter how many operations are accepted (the final Only when a predetermined judgment result has been obtained as a result of jackpot judgment or performance judgment, etc., the reception permission state is not terminated prematurely (the final The acceptance permission state may be terminated early (when the presentation mode of ``2'' appears). Even with such a configuration, it can be said that it is realized as "a type of acceptance acceptance state in which the acceptance acceptance state can be terminated early based on the operation acceptance (when the final production mode appears)" .

In addition, in the 1st A reception permissible state and the 3rd A reception permissible state, there is an interval at which a judgment (operation reception) is made as to whether or not the operation state is in the operation state by the auto continuous hit function (when the operation state is maintained, the change after reception is (intervals that occur) may be different from each other.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state in the 2A reception permission state, the number of times the output sound after 2A reception can be generated in the 2A reception permission state is limited to the number of times in the 1A reception permission state. The number of times the first A post-acceptance output sound can be generated within the first A acceptance permission state when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state may be set to be smaller than the number of times that the first A post-acceptance output sound can be generated.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state in the 2A reception permission state, the number of times the output sound after the 2A reception can be generated in the 3A reception permission state is The number of times the third A post-acceptance output sound can be generated within the third A acceptance permission state when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state may be set to be smaller than the number of times that the third A post-reception output sound can be generated.

In addition, in the 2nd A reception permissible state, the upper limit number of times the 2nd A reception output sound can be generated by keeping the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is It may be set to be less than the upper limit number of times that the second A post-acceptance output sound can be generated multiple times by repeating the operation without maintaining it.

In addition, in the 1st A reception permissible state, the upper limit of the number of times the 1A post reception output sound can be generated multiple times by maintaining the operation button 410 in the operation state is the upper limit of the number of times the operation button 410 can be repeatedly operated without maintaining the operation button 410 in the operation state. This may be set to be equal to or greater than the upper limit number of times that the output sound after receiving the first A can be generated a plurality of times.

In addition, in the 3A acceptance permission state, the upper limit number of times that the output sound after 3A reception can be generated multiple times by maintaining the operation button 410 in the operation state is the upper limit of the number of times the operation button 410 can be repeatedly operated without maintaining the operation button 410 in the operation state. This may be set to be equal to or greater than the upper limit number of times that the output sound after receiving the third A can be generated a plurality of times.

In addition, in the example of production described above, the post-operation output sound of the type that changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state (the first reception shown in FIG. The post-operation output sound SA2) is a type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state (the second post-acceptance output shown in FIG. 149(h)). Although the output of the sound SB2) can be started in either the output state or not in the output state, it changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from the operation state to the non-operation state. The post-operation output sound of the type that is not accepted (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. The output sound after operation of the type (the first output sound after reception SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) does not start output alone when it is not in the output state, but when it is in the output state (or at the same time). The output may be started.

Further, in the second A acceptance permission state according to the production example described above, even if the output condition of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state ( At the timing tAb2-B2) shown in FIG. 149, the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2, whereas the output sound SB2 that has been in the output state until then starts to be output. Regarding the output sound SA2 after reception of No. 1 (here, one sound effect), the output state is not ended or a new output is started based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. You may also do so. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (single sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

Furthermore, in the first A acceptance acceptance state according to the production example described above, when the output condition of the first post-acceptance output sound SB1 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state (as shown in FIG. 146). At the timing tAa2-B2), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 starts based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAa2-B2. Regarding the output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect), the output state may be ended based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAa2-B2, and a new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, The sound (one sound effect) based on the sound effect data (one sound effect data) will start to be output.

Further, in the third A acceptance permission state according to the production example described above, when the output condition of the third post-acceptance output sound SB3 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state (as shown in FIG. 152). At the timing tAc2-B2), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAc2-B2, whereas the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAc2-B2. Regarding the output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect), the output state may be ended based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAc2-B2, and a new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAc2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, The sound (one sound effect) based on the sound effect data (one sound effect data) will start to be output.

Furthermore, "the post-operation output sound is generated multiple times" means that there are multiple timings at which the post-operation output sound is newly started to be output simply by maintaining the operating state. That is, when the operating state is maintained, it can be said that the post-operation output sound is generated only once while the post-operation output sound is being reproduced based on one piece of data.

Further, in the acceptance permission state, the sample image display does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, the sample image display may not be displayed in at least one of the above-mentioned acceptance acceptance states (1st A acceptance acceptance state to 6th A acceptance acceptance state). For example, in the first A reception acceptance state, the sample image display may not be displayed. Alternatively, the sample image display may not be displayed in the third A acceptance acceptance state instead of the first A acceptance acceptance state.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned acceptance acceptance states (1st A acceptance acceptance state to 6A acceptance acceptance state), two types of sounds (after the first acceptance Both types of sounds (output sound after first reception, output sound after second reception) can be output at the same time (output sound after first reception, output sound after second reception). When the operation is accepted, only one of these sounds may be selectively output, or only one of the sounds may be output, and the other may not necessarily be output. You may choose not to prepare.

In addition, in the 2A acceptance acceptance state, the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is not processed to be a fixed time, but only to be processed to be an indefinite time. In the 1st A acceptance acceptance state and the 3A acceptance acceptance state, it is sufficient that at least a process is executed in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is a constant time, and the output sound after an operation is Processing in which the interval until a new output sound is generated is a fixed time (first output sound after reception), and processing in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after operation is an indefinite time (second output sound) (output sound after reception) may be executed.

In the above-mentioned reception acceptance state, the continuous hit display and single hit display may not necessarily be displayed.

Moreover, the above-mentioned "time below a specific time" includes a specific time, and only the specific time may be prepared as the "time below a specific time". Further, only one time may be prepared as the above-mentioned "time longer than the specific time".

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "time less than or equal to a predetermined time" includes a predetermined time, and only the predetermined time may be provided as the "time less than or equal to a predetermined time." Moreover, only one time may be prepared as the above-mentioned "time longer than the predetermined time".

Note that it is desirable that the specific time is shorter than the predetermined time, and that the "time less than or equal to the specific time" is shorter than the "time less than or equal to the predetermined time." On the other hand, it is desirable that the "time longer than the specific time" be longer than the "time longer than the predetermined time". Or, if "a time longer than a specific time" is set as an indefinite time, depending on the indefiniteness, it may be "a time longer than a predetermined time" or it may be "a time longer than a predetermined time". It is also possible to allow both of these to occur.

In the production example shown in FIG. 149(g), it is possible that the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state while the output sound is being output after receiving the second A. When detected, the second A post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2) in the output state is terminated with this detection as a trigger, but it is not terminated but changes to a different output mode ( (changes in volume/sound quality, changes in output sound mode, etc.).

Further, the post-operation output sound (post-reception output sound) may be something that suggests the level of expectation, or may be something that does not suggest the level of expectation. In fact, the first post-acceptance output sound SA and the like are sounds that do not suggest expectations.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 may further include an acceptance acceptance state different from the above-mentioned first A acceptance acceptance state to sixth A acceptance acceptance state. For example, there is a different reception permission state in which the performance regarding operations and non-operations is the same as in the 1st A reception permission state, but the type of enemy character that appears is different, or a case in which the operations are different from the 2A reception permission state. Although the performance regarding operation and non-operation is the same, the performance regarding operation and non-operation is the same as in another reception permissible state where the type of enemy character that appears is different, or the 3A reception permissible state. However, it is also possible to provide another reception acceptance state in which the types of enemy characters that appear are different.

Further, although this pachinko machine 1 is provided with all of the above-mentioned 1st to 6th A acceptance permission states, it is not necessarily necessary to provide all of these acceptance permission states. Rather, it is desirable to provide only some of these acceptance acceptance states in an appropriate combination in consideration of desired effects. By providing "appropriate combinations" of the configurations described below, excellent effects can be achieved. In addition, each of the configurations below exemplifies combinations of the reception acceptance states that should be provided in order to achieve the effect among the configurations shown in the production example described above; The present invention is not limited to these combinations, and any combination not illustrated may be used as long as the desired effect can be achieved. Further, as long as it does not have a negative effect on achieving the desired effect, a configuration that is adopted by another acceptance permission state that is unrelated to the desired effect may be provided as appropriate.

For example, the first configuration A1 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, the operation on the specific operation means (operation button 410) is The multiple operation valid state of the type in which the message display prompting the operation (message display MA1, MA2, MA4) is displayed (the 1st A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 146, the 2nd A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149, and the 2nd A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 155) 4A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 152) and a multiple operation valid state (3A reception permission state shown in FIG. 152) of a type in which no message display is displayed, the type in which the message display is displayed. In the multiple operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state, 2nd A reception permissible state, 4th A reception permissible state), it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state, and the operation is performed accordingly. When the post-operation output sound (1st A post-acceptance output sound, 2nd A post-acceptance output sound, 4th A post-acceptance output sound) is output, the above specific operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that the means (operation button 410) has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which it is not operated, the post-operation output sound in the output state can change with this detection as a trigger (FIG. 149) g), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state in the multiple operation enabled state (3rd A reception allowed state) where no message display is displayed. is detected and a corresponding post-operation output sound (3A post-reception output sound) is output, the specific operating means (operation Even if it is detected that the button 410) has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state, the post-operation output sound in the output state is not changed based on this detection. (Output sound after reception of 3A shown in FIGS. 152(g) and (h)). In the above example, the output sound after reception of the third A shown in FIGS. 152(g) and (h) is not triggered by this detection, but is output for a predetermined output time and then ends. There is. According to such a configuration, in the multiple operation valid state, whether a change occurs in the output sound after the operation when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state depends on whether the message display is displayed or not. It is now possible to suggest whether or not the player is playing the game, and it is expected that the game player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

Moreover, in the first configuration A1 according to the example of production described above, in particular, among the multiple operation valid states, the specific operation means ( When it is detected that the operation button 410) is in the operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (3rd A post-reception output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound (3A post-reception output sound) is output. Even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is being output, the output after the operation in the output state is The change (end) of the sound (output sound after receiving 3A) is not triggered by this detection, but is done without being triggered by this detection (for example, the sound is output for a predetermined output time). On the other hand, among the above multiple operation valid states, the multiple operation valid states of the types in which the message display (message display MA1, MA2, MA4) is displayed (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state) It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the 4th A reception permissible state), and the corresponding post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound, 2A post-reception output sound) is generated. , 4A post-reception output sound) is output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state where it is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that the output sound after the operation is in the output state, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is triggered by the detection (the output sound after the second A reception shown in FIG. 149(g)). and a case where the detection is not triggered (the first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146 and the fourth A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155). According to such a configuration, when the message display is not displayed in the multiple operation valid state, no change occurs in the output sound after the operation when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. On the other hand, when the message display is displayed in the multi-operation enabled state, the output sound changes after the operation when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since it becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not a situation occurs, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Moreover, in the first configuration A1 according to the example of production described above, when one mode (message display MA2) is displayed as a message display, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state. Sometimes there is a change in the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) and the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound). ) (second reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)). The effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state" can be more suitably achieved. . However, this configuration does not necessarily need to be adopted; for example, when different message display formats appear, such as message display sizes, colors, or display formats, Even if the output sound changes after the operation and sometimes does not change depending on the mode, compared to the case where the message display itself is not displayed at all, It can be expected that this will make it difficult for the player, to a certain level, to recognize "whether or not there will be a change in the output sound after the operation." However, it is desirable (not an essential configuration) to display a message prompting multiple operations in a manner that cannot appear in an operation-enabled state in which only one operation is accepted.

In addition, in the eighth configuration A8, among the multiple operation valid states, there are multiple operation valid states of the type in which a message display is displayed (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state), and no message display is displayed. Regarding the type of multiple operation valid state (3A acceptance permission state), "multiple operation valid state where the output sound after the corresponding operation is output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state" ” may be prepared. In other words, in this case, if the message display is not displayed even though it is a "multiple operation valid state in which the output sound after the operation is output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state", the output state The change (end) of the output sound after the operation is not triggered by the detection, and will be done without the trigger of the detection, and if a message is displayed, the operation that is in the output state There are two cases in which the change (end) of the post-output sound is made in response to the detection, and in other cases it is made not in response to the detection.

Further, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state is also explained. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, among the multiple operation valid states of the type in which a message display is displayed, in the special multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permission state), although it is one valid period, it becomes a non-operation state. The output state is not terminated upon detection of a non-operation state, and the output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operation state. Since the post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2) is output in both cases, in the 2A acceptance permission state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. The effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation when changing the state" can be achieved more favorably.

In addition, in the 1st A reception permission state, 3A reception permission state, and 4A reception permission state according to the above-mentioned production examples, the output sound after the operation is terminated when the output state is triggered by the detection of the non-operation state. There is no case in which the output sound is outputted, and there is only a case in which the post-operation output sound is outputted without ending the post-operation output sound triggered by the detection of the non-operation state.

Further, regarding the first configuration A1, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is a target of displaying a sample image and is allowed to accept operations multiple times."

Furthermore, in order to realize the first configuration A1, the fourth A reception acceptance state does not necessarily need to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned configurations and effects.

Further, for example, the second configuration A2 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is ) is in the operating state, the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times. ) is in the operating state and the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times. 3A acceptance state shown in FIG. 152), the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state. It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state in the multiple operation valid state of the type (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state, 3rd A reception allowed state), and in response to this. If the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, second A post-reception output sound, third A post-reception output sound) is output, the above-mentioned output sound is output while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which it is not operated, the output sound after the operation in the output state may change with this detection as a trigger. On the other hand, there are multiple types of sounds in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operating state (the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the operation valid state (4th A acceptance permission state), and a corresponding post-operation output sound (4th A post-acceptance output sound) is output. In this case, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state while the output sound is being output after the operation. , the end of the post-operation output sound (the 4th A post-reception output sound) in the output state is not changed based on the detection (as shown in FIGS. 155(g) and (h)). Output sound after receiving 4th A). In the above example, the 4A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIGS. 155(g) and (h) is not triggered by this detection, but is output for a predetermined output time and then ends. There is. According to such a configuration, in the multi-operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operating means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state, depending on whether the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled or not. It is now possible to suggest whether or not this will occur, and it is expected that the player's interest in gaming can be suitably maintained.

Moreover, in the second configuration A2 according to the example of production described above, in particular, in the multiple operation valid state, simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state will cause the corresponding post-operation output sound to be When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state (4th A reception permission state) of a type that is not output multiple times, the output sound after the operation (4th A reception permission state) is detected. If a post-operation output sound is output, the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if this is detected, the change (end) of the output sound after the operation in the output state will not be triggered by this detection, but will be done without this detection as a trigger (for example, if a predetermined On the other hand, in the multi-operation valid state, just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, the corresponding output sound after the operation is output. It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state in the multiple operation valid state of the type that is output multiple times (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state, 3rd A reception allowed state). If the corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, second A post-reception output sound, third A post-reception output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound is being output. Among these, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated, the change (end) of the output sound after the operation in the output state is changed to the corresponding state. When it is triggered by the detection (the output sound after the 2nd A reception shown in FIG. 149(g)) and when it is not triggered by the detection (the output sound after the 1A reception shown in FIG. 146, the output sound after the 1A reception shown in FIG. 152). 3A (output sound after reception as shown). According to such a configuration, when the so-called auto-repeat function is not enabled in the multi-operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state. On the other hand, when the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled in the multiple operation enabled state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, Since it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the output sound after an operation, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the second configuration A2 according to the above-described production example, a multiple operation enabled state is a type in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state. In (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state, 3rd A reception allowed state), there are both cases in which the sample image display is displayed in the first color scheme and cases in which it is displayed in the second color scheme (Fig. 146 (c), FIG. 149(c), FIG. 152(c), etc.) is the type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operating means (operating button 410) in the operating state. In the multiple operation enabled state (4th A reception allowed state), there are at least some cases in which the sample image display is displayed in the first color scheme (the first color scheme is always fine), but there are no cases in which it is displayed in the second color scheme. You can do it like this.

In this case, the multiple operation enabled state (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception permission state) in which the output sound after the operation is output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state In the permissible state and 3A reception permissible state), it is sufficient that the sample image display is displayed in both the first color scheme and the second color scheme, for example, if multiple operations of the relevant type are valid. The state may include a predetermined multiple operation enabled state in which the replica image display is displayed only in the first color scheme, or a specific multiple operation enabled state in which the replica image display is not displayed in either the first color scheme or the second color scheme. A multiple operation valid state may be included.

Furthermore, as described above, among the multiple operation valid states of the type in which the output sound after the operation is generated multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, there is a special multiple operation valid state. (2nd A acceptance permission state) generates a post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2) in which the output state is not terminated upon detection of a non-operation state even though the validity period is one. There are two cases: one is to generate the post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2) in which the output state is terminated upon detection of the non-operation state, In the 2A reception acceptance state, it is more preferable to have an effect such as "making it difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state" It comes to be played.

Further, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state is also explained. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, among the multiple operation valid states of the type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, a special multiple operation valid state (the 1A reception permissible state or 3A reception permissible state), there is no case where the output sound is output after the operation, which ends the output state upon detection of the non-operation state; There is only a case where the post-operation output sound is output without ending the post-operation output sound when the detection is triggered.

In addition, in the second configuration A2 according to the above-described production example, a multiple-operation enabled state is created in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state. is a post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (end) upon detection of a non-operation state even though it is one valid period. and generate a post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes (ends) upon detection of a non-operation state. A plurality of operations valid state (second A reception permissible state) is provided for both cases and types. In addition, there is a type in which only the output sound after operation (output sound after 1A reception, output sound after 3A reception) is generated, the output state of which is not terminated upon detection of the specific operation means (operation button 410) being in the non-operation state. The multi-operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state, 3rd A reception permissible state) is provided. However, this shall not be provided for a type of multiple operation enabled state in which only the output sound is generated after the operation, in which the output state is terminated upon detection of the specific operation means (operation button 410) being in the non-operation state. becomes.

Further, regarding the second configuration A2, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is a target for displaying a sample image and for which operation reception is permitted a plurality of times."

Furthermore, in order to realize the second configuration A2, only one of the first A acceptance acceptance state and the third A acceptance acceptance state may be provided, and even in this case, each of the above-mentioned configurations and operations may be provided. It is possible to obtain the effect.

Further, for example, the third configuration A3 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a periodic change in the display of the sample image. The multiple operation valid state of the type that is displayed in units of time longer than a predetermined time (the 2nd A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149, the 4th A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 155), and the display of the sample image. A multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 146, 3A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 152) of the type in which periodic changes are displayed in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time. If provided, the above specified in the multiple operation enabled state (2nd A reception allowed state, 4th A reception allowed state) in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of time longer than a predetermined time. If it is detected that the operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state and the corresponding post-operation output sound (output sound after 2nd A reception, output sound after 4A reception) is output, the output sound after the operation When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the output sound is being output, the operation after the operation in the output state is detected. While the output sound can change based on the detection (output sound after the second A reception shown in FIG. 149(g)), periodic changes in the sample image display may appear in units of time shorter than the predetermined time. When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state, 3rd A reception permissible state) of the type displayed in , the corresponding operation is performed. When the post-output sound (output sound after 1st A reception, output sound after 3rd A reception) is output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is pressed while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that the operation state has changed to a non-operation state where no operation has been performed, the end of the post-operation output sound (output sound after 4A reception) in the output state is changed based on this detection. (The 1st A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146, the 3rd A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 152). In the above example, the 1A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146 and the 3A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152 are not triggered by this detection, but are output for a predetermined output time and end. It is supposed to be done. According to such a configuration, in the multi-operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, through the length of time required for periodic changes in the image display. It is now possible to suggest whether or not a change will occur, and it is expected that interest in gaming can be suitably maintained.

Further, in the third configuration A3 according to the above-described production example, in particular, among the plurality of operation valid states, a plurality of types are displayed such that periodic changes in the image display appear in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time. When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state in the operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state, 3rd A reception permissible state), the output sound after the operation corresponding to this (1st A reception permissible state, 3rd A reception permissible state) is detected. If the output sound (output sound after 3A reception) is output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) has not been operated from the operation state while the output sound after operation is being output. Even if it is detected that the non-operation state has been entered, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by this detection; (For example, the output is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated.) On the other hand, in the multi-operation enabled state, periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state in the multiple operation enabled state of the displayed type (2nd A reception allowed state, 4th A reception allowed state), and the post-operation output corresponding to this is detected. When the sound (output sound after 2nd A reception, output sound after 4th A reception) is output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state while the output sound after the operation is being output. When it is detected that the state has entered the non-operated state where no operation has been performed, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is triggered by this detection (as shown in FIG. 149(g)). There is both a case (2nd A post-reception output sound) which is performed without this detection as a trigger (4A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155). According to such a configuration, when the time required for periodic changes in the image display in the multiple operation valid state is relatively short, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, While it is preferable to suggest that no change occurs in the output sound after the operation, when the time required for periodic changes in the image display in the multiple operation valid state is relatively long, the specific operation means is removed from the operation state. Since it becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation when the device is put into the operating state, it is expected that a feeling of tension can be suitably maintained.

Further, in the third configuration A3 according to the above-described production example, among the multiple operation valid states, the multiple operation is of a type that is displayed such that a periodic change in the display of the sample image appears in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time. The valid state (1st A reception permissible state, 3rd A reception permissible state) is defined as "by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operating state, the output sound after the operation (1A output sound after reception, the 3rd A reception permissible state) is activated. 3A (output sound after reception) is generated multiple times as "Multiple operation valid state", but the type of multiple operation valid state in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time longer than a predetermined time The state (2nd A reception permissible state, 4th A reception permissible state) is a "multiple operation valid state in which an output sound is generated multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state" ” (2nd A reception permissible state) and “multiple operation valid state in which the output sound after the corresponding operation does not occur multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state” This suggests that the so-called automatic continuous hit function is to be activated when the time required for periodic changes in the sample image display is short. At the same time, when the periodic change in the sample image display takes a long time, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled. In this respect, even if it takes a long time to periodically change the image display, the output sound changes after the operation (end) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. When this occurs, it is suggested that the so-called auto-repeat function is to be activated, so it can be expected to suitably maintain the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as described above, among the multiple operation valid states (2nd A reception permissible state, 4th A reception permissible state) that are displayed in such a way that periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time longer than a predetermined time, In the special multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance permission state), the output sound after operation (second reception acceptance state) is one valid period, but the output state is not terminated upon detection of the non-operation state. Both the case of generating the post-operation output sound SB2) and the case of generating the post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2) whose output state is terminated upon detection of the non-operation state. Therefore, in the 2A acceptance acceptance state, it is difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. ” effects can be achieved more favorably.

Note that among the types of multiple operation valid states (2nd A reception permissible state, 4th A reception permissible state) that are displayed in such a way that periodic changes in the sample image display appear in time units longer than a predetermined time, special multiple operation In the operation valid state (4th A reception permissible state), there is no possibility of generating an output sound after the operation to end the output state upon detection of the non-operation state; There is only a case where an output sound is generated after an operation in which the output state is not terminated upon detection.

Also, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Further, regarding the third configuration A3, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is a target for displaying a sample image and for which operation reception is permitted a plurality of times."

Further, in the third configuration A3, a plurality of times may be prepared as the "time less than or equal to the predetermined time", or only one time (for example, "predetermined time") may be prepared. good. Similarly, regarding the above-mentioned "time longer than the predetermined time", a plurality of time periods may be prepared, or only one time period may be prepared.

Further, in order to realize the third configuration A3, the third A reception acceptance state does not necessarily need to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned configurations and effects.

For example, the fourth configuration A4 includes a multiple-operation enabled state in which operation acceptance for the operation means that is the object of displaying the sample image is permitted multiple times, and the operation means include the first operation means (operation button 410) and A second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is prepared, and the multiple operation enable state is a multiple operation enable state of a type in which at least a replica image display imitating the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed. (the 1st A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 146, the 2nd A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149, the 3rd A acceptance acceptance state, the 4th A acceptance acceptance state) and the second operation means (sword ornament 5001). If the simulated image display is provided with at least a multiple operation valid state of the displayed type (5A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 158), a simulated image display of the first operating means (operation button 410) The first operation means (operation button 410) is in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the image display is at least displayed (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state, 3rd A reception allowed state, 4th A reception allowed state). is detected to be in the operating state, and corresponding output sounds after operation (output sound after 1A reception, output sound after 2A reception, output sound after 3A reception, output sound after 4A reception) are output. In this case, when it is detected that the first operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. , the post-operation output sound in the output state can change upon the detection (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), whereas the second operation means (sword ornament 5001 ) is detected that the second operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permission state) of the type in which at least a simulated image display is displayed. If the post-operation output sound (5A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the post-operation output sound is output, the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that the state has changed to a non-operated state where no operation has been performed, the end of the post-operation output sound (output sound after 5A reception) in the output state is changed based on this detection. (The 5th A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 158). In the above-mentioned example, the fifth A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 158 is not triggered by this detection, but is output for a predetermined output time and then ends. According to such a configuration, in the multiple operation enabled state, multiple operations are allowed and the operation means can be changed from the operation state to the non-operation state through the type of the operation means that is the target of the image display. It is now possible to suggest whether or not there will be a change in the output sound after the operation when playing the game, and it is expected that the user's interest in the game will be suitably maintained.

Moreover, in the fourth configuration A4 according to the above-described production example, in particular, among the plurality of operation valid states, a plurality of types in which at least a replica image display imitating the second operating means (sword decoration body 5001) is displayed are displayed. It is detected that the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is in the operation state in the operation valid state (5A reception permission state), and the corresponding post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) is generated. If the output sound is output after the operation, it is detected that the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which it is not operated. Even if the output sound is changed after the operation in the output state (end), the change (end) of the output sound after the operation in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is done without the detection as a trigger (for example, after a predetermined output time) On the other hand, among the multiple operation valid states, the multiple operation valid state is of a type in which at least a simulated image display imitating the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed. It is detected that the first operating means (operation button 410) is in the operating state in (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state, 3rd A reception allowed state, 4th A reception allowed state) and responds to this. If the post-operation output sound (1st A post-reception output sound, 2nd A post-reception output sound, 3A post-reception output sound, 4th A post-reception output sound) is output, the state in which the post-operation output sound is output. When it is detected that the first operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated, the output sound after the operation in the output state changes (ends). is triggered by the detection (the output sound after the 2A reception shown in FIG. 149(g)) and when it is not triggered by the detection (the output sound after the 1A reception shown in FIG. 146, Both the 3rd A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152 and the 4A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155 are provided. According to such a configuration, when the second operating means is targeted for displaying a sample image and the second operating means is operated in the multiple operation valid state, the second operating means is deactivated from the operating state. On the other hand, when the first operating means is targeted for displaying a sample image and the first operating means is operated, it is preferable to suggest that there is no change in the output sound after the operation when the operating state is set. Since it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation when the first operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension. become expected.

Further, as described above, the multiple operation valid states (1A reception permission state, 2A reception permission state, 3A reception permission state, 3A reception permission state, 3A reception permission state, 3A reception permission state, 3A reception permission state, In the special multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permissible state), the output state changes upon detection of a non-operation state even though it is only one valid period. There are cases in which a post-operation output sound that is not terminated (second post-acceptance output sound SB2) is generated, and a post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2) in which the output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operation state (first post-acceptance output sound SB2). Since the output sound SA2) is generated in both cases, in the 2A acceptance acceptance state, the output sound after the operation is generated when the first operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. The effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether a change has occurred or not" can be achieved more favorably.

In addition, in the multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permission state) in which at least a simulated image display of the second operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is displayed, the detection of the non-operation state is disabled. There is no case in which a post-operation output sound whose output state is terminated is generated as a trigger, and there is only a case in which a post-operation output sound whose output state is not terminated is generated upon detection of a non-operation state as a trigger.

Further, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state is also explained. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Furthermore, in order to realize the fourth configuration A4, the fourth A reception acceptance state does not necessarily need to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned configurations and effects.

In addition, in order to realize the fourth configuration A4, only one of the 1A acceptance acceptance state and the 3A acceptance acceptance state may be provided, and even in this case, each configuration and operation described above may be provided. It is possible to obtain the effect.

For example, the fifth configuration A5 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state ( 2nd A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149), second multiple operation valid state (4A reception permission state shown in FIG. 155), and third multiple operation valid state (1A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146). The first multiple operation valid state (second A reception acceptance state) is the state in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state after the operation according to the detection. A change can be executed multiple times, but in that case, the interval after the operation until the change starts anew in response to the above detection is an indefinite period of time, and the second multiple operation is valid. The state (4th A acceptance acceptance state) is such that the change after the operation according to the detection cannot be executed multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, and the 3rd plurality The operation valid state (1st A acceptance permission state) is a state in which the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state, and the post-operation change according to the detection can be newly executed at a fixed time interval. In this case, it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permission state), and the corresponding post-operation output sound (after the second A reception) is detected. output sound) is output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the output sound is being output after the operation. When detected, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state can be triggered by the detection (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the second multiple operation valid state (4th A acceptance permission state), and the corresponding post-operation output sound (4th A post-acceptance output sound) is output, it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. However, the change (end) of the output sound after the operation in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is done without the detection (for example, the change (end) of the output sound after the operation in the output state is done for a predetermined output time. (output sound after the 4th A reception shown in FIG. 155), and the specific operation means (operation button 410) is activated in the third multiple operation valid state (1A reception permissible state). is detected to be in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is output, while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that the operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state where it is not operated, the change (end) of the output sound after the operation in the output state is triggered by the detection. Instead, it is performed without taking this detection as a trigger (for example, it is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated) (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146).

According to such a configuration, first, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not able to generate a plurality of post-operation output sounds according to the detection just by maintaining the operation state, the specific operation means is activated. It is now possible to suitably suggest that no change occurs in the output sound after operation (output sound after 4th A reception) when changing from the operation state to the non-operation state. In this regard, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state and the post-operation output sound according to the detection described above can be generated multiple times, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated. When changing from the state to the non-operation state, there is a case where a change occurs in the output sound after operation (output sound after 2nd A reception), and a case where there is no change in the output sound after operation (output sound after 1A reception). ), but the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state by determining whether or not the post-operation output sound is output at regular intervals. It is now possible to suggest whether or not there will be a change in the output sound after the operation when the operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, and it is expected that the game enjoyment will be suitably maintained. Become so.

Further, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state is also explained. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, in the fifth configuration A5, an operating means when the so-called auto-sequential hit function is not enabled in the multiple-times operation enabled state, and an operating means when the so-called auto-sequentially-hits function is enabled in the multiple-times operation enabled state. , it is assumed that the same operation means is used as the "specific operation means" in both cases, but this is not necessarily the case. In addition, although we have assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, this is not necessarily the case. I can't do it. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, in order to realize the fifth configuration A5, the third A reception permission state is provided as the multiple operation valid state instead of the first A reception permission state, and the third A reception permission state is replaced with the third A reception permission state. It may also be realized as a valid state for three or more operations. Alternatively, the plurality of operation valid states may include both the first A reception permission state and the third A reception permission state.

For example, the sixth configuration A6 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state ( 2nd A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149), second multiple operation valid state (4A reception permission state shown in FIG. 155), and third multiple operation valid state (1A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146). The first multiple operation valid state (second A reception acceptance state) is the state in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state after the operation according to the detection. The change can be executed multiple times, and in that case, the interval after the operation until the change starts anew in response to the above detection is always longer than the specific time, and the second multiple times. The operation valid state (4th A acceptance acceptance state) is a state in which the post-operation change according to the detection described above cannot be executed multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state. 3. The multiple operation valid state (1st A acceptance permission state) is such that the post-operation change according to the detection can be executed multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, At that time, if the interval until the change after the operation starts anew in response to the above detection is always a specific time or less, then the first multiple operation valid state (2A reception acceptance state), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is in an output state, the output sound after the operation in the output state is The change (end) can be made using this detection as an opportunity (output sound after 2nd A reception shown in FIG. 149(g)), and the second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception permissible state) When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (fourth A post-reception output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound is output. Even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is in a state where The (termination) is not triggered by the detection, but is performed without triggering the detection (for example, the output is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated) (Fig. 155), it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state in the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permissible state), and in response to this, When the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is output, the specific operating means (operation button 410) is operated from the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that a non-operation state has been entered, the change (end) of the output sound after the operation in the output state will not be triggered by this detection; (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then terminated) (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146).

According to such a configuration, first, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not able to generate a plurality of post-operation output sounds according to the detection just by maintaining the operation state, the specific operation means is activated. It is now possible to suitably suggest that no change occurs in the output sound after operation (output sound after 4th A reception) when changing from the operation state to the non-operation state. In this regard, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state and the post-operation output sound according to the detection described above can be generated multiple times, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated. When changing from the state to the non-operation state, there is a case where a change occurs in the output sound after operation (output sound after 2nd A reception), and a case where there is no change in the output sound after operation (output sound after 1A reception). ), but when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the interval from when the output sound after operation is output to when it is newly output is a specific time. It is now possible to suggest whether or not there will be a change in the output sound after the operation when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state by determining whether the specific operation means (operation button 410) is longer than the operating state. People are now expected to maintain their interests in a suitable manner.

Further, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state is also explained. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, in the sixth configuration A6, an operating means when the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated in the multi-time operation enabled state, and an operating means when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is enabled in the multiple-time operation enabled state. , it is assumed that the same operation means is used as the "specific operation means" in both cases, but this is not necessarily the case. Furthermore, although we have assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, this is not necessarily the case. I can't do it. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, in realizing the sixth configuration A6, the 3rd A reception permission state is provided as the multiple operation valid state instead of the 1A reception permission state, and the 3A reception permission state is replaced by the 3A reception permission state. It may also be realized as a valid state for three or more operations. Alternatively, the plurality of operation valid states may include both the first A reception permission state and the third A reception permission state.

For example, the seventh configuration A7 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a predetermined end timing has arrived. A multiple operation valid state of the type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the operated state before the specified operation means (operation button 410) 1A acceptance acceptance state, 2A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. Based on this, if a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated (3A reception permission state shown in FIG. 152, 4A reception permission state shown in FIG. 155) is provided, A multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operated state before a predetermined termination timing arrives. (1st A acceptance acceptance state, 2nd A acceptance acceptance state), it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state, and the corresponding output sound after operation (1A acceptance output sound, 2nd A reception acceptance state) is detected. 2A output sound after reception) is output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state where it is not operated while the output sound after operation is being output. When it is detected that the operation has changed, the output sound after the operation in the output state can change based on the detection (the output sound after the second A reception shown in FIG. 149(g)). A multiple operation valid state (a type of multiple operation valid state) in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the operated state before the specified termination timing arrives. It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the 3A acceptance acceptance state, 4A acceptance acceptance state), and the corresponding post-operation output sound (3A post-acceptance output sound, 4A acceptance acceptance state) is detected. If the post-operation output sound) is output, the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if this is detected, the end of the post-operation output sound (3A post-reception output sound, 4A post-reception output sound) in the output state is not changed based on this detection. (3rd A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152, 4th A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155). In the above example, the 3A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152 and the 4A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155 are not triggered by this detection, but are output for a predetermined output time and end. It is supposed to be done. According to such a configuration, in the multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is determined based on whether the operation valid state is terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state. It is now possible to suggest whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation when changing from the operation state to the non-operation state, and it is expected that the player's interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

Moreover, in the seventh configuration A7 according to the above-described production example, in particular, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing of the plurality of operation valid states arrives. When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated in a type of multiple operation valid state (3A acceptance permission state, 4A reception permission state) in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that If the state is detected and the corresponding post-operation output sound (3A post-reception output sound, 4A post-reception output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound is output. Even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated, the change (end) of the output sound after the operation in the output state will not occur. , which is not triggered by the detection and is done without the detection (for example, is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated), whereas the multiple operation valid state described above is Among these, the plurality of times the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the predetermined termination timing arrives. In the operation valid state (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state), it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operated state, and the corresponding post-operation output sound (1st A post-reception output) is detected. sound, 2nd A output sound after reception) is output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operation state while the output sound after operation is being output. When the state is detected, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is triggered by the detection (2A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). ) and a case where the output sound is not triggered by the detection (output sound after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146). According to such a configuration, the operation valid state is not terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state before the predetermined termination timing arrives. In the operation valid state, it is preferable to suggest that there is no change in the output sound after the operation when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. In a multiple operation valid state of a type where the operation valid state can be terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means was previously detected to be in the operated state, the specific operation means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state. Since it is now possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after an operation, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

Note that in the seventh configuration A7, there are a plurality of types in which the valid operation state is not terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means is detected to be in the operational state before the predetermined termination timing arrives. The operation is performed based on the operation means that is to be operated multiple times in the operation valid state and the specific operation means being detected to be in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. Multiple operations of a type that can terminate the valid state.Although it is assumed that the operation means that are the object of multiple operations in the valid state are the same operation means as the "specific operation means," this is not necessarily the case. I can't. For example, in the multiple operation valid state, when the "operation means" expressed as a sample image display is operated, the seventh configuration may be determined as whether the operation valid state is of a type that can be terminated by this A7 may be specified.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the seventh configuration A7 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

Further, in the seventh configuration A7 according to the above-described production example, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing of the plurality of operation valid states arrives. The multiple operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state, 2nd A reception permissible state) of the type in which the relevant operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection of the operation is ``operation of the specific operation means (operation button 410)''. The output sound after the operation (the output sound after the first A reception, the output sound after the second A reception) is generated multiple times just by maintaining the state. A multiple operation valid state (3A acceptance permission state) of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the operated state before the arrival of the operation button 410 , No. 4A reception permissible state) occurs as a "multiple operation valid state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state" (No. 3A reception permissible state) and ``multiple operation valid state in which the output sound after the corresponding operation does not occur multiple times just by keeping the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state'' (4A reception (permissive state).

Furthermore, as described above, the type in which the valid operation state can be terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the operation state before the predetermined termination timing arrives. Among the multiple operation valid states (1st A reception permissible state, 2nd A reception permissible state), in the special multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permissible state), it is possible to enter the non-operation state even though it is one valid period. There are two cases in which the output state is not terminated upon detection of a non-operation state, and a case in which the output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operation state. In the second A acceptance state, "the specific operation means (operation button 410) is deactivated from the operation state". The effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation when entering the operation state" can be achieved more favorably.

On the other hand, there is a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the predetermined termination timing arrives. Among the multiple operation valid states (1st A reception permissible state, 2nd A reception permissible state), in the special multiple operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state), output is triggered by detection of a non-operation state. There is no case in which a post-operation output sound is generated when the state is terminated, and there is only a case in which a post-operation output sound is generated in which the output state is not terminated, triggered by detection of a non-operation state.

Further, in the seventh configuration A7, the operation valid state is determined based on the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. In the multiple operation valid state of the type that can be terminated (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state), the above message display MA is always displayed (message display MA1, MA2), but the predetermined end timing is A multiple operation valid state (3rd A acceptance permission state, In the 4th A acceptance acceptance state), there are cases in which the message display MA is displayed (4th A acceptance acceptance state) and cases in which the message display MA is not displayed (3A acceptance acceptance state).

Also, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Further, regarding the seventh configuration A7, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is a target for displaying a sample image and for which operation reception is permitted a plurality of times."

In addition, in realizing the seventh configuration A7, only one of the 3A acceptance acceptance state and the 4A acceptance acceptance state may be provided, and even in this case, each configuration and operation described above may be provided. It is possible to obtain at least some of the effects.

Further, for example, the eighth configuration A8 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) The multiple operation valid state of the type in which the message display prompting operation (message display MA1, MA2, MA4) is displayed (the 1st A reception permissible state shown in FIG. 146, the 2nd A reception permissible state shown in FIG. 149, 155) and a multi-operation valid state of the type in which the message display is not displayed (3A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 152), the above message display will not be displayed. In the multi-operation enabled state (3A acceptance acceptance state) of the type, when it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in the operating state, the post-operation output sound is "The output sound after the operation is If the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while being output, the output sound after the operation will start from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state. Only "sounds whose time until they become inaudible is not a fixed amount of time (sounds whose duration is not fixed and is not processed as a fixed period of time)" can be output (after the third A reception shown in Figure 152). On the other hand, in the multiple operation valid states (1st A reception permissible state, 2nd A reception permissible state, 4th A reception permissible state) of the type in which the above message display is displayed, the above specific operation means (operation button 410 ) is detected to be in the operating state, the post-operation output sound will be displayed as a "non-operated" message indicating that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has not been operated from the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. If a sound is output, the time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is processed as a fixed period of time" is output. (2A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) and "non-operation in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operating state while the output sound after operation is being outputted" "Sound that takes an indefinite period of time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation (sound that takes an indefinite period of time)" (the first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146 and the fourth A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155). In the example described above, the output sound after reception of the second A shown in FIG. 149(g) is constant from the timing when the specific operation means enters the non-operation state until the output sound after the operation becomes inaudible. "0 seconds" is set as the time.

According to such a configuration, in the multiple operation valid state, if the output sound after the operation is in the output state and the message display is not displayed, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. It is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound that is in the output state to end after entering the non-operation state; for example, the specific operation means (operation button 410) It becomes possible to suitably suggest that the noteworthy performance is low in a situation where the display has just been changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. On the other hand, in the multi-operation enabled state, if the output sound after the operation is in the output state and the message display is displayed, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. There are both cases in which it is possible to estimate how long it will take for the output sound after an operation in the output state to end after the operation changes to the non-operation state, and cases in which it is difficult to estimate. Therefore, for example, while suggesting that there is a possibility that the performance after changing the specific operation means (operation button 410) from the operation state to the non-operation state is worth paying attention to, It is expected that the output sound after an operation that is in the output state will not necessarily end after a certain period of time has elapsed, and that the feeling of tension when changing to the non-operation state will also be maintained suitably. Become so.

Moreover, in the first configuration A1 according to the above-mentioned production example, when one mode (message display MA2) appears as a message display, the post-operation output sound is "While the post-operation output sound is being output." When the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, the output sound after the operation becomes non-operating from the timing when the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes to the non-operating state. When the sound whose time until it becomes audible is processed as a fixed time is output (the second output sound after reception SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)), and when the output sound after the operation is If the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state where it is not being operated while the is being output, the timing from when the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes to the non-operating state. When a sound is output that does not take a certain period of time until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation (second output sound after reception SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)), and I made it so. In such a configuration, for example, even though one mode (message display MA2) is appearing as a message display, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. While trying to suggest that there is a possibility that the performance is worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has passed after being in the non-operation state. Therefore, it is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the vehicle is in a non-operating state.

In addition, in the eighth configuration A8, among the multiple operation valid states, there are multiple operation valid states of the type in which a message display is displayed (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state), and no message display is displayed. Regarding the type of multiple operation valid state (3A acceptance permission state), "multiple operation valid state where the output sound after the corresponding operation is output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state" ” can be prepared as. In other words, in this case, if the message display is not displayed even though it is a "multiple operation valid state in which the output sound after the operation is output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means in the operating state", the output state The change (end) of the output sound after the operation is not triggered by the detection, and will be done without the trigger of the detection, and if a message is displayed, the operation that is in the output state There are two cases in which the change (end) of the post-output sound is made in response to the detection, and in other cases it is made not in response to the detection.

Also, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Also, as mentioned above, among the multiple operation valid states of the type in which the message display is displayed, in the special multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance permission state), even though it is one valid period, the output sound after the operation is "If the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the output sound is being output after the operation, the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes to the non-operating state. ) is output (the second reception shown in FIG. 149(g) After-output sound SA2) and "If the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the above-mentioned When a sound is output in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is turned on until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is not constant (as shown in FIG. 149(h) Since both the output sound SB2) and the second post-acceptance output sound SB2) are present, for example, in the 2A acceptance permission state, the performance after changing the specific operation means (operation button 410) from the operation state to the non-operation state is improved. While suggesting that there is a possibility that there is a value worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed after being put in the non-operation state. It is now expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the device is in a non-operating state.

In addition, in the 1st A reception permission state, 3A reception permission state, and 4A reception permission state according to the above-mentioned example of production, the output sound after the operation ends when the output state is triggered by the detection of the non-operation state. There is no case in which the output sound is outputted, and there is only a case in which the post-operation output sound is outputted without ending the post-operation output sound triggered by the detection of the non-operation state.

In addition, "the time from the timing when the specific operating means (operating button 410) becomes in the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation" is set as any time. It may also be "0 seconds".

Further, regarding the eighth configuration A8, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is a target for displaying a sample image and for which operation reception is permitted a plurality of times."

Furthermore, in order to realize the eighth configuration A8, the fourth A reception acceptance state does not necessarily need to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned configurations and effects.

For example, the ninth configuration A9 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) ) is in the operating state and the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times. 3A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 152), and a multiple operation valid state (see FIG. 4A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. In the state (4th A acceptance permission state), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state, the after-operation output sound is "While the said after-operation output sound is being output," When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, the output sound after the operation becomes inaudible from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state. Only sounds that take an indefinite amount of time (sounds that take an indefinite amount of time without being processed as a certain amount of time) can be output (the output sound after receiving 4A shown in Figure 155). , multiple operation valid state (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state) in which the output sound after the operation is output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operating state , 3A acceptance acceptance state), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state, the post-operation output sound is "The above-mentioned specific operation means is output while the post-operation output sound is output." When the operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state until the output sound after the operation becomes inaudible. 149 (g) shown in FIG. 149(g)), and when the "sound in which the time of When the operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state until the output sound after the operation becomes inaudible. A sound whose time is not a fixed time (sound whose time is undefined)" can be output (the output sound after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146, the output sound after the third A reception shown in FIG. 152). I made it so that there is. In the example described above, the output sound after reception of the second A shown in FIG. 149(g) is constant from the timing when the specific operation means enters the non-operation state until the output sound after the operation becomes inaudible. "0 seconds" is set as the time.

According to such a configuration, when the so-called auto-sequence function is not activated in the multi-operation enabled state, after the operation that is in the output state when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, It is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the output sound to end after the state is changed to the non-operated state. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that the noteworthy performance is low in a situation where there is no such thing. On the other hand, when the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled in the multi-operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state. , since there are both cases in which it is possible to estimate how much time has passed since the non-operation state is entered and cases in which it is difficult to estimate, for example, the specific operation means described above. Although it suggests that there is a possibility that the performance after changing from the operation state to the non-operation state is worth paying attention to, it does not necessarily mean that the output state is reached after a certain period of time has passed after the operation is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. The output sound is no longer always terminated, and it is now expected to maintain a good sense of tension when the device is placed in a non-operating state.

Further, in the ninth configuration A9 according to the above-described production example, the multiple operation valid state is a type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state. In (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state, 3rd A reception allowed state), there are both cases in which the sample image display is displayed in the first color scheme and cases in which it is displayed in the second color scheme (Fig. 146 (c), FIG. 149(c), FIG. 152(c), etc.) is the type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operating means (operating button 410) in the operating state. In the multiple operation enabled state (4th A reception allowed state), there are at least some cases in which the sample image display is displayed in the first color scheme (the first color scheme is always fine), but there are no cases in which it is displayed in the second color scheme. You can do it like this.

In this case, the multiple operation enabled state (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception permission state) in which the output sound after the operation is output multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state In the permissible state and 3A reception permissible state), it is sufficient that the sample image display is displayed in both the first color scheme and the second color scheme, for example, if multiple operations of the relevant type are valid. The state may include a predetermined multiple operation enabled state in which the replica image display is displayed only in the first color scheme, or a specific multiple operation enabled state in which the replica image display is not displayed in either the first color scheme or the second color scheme. A multiple operation valid state may be included.

Further, as described above, in the ninth configuration A9 according to the above-mentioned production example, there are multiple types in which the output sound after the operation is generated multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state. Among the multiple operation valid states, in the special multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance acceptance state), even though the valid period is one, the output sound after the operation is "The above When the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, the post-operation output sound is made inaudible from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state. 149(g)) is output (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. When the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from the operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, the output sound after the operation becomes inaudible from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state. There are both cases where a sound whose time until the reception is not fixed (sound whose time is undefined) can be output (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)). Therefore, in the special multi-operation enabled state (2nd A reception allowed state), this suggests that the performance after changing the specific operating means from the operating state to the non-operating state may be worth paying attention to. However, the output sound after an operation that is in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed after being put into the non-operation state, and this also reduces the feeling of tension when changing to the non-operation state. It is expected that it will be maintained properly.

Also, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Further, in the ninth configuration A9 according to the above-described production example, a multiple operation of a type in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state Among the valid states, in a special multiple-operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state or 3rd A reception permissible state), the post-operation output sound is ``When the specific operation means ( When the operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, the time from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operated state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is determined. "sound that is processed as a fixed period of time" is not output, and the specific operating means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output. , the time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a sound whose duration is not fixed (sound whose duration is indefinite). The only option is to output it.

In addition, "the time from the timing when the specific operating means (operating button 410) becomes in the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation" is set as any time. It may also be "0 seconds".

Further, regarding the ninth configuration A9, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is a target for displaying a sample image and is allowed to accept operations a plurality of times."

In addition, in realizing the ninth configuration A9, only one of the first A acceptance acceptance state and the third A acceptance acceptance state may be provided, and even in this case, each of the above-mentioned configurations and operations It is possible to obtain the effect.

For example, the tenth configuration A10 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a periodic change in the display of the sample image. The multiple operation valid state of the type that is displayed in units of time longer than a predetermined time (the 2nd A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149, the 4th A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 155), and the display of the sample image. A multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 146, 3A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 152) of the type in which periodic changes are displayed in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time. If provided, in the multiple operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state, 3rd A reception permissible state) in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed so as to appear in units of time equal to or less than the above predetermined time, the above-mentioned When it is detected that the specific operating means (operating button 410) is in the operating state, the post-operation output sound is displayed as "The specific operating means (operating button 410) is operated while the post-operating output sound is being output." When the state changes to a non-operated state in which it is not operated, the time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operated state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a sound that does not have a fixed time ( Although it is possible to output only "sounds that are not processed as a fixed time and have an indefinite time period" (the output sound after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146, and the output sound after the third A reception shown in FIG. 152). On the other hand, in the multiple operation enabled state (2nd A reception allowed state, 4th A reception allowed state) in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time longer than a predetermined time, the specific operation means When it is detected that the operation button 410 is in the operation state, a post-operation output sound is generated that says, ``While the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated from the operation state. When the specified operating means enters the non-operating state, the time from when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is processed as a certain period of time. When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated from the operating state while the output sound after the operation is being output (the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), If the specified operation means enters the non-operation state and the output sound is rendered inaudible after the operation, the time elapses from the time when the output sound becomes inaudible. A certain sound)" can be output (the output sound after the 4th A reception shown in FIG. 155). In the example described above, the output sound after reception of the second A shown in FIG. 149(g) is constant from the timing when the specific operation means enters the non-operation state until the output sound after the operation becomes inaudible. "0 seconds" is set as the time.

According to such a configuration, when the time required for periodic changes in the image display in the multi-operation enabled state is relatively short, the operation that is in the output state when the specific operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. It is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the post-output sound to end after entering the non-operating state; for example, in a situation where the specific operating means has just been changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that the noteworthy performance is low. On the other hand, when the time required for periodic changes in the image display in the multiple operation valid state is relatively long, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. , since there are both cases in which it is possible to estimate how much time has passed since the non-operation state is entered, and cases in which it is difficult to estimate, it is possible to operate the specific operation means as described above. Although it is suggested that the performance after changing from the state to the non-operating state may be worth paying attention to, the output sound after the operation does not necessarily reach the output state after a certain period of time has passed after the state is changed to the non-operating state. It is now expected that the user will not necessarily end the operation, and it will be expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when entering the non-operating state.

Further, in the tenth configuration A10 according to the above-described production example, among the multiple operation valid states, the multiple operation is of a type that is displayed such that a periodic change in the display of the sample image appears in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time. The valid state (1st A reception permissible state, 3rd A reception permissible state) is defined as "by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operating state, the output sound after the operation (1A output sound after reception, the 3rd A reception permissible state) is activated. 3A (output sound after reception) is generated multiple times as "Multiple operation valid state", but the type of multiple operation valid state in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time longer than a predetermined time The state (2nd A reception permissible state, 4th A reception permissible state) is a "multiple operation valid state in which an output sound is generated multiple times by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state" ” (2nd A reception permissible state) and “multiple operation valid state in which the output sound after the corresponding operation does not occur multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state” This suggests that the so-called automatic continuous hit function is to be activated when the time required for periodic changes in the sample image display is short. At the same time, when the periodic change in the sample image display takes a long time, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled. In this respect, even if the time required for periodic changes in the image display is long, the post-operation output sound will be displayed as "When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated while the post-operation output sound is being output." When the state changes from the state to a non-operated state in which it is not operated, the time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operated state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is treated as a fixed time. When the "sound" is output, it is suggested that the so-called auto-repeat function is to be activated, so it can be expected that the player's interest in the game will be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the tenth configuration A10 according to the above-described production example, among the multiple operation valid states, the multiple operation of the type that is displayed such that a periodic change in the image display appears in a time unit longer than the predetermined time In the active state, the sample image display may be displayed in the first color scheme or in the second color scheme, but simply maintaining the above-mentioned specific operating means in the operating state will result in the corresponding output after the operation. In the multiple operation enabled state of the type where the sound does not occur multiple times, there are at least some cases where the sample image display is displayed in the first color scheme (the first color scheme is always fine), but there are no cases where it is displayed in the second color scheme. .

Furthermore, as described above, among the multiple operation valid states (2nd A reception permissible state, 4th A reception permissible state) that are displayed in such a way that periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time longer than a predetermined time, In the special multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance acceptance state), although the valid period is one, the post-operation output sound is "When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is output while the post-operation output sound is being output. ) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state where it is not being operated, the time from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a certain period of time. (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)), and when the specific operation means (operation When the button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, the time from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operated state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is constant. Since there is both a case where a sound that is not at a certain time (a sound whose time is undefined) can be output (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)), special multiple times. In the operation valid state (2nd A reception acceptance state), for example, while suggesting that there is a possibility that the performance after changing the specific operation means from the operation state to the non-operation state is worth paying attention to, To make it so that the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has elapsed after being put into the operating state, and to suitably maintain the feeling of tension when changing to the non-operating state. becomes expected.

Note that among the types of multiple operation valid states (2nd A reception permissible state, 4th A reception permissible state) that are displayed in such a way that periodic changes in the sample image display appear in time units longer than a predetermined time, special multiple operation In the operation valid state (4th A acceptance acceptance state), the post-operation output sound is "non-operated when the specific operation means (operation button 410) has not been operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output." If a sound is output, the time from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is processed as a fixed time. "If the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the output sound is being output after the operation, the specific operating means is in the non-operating state. There are only cases in which a sound is output where the time from the timing at which the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is not a fixed amount of time (sound that takes an indefinite amount of time).

Further, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state is also explained. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Further, regarding the tenth configuration A10, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is a target for displaying a sample image and is allowed to accept operations multiple times."

Further, in the tenth configuration A10, a plurality of times may be prepared as the "time less than or equal to the predetermined time", or only one time (for example, "predetermined time") may be prepared. good. Similarly, regarding the above-mentioned "time longer than the predetermined time", a plurality of time periods may be prepared, or only one time period may be prepared.

Furthermore, in order to realize the tenth configuration A10, the third A reception permission state does not necessarily need to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-described configurations and effects.

Further, for example, the eleventh configuration A11 includes a multiple-operation enabled state in which reception of an operation on the operation means that is the object of displaying the sample image is permitted multiple times, and the operation means include a first operation means (operation button 410) and A second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is prepared, and the multiple operation enable state is a multiple operation enable state of a type in which at least a replica image display imitating the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed. (the 1st A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 146, the 2nd A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149, the 3A reception permission state shown in FIG. 152, the 4th A reception permission state shown in FIG. 155), and the second A reception permission state shown in FIG. In the case that the second operation is provided with a multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 158) of the type in which at least a simulated image display imitating the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is displayed, the second operation The second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in an operating state in the multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permission state) of the type in which at least a replica image display imitating the means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed. When is detected, the post-operation output sound is displayed as "If the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state where it is not being operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. , the time from the timing when the second operating means (sword decoration body 5001) enters the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a sound that is not a fixed period of time (processed as a fixed period of time) However, only a sound with an indefinite duration (a sound with an indefinite duration) can be output (the output sound after receiving the 5A shown in FIG. The first operation means (operation button 410) is operated in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which at least When it is detected that the operation button 410 is in the operation state, the after-operation output sound indicates that the first operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which it is not operated while the after-operation output sound is being output. , the time from the timing when the first operating means (operating button 410) enters the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is processed as a certain period of time. (the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) and "When the first operating means (operation button 410) is operated from the operating state while the corresponding post-operation output sound is being output." When the state is in a non-operating state, the time from the timing when the first operating means (operation button 410) enters the non-operating state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a certain period of time. 146, the output sound after the 3rd A reception shown in FIG. 152, and the 4th A sound after the 4A reception shown in FIG. 155. output sound). In the above example, the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) is in a state where the post-operation output sound is inaudible from the timing when the first operating means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state. ``0 seconds'' is set as the constant time until the

According to such a configuration, in the multiple operation valid state, the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is targeted for displaying a replica image, and the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated. Sometimes, when the second operating means (sword decoration body 5001) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state is terminated after how much time has passed since the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is changed to the non-operating state. For example, in a situation where the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) has recently been changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is preferable to suggest that the noteworthy performance is low. You will be able to do this. On the other hand, when the first operation means (operation button 410) is targeted for displaying the sample image and the first operation means (operation button 410) is operated, the first operation means (operation button 410) is When changing from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is possible to estimate how much time will elapse after the operation output sound that is in the output state ends after changing to the non-operating state, and in other cases it is difficult to estimate. This suggests that, for example, the performance after the first operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state may be worth paying attention to. However, the output sound after an operation that is in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed after being put into the non-operation state, and the feeling of tension when changing to the non-operation state has also been improved. It is expected that this will be maintained appropriately.

Further, as described above, the multiple operation valid states (1A reception permission state, 2A reception permission state, 3A reception permission state, 3A reception permission state, 3A reception permission state, 3A reception permission state, 3A reception permission state, In the special multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permissible state), the post-operation output sound "The output sound after the operation is not output." If the first operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not being operated while the user is in the room, the operation is performed from the timing when the first operating means (operating button 410) changes to the non-operating state. When a sound in which the time until the post-output sound is rendered inaudible is processed as a fixed time is output (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)); If the first operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the output sound is being output after the operation, the first operating means (operating button 410) changes to the non-operating state. 410) until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a sound for which the time is not fixed (sound for which the time is undefined)" may be output (see Fig. 149 (h)). Since both the second post-acceptance output sound SB2) shown in FIG. Although it is suggested that there is a possibility that the performance after changing from the operation state to the non-operation state is worth paying attention to, the output after operation is not necessarily in the output state after a certain period of time has passed after being changed to the non-operation state. The sound is no longer always terminated, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained when the device is placed in a non-operating state.

In addition, in the multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permission state) in which at least a simulated image display of the second operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is displayed, the output sound after the operation is "Output after the operation". When the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while sound is being output, the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes to the non-operating state. "The time from when the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is processed as a fixed time" is not output, and "The output sound after the operation is output" is not output. In this case, when the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from the timing when the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes to the non-operating state. There are only cases in which a sound is output for which the time it takes for the output sound to become inaudible after the operation is not fixed (sound for which the time is undefined) is output.

Also, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Further, in order to realize the eleventh configuration A11, the fourth A acceptance permission state does not necessarily need to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned configurations and effects.

Furthermore, in order to realize the eleventh configuration A11, only one of the 1A acceptance acceptance state and the 3A acceptance acceptance state may be provided, and even in this case, each of the above-mentioned configurations and operations may be provided. It is possible to obtain the effect.

For example, the twelfth configuration A12 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state ( 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146). state), the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) according to the detection can be generated at predetermined intervals simply by maintaining the specific operating means (operation button 410) in the operating state. However, the output sound after the operation is "If the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state where the operation button 410 is not operated while the output sound after the operation is being output, Output as a sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means becomes in the state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is not a fixed time (sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is undefined) (the output sound after receiving the first A shown in FIG. 146), whereas in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A receiving permissible state), the specific operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in the operating state. The post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times by simply pressing the button, and in that case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to be an indefinite period of time. However, the post-operation output sound is "If the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the non-operated state When the time from the timing when the specific operation means is activated to when the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a certain period of time (sound that is processed as a certain period of time)'' is output. (2nd A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), "Non-operation state where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. , the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) enters the non-operation state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a sound that is not a fixed period of time (an undefined period of time) (a second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)). In the above-mentioned example, the post-operation output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) becomes inaudible from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) enters the non-operation state. "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time until the

According to such a configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state (1st A acceptance acceptance state) among the multiple operation valid states, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state It is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) that is in the output state to end after entering the non-operation state, for example, when the specified operation means ( In a situation where the operation button 410) has just been changed from the operated state to the non-operated state, it is possible to suitably suggest that the noteworthy performance is low. In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state) among the multiple operation valid states, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state, it is in the output state. There are two cases in which it is possible to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) to end after entering the non-operation state, and in other cases it is difficult to estimate. For example, while suggesting that there is a possibility that the performance after changing the specific operation means (operation button 410) from the operation state to the non-operation state is worth paying attention to, To make it so that the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has elapsed after being put into the operating state, and to suitably maintain the feeling of tension when changing to the non-operating state. becomes expected.

In addition, in the twelfth configuration A12, a third multiple operation valid state (4th A acceptance permission state) is further prepared as the multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state (4th A reception permission permission state) is further prepared. state), simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state does not allow the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound after 4A reception) to be generated multiple times in response to the detection; The output sound is "If the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state in which it is not operated while the output sound is being output after the operation, the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state. The time from the timing when the button 410) is activated until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is not treated as a fixed time, but can be output as an "indeterminate sound". According to such a configuration, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection described above cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, the post-operation output sound is If the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the output sound is being output after the operation, the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes to the non-operating state. It is now possible to suitably suggest that the time from the timing at which the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is not treated as a fixed time, but is output as an indefinite sound. .

Further, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state is also explained. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permission state), the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is generated multiple times. The interval is an unspecified time, but when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state in the second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance acceptance state), the output sound after the operation ( The 1st A post-acceptance output sound) does not occur at intervals shorter than a predetermined time (fixed time) which is the interval when it occurs multiple times, but only at intervals longer than the predetermined time. That is, in this case, the post-operation output sound (output sound after 2nd A reception) corresponding to the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permissible state) is changed to the second multiple operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state). Unlike the corresponding output sound after operation (output sound after 1st A reception), the interval at which the output is repeated due to the auto continuous hit function is indefinite, and the time required for that interval (minimum time) is also longer. , it becomes difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeat function is enabled or not, and the first multiple operation enabled state (2nd A reception allowed state) and the third multiple operation enabled state (4th A reception allowed state) It is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize which of the following situations is occurring.

In addition, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state in the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permissible state), within the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permissible state). The number of times that the post-operation output sound (output sound after 2nd A reception) can be generated is determined by the number of times that the post-operation output sound (output sound after 2nd A reception) can be generated when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the 2nd multiple operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state). The number of times the post-operation output sound (output sound after first A reception) can be generated is set to be smaller than the number of times that the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) can be generated within the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permissible state) when maintained in did. In other words, in this case, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), it becomes even more difficult to recognize whether the auto continuous hit function is enabled, and the first multiple operation valid state It is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize which of the state (2nd A reception permissible state) and the 3rd multiple operation valid state (4th A reception permissible state) is occurring. Become so.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception allowed state), by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, the post-operation output sound (2nd A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times. The upper limit number of times that the specific operation means (operation button 410) can be repeatedly operated without maintaining it in the operating state is set to be smaller than the upper limit number of times that the output sound can be generated multiple times after the operation. . According to such a configuration, the characteristics related to the performance as the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permissible state) are the same as the third multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permissible state) in which the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated. state), and it is difficult to recognize which of the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permissible state) and the third multiple operation valid state (4th A reception permissible state) is occurring. As a result, they are expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowed state), by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times. The upper limit number of times that can be generated is the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operation means (operation button 410) without maintaining it in the operated state. is set to be equal to or greater than the upper limit number of times.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (1st A reception allowed state) and the third multiple operation valid state (4th A reception allowed state), the output sound after the operation is "The output sound after the operation is output. In this case, when the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state. is not output as a sound that takes a fixed amount of time (sound that is processed as a fixed amount of time).

Furthermore, in the twelfth configuration A12, it is assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are the same operation means. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, in order to realize the twelfth configuration A12, the third A reception permission state is provided as the multiple operation valid state instead of the first A reception permission state, and the third A reception permission state is set as the multiple operation valid state. It may also be realized as a valid state for two or more operations. Alternatively, the plurality of operation valid states may include both the first A reception permission state and the third A reception permission state.

For example, the thirteenth configuration A13 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state ( A second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In this case, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in the operation state, and after the operation according to the detection. The output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) can be generated multiple times, but in that case, the interval after the operation until the output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time, and The post-output sound (output sound after 2nd A reception) is defined as "If the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state where it is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, Sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) enters the non-operation state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a constant time (sound that is processed as a constant time) )" (output sound after the second A reception shown in FIG. ) is merely maintained in the operating state, the post-operation output sound (output sound after 4th A reception) according to the above detection cannot be generated multiple times, and the post-operation output sound (output sound after 2A reception) is "If the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the output sound is being output after the operation, the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes to the non-operating state. ) from the timing when the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is output as a sound that is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is undefined) ( 4A output sound after reception as shown in FIG. The post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the operation can be generated multiple times, but in that case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is a specific time or less, In addition, the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is defined as ``While the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated. In this case, the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) enters the non-operation state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a sound that is not a fixed period of time (processed as a fixed period of time). (the output sound after receiving the first A shown in FIG. 146). In the above example, the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) is in a state where the post-operation output sound is inaudible from the timing when the first operating means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state. ``0 seconds'' is set as the constant time until the

According to such a configuration, first, when the post-operation output sound according to the above detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, the post-operation output sound is "If the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the output sound is being output after the operation, the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes to the non-operating state. It is suggested that the time from the timing when ) becomes inaudible until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is output as a sound that is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is undefined). will be done. In this regard, when the post-operation output sound according to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operating state, the post-operation output sound is When the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while sound is being output, the timing at which the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes to the non-operating state. 149 (g). 2A (output sound after reception) and "If the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the corresponding output sound after operation is being output, A sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is activated until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is not a fixed time (sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is undefined) ” (output sound after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146), and when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state It is possible to suggest which properties of the output sound will be output after the operation, based on whether the interval between the output sound and the new output is longer than a specific time. As a result, it is expected that players will be able to maintain their interest in gaming in a favorable manner.

In addition, in the thirteenth configuration A13, in particular, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state) is set such that "the specific operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is being output." When the means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, the period from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible. In some cases, the sound whose time is a fixed time (sound that is processed as a fixed time) is output (the output sound after receiving the second A shown in FIG. 149(g)), and in the other case, the sound is If the specified operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state while the specified operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operated state, the operation will be performed from the timing when the specified operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state. When the second post-reception output sound shown in FIG. SB2). That is, in this case, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), the post-operation output sound (the second There are both cases where it is possible to estimate how long it will take for the output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) to end after entering the non-operation state, and cases where it is difficult to estimate. , for example, while suggesting that there is a possibility that the performance after changing the specific operation means (operation button 410) from the operation state to the non-operation state is worth paying attention to; The output sound does not necessarily end after an operation in the output state after a certain period of time has elapsed, and it is expected that the tension when changing to the non-operation state will be maintained appropriately. Become.

Further, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state is also explained. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, in the thirteenth configuration A13, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permission state), the post-operation output sound (second A reception permission state) The interval at which the output sound (output sound) occurs multiple times is an undefined period of time, and when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state in the third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permission state). When the output sound occurs multiple times after an operation, the interval is now a constant time. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (output sound after second A reception) corresponding to the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state) is changed to the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permission state). Unlike the corresponding output sound after operation (output sound after 1st A reception), the interval at which the output is repeated due to the auto continuous hit function is indefinite, and the time required for that interval (minimum time) is also longer. , it becomes difficult to recognize whether the automatic repeated hit function is enabled or not, and the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception allowed state) and the second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception allowed state) It is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize which of the following situations is occurring.

In addition, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state in the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permissible state), within the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permissible state). The number of times that the output sound after operation (output sound after 2nd A reception) can be generated is the number of times that the output sound after operation (output sound after 2nd A reception) can be generated in the 3rd multiple operation valid state (1st A reception allowed state) and the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state The number of times that the output sound after operation (output sound after 1A reception) can be generated is set to be smaller than the number of times that the output sound after operation (output sound after 1A reception) can be generated in the third multiple operation valid state (1A reception permission state) when did. In other words, in this case, in the first multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance acceptance state), it becomes even more difficult to recognize whether the auto continuous hit function is enabled, and the first multiple operation is enabled. It is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize which of the state (2nd A reception permissible state) and the second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception permissible state) is occurring. Become so.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception allowed state), by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, the post-operation output sound (2nd A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times. The upper limit number of times that the specific operation means (operation button 410) can be repeatedly operated without maintaining it in the operating state is set to be smaller than the upper limit number of times that the output sound can be generated multiple times after the operation. . According to such a configuration, the nature of the performance in the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permissible state) is different from the second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception permissible state) in which the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated. state), and it is difficult to recognize which of the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permissible state) and the second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception permissible state) is occurring. As a result, they are expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowed state), by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times. The upper limit number of times that can be generated is the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound (output sound after 1A reception) can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operation means (operation button 410) without maintaining it in the operated state. is set to be equal to or greater than the upper limit number of times.

In addition, in the third multiple operation valid state (1st A reception allowed state) and the second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception allowed state), the output sound after the operation is "The output sound after the operation is output. In this case, when the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated, the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible from the timing when the specific operating means enters the non-operating state. is not output as a sound that takes a fixed amount of time (sound that is processed as a fixed amount of time).

Further, in the thirteenth configuration A13, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are the same operation means. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, in order to realize the thirteenth configuration A13, the third A reception permission state is provided as the multiple operation valid state instead of the first A reception permission state, and the third A reception permission state is replaced with the third A reception permission state. It may also be realized as a valid state for three or more operations. Alternatively, the plurality of operation valid states may include both the first A reception permission state and the third A reception permission state.

Further, for example, the fourteenth configuration A14 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a predetermined end timing has arrived. A multiple operation valid state of the type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the operated state before the specified operation means (operation button 410) 1A acceptance acceptance state, 2A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. Based on this, if a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated (3A reception permission state shown in FIG. 152, 4A reception permission state shown in FIG. 155) is provided, A multiple operation valid state (of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the operated state before the predetermined termination timing arrives) In the 3rd A acceptance acceptance state and the 4th A acceptance acceptance state), when it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in the operating state, the post-operation output sound is output as the post-operation output sound. If the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not being operated, the post-operation output sound is made inaudible from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state. In contrast, the sound whose duration is not a fixed time (sound that is undefined and not processed as a fixed time) is output (the output sound after reception of the 3A shown in FIG. 152, the sound after the reception of the 3A shown in 4A output sound after reception), the operation valid state is terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. In the multi-operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state, 2nd A reception permissible state) of type 3, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state, the output sound after the operation is "If the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the output sound is being output after the operation, the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes to the non-operating state. ) is output (Figure 149 (g) 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in )) and the post-operation output sound that indicates "the non-operation sound in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) has not been operated from the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output." When the operation state is entered, the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) becomes in the non-operation state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a sound that is not a constant time (a constant (a sound that is undefined and is not processed as time) is output (the output sound after receiving the first A shown in FIG. 146). In the above example, the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) is in a state where the post-operation output sound is inaudible from the timing when the first operating means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state. ``0 seconds'' is set as the constant time until the

According to such a configuration, in the multiple operation valid state of the type that is not terminated (the 3rd A reception permission state, the 4th A reception permission state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. It is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound that is in the output state to end when the operation is in the non-operation state, for example, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated. In contrast, it is possible to suitably suggest that the noteworthy performance is low under the situation where the state is immediately changed from the non-operating state to the non-operating state. state, 2A acceptance acceptance state), the operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state is determined by how long the output sound after the operation is in the non-operating state. Since there are both cases where it is possible to guess whether it will be terminated over time and cases where it is difficult to guess, for example, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to Although it is suggested that the performance after being put into the state may be worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed after being put into the non-operation state. This will no longer be the case, and it will be expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when entering the non-operating state.

Furthermore, as described above, the type in which the valid operation state can be terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the operation state before the predetermined termination timing arrives. Among the multiple operation valid states (1st A reception permissible state, 2nd A reception permissible state), in the special multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permissible state), the output sound after operation is valid for one valid period. ``If the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state in which it is not operated while the output sound is being output after the operation, the specific operating means has entered the non-operating state. When a sound in which the time from the timing until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is processed as a fixed time is output (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g) ) and "If the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state where it is not being operated while the output sound is being output after the operation, the specific operating means is in the non-operating state. In the case where a sound whose time from the timing when the operation becomes inaudible until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is not a fixed period of time (sound whose duration is indefinite) may be output (the 2), so in the special multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permissible state), for example, after changing the specific operation means from the operating state to the non-operating state, Although it is suggested that the performance may be worth paying attention to, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has elapsed after the non-operation state. Therefore, it is expected to suitably maintain the feeling of tension when entering the non-operating state.

Note that the operation valid state may be terminated multiple times based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the predetermined termination timing arrives. Among the operation valid states (1st A reception permissible state, 2nd A reception permissible state), in the special multiple operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state), the output sound after the operation is "The output sound after the operation is output." If the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state in which it is not being operated, the output sound after the operation becomes inaudible from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state. "The sound in which the time until the state is changed is treated as a fixed time" is not output, and "the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state while the output sound after the operation is being output." When the state becomes a non-operation state where the specific operation means is not operated, the time from the timing when the specific operating means becomes in the non-operation state until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is a sound that does not have a fixed period of time (indeterminate) There is only one case in which a sound corresponding to the time of

Further, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state is also explained. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, in the fourteenth configuration A14, it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives in the multiple operation valid state. The multiple operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state, 2nd A reception permissible state) of the type in which the relevant operation valid state can be terminated based on the ``simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state The specified operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives, but the specified operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. The multiple operation valid states (3A acceptance permission state, 4A reception permission state) in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection of the ``specific operation means (operation button 410)'' In some cases, the output sound is generated multiple times after the corresponding operation by simply maintaining the multiple operation valid state, and in other cases, the output sound is generated multiple times after the corresponding operation by simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) Since the output sound is generated in both the "multiple operation valid state" in which the output sound is not generated multiple times, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is activated before the predetermined end timing arrives. In a type of multiple-operation-enabled state where the operation-enabled state is not terminated based on the detection of the operation state, it can be expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeating function is enabled or not. .

Further, in the fourteenth configuration A14, the operation valid state is determined based on the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. In the multiple operation valid state of the type that can be terminated (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state), the above message display MA is always displayed (message display MA1, MA2), but the predetermined end timing is A multiple operation valid state (3rd A acceptance permission state, In the 4th A reception allowed state), there are cases where the message display MA is displayed (4th A reception allowed state) and cases where the message display MA is not displayed (3A reception allowed state). When the display MA is displayed, it can be expected that it will be difficult to recognize which of the above types the multiple operation valid state has occurred, thereby suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

Further, regarding the fourteenth configuration A14, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is a target of displaying a sample image and is allowed to accept operations multiple times."

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the fourteenth configuration A14 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in order to realize the fourteenth configuration A14, only one of the 3A acceptance permission state and the 4A reception permission state may be provided, and even in this case, each of the above-mentioned configurations and operations may be provided. It is possible to obtain the effect.

Further, for example, the fifteenth configuration A15 includes a multiple operation valid state in which the reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first plurality of operation conditions that are different from each other. We will prepare a multiple operation valid state (1st A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 146) and a second multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149), and a first multiple operation valid state ( In both the 1st A acceptance acceptance state) and the 2nd multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance acceptance state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state where it is not operated, and the output after the operation is A situation in which the sound (the output sound after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146, the output sound after the second A reception shown in FIG. 149) is in the output state (for example, the period from timing tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 in FIG. 146, It is possible to play the game so that the period from timing tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 in FIG. In a situation where the operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound after 1A reception) is in an output state, the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound after 1A reception) is output. As shown in FIG. 146(g), when the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, this may trigger a change (end) in its output state (as shown in FIG. 146(g)). Both the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (timing tAa2-C1)) and the sound that does not cause a change in the output state (second post-acceptance output sound SB1 shown in FIG. 146(h)) are output. However, while the specific operating means is in the operating state and the output sound after the operation is in the output state, the specific operating means (operating button 410) may change from the operating state to the non-operating state. When the operation state is entered, the output state is not changed due to this, regardless of the type of sound output as the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound after 1A reception) (for example, , timing tAa2-A2, timing tAa2-B3, etc. in FIGS. 146(g) and (h)), the specific operating means (operating button 410) is in a non-operation state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound after 1st A reception) is in an output state, the above-mentioned specific operation is used as the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound after 2A reception). When the means (operation button 410) temporarily changes from the non-operated state to the operated state (see, for example, timing tAb-C1 shown in FIG. 149), this triggers a sound that does not cause a change in its output state ( Although the second post-acceptance output sound SB2) shown in FIG. 149(h) is in the output state (although no sound that could cause a change in the output state is output as the post-operation output sound), The specific operating means (operating button 410) is operated while the specific operating means (operating button 410) is in an operating state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is in an output state. When the state changes from the state to the non-operation state, this is used as a trigger to change the sound output as the post-operation output sound according to the type of sound (after the first reception shown in FIG. 149(g)). There are both output sound SA2) and no change (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) (for example, see timing tAb2-B3).

According to such a configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance acceptance state), even if the specific operating means (operation button 410) in the operated state is brought to the non-operated state, the output state remains unchanged until then. Since the output sound after the operation (the output sound after receiving 1A) that corresponds to the above does not change (end) due to this, it is expected that the user will feel free to interrupt the operation. When the specific operation means (operation button 410) which is in a non-operating state is brought into an operating state, a change (end) occurs in the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving the first A) that has been in the output state until then; Since there are cases where no change (end) occurs, and cases where no change (end) occurs, it is made to encourage re-operation, but it is also possible that a change may occur in the output sound after the operation, so that it is possible to re-operate. It can also be expected that this will suitably provide the feeling of tension to do something. On the other hand, in the second multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance permission state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in the operated state is set to the non-operated state, after the operation that was in the output state until then, Since there are both cases in which a change occurs in the output sound (output sound after 2nd A reception) and cases in which there is no change (end), the output sound after the operation is The possibility of a change in the sound (output sound after reception of 2nd A) provides a sense of tension in interrupting the operation, while the specific operation means (operation) in the non-operating state When setting the button 410) to the operating state, there is no change (end) to the post-operation output sound (output sound after 2nd A reception) that was in the output state until then, so feel free to do so. It can be expected that the operation will be performed again.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in the operated state is set to the non-operated state, this is used as an opportunity to change the display state until then. The post-operation display (display during repeated hits HA2) is changed (terminated), but at this time, a display different from the post-operation display (non-operation display HB2) is to appear (Fig. 151(c), ( f) etc.), it becomes possible to more actively prompt the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is to be brought into the non-operation state, the above-mentioned post-non-operation display HB2 is used as a trigger. is displayed, but at this time, since the production sound corresponding to the non-operation display HB2 is not newly output, the display after non-operation display HB2 is displayed when the non-operation display HB2 is put into the operating state. This makes it possible to suggest that the display was triggered by the non-operation state, rather than the display that was previously displayed.

In addition, in the fifteenth configuration A15, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated as a post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permissible state). The post-operation output sound of the type whose output state changes upon changing from the state to the non-operation state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) and the specific operation means (operation A type of post-operation output sound whose output state does not change (end) when the button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) and are prepared, so that a situation may occur where both of the output sounds are in the output state after these operations. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) that was in the output state until then changes (ends), creating a moderate sense of tension. It will be possible to prompt the interruption of operations while providing the following information.

In addition, in the fifteenth configuration A15, the type of post-operation output sound (FIG. 149(g) The shown first post-acceptance output sound SA2) is a type of post-operation output sound (FIG. 149( The output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2) shown in h) can be started in either the output state or not in the output state, but if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated. The type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that is not changed (ended) upon changing from the state to the non-operation state is a specific operation means (operation button 410). ) is not in the output state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that changes (ends) when the state changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. By making it possible for the output to start when the output is in the output state (or at the same time) instead of starting output on its own, it is possible to provide an appropriate sense of tension while also encouraging interruptions in the operation. .

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance permission state) of the 15th configuration A15, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output sound after the second reception is Even if the output condition of SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, for the first reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then, its output state is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. It may be configured not to terminate or start new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (single sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permission state) of the fifteenth configuration A15, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output sound after the first reception is When the output condition of SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAa2-B2. On the other hand, the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then ends its output state based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAa2-B2, A new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, The sound (one sound effect) based on the sound effect data (one sound effect data) will start to be output.

Further, regarding the fifteenth configuration A15, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is a target for displaying a sample image and for which operation reception is permitted a plurality of times."

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the fifteenth configuration A15 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the fifteenth configuration A15, the third A reception permission state may be provided as the first plural operation valid state instead of the first A reception permission state. Alternatively, both the 1st A acceptance permission state and the 3A acceptance permission state may be provided.

Further, for example, the 16th configuration A16 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation reception is permitted multiple times for the operation means that is the target of the image display, and the multiple operation valid states have different occurrence conditions. A first multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 158) and a second multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) are prepared, and the first multiple operation activation state is prepared. The operation valid state (5A reception acceptance state) occurs as an operation valid state in which at least a replica image display imitating the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) among the operation means is displayed. The first-side post-operation output sound (the 5A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 158) is in the output state in response to the detection that the operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in the operating state where it is being operated, and To play the game so that a situation in which the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in a non-operating state where it is not operated (for example, a period from timing tAe2-B2 to tAe2-C1 shown in FIG. 158) appears. is possible, and the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state) is such that at least a simulated image display of the second operation means (operation button 410) among the operation means is displayed. The output sound after the second side operation (as shown in FIG. 149 A situation in which the output sound (output sound after reception of the second A) is in the output state and the second operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state (for example, the timing tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149). It is possible to play the game in such a way that a period of time, etc.) appears.

In this regard, in the 16th configuration A16, the first operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is in the non-operation state in the first multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permission state) and after the first side operation. Under the situation where the output sound (output sound after receiving 5A) is in the output state, the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) temporarily changes from the non-operating state to the operating state as the output sound after the first side operation. (For example, when timing tAe-C1 arrives), a sound that causes a change (end) in the output state (5A reception shown in FIGS. 158(g) and (h)) In some cases, only the output sound (rear output sound) is output (although it is possible to perform a process that causes a change in the sound in the output state), but when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in the operating state, In addition, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first side operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) is in an output state. In this case, the output state of the output sound (sword ornament 5001) after the first side operation does not change (processing that causes a change in the sound in the output state is not enabled) (for example, as shown in Fig. (See timing tAe2-A2 shown in 158(g), (h)).

According to such a configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance acceptance state), even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) which is in the operated state is brought into the non-operated state, the Since no change (end) will occur in the output sound after the operation that was in the output state (output sound after the 5th A reception), it is expected that the user will feel free to interrupt the operation. However, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) which is in the non-operating state is brought into the operating state, the post-operation output sound (output sound after reception of 5A) that was in the output state until then changes (ends). Since this is designed to occur in some cases, it can be expected to suitably provide a sense of tension when re-operating.

Further, in the 16th configuration A16, in the second multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance acceptance state), the second operating means (operation button 410) is in the non-operated state, and the output sound after the second side operation is In a situation where (the output sound after receiving the second A) is in the output state, the second operation means (operation button 410) temporarily changes from the non-operation state to the operation state as the output sound after the second side operation. Sometimes (for example, when timing tAb-C1 arrives), only the sound that does not cause a change (end) in the output state (the output sound after receiving the second A shown in FIG. 149(h)) is output. However, if the second operating means (operating button 410) is in the operating state and the above-mentioned If the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state while the second-side post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in the output state, this When the second-side post-operation output sound (second-A post-reception output sound) is changed (terminated) depending on the type of sound that is being output (the first one shown in FIG. 149(g)). There may be both the post-acceptance output sound SA2) and the case where it is not changed (terminated) (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)).

According to such a configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permissible state), while prompting the interruption of the operation, the output sound after the operation (output sound after the second A reception) changes (end). ) may occur, which preferably provides a sense of tension in interrupting the operation. On the other hand, when the second operating means (operating button 410) which is in the non-operating state is brought into the operating state, Since the output sound after the operation (output sound after receiving 2A) that was in the output state until then does not change (end), you can feel free to perform the operation again. can be expected.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), when the second operating means (operation button 410) that is in the operating state is set to the non-operating state, this is used as a trigger to change the display state until then. The existing post-operation display (repeating hit display HA2) is changed (terminated), but at this time, a different display from the post-operation display (non-operation display HB2) is to appear (FIG. 151(c), (f) etc.), it becomes possible to more actively prompt the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), when the second operating means (operation button 410) in the operating state is set to the non-operating state, the above-mentioned post-non-operation display is HB2 is displayed, but at this time, we have decided not to newly output the production sound corresponding to the non-operation display HB2, so the display after non-operation display HB2 is displayed when the non-operation display HB2 is put into the operation state. This makes it possible to suggest that the display was triggered by the non-operation state, rather than by the display being activated.

In addition, in the 16th configuration A16, the second operation means (operation button 410) is used as the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permissible state). A post-operation output sound of a type whose output state changes upon transition from an operating state to a non-operating state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)), and a second operating means. A type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (end) when the (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state SB2) is prepared, so that a situation may arise in which both of the output sounds are in the output state after these operations. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) that was in the output state until then changes (ends), creating a moderate sense of tension. It will be possible to prompt the interruption of operations while providing the following information.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance permission state) according to the 16th configuration A16, the change ( The post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) of the type (completed) indicates that the second operating means (operation button 410) has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. In either situation, when the type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that is not changed (terminated) triggered by is in the output state or when it is not in the output state. 149 (h), but the output sound after the operation is not changed (ended) when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state (see FIG. 149(h)). The second post-acceptance output sound SB2) is a type of post-operation output sound (FIG. 149 Since the first post-acceptance output sound SA2) shown in (g) does not start outputting alone when it is not in the output state, it can start outputting when it is in the output state (or at the same time). This makes it possible to encourage users to interrupt operations while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance permission state) of the 16th configuration A16, while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output after the second reception is Even if the output condition of sound SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is output based on the operation reception performed at timing tAb2-B2. However, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then is output based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2. It may not exit the state or start new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (one sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

Further, for example, the seventeenth configuration A17 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first plurality of operation conditions different from each other. A second multiple operation valid state (the 3rd A reception permission state shown in FIG. 152) and a second multiple operation valid state (the 2A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149) are prepared. 2A acceptance permission state), the state can be terminated when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the predetermined termination timing arrives. However, in the first multiple operation valid state (3A acceptance acceptance state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) may be in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. It is assumed that the state will not be terminated upon detection. Then, in the first multiple operation valid state (3rd A acceptance permission state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (3A post-acceptance output) is detected. If the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operated state to the operated state while the sound) is in the output state, the output state of the output sound after the operation changes (end). ), but if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state and the operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA3 shown at timing tAc2-C1 in FIG. 152(g)) is If the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state while the output sound after receiving 3A is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. (For example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 shown at timing tAc2-B3 in FIGS. 152(g) and (h) etc.), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state and the output sound after the operation (output after the 1A reception) is in the second multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permission state). sound) is in the output state, the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is when the specific operation means (operation button 410) temporarily changes from the non-operation state to the operation state. (For example, refer to timing tAb-C1 shown in FIG. 149) A sound that does not cause a change (end) in its output state using this as an opportunity (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in the output state (although no sound that could cause a change (end) in the output state is output as the output sound after the operation), and the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in the operating state. In addition, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state while the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is in the output state, this is used as a trigger. As shown in FIG. 149, when the sound is changed (terminated) depending on the type of sound output as the post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) and when it is not changed (FIG. 149 (h) and the second post-acceptance output sound SB2) (for example, see timing tAb2-B3).

According to such a configuration, when the "first multiple operation valid state (3rd A reception permissible state)" that is not terminated by an operation by a player occurs, the state is changed to a non-operation state. It becomes possible to more actively urge the specific operating means to be put into the operating state. In addition, if a "second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permissible state)" that can be terminated by an operation by a player occurs, the specific operation means that is in an operational state is set to a non-operational state. It is expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained, as there is a possibility that a sound that does not cause a change (end) is output when the non-operation state is triggered, while encouraging the user to do so more actively. It can be done.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in the operated state is set to the non-operated state, this is used as an opportunity to change the display state until then. The post-operation display (repeated hit display HA2) is changed (terminated), but at this time, a display different from the post-operation display (non-operation display HB2) is to appear (Fig. 151(c), ( f) etc.), it becomes possible to more actively prompt the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is to be brought into the non-operation state, the above-mentioned post-non-operation display HB2 is used as a trigger. is displayed, but at this time, since the production sound corresponding to the non-operation display HB2 is not newly output, the display after non-operation display HB2 is displayed when the non-operation display HB2 is put into the operating state. This makes it possible to suggest that the display was triggered by the non-operation state, rather than the display that was previously displayed.

In addition, in the 17th configuration A17, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated as a post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the second multiple-time operation valid state (second A reception permissible state). The post-operation output sound of the type whose output state changes upon changing from the state to the non-operation state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)), and the specific operation means (operation A type of post-operation output sound whose output state does not change (end) when the button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) and are prepared, so that a situation may occur where both of the output sounds are in the output state after these operations. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) that was in the output state until then changes (ends), creating a moderate sense of tension. It will be possible to prompt the interruption of operations while providing the following information.

In addition, in the 17th configuration A17, the type of post-operation output sound (FIG. 149(g) The shown first post-acceptance output sound SA2) is a type of post-operation output sound (FIG. 149( The output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2) shown in h) can be started in either the output state or not in the output state, but if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated. The type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that is not changed (ended) upon changing from the state to the non-operation state is a specific operation means (operation button 410). ) is not in the output state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that changes (ends) when the state changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. By making it possible for the output to start when the output is in the output state (or at the same time) instead of starting output on its own, it is possible to provide an appropriate sense of tension while also encouraging interruptions in the operation. .

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance permission state) of the 17th configuration A17, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output sound after the second reception is Even if the output condition of SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, for the first reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then, its output state is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. It may be configured not to terminate or start new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (single sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

Further, in the first multiple operation valid state (3A reception permission state) of the 17th configuration A17, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output sound after the first reception is When the output condition of SB3 is satisfied (timing tAc2-B2 shown in FIG. 152), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAc2-B2. On the other hand, regarding the first reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then, the output state is ended based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAc2-B2, A new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAc2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, The sound (one sound effect) based on the sound effect data (one sound effect data) will start to be output.

Further, regarding the seventeenth configuration A17, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is a target for displaying a sample image and for which operation reception is permitted a plurality of times."

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the seventeenth configuration A17 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

For example, the 18th configuration A18 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first plurality of operation valid states having different occurrence conditions. We will prepare a multiple operation valid state (1st A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 146) and a second multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149), and a first multiple operation valid state ( In both the 1st A acceptance acceptance state) and the 2nd multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance acceptance state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state where it is not operated, and the output after the operation is A situation in which the sound (the output sound after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146, the output sound after the second A reception shown in FIG. 149) is in the output state (for example, the period from timing tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 in FIG. 146, It is possible to play the game so that the period from timing tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 in FIG. When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state while the operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) is in the output state. When the operation state is entered from , the time from entering the operation state to the end of the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound after 1A reception) is determined by the type of the post-operation output sound in the output state. According to (See timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIGS. 146(g) and (h)), the specific operating means (operating button 410) is in the operating state, and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is If the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound ends after the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. In contrast, the time required for the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permissible state) is set to be indefinite (see timing tAa2-B3 shown in FIGS. Among these, when the specific operating means (operating button 410) is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is in an output state, the specific operating means (operating button 410) ) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from when it enters the operating state until the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) ends is uncertain (Fig. 149(h)), in a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in the output state. If the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while in the state of Depending on the type of output sound after operation in the output state, the time until the output sound is fixed (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) or indefinite (FIG. 149(h) ) is the first post-acceptance output sound SB2) (see timing tAa2-B3 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and (h)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the constant time.

According to such a configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance acceptance state), the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when changing the specific operating means from the operated state to the non-operated state is It is difficult to estimate how long it will take to end the state, for example, if the specific operating means has recently been changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, the performance is noteworthy. It will be possible to suitably suggest that. On the other hand, when changing a specific operating means from a non-operating state to an operating state, it is possible to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound that is in the output state to end after the specific operating means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. Since there are both cases where it is difficult to guess and cases where it is difficult to guess, this suggests that, for example, there is a possibility that the performance after the above-mentioned specific operation means is put into operation again is worth paying attention to. However, the output sound after the operation in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed after the operation state is changed again, and this is also desirable for reducing the feeling of tension when returning to the operation state. will be expected to be maintained.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state), the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when changing the specific operating means from the non-operating state to the operating state is This suitably suggests that it is difficult to estimate how much time it will take to end, and that, for example, in a situation where the specific operating means has just been changed from a non-operating state to an operating state, the performance that should be noted is low. You will be able to do it. On the other hand, it is possible to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound that is in the output state to end when the specific operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. Because there are both cases where it is difficult to guess and cases where it is difficult to guess, this suggests that, for example, there is a possibility that the performance after the above-mentioned specific operation means is in the non-operation state is worth paying attention to. However, the output sound after an operation in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed after the non-operation state is set, and this is also desirable for reducing the feeling of tension when switching to the non-operation state. will be expected to be maintained.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in the operated state is set to the non-operated state, this is used as an opportunity to change the display state until then. The post-operation display (repeated hit display HA2) is changed (terminated), but at this time, a display different from the post-operation display (non-operation display HB2) is to appear (Fig. 151(c), ( f) etc.), it becomes possible to more actively prompt the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in the operated state is set to the non-operated state, this is used as an opportunity to display the after-non-operation display HB2. is displayed, but at this time, since we have decided not to output new sound effects corresponding to the non-operation display HB2, the non-operation display HB2 is displayed when it is put into the operation state. This makes it possible to suggest that the display was triggered by the non-operation state, rather than by the display being displayed in a non-operating state.

In addition, in the 18th configuration A18, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated as a post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permissible state). The post-operation output sound of the type in which the output state is terminated after a certain period of time after changing from the state to the non-operation state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) and the specific operation means (operation A type of post-operation output sound in which the output state ends at an indefinite time rather than a fixed time after the button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state (second post-acceptance output shown in FIG. 149(h)) Sound SB2) is prepared, and a situation may occur in which both of the output sounds are in the output state after the operation. In other words, in this case, when interrupting the operation, only a part of the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) that was in the output state until then will be finished in a certain period of time, so you can feel a moderate sense of tension. It will be possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation while providing the information.

In addition, in the 18th configuration A18, a type of post-operation output sound (shown in FIG. 149(g) The first post-acceptance output sound SA2) is a type of post-operation output sound (Fig. The output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2) shown in 149(h) can be started in either the output state or not in the output state, but the specific operation means (operation button 410) The type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that ends not at a fixed time but at an indefinite time after changing from the operating state to the non-operating state is a specific The type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is terminated after a certain period of time after the operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. Since output is not started independently when it is not in the output state, but can be started when it is in the output state (or at the same time), it is possible to provide a moderate sense of tension while encouraging interruptions in operation. become able to.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permission state) of the 18th configuration A18, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output sound after the second reception is Even if the output condition of SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, for the first reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then, its output state is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. It may be configured not to terminate or start new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (single sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (1st A reception permission state) of the 18th configuration A18, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output sound after the first reception is When the output condition of SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAa2-B2. On the other hand, the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then ends its output state based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAa2-B2, A new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, The sound (one sound effect) based on the sound effect data (one sound effect data) will start to be output.

Further, regarding the eighteenth configuration A18, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is a target of displaying a sample image and is allowed to accept operations multiple times."

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the eighteenth configuration A18 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

In addition, in realizing the eighteenth configuration A18, the third A reception permission state may be provided as the first plural operation valid state instead of the first A reception permission state. Alternatively, both the 1st A acceptance permission state and the 3A acceptance permission state may be provided.

For example, the 19th configuration A19 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times for the operation means that is the target of the image display, and the multiple operation valid states have different occurrence conditions. A first multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 158) and a second multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) are prepared, and the first multiple operation activation state is prepared. The operation valid state (5A reception acceptance state) occurs as an operation valid state in which at least a replica image display imitating the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) among the operation means is displayed. The first-side post-operation output sound (the 5A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 158) is in the output state in response to the detection that the operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in the operating state where it is being operated, and To play the game so that a situation in which the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in a non-operating state where it is not operated (for example, a period from timing tAe2-B2 to tAe2-C1 shown in FIG. 158) appears. is possible, and the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state) is such that at least a simulated image display of the second operation means (operation button 410) among the operation means is displayed. The output sound after the second side operation (as shown in FIG. 149 A situation in which the output sound (output sound after reception of the second A) is in the output state and the second operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state (for example, the timing tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149). It is possible to play the game in such a way that a period of time, etc.) appears.

In this regard, in the 19th configuration A19, the first operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is in the non-operation state in the first multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance acceptance state) and after the first side operation. If the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state while the output sound (output sound after receiving 5A) is in the output state, The time from the time to the end of the output state of the output sound after the first side operation (output sound after the 5A reception) can be treated as a fixed time; The first operating means (sword ornamental body 5001) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state while the rear output sound) is in the output state and the first operating means (sword ornamental body 5001) is in the operating state. In this case, the time from entering the non-operation state until the output state of the first-side post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) ends is indefinite (it is not treated as a fixed time). (For example, see timing tAe2-A2 shown in FIGS. 158(g) and (h)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the constant time.

According to such a configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance permission state), the first operating means (sword decoration body 5001) is in the output state when changing from the non-operating state to the operating state. The post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) can be used to estimate how much time has passed since the operation state was entered, and for example, the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) While the first operating means (sword decoration body 5001) is changed from the non-operating state to the non-operating state, it suitably suggests that there is remarkable performance even in a situation where the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from the non-operating state to the non-operating state. The post-operation output sound (5A post-acceptance output sound) that is in the output state when In a situation where the operating means (sword ornament 5001) has just been changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is possible to suitably suggest that the noteworthy performance is low.

In addition, in the nineteenth configuration A19, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permissible state), the second side post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in the output state, and the above-mentioned If the second operating means (operating button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the second operating means (operating button 410) is in the non-operating state, after entering the operating state Although the time until the output state of the output sound after the second side operation (the output sound after the 2nd A reception) ends is undefined, the output sound after the second side operation (the output sound after the 2nd A reception) is output. If the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state while the second operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state, the second operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state. The time from when the output state of the second-side post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) ends is a certain amount of time depending on the type of the second-side post-operation output sound in the output state. There are two cases: (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) and an indefinite case (first post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)).

According to such a configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state), the operation that is in the output state when the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state The post-output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is such that it is difficult to estimate how long it will take to end after entering the operating state, for example, when the second operating means (operating button 410) is pressed. If the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operating state to the non-operating state, it can be suitably suggested that the noteworthy performance is low in a situation where the user has just changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. When the output sound after operation (operation button 410) is in the output state, it may be possible to estimate how much time has passed since the state is changed to the non-operation state, or it may be difficult to estimate. For example, while it is suggested that there is a possibility that the performance after the second operating means is in the non-operating state is worth paying attention to, It is expected that the output sound after an operation in the output state will not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed, and that the tension when changing to the non-operation state will also be maintained appropriately. It becomes like this.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state), when the second operating means (operation button 410) that is in the operating state is set to the non-operating state, this is used as a trigger to change the display state until then. The existing post-operation display (repeating hit display HA2) is terminated, but at this time, a different display (non-operation display HB2) from the post-operation display is to appear (FIGS. 151(c) and (f)). ), it will be possible to more actively prompt users to interrupt operations.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), when the second operating means (operation button 410) in the operating state is set to the non-operating state, the above-mentioned post-non-operation display is HB2 is displayed, but at this time, we have decided not to newly output the production sound corresponding to the non-operation display HB2, so the display after non-operation display HB2 is displayed when the non-operation display HB2 is put into the operation state. This makes it possible to suggest that the display was triggered by the non-operation state, rather than by the display being activated.

In addition, in the nineteenth configuration A19, the second operation means (operation button 410) is used as the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permissible state). A post-operation output sound of a type whose output state is terminated after a certain period of time after changing from an operation state to a non-operation state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)), and a second operation After the operation button 410 changes from the operation state to the non-operation state, the output state is terminated not at a fixed time but at an undefined time (second output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)). The post-operation output sound SB2) is prepared, and a situation may occur in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in the output state. In other words, in this case, when interrupting the operation, only a part of the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) that was in the output state until then will be finished in a certain period of time, so you can feel a moderate sense of tension. It will be possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation while providing the service.

In addition, the second multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance permission state) according to the 19th configuration A19 ends after a certain period of time after the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The type of post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is a constant sound after the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. When the type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that ends at an unspecified time instead of time is in the output state and when it is not in the output state. Although the output can be started under any circumstances, the output sound after the operation ends after an indefinite period of time rather than a fixed period of time after the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state (Fig. The second post-acceptance output sound SB2) shown in 149(h) is a type of post-operation output that ends after a certain period of time after the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The sound (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) does not start outputting alone when it is not in the output state, but can start outputting when it is in the output state (or at the same time). This makes it possible to provide an appropriate sense of tension while also encouraging interruptions in operations.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance permission state) of the 19th configuration A19, while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output after the second reception is Even if the output condition of sound SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 is output based on the operation reception performed at timing tAb2-B2. However, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then is output based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2. It may not exit the state or start any new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (single sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

For example, the 20th configuration A20 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state ( 2nd A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149), second multiple operation valid state (4A reception permission state shown in FIG. 155), and third multiple operation valid state (1A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146). In each of these multiple operation valid states, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state where it is not operated, and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in the operation state. The post-operation output sound (the 2nd A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) according to the above detection can be generated multiple times, but in that case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is ( The specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state in the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance acceptance state). However, the output sound after the operation according to the above detection (the output sound after the 4th A reception shown in FIG. 155) cannot be generated multiple times. state), the post-operation output sound (the 1A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operating means (operation button 410) in the operating state. However, in this case, it is possible to perform processing such that the interval between when the output sound is newly generated after the operation is a constant time. Then, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, In the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state) in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is an indefinite time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state. If the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in the output state, the above-mentioned operation Whereas the output state of the post-output sound (output sound after receiving the second A) is not changed (ended) using this as an opportunity (for example, the timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and (h) etc.), and in the third multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance permission state) in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after the above operation is a fixed time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state. If this occurs, the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound after 1st A reception) can be changed (terminated) using this as an opportunity (for example, at timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)). ), the second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception In the permissible state), the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 4A) is in an output state. When the (operation button 410) changes from the non-operated state to the operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed (terminated) using this as an opportunity (for example, Fig. 155(g), (h) )).

According to such a configuration, when the player performs a second operation in the second multi-operation enabled state (4th A acceptance permission state) in which the so-called auto-repeat function is not enabled, and when the so-called auto-repeat function is fixed. In both cases where the player performs the operation again in the third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance acceptance state) which is activated at every interval, the output state of the output sound after the operation does not correspond to this. Since it can be changed (ended) as a trigger, it is expected that the tension will be maintained appropriately by making it difficult to recognize whether or not the automatic continuous hit function is being activated. Become so. On the other hand, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), if the specific operation means is operated again while the output sound is in the output state after the operation. , that the user is not in a situation where the so-called auto-repeat function is not enabled (second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception permissible state)), that is, the user is in a situation where the auto-repeat function is enabled. Since the so-called auto-repeat function is not activated at regular intervals, it is made difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeat function is enabled. A decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), the output state after the operation does not change (end) upon detection of the non-operation state (see FIG. 149). 149 (h)) and the output sound after operation (Fig. 149 (g)) in which the output state changes (ends) upon detection of the non-operation state. The second A post-acceptance output sound shown in Figure 2) is output. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (the 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes (ends) upon detection of the non-operation state is subsequently replayed. Even if an operation is performed, it will no longer be in the output state at that point, and the output state will not change (end) upon detection of the non-operation state (see Figure 149). Only the 2nd A post-acceptance output sound shown in (h)) can be outputted as a sound that is not changed (terminated) by the re-operation at the time when the re-operation is performed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it corresponds to the second multiple operation valid state (the 4th A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation valid state (the 1st A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 146). The post-operation output sound includes a type of post-operation sound that does not maintain the output state when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, but uses this as a trigger to change (end) the output state. No output sound is prepared, but only a type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state.

Also, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, in the said 20th structure A20, the operating means when the so-called auto continuous hit function is not enabled in the multiple-times operation valid state, and the operating means when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is enabled in the multiple-times operation valid state. , it is assumed that the same operation means is used as the "specific operation means" in both cases, but this is not necessarily the case. Furthermore, although we have assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, this is not necessarily the case. I can't. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, in realizing the 20th configuration A20, the 3rd A reception allowing state is provided as the multiple operation valid state instead of the 1st A reception allowing state, and the 3A reception allowing state is set as the multiple operation valid state. It may also be realized as a valid state for three or more operations. Alternatively, the plurality of operation valid states may include both the first A reception permission state and the third A reception permission state.

For example, the 21st configuration A21 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state ( A second A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, the specified It is possible to play the game so that a situation in which the operating means (operating button 410) is in a non-operating state where it is not operated and the output sound is in an output state after the operation is made, and the first plurality of operations are performed. In the valid state (2nd A reception permissible state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in the operating state, and the post-operation output sound according to the detection (2A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) is generated. ) can occur multiple times, but in that case, the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is set to an indefinite time (not treated as a fixed time), and the second plurality of In the operation valid state (first A reception permission state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in the operation state, and the output sound after the operation according to the detection (after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146) is activated. (output sound) can be generated multiple times, and in this case, it is possible to process so that the interval after the operation until the output sound is newly generated is a constant time. Then, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after the above operation is an indefinite time, the specific operation is performed. The specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state while the means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is in an output state. When the operation state is entered from , the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound after 2nd A reception) is not changed (terminated) using this as an opportunity (for example, Fig. 149(g), ( (see timing tAb2-C1 etc. shown in FIG. (Acceptance Acceptance State), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in the output state. When the (operation button 410) changes from the non-operated state to the operated state, this is used as a trigger to change the sound output as the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) according to the type of sound being output. There are both a case (output sound after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146(g)) and a case where no change is made (the output sound after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146(h)).

According to such a configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) in which the so-called auto-repeating function is not activated at regular intervals, the specific operation means (operation button 410 ) from the non-operating state to the operating state again, the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound after 2nd A reception) does not change (end) as a result of this, so the above-mentioned post-operation output sound will be changed again. Coupled with the fact that the interval until this occurs is an indefinite period of time, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether or not the player's operation has been properly accepted. On the other hand, in the second multi-operation enabled state (the first A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 146) in which the so-called auto-repeating function is enabled at regular intervals, for example, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is activated. While trying to suggest that there is a possibility that the performance after being put into the operating state is worth paying attention to, the output sound after the operation that is in the output state (the output sound after the first A reception) is changed when the operation state is changed again. By not necessarily changing (terminating) the operation based on the event, it is expected that the tension will be suitably maintained when returning to the operating state.

In addition, as a post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permissible state shown in FIG. 149), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is The post-operation output sound of the type whose output state changes (ends) upon entering the non-operation state (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) and the specific operation means (operation button A post-operation output sound of a type whose output state does not change (end) when 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) is prepared. and the situation where both of the output sounds are in the output state after these operations can occur. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) that was in the output state until then changes (ends), creating a moderate sense of tension. It will be possible to prompt the interruption of operations while providing the following information.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), after the type of operation changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. The output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is a type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. Although the output of the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h) can be started in either the output state or not, the operation button 410 The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that is not changed (ended) when the operation button 410 changes from the operation state to the non-operation state is When the type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that changes (ends) upon entering the operating state is not in the output state, output starts independently. Alternatively, the output may be started when (or at the same time) the output is in the output state.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance permission state) of the 21st configuration A21, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output sound after the second reception is Even if the output condition of SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, for the first reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then, its output state is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. It may be configured not to terminate or start new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (single sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permission state) of the 21st configuration A21, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output sound after the first reception is When the output condition of SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAa2-B2. On the other hand, the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then ends its output state based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAa2-B2, A new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, The sound (one sound effect) based on the sound effect data (one sound effect data) will start to be output.

Further, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state is also explained. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Note that in the 21st configuration A21, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Further, the "multiple operations valid state" according to the 21st configuration A21 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

In addition, in order to realize the 21st configuration A21, the 3rd A reception permission state is provided as the multiple operation valid state instead of the 1A reception permission state, and the 3A reception permission state is replaced by the 3A reception permission state. It may also be realized as a valid state for two or more operations. Alternatively, the plurality of operation valid states may include both the first A reception permission state and the third A reception permission state.

For example, the 22nd configuration A22 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state ( 2nd A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149), second multiple operation valid state (4A reception permission state shown in FIG. 155), and third multiple operation valid state (1A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146). In each of these multiple operation valid states, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state where it is not operated, and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in the operation state. The post-operation output sound (the 2nd A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) according to the above detection can be generated multiple times, but in that case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is ( The specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state in the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance acceptance state). However, the output sound after the operation according to the above detection (the output sound after the 4th A reception shown in FIG. 155) cannot be generated multiple times. state), the post-operation output sound (the 1A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operating means (operation button 410) in the operating state. However, in this case, it is possible to perform processing such that the interval between when the output sound is newly generated after the operation is a constant time. Then, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, In the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state) in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is an indefinite time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state. If the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state while the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in the output state, the operation The time from when the state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound (output sound after 2nd A reception) ends is indefinite (for example, the timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(h) etc.), and in the third multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance permission state) in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after the above operation is a fixed time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state. In this case, the time from entering the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (output sound after 1A reception) can be treated as a fixed time rather than an indefinite time (for example, , refer to timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g), etc.), the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is generated multiple times just by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state. In the second multiple operation valid state (4th A acceptance acceptance state) in which the operation is not possible, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (4th A post-acceptance output sound) If the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state while the is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output is terminated after entering the operating state. The time up to this point can be treated as a constant time (see, for example, timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIGS. 155(g) and (h)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the constant time from when the operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is ended.

According to such a configuration, when the player performs a second operation in the second multi-operation enabled state (4th A acceptance permission state) in which the so-called auto-repeat function is not enabled, and when the so-called auto-repeat function is fixed. In both cases, when the player performs the re-operation in the third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permissible state) which is activated at each interval, the above-mentioned operation is performed after the player performs the re-operation. Since the time it takes for the output state of the output sound to end after an operation is fixed, it is difficult to recognize whether or not you are in a situation where the automatic repeated hit function is being activated, and a sense of tension is suitably maintained. become expected to do so. On the other hand, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), if the specific operation means is operated again while the output sound is in the output state after the operation. , that the user is not in a situation where the so-called auto-repeat function is not enabled (second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception permissible state)), that is, the user is in a situation where the auto-repeat function is enabled. Since the so-called auto-repeat-hitting function is not activated at regular intervals, it is made difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeat-hitting function is to be activated. The decline can now be suppressed.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after the operation is an indefinite time, the specific operation means (operation button 41 ) is detected to be in the operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound is generated when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is operated. If the time from the state to the non-operated state until the output state is terminated is treated as indefinite (for example, see timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(h)), and the output state There are both cases where the time until the end of the process is treated as a constant time (for example, see timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(g)), and the other case where the time until the end of the process is treated as a fixed time (for example, see timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(g)). In other words, in this case, when interrupting the operation, only a part of the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) that was in the output state until then will be finished in a certain period of time, so you can feel a moderate sense of tension. It will be possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation while providing the service.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it corresponds to the second multiple operation valid state (the 4th A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation valid state (the 1st A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 146). As the post-operation output sound, a type of post-operation output sound for which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operated state to the operated state until the output state is finished is not prepared. First, only the types of post-operation output sounds that can be treated as a constant time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operated state to the operated state until the output state ends are prepared. There is.

Further, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state is also explained. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, in the said 22nd structure A22, the operating means when the so-called auto continuous hit function is not enabled in the multiple-times operation valid state, and the operating means when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is enabled in the multiple-times operation valid state. , it is assumed that the same operation means is used as the "specific operation means" in both cases, but this is not necessarily the case. Furthermore, although we have assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, this is not necessarily the case. I can't. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, in order to realize the 22nd configuration A22, the 3rd A reception permission state is provided as the multiple operation valid state instead of the 1A reception permission state, and the 3A reception permission state is replaced by the 3A reception permission state. It may also be realized as a valid state for three or more operations. Alternatively, the plurality of operation valid states may include both the first A reception permission state and the third A reception permission state.

For example, the 23rd configuration A23 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state ( A second A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, the specified It is possible to play the game so that a situation in which the operating means (operating button 410) is in a non-operating state where it is not operated and the output sound is in an output state after the operation is made, and the first plurality of operations are performed. In the valid state (2nd A reception permissible state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in the operating state, and the post-operation output sound according to the detection (2A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) is generated. ) can occur multiple times, but in that case, the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is set to an indefinite time (not treated as a fixed time), and the second plurality of In the operation valid state (first A reception permission state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in the operation state, and the output sound after the operation according to the detection (after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146) is activated. (output sound) can be generated multiple times, and in this case, it is possible to process so that the interval after the operation until the output sound is newly generated is a constant time. Then, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after the above operation is an indefinite time, the specific operation is performed. When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state while the means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is in the output state. When the operation state is entered from , the time from when the operation state is entered until the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) ends is indefinite (for example, , refer to timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and (h), etc.), the second multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is a constant time (the 1st A reception permissible state shown in FIG. 146), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state, and the post-operation output sound (the 1A post-reception output sound) is in the output state. When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state in The time until the end is an indefinite time (output sound after 1A reception shown in FIG. 146(h)) and a fixed time (output sound after 1A reception shown in FIG. 146(g)). sound). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the constant time from when the operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is ended.

According to such a configuration, in the first multi-operation enabled state (second A acceptance acceptance state) in which the so-called auto-repeating function is not enabled at regular intervals, the specific operating means (operation button 410) is kept in the non-operated state. Even if the operation state is changed again from , the time from when the operation state is entered until the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound ends is indefinite, so the interval until the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is newly generated. Coupled with the fact that the time is set at an undefined time, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether or not the player's operation has been properly accepted. On the other hand, in the second multi-operation enabled state (first A acceptance acceptance state) in which the so-called auto-repeating function is enabled at regular intervals, for example, the specific operating means (operation button 410) is put into the operating state again. While suggesting the possibility that the performance from the beginning is worth paying attention to, the output sound after an operation in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time after the operation state is changed again. Therefore, it is expected to suitably maintain the feeling of tension when returning to the operating state.

In addition, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), the sound after the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. A type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) in which the time until the output state is terminated is not treated as a fixed time and is indefinite, and its output state and the post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) in which the time until the end of the operation is processed as a fixed time (0 seconds in the above example). It is now possible for a situation in which the is in the output state to appear.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), the operation ends after a certain period of time (0 seconds in the above example) after the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. The type of post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) does not end within a certain period of time after the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, and is indefinite. In both situations, when the post-operation output sound of the type that ends at the time (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in the output state and when it is not in the output state. A type of post-operation output sound (the output sound shown in FIG. 149 (h)) that can be started, but is not finished within a certain time after the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, but ends at an undefined time. 149 (g The first post-acceptance output sound SA2) shown in ) may not be started to be output independently when it is not in the output state, but may be started to be output when it is in the output state (or at the same time).

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance permission state) of the 23rd configuration A23, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output sound after the second reception is Even if the output condition of SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, for the first reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then, its output state is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. It may be configured not to terminate or start new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (single sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permission state) of the 23rd configuration A23, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output sound after the first reception is When the output condition of SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAa2-B2. On the other hand, the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then ends its output state based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAa2-B2, A new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, The sound (one sound effect) based on the sound effect data (one sound effect data) will start to be output.

Also, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Note that in the 23rd configuration A23, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Further, the "multiple operations valid state" according to the 23rd configuration A23 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

In addition, in order to realize the 23rd configuration A23, the 3rd A reception permission state is provided as the multiple operation valid state instead of the 1A reception permission state, and the 3A reception permission state is replaced by the 3A reception permission state. It may also be realized as a valid state for two or more operations. Alternatively, the plurality of operation valid states may include both the first A reception permission state and the third A reception permission state.

For example, the 24th configuration A24 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) The post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the operation state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is made to be an undefined time. Processable indeterminate change multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) and post-operation output sound according to the above detection simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state. can be generated multiple times, and in this case, a constant change multiple operation valid state (first A shown in FIG. 146 The reception permission state (3A reception permission state shown in FIG. 152) is prepared. Whereas the state occurs as a multiple operation valid state of the type that can be terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) was previously detected to be in the operation state, the constant change multiple times occurs. The operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state, 3rd A reception permissible state) is based on the fact that the specific operation means is detected to be in the operational state before the predetermined end timing arrives. When the state occurs as a multiple operation valid state of a type that is not terminated (3rd A acceptance permission state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) enters the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. There is both a case where the state occurs as a multiple operation valid state of a type that can be terminated based on the detection of a certain thing (third A acceptance permission state), and a case where the state occurs as a multiple operation valid state that can be terminated based on the detection of a certain condition.

According to such a configuration, when the interval between when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state and the output sound is newly generated after the operation is set to be an indefinite time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is Detection that the operating means (operating button 410) is in an operating state can suitably suggest that the state is in a situation where the state can be terminated. 410) is maintained in the operating state and the interval until a new output sound is generated after the operation is a constant time, it is detected that the specific operating means (operating button 410) is in the operating state. Whether the state is in a situation where the state can be ended by triggering the operation, or whether the state is in a situation where the state cannot be ended by the detection of the specific operating means (operation button 410) being in the operating state. It is now expected to be difficult to recognize and maintain a good sense of tension.

Indeterminate change In the multiple operation enabled state (2nd A reception allowed state), the interval until a new output sound is generated after the operation is not processed to be a fixed time, but is set to be an indefinite time. However, in the constant change multiple operation enabled state (1st A reception allowed state, 3rd A reception allowed state), the interval after the operation until the new output sound is generated is a process that is a fixed time. is sufficient as long as it is executed at least, and there is a process in which the interval until a new output sound after an operation is generated is a constant time (output sound after the first reception), and a process in which a new output sound after an operation is generated. Both the process (the second output sound after reception) and the process in which the interval until the second reception is an indefinite period of time may be executed.

In the indefinite change multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance acceptance state), if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state and a corresponding output sound is output after the operation, the corresponding operation is The after-output sound is when the specific operation means (operation button 410) maintains its output state when it changes from the operating state to the non-operating state (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)); There is both a case where the output state is not maintained and the output state is ended using this as an opportunity (the output sound after receiving the second A shown in FIG. 149(g)). In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) that was in the output state until then changes (ends), creating a moderate sense of tension. It will be possible to prompt the interruption of operations while providing the following information.

In the constant change multiple operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state, 3rd A reception permissible state), the output sound after the operation changes when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. Since there is no case where the output state is terminated by triggering, it becomes easier to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the indefinite change multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permissible state), the message display may not be displayed and the message display is always displayed, but the constant change multiple operation valid state (1A reception permissible state) , 3A reception acceptance state), there are both cases where the message display is displayed and cases where the message display is not displayed, so it can be expected that a sense of tension can be maintained suitably. .

Also, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, in the 24th configuration A24, the operation target is a constant change multiple operation valid state (1st A acceptance permission state, 3rd A reception permission state) and an indefinite change multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permission state). Although it has been assumed that the operating means used for both operations are the same operating means, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Further, the "multiple operations valid state" according to the 24th configuration A24 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

For example, the twenty-fifth configuration A25 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state ( 2nd A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149), second multiple operation valid state (4A reception permission state shown in FIG. 155), and third multiple operation valid state (1A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146). In each of these multiple operation valid states, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state where it is not operated, and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in the operation state. The post-operation output sound (the 2nd A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) according to the above detection can be generated multiple times, and in that case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is longer than a specific time. is always considered to be a long time, and in the second multiple operation valid state (4th A acceptance permission state), if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is kept in the operation state, it will not respond to the detection. The output sound after the specified operation (the output sound after the 4th A reception shown in FIG. 155) is not allowed to be generated multiple times, and in the 3rd multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowed state), the specified Just by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, the post-operation output sound (the output sound after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146) according to the above detection can be generated multiple times. The interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is always set to be less than or equal to the specific time. Then, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, In the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state) in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is always longer than the specific time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state. In this case, the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is not changed (ended) using this as an opportunity (for example, as shown in FIGS. 149(g) and 149(h) (see timing tAb2-C1, etc.), in the third multiple operation valid state (1st A acceptance permission state) in which the interval after the above operation until a new output sound is generated is always less than or equal to the specified time. , when the specific operating means (operating button 410) is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 1A) is in an output state. changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) can be changed (ended) using this as an opportunity (for example, as shown in FIG. 146(g)). (see timing tAa2-C1 etc. shown), the second plurality of the plurality of the above are not capable of generating the post-operation output sound according to the detection a plurality of times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state. In the operation valid state (4th A acceptance permission state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is in the output state. When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state in the middle of the operation, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed (terminated) using this as an opportunity (for example, (See timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIGS. 155(g) and 155(h), etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the player performs the operation again in the second multiple operation valid state (4th A acceptance permission state) in which the so-called auto-repeat function is not activated, and when the output after the previous operation is When a player is in the above-mentioned third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permissible state), the so-called auto-sequence function is enabled and output after a new operation is started only after a specific time period or less has elapsed since the start. In both cases, the re-operation by the player causes the post-operation output sound that was in the output state to change (end), so the auto-repeating function is enabled. It is expected to maintain a good sense of tension by making it difficult for people to recognize whether they are in a certain situation or not. On the other hand, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), if the specific operation means is operated again while the output sound is in the output state after the operation. , that the user is not in a situation where the so-called auto-repeat function is not enabled (second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception permissible state)), that is, the user is in a situation where the auto-repeat function is enabled. Since it can be recognized, the so-called auto-repeat function will not be activated unless a specific time has passed since output started after the previous operation. Although it is made difficult to play, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the configuration.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), the output state after the operation does not change (end) upon detection of the non-operation state (see FIG. 149). 2A output sound after reception shown in (h)) and after-operation output sound (FIG. 149 (g)) in which the output state changes (ends) upon detection of the non-operation state. The second A post-acceptance output sound shown in Figure 2) is output. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (the 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes (ends) upon detection of the non-operation state is subsequently replayed. Even if an operation is performed, it will no longer be in the output state at that point, and the output state will not change (end) upon detection of the non-operation state (see Figure 149). Only the 2nd A post-acceptance output sound shown in (h)) can be outputted as a sound that is not changed (terminated) by the re-operation at the time when the re-operation is performed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of production, it corresponds to the second multiple operation valid state (the 4th A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation valid state (the 1st A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146). The post-operation output sound includes a type of post-operation sound that does not maintain the output state when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, but uses this as a trigger to change (end) the output state. No output sound is prepared, but only a type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state.

Also, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, in the said 25th structure A25, the operating means when the so-called auto continuous hit function is not enabled in the multiple-times operation valid state, and the operating means when the so-called auto continuous-hitting function is activated in the multiple-times operation valid state. , it is assumed that the same operation means is used as the "specific operation means" in both cases, but this is not necessarily the case. Furthermore, although we have assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, this is not necessarily the case. I can't do it. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, in order to realize the 25th configuration A25, the 3rd A reception permission state is provided as the multiple operation valid state instead of the 1A reception permission state, and the 3A reception permission state is replaced by the 3A reception permission state. It may also be realized as a valid state for three or more operations. Alternatively, the plurality of operation valid states may include both the first A reception permission state and the third A reception permission state.

For example, the twenty-sixth configuration A26 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state ( A second A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, the specified It is possible to play the game so that a situation in which the operating means (operating button 410) is in a non-operating state where it is not operated and the output sound is in an output state after the operation is made, and the first plurality of operations are performed. In the valid state (2nd A reception permissible state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in the operating state, and the post-operation output sound according to the detection (2A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) is generated. ) can be generated multiple times, and in that case, the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always longer than the specific time, and the second multiple operation valid state (first A In the reception permissible state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, and the post-operation output sound (the 1A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) is generated multiple times in response to the detection. In this case, the interval after the operation until the output sound is newly generated is always set to be less than or equal to the specified time. Then, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after the above operation is always longer than the specific time, , when the specific operating means (operating button 410) is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is in an output state. When the state changes from the non-operated state to the operated state, the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is not changed (ended) using this as an opportunity (for example, as shown in FIG. 149). (see timing tAb2-C1 etc. shown in g) and (h)), the second multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always equal to or less than the specific time. (the 1st A reception permissible state shown in FIG. 146), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state, and the post-operation output sound (the 1A post-reception output sound) is in the output state. When the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, this is used as an opportunity to change the sound output as the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound). There are both cases in which the output sound is changed depending on the type of (the output sound after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146(g)) and cases where it is not changed (the output sound after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146(h)). I did it like that.

According to such a configuration, the first multiple operation valid state is such that a new post-operation output is not started by the so-called auto-repeating function unless a time longer than a specific time has elapsed since the last post-operation output started. (2nd A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149), even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, the post-operation output sound (2nd A post-reception output sound) is Since the output status does not change (end) with this as an opportunity, this also goes hand in hand with the fact that the so-called auto continuous hit function will not be enabled (function) unless a certain amount of time has passed since output started after the previous operation. It is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether the player's operation has been properly accepted. On the other hand, a second multiple operation in which the so-called auto-sequence function is enabled (functions) and a new post-operation output is started only after a certain period of time or less has passed since the output after the previous operation started. In the valid state (the 1A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 146), for example, it is suggested that there is a possibility that the performance after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is put into the operation state again may be worth paying attention to. However, the post-operation output sound (output sound after 1A reception) that is in the output state does not necessarily change (end) when the operation state is changed again, so that the operation state is returned to the operation state. It is now expected that the sense of tension at the time will be suitably maintained.

In addition, as a post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permissible state shown in FIG. 149), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is The post-operation output sound of the type whose output state changes (ends) upon entering the non-operation state (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) and the specific operation means (operation button A post-operation output sound of a type whose output state does not change (end) when 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) is prepared. and the situation where both of the output sounds are in the output state after these operations can occur. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) that was in the output state until then changes (ends), creating a moderate sense of tension. It will be possible to prompt the interruption of operations while providing the following information.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), after the type of operation changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. The output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is a type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. Although the output of the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h) can be started in either the output state or not, the operation button 410 The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that is not changed (ended) when the operation button 410 changes from the operation state to the non-operation state is When the type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that changes (ends) upon entering the operating state is not in the output state, output starts independently. Alternatively, the output may be started when (or at the same time) the output is in the output state without being output.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permissible state) of the 26th configuration A26, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output sound after the second reception is Even if the output condition of SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, for the first reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then, its output state is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. It may be configured not to terminate or start new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (single sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permission state) of the twenty-sixth configuration A26, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output sound after the first reception is When the output condition of SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAa2-B2. On the other hand, the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then ends its output state based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAa2-B2, A new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, The sound (one sound effect) based on the sound effect data (one sound effect data) will start to be output.

Further, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state is also explained. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Note that in the 26th configuration A26, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Further, the "multiple operations valid state" according to the twenty-sixth configuration A26 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in order to realize the twenty-sixth configuration A26, the third A reception permission state is provided as the multiple operation valid state instead of the first A reception permission state, and the third A reception permission state is set as the multiple operation valid state. It may also be realized as a valid state for two or more operations. Alternatively, the plurality of operation valid states may include both the first A reception permission state and the third A reception permission state.

For example, the twenty-seventh configuration A27 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state ( 2nd A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149), second multiple operation valid state (4A reception permission state shown in FIG. 155), and third multiple operation valid state (1A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146). In each of these multiple operation valid states, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state where it is not operated, and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in the operation state. The output sound after the operation according to the above detection (the output sound after the second A reception shown in FIG. 149) can be generated multiple times, and in this case, the interval until the output sound after the operation is newly generated is set from a specific time. Also, in the second multi-operation valid state (4th A reception permissible state), if the specific operating means (operation button 410) is kept in the operating state, it will not be possible to respond to the detection. The post-operation output sound (the output sound after the 4th A reception shown in FIG. 155) cannot be generated multiple times, and in the 3rd multiple operation valid state (1A reception permissible state), the specific operation Just by maintaining the means (operation button 410) in the operating state, the output sound after the operation according to the above detection (the output sound after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146) can be generated multiple times, and in that case, the operation The interval until a new output sound is generated is always set to be less than or equal to the specific time. Then, among the multiple operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound according to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, In the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state) in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is always longer than the specific time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state. In this case, the time from entering the operation state to ending the output state of the post-operation output sound (output sound after second A reception) is indefinite (for example, as shown in FIG. 149(h) (see timing tAb2-C1, etc.), in the third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permission state) in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after the above operation is always less than or equal to the specific time. , when the specific operating means (operating button 410) is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 1A) is in an output state. When it changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from when it enters the operating state until the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound after 1A reception) ends is not an indefinite period of time but a fixed period of time. can be processed as a time (for example, see timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)), and the above-mentioned operation can be performed in response to the above-mentioned detection simply by maintaining the above-mentioned specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state. In the second multi-operation valid state (4th A acceptance permission state) in which the post-operation output sound is not allowed to be generated multiple times, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is not generated. If the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state while the output sound (output sound after receiving 4A) is in an output state, after the above-mentioned operation after entering the operating state, The time until the output state of the output ends can be treated as a fixed time (for example, see timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIGS. 155(g) and 155(h)). In the above-mentioned example, "0 seconds" is set as the constant time from the start of the operation state until the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound.

According to such a configuration, when the player performs a second operation in the second multi-operation enabled state (4th A acceptance acceptance state) in which the so-called auto-repeat function is not enabled, and when the so-called auto-repeat function is fixed. In both cases, the player performs the re-operation in the third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permissible state), which is activated (functioned) at each interval. Since the time from when the above operation ends until the output state of the output sound ends is constant, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the auto continuous hit function is being activated, creating a sense of tension. It is expected that it will be maintained properly. On the other hand, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), if the specific operation means is operated again while the output sound is in the output state after the operation. , that the user is not in a situation where the so-called auto-repeating function is not enabled (second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception permissible state)), that is, the user is in a situation where the auto-repeating function is enabled. Since the so-called auto-repeat-hitting function is not activated at regular intervals, it is made difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeat-hitting function is to be activated. The decline can now be suppressed.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after the operation is always longer than the specific time, the specific operation means When it is detected that the (operation button 410) is in the operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound is 410) is treated as indeterminate from when it changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends (for example, see timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(h)). and a case where the time until the output state is terminated is treated as a fixed time (for example, see timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(g)). In other words, in this case, when interrupting the operation, only a part of the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) that was in the output state until then will be finished in a certain period of time, so you can feel a moderate sense of tension. It will be possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation while providing the service.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, it corresponds to the second multiple operation valid state (the 4th A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation valid state (the 1st A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 146). As the post-operation output sound, a type of post-operation output sound for which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operated state to the operated state until the output state is finished is not prepared. First, only the types of post-operation output sounds that can be treated as a constant time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operated state to the operated state until the output state ends are prepared. There is.

Also, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, in the said 27th configuration A27, the operating means when the so-called auto continuous hit function is not enabled in the multiple-time operation valid state, and the operating means when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is enabled in the multiple-time operation valid state. , it is assumed that the same operation means is used as the "specific operation means" in both cases, but this is not necessarily the case. In addition, although we have assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, this is not necessarily the case. I can't. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

In addition, in order to realize the twenty-seventh configuration A27, the 3rd A reception permission state is provided as the multiple operation valid state instead of the 1A reception permission state, and the 3A reception permission state is replaced by the 3A reception permission state. It may also be realized as a valid state for three or more operations. Alternatively, the plurality of operation valid states may include both the first A reception permission state and the third A reception permission state.

For example, the twenty-eighth configuration A28 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state ( A second A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, the specified It is possible to play the game so that a situation in which the operating means (operating button 410) is in a non-operating state where it is not operated and the output sound is in an output state after the operation is made, and the first plurality of operations are performed. In the valid state (2nd A reception permissible state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is simply maintained in the operating state, and the post-operation output sound according to the detection (2A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) is generated. ) can be generated multiple times, and in that case, the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always longer than the specific time, and the second multiple operation valid state (first A In the reception permissible state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, and the post-operation output sound (the 1A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) is generated multiple times in response to the detection. In this case, the interval after the operation until the output sound is newly generated is always set to be less than or equal to the specific time. Then, the first multiple operation valid state (the second A shown in FIG. 149 When the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-accepting output sound) is in the output state, When the (operation button 410) changes from the non-operated state to the operated state, the time from when it enters the operated state until the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) ends is undefined. (For example, refer to the timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and (h)), and only a specific time period or less has elapsed since the output started after the previous operation. In the second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 146) in which the so-called automatic repeated hit function is enabled and a new post-operation output is started, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state. In this case, the time from when the operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) ends is an indefinite time (the time shown in FIG. 146(h)) 1A output sound after reception) and a fixed time period (1A output sound after reception shown in FIG. 146(g)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the constant time from when the operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is ended.

According to such a configuration, the so-called auto continuous hit function is not activated unless a time longer than a specific time has passed since output started after the previous operation. ), even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, the time from when it becomes the operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is indefinite. This, coupled with the fact that the interval between the above operations and the generation of new output sounds is set to an indefinite period of time, makes it difficult to recognize whether or not the player's operations have been properly accepted, creating a good sense of tension. expected to be maintained. On the other hand, the second multiple operation valid state (in which the so-called auto-sequence function is enabled and a new post-operation output is started only after a specific time period or less has elapsed since the output after the previous operation was started) In the 1A reception acceptance state), for example, while suggesting that the performance after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is put into the operation state again may be worth paying attention to, the output state may be By making the output sound after a certain operation not necessarily end within a certain period of time after the device is put into the operating state again, it is expected that the feeling of tension will be suitably maintained when the device is put into the operating state again. become.

Also, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), the sound output after the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. A type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) in which the time until the output state is terminated is not treated as a fixed time and is indefinite, and its output state and the post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) in which the time until the end of the operation is processed as a fixed time (0 seconds in the above example). A situation where the is in the output state can now occur.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), the operation ends after a certain period of time (0 seconds in the above example) after the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. The type of post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) does not end within a certain period of time after the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, and is indefinite. In both situations, when the post-operation output sound of the type that ends at the time (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in the output state and when it is not in the output state. A type of post-operation output sound (the output sound shown in FIG. 149 (h)) that can be started, but is not finished within a certain time after the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, but ends at an undefined time. 149 (g The first post-acceptance output sound SA2) shown in ) may not be started to be output independently when it is not in the output state, but may be started to be output when it is in the output state (or at the same time).

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state) of the twenty-eighth configuration A28, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output sound after the second reception is Even if the output condition of SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, for the first reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then, its output state is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. It may be configured not to terminate or start new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (single sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permission state) of the twenty-eighth configuration A28, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output sound after the first reception is When the output condition of SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAa2-B2. On the other hand, the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then ends its output state based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAa2-B2, A new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, The sound (one sound effect) based on the sound effect data (one sound effect data) will start to be output.

Also, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Note that in the 28th configuration A28, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Further, the "multiple operations valid state" according to the twenty-eighth configuration A28 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

In addition, in order to realize the 28th configuration A28, the 3rd A reception permission state is provided as the multiple operation valid state instead of the 1A reception permission state, and the 3A reception permission state is replaced by the 3A reception permission state. It may also be realized as a valid state for two or more operations. Alternatively, the plurality of operation valid states may include both the first A reception permission state and the third A reception permission state.

For example, as the 29th configuration A29, a multiple operation valid state is provided in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) The post-operation output sound according to the above detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the operation state, and in that case, the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated is always longer than the specific time. The long-change multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection only when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state. can be generated multiple times, and in this case, the interval after the operation until the output sound is newly generated is always less than or equal to the above-mentioned specific time. The reception permission state (3A reception permission state shown in FIG. 152) is provided, and the long change multiple operation valid state (2A reception permission state) Whereas the state occurs as a multiple operation valid state of the type that can be terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) was previously detected to be in the operation state, the short change multiple times occurs. The operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state, 3rd A reception permissible state) is based on the fact that the specific operation means is detected to be in the operational state before the predetermined end timing arrives. When the state occurs as a multiple operation valid state of a type that is not terminated (3rd A acceptance permission state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) enters the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. There is both a case where the state occurs as a multiple operation valid state of a type that can be terminated based on the detection of a certain thing (third A acceptance permission state), and a case where the state occurs as a multiple operation valid state that can be terminated based on the detection of a certain condition.

According to such a configuration, although the automatic repeated hitting function is to be activated, the so-called automatic repeated hitting function will not be activated unless a period longer than a specific time has elapsed since output started after the previous operation. can suitably suggest that the state is in a situation where the state can be terminated upon detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state; If the so-called automatic continuous hit function is activated and a new post-operation output is started only after a specific time period or less has passed since post-output was started, the specific operating means (operation button 410) is operated. Either the state is in a situation where the state can be terminated upon detection of the current state, or the state cannot be terminated upon detection of the specific operating means (operation button 410) being in the operating state. People are expected to maintain a good sense of tension by making it difficult to recognize the situation.

In the long change multiple operation enabled state (2nd A reception allowed state), the interval from the operation until the new output sound is generated is not processed to be a fixed time, but is treated as an indefinite time. However, in the short-change multiple operation enabled state (1st A reception permissible state, 3rd A reception permissible state), the interval after the operation until a new output sound is generated is a constant time. is sufficient as long as it is executed at least, and there is a process in which the interval until a new output sound after an operation is generated is a constant time (output sound after the first reception), and a process in which a new output sound after an operation is generated. Both the process (the second output sound after reception) and the process in which the interval until the second reception is an indefinite period of time may be executed.

In the long change multiple operation enabled state (2nd A acceptance acceptance state), if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the corresponding operation is The after-output sound is when the specific operation means (operation button 410) maintains its output state when it changes from the operating state to the non-operating state (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)); There is both a case where the output state is not maintained and the output state is ended using this as an opportunity (the output sound after receiving the second A shown in FIG. 149(g)). In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) that was in the output state until then changes (ends), creating a moderate sense of tension. It will be possible to prompt the interruption of operations while providing the following information.

In the short-change multiple operation enabled state (1st A reception permissible state, 3rd A reception permissible state), the post-operation output sound is the same as when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. Since there is no case where the output state is terminated with the trigger, it becomes easier to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the long change multiple operation enabled state (2nd A reception allowed state), the message display may not be displayed and the message display is always displayed, but the short change multiple operation enabled state (1st A reception allowed state). , 3A reception acceptance state), there are both cases where the message display is displayed and cases where the message display is not displayed, so it can be expected that a sense of tension can be maintained suitably. .

Further, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to an operation state is also explained. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, in the said 29th configuration A29, the operation target is a short change multiple operation valid state (1st A acceptance permission state, 3rd A reception permission state) and a long change multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception permission state). Although it has been assumed that the operating means used for both operations are the same operating means, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the twenty-ninth configuration A29 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

Further, for example, the 30th configuration A30 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the sample image display is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first The multiple operation valid state (the 2nd A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149), the second multiple operation valid state (4A reception permission state shown in FIG. 155), and the third multiple operation valid state (the 4A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146) In each of these multiple operation valid states, the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the image display is in a non-operation state and is not operated. It is possible to play the game so that a situation in which the output sound is in the output state after the operation is made, and in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), the periodic display of the simulated image It is possible to display changes in time units longer than a predetermined time period, and the operation means (operation button 410) that is the object of displaying the sample image can be displayed after the operation in accordance with the above detection simply by maintaining the operating state. The sound (the output sound after the second A reception shown in FIG. 149) can be generated multiple times, and in the second multiple operation valid state (the fourth A reception permissible state), periodic changes in the sample image display are made. Although it is possible to display images that appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time period, if the operation means (operation button 410) that is the object of displaying the sample image is simply maintained in the operating state, the output after the operation according to the detection described above cannot be achieved. The sound (output sound after the 4th A reception shown in FIG. 155) is not allowed to be generated multiple times, and in the 3rd multiple operation enabled state (1A reception allowed state), the periodic change in the sample image display is prevented from occurring multiple times. The operation means (operation button 410) that can be displayed in units of time equal to or shorter than a predetermined time and is the object of displaying the image is maintained in the operating state, and the output sound after the operation according to the detection described above (Fig. 146) can be generated multiple times. Then, multiple operation is enabled in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the image display in the operation state. Among the states, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state) in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the sample image display The operation means (operation button 410) to which the operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound after second A reception) is in an output state. changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, whereas the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is not changed (ended) using this as an opportunity (for example, in Fig. 149 (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in (g), (h), etc.), the third multiple operation is enabled in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time. In the state (first A reception permissible state), the operating means (operation button 410) that is the target of the sample image display is in the non-operation state, and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in the output state. If the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state under certain circumstances, the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) changes (ends). ) (for example, see timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)), and the periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. is in the second multiple operation valid state (where the operation means (operation button 410), which is the target of the image display, is maintained in the operation state, and the output sound after the operation according to the detection described above cannot be generated multiple times). In the 4th A reception permissible state), the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the sample image display is in the non-operation state, and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is in the output state. When the operating means (operating button 410) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state in the middle of the operation, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed (terminated) using this as an opportunity (for example, as shown in Fig. 155(g), (h), etc.).

According to such a configuration, among the multiple operation valid states in which the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled for the operating means that is the target of the sample image display, the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance With regard to the state), periodic changes in the sample image display appear in time units longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, and the so-called auto-repeating function is not enabled in the second multi-operation enabled state (4A reception). By using the same configuration as in the permissible state), it is difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeat function is being used and maintain a sense of tension. In this case, unlike the case of the second multiple operation valid state (4th A acceptance permission state) (see timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIGS. 155(g) and (h)), the output sound after the operation is Since the output state of is set not to change based on this trigger (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(h)), whether or not there is a change at the time of re-operation determines whether or not the auto-repeat function is enabled. It can be expected that the decline in interest in gaming can be suppressed by suitably indicating that the player is currently in a situation where the game is becoming more difficult. In addition, among the multiple operation valid states in which the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled for the operation means that is the target of the sample image display, the third multiple operation valid state (1st A acceptance permission state) is not operated. If the operation is performed again while the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed based on this, so the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled. By making it the same configuration as the second multiple operation valid state (4th A acceptance acceptance state) in which the user is not allowed to perform multiple operations, it is made difficult to recognize whether the automatic repeated hit function is applied and maintain a sense of tension (Fig. 146 ( (see timing tAa2-C1 shown in g)), the periodic change in the sample image display differs from the case of the second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception permissible state), and the periodic change of the sample image display is performed in units of time equal to or shorter than the above-mentioned predetermined time. Since it is possible to display the image in such a way that it appears, the periodic changes in the simulated image display can be used to suitably suggest that the auto-repeat function is being activated. It can be expected to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, the non-operation state There are two cases in which the output state is not changed (ended) upon detection of a non-operation state (the output sound after the second A reception as shown in FIG. There is both a case of outputting a post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes (ends) upon detection. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (the 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes (ends) upon detection of the non-operation state is subsequently replayed. Even if an operation is performed, at that point it is already in a non-output state, that is, it is no longer in an output state, and the output state changes upon detection of a non-operation state. Only the output sound after the operation that is not changed (terminated) (the output sound after the second A reception shown in FIG. 149(h)) is outputted as a sound that is not changed (terminated) by the re-operation at the time when the re-operation is performed. It is said that it is possible to make it wet.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of production, it corresponds to the second multiple operation valid state (the 4th A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation valid state (the 1st A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146). The post-operation output sound is one that does not maintain its output state when the operating means that is the target of the image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, but uses this as an opportunity to change (end) the output state. No post-operation output sound is prepared, but only post-operation output sounds of a type that do not change (end) the output state when the operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state.

In addition, in the 30th configuration A30, a first multiple operation valid state (a second A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 149 ), the output state changes (end) as the operation means that is the target of the sample image display changes from the operation state to the non-operation state as the output sound after operation (output sound after second A reception) corresponding to The type of post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) and the operation means for which the sample image is displayed have changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. A post-operation output sound of a type whose output state does not change (end) as a trigger (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is prepared, and both of these post-operation output sounds are prepared. It is now possible for a situation in which the is in the output state to appear. In other words, in this case, when interrupting the operation, only a part of the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) that was in the output state until then becomes in the non-operation state, so that the operation is not terminated. , it becomes possible to encourage interruptions of operations while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) according to the 30th configuration A30, the operating means to be displayed as a sample image changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The type of post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that changes (ends) based on this event indicates that the operating means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. In either situation, when the type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that is not changed (terminated) triggered by is in the output state or when it is not in the output state. However, the output sound after the operation is not changed (ended) when the operation means targeted for displaying the sample image changes from the operation state to the non-operation state (see Fig. 149 (h)). The second post-acceptance output sound SB2) shown is a post-operation output sound (SB2) of a type that changes (ends) when the operating means targeted for displaying the sample image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. The first post-acceptance output sound SA2) shown in FIG. 149(g) is not started to be output alone when it is not in the output state, but can be started to be output when it is in the output state (or at the same time). This makes it possible to encourage users to interrupt operations while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) according to the 30th configuration A30, while the operating means to be displayed as a sample image is maintained in the operating state, , even if the output condition for the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is not produced at the timing tAb2-B2. The output is started based on the operation reception, whereas the output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) after the first reception, which was in the output state until then, is started at the timing tAb2-B2. The output state may be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation acceptance. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (single sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

Further, the "multiple operations valid state" according to the 30th configuration A30 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

In addition, the configuration determines whether or not a change occurs when the operation means (operation button 410) targeted for displaying a sample image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and changes when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state. It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not this occurs is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, in the said 30th configuration A30, the operating means when the so-called auto continuous hit function is not enabled in the multiple operation valid state, and the operating means when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is enabled in the multiple operation valid state. , it is assumed that both use the same operating means, but this is not necessarily the case. In addition, although we have assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, this is not necessarily the case. I can't. For example, in realizing the 30th configuration A30, the 5A reception permission state (see FIGS. 158 to 160) is provided as the multiple operation valid state instead of the 4A reception permission state, The fifth A acceptance permission state may be realized as the second multiple operation valid state.

Further, a second multiple operation enabled state (4th A acceptance permission state) in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, and a so-called auto-repeating function is not enabled. Alternatively, in the 5th A acceptance acceptance state), a specific type of output sound may be prepared as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple-times operation valid state. Although the output sound of the specific type is of one type, the output state changes (ends) when the operating means that is the target of the sample image display changes from a non-operating state to an operating state. There may be both a case where the output state does not change (end) and a case where the output state does not change (end). In this case, the presence or absence of such a change (end) of the output state may be determined based on a judgment (direction judgment) according to the operation reception, or it may be determined based on the number of operation receptions. Alternatively, it may be determined based on the type of display mode that appears as a display after acceptance.

Further, for example, the 31st configuration A31 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on the operation means (operation button 410) that is the object of displaying the sample image is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first A multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) and a 2nd multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared, and in these multiple operation valid states In either case, it is possible to play the game so as to create a situation in which the operation means (operation button 410) that is the object of displaying the simulated image is in a non-operation state and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. In the first multi-operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state), the pattern image can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in time units longer than a predetermined time period. The post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) in response to the above detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the operating means (operation button 410) that is the object of the display in the operating state. In the second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permission state), periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, and the sample image display is The post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the target operating means (operation button 410) in the operating state. Make it. Further, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), it is possible to display periodic changes in the sample image display so that they appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. The operation is performed under the condition that the operation means (operation button 410) that is the object of displaying the sample image is in a non-operation state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state. When the means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is not changed (terminated) using this as an opportunity. (For example, refer to timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and (h).) In the second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 146), the sample image display is The operation means (operation button 410) that can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time and is the object of displaying the sample image is in a non-operation state and the output sound after the operation (the first A When the operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state under a situation where the output sound after reception is in the output state, this is used as an opportunity to output the above-mentioned output sound after operation (first A Depending on the type of sound being output as the output sound after reception), the output state changes (ends) or does not change (end) (as in the 1A output sound after reception shown in FIG. 146(g)). (the output sound after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146(h)).

According to such a configuration, the first multiple operation valid state (the second A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149 ), even if the operating means (operating button 410) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) does not change (end) as a result of this. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether the player's operation is being properly accepted. On the other hand, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 146) in which periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, for example, While suggesting that the performance after the operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state again may be worth paying attention to, By making sure that the sound (sound) does not necessarily change (end) when the device is put into the operating state again, it is expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained when the user returns to the operating state. Become.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, the non-operation state There are two cases in which the output state is not changed (ended) upon detection of a non-operation state (the output sound after the second A reception as shown in FIG. There is both a case of outputting a post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes (ends) upon detection. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (the 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes (ends) upon detection of the non-operation state is subsequently replayed. Even if an operation is performed, it will no longer be in the output state at that point, and the output state will not change (end) upon detection of the non-operation state (see Figure 149). Only the 2nd A post-acceptance output sound shown in (h)) can be outputted as a sound that is not changed (terminated) by the re-operation at the time when the re-operation is performed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (the first A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. A post-operation output sound of the type that does not maintain the output state and uses this as a trigger to change (end) the output state when the operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state is not prepared. Only the types of post-operation output sounds that do not change (end) the output state when the operation is performed are provided.

In addition, in the 31st configuration A31, a first multiple operation valid state (a second A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 149 ), the output state changes (end) as the operation means that is the target of the sample image display changes from the operation state to the non-operation state as the output sound after operation (output sound after second A reception) corresponding to The type of post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) and the operation means for which the sample image is displayed have changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. A post-operation output sound of a type whose output state does not change (end) as a trigger (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is prepared, and both of these post-operation output sounds are prepared. It is now possible for a situation in which the is in the output state to appear. In other words, in this case, when interrupting the operation, the output state changes ( This makes it possible to encourage users to interrupt the operation while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) according to the 31st configuration A31, the operating means to be displayed as a sample image changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The type of post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that changes (ends) based on this event indicates that the operating means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. In either situation, when the type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that is not changed (terminated) triggered by is in the output state or when it is not in the output state. However, the output sound after the operation is not changed (ended) when the operation means that is the target of the sample image display changes from the operation state to the non-operation state (see Fig. 149 (h)). The second post-acceptance output sound SB2) shown is a post-operation output sound (SB2) of a type that changes (ends) when the operating means targeted for displaying the sample image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. The first post-reception output sound SA2) shown in FIG. 149(g) is not started to be output alone when it is not in the output state, but can be started to be output when it is in the output state (or at the same time). This makes it possible to encourage users to interrupt operations while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) according to the 31st configuration A31, while the operating means to be displayed as a sample image is maintained in the operating state, , even if the output condition for the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is not produced at the timing tAb2-B2. The output is started based on the operation reception, whereas the output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) after the first reception, which was in the output state until then, is started at the timing tAb2-B2. The output state may be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation acceptance. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (one sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

In addition, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permission state) of the 31st configuration A31, while the operating means (operation button 410) targeted for displaying the sample image is maintained in the operating state, When the output condition of the first post-acceptance output sound SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAa2-B2. On the other hand, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then is output based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAa2-B2. The output state may be ended and a new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, The sound (one sound effect) based on the sound effect data (one sound effect data) will start to be output.

In addition, the configuration determines whether or not a change occurs when the operation means (operation button 410) targeted for displaying a sample image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and changes when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state. It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not this occurs is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Further, the "multiple operations valid state" according to the 31st configuration A31 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

Note that in the 31st configuration A31, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. do not have.

Further, for example, the 32nd configuration A32 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the sample image display is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, the first The multiple operation valid state (the 2nd A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149), the second multiple operation valid state (4A reception permission state shown in FIG. 155), and the third multiple operation valid state (the 4A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146) In each of these multiple operation valid states, the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the image display is in a non-operation state and is not operated. It is possible to play the game so that a situation in which the output sound is in the output state after the operation is made, and in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state), the periodic display of the simulated image After the operation according to the detection, the operation means (operation button 410) which is the object of the display of the sample image and which can be displayed so that the change appears in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, is simply maintained in the operation state. The output sound (the output sound after the second A reception shown in FIG. 149) can be generated multiple times, and in the second multiple operation enabled state (the fourth A reception allowed state), periodic changes in the sample image display are made. can be displayed so that it appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, but if the operation means (operation button 410) that is the object of displaying the sample image is simply maintained in the operating state, it will not be possible to display the image after the operation according to the detection. The output sound (the output sound after the 4th A reception shown in FIG. 155) is not allowed to be generated multiple times, and in the 3rd multiple operation enabled state (1A reception allowed state), periodic changes in the sample image display are The operation means (operation button 410) that can be displayed in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time and is the object of displaying the sample image is simply maintained in the operating state, and the output sound after the operation according to the detection ( The 1st A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) can be generated multiple times. Then, multiple operation is enabled in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the image display in the operation state. Among the states, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state) in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the sample image display The operation means (operation button 410) to which the operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound after second A reception) is in an output state. When the state changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from entering the operating state until the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) ends is indefinite; For example, refer to the timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(h)), the third multiple operation is enabled so that periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time. In the state (1st A reception permissible state), the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the sample image display is in the non-operation state, and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) is in the output state. If the operating means (operating button 410) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state under certain circumstances, the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) changes after entering the operating state. The time until the end of the process can be treated as a fixed time rather than an indefinite time (for example, see timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. In the second multiple operation valid state (4th A acceptance permission state) in which the operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state and the output sound after the operation according to the detection is not generated multiple times, the operation When the operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (output sound after reception 4A) is in an output state, the operation means (operation button 410) is displayed as a sample image. 410) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from entering the operating state until the end of the output state of the post-operation output can be treated as a constant time (for example, (See timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIGS. 155(g) and 155(h), etc.). In the above-mentioned example, "0 seconds" is set as the constant time from the start of the operation state until the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound.

According to such a configuration, among the multiple operation valid states in which the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled for the operating means that is the target of the sample image display, the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance With regard to the state), periodic changes in the sample image display appear in time units longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, and the so-called auto-repeating function is not enabled in the second multi-operation enabled state (4A reception). By using the same configuration as in the permissible state), it is difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeat function is being used and maintain a sense of tension. In this case, unlike the case of the second multiple operation valid state (4th A acceptance permission state) (see timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIGS. 155(g) and (h)), the above from the re-operation. The time until the output state of the post-operation output sound (output sound after 2nd A reception) ends is not treated as a fixed time, but is set to be an indefinite time (timing tAb2 shown in FIG. 149(h)). -Refer to C1), it is expected that through this processing mode at the time of re-operation, it will be possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest by suitably indicating that the automatic continuous hit function is being activated. sell. In addition, among the multiple operation valid states in which the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled for the operation means that is the target of the sample image display, the third multiple operation valid state (1st A acceptance permission state) is not operated. If a re-operation is performed while the post-output sound is in the output state, the time from the re-operation until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends can be treated as a fixed time. By having the same configuration as the second multi-operation enabled state (4th A acceptance permission state) in which the so-called auto repeated tapping function is not enabled, it is difficult to recognize whether the automatic repeated tapping function is applicable. While trying to maintain a sense of tension (see timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)), the periodic changes in the sample image display are consistent with the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance acceptance state). Unlike in the previous case, since it is possible to display images that appear in units of time less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the auto-repeat function can be activated depending on the length of the periodic changes in the sample image display. It can be expected that a decrease in interest in gaming can be suppressed by suitably indicating that the player is in a certain situation.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, the non-operation state When outputting a type of post-operation output sound (the 2nd A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) in which the time from when the output state is terminated until the output state ends is treated as a fixed time, and A type of post-operation output sound in which the time from entering the operating state to ending the output state is not treated as a fixed time and is indefinite (output sound after 2A reception shown in FIG. 149(g)) It is now possible to output both. In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the constant time from when the non-operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is ended.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of production, it corresponds to the second multiple operation valid state (the 4th A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple operation valid state (the 1st A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146). The post-operation output sound that is output when the operation means to be displayed as a sample image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is a sound whose duration is constant from when the operating means becomes the non-operating state until the output state ends. Post-operation output sounds of the type that are processed as time are not prepared, and the time from when the operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends is not processed so that it becomes a constant time. Only the output sound after the type of operation is provided.

In addition, in the 32nd configuration A32, a first multiple operation valid state (a second A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 149 ) as the output sound after operation (output sound after reception of 2nd A) corresponding to the time from when the operation means targeted for displaying the sample image changes from the operation state to the non-operation state until the output state is ended. The type of post-operation output sound that is processed to last a certain amount of time (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) and the operation means that is the subject of the sample image display from the operating state. Post-operation output sound of a type that is not processed so that the time from entering the non-operating state to ending the output state is a constant time (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) ) are prepared, so that a situation may occur where both of the output sounds are in the output state after these operations. In other words, in this case, when interrupting the operation, only a part of the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) that was in the output state until then will be finished in a certain period of time, so you can feel a moderate sense of tension. It will be possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation while providing the service.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) according to the 32nd configuration A32, the operating means to be displayed as a sample image changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time from the time to the end of the output state is a constant time is: Post-operation output sounds of types that cannot be processed (as shown in FIG. 149(h) The second reception output sound SB2) can be started in either the output state or not in the output state. Post-operation output sound of a type that cannot be processed so that the time from entering the non-operating state to ending the output state is a constant time (second post-reception output shown in FIG. 149(h)) Sound SB2) is a type that can be processed in such a way that the time from when the operating means that is the object of displaying the simulated image changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends becomes a constant time. The output sound after the operation (the first output sound after reception SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) does not start output alone when it is not in the output state, but is output when it is in the output state (or at the same time). By making it possible for the operation to be started, it is possible to provide an appropriate sense of tension while also encouraging the user to interrupt the operation.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the 32nd configuration A32 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

In addition, the configuration of whether or not processing related to change (termination) is executed when changing the operation means (operation button 410) targeted for displaying the sample image from the operation state to the non-operation state, and the non-operation state It goes without saying that the configuration as to whether or not the process related to change (termination) is executed when changing from the operating state to the operating state is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

In addition, in the said 32nd structure A32, the operating means when the so-called auto continuous hit function is not enabled in the multiple-time operation effective state, and the operating means when the so-called auto continuous-hit function is enabled in the multiple-time operation effective state. , it is assumed that both use the same operating means, but this is not necessarily the case. Furthermore, although we have assumed that the operating means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state, the second multiple operation valid state, and the third multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, this is not necessarily the case. I can't. For example, in realizing the 32nd configuration A32, the 5A reception permission state (see FIGS. 158 to 160) is provided as the multiple operation valid state instead of the 4A reception permission state, The fifth A acceptance permission state may be realized as the second multiple operation valid state.

In addition, a second multiple operation enabled state (4th A acceptance permission state) in which periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, and a so-called automatic continuous hit function is not enabled. Alternatively, in the 5th A acceptance acceptance state), a specific type of output sound may be prepared as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple-times-operation enabled state. Although the output sound of the specific type is of one type, the time from when the operating means that is the target of the sample image display changes from the non-operating state to the operating state until the output state ends is constant. There may be both a case in which the output state is processed so that the output state is a constant time, and a case in which the output state is not processed so that the time until the output state is completed is a constant time. In this case, whether or not to execute the process related to the change (termination) of the output state may be determined based on a judgment (direction judgment) according to the operation reception, or whether the operation reception is performed or not. It may be determined based on the number of times the reception has been received, or it may be determined based on the type of display mode that appears as a post-acceptance display.

Further, for example, the 33rd configuration A33 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the sample image display is permitted multiple times, and as the multiple operation valid state, a first A multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) and a 2nd multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared, and in these multiple operation valid states In either case, it is possible to play the game so as to create a situation in which the operation means (operation button 410) that is the object of displaying the simulated image is in a non-operation state and the output sound after the operation is in an output state. In the first multi-operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state), the pattern image can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in time units longer than a predetermined time period. The post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) in response to the above detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the operating means (operation button 410) that is the object of the display in the operating state. In the second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permission state), periodic changes in the sample image display can be displayed in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, and the sample image display is The post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the target operating means (operation button 410) in the operating state. Make it. Further, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), it is possible to display periodic changes in the sample image display so that they appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. The operation is performed under the condition that the operation means (operation button 410) that is the object of displaying the sample image is in a non-operation state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state. When the means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from entering the operating state to ending the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) is ( (For example, see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and (h)), and the second multiple operation valid state ( In the first A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 410) is in a non-operating state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, and the operating means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state. In this case, the time from when the operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is terminated is treated as a constant time (as shown in FIG. 146(g)). There are both cases where the time is not treated as a fixed time and is treated as an indefinite time (the output sound after the 1A reception shown in FIG. 146(h)). did.

According to such a configuration, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the image display in the operation state. Among the operation valid states, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. Even if the operation means (operation button 410) that is the object of displaying the sample image is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state again, the time from when it becomes the operating state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends. Since this is undefined, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether or not the player's operation has been properly accepted. On the other hand, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 146) in which periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, for example, While suggesting that the performance after the operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state again may be worth paying attention to, By making the sound (sound) not necessarily terminate within a fixed period of time after the user enters the operating state again, it is expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained when the user returns to the operating state.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, the non-operation state When outputting an unprocessed output sound (output sound after 2A reception shown in FIG. 149(h)) so that the time from when the output state is terminated to the end of the output state is a constant time, and when the non-operation output sound is output, The output sound after operation (the output sound after reception of 2A shown in FIG. 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time from entering the operation state to ending the output state is a constant time is I made it so that there are both cases where it is output.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple operation valid state (the first A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. The type of post-operation output sound that can be processed is not prepared so that the time from when the operating means changes to the non-operating state until the output state ends is a constant time, and when the operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. Only post-operation output sounds of types that are not processed are prepared so that the time from entering the operating state to ending the output state is a constant time.

In addition, in the 33rd configuration A33, a first multiple operation valid state (a second A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 149 ) as the output sound after operation (output sound after reception of 2nd A) corresponding to the time from when the operation means targeted for displaying the sample image changes from the operation state to the non-operation state until the output state is ended. The type of post-operation output sound that can be processed for a certain period of time (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) and the operation means to be displayed as a sample image are operated. A type of post-operation output sound that is not processed so that the time from the state to the non-operation state to the end of the output state is a constant time (the second post-reception output shown in FIG. 149(h)) Sound SB2) is prepared, and a situation may occur in which both of the output sounds are in the output state after the operation. In other words, in this case, when interrupting the operation, only a part of the post-operation output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) that was in the output state until then will be finished in a certain period of time, so you can feel a moderate sense of tension. It will be possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation while providing the information.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) according to the 33rd configuration A33, the operating means targeted for displaying the sample image changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time from the time to the end of the output state is a constant time is: The post-operation output sound of the type that is not processed so that the time from when the operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends is a constant time (the 1st output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)). After receiving the output sound SB2), the output can be started in either the output state or not in the output state. A post-operation output sound of a type that cannot be processed so that the time from entering the state to ending the output state is a constant time (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) ) is a type of operation that can be processed in such a way that the time from when the operating means that is the target of the image display changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends is a constant time. The post-output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) does not start outputting alone when it is not in the output state, but starts outputting when it is in the output state (or at the same time). This makes it possible to provide an appropriate sense of tension while also encouraging interruptions in operation.

In addition, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) according to the 33rd configuration A33, while the operating means to be displayed as a sample image is maintained in the operating state, , even if the output condition for the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is not produced at the timing tAb2-B2. The output is started based on the operation reception, whereas the output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) after the first reception, which was in the output state until then, is started at the timing tAb2-B2. The output state may be terminated or new output may not be started based on the operation acceptance. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (single sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

In addition, in the second multiple operation enabled state (first A acceptance permission state) of the 33rd configuration A33, while the operating means (operation button 410) targeted for displaying the sample image is maintained in the operating state, When the output condition of the first post-acceptance output sound SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAa2-B2. On the other hand, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state until then is output based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAa2-B2. The output state may be ended and a new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, The sound (one sound effect) based on the sound effect data (one sound effect data) will start to be output.

In addition, the configuration determines whether or not a change occurs when the operation means (operation button 410) targeted for displaying a sample image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and changes when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state. It goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether or not this occurs is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Further, the "multiple operations valid state" according to the 33rd configuration A33 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

Note that in the 33rd configuration A33, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. do not have.

Further, for example, the 34th configuration A34 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for the operation means that is the target of the sample image display is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple operation valid state, the periodic period of the sample image display is In the multiple operation valid state of the type in which changes are displayed in units of time equal to or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, the 1A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 146), the operation means that is the target of the sample image display is operated. By simply maintaining the state, the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound after 1A reception shown in FIG. 146) can be output multiple times, and the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is constant. The above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) can be output multiple times in the form of a time of The multiple operation valid state of the type that is displayed in units of time longer than the time (for example, the 2nd A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149, the 4th A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 155, the 4th A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 158 5A acceptance permission state, etc.), if the operating means that is the target of the sample image display is maintained in the operating state, the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (the 1A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) can be output multiple times. However, the output sound after the operation (output sound after reception of 2A) is not processed so that the interval until the new output sound after the operation is generated is a fixed time, but an indefinite time. ) can be output multiple times (2nd A reception allowed state), and if the operation state is simply maintained, the output sound after the above operation (output sound after 4th A reception, output sound after 5th A reception) is multiple times. There are both cases in which the output is not possible (4th A reception allowed state, 5th A reception allowed state).

According to such a configuration, if the periodic change in the sample image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, it is preferably determined that the so-called automatic continuous hit function is to be activated. In addition to what can be suggested, when the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled, an output sound is output after reception at a certain time interval, so the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled. It is easier to remember the feeling of playing the game, and it is expected that players will be able to maintain their interest in the game. On the other hand, if periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the so-called automatic continuous hit function may be activated. In addition to the fact that there are cases where it is not applicable, even if the so-called auto continuous tapping function is enabled, the output sound is only output after reception at irregular intervals, and it feels like the auto continuous tapping function is enabled. Since it is made difficult to recognize, it is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in a multi-operation enabled state of a type in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operating means that is the target of the sample image display is maintained in the operating state. If the operation means that is in the operation state is set to the non-operation state while the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is being output, the sound after the operation that was in the output state until then becomes the non-operation state. The time until the end of the output sound is processed so that it is not always a fixed time, but is always set to an undefined time (the output sound after the 4th reception shown in Figure 155, the output sound after the 4th reception shown in Figure 158) 5A output sound after reception). On the other hand, in the multi-operation enabled state of the type in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the operating means that is the target of the sample image display remains in the operating state. As a result, when the operating means that is in the operating state is set to the non-operating state while the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) is being output multiple times at irregular intervals, , when processing is performed so that the time from entering the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound that has been in the output state ends is a constant time (2nd A reception shown in FIG. 149(g) (after-output sound), and when the time from when the non-operation state is entered until the post-operation output sound that has been in the output state until then is terminated is not processed to be a constant time and is left as an indefinite time ( 2A (output sound after reception) shown in FIG. 149(h)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the constant time from the non-operation state to the end of the post-operation output sound output state.

According to such a configuration, when the operating means that is in the operating state is set to the non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation sound that was in the output state until then becomes the non-operating state. When the time until the output sound ends is processed to be a certain time (predetermined time), it can now be indicated that the so-called auto continuous hit function is to be enabled. Become. However, even if the so-called auto-speech function is activated (2nd A acceptance permission state shown in Figure 149), the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then ends when the corresponding non-operation state is reached. Since the process is not necessarily performed so that the time until the operation is performed is a constant time, it becomes possible to suitably maintain a feeling of tension when the state is set to the non-operating state.

In addition, in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operating means that is the target of the sample image display is maintained in the operating state, As a result, when the operating means that is in the operating state is set to the non-operating state while the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) is output multiple times at irregular intervals, the sample image A type of post-operation output sound that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means to be displayed changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends is a certain amount of time (Fig. The first post-acceptance output sound SA2) shown in 149(g) is made such that the time from when the operating means changes from the operated state to the non-operated state until the output state is ended is a constant time. The output of the post-operation output sound of the type that is not processed (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) can be started in either the output state or not in the output state. However, the type of post-operation output that cannot be processed in such a way that the time from when the operation means that is the object of displaying the sample image changes from the operation state to the non-operation state until the output state ends is a constant time. The sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is generated from when the operating means targeted for displaying the sample image changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends. starts outputting independently when the type of post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time becomes a constant time is not in the output state. Alternatively, the output may be started when (or at the same time) the output is in the output state.

Also, the configuration of whether or not a change occurs when the operating means targeted for displaying a sample image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the assumption that the reception valid state continues.

Further, the "multiple operations valid state" according to the 34th configuration A34 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

In addition, in realizing the 34th configuration A34, only one of the 4th A acceptance acceptance state and the 5A acceptance acceptance state may be provided, and even in this case, each of the above-mentioned configurations and operations may be provided. It is possible to obtain the effect.

For example, the 35th configuration A35 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for the operation means that is the target of the sample image display is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple operation valid state, the periodic period of the sample image display is In the multiple operation valid state of the type in which changes are displayed in units of time equal to or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, the 1A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 146), the operation means for which the sample image is displayed is not operated. The post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the state, and in that case, the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated is always set. In contrast, in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the sample image In a case where the post-operation output sound according to the above detection can be generated multiple times just by maintaining the operating means that is the display target in the operating state (for example, the second A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149); If only the operation state is maintained, the output sound after the operation cannot be output multiple times (for example, the 4th A reception permission state shown in FIG. 155, the 5A reception permission state shown in FIG. 158). However, if the post-operation output sound according to the above detection can be generated multiple times by simply maintaining the operating state (2nd A reception permission state), the output sound after the operation is generated until the new output sound is generated. The interval was always set to be longer than the specified time.

According to such a configuration, when the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in a time unit that is less than or equal to the predetermined time, it is preferably determined that the so-called auto continuous hit function is to be activated. In addition to what can be suggested, when the so-called auto-repeat function is enabled, new output sounds are output one after another within a relatively short period of time, so the so-called auto-repeat function is It is easier to remember the feeling of being enabled, and it is expected that the player will maintain his/her interest in the game. On the other hand, if periodic changes in the sample image display appear in time units longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the so-called automatic continuous hit function may be activated. In addition to both cases where it is not applicable, even if the so-called auto continuous hit function is enabled, the output sound will not be output after a new reception until a relatively long time has passed, and the auto continuous hit function will be activated. Since it becomes difficult to recognize the actual feeling of what is being done, one is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, in the 35th configuration A35, the multiple operation valid state (for example, the 1A reception permission shown in FIG. 146 state), if the operating means that is the target of the sample image display is maintained in the operating state, in that case, the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is the sample image that appears in time units of the predetermined time or less. The time may be set to be shorter than the time required for periodic changes in display. In other words, in this case, when the operation is performed, a repeating change appears in shorter time units than when the operation is not performed, so it is clear that the so-called auto continuous hit function is to be activated. It becomes possible to provide performance benefits that are easier to recognize.

Furthermore, in the thirty-fifth configuration A35, in the multi-operation enabled state of the type in which periodic changes in the pattern image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operating means that is the object of the pattern image display is If the post-operation output sound according to the above detection can be generated multiple times just by being maintained in the operating state (2nd A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149), until the post-operation output sound is newly generated. The interval may be set to be longer than the time required for periodic changes in the image display that appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. In other words, in this case, even if it is operated under conditions, only repeated changes over a longer period of time will appear than when it is not operated, so the so-called auto continuous hit function is activated. You will be able to suggest this while maintaining a suitable sense of tension.

In addition, in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operating means that is the target of the sample image display is only maintained in the operating state. When the post-operation output sound according to the above detection can be generated multiple times (2A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149), the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to "predetermined time It may be possible to allow both a case where the time is longer than a predetermined time and a case where the time is longer than a predetermined time to occur. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it possible to have both cases in which it is easy to recognize and cases in which it is difficult to recognize that the so-called automatic continuous hit function is being activated.

Further, the "multiple operations valid state" according to the thirty-fifth configuration A35 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

In addition, in order to realize the 35th configuration A35, only one of the 4th A acceptance acceptance state and the 5A acceptance acceptance state may be provided, and even in this case, each of the above-mentioned configurations and operations It is possible to obtain the effect.

Further, for example, the 36th configuration A36 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation for the operation means that is the target of the sample image display is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple operation valid state, periodic changes in the sample image display are provided. is displayed in units of time less than or equal to a predetermined time, it is detected that the operating means for which the sample image is displayed is in an operating state before the predetermined end timing arrives. 146 (e.g., the 1A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 146)" (for example, the 1A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 146) is occurring. In the multiple operation valid state, periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. In this case, there are multiple types of states in which the state can be ended when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the sample image display is in the operating state before the predetermined end timing arrives. If the state is in a state where the "operation enabled state (for example, the 2A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. The multiple operation valid state of the type (for example, the 4A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 155 or the 5A reception permission state shown in FIG. 158) is occurring. You can.

According to such a configuration, when the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in a time unit that is less than or equal to the predetermined time in the multi-operation enabled state, the operation means that is the target of the sample image display is While it is possible to suitably suggest that the state is in a situation where the state can be terminated by detecting that the state is in the operation state, the periodic change in the display of the sample image in the state where the operation is enabled multiple times is If the display is displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, whether the state is likely to be terminated upon detection of the operation means for which the sample image is displayed is in the operating state; Or, it is expected that the detection of the operation means that is the target of the image display being in the operating state will make it difficult to recognize whether the state is not being terminated, and a sense of tension will be suitably maintained. Become so.

It goes without saying that if the 36th configuration A36 is provided, the 3rd A acceptance permission state is basically not provided. However, regarding the 3A reception acceptance state, it is possible to prepare for it by, for example, changing the periodic change of the sample image display to one that appears in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. It is. Alternatively, the third A acceptance acceptance state may be provided as an acceptance acceptance state in which the sample image display itself does not appear.

Furthermore, in the above-described production example, when a plurality of operation valid state occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound indicating that operation acceptance is allowed may be output. Then, in the multiple operation enabled state, periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of time less than or equal to the predetermined time, and in the multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed for the predetermined time. The acceptance permission sound may be output in the same manner in the case where the sound is displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, but in the multiple operation enabled state, the periodic change in the sample image display is for a time longer than the predetermined time. If the periodic change in the sample image display is displayed in units of time equal to or less than a predetermined time in the multiple operation enabled state, the above-mentioned reception will not be possible. The permissible sound may be output in some cases. Or, on the contrary, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of time equal to or less than a predetermined time in the multi-operation enabled state, periodic changes in the sample image display in the multiple-operation enabled state The acceptance permission sound may be output in a manner that cannot be output if the change is displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. In addition, in the multiple operation enabled state, if periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of time less than a predetermined time, the above acceptance permission sound is always output, but in the multiple operation enabled state, the sample image display In the case where periodic changes in the image display are displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, there may be both cases where the acceptance permission sound is output and cases where it is not output.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in the multiple operation enabled state, periodic changes in the sample image display are displayed in units of time equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, and in the multiple operation enabled state, the periodic change in the sample image display is In either case, if the change is displayed in a time unit longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, even if no operation is accepted until the multiple operation valid state ends, the operation will not be accepted. The same change after reception as when reception occurs can occur (for example, see FIG. 147, FIG. 150, etc.). In this regard, if periodic changes in the sample image display appear in units of time less than the above-mentioned predetermined time in the multi-operation enabled state, the operation is not accepted until the multiple-operation enabled state ends. Even if there is no operation, the same change after the reception as when the operation is accepted will always occur, but in the multiple operation valid state, periodic changes in the sample image display will be displayed in a time unit longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. In this case, when there is no operation reception until the operation valid state ends multiple times, the same change after the reception occurs as when the operation reception was received, and the same change as when the operation reception was received. There may be both a case where no change occurs and a case where no change occurs.

Further, the "multiple operations valid state" according to the 36th configuration A36 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in order to realize the 36th configuration A36, only one of the 4th A acceptance acceptance state and the 5A acceptance acceptance state may be provided, and even in this case, each of the above-mentioned configurations and operations may be provided. It is possible to obtain the effect.

Further, for example, the 37th configuration A37 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is A predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (as shown in FIG. 155 In the 4A acceptance acceptance state), a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state. In contrast, when the operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which it is not operated, a corresponding non-operation display is not displayed (FIG. 155(e) , (f) and FIGS. 157(c), (e), (g), etc.), it is detected that the specific operating means (operating button 410) is in the operating state simply by maintaining the operating state. A specific type of multiple operation valid state in which the above-mentioned post-operation change according to In the 3A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, the corresponding non-operating display HB2 (see FIG. 149(f), FIG. 151(c), (f), etc.) ) can be displayed, and in a specific type of multiple operation valid state (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state, 3rd A reception allowed state), the above specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state, and the above-mentioned post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is displayed in response to detection of the non-operation state, and the post-operation output of the post-operation change is displayed. A situation in which the sound (output sound after receiving 2nd A) maintains the output state (for example, timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149) can now occur as a result of the player's playing. In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operation state to the operation state, this detection triggers the non-operation display (non-operation display) that had been in the display state until then. A change (end) is caused to the post-operation display HB2), but a change (end) is caused to the post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that was in the output state until then. The output state can be maintained without causing any change (end) (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (h), FIG. 151(g), etc.).

According to such a configuration, the post-operation change in response to the detection of being in the operating state can be performed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means (operating button 410) in the operating state. In the multi-operation enabled state of the type (the 1st A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 146, the 2nd A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149, and the 3rd A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 152), the change after the operation is not executed. If the player performs a second operation while the game is in progress, some of the changes after the previous operation may continue to be executed, but some changes (end) may occur. Therefore, while providing a sense of tension when performing the operation again, it is also possible to suitably impart a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In addition, in the multiple operation valid state of the specific type according to the 37th configuration A37 (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state, 3rd A reception allowed state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state. When the non-operation state is entered, a corresponding post-non-operation display is displayed (2nd A reception allowed state) and a case in which the non-operation display is not displayed (1A reception allowed state, 3A reception allowed state). Since both the state and the state are provided, it is possible to suitably provide a sense of tension when entering the non-operating state.

In addition, in the 37th configuration A37, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the multiple operation valid state of the specific type (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state, 3rd A reception allowed state). is in a non-operation state, and the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is displayed in response to detection of the non-operation state, and the post-operation output sound of the post-operation change is displayed. It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state in a situation where the output state is maintained (for example, timing tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149). Then, with this detection as a trigger, a change (end) is always caused to the non-operation display (non-operation display HB2) that was in the display state until then, while the display that was in the output state until then The output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) is always maintained without any change, but if the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state, the above-mentioned post-non-operation display is not displayed in response to detection of the non-operation state, and the post-operation output sound of the post-operation change maintains the output state. When it is detected that the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state in a situation where the When the output state of the post-operation output sound (the output sound after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146) that has been in the output state is changed depending on its type (see FIG. 146 ( There seems to be both a case where the output state is maintained without causing any change (the output sound after the 1st A reception shown in FIG. I made it.

According to such a configuration, the post-operation change in response to the detection of being in the operating state can be performed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means (operating button 410) in the operating state. Among the multiple operation valid states of the type (the 1st A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 146, the 2nd A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149, and the 3rd A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 152), the display after non-operation is Even if the multiple operation valid state is not displayed (the 1st A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 146, the 3rd A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 152), the player cannot perform the re-operation while the post-operation change is being executed. If this is done, some of the changes after the previous operation will continue to be executed, but some changes may occur, so there will be a feeling of tension when re-operating. While providing this, it is also possible to suitably give a feeling of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, regarding the 1st A reception acceptance state, similar to the 2A reception acceptance state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state where it is not operated. This may be generated as an acceptance permission state in which a corresponding post-operation display is displayed. In this case, the conditions for displaying the post-non-operation display, the conditions for hiding the display, etc. may be the same as those for the post-non-operation display HB2 described in the second A acceptance permission state. However, even in this case, the above-mentioned 3A reception acceptance state is such that when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state where it is not operated, the corresponding non-operation display is displayed. It is desirable that this occurs as an acceptance permission state that is not displayed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, when the non-operation display is displayed, the corresponding sound is not output, so the non-operation display is displayed when the non-operation display is activated. This makes it possible to suggest that the display was triggered by the non-operation state, rather than by the display being displayed in a non-operating state.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the post-operation change in response to the detection of the specific operation means (operation button 410) being in the operation state can be performed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state. The multiple operation valid state of the type (the 1st A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146, the 2A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149, and the 3A reception permission state shown in FIG. 152) includes the 1st reception permission state. The state includes a state (1st A reception allowed state or 3rd A reception allowed state) and a 2nd reception allowed state (2nd A reception allowed state).

In the second reception permission state (2A reception permission state), the post-operation output of the type is changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state. The sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is a type of sound that does not change (end) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state. The post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) can be started to be output in either the output state or not in the output state, but when a specific operation The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when the means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state is , a type of post-operation output sound that is terminated when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) Since the output is not started independently when the output is not in the output state, but can be started when the output is in the output state (or at the same time), it is possible to provide a moderate sense of tension while encouraging interruptions in operation. You will be able to do this.

Further, in the second acceptance acceptance state (2nd A acceptance acceptance state) of the 37th configuration A37, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 Even if the output condition is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, for the first received output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then, its output state is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. It may also be configured not to terminate or start new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (one sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

Further, when the first reception permission state of the 37th configuration A37 is the "1st A reception permission state", the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state in the first reception permission state (1A reception permission state). When the output condition of the first post-acceptance output sound SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is output at the timing tAa2-B2. While the output is started based on the operation reception performed, the output sound SA1 after the first reception (here, one sound effect) that has been in the output state until then is started at the timing tAa2-B2. The output state may be ended based on the received operation, and a new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, The sound (one sound effect) based on the sound effect data (one sound effect data) will start to be output.

Further, when the first reception permission state of the 37th configuration A37 is the "3A reception permission state", the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state in the first reception permission state (3A reception permission state). When the output condition of the third post-acceptance output sound SB3 is satisfied (timing tAc2-B2 shown in FIG. 152), the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is output at the timing tAc2-B2. While the output is started based on the operation reception performed, the third reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that has been in the output state until then is output at the timing tAc2-B2. The output state may be ended based on the received operation, and a new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAc2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, The sound (one sound effect) based on the sound effect data (one sound effect data) will start to be output.

Note that in the thirty-seventh configuration A37, it is assumed that the operating means to be operated in the plurality of operation enabled states are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the thirty-seventh configuration A37 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

In addition, in order to realize the 37th configuration A37, only one of the 1st A acceptance permission state and the 3rd A acceptance permission state may be provided, and even in this case, each configuration and operation described above may be provided. It is possible to obtain the effect.

For example, the 38th configuration A38 includes a multiple operation valid state in which reception of an operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple operation valid state, a predetermined end timing is set. A predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (see FIG. 152 In the 3rd A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 155 and the 4A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. Although an after-operation display can be displayed, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operation state where it is not operated, a corresponding non-operation display may be displayed. (Fig. 152(e), (f) and Fig. 154(c), (g), Fig. 155(e), (f), Fig. 157(c), (e), ( g), etc.), the specified state may be terminated upon detecting that the specified operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the predetermined termination timing arrives. In the multi-operation enabled state of the type (the 1st A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146, the 2nd A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149), it is not possible to detect that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state. Based on this, a post-operation display that is one of the post-operation changes can be displayed, and when the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-operating display HB2 is displayed. In the multiple operation valid state of the specific type (the 1st A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 146, the 2nd A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state, and the above-mentioned after-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is displayed in response to detection of the state being in the non-operation state, and the after-operation output sound of the above-mentioned post-operation change is displayed. A situation in which the output sound (output sound after receiving 2nd A) remains in the output state (for example, timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149) can occur due to the player's play. In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operation state to the operation state, this detection triggers the non-operation display (which had been in the display state until then). A change (end) is caused to the non-operation display HB2), but a change (end) is caused to the post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that was in the output state until then. The output state is maintained without any change (end) (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (h), FIG. 151(g), etc.).

According to such a configuration, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives, the state can be ended. In the multiple operation valid state of a specific type (the 1st A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 146 and the 2nd A reception allowed state shown in FIG. 149), the player does not perform the re-operation while the post-operation change is being executed. If the change occurs after the previous operation, some of the changes may continue to be executed, but some changes may occur (termination), which may cause stress when re-operating. While providing a sense of excitement, it is also possible to suitably create a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In addition, in the multiple operation valid state of the specific type according to the 38th configuration A38 (the 1st A reception allowed state and the 2nd A reception allowed state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. When the non-operation display is displayed, there are both cases in which the corresponding non-operation display is displayed (2nd A reception permissible state) and cases in which the non-operation display is not displayed (1st A reception permissible state). It becomes possible to suitably provide a sense of tension when entering the non-operating state.

In addition, in the 38th configuration A38, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state among the multiple operation valid states of the specific type (first A reception permission state and second A reception permission state), In addition, the above-mentioned post-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is displayed in response to the detection of the non-operation state, and the post-operation output sound of the post-operation change maintains the output state. When it is detected that the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state in a situation where the Taking this as a trigger, the non-operation display (non-operation display HB2) that had been in the display state will always change (end), while the post-operation output sound that had been in the output state (Fig. 149(h) (2nd A post-reception output sound), the output state is always maintained without any change, but the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state, A situation in which the post-operation display corresponding to the detection of the non-operation state is not displayed, and the post-operation output sound of the post-operation change maintains its output state (for example, When it is detected that the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state at timings tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. For the output sound after the operation that was in the output state (the output sound after the first A reception shown in FIG. 146), if the output state is changed according to its type (the first one shown in FIG. 146(g)) 1A output sound after reception) and a case where the output state is maintained without causing any change (1A output sound after reception shown in FIG. 146(h)).

According to such a configuration, the post-operation change in response to the detection of being in the operating state can be performed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means (operating button 410) in the operating state. Among the multiple operation valid states of the type (the 1st A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146 and the 2nd A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the multiple operation valid state in which the display after non-operation is not displayed (FIG. 146 Even if the player is in the 1A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. However, some changes may occur, so while we provide a sense of tension when re-operating, we also create a sense of anticipation for the start of a new production. This makes it possible to apply it suitably.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, regarding the 1st A reception acceptance state, similar to the 2A reception acceptance state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state where it is not operated. This may be generated as an acceptance permission state in which a corresponding post-operation display is displayed. In this case, the conditions for displaying the post-non-operation display, the conditions for hiding the display, etc. may be the same as those for the post-non-operation display HB2 described in the second A acceptance permission state. In the specific type of multiple operation valid state (1st A reception permissible state or 2nd A reception permissible state) according to the 38th configuration A38 that adopts such a modification, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state. When the non-operation state is entered, the corresponding post-non-operation display will always be displayed, and there will be no case where the post-non-operation display is not displayed. Even in this case, the above-mentioned 3A acceptance permission state and 4A acceptance permission state are changed depending on the state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state where it is not operated. It is desirable to cause this to occur as an acceptance-permitted state in which no display after non-operation is displayed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, when the non-operation display is displayed, the corresponding sound is not output, so the non-operation display is displayed when the non-operation display is activated. This makes it possible to suggest that the display was triggered by the non-operation state, rather than the display that was previously displayed.

Furthermore, in the above-described production example, the state may be ended when it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in the operating state before the predetermined end timing arrives. The multiple operation valid state of a specific type (the 1st A reception permissible state shown in FIG. 146 and the 2nd A reception permissible state shown in FIG. 149) includes a first reception permissible state (1A reception permissible state), A second acceptance permission state (second A reception permission state) is included.

In the second reception permission state (2A reception permission state), the post-operation output of the type is changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state. The sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is a type of sound that does not change (end) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) can be started to be output in either the output state or not in the output state. The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when the means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state is , a type of post-operation output sound that is terminated when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) Since the output is not started independently when it is not in the output state, but can be started when it is in the output state (or at the same time), it is possible to provide a moderate sense of tension while encouraging interruptions in operation. You will be able to do this.

Further, in the second acceptance acceptance state (2nd A acceptance acceptance state) of the 38th configuration A38, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 Even if the output condition is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, for the first received output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then, its output state is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. It may also be configured not to terminate or start new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (single sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

In addition, in the first reception permission state (first A reception permission state) of the 38th configuration A38, the output condition of the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state. (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAa2-B2, whereas the output state until then is Regarding the first reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was at the timing tAa2-B2, the output state is ended and a new output is started based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAa2-B2. You can do it like this. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, The sound (one sound effect) based on the sound effect data (one sound effect data) will start to be output.

Note that in the thirty-eighth configuration A38, it is assumed that the operating means to be operated in the plurality of operation valid states are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the thirty-eighth configuration A38 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

In addition, in order to realize the 38th configuration A38, only one of the 3A reception permission state and the 4A reception permission state may be provided, and even in this case, each of the above-mentioned configurations and operations It is possible to obtain the effect.

Further, for example, the 39th configuration A39 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is 410) is maintained in the operating state, the above-mentioned post-operation change can be performed multiple times in such a way that the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts outputting anew is a constant time. In the multiple operation valid state of a predetermined type (the 1st A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146 or the 3A reception permission state shown in FIG. 152), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state. A post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection of a certain event, but even if the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this will not occur. In contrast, the above-mentioned specific operation means ( When the operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the post-operation change occurs in a plurality of ways, such that the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts outputting anew is an indefinite time. In the valid state for multiple operations of a specific type that can be performed twice (the 2nd A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149), the operation is performed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state. Not only can the after-operation display, which is one of the post-changes, be displayed, but also when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state, the non-operated state is displayed. The above-mentioned specific type In the multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance acceptance state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state, and the post-non-operation display ( A situation in which the non-operation display HB2) is displayed and the output sound after operation (output sound after reception of 2nd A) of the above-mentioned post-operation changes maintains its output state (for example, the timing shown in FIG. 149 tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1, etc.) can appear as a result of the player's play, and in this situation, the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operated state to the operated state. When detected, the detection triggers a change (end) to the above-mentioned non-operation display (non-operation display HB2) that was in the display state until then, but the display that was in the output state until then The above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) does not change (end) and can maintain its output state (FIG. 149(f) ), (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in (h), FIG. 151(g), etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts outputting anew is indefinite. In a specific type of multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be executed multiple times in the form of a time of When the player performs a second operation, while some of the aspects of the change after the previous operation will continue to be executed, some changes (end) may occur. Therefore, while providing a sense of tension when performing the operation again, it is also possible to suitably impart a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, regarding the 1st A reception acceptance state, similar to the 2A reception acceptance state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state where it is not operated. This may be generated as an acceptance permission state in which a corresponding post-operation display is displayed. In this case, the conditions for displaying the post-non-operation display, the conditions for hiding the display, etc. may be the same as those for the post-non-operation display HB2 described in the second A acceptance permission state. However, even in this case, the above-mentioned 3A reception acceptance state is such that when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state where it is not operated, the corresponding non-operation display is displayed. It is desirable that this occurs as an acceptance permission state that is not displayed.

According to such a configuration, among the multiple operation valid states according to the 39th configuration A39, when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the post-operation change that is one of the post-operation changes. A multiple operation valid state of a predetermined type in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be performed multiple times with the interval until a new output sound starts being outputted at a fixed time (1st A reception shown in FIG. 146) In the permissible state or the 3A reception permissible state shown in FIG. 152), a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in the operated state. However, even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state, the corresponding display after non-operation is not displayed (3rd A acceptance permission state), and the specific operation means (operation button 410) Not only is it possible to display an after-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, based on the detection that the operation button 410) is in the operated state, but also when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. Even when it is detected that the device has entered the non-operation state, there are both cases in which the post-non-operation display can be displayed in accordance with the detection of the non-operation state. In this case, the specific operation means ( The operation button 410) is in a non-operation state, and a post-non-operation display is displayed in response to detection of the non-operation state, and the post-operation output sound of the post-operation change maintains the output state. In this situation, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state, this detection will trigger the As such, while the non-operation display that was previously in the display state will always change, the output state of the operation output sound that was previously in the output state will change depending on its type. (the 1st A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 146(g)) and the case where the output state is maintained without any change (1A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 146(h)). sound).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, when the non-operation display is displayed, the corresponding sound is not output, so the non-operation display is displayed when the non-operation display is activated. This makes it possible to suggest that the display was triggered by the non-operation state, rather than the display that was previously displayed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the interval until the output sound after the operation, which is one of the changes after the operation, starts outputting anew is indefinite. The specific type of multiple operation valid state in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be performed multiple times in the form of a time period of 100 seconds includes a special acceptance permission state (2nd A reception permission state).

In the special reception permission state (2nd A reception permission state), the post-operation output sound changes (ends) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state. (First post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is a type of operation that is not changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state. The output of the after-output sound (the second after-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) can be started in either the output state or not in the output state, but the specific operation means The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when the (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state is as follows: The type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is terminated when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. Since output is not started independently when it is not in the output state, but can be started when it is in the output state (or at the same time), it is possible to provide a moderate sense of tension while encouraging interruptions in operation. become able to.

In addition, in the special reception permission state (2nd A reception permission state) of the 39th configuration A39, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the second post-reception output sound SB2 is Even if the output condition is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, regarding the first reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then, its output state is terminated based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. You may also choose not to start a new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (single sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

In addition, in the said 39th structure A39, although the case where the operation means targeted for operation in the multiple operation valid state is the same operation means is assumed, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Further, the "multiple operations valid state" according to the thirty-ninth configuration A39 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

In addition, in order to realize the 39th configuration A39, only one of the 1A acceptance acceptance state and the 3A acceptance acceptance state may be provided, and even in this case, each of the above-mentioned configurations and operations It is possible to obtain at least part of the effect.

Further, for example, the 40th configuration A40 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation acceptance for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and among the multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) 410) is maintained in the operating state, the post-operation change occurs in such a way that the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts outputting anew is always a specific time or less. In a multiple operation valid state of a predetermined type that can be executed multiple times (the 1st A reception permission state shown in FIG. 146 or the 3A reception permission state shown in FIG. 152), the specific operation means (operation button 410) The post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in the operated state. However, the above-mentioned When the specific operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts outputting anew is always longer than the specific time. In a specific type of multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state. Not only can the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, be displayed based on the detection of a certain event, but also the fact that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state is displayed. Even when the non-operation state is detected, a post-non-operation display HB2 (see FIG. 149(f), FIGS. 151(c), (f), etc.) can be displayed according to the detection of the non-operating state. In addition, in the multiple operation valid state of the specific type (2nd A acceptance permission state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state, and detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state A situation in which the above-mentioned non-operation display (non-operation display HB2) according to the above is displayed, and the post-operation output sound (output sound after 2A reception) of the above-mentioned post-operation changes maintains its output state. (For example, timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149) may appear due to the player's playing, and in this situation, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated. When it is detected that the state has changed to the operation state, this detection triggers a change (end) to the above-mentioned non-operation display (non-operation display HB2) that was in the display state until then. However, the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that had been in the output state until then does not change (end) and maintains its output state. (See timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (h), FIG. 151(g), etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts outputting anew is as described above. In a specific type of multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance permission state shown in FIG. 149) in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be executed multiple times for a time that is always longer than the specific time, the post-operation change is If the player performs a second operation while the game is being executed, some of the changes after the previous operation will continue to be performed, but some of them will change (end). Therefore, while providing a sense of tension when performing operations again, it is also possible to suitably impart a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, regarding the 1st A reception acceptance state, similar to the 2A reception acceptance state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state where it is not operated. This may be generated as an acceptance permission state in which a corresponding post-operation display is displayed. In this case, the conditions for displaying the post-non-operation display, the conditions for hiding the display, etc. may be the same as those for the post-non-operation display HB2 described in the second A acceptance permission state. However, even in this case, the above-mentioned 3A reception acceptance state is such that when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state where it is not operated, the corresponding non-operation display is displayed. It is desirable that this occurs as an acceptance permission state that is not displayed.

According to such a configuration, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state according to the fortieth configuration A40, the operation that is one of the post-operation changes is performed. A multiple operation valid state of a predetermined type (shown in FIG. 146) in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be performed multiple times in such a manner that the interval until the output of the post-output sound is newly started is always a specific time or less. In the 1A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 152 and the 3A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. The display is allowed to be displayed, but even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state, the corresponding display after non-operation is not displayed (3rd A acceptance permission state); Not only is it possible to display an after-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, based on the detection that the specific operating means (operating button 410) is in the operating state, but also when the specific operating means (operating button 410) is in the operating state. Even when it is detected that the state changes from the state to the non-operation state, there are both cases in which the non-operation display can be displayed in accordance with the detection of the non-operation state. In this case, the specific operation means ( The operation button 410) is in a non-operation state, and a post-non-operation display is displayed in response to detection of the non-operation state, and the post-operation output sound of the post-operation change maintains the output state. In this situation, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state, this detection will trigger the As such, while the non-operation display that was previously in the display state will always change, the output state of the operation output sound that was previously in the output state will change depending on its type. (the 1st A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 146(g)) and the case where the output state is maintained without any change (1A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 146(h)). sound).

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, when the non-operation display is displayed, the corresponding sound is not output, so the non-operation display is displayed when the non-operation display is activated. This makes it possible to suggest that the display was triggered by the non-operation state, rather than the display that was previously displayed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts outputting anew is as described above. The specific type of multiple operation valid state in which the above-mentioned post-operation change can be executed multiple times for a time that is always longer than the specific time includes a special reception permissible state (2nd A reception permissible state). I did it like that.

In the special reception permission state (2nd A reception permission state), the post-operation output sound of the type changes (ends) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state. (First post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is a type of operation that is not changed (ended) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state. The output of the after-output sound (the second output after-acceptance sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) can be started in either the output state or not, but the specific operation means The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when the (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state is as follows: The type of post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is terminated when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. Since output is not started independently when it is not in the output state, but can be started when it is in the output state (or at the same time), it is possible to provide a moderate sense of tension while encouraging interruptions in operation. become able to.

In addition, in the special acceptance acceptance state (2nd A acceptance acceptance state) of the 40th configuration A40, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is Even if the output condition is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is started based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, regarding the first reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that had been in the output state until then, its output state is terminated based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. You may also choose not to start a new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued; If the playback is terminated prematurely, a sound based on new data (single sound effect) will not be output or the playback will not be restarted.

In addition, in the said 40th structure A40, although the case where the operation means targeted for operation in the multiple operation valid state is the same operation means is assumed, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "the operation means that is expressed as a sample image display and is allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" according to the fortieth configuration A40 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol fluctuation based on jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in order to realize the 40th configuration A40, only one of the 1A acceptance acceptance state and the 3A acceptance acceptance state may be provided, and even in this case, each of the above-mentioned configurations and operations may be provided. It is possible to obtain at least part of the effect.

By the way, in the first configuration A1 to the 40th configuration A40 above, there is one that states "suggestion that the performance is worth paying attention to" as an effect, but it is not a production that is worth paying attention to. It is not necessary to actually have sex. It can be expected that the player's interest in the game will be maintained simply by providing a performance that ``a valuable performance may be executed.''

Further, for the first configuration A1 to the fortieth configuration A40, some of the configurations may be applied to each other.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to several embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various modifications may be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. Improvements and design changes are possible.

During the reception period for the production example described above, if no operation is accepted for the operation unit, the same post-acceptance display as when the operation for the operation unit was accepted is not displayed (the same post-acceptance change is not caused). In addition to ``not causing any effects related to the relevant reception period'', the method to ``do not display the same post-reception display as when the operation was accepted (although it does not cause the same post-reception change),'' It may be possible to display a different post-acceptance display (a different post-acceptance change may occur) from that when the operation was accepted.

In the case where a plurality of operation units are prepared for which operation reception is permitted during the reception period for the above-mentioned performance example, these operation units may be provided as different operation units from each other. , may be provided as different parts within one operation unit.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the display that imitates the operation part may be any image display in which the relevant part is represented as an image at least, and parts other than the relevant operation part are also represented within the same image display. It may be something that exists.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, depending on the type of reception period, when the reception period occurs, the acceptance permission sound is output in one of several modes with different expectations (expectations regarding the granting of benefits such as jackpots). However, in a type of reception period in which a reception permission sound is output in this manner, if an operation is performed on a specific operation unit while the reception permission sound is being output, this will be triggered. The acceptable sound may always be made inaudible (this is not an essential configuration). In other words, in this case, if the operation is performed early after the acceptance period occurs, there is a risk that the expectation information provided by the acceptance acceptance sound will not be recognized early, so the acceptance period will occur. It can be expected that the player will be prevented from playing a sloppy game such as repeatedly hitting the player in advance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, depending on the type of reception period, the reception permission sound may always be output in the same manner when the reception period occurs, but the reception permission sound is output in such a manner. In the reception period of a type, if an operation is performed on a specific operation unit while the reception permissible sound is output, the reception permissible sound becomes inaudible due to this, and the case where the reception permissible sound becomes inaudible. There may be a case where the permissible sound is not rendered inaudible (this is not an essential configuration). In other words, in this case, if the acceptance permissible sound is not made inaudible, it is possible to recognize that it is not the type of acceptance permissible sound that suggests the level of expectation when an operation is accidentally performed early. Therefore, it can be expected to suppress a decline in interest in games. In addition, if the reception permissible sound is made inaudible, it is not the type of reception permissible sound that indicates the level of expectation in the first place, so there is no disadvantage to operating it early. Since the user will be aware of the possibility that the sound is of the suggested type, it is expected that the above-mentioned sloppy games will be discouraged even if the sound is of this type. sell.

For example, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the automatic production function, a display such as "Auto button setting in progress" may be displayed, but this display does not necessarily have to be carried out. In particular, if the machine is not a pachinko machine 1 that is set to automatic performance mode, but is realized as a pachinko machine 1 that is always in a state where the automatic performance function can be enabled and is not equipped with a process such as "setting to the performance state", It is desirable that a display such as "Auto button setting in progress" not be displayed. In a pachinko machine 1 that is not equipped with a process such as "setting to the performance state", the effective period for the automatic performance function and the automatic performance function are determined depending on the type of operation reception performance that is allowed to be operated by the player. It may be arranged such that there is a valid period in which the data is not played.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, "operation-related display (for example, display of a sample image, etc.)" means that the state in which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted (acceptance permissible period) or that the operation reception is permitted. Since it can only appear when the "operation-related display" is displayed, the acceptance period must occur or at the time when the "operation-related display" is displayed. It suffices if it is in a permissible state. Therefore, while the "operation related display" is being displayed, the acceptance permission period may end before it is hidden.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the "sample image" may be any image that prompts the player to perform an operation; It does not have to be displayed as an image that imitates the target operation means.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected refers to the direct manipulation (pressing action) by the player, such as the "operation button 410" or "sword decoration 5001." It is not limited to "a player's touching action on a specific part" that can be detected by a touch sensor, or "a player's action within a specific space" that can be detected by a non-contact sensor. The meaning also includes things like. In short, any device may be used as long as it includes one or more receiving means (operation unit) that accepts actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.).

In addition, when adopting the automatic performance function in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the timing for automatic generation (automatic reception) of operation reception within the operation validity period can be set at any timing within the operation validity period. It may be. In order to appropriately provide the player with operation opportunities, it is necessary to perform an operation when no operation is detected until a predetermined timing that occurs after half or more of the operation validity period has elapsed. It is desirable that the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) and that the post-operation performance is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, an operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) when no operation is detected until the remaining time within the operation validity period reaches one frame, and the post-operation performance is performed based on the automatically generated operation reception. It is most desirable to start the process. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the automatic production function, if the bar display is to be maintained without being hidden even after the validity period has ended, the operation that will be performed according to the timing when the validity period ends It is desirable to perform an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration, turning off an LED, etc.). This is expected to prevent players from misperceiving that the validity period has continued, even if the bar display is not hidden but continues to be displayed. Become so.

In each of the above-mentioned production examples, when "period", "time", or "state" is written, these may be the minimum unit of control such as "period", "time", or "state". For example, the meaning includes the period, time, and state of one frame.

In addition, the "post-reception change (post-reception display)" that corresponds to the operation reception performed during each reception period (operation permissible state) for the above-mentioned production examples and their variations does not necessarily reflect the expectation that a jackpot will be obtained. It doesn't have to be a suggestion. For example, it may be generated as a reception period for determining whether or not the probability fluctuation function will be enabled within the execution period of a jackpot game, and may be executed as a display after the reception, and the expectation level suggestion regarding the game may be It may also be made to occur as a simple acceptance period within an unrelated mini-game and to be executed as a display after acceptance. Alternatively, it may be generated based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition during various interval periods, and may be executed as a display after acceptance of the condition. Therefore, the reception period according to the above-described production example or its modification example does not necessarily have to occur within the period in which the symbol variation is being executed. In addition, even if the display is displayed as a post-reception display that does not suggest such expectations, multiple formats are provided for the display of the post-reception display, and the display is displayed in one of these multiple formats. You may also do so. In addition, each reception period (operation permissible state) for the above-mentioned production examples and their variations is not a finite period in which a predetermined set time is set, and unless a predetermined condition unrelated to the passage of time is satisfied. may include a type of acceptance period (operation permission state) that continues indefinitely.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, production sounds such as "BGM production sound" and "BMG playback sound" are those whose audible output can be started based on a starting prize, and which can be applied to multiple symbol variations. This refers to sound that can be output in such a way that it can maintain its audible state across the range.

It is also possible to separately prepare a simulated image of the operation receiving part that receives an operation and a peripheral decoration image that decorates its periphery as image data, and display them as an integrated simulated image that combines each image data. good.

In the example shown in FIG. 144, when giving an operation opportunity to one operation means, there is a case where the "normal button drawing image BMGa" is displayed (FIGS. 144(a) and (c)), and a case where this 144 (b), (d)) is displayed. However, when the "normal button drawing image BMGa" is displayed (FIGS. 144(a) and (c)), an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (first operation receiving part), and the "special button image BMGa" is displayed. When the "sample image BMGb" is displayed (FIGS. 144(b) and 144(d)), the second operation means (second operation receiver) different from the first operation means (first operation receiver) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be provided.

In each of the above explanation examples, the members (operating means) prepared as operation targets include those that require a pressing operation (pressing action) (such as a button), and those that require an insertion/extraction operation (insertion/removal action) (such as a sword). In addition to decorations, etc.), it may also be realized as something that requires player actions such as non-contact or touch (proximity sensor, etc.).

Although it is assumed that the peripheral decoration image SSG does not imitate the peripheral decoration part that is actually provided on the periphery of "the operation receiving part that is the object to which the operation opportunity is given," it is assumed that at least a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG imitates the peripheral decoration part. There may be a part that imitates the peripheral decoration part.

When displaying the specific image TG within the validity period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily need to be displayed.

Regarding the "automatic reception effect (reception period during which the automatic button function is activated)" described in Figure 144 and subsequent figures, any of the implementation methods related to the "automatic reception effect" exemplified earlier will be adopted. You may also do so. Any of the above-mentioned implementation methods may also be adopted as to how the sample image and the gauge image are respectively displayed when the automatic reception presentation is performed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception performance occurs, the type of performance state at the time of occurrence, the type of the reception performance (post-operation performance) itself, or the reception performance. Depending on the conditions under which the ``automatic performance function'' is activated, the same post-operation performance will be executed even if there is no operation by the player within the validity period (the ``automatic performance function'' is activated). If there is no operation by the player within the validity period, the post-operation performance may not be executed (the "automatic performance function" may not be activated). The timing at which the automatic production function is activated may be at a predetermined timing within the validity period, at the end of the validity period, or at a timing a little while after the validity period ends. It may be.

The acceptance period (operation permissible state) illustrated in each production example described above does not necessarily have to occur within the performance pattern according to the result of jackpot determination (performance determination). For example, if a predetermined condition is met not during a period when symbol fluctuations are being performed, but during a period when symbol fluctuations are not being performed (for example, a period when a jackpot game is being performed, various interval periods, etc.) (based on what has been established).

In addition, for the acceptance period illustrated in each production example above, the end condition of the acceptance period does not necessarily have to be set as "a predetermined time value has elapsed", and the predetermined end condition is satisfied. The acceptance period may be ended when (for example, when 10 game balls are accepted in the grand prize opening).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the extinction EF production (disappearance effect image, duplicate production display, etc.) is different from the post-reception production (conversation previews that indicate expectations based on which conversation will appear, movable objects, etc.) common to multiple reception periods with different types (such as movable effects that indicate expectations based on whether or not the cut-in works, cut-in notices that indicate expectations depending on how the cut-in display appears, etc.) (can be executed in the same production mode), thereby making it possible to recognize that the operation reception (operation reception) has been properly performed (the reception period has ended). be. In other words, the post-reception performance differs depending on the type of reception period, so when you look at the content of the performance, you can check whether it is being performed within the reception period or whether the reception period has ended. It is difficult to recognize whether this is being done in conjunction with the In this regard, regardless of the type of reception period, by preparing a disappearing EF effect that can appear in a common (same) manner after the reception period ends, the operation reception (operation reception) can be properly performed and the post-reception performance can be performed. This makes it possible to suitably indicate that the program is currently being executed. However, as long as the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) executes a common disappearance EF effect (disappearance effect image, duplicate effect display, etc.) after receiving multiple types of effects, for example, after receiving a specific type A dedicated extinction EF effect (duplicate effect display) may be prepared that can be executed only when the effect occurs.

Unless otherwise specified, the configurations of each performance example described above are for the case where the game is being executed in a normal state, and are not for the case where some abnormal state has occurred.

The reception acceptance state related to each production example described above does not have to occur based on a judgment, such as occurring due to the passage of time, and the display after reception may be based on a judgment, such as a mini-game during a jackpot, for example. It does not have to be indicative of the results.

"Make (sample image)" used when explaining each of the above-mentioned production examples is synonymous with "simulation (mock image)."

The above-mentioned "multiple operation allowed state" may be a state in which the selection target (for example, a character, etc.) changes each time the operation is performed.

In addition, regarding the above-mentioned "auto continuous press function", in addition to realizing it as a continuous press mode in which a change after a new reception occurs at a fixed interval just by maintaining the operation state, if the operation state is maintained, a change after one reception according to the operation reception is realized. It is also possible to implement a long press mode in which the change is continued without being terminated (extending the execution time).

In addition, the matters described as "desirable" in each production example, modification example, notes, etc. mentioned above only describe further effects when the same configuration is provided; Needless to say, it is not necessary to prepare.

That is, in the embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, similar effects can be achieved.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special reserve number display 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special reserve Number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General prize opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate section 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Big winning opening

Claims (1)

an operating means operable by a player;
A determination means for making a determination;
a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained in the determination by the determining means;
operation state detection means capable of detecting the state of the operation means;
post-operation sound output means capable of outputting a post-operation output sound in accordance with the detection when the operation state detection means detects that the operation means is in an operating state;
and a simulated image display means capable of displaying a simulated image display of the operating means,
Detection of being in the operation state as a sample image operation valid state, which is a state in which the output sound after the operation can be started when it is detected that the operation means that is the target of the sample image display is in the operation state. A gaming machine is provided with a multiple operation valid state in which a plurality of operations are allowed and the output sound after the operation can be output multiple times,
As the multiple-time operation valid state, a first multiple-time operation valid state and a second multiple-time operation valid state having mutually different occurrence conditions are prepared,
The first multiple operation valid state is an operation valid state in which at least a simulated image display of the first operation means among the operation means is displayed, and the first operation means is in an operation state where the first operation means is being operated. It is possible to play the game in such a way that a situation occurs in which the output sound after the first operation is in the output state in response to the detection of the first operation, and the first operation means is in the non-operation state where the first operation means is not operated. ,
The second multiple operation valid state is an operation valid state in which at least a simulated image display of the second operation means among the operation means is displayed, and the second operation means is in an operation state where the second operation means is being operated. It is possible to play the game so that a situation appears in which the output sound after the second side operation is in the output state in response to the detection of the second operation means, and the second operation means is in the non-operation state where the second operation means is not operated. ,
In the first multiple operation valid state, in a situation where the first operation means is in the non-operation state and the output sound after the first side operation is in the output state , As the output sound, when the first operating means tentatively changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, a sound that can cause a change in the output state using this as an opportunity is output, and the output state There are cases where a sound is output that does not cause a change in the output state, but when the first operating means temporarily changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, this may be used as an opportunity to cause a change in the output state. A loud sound and a sound that does not cause a change in the output state are not outputted redundantly, and while any of these sounds is in the output state, the first operating means changes from the operating state to the Even if it becomes inactive, its output state will not change due to this.
In the second multiple operation valid state, in a situation where the second operation means is in the non-operation state and the second-side post-operation output sound is in the output state, the second-side post-operation output sound Assuming that the second operating means tentatively changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, only a sound that does not cause a change in its output state is output as a result of this, but when the second operating means If the second operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state while the second operating means is in the operating state and the second side post-operation output sound is in the output state, taking this as an opportunity, Depending on the type of sound output as the output sound after the second side operation, the output state may or may not change.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images